ABG-HSE-MS.0000 (Complete Safety Manual)

Origination Date: October 7, 2017 Revision Date: -
ABG
Release Authorized by: Nazar Salman, Safety Director Manual Rev 0
ABG HEALTH SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL MANUAL

SAFETY PROCEDURES A-B B-E E-F G-I L-S T-W CATEGORY FORMS TOC PAGE
HEALTH SAFETY ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY 15
ABRASIVE BLASTING 24
ACCIDENT REPORTING & INVESTIGATION 29
First Report of Injury Form 36
Involved / Injured Employee Statement Form 39
Witness Statement Form 40
Medical Authorization to Treat Form 41
Attachment 01 – Recordkeeping Classification Process
Attachment 02 – Investigation Guidelines
Attachment 03 – Example – Fatality/Multiple Injury Reporting Protocol
AERIAL & SCISSOR LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM 42
ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT / MAINTENANCE WORK & AWARENESS 49
ASSURED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR PROGRAM (GFCI) 58
BANANA WEDGE GUIDELINES 61
BARRICADES, SIGNS & TAGS 64
BEHAVIOR BASED SAFETY 69
Hazard Elimination Observation Form 74
BENZENE AWARENESS 75
BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS 81
Attachment 01 – Employee Codes and Titles
Attachment 02 – Waiver of Hepatitis B Vaccination
BUTADIENE AWARENESS 89
CADMIUM POLICY & PROCEDURES 98
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS 105
CONFINED SPACE & PERMIT CONFINED SPACE PROCEDURE 113
Confined Space Permit 123
Duties of a Confined Space Entry Attendant/Standby Person 133
Attachment 01 – Confined Space Data Sheet
Attachment 02 – Duties of a Confined Space Entry Attendant/Standby Person
CRANE & DERRICK OPERATION PROCEDURES 134
Critical Lift Permit 143
Attachment 01 – Crane Operator Training and Licensing
Attachment 02 – Rigging Personnel Qualifications/Training and FAQs
Attachment 03 – Crane Operator Licensing Flowchart
Attachment 04 – Safety Device Requirement for Cranes
Attachment 05 – Signal Person Training and FAQs
SAFETY PROCEDURES A-B B-E E-F G-I L-S T-W CATEGORY FORMS TOC
Attachment 01 – Lift Categories
Attachment 02 – Typical Rigging Plot Plan
Attachment 03 – Rigging Interference Drawing
Attachment 04 – Transportation Drawing
Attachment 07 – Certification Sticker
Attachment 08 – Employee Properly Positioned in Suspended Workbasket
CRYSTALLINE SILICA 144
DISCIPLINARY POLICY 152
Attachment 01 – Classification of Violations
Attachment 02 – Written Reprimand Record - HR Form H617 (sample)
All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

Page 1
ABG
Attachment 03 – Verbal Reprimand - HR Form H617-1 (sample)

DISMANTLING & DEMOLITION 157
Attachment 01 – Sample Questions for an Initial Survey Report
Attachment 02 – Sample Questions for Contractor Selection
DRIVING SAFETY 165
EARTHWORK, CONCRETE & MASONRY 169
EATING AND SANITATION FACILITIES 177
ELECTRICAL HIGH-VOLTAGE CAL/OSHA 180
ELECTRICAL LOW-VOLTAGE CAL/OSHA 187
ELECTRICAL SAFETY AWARENESS 194
Attachment 01 – Checklist for Insulating Rubber Gloves
EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN 223
Emergency Telephone Numbers Template 231
Attachment 01 – Emergency Preparedness Plan — Items for Consideration
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 232
Attachment 01 – Example of a Typical Emergency Plan
FALL PROTECTION PLAN 267
Fall Protection Work Plan 284
Attachment 01 – Fall Protection Documentation Requirements
Attachment 02 – Engineering Controls, Typical Anchorage Points, and Structural Members Sizes
Attachment 03 – Personal Fall Protection Equipment Inspection by Users
Attachment 04 – Periodic Inspections by Competent Persons
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT 286
FIRE PROTECTION / EXTINGUISHERS 293
Attachment 01 – Inspection Requirements for Portable Fire Extinguishers
FIRST AID & CPR 298
FIRST BREAK PROCEDURE 303
FIT FOR DUTY 308
FORKLIFT & INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS 313
Inspection Report - Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment: Forklift 330
Forklift Truck Operations Training Course - Written Test 333
Forklift Truck Operations Test Answer Key 335
Forklift Truck Operator Performance Test 336
JLG Boom Lift Safe Operation and Qualification Quiz 339
JLG Boom Lift Qualification Quiz Key 341
Attachment 01 – Forklift Operator Training and Licensing
GAS HAZARDS 343
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 346
Attachment 01 – HSE Information Poster
Attachment 02 – Reporting and Resolving HSE Issues Flowchart
Attachment 01 – Computer Workstation Ergonomics
GENERAL WASTE MANAGEMENT (See Environmental Management) 232
GRADING, GUARDRAILS & FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL 354
HAND AND / OR POWER TOOLS 359
HAZARD COMMUNICATION – (HAZCOM) 370
Hazardous Material Identification System/Guide (HMIS/HMIG) 381
Attachment 01 – National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Hazard System
Attachment 02 – Hazardous Material Identification System/Guide (HMIS/HMIG)
Attachment 03 – Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
Attachment 04 – The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)

Page 2
ABG
Attachment 05 – Hazard Communications Poster (example)

HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ASSESSMENT 389
Hazardous Materials
Attachment 01 – Sample Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)
HEAT ILLNESS PREVENTION PROGRAM 396
Attachment 01 – Sample Heat Stress Plan
HEAT ILLNESS PREVENTION PROGRAM CAL/OSHA 406
HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM POLICY 416
Attachment 01 – Air Sample Results
Attachment 02 – One Page Summary of the Hazards of Chromium VI
Attachment 03 – Initial Exposure Determination
Attachment 04 – Sample Letter Notifying Laundry Service Providers
HIGH PRESSURE WATER CLEANING 442
Attachment 01 – High-Pressure Water Cleaning Above 1000 psig
Attachment 02 – Typical HPWC Equipment Layout
Attachment 03 – Typical HPWC Lancing Arrangement
Attachment 04 – Line Moling Used for Cleaning
Attachment 05 – Typical Shotgun Blaster with Integral and Remote Fail-Safe Valve
HOT TAP 451
HOUSEKEEPING 458
HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION 461
Attachment 01 – Health, Safety, and Environmental Policy
Attachment 02 – Health, Safety, and Environmental Principles
Attachment 03 – Health, Safety, and Environmental Vision
Attachment 04 – Health, Safety, and Environmental Objectives
Attachment 05 – Health, Safety, and Environmental Goals
Attachment 06 – Health, Safety, and Environmental Board Charter
HSE Activity Plan
HSE Communications
HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – EXECUTION 473
HSE OFFICE & ENGINEERING & PROJECT SITE ACTIVITIES 506
HSE Program
Hydrofluoric Acid Exposure Prevention & Control Program
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) 538
Attachment 01 – Sulfur Based Gases Examination
Attachment 02 – Example of Formal Request for Client Monitoring Data
INCENTIVE & AWARDS PROGRAM 547
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE 555
Attachment 01 – Industrial Hygiene Baseline Hazard Assessments
Attachment 02 – Written Industrial Hygiene Sampling Strategy Document
Attachment 03 – List of Toxic and Reactive Highly Hazardous Chemicals
Ionizing Radiation Control
INJURY AND ILLNESS PREVENTION PROGRAM (IIPP) CAL/OSHA 565
INJURY ILLNESS RECORDKEEPING 572
Injury Management and Workers’ Compensation
Attachment 01 – Injury Management Process Flow Diagram
Attachment 02 – (Critical Injury) Sample Letter to Employees
Attachment 03 – Workers’ Compensation Claim Cycle
Attachment 04 – Frequently Asked Questions

Page 3
ABG
Attachment 05 – Workers’ Compensation Claim Reporting

Inspections / Assessments and Audits
Attachment 01 – Behavior Based Safety / Hazard Elimination Observation Program
LADDER SAFETY 581
Attachment 01 – Inspection Requirements
LEAD & LEAD AWARENESS 588
Attachment 01 – Initial Determination for Employee Lead Exposure
Attachment 02 – Employee Exposure Assessment
Attachment 03 – Sample Form Letter
LOCKOUT & TAGOUT (LOTO) 601
Attachment 01 – Lock Cutting and Removal
Attachment 02 – Guidelines for Determining Need for Lockout/Tagout
Attachment 03 – Examples of Group Lockout/Tagout Methods
Attachment 04 – Guidelines for Safe-Condition Check
Loading and Unloading Material
MANUAL LIFTING 620
Attachment 01 – Manual Handling of Loads
MIER – MSISR 626
Attachment 01 – Joint Ventures and Limited Liability Companies
Attachment 02 – Instructions for Completing the MIER/MSISR
MOBILE EQUIPMENT 629
Attachment 01 – Motorized Heavy Equipment Operator Training and Licensing
Attachment 02 – Safety Device Requirements
NATURALLY OCCURING RADIATION MATERIALS (NORM) 641
NEW EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 666
NOISE AWARENESS / NOISE EXPOSURE/HEARING CONSERVATION 675
PERMIT TO WORK 679
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT / ASSESSMENTS (PPE) 687
Attachment 01 – Eye and Face Protection
Attachment 02 – Standard Tool Crib Gloves
Attachment 03 – Glove Rating Selection Chart - Nonroutine Work
PIPING & PRESSURE TESTING 701
PRE - EMPLOYMENT MEDICAL EXAM 705
PREPARING A PROJECT & SITE SPECIFIC HSE MANAGEMENT PLAN 709
PRE-TASK PLANNING AND RISK ANALYSIS 712
Attachment 01 – Formal Risk Assessment Process
PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT / CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES - PSM 727
Attachment 01 – Sample Form Letter
Attachment 02 – List of Toxic and Reactive Highly Hazardous Chemicals
RAILROAD SAFETY OPERATIONS GUIDELINES 733
Safety Training for Railroad Switch Engine Operations 745
Safety Training for Railroad Trackmobile Operations 748
Railroad Operations Training Review 752
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 756
Attachment 01 – Voluntary Respirator User Information
RIGGING MATERIAL & HANDLING OPERATIONS 767
Attachment 01 –Lift Categories
SAFETY & HEALTH TRAINING 778

Page 4
ABG
SAFETY MEETINGS 784

Toolbox Safety Meeting Form 786
SAFETY TASK ASSESSMENT (STA) 788
SAFE WORK ENVIRONMENT IN SHOPS AND AROUND EQUIPMENT 804
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY 809
Attachment 01 – Scaffold Checklist – User
Attachment 02 – Gin Wheel Erection Checklist
SCAFFOLD SAFETY CAL/OSHA 827
SHORT SERVICE EMPLOYEE (SSE) (See New Employee Development NED) 670
SPILL PREVENTION / RESPONSE (See Environmental Management) 236
STEEL ERECTION FOR CONSTRUCTION 842
STOP WORK AUTHORITY 847
SUBCONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT PLAN 853
SUBSTANCE ABUSE & PREVENTION PROGRAM 868
Description of Suspicious Behavior Form 874
Site Standard Time Limit for Providing Test Sample 875
Consent to Substance Abuse Screening 876
Test Administrators Guide 877
Attachment 01 – Substance Abuse Screening Test Administrator’s Guide
Attachment 02 – Laboratory Chain of Custody (Example)
Traffic Management
Training & Orientation
Attachment 01 – General HSE Orientation Template
Attachment 02 – Visitor HSE Orientation Template
Attachment 03 – HSE Training Matrix (guide)
Attachment 04 – New Employee Development
Attachment 05 – New Employee Development Tracking Log
Attachment 06 – New Employee Development Evaluation Form
Travel Safety
TRENCHING, EXCAVATION & SHORING 902
Excavation and Trenching Safety Checklist (Pre-work and Inspection) 917
Excavation and Trenching Permit 920
Attachment 01 – Competent Person Responsibilities
Attachment 02 – Excavation Detail Sketch
Attachment 03 – Shoring for Trenches
VEHICLES, TRAFFIC CONTROL, BARRICADES & WARNING SIGNS (See Mobile Equipment) 629
WELDING & CUTTING PROCEDURES 920
Hot Work Permit 935
Attachment 01 – Assessment of Task Before Hot Work Permit Issue
Attachment 02 – Duties of the Fire Watch/Standby Person
WELDING ELECTRICAL CAL/OSHA 936
WELDING GAS SYSTEM CAL/OSHA 943
WORKPLACE VIOLENCE OR POTENTIALLY VIOLENT PROCEDURE 951
Work Hour Control/Working Alone
Working in Heat
Attachment 01 – Sample Heat Stress Plan
Working Near Overhead Power Lines
Working on Roofs
Attachment 01 – Roofing Checklist

Page 5
ABG

Page 6
ABG
FORMS A-C C-G G-I I-J J-P P-R R-W PROCEDURES CATEGORY TOC
Alcohol Testing Form 000.653.F0266
Application for Designated Driver F0185
Attachment D, Project Health, Safety, and Environmental Rules & Regulations 000.430.F0175
Authority to Remove Authorized Worker Danger Tag and Lock F0162
Authorized Permit Issuers F0205
Authorized Worker Danger Tag F0280
Automobile Incident / Accident Report F0102A
Barricade Tag – Caution (Yellow) F0311
Barricade Tag – Danger (Red) F0312
Bomb Threat Checklist F0174
Breach of HSE Requirements – Notice of Second Warning F0195
Break-In Permit F0177
Caution Tag (Controlling Organization) F0282
Competent/Qualified Person Designations F0310
Computer Workstation and Ergonomics Checklist F0200
Confined Space Entry Hazard Identification Guidelines / Checklist F0196
Confined Space Entry Permit F0115
Confined Space Entry Register (Front View) F0114
Confined Space Entry Risk Assessment F0197
Consent to Substance Abuse Screening F0267
Contract Scope of Work F0258
Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Prequalification Questionnaire F0219
Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Documentation Requirements Checklist F0257
Contractor HSE Prequalification Evaluation F0222
Contractor Request and Release Form F0259
Contractors’ HSE Alignment (Kickoff) Meeting F0228
Crane Lift Permit F0224
Crane Operator License Record F0127
Crane Operator Physical Examination (Post-Offer, Job-Related) F0320

Page 7
ABG
Crane Operator Skills Test/Performance Evaluation (Bridge/Overhead) F0299
Crane Operator Skills Test/Performance Evaluation (Drum Hoist) F0300
Crane Operator Skills Test/Performance Evaluation (Friction) F0296
Crane Operator Skills Test/Performance Evaluation (Hydraulic) F0297
Crane Operator Skills Test/Performance Evaluation (Tower) F0298
Daily First Aid Record F0199
Daily Inspection Report – Cranes F0302
Danger – Do Not Operate Tag (Controlling Organization) F0281
Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag F0301
Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Material/Substance Register F0163
Description of Suspicious Behavior Form F0260
Driver’s License Record F0204
Electrical Equipment Inspection Register F0110
Emergency Respirator Protection – Monthly Inspection Report F0124
Employee Exposure Assessment for Lead F0135
Employee HSE Responsibilities F0147
Employee Monitoring Notification F0136
Employee Notification of Personal Sampling Results F0603
Employee Physical Examination F0321
Energized Electrical Work Permit (EWP) F0277
Equipment Operator Certification Record F0128
Equipment Operator’s License F0126
Example HSE-MOC Change Form F0246
Example HSE-MOC Master Log List F0247
Excavation and Trenching Permit – Example 1 F0206
Excavation and Trenching Permit – Example 2 F0207
Fall Protection Work Plan F0307
Floor Grating Removal Permit F0170
General HSE Orientation Attendance Record F0151
General Orientation Questionnaire F0152

Page 8
ABG
Good Faith Roof Assessment F0317
Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Checklist and Permit F0170
Green Lift Checklist (ABG) F1003
Hazard and Risk Review F0156
Hazard Communication Program Checklist F0103
Hazard Elimination Observation Form F0275
Hazard Inspection Checklist F0150
Hazardous and Toxic Substances Disclosure F0256
Heat Stress/WBGT Monitoring Log F0283
High-Pressure Water Cleaning Certification Program F0132
High-Pressure Water Cleaning Equipment Checklist F0131
High-Pressure Water Cleaning Job Qualification F0130
Hot Tap Permit F0133
Hot Work Permit – Example 1 F0236
HSE Activity Plan F0072
HSE Audit Protocol F0272
HSE Audit Scorecard F0273
HSE Audit Scoring Reference F0274
HSE Discipline Audit Checklist (ABG) NOT SURE!!! F0950
HSE Management System Compliance and Equivalency F0270
HSE Orientation Comprehension Test F0227
HSE Perception Survey F0276
HSE Site Self-Assessment F0951
HSE Weekly Self-Assessment Program F0172
Incident Investigation Report F0198
Individual Release Form F0261
Industrial Hygiene and Hazardous Materials Evaluation F0290
Industrial Hygiene Chain of Custody and Laboratory Request F0289

Page 9
ABG
Industrial Hygiene Direct-Reading Instrument Survey F0285
Industrial Hygiene Inspection F0291
Industrial Hygiene Noise Dosimetry Survey F0286
Industrial Hygiene Personnel Data F0288
Industrial Hygiene Sampling F0287
Industrial Hygiene Wipe and Bulk Sampling F0284
Injured Employee Job Description F0113
Injury Management Authorization F0166
Inspection Report – Crane Work Area F0211
Inspection Report – General Line Equipment: Welding Machines, Air Compressors, Manlifts, etc. F0107
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment TOC F0105
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Backhoe F0105e
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Excavator F0105d
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Farm Tractor F0105j
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Forklift F0105a
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Skid Steer F0105f
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Sweeper F0105s
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment – Trucks & Light Vehicles F0105h
Inventory Health List F0244
Job Hazard Checklist F0315
Job Safety Analysis F0100
Key Result Area (KRA) Performance Index – Weekly Environmental Audit Summary Sheet F0202
Ladder Inspection Register F0116
Line Break Permit F0129
Lockout/Tagout Surveillance/Program Review F0294
Machine-Specific Energy Control Process F0295
Major Events Report F0158
Management Letter to Employees Form, RE: Substance Abuse Screening F0262
Manager HSE Site Tour F0327
Medical Access Authority F0232
Medical Checklist F0245
Medical Evaluation Report F0233

Page 10
ABG
Million Plus Safety Excellence Award Application F0142
Monetary HSE Insensitive Program F0139
Monthly Incident Experience Report (MIER) F0117
Monthly Inspection Report – Construction Equipment and Light Vehicles F0108
Offer of Suitable Employment F0167
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator F0218
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Backhoe F0218e
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Dozer F0218g
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Dump Truck F0218h
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Excavator F0218d
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Farm Tractor F0218j
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Forklift F0218a
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Front-End Loader F0218i
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Personnel Platform (Manlift) F0218b
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Scissor Lift F0218c
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Skid Steer F0218f
Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment Operator: Sweeper F0218s
Permit to Work F0181
Permit to Work Activity Exemptions F0180
Physician’s Recommendation Concerning Respirator Use F0122
Plant Risk Assessment Checklist F0155
Post-Employment Job-Related Questionnaire F0322
Potential Exposure Log F0292
PPE Employee Training Certification F0226
PPE Workplace Hazard Assessment Certification F0225
Pre-Mobilization Inspection Report – Construction Equipment and Light Vehicles F0165
Pre-Task Briefing Checklist F0316
Pre-Task Hazard Checklist F0154
Pre-Task Planning Signoff F0314
Project Closeout Report F0319
Project Incident Log F0193

Page 11
ABG
Project Pre-Employment Medical – Advice of Successful Completion F0234
Purchase Deduction Authorization – Safety Equipment F0146
Random Selection Verification Example F0263
Respirator Fit Testing Record F0123
Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire F0120
Respiratory Supplemental Information Guide F0121
Return to Work Notice F0112
Rigging Equipment Register F0111
Roof Access Permit F0182
Safe Work Observation Process Report F0171
Safety and Health Baseline F0293
Safety Certificate Plaque Application F0143
Safety Cross Award Application F0144
Safety Harness and Lanyards Inspection Checklist F0161
Safety Task Assignment F0101
Sample HSE Audit Assessment Closeout Letter F0952
Scaffold Checklist – Erection F0308
Scaffold Inspection Tag F0303
Scaffold Status Tag (Green) – Erected to Code F0306
Scaffold Status Tag (Red) – Keep Off F0304
Scaffold Status Tag (Yellow) – Special Conditions F0305
Site HSE Inspection Schedule F0190
Site Standard Time Limit for Providing Test Sample F0264
Spill Prevention and Countermeasure Plan F0203
Stop Work Authority F0601
Subcontractor Request Form 000.430.F0206
Substance Abuse Prevention / Statement of Understanding Form F0265
Supervisor HSE Responsibilities F0145
Supplied Air Pre-Job Checklist F0602
Suspended Personnel Workbasket / Platform Checklist and Authorization F0118
Tagout Authorization Form (TAF) F0278

Page 12
ABG
Tagout Index F0279
Toolbox Meeting Report F0188
Training/Education Attendance Log F0269
Visitors HSE Orientation Attendance Record F0149
Working Near Overhead Power Lines Permit F0187

Page 13
ABG
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
[Alt + Right/Left = Page Forward/Back]
PURPOSE.....................................................................................................................................................................16
SCOPE16
APPLICATION..............................................................................................................................................................16
DEFINITIONS...............................................................................................................................................................16
1.0 POSTING REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................17
2.0 PROJECT HSE BOOKLET.......................................................................................................................................17
3.0 SAFETY COMMITTEES.........................................................................................................................................17
4.0 TOOLBOX MEETINGS..........................................................................................................................................18
5.0 COMPETENT PERSON DESIGNATIONS................................................................................................................18
6.0 OPERATION OF CELLULAR TELEPHONES.............................................................................................................19
7.0 PERSONAL JEWELRY...........................................................................................................................................20
8.0 TOOL/EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................20
9.0 RESOLVING HSE CONCERNS AND ISSUES...........................................................................................................20
10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE.................................................................................................................21
11.0 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS......................................................................................................................21
12.0 BROWNFIELD OPERATIONS LIAISON AND INTEGRATION...................................................................................21
13.0 EXCLUSIONS.......................................................................................................................................................22
14.0 REFERENCES.......................................................................................................................................................22
15.0 ATTACHMENTS...................................................................................................................................................23

Page 14
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies topics that are not contained in a stand-alone practice but are important to a successful
and comprehensive health, safety, and environmental (HSE) program.
SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
 Safety Topics
 Hierarchy of Controls
 Posting Requirements
 Project HSE Booklet
 Safety Committees
 Toolbox Meetings
 Competent Person Designations
 Operation of Cellular Telephones
 Personal Jewelry
 Tool/Equipment Modifications
 Resolving HSE Concerns and Issues
 Environmental Tobacco Smoke
 Adverse Weather Conditions
 Brownfield Operations Liaison and Integration
 Handover Report
 Exclusions
APPLICATION
This practice applies to all work activities and employees under the control of ABG and its subcontractors.
DEFINITIONS
Competent Person — One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the
surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to
employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Qualified Person — One who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional
standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully
demonstrated his/her ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the
work, or the project.
SAFETY TOPICS
All meetings with more than 4 attendees will commence with a Safety topic. The topic will be presented by an
attendee nominated by the leader or a volunteer and will be an item relevant to the project. The topic may be
work or home-related.
HIERARCHY OF CONTROLS
Hazards will be controlled by the following hierarchy:
 Substitution

Page 15
ABG
 Engineering controls, where technically feasible

 Administrative controls
 Personal protective equipment (PPE)
1.0 POSTING REQUIREMENTS
The following safety-related notices, forms, and signs must be posted on company information bulletin boards
wherever employees normally congregate:
 Emergency telephone numbers/contact persons
 Workers’ compensation information specified by state requirements
 Required state/federal/in-country posters (such as Attachment 01)
2.0 PROJECT HSE BOOKLET
A Project HSE Booklet will be available for all project employees and visitors at the commencement of field
activities. HSE Booklets are given out at he hiring centers at the time of hire, and will be available on job sites.
The contents of the booklet will include as a minimum:
 HSE Policy and Principles
 General HSE requirements
 Project and industry-specific HSE rules
 Discipline
 Fitness for work
 General rules regarding specific equipment and work practices
 Fire and emergency
 Personal protective equipment
 First aid
 Environmental protection
 Security
3.0 SAFETY COMMITTEES
Several clients routinely require the establishment and continuous, positive function of a project/site HSE
committee. Additionally, several OSHA state plans (such as Oregon) require a safety committee for construction
projects/sites. In such cases, the contractually-imposed standards may prescribe the membership responsibilities,
authority, duties, and administration of the committee. In the absence of prescriptive standards, ABG Project HSE
and ABG Project/Construction Management will determine the charter for the safety committee.
On projects/sites where the requirement for a safety committee is not imposed, ABG Corporate HSE recommends
that a safety committee be established at the discretion of the Project Director/Manager.
The Project HSE Committee may be comprised as follows:
 Project/Construction Manager (chairperson)
 HSE Manager/Representative
 Project employee representatives
 Contractor management nominees
 Contractor employee representatives

Page 16
ABG
The project may be divided into several areas. Each area will have an HSE subcommittee that will meet at least
monthly. Each subcommittee will be represented on the Project HSE Committee.
The Project HSE Committee will meet monthly.
Examples of Project HSE Committee functions are:
 Act in an advisory capacity.
 Create and maintain an active interest in project HSE and assist in reducing work
injuries, work-related illnesses, environmental impacts, and hazards.
 Consider measures for the training and education in, and promotion of, HSE
management and make recommendations in relation to those measures.
 Review standards, rules, and procedures relating to HSE that are to be carried out or
complied with at the workplace and suggest enhancements.
 Review the circumstances surrounding recent work injuries, work-related illnesses,
and environmental workplace incidents and make such recommendations as the
Committee considers desirable.
 Review planned site inspections and audits and make recommendations to correct
unsatisfactory levels of performance.
 Initiate programs aimed at arousing and maintaining interest in the workplace HSE
program.
 Maintain records of meetings including any recommendations.
A record of attendees and of matters discussed will be kept for all Project HSE Committee meetings. The
chairperson of each meeting is responsible for maintaining records and distributing records to members of the
Committee and each work group and posting on project HSE notice boards.
4.0 TOOLBOX MEETINGS
Toolbox meetings to discuss workplace HSE issues will be conducted by the immediate supervisor for his/her
individual work groups. Toolbox meetings will be held at least weekly and will be attended by all members of the
work group.
The agenda for toolbox meetings will be directed toward the activities and tasks associated with the work group’s
activities. Typically, such agenda items may include:
 Safety topic
 Follow-up items raised at previous Toolbox Meetings
 Review of accidents/near misses
 Follow-up discussion of inspections/audits
 Items of general HSE importance to the project
 Items of HSE interest to the work group
 HSE Policy
 HSE initiatives and review of job safety analyses
 HSE performance
 Environmental aspects
The Project Manager will maintain minutes of toolbox meetings and lists of attendees.

Page 17
ABG
5.0 COMPETENT PERSON DESIGNATIONS
Construction Managers, Project Managers, and Engineering Managers must designate Competent Persons and
Qualified Persons when required, and document on Form 000.653.F0310, Competent/Qualified Person
Designations. Competent Persons must be designated when the following activities are part of project/site or
office operations:
 Aerial lift trainer
 Asbestos
 Cadmium
 Compressed air (tunneling)
 Demolition
 Excavation, trenching, shoring
 Fall protection
 Ionizing radiation
 Ladders (portable)
 Lead abatement
 Rigging
 Roof work safety monitor
 Scaffolds
 Steel erection
Note: On projects/sites where the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual, EM 385-1-1, is imposed, Competent Persons must also be
designated for the following:
 Confined space entry

 Environmental management
 Hazardous materials usage
 Hearing protection/conservation
 Respiratory protection
 Roof inspection
 Safety manager
 Safety Supervisor
 Safety technician
 Safety trainer
Competent Persons may be designated for other activities using the same process.
Qualified Persons must be designated for the following:
 Concrete and masonry construction

 Crane maintenance and repair persons
 Excavation, trenching, and shoring design
 Fall protection system design
 Hoisting and rigging (personnel platform design)

Page 18
ABG
 Scaffold design
6.0 OPERATION OF CELLULAR TELEPHONES
Cellular telephone operation requirement and use limitations are applicable to all ABG employees, temporary
employees, subcontractor and lower-tier contractor personnel, and other third party personnel who operate
company cars, industrial vehicles, rentals, and personal vehicles while on ABG company business or on
project/site property.
Cellular phones that must be hand-held to the ear to hear/speak should not be used by the vehicle operator while
driving. In an emergency or where a call must be made or answered using this type of phone by the vehicle
operator, the operator should pull off and stop at a safe location. It is recommended that vehicle operators not
answer an incoming call; but, after safely pulling over, dial the person back. “Hands-free,” voice-operated or
speed-dial phones with a speaker or single earpiece capability may be used by the vehicle operator while driving,
with discretion, depending on an assessment of driving conditions. Even with the voice-activated, hands-free
devices, long or extended phone conversations while driving are discouraged.
Note: Several states in the United States of America (USA), as well as communities
around the world, have laws in force prohibiting the use of hand-held cellular
telephones. In such states/communities, ABG will also prohibit such use (whether
the offense is considered a first or second/subsequent level violation).
7.0 PERSONAL JEWELRY
Finger rings, bracelets, necklaces, and dangling-type jewelry (such as earrings) should not be worn. Dangling
earrings are defined as an earring that extends outside of or below the earlobe perimeter.
Exception: Medic alert bracelets or necklaces.
Electrical Engineering, Maintenance Electrical employees, or other classifications performing as primary duties
electrical work in panels or on high-voltage systems must not wear any type of metal wristband.
8.0 TOOL/EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS
No modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of tools or equipment may be made
without the manufacturer’s written approval. If the manufacturer does not approve modifications or changes,
written approval from a registered professional engineer may be considered. If such modifications or changes are
made, the capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals must be changed accordingly.
9.0 RESOLVING HSE CONCERNS AND ISSUES
All employees and contractor personnel are given the opportunity to voice concerns and issues without fear of
reprisal.
Employees should discuss HSE issues and concerns with their immediate supervisor, as the issues and concerns
become apparent. These discussions may take place during pre-job briefings, formal or informal walkthroughs,
safety meetings, or may be a scheduled meeting with the supervisor.

Page 19
ABG
Employees may contact their safety committee members/representative at any time to help resolve safety
concerns.
Employees may contact Project HSE at any time to discuss HSE concerns. Such concerns may be provided orally,
or in writing using Form 000.653.F0275, Hazard Elimination Form, or equal. Employees may request
confidentiality or anonymity, which will be honored.
Personal stop-work authority is granted to and implemented as required by ABG employees and supported by all
levels of supervision and management. (Subcontractor employees have stop-work authority in any imminent
danger situation, unless their employer grants them full stop-work authority.)
Resolution of employee HSE concerns should be communicated to the employee(s).
If disagreement exists between the employee and the supervisor as to whether or not a hazard exists, or if there
is disagreement over what rectification measures should be taken, the process shown in Attachment 02,
Reporting and Resolving HSE Issues Flowchart, will be followed:
 During the course of the resolution process an employee may be reassigned to other
duties not affected by the reported hazard.
 Should a resolution not be agreed to, elevate the issue/concern to the next level of
management or notify the HSE Representative.
10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE
Smoking tobacco is prohibited indoors, unless smoking areas are specifically designated and allowed under local
regulations.
Smoking is prohibited in outdoor locations as follows:
 Close to windows and doors
 Close to air intakes
 Other openings that may allow airflow into the building(s)
Smoking tobacco is prohibited in vehicles and equipment associated with the project/site and office.
11.0 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
Projects/sites must establish a process to receive “adverse weather condition” warnings, and to communicate
actions to employees and contractor personnel on the project/site.
Projects/sites subject to ice, snow, rain, wind, or other adverse weather conditions must address the protection of
employees and equipment on the pre-job planning documents, including area-specific requirements.
12.0 BROWNFIELD OPERATIONS LIAISON AND INTEGRATION
When work is undertaken in live or operational environs of facilities, it is critical that proposed work is scheduled,
coordinated, and approved by all parties concerned. The parties should include the following:
 Operations team
 Project/site leadership team, including but not limited to:

Page 20
ABG
 Construction Manager
 HSE Representative
 Superintendents, inspectors, and engineers
 Contractor leadership team
 Subcontractor leadership team
 Emergency personnel, including but not limited to:
 Emergency services representative(s)
 Project/site operations representative
The above personnel must schedule regular meetings in order to schedule and coordinate plant operations and
vessel movements.
Where the client has procedures in place that meet or exceed these minimum requirements, generally the client’s
procedures will be used.
HANDOVER REPORT
Supervisors must report the current day’s activities and outstanding issues to their replacement supervisors if
they have not been able to correct the hazard or issues themselves.
A handover report should include the following as applicable:
Time on and off site Employees accounted for
Progress (forecast and actual) HSE issues unresolved
HSE issues resolved Ongoing hot work
Permits issued Medical services – if any
State of emergencies – if any Equipment issues unresolved
Equipment issues resolved Area report general
Area report (specific)
Once presented and understood, the handover report will be signed off by both supervisors. Copies will be
maintained in the applicable management office (contractor or ABG).
The oncoming supervisor then becomes responsible for resolution of outstanding or unresolved issues during his
shift. If disagreement on the safety of the workplace exists between supervisors during the handover, the next
higher manager will resolve the issue/assign responsibilities before work commences, if possible.
During the course of the next higher manager resolving handover issues, employees may complete alternate
duties in areas not affected.
Should a resolution not be achieved by the next higher manager, he/she should elevate the issue to his/her
manager, and so on up the chain-of-command.
13.0 EXCLUSIONS
In the unusual circumstance where a safety requirement or assignment is not feasible, is inappropriate for the
specific and unique situation, or presents a greater risk to the employee, a written justification for exclusion may
be submitted to the supervisor responsible for the work and the HSE Representative for review.

Page 21
ABG
A written justification from a contractor requires additional approval of the assigned contracts
engineer/administrator.
Once the justification is approved, the exclusion is included in the Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Form 000.653.F0100,
or Safety Task Assignment (STA), Form 000.653.F0101, as applicable, and all affected employees are informed
during a pre-job briefing. The pre-job briefing is documented in accordance with Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task
Planning/ Risk Analysis.
14.0 REFERENCES
Document ID Document Title

000.653.1304 Pre-Task Planning/Risk Analysis
Forms
000.653.F0100 Job Safety Analysis
000.653.F0101 Safety Task Assignment
000.653.F0275 Hazard Elimination Form
000.653.F0310 Competent/Qualified Person Designations
15.0 ATTACHMENTS
Attachment No. Attachment Title

Attachment 01 HSE Information Poster
Attachment 02 Reporting and Resolving HSE Issues Flowchart

Page 22
ABG
ABRASIVE BLASTING PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Scope ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Application..................................................................................................................................................................25
MINERAL DUSTS..........................................................................................................................................................25
Toxicity Evaluation......................................................................................................................................................25
Static Electricity..........................................................................................................................................................25
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).........................................................................................................................26
Inspection and Care of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)....................................................................................26
Medical Requirements................................................................................................................................................26
Air Supply / Blasting Equipment.................................................................................................................................26
Accumulation of Dust.................................................................................................................................................27
Supplied Air Quality....................................................................................................................................................27
Blast Nozzles...............................................................................................................................................................27
Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................................27

Page 23
ABG
Scope
This procedure provides minimum HSE requirements for protecting personnel engaged in shot, sand, or other
abrasive blasting operations.
This procedure describes when personnel protective equipment (PPE) is required for abrasive blasting operations
and provides information associated with PPE use.
Application
This procedure applies globally to ABG and its subcontractors.
MINERAL DUSTS
Substance mppcf [j]
SILICATES
(less than 1 percent crystalline silica)
Mica 20
Portland cement 50
Soapstone 20
Talc (non-asbestiform) 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit --
Graphite (natural) 15
Inert or Nuisance Particulates [m]: 50 (or 15 mg/m(3), whichever is the

"[*Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic, and organic dusts as smaller) of total dust less than 1
indicated by examples in TLV's Appendix D]" percent SiO(2)
Toxicity Evaluation
Prior to conducting sandblasting operations, owners must provide ABG with suitable information as to the coating
material both inner and outer on equipment to be blasted. (Epoxy coatings, i.e. Coal Tar Pitch, require special
PPE).
Static Electricity

Page 24
ABG
When working around flammable or explosive dust mixture, equipment, including the exhaust system, electrical
wiring, ducts, enclosure, dust collections, and most importantly, the blast nozzle, must be bonded to prevent the
buildup of static charges.
Grinding Wheels
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
The following PPE will be used or worn by personnel engaged in abrasive blasting operations:
- An air-line respirator of the continuous-flow type in a protective hood to cover the head (protective
helmet), neck, shoulders, and chest;
- An air-purifier and filter for removal of oil, water, and any other organic-matter contaminant that might
be discharged from the compressor;
- A pressure regulator with an attached gauge, if the pressure in the compressor exceeds 25 psi or
equivalent;
- A pressure relief valve, if the pressure regulator should fail;
- A low pressure airline hose of not more than 300 feet (90 meters) for each person;
- Hood view ports made of impact-resistant safety glass, or plastic covered by a metal screen;
- Gauntlet-type leather gloves;
- Hard leather work shoes (safety toes/steel shanks recommended);
- Clothing made of strong-fibered material to resist flying abrasive material;
- An inline alarm system that will automatically signal both audio and visual alarms if the carbon monoxide
(CO) level reaches 10 PPM; and
- Adequate hearing-protection devices.
Inspection and Care of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Interior of the mask shall be cleaned with a respirator sanitary wipe pad daily, by the individual that wore the
mask. If a mask is worn by other than one (1) person, the mask will be sterilized by the safety supply rental
company. DO NOT DISMANTLE THE SUPPLIED AIR RESPIRATOR! When not in use, the respirator must be
placed in a plastic bag and the user’s name as well as date placed on the outside. At no time are masks to be
left out in the open unprotected on the job site. All valves and regulators must be checked before each use. The
condensate (pet cock) valve at the bottom of the purifier should be opened daily to remove excess water. The air
supply hood will be cleaned and stored as required for other respirators.
Disposable Respirators: All disposable masks are to be rendered un-usable (straps removed, etc.) and then
disposed of properly.
Medical Requirements
Personnel engaged in abrasive blasting operations must complete the medical questionnaire.

Page 25
ABG
Air Supply / Blasting Equipment
The airline hose will be a non-electrical conductor. Hose lengths will be joined by metal couplings secured to the
outside of the hose to avoid erosion and weakening of the couplings.
Nozzles will be attached to the hose by fittings that will prevent the nozzle from becoming disengaged. Dead man
controls will be provided at the nozzle and on the hose.
Cable (Whip Check) at least one-fourth (1/4) inch (6.3 mm) in diameter or safety chains will be provided and used
on each hose connection to prevent the hose from whipping or thrashing around in case a coupling becomes
disconnected.
Hoses shall be non-compatible with other air hoses. Hoses must be capped or protected when not in use.
The compressor shall have a receiver with thirty (30)-minute air supply.
Air samples shall be taken.
Accumulation of Dust
Dust shall not be permitted to accumulate on the floor or on ledges outside of an abrasive-blasting enclosure and
any spills must be cleaned promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be kept clear of steel shot or similar abrasive
which may cause a slipping hazard.
Supplied Air Quality
ABG will provide employees using atmosphere-supplying respirators (supplied-air and SCBA) with breathing gases
of high purity, shall ensure that compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for
respiration accords with the following specifications:
- Compressed and liquid oxygen shall meet the United States Pharmacopoeia requirements for medical or
breathing oxygen.
- Compressed breathing air shall meet at least the requirements for Grade D breathing air.
- All grade D breathing air must be compressed, not mixed, from a reputable safety supply company. NO
mixed gas processes will be allowed to produce Grade D breathing air.
- The oxygen content must be between 19.5 and 23.5.
- Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less
- Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less
- Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less
- Lack of noticeable odor
For more information on supplied air compressors visit OSHA Supplied Air Compressors
Blast Nozzles

Page 26
ABG
The blast nozzle must be equipped with an operating valve which must be held open manually. The nozzle must
be placed in a support when not in use.
Cleaning
Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 psi and then only
with effective chip guarding and personal protective equipment. A face shield, monogoggles and an N95 or
higher respirator must also be used when cleaning.
Sandblasting areas shall be barricaded with "SANDBLASTING AREA - KEEP OUT" signs.
Before each job, check hose-to-hose connections, hose-to-nozzle connections, and hose-to-mixing chamber.
Note: Review Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for hazards associated with the blasting material being used.

Page 27
ABG
ACCIDENT REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 30
SCOPE30
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................30
First Aid Case (FAC)..............................................................................................................................................30
Lost Time Injury/Disease (DART-L).......................................................................................................................30
Major Event..........................................................................................................................................................31
Near Miss.............................................................................................................................................................31
Other Recordable Case (ORC) (also known as “medical treatment case”)...........................................................31
Recordable Case...................................................................................................................................................31
Restricted Workday Case (DART-R)......................................................................................................................31
Total Case Incident Rate (TCIR)............................................................................................................................31
Project HSE...........................................................................................................................................................31
Supervisor/Manager.............................................................................................................................................32
Project Manager/Superintendent........................................................................................................................32
Regional Safety Manager.....................................................................................................................................32
Subcontractors.....................................................................................................................................................32
REPORTING...............................................................................................................................................................32
Major Events........................................................................................................................................................32
Fatality / Multiple Injury Reporting......................................................................................................................33
INVESTIGATION........................................................................................................................................................33
The important considerations after an incident are:............................................................................................34
CLASSIFYING AND RECORDING INCIDENTS...............................................................................................................34
Press Releases......................................................................................................................................................35

Page 28
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for reporting, investigating, and managing incidents that have health,
safety, or environmental significance. The requirements include reporting, investigating, and managing the
following:
 Occupational injuries and illnesses (including classifying cases for recordkeeping/reporting purposes)
 Occupational exposure to toxic substances
 Motor vehicle incidents
 Property damage incidents
 Environmental incidents
 Near-miss and other health- and safety-related incidents
SCOPE

 Responsibilities
 General Requirements
 Reporting
 Investigation
 Classifying and Recording Incidents
 Press Releases
APPLICATION
This practice applies to work activities and employees under the control of ABG and its contractors.
Specific countries or regions may have reporting requirements different from those stated herein. If such is
the case, local requirements will be met in addition to those required in this practice.
All recording determinations, for recordkeeping purposes, will be made as defined and prescribed by the
United States (U.S.) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Recordkeeping Handbook.
This practice provides guidance only for ABG contractors. However, contractors and lower-tier contractors are
required to retain and maintain an Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 300 Log or equal. This log
(covering injuries and illnesses connected with each contract) will be submitted to ABG Project HSE by the
5th working day of each month DEFINITIONS
First Aid Case (FAC) - A work-related case that is not an OSHA recordable illness or injury
Incident - An unintentional and unplanned event, causing or with the potential to cause, injury, illness, property
or asset damage, environmental damage, or loss of production. This covers terms such as near miss, near hit,
non-injury incident, and similar phrases.

Page 29
ABG
Lost Time Injury/Disease (DART-L) - Those incidents that result in permanent disability or time lost from work of
one day/shift or more (not including the day of injury/illness).

Page 30
ABG
Major Event - An incident defined as:

Fatality
Lost time incident
Large fire/explosion
Severe damage by storm, earthquake, etc.
Serious facility/equipment damage
Serious environmental event such as a major oil/chemical spill
A terrorist threat, dangerous situation, or local conflict
An event not involving any of the situations above, but is serious enough that publication in the media
may be expected
Near Miss - An unintentional, unplanned incident with the potential to cause injury, illness, property or asset
damage, environmental damage or loss of production
Other Recordable Case (ORC) (also known as “medical treatment case”) – A recordable case that is not a fatality,
and has no lost or restricted days associated.
Recordable Case - An occupationally-related injury or illness that results in any of the following:
 Death
 Days away from work
 Restricted work or temporary transfer to another job
 Medical treatment beyond first aid
 Loss of consciousness
 A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed healthcare professional,
even if it does not result in any of the above-described conditions.
Restricted Workday Case (DART-R) - a work-related illness or injury that results in the employee being unable to
perform any of his/her normal duties on any scheduled day/shift subsequent to the injury occurring or the illness
being identified.
Total Case Incident Rate (TCIR)
Number of Recordable Injuries and Illness x 200,000

Hrs = TCIR
Total Number Hours Worked
Distribution: None
Incident investigations should be conducted by an investigative “team” led by a line supervisor or manager at the
project level. Depending upon the circumstances or severity, the HSE Board may appoint other team members to
investigate the incident.
Project HSE

Page 31
ABG
Project HSE will perform the following:

 Assist line management during the investigation.
 Review the completed Incident Investigation Report for completeness and accuracy.
 Coordinate with corporate HSE to determine the classification and maintain logs and summaries of the
incidents.
 Document and report incidents determined to be site-related to ABG management and client coordinator
as directed.
 Report “major events” to management, Regional Safety Manager, and the Regional Safety Manager
immediately or as soon as possible.
 Maintain project records on all occupational injuries/illnesses, vehicle accidents, property loss, and near-
miss incidents.
 Post copies of the (previous year’s) annual accident summary (OSHA 300A or equal) on bulletin boards by
February 1 to permit employees to see the summary on their way to and from work.
Supervisor/Manager
The immediate supervisor/manager will submit the Incident Investigation Report to Project/Site Management
within 24 working hours.
It is a common contractual requirement to submit incident reports to the client. In such cases, ABG Project
HSE also submits the report in the timeframe specified in the contract.
Project Manager/Superintendent
The Project Manager/Superintendent will assist in conducting the investigation and will review the Incident
Investigation Report before release.
Regional Safety Manager
The Regional Safety Manager will review and approve accident investigation reports and determine distribution.
Safety Flash report will be generated based on information found in the investigation.
Subcontractors
Subcontractors will submit all incident reports and associated documents to the ABG Project
Manager/Superintendent and Site Safety. This applies to all elements of this practice where reporting
documents are mentioned.
REPORTING

Page 32
ABG
Major Events
Major events will be reported by the supervisor to the Project/Site Manager and Project HSE immediately.
Project HSE or the Project/Site Manager will notify the Regional Safety Manager immediately. If a Regional Safety
Manager cannot be contacted immediately, the Safety Director must be notified of the major event.
The Site Safety Manager will report the major event to the Regional Safety Manager immediately. If the Regional
Safety Manager is not available, immediate notification will be given to his/her delegate, who will be responsible
for disseminating notification, as appropriate.
The Regional Safety Manager will determine additional distribution after consulting with senior management,
legal, etc., and is responsible for submitting the final reports to the Risk Administrator for recordkeeping
purposes.
Major event investigations should use the ABG Root Cause Investigation program in consultation with the HSE
Management and Director.
Fatality / Multiple Injury Reporting

When a fatality (regardless of suspected cause) or accident involving hospitalization of 3 or more employees
occurs, the following notifications must be made:
Each Business unit will develop a reporting protocol to be followed.
(All situations) — ABG Project HSE notifies corporate HSE and the client.
(If a Subcontractor employee or work is involved) — Subcontractor immediately notifies ABG Project HSE,
OSHA/state-plan, and other oversight agencies, as required.
(If a ABG employee is involved) — Following authorization by the Regional Safety Manager, ABG
Corporate HSE notifies OSHA/state-plan and other oversight agencies, as required.
INVESTIGATION
The basic purpose of an incident investigation is to prevent a recurrence of the incident.

To accomplish this, the objectives of an incident investigation are:
 Determination of root causes of incidents
 Correction of unsafe conditions
 Elimination of unsafe acts
 Improvement of work capability
 Improvement of supervision
The investigation phase begins as soon as the supervisor is made aware of the incident. While treatment of
injuries and immediate HSE concerns created by the incident are the initial top priority, the supervisor should be
carefully observing the incident scene – planning for follow-up action and future reference.

Page 33
ABG
Once the immediate needs caused by the incident have been satisfied, the supervisor should begin to investigate
the incident in detail. Prompt incident investigation may reveal contributing factors to the incident that may not
be present at a later date and time.
As soon as possible, taking into account any injuries or personal problems as a result of the incident, the
supervisor and safety representative (if available) should interview the personnel involved in, and witnesses to,
the incident.
The important considerations after an incident are:

 Mitigate the impact to personnel involved in the incident.
 Mitigate the impact to ABG as a result of the incident.
 Prevent reoccurrence of a similar incident.
The HSE Representative may conduct an independent investigation of the incident. Such investigation is not
designed to replace the supervisor’s investigation, but to provide a second opinion with regards to the incident.
The HSE investigation will follow the same guidelines as the supervisor’s investigation, and include talking with the
supervisor for his/her opinion and input.
Project/Site Management, including the site HSE Representative, will review the report(s) and distribute once the
investigation is finalized.
CLASSIFYING AND RECORDING INCIDENTS
 The HSE Representative will receive and review incident reports and perform the following for each ABG
and subcontractor (including lower-tier contractor) occupational injury and illness:
 Call employees and/or supervisors (as appropriate) for additional information as needed. Discuss
injury/illness reports with corporate HSE and review potentially recordable cases and status changes.
 Corporate HSE will make the final determination regarding recordability of cases with a date of
injury/diagnosis on or after January 1, 2002 based on information available at that time in accordance
with the requirements in 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1904.
The Recordkeeping Classification Process will be used to document classification decisions.
Refer to the OSHA Recordkeeping Handbook and OSHA 300 forms.
 In locations where a recordkeeping and classification process is prescribed by a law or standard other than
OSHA, the requirements of the law/standard must be followed IN ADDITION TO the requirements of
29 CFR 1904.
 Add/update recordable cases to appropriate OSHA 300 Log. The ABG HSE Representative maintains an
informal and unofficial OSHA 300 Log or equal for contractors and lower-tier contractors.
 Complete OSHA 301 forms or equal (BLS Supplementary Record of Occupational Injury/Illness) for
recordable cases that do not have a completed copy of a workers’ compensation claim form in the file.

Page 34
ABG
Some OSHA sources have stated that forms “equal to” the 301 forms are not acceptable — it is recommended that
each project in the U.S. check with the local OSHA office to be sure (document such inquiries).
 Track open/pending cases to resolution by updating cases as new information is received.

 Communicate case status changes to management and also notify them of cases requiring reevaluation by
the occupational healthcare provider:
 Track receipt of incident reports.
 When received, transmit a copy of incident reports to the Regional Safety Manager.
Press Releases
All announcements to the news media or to the public in general must be made through, or in
coordination with, the Corporate Media Relations Department and the Corporate HSE Director. This is
intended to ensure that the information provided is factual and in the best interests of the client, the
company, and the employees.
Unless specifically authorized, project/site personnel will not initiate contact with the news media. The
Corporate Media Relations Department will decide when and if inquiries by the press are answered.
This will ensure that answers are given in a factual manner with details following as soon as possible. No
conclusions or opinions on cause and effect should be given.

Page 35
Injury Illness Property Damage/Fire Near Miss
Complete within 24 hours and submit to Kathy Bradley and your HSE manager.
1. Case No. (To be obtained by HO) 2. Social Security No.
Personal
Background Information
3. Employee Name 4a. Age 4b. Date of Birth 5. Sex 6. Regular Occupation
M F
7a. Home Address 7b. Phone Number(s)
8a. Date of Hire 8b. Hourly Rate 8c. Hours worked per day 8d. Days worked per week 8e. Days scheduled off
8f. Immediate Supervisors name/number 8g. Who incident was reported to
9. Shift 10. Location Name and Job Number 11. Location Address
12a. Date of Incident 12b. Time of Incident (24-hr clock) 13. Time Shift Started/Ended 14a. Date Reported 14b. Time Reported
Yr. Mo. Day Yr. Mo. Day
15a. Date Lost Time Began 16a. Date Restricted Activity Began 17. Date Returned to Full Duty
Yr. Mo. Day Yr. Mo. Day Yr. Mo. Day
18. Nature of Injury (choose all that apply) 19. Injured Body Part (choose all that apply) 20. Body Side Indicator
L R Both
21. Name and Address of Physician/LHCP 22. Name and Address of Hospital
23. Case Type 24. If Fatality, Date of Death

Yr. Mo. Day
25a. Bldg. No. 25b. Dept. No. 25.c Exact Location of Incident 26. Onsite or
Offsite
Incident
Description
27. Occupation at Time of Incident 28. Time in Occupation 29. Mechanism of Injury
Yrs. Mos.
30. Job Being Performed at Time of Incident
31. What Occurred?
32. Type of Incident (check all that apply)

Injury/Illness Spill Lock and Tag Property Damage:
Potential Exposure Fire Electrical Est. Cost $
Near Miss Excavation Ergonomics Motor Vehicle Accident:
Other: Environmental Equipment/Vehicle Operator Est. Cost $
33. List of Equipment/Property Involved in Incident (include if applicable manufacturer type and equipment No.)
Equipment/Property is Owned Leased Client-Owned
Estimated Cost of Repair: $
34. List permits/work authorizations in place for tasks at time of incident:
Contributing Actions (items 39-40, five entries max. per item) Contributing Conditions
35. What actions caused or contributed to the incident? 36. What condition of tools, equipment, or job site caused or contributed to
(give details on additional page as required) the incident? (give details on reverse side as required)
a.Operating without necessary j. Riding hazardous equipment a. Inadequate guard/safety device h. Close clearance/congestion
training k. Improper position/posture b. Hazardous attire i. Hazardous
b. Failure to make secure l. Influenced by distraction c. Inadequate warning system arrangement/storage
c. Operating at unsafe speed m. Inadequate protective d. Fire or explosion hazard j. Defective tools/equipment
d. Inadequate equipment e. Unsecured against movement k. Atmospheric condition
warning/signal n. Standard procedure deviation f. Poor housekeeping l. Illumination/noise hazard
e.Nullified safety device o. Other contributing action g. Protruding object hazard m. Other unsafe condition
f. Used defective equipment p. No contributing action n. No unsafe condition
g.Used equipment unsafely determined
h. Used wrong
tool/equipment
i. Equipment not at zero
energy state
37. What caused or influenced above contributing actions? 38. What caused or influenced above contributing conditions?
a. Unaware of job hazards h. Influence of emotions a. Caused by employee h. Other contractor
b. Inattention to hazard i. Influence of fatigue b. Caused by another employee i. Inadequate preventative
c. Unaware of safe method j. Influence of intoxicant/drugs c. Defective from normal use maintenance
d. Low level job skill k. Defective vision/hearing d. Defective via abuse/misuse j. Purchasing process
e. Tried to gain or save time l. Influence of illness e. Inadequate safety inspection k. Deteriorating exposure
f. Tried to avoid extra effort m. Other factors f. Inadequate l. Management acceptance
g. Tried to avoid discomfort n. Unknown factors housekeeping/cleanup m. Other source cause
g. Faulty design/construction n. Unknown source cause
39. Incident Analysis – Root Cause (check only one)
Equipment/Material Problem Personnel Error Training Deficiency External Phenomenon
1a. Defective or failed part 3a. Inadequate work environment 5a. No training provided 7a. Weather or ambient
1b. Defective or failed 3b. Inattention to detail 5b. Insufficient practice or hands on condition
material 3c. Procedure not used or used experience 7b. Power failure or
1c. Defective weld, braze, or incorrectly 5c. Inadequate content transient
soldered joint 3d. Communication problem 5d. Insufficient refresher training 7c. External fire or
1d. Manufacturer shipping or 3e. Other human error 5e. Inadequate presentation or explosion
marking error Design Problem materials 7d. Theft, tampering,
1e. Electrical or instrument 4a. Inadequate person/machine Management Problem sabotage, or vandalism
noise interface 6a. Inadequate administrative control
1f. Contaminant 4b. Inadequate or defective design 6b. Work organization/planning 8 Other
1g. End of life failure 4c. Error in equipment or material deficiency
(equipment or material) selection 6c. Inadequate supervision
Procedure Problem 4d. Drawing, specification, or data 6d. Improper resource allocation
2a. Defective or inadequate error 6e. Policy not adequately defined,
procedure disseminated, or enforced
2b. Lack of procedure 6f. Other management problem
40. HPI
Task Demands Work Environment Individual Capabilities Human Nature
1a. Time pressure (in a hurry) 2a. Distractions/Interruptions 3a. Unfamiliarity w/task/First 4a. Stress (limits attention)
1b. High Workload (memory 2b.Changes/Departures from time 4b.Habit patterns
requirements) routine 3b. Lack of knowledge (mental 4c. Assumptions (inaccurate
1c. Simultaneous, multiple tasks 2c. Confusing displays or model) mental picture)
1d. Repetitive actions, controls 3c. New technique not used 4d. Complacency/
monotonous 2d.Workarounds/OOS before Overconfidence
1e. Irrecoverable acts instruments 3d. Imprecise communication 4e. Mindset (“tuned” to see)
2e. Hidden system response habits 4f. Inaccurate risk perception
1f. Interpretation requirement (Pollyanna)
2f. Unexpected equipment 3e. Lack of proficiency/
1g.Lack of or unclear standards Inexperience 4g. Mental shortcuts (biases)
conditions 4h. Limited short-term memory
2g. Lack of alternative 3f. Indistinct problem solving
indication skills
2h.Personality conflicts 3g. “Hazardous” attitude for
critical task
3h. Illness/Fatigue
41. What action has been taken to prevent recurrence?
(give details on reverse side)
a. Use safer materials/supplies h. Improved enforcement p. Eliminate congestion

b. Improve illumination i. Order JSA done on job q. Reinstruction of employees involved
c. Improve ventilation j. Order JSA revision r. Warning to employees involved
d. Mandatory prejob instructions k. Install/revise safety guard/device s. Discipline of employees involved
e. Job reassignment of employee l. Require protective equipment t. Preventive instruction of others doing job
f. Improved inspection procedure m. Repair/replace equipment u. Correction other than above
n. Improved storage/arrangement
g. Improved cleanup procedure o. Improve design/construction
Corrective Actions Required to Prevent Recurrence
42. Required Corrections: What corrective actions will be taken to prevent Person Target Date for
Responsible Completion
recurrence of the incident? See Section 45
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Note: Use additional pages if necessary—number additional pages (f) 46-2, (f) f6-3, etc., and attach.
43. Additional Pages Attached No Yes (check all that apply)

e. Environmental Page
a. Photo Log c. Witness Statement (how many?)
f. Corrective Actions (continuation page)
b. Employee Statement d. Ergonomic Page
44. Immediate Supervisor (name/title): Date Completed 45. Other Participants in Investigation
Yr. Mo. Day No Yes (See list on page 2)
46. Report Prepared by (name/title): 47. Reviewed by Management (name/title): Yr. Mo. Day
(b.) INVOLVED/INJURED EMPLOYEE’S STATEMENT
Employer Name (print) Employee Name (Print)
Home Address (street)
City/State/Zip/Country Telephone No.
Age Date of Birth Sex Date of Incident Time of Incident Marital Status No. of Children
Instructions: In your own words, describe the incident in as much detail as possible. Speak to who, what, where, when, why, and how.
USE ADDITIONAL PAPER IF NECESSARY
How did the incident occur?
How could the injury/illness have been prevented?
BY SIGNATURE, THIS STATEMENT IS THE TRUTH TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE.
Signature Date
TO BE COMPLETED BY EMPLOYEEE IF HE/SHE DOES NOT SEEK MEDICAL TREATMENT.
I HAVE REPORTED A WORK RELATED INJURY/ILLNESS AS DESCRIBED ABOVE. AT THIS TIME, I DECLINE MEDICAL
TREATMENT AS OFFERED BY MY EMPLOYER AND WISH TO BE ALLOWED TO RETURN BACK TO WORK AT MY NORMAL JOB
DUTIES WITHOUT ANY RESTRICTIONS OR SPECIAL ACCOMODATIONS. AS I HAVE DECLINED MEDICAL TREATMENT, I
UNDERSTAND THAT I MAY BE REQUIRED TO SUBMIT POST INCIDENT DRUG SCREEN AS A RESULT OF THE REPORTED INJURY.
Signature Date
(c.) WITNESS STATEMENT
Employer Name (print) Employee Name (Print)
Home Address (street)
City/State/Zip/Country Telephone No.
Age Sex Date of Incident Time of Incident
Instructions: In your own words, describe the incident in as much detail as possible. Speak to who, what, where, when, why, and how.
USE ADDITIONAL PAPER IF NECESSARY
How did the incident occur?
How could the injury/illness have been prevented?
BY SIGNATURE, THIS STATEMENT IS THE TRUTH TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE.
Signature Date
(f.) MEDICAL AUTHORIZATION TO TREAT
Employee Name Date of Incident
Employee Address (street/city/state/zip Social Security No.
Authorized by (print name and title) Phone No.
Injury / Illness Description (include all body parts affected)
PLEASE FORWARD ALL BILLS TO:

281.817.9574 / OFFICE
Plant Performance Services
713.825.2245 / CELL
Attn: Kathy Bradley
4800 Sugar Grove Blvd. Suite 450

Kathy.bradley@ABGworld.com
Stafford, TX 77477
THIS AUTHORIZES MEDICAL TREATMENT FOR THE AFOREMENTIONED EMPLOYEE OF PLANT PERFORMANCE SERVICES. PLEASE
NOTE THAT IF THE CONDITION IS FOUND TO BE NON-OCCUPATIONAL, ALL CHARGES INCURRED AFTER THE INITIAL SERVICE DATE
WILL BECOME THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE EMPLOYEE, AND THE EMPLOYEE AGREES TO THESE TERMS BY HIS/HER SIGNATURE
BELOW.
Employee Signature Date
AUTHORIZATION FOR RELEASE OF MEDICAL INFORMATION
I HEREBY AUTHORIZE YOU (MEDICAL PROVIDER) TO DELIVER, DISCLOSE AND RELEASE ALL INFORMATION
CONCERNING CARE RENDERED TO ME FOR THE REPORTED OCCUPATIONAL ILLNESS/INJURY IN REGARDS TO THE
INCIDENT AS DESCRIBED ABOVE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: ER VISITS, DIAGNOSIS, DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES
(WITH INTERPRETATION), MEDICAL HISTORY, REPORTS OF MEDICAL EXAMS, PRE-OPERATIVE, OPERATIVE AND POST-
OPERATIVE REPORTS TO MY EMPLOYER, PLANT PERFORMANCE SERVICES (ABG) AND IT’S REPRESENTATIVES.
A PHOTO STATIC COPY OF THIS AUTHORIZATION SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS EFFECTIVE AND VALID AS THE ORIGINAL.
ABG
AERIAL & SCISSOR LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 43
SCOPE43
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................43
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................43
1.0 INSPECTIONS....................................................................................................................................................43
2.0 TRAINING AND LICENSING...............................................................................................................................44
3.0 OPERATION — AERIAL LIFTS AND ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS..................................................................44
3.1 General Requirements.................................................................................................................................44
3.2 Operations...................................................................................................................................................45
3.3 Working Near Overhead Power Lines..........................................................................................................45
4.0 OPERATION — MATERIAL/PERSONNEL HOISTS...............................................................................................46
4.1 Operation.....................................................................................................................................................46
4.2 Wire Rope....................................................................................................................................................46
4.3 Material Hoists............................................................................................................................................46
4.4 Personnel Hoists..........................................................................................................................................47
4.5 Lifting Cradle................................................................................................................................................47
5.0 REFERENCES.....................................................................................................................................................47

Page 44
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for the operation and maintenance of work platforms; aerial lifts that
can be raised and lowered, including those that are boom-supported, self-propelled, manually operated, and
vehicle-mounted; and hoists used to raise material and personnel.
SCOPE
 Inspections
 Training and Licensing
 Operation — Aerial Lifts and Elevating Work Platforms
 Operation — Material and Personnel Hoists
Note: Refer to Practice 000.502.1000 for crane-suspended work platforms.
Note: Refer to Practice 000.653.3303 for suspended scaffolds (2-point platforms).
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Aerial Lift — A vehicle-mounted device, telescoping or articulating, or both, used to position personnel. They
include the following types of vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to elevate personnel to jobsites above
ground: extensible boom platforms, aerial ladders, and articulating boom platforms. Commonly-used terms
include JLG, snorkel lift, and high-lift boom truck.
Competent Person — One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or
working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Elevating Work Platform — A device designed to elevate a platform in a substantially vertical axis. Commonly
used terms include vertical tower, scissor lift, and spider lift.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
No modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment will be made without
the manufacturer’s written approval. If such modifications or changes are made, the capacity, operation, and
maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals will be changed accordingly.
Designation of Competent and Qualified Persons must be documented in accordance with Practice 000.653.1000,
HSE General Requirements.
1.0 INSPECTIONS
Aerial lifts and elevating work platforms (hereafter called lifts) and material/personnel hoists (hereafter called
hoists) received for use through purchase, contract obligations, or rental must receive an initial inspection by a

Page 45
ABG
Competent Person before placing into operation to verify that there are no mechanical defects or safety
deficiencies; results are documented on Form 000.653.F0165, Pre-Mobilization Inspection Report — Construction
Equipment and Light Vehicles.
If the lift/hoist warrants service or repair, it will be rejected (before unloading) and returned to the lessor or
owner. The lessor/owner will be notified before such action and, if possible, be allowed to make necessary
repairs at his/her own expense. Management/supervision and the HSE Representative will be part of this
decision-making process. A photocopy of the inspection report, noting deficiencies will be transmitted to the
lessor/owner.
When a lift/hoist becomes damaged or in need of repair, a documented inspection (on Form 000.653.F0107,
Inspection Report – General Line Equipment) by a Competent Person must be completed before the equipment
is returned for use.
Note: Forms used to document inspections (000.653.F0107 series) and performance evaluations
(000.653.F0218 series) are specific to the machine. Both forms have a sub-letter
designation for nearly every type of machine. For example, F0107 “b” and F0218 “b” are
used for aerial lifts; F0107 “c” and F0218 “c” are used for scissor lifts; F0107 “x” is used for
a welding machine; and F0107 is used for an air compressor.
Before use on each shift, the operator will complete an inspection of the lift to verify that the unit is in an
operable condition; this inspection is documented on Form 000.653.F0107.
Hoists will receive a daily pre-use inspection by a Competent Person documented on the applicable Form
000.653.F0107. Deficiencies will be fully explained in the “Comments.” Corrective actions will also be noted on
the form before the lifts may be used in the field.
If a deficiency has the potential for causing bodily injury to the operator/driver or ground employees, the
equipment/vehicle must be tagged with a Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag, Form 000.653.F0301 or equal, to
avoid operation. The supervisor must be notified when the equipment/vehicle is tagged out of service.
A monthly inspection of lifts and hoists will be performed by a Competent Person and documented using Form
000.653.F0108, Monthly Inspection Report – Construction Equipment and Light Vehicles.
2.0 TRAINING AND LICENSING
Employees who will operate lifts must be trained to the requirements of this practice and
specific manufacturer’s operating instructions by a Competent Person.
Note: Training requirements can be met by a project-specific training course,

manufacturer’s training classes, or other recognized training that covers the
content of this practice.

Page 46
ABG
3.0 OPERATION — AERIAL LIFTS AND ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS
3.1 General Requirements
Lifts purchased, leased, rented, or otherwise used on the project/site must meet the criteria in the most recent
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards in the ANSI A92 series or equivalent in-country
standard(s).
Lifts will be maintained and repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
Insulated portions of lifts must not be altered or damaged by use that reduces the insulation capability of the
unit.
3.2 Operations
Lifts will be operated in accordance with the requirements contained in this practice, training classes, and the
manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Operate lifts on level surfaces or within the slope limits given by the manufacturer. Use wheel chocks when
working on inclines as recommended by the manufacturer.
Set brakes and fully extend outriggers (if equipped and wherever space permits), position on stable surfaces, or
use pads/appropriate cribbing arranged in a stable configuration.
Note: If the outriggers cannot be fully extended, operate within limitations specified in
the manufacturer’s operating manual.
Ensure the area surrounding the lift is clear of personnel and equipment before lowering the platform, or
position awareness barriers around the lifts.
Provide safety barricades around manlifts operated in restricted areas, in accordance with Practice 000.653.3301,
Barricades, Signs, and Tags, so that personnel cannot be caught between rotating equipment and adjacent fixed
objects.
Stand on the floor of the lift and do not sit or climb on the edge or handrail. Do not climb out of the lift or use
planks, ladders, or other devices, to reach the work location.
In aerial lifts (JLGs, snorkel lifts, boom trucks), wear a full body harness and lanyard and attach it to an approved
anchorage on the boom or basket. For scissor lifts, fall protection is required when the manufacturer has
constructed a 5,000-pound (2268-kilogram) fall protection anchorage point and has specified in the operating
manual that fall protection is required.
Do not tie off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while in a lift.
Only tools and materials required for the task are permitted to be raised in a lift.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the lift.
Do not move lifts when the platform is occupied unless the equipment is specifically designed for this type of
operation.

Page 47
ABG
Note: For aerial lifts, the boom is completely retracted and resting in the transport
cradle. Employees may stay in the bucket/platform for simple relocation
movements.
Lifts that can be moved in elevated positions must have interlocks that keep the unit from moving or controlling
the speed to a rate that does not affect stability when the platform is raised.
Booms and outriggers must be secured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions before over-the-road
transport.
3.3 Working Near Overhead Power Lines
Refer to Practice 000.653.3209, Working Near Overhead Power Lines.

4.0 OPERATION — MATERIAL/PERSONNEL HOISTS
4.1 Operation
Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings, operating rules, signal systems, and
operating instructions must be conspicuously posted at the operator’s station for the hoist, or on the car frame or
crosshead.
Overhead protection of 2-inch (5.1-centimeter) planking, 3/4-inch (1.9-centimeter) plywood or equivalent, will be
provided on the top of every hoist.
4.2 Wire Rope
Wire rope with defects must be removed or replaced immediately. If 1 wire rope in a set requires
replacement, the entire set of ropes must be replaced.
Any of the following defects will render the wire rope unfit for use:
 Corrosion – Any development of slight corrosion should be noted and watched
closely. Severe corrosion is cause for replacement.
 Broken Wires – One or more valley breaks, 6 randomly distributed broken wires in
one rope lay, or 3 broken wires in one strand in one rope lay is cause for
replacement.
 End Attachments – Development of broken wires near attachments is cause for
replacement. If this condition is localized in an operating rope and the section in
question can be eliminated by making a new attachment; this may be done rather
than replacing the entire rope.
 Abrasion – Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, or peening that causes loss of more than
one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires is cause for replacement.
 Kinking – Severe kinking, crushing, bird caging, or other damage resulting in the
distortion of the rope structure is cause for replacement.
 Heat Damage – Evidence of heat damage resulting from contact with a torch or any
damage caused by contact with electrical wires is cause for replacement.
 Reduced Rope Diameter – Cause for replacement if the reduction from the normal
rope diameter is more than:

Page 48
ABG
 3/64 inch (0.1 centimeter) for diameters up to and including 3/4 inch
(1.9 centimeters)
 1/16 inch (0.2 centimeter) for diameters ranging from 7/8 to 1-1/8 inches (2.2 to
2.8 centimeters)
 3/32 inch (0.2 centimeter) for diameters from 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inches (3.2 to
3.8 centimeters)
4.3 Material Hoists
No person is allowed to ride on a material hoist except for the purpose of inspecting or maintaining
the hoist. A sign stating “No Riders Allowed” must be posted on the car frames or crosshead.
Entrances to material hoist ways must be protected by gates or bars that:
 Guard the full width of the landing entrance
 Are painted with diagonal contrasting colors
 Are equipped with a latching device
Note: In the case of bars, are no less than 2 x 4-inch (5.1 x 10.2-centimeters) lumber or an
equivalent, 42-inches (106.9 centimeters) above the floor, and 2 feet (0.6 meter) from the
hoistway line.
Inspection, testing, construction, operation, and maintenance of material hoists will be in accordance
with the requirements of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard A10.5, Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1926.552, or other applicable in-country standards.
4.4 Personnel Hoists
Personnel hoistway doors may be no less than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 meters) high. Solid doors, where
used, will be provided with a vision panel opening having a width not exceeding 6 inches (15.2
centimeters) and an area not exceeding 80 square inches (203.2 square centimeters) that is covered
with expanded metal.
Landing doors will be provided that can be locked mechanically so that they cannot be opened from
the landing side. These locks will be of a type that can be released only by a person in the car.
For hoists located outside of structures, the enclosures on the building side of the hoistway will be full
height or a minimum of 10 feet (3.1 meters) at each floor landing.
Inspection, testing, construction, operation, and maintenance of personnel hoists will be performed
in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A10.4 standards or applicable in-country standards.
Note: For suspended personnel platforms (workbaskets), refer to Practice

000.502.1000, Cranes and Rigging – Operations (Site-Specific).
4.5 Lifting Cradle

Page 49
ABG
The following types of equipment will not be lifted under any circumstances unless contained in an
engineered and certified lifting cradle:
 Drums
 Toolboxes or tool kits
 Oxy-acetylene and other compressed gas cylinders
Cradles must have a retention/restraint system.

5.0 REFERENCES

000.502.1000 Cranes and Rigging – Operations (Site-Specific)
(ABG)
000.653.1000 HSE General Requirements
000.653.3209 Working Near Overhead Power Lines
000.653.3301 Barricades, Signs, and Tags
000.653.3303 Scaffolds
Forms:
000.653.F0107 Inspection Report – General Line Equipment:
Welding Machines, Air Compressors, Manlifts, etc.
000.653.F0108 Monthly Inspection Report – Construction
Equipment and Light Vehicles
000.653.F0165 Pre-Mobilization Inspection Report — Construction
000.653.F0301 Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag
Non-ABG Documents
ANSI A10.4 Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists and
Employee Elevators
ANSI A10.5 Safety Requirements for Material Hoists for
Construction and Demolition Operations
ANSI A92 Series Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices and Work
Platforms
29 CFR 192`6.552 Material Hoists, Personnel Hoists, and Elevators

Page 50
ABG
ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT / MAINTENANCE WORK & INCIDENTAL HANDLING OF
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 50
SCOPE50
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................50
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................50
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................................................................51
2.0 Responsibilities................................................................................................................................................51
2.1 Project/Site Manager..................................................................................................................................51
2.2 Asbestos Removal Company.......................................................................................................................51
2.3 Qualified Hygienist......................................................................................................................................52
3.0 HANDLING/REMOVAL....................................................................................................................................52
3.1 Allowable Exposure Limits...........................................................................................................................52
3.2 Requirements..............................................................................................................................................52
3.3 Controls and Work Practices.......................................................................................................................54
3.4 Recordkeeping.............................................................................................................................................55
4.0 AIR MONITORING..........................................................................................................................................55
5.0 ACCIDENTAL EXPOSURE.................................................................................................................................56
6.0 REFERENCES...................................................................................................................................................57

Page 51
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice provides the requirements for handling asbestos when it is discovered incidental to other services
provided to a client.
SCOPE

 Handling/Removal
 Air Monitoring
 Accidental Exposure
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Asbestos  A naturally occurring mineral fiber with any of the following names:
 Chrysotile
 Amosite
 Crocidolite
 Fibrous tremolite
 Fibrous anthophyllite
 Fibrous actinolite
Asbestos Fiber  Asbestos that is 5 micrometers or longer with the length at least 3 times the diameter.
Cemented Asbestos  Asbestos that is tightly bound with tar, Portland cement, or other material. Cement pipe or
sheet can emit airborne fibers if the materials are cut, abraded or sawed, or if they are broken during demolition
operations.
Competent Person – One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or
Friable Asbestos  Asbestos that can be crushed, pulverized, or reduced to dust with hand pressure and is likely
to emit fibers. The fibrous or fluffy sprayed-on materials are used for fireproofing, insulation or sound proofing is
considered to be friable and readily release airborne fibers if disturbed.
Non-Friable Asbestos – Materials such as vinyl asbestos floor tile or roofing felts are considered non-friable which
normally do not emit airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding or sawing operations.
Regulated Area – An area established to demarcate areas where airborne concentrations of asbestos or asbestos-
containing materials can reasonably be expected to exceed the permissible limits.
Time-Weighted Average (TWA) – Concentration for a normal 8-hour workday and a 40-hour work week, to which
nearly all employees may be repeatedly exposed, day after day, without adverse effect.

Page 52
ABG
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
In the event that asbestos is encountered, the client will be notified immediately. It is preferred by ABG that the
client takes charge of hiring and managing an asbestos removal company. However, if approval is granted from
Business Line Management to provide client support in managing an asbestos removal company, the Business
Line HSE Lead will be contacted for assistance in developing a site-specific asbestos contractor management plan.
ABG employees will not handle, remove, transport, or dispose of asbestos-containing materials. If it is necessary
to remove asbestos, the client should contract with an approved asbestos abatement company.
Compliance with applicable standards such as 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1926.1101 is required.
2.0 Responsibilities
2.1 Project/Site Manager
The Project/Site Manager will notify the client that asbestos-containing material has been detected and that it
must be removed. The Project/Site Manager will request that the owner hire and manage an asbestos removal
company. In the event that the client is desirous of ABG assisting the client with its management of the asbestos
removal company, the Project/Site Manager must immediately obtain approval from Business Line Management.
Approval by Business Line Management will depend upon whether or not the client has provided ABG with
adequate protection against potential liability, normally addressed in ABG’s contract with the client. ABG Legal
Services must be consulted to ensure adequate legal protection is available.
2.2 Asbestos Removal Company
ABG will recommend that the client hire a qualified — and where required — licensed contractor to remove and
dispose of the asbestos in accordance with applicable standards and accepted industry practice.
In the event that approval has been received from Business Line Management to assist the client with its
management of the asbestos removal company, ABG will assist the client with its monitoring of the following
actions.
The asbestos abatement and Removal Company will:
 Direct the auditing and monitoring activities of employees and/or a contractor, to ensure that job
procedures are managed properly.
 Maintain accurate records of all work performed.
 Maintain accurate records of asbestos and asbestos–free areas.
 Maintain accurate records of all material sampling.
 When required or necessary, arrange for the excavation of new dumping trenches at the asbestos
dump.
 Maintain clean and orderly conditions at the asbestos dump.
 Carry out a routine visual inspection of the cells.
 Provide the labor force with the proper training, correct apparel, and safety equipment when
working within a declared “asbestos working area.”

Page 53
ABG
 Provide for the removal of bags or bulk material to be transported to an approved asbestos dump
within 24 hours of removal.
 At all times during, and upon completion of any removal program, maintain the worksite in a
clean, tidy, and safe situation (such as off-cuts, empty containers, and other materials used or
removed from the worksite).
Monitor performance against standards in the following areas:

 Respirators and other protection equipment
 Decontamination units and change rooms
 Use and servicing of negative air units
 Servicing of vacuum cleaners
 Disposal of waste materials
 Removal of asbestos-containing materials
2.3 Qualified Hygienist
management of an asbestos removal company, ABG will employ the services of a qualified hygienist through an
approved contractor to perform the following:
 Monitor the activities of ABG employees, using both occupational and para-occupational air
monitoring before, during, and at the completion of the asbestos abatement work.
 Follow up monitoring results and redirect where necessary.
 Maintain an accurate record of all fiber monitoring results and disseminate results to personnel
involved.
 Require the client and the client’s asbestos abatement contractor to routinely inspect all asbestos
work areas so that applicable standards are being strictly followed.
 Forward applicable fiber monitoring results to the ABG HSE Representative.
3.0 HANDLING/REMOVAL
management of the asbestos removal company, the following information is provided so that ABG can address
asbestos issues as they might arise.
3.1 Allowable Exposure Limits
The individual permissible exposure limit (PEL) is 0.1 fibers/cc, 8-hour TWA.
The excursion limit is 1.0 fiber/cc measured over 30 minutes.
3.2 Requirements
Wherever feasible, the asbestos abatement contractor must establish negative pressure
The asbestos abatement contractor must designate a Competent Person (in accordance with Practice
000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements, who will supervise the following:

Page 54
ABG
 Setting up the enclosure

 The integrity of the enclosure
 Entry to and exit from the enclosure
 All employee exposure monitoring
 Provision and use of hygiene facilities by employees
 Appropriate use of protective clothing: coveralls, gloves, head coverings, foot
coverings, face shield, vented goggles and respirators within the enclosure
The asbestos abatement contractor’s designated Competent Person will verify the following:
 Employees are trained in work practices, personal protective equipment (PPE), respiratory equipment,
and engineering controls that reduce or maintain the exposure below the TWA such as exhaust systems,
for hand tools, wet methods, cleanup procedures, and PPE.
 Engineering controls are functioning properly.
Note: Small scale, short duration operations such as pipe repairs, valve replacement, installing electrical
conduits, installing or moving drywall, roofing and other general building maintenance or
renovation, do not require the client or an asbestos abatement contractor to comply with the
above requirements.
Any employee, including employees performing housekeeping activities before or after construction activities,
which is exposed at or above the action level (0.1 fibers/cc, 8-hour TWA) for 30 or more days per year, even if
they are not working directly with the asbestos, must have the following:
 A medical examination in accordance with Practice 000.653.2100, Pre-Project Medical
Examination.
 Respirator training and respirator fit testing in accordance with Practice 000.653.3002,
Respiratory Protection. Employees wearing negative pressure respirators must have either
quantitative or qualitative fit test. The qualitative fit test may only be used for testing the fit
of a half-face respirator.
Respirators must be used in the following circumstances:

 Work practice controls
 Work operations
 To reduce exposure
 Emergencies
Note: Respirators are to be provided to employees at no cost to the employees and should be
chosen from those approved by NIOSH. Powered air-purifying respirators will be available to
employees upon request when the respirator will provide adequate protection.

Page 55
ABG
Respirators will be used as shown below:
Asbestos Concentration Minimum Respirator Required

Not to exceed 2 fiber/cc Half-face air-purifying respirator equipped with high-
efficiency filters
Not to exceed 10 fibers/cc Full face piece air-purifying respirator equipped with
high-efficiency filters
Not to exceed 20 fibers/cc Air-supplied respirators with continuous flow or
pressure-demand regulator.
Any powered air-purifying respirator equipped with
high-efficiency filters.
Not to exceed 200 fibers/cc Full face piece air-supplied respirators operated in
pressure-demand mode.
Over 200 fibers/cc or Full facepiece supplied air respirator
Unknown concentrations operated in pressure-demand mode equipped with
an auxiliary positive pressure self-contained
breathing apparatus.
Full-body covering that will prevent contamination of the employees’ skin or clothing.
Wash facilities to remove asbestos from the face, hands, and any other part of the body not
protected by clothing.
A place to store and to consume food, beverages, and tobacco products so that these items will
not be contaminated by asbestos.
Procedures and a designated area for changing into and removing protective clothing to prevent
asbestos contamination of other facilities, such as eating areas, shops, tool rooms, and offices.
Initial and annual training that will include the following:

 Routine and emergency procedures followed while working with asbestos
 Health effect associated with asbestos
 Health effects of smoking and asbestos exposure
 Review of this practice, or site-specific procedure
 Review of applicable exposure monitoring
 PPE and limitations
 A certificate of training should be provided and maintained
3.3 Controls and Work Practices
The Competent Person must ensure that the following controls and work practices are implemented:
 Friable asbestos is saturated with wetting agents before removal, whenever feasible.
 Enclosures are used when friable asbestos must be removed without wetting, and a filtered
exhaust system will be used to remove fibers from the enclosure.

Page 56
ABG
 Removed asbestos is bagged, labeled, stored, or disposed daily in a way that will prevent
release of fibers.
 For work that may release fibers from cemented asbestos, such as sawing, grinding, or drilling,
the tools are equipped with a local exhaust system or a water spray at the point of operation.
 Barricades are used to limit the number of employees exposed to asbestos.

Page 57
ABG
Work areas that have been barricaded or enclosed have signs posted at all entrances that indicate:
DANGER
ASBESTOS
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS & PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED
IN THIS AREA
Each enclosed or barricaded area must be cleaned at the end of each workday with a vacuum cleaner, by wet
sweeping, or other effective means of fiber cleanup.
Insulation that contains greater than 1 percent asbestos will not be installed or reinstalled, except that it may be
spray-applied to equipment with advance notification to the relevant authorities.
Disposal areas and asbestos containers must be labeled:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
Note: The letters and label may be any size and color as long as it is easy to read.
The relevant regulatory authority must be notified before asbestos removal.

3.4 Recordkeeping
A list containing the names of ABG employees exposed to asbestos must be maintained at the site.
All records and documentation will be maintained in accordance with the schedule provided in Practice
000.653.1500, Records Management and Document Control.
4.0 AIR MONITORING
The asbestos removal company upon notification — preferably 24 hours in advance of the requirement — will
arrange for the qualified hygienist to perform the monitoring. The qualified hygienist will:
 Supply sufficient monitors as requested.
 Position monitors in the breathing zone of selected employees.
 Start/stop the occupational monitors on selected employees.
 Ensure samples are representative of the 8-hour TWA, and 30-minute excursion
exposure.
 Control the operation of para-occupational monitors for the duration of the job.
 Provide results of the monitoring to the ABG HSE Representative for distribution
to the work parties involved.

Page 58
ABG
If monitoring data indicates the TWA and/or excursion limits are exceeded, the contractor must develop
and implement a written plan to reduce employee exposure. The plan should include engineering and
work practice controls and the use of respiratory protection.
5.0 ACCIDENTAL EXPOSURE
Decontamination of an employee accidentally exposed to asbestos must be conducted in accordance with

applicable standards. At a minimum, the following steps must be taken following an accidental exposure to
asbestos:
Once it is suspected that an employee has been accidentally exposed to asbestos, the employee will be
isolated from all other employees as follows:
 Isolate the employee in a location not used for eating or other personal use.
 Isolate the employee in an area free of drafts.
 Turn off any HVAC to the isolation area.
Before a potentially exposed employee enters an isolation area:
 Spread plastic sheeting, if available, on the floor in one area of the room.
 If plastic sheeting is not available, use plastic trash liners.
 Place an empty trash can with a clean plastic trash liner on the plastic sheeting.
 Adjacent to the plastic sheeting provide clean towels or other form of clothing
that a disrobed employee can use to cover up.
Note: Whatever is used to cover up must be considered disposable.)
Have the employee enter an “isolation area” and stand on the plastic sheeting.
Support personnel, suited up with appropriate PPE and a respirator suitable for asbestos, will take an
HEPA vacuum and vacuum-clean the clothing worn by the potentially exposed employee.
After being vacuum-cleaned, the potentially exposed employee will discard all clothing exposed to the
potential asbestos substance into the trash can and carefully close the plastic liner in the trash can to
prevent further spread of contamination. (Use a common-tie-wrap to secure the liner).
After discarding the contaminated clothing, the potentially exposed employee should move onto a
clean area of the plastic sheeting and don the cover-up provided.
Once the cover up is donned, the potentially exposed employee will proceed to a shower (separate
area from the isolation area).
All temporary cover up clothing will be removed and placed in a plastic bag and secured with tie-wrap.
This clothing is disposed of with the other decontamination materials.
The employee will thoroughly wash and rinse before donning regular clothing.
Support personnel, suited up with appropriate PPE and a respirator suitable for asbestos, will
decontaminate the isolation area and arrange for disposal of potentially contaminated materials as
follows:
 Enter the isolation area with large plastic bags.
 Using spray mist bottles dampen the plastic sheeting on the floor.
 Carefully fold the sheeting inward in overlapping folds to prevent any asbestos
materials from contaminating the emergency isolation area.

Page 59
ABG
 Place the plastic sheeting in a plastic bag and seal the bag. Place the bagged
sheeting in a second plastic bag and seal the bag.
 Remove the plastic liner containing the contaminated clothing from the trash can,
place the liner and clothing in a second plastic bag, and seal the second plastic
bag.
 Retrieve the plastic bag containing the cover-up clothing from the shower area
and place in a second plastic bag and seal the bag.
 Store the plastic bags in a secure area, away from normal work areas or traffic.
 Post a warning sign that bags may contain asbestos – do not disturb.
 Proceed through the decontamination sequence above.
Arrange for sampling and analysis of the suspected asbestos substance. Have the substance tested for asbestos.
If test results are negative for asbestos, provided no other harmful substance is involved, the employee’s clothing
may be returned, and plastic sheeting can be disposed of in a normal manner.
If test results are positive for asbestos, contaminated clothing and sheeting must be disposed of in accordance
with mandated asbestos disposal procedures. The potentially exposed employee will be provided medical
counseling with regard to asbestos exposure, and all regulatory exposure requirements must be adhered to.
6.0 REFERENCES

000.653.1500 Records Management and Document Control
000.653.2100 Pre-Project Medical Examination
000.653.3002 Respiratory Protection
Non-ABG Documents
29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos

Page 60
ABG
ASSURED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR PROGRAM (GFCI)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 59
SCOPE59
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................59
SUPERINTENDENT REPSONSIBLITIES....................................................................................................................59
TESTING INTERVAL...................................................................................................................................................60
TEST PROCEDURE.....................................................................................................................................................60
COLOR CODE........................................................................................................................................................60

Page 61
ABG
PURPOSE:
It is the policy of ABG is to establish and implement an Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program on all
construction sites in addition to utilizing Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI’s) on all 120 volt circuits. A
written copy of the program must be maintained at the job-site and be made available for review by all
employees.
SCOPE
This program covers all extension cords and power receptacles providing 120 volt single phase 12 and 20 ampere
service, which is not part of the permanent wiring of a building or structure. It also includes all equipment
connected by cord and plug that is either available for use or used by employees.
APPLICATION
Each Superintendent is responsible for determining that every extension cord and power outlet, as well as any
electrical equipment attached by a plug and cord is inspected for damage prior to each day’s use. A copy of all
inspections and this procedure will be maintained at the job-site.
THE SUPERINTENDENT IS REPSONSIBLE FOR ASSURING THAT:

 Any cord with damaged or broken insulation is removed from service, the cord shortened or replaced to
eliminate the break.
 Plugs with missing or damaged ground prongs or which are otherwise damaged are removed from
service.
 Tools or other equipment that show damage to their case or power cord shall not be used.
 Double insulated tools with damaged cases are removed from service if the damage reduces the
insulation of the case.
Any tool failing this inspection will be removed from service until it is repaired and passes the test outlined in this
Section. Cords with broken insulation Will Not Be Repaired with Electrical Tape. They will be replaced or
shortened to eliminate the damaged section.
All extension cords, receptacles and equipment connected by cord and plug, except those which are double
insulated, must be tested to determine that the grounding circuit is continuous. Each receptacle, extension cord
and tool must be tested to determine if it is correctly wired. These tests must be performed.
 Before first use.

 Before returning the unit to service after repair.
 After any incident, which may reasonably have caused damage to the ground circuit, such as shock
loading the cords by stretching it or running over it with a vehicle?
 At least every three months for all tools and extension cords and every six months for fixed or temporary
wiring not exposed to damage.

Page 62
ABG
 A Record of These Tests Shall Be Maintained. This will be done by color coding each cord, receptacle and
power tool that passes with colored tape. The color of the tape will be alternated with the test period.
TESTING INTERVAL
Testing Interval – The minimum test interval allowed under OSHA 29CFR 1926.404 (b) (iii) is quarterly beginning
with the first test when the tool is purchased. If, however, your quarterly inspections find any defective tools,
which have not been identified by the routine daily tool inspection, it will be necessary to conduct your
inspections monthly.
TEST PROCEDURE
 All equipment grounding connectors will be tested for continuity and must be electrically continuous.
This test will be performed with an ohmmeter, a continuity tester or other appropriate equipment.
 All power outlets, including those on portable generators and welding machines and power cords shall be
tested for the correct polarity and continuity of the equipment ground. This test will be performed with a
receptacle tester or other appropriate equipment.
 All Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) shall be tested prior to use by pressing the test button. Plug in
a tool and press the ON switch. The tool should NOT turn on. Press the RESET button on the GFCI to
complete the test.
 Each extension cord, receptacle or tool, which passes the above test, will be identified by color code
applied with tape at the plug end. Extension cords should be marked at both ends. For receptacles, place
the tape on the wall immediately above the receptacle.
THE COLOR CODE WILL BE AS FOLLOWS:
First Quarter (1/1 - 3/31) RED
Second Quarter (4/1 to 6/30) GREEN
Third Quarter ( 7/1 to 9/30) BLUE
Fourth Quarter (10/1 to 12/31) YELLOW

Page 63
ABG
BANANA WEDGE SAFE USE GUIDELINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.....................................................................................................................................................................62
ACCOUNTABILITY........................................................................................................................................................62
SAFETY GUIDELINES....................................................................................................................................................62

Page 64
ABG
PURPOSE
To establish general safety guidelines designed to protect employees and other personnel working on or near a
ABG project that involves the use of banana type wedges.
ACCOUNTABILITY
All management and supervisory personnel are responsible and accountable for the effective communication and
enforcement of these guidelines. Employees are accountable for following these safety guidelines and should
understand the dangers involved in using this type of tool.
SAFETY GUIDELINES
1. The supervisor shall assure that all employees utilizing a banana wedge to complete a job assignment are
properly trained on this policy regarding the safe use and related hazards of the tool prior to use.
2. Each task and work area shall be personally evaluated and inspected by the supervisor to determine if the
use of banana wedges is the proper alternative means available to complete the work task. Flange
spreaders
or similar alternative means are to be considered as a means of completing the task where feasible.
3. After a thorough hazard assessment is conducted and banana wedges are found to be the appropriate
option, the supervisor must then complete the attached Banana Wedge Use & Justification Form included in this
policy and conduct a risk meeting surrounding the planned steps of the procedure with all employees
involved in performing the task prior to executing the work. The supervisor/competent person designee
must also remain at the work site and monitor the job until the task is safely completed.
4. All personnel, including other contractors, shall be communicated with concerning the task to be
performed
with the tools and removed from the immediate area if necessary and remain at a safe distance until the
task
is complete. NO EXCEPTIONS.
5. The senior site manager on the project is responsible for the authorization and release of the banana
wedge
tool needed to complete the task. The supervisor assigned to the work crew will then complete or update
the existing Safety Task Assignment (STA) to reflect the new hazards associated with the tools use and
this should be completed to reflect the change in conditions and hazards associated with the use of the
banana wedges. EVERY ABG EMPLOYEE involved in the work task regardless of title or position shall
review and sign the STA.
7. All banana wedges shall have drilled/pressed 1/4 inch holes, approximately 1-1/2 inch from the tip of the

Page 65
ABG
barrel and will be linked together with 1/8 inch poly coated wire rope and a compression clamp that will
withstand failure should the wedges dislodge. The tools are to be inspected before each use to ensure
that
they are in safe working condition and are to be taken out of service if repairs are needed. Any tool
variance to this requirement must be approved by the Safety Department.
8. In addition, the barrel of all banana wedges shall be painted red from the tip of the barrel to the end of
the
flat surface. (This will identify a stop point when the red reaches the flange surface) Wedges found not
painted red or needing recoating will be placed out of service until proper red identification has applied.
9. All work above head level will require a work platform sufficient enough to keep the employee from
over-extending while performing the task.
10. Face shields shall be worn at all times when using banana wedges to complete a job assignment. When
full-face respirators are in use, it shall be at the discretion of the supervisor as to whether face shields will
be required.
11. All banana wedges shall be highly restricted and controlled by jobsite project managers and supervision to
ensure that the tools are not freely accessible to craft personnel on a shelf in tool trailer without
completing this process of approval before use. It is the responsibility of the senior site manager to
determine what control access measure is appropriate for their specific jobsite.
12. Any ABG employee has the right to stop a task if he/she has a safety concern during a work assignment
without the fear of retaliation. If at any time questions are raised as to the safe steps required for the job
task, or the work scope becomes unclear at any time, the work will cease until all questions are answered
and hazards safeguarded against before work is allowed to continue.

Page 66
ABG
BARRICADES SIGNS AND TAGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 64
SCOPE65
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................65
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................65
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................65
2.0 BARRICADES...................................................................................................................................................66
2.1 Warning Barricades...................................................................................................................................66
2.2 Protective Barricades.................................................................................................................................66
3.0 BARRICADE TAPE...........................................................................................................................................66
4.0 FLOOR Hole Covers........................................................................................................................................67
5.0 SIGNS.............................................................................................................................................................68
6.0 TAGS..............................................................................................................................................................68
7.0 REFERENCES...................................................................................................................................................68

Page 67
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the requirements for various types, setup, maintenance, and uses of HSE barricades,
signs, and tags.
SCOPE
 Barricades
 Barricade Tape
 Floor Hole Covers
 Signs
 Tags
APPLICATION
This practice applies to all work activities and employees under the control of ABG and its contractors.
DEFINITIONS
None.
Employee failure to heed safety signs, tags, or barriers will result in appropriate disciplinary action.
Barricade tape will be accompanied with signs or tags to clearly communicate the hazard and include the
following:
 Supervisor/foreman who placed the barricade tape
 Purpose or reason for the barricade (the hazard[s])
 Date placed
Note: Refer to Forms 000.653.F0311 and 000.653.F0312 for examples of tags that may
be used (available from ABG Greenville Forms Management).
Accident prevention tags will be removed only after the condition that prompted their placement is resolved.
Barricade tape and signs should be removed by the person, or supervisor of the person, who placed it as soon as
the hazard is eliminated. This will maintain the importance of barricades, improve access, and reduce clutter.
The following colors and color combinations are used for HSE markings:
 Red – Designates fire protection and extinguishing equipment, “DANGER” signs/tags,
and “STOP” buttons or emergency controls. (If automatic sprinkler piping is painted
to match the ceiling or walls, attach Red/White labels to identify the piping as
automatic sprinkler.)

Page 68
ABG
 Orange – Designates parts of equipment that may cut, crush, or otherwise injure.
Street and highway construction and maintenance signs have a black legend on an
orange background.
 Yellow or Yellow-Black Combinations – Designates caution for hazards such as
striking against, tripping, falling, or bumping, and “CAUTION” tags.
 Green – Designates “SAFETY” and the location of safety equipment other than fire
protection equipment.
 Blue – Designates informational signs and bulletin boards and has specific
applications in the railroad area to designate warnings for track repair, and the
movement of equipment under repair.
 Black/White/Yellow – Designates traffic or housekeeping markings.
2.0 BARRICADES
Barricades are required around excavations (refer to Practice 000.653.3311, Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring);
openings in floors, walls, or roof areas; edges of platforms; and certain types of overhead work.
2.1 Warning Barricades
Warning barricades offer no physical protection, but serve to alert personnel in the area that a hazard is present.
 Warning barricades must be set back 6 feet (1.8 meters) minimum from the hazard.
 If 6 feet (1.8 meters) is not feasible, a protective barricade should be used.
 If the hazard is a potential fall of 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more, the warning barricade
must be set back at least 6 feet (1.8 meters) — preferably 15 feet (4.6 meters).
2.2 Protective Barricades
Protective barricades not only warn of a hazard, but provide physical isolation or protection from the hazard.
Examples include guardrails or cables set at the proper height around an opening or edge. Another example is
anchored railroad ties to prevent driving into a culvert.
Protective barricades must be designed to meet their intended purpose.
 Example 1: If the barricade is to prevent personnel from walking into a floor hole, it
must meet all requirements for a guardrail (top and mid rails and toe board designed
to resist a 200 pound (85 kilogram) force.
 Example 2: If the barricade is to stop equipment from running into a ditch, it must
be the equivalent of railroad ties or 6-inch (15.2 centimeters) ID concrete-filled pipe
posts, set 3-feet (0.9 meter )deep in concrete, spaced 3 feet (0.9 meter) apart.
A swinging entrance gate through the railing or an offset so employees cannot walk directly into the opening must
be provided.

Page 69
ABG
3.0 BARRICADE TAPE
Barricade tape will be of a color or combination of colors that convey the appropriate level of hazard.
 Yellow/Black Barricade Tape: This type of barricade tape serves as a caution to
indicate to employees that a potential hazard exists. Employees may enter without
permission from erector of this tape. This barricade tape is used for, but not limited
to, the following:
 Excavation 1 to 4 feet (0.3 to 1.2 meters) in depth
 Identification of trip hazards and low hanging objects
 Material storage on the site
 Red Barricade Tape: This type of barricade tape indicates DANGER and that a
potential serious hazard may be present. No employee, other than those assigned to
work inside a RED barricade, may enter without first obtaining permission from the
erector of the tape. This barricade tape is used for, but is not limited to, the
following:
 Excavations 4 feet (1.2 meters) or more in depth
 Overhead work
 Live electrical components
 Scaffold under construction
 Around swing radius of equipment with a rotating superstructure
 Magenta (Purple)/Yellow Tape: This barricade tape is used to indicate DANGER—
RADIATION and that possible exposure may be present. This barricade tape is
considered an equal to red, in that no employees are allowed to enter this area
without first obtaining permission from the erector of the tape. This color is
representative of x-ray work being performed.
Signs must also be posted to protect areas where radiation operations are in progress.
In operating facilities, it is recommended that construction areas are barricaded and posted “Construction Areas
— Hard Hat and Eye Protection Required” with a physical boundary (such as rope or fencing, where practical) to
control access and warn of potential hazards. “Hurricane” fencing should be used for barricading outdoor areas.
Note: “Hurricane” fence (or equal) is required for areas accessible to the public.
Tape will be erected to enclose the specific area to be protected only. In general, passageways must not be
blocked. However, if passageways or access ways must be blocked, contact management for coordination with
other crafts and/or possible alternatives.
Tape will be erected in a secure and neat manner that will maintain a height of between 40 and 45 inches (101.6
and 114.3 centimeters) from the floor or ground surface.
4.0 FLOOR Hole Covers
A floor hole cover conforming to the following is required:

 If one dimension of the opening is 18 inches (45.7 centimeters) or less, use plywood
at least3/4-inch (1.9 centimeters) thick.

Page 70
ABG
 If both dimensions of the opening exceed 18 inches (45.7 centimeters), use two
layers of 3/4-inch (1.9 centimeter) plywood or material at least 2-inches
(5.1-centimeters) thick.
Covers over large floor openings must be constructed to the same loading specification as scaffold decking.
Floor hole covers must be secured (cleat, wire, or nail) to prevent displacement.
Floor hole covers must be clearly marked with a “Danger – Hole Cover – Do Not Remove” sign.
5.0 SIGNS
Signs will be placed in strategic and prominent locations to warn against hazard, or in combination with barricade
tape/fencing.
Refer to Practice 000.653.3211, Traffic Management, for requirements when establishing signs, signals, or
barricades on or near roads or railroads.
Danger signs will be used where a SERIOUS hazard exists.
Note: Danger signs have a predominantly red upper panel with black outlined borders
and a white lower panel for additional lettering.
Use caution signs to warn against potential hazards or to caution against unsafe practices.
Note: Caution signs are predominantly yellow with a black upper panel and borders and
the word “caution” written in yellow on the upper panel. Write any additional
words in black on the lower panel.
6.0 TAGS
Accident prevention tags will be used as a temporary means to warn employees of an existing hazard such as
defective tools or equipment, or in combination with barricade tape/fencing.
Note: Accident prevention tags are white with the word DANGER in white letters on a
red oval within a black box with blacking lettering (“Don’t Use It – Unsafe) for the
message. Refer to Form 000.653.F0301, Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag.
Accident prevention tags will not be used as a substitute for signs.

Note: Accident prevention tags with the message “Danger – Do Not Operate” or candy
stripe tags with the message “Danger” are used only for lock and tag as part of
the Hazard Energy Control program. Refer to Practice 000.653.3315, Hazardous
Energy Control.
7.0 REFERENCES

000.653.3211 Traffic Management

Page 71
ABG

000.653.3315 Hazardous Energy Control
Forms
000.653.F0301 Danger – Don’t’ Use It – Unsafe Tag
000.653.F0311 Barricade Tag – Caution (yellow)
000.653.F0312 Barricade Tag – Danger (red)

Page 72
ABG
BEHAVIOR BASED SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
P
URPOSE 69
SCOPE70
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................70
1.0 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................70
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES...........................................................................................................................................70
2.1 Project/Construction Manager..................................................................................................................70
2.2 Line Management......................................................................................................................................70
2.3 Employees.................................................................................................................................................71
3.0 TRAINING.......................................................................................................................................................71
4.0 HAZARD ELIMINATION OBSERVATION...........................................................................................................71
5.0 DATA COLLECTION AND STATISTICAL COMPARISONS...................................................................................72

Page 73
ABG
PURPOSE
The Hazard Elimination Observation process is a technique used to verify that work is performed efficiently and in
compliance with agreed HSE standards. The hazard identification and elimination process is a system that seeks to
prevent injuries by eliminating hazards. The purpose of this procedure is to identify guidelines and requirements
for carrying out such observations. This procedure will set down the approach to be used on this project. It can be
used in all occupations and their associated tasks.
Conducting quality and accurate safety observations is a critical component in our drive toward ZERO ACCIDENTS.
It guides us through the steps of each job, potential “at risk” behaviors, and assists in the recognition of those
actions that may cause an accident. The Hazard Elimination Observation process is a pro-active approach that
permits us to take action prior to the event and thus avoid loss. It increases employees’ HSE awareness by
involving suitably trained workplace personnel to conduct the safety observations.
SCOPE
The purpose of this procedure is to set out the requirements for completion of the Hazard Elimination
Observations process.
It also lays out the time frame for hazard observations on the project, methods of recording the observations, and
follow up mechanisms.
Observations also provide direct and measurable information on employees’ work practices to identify both safe
and unsafe behaviors.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to both ABG and Contractor personnel.
1.0 GENERAL
Hazard Elimination Observations will be conducted by each line manager/supervisor at the project site.
Training for selected personnel will be undertaken on Hazard Elimination Observations processes.
See Hazard Elimination Observation Form 000.653.0275.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
2.1 Project/Construction Manager
The Project Manager / Site Supervisor are responsible for providing sufficient resources to comply with this
procedure and for assigning responsibility for Hazard Elimination Observation completions to Line Management
and Project Supervision.
2.2 Line Management
Line Management both ABG and contractor are responsible to confirm:

 Observation forms are readily available for their area;

Page 74
ABG
 The frequency of the observations performed for their area of responsibility meet
project requirements;
 Assign responsibility for observation corrective actions needed in their area of
responsibility and verify they are carried out;
 Follow up actions are completed; and
 Review and feedback results of the observations.
ABG and contractor line management are responsible for scheduling and conducting a minimum of one (1) Hazard
Elimination Observation per shift / per day.
2.3 Employees
Each individual is responsible for participating and cooperating with line managers conducting Hazard Elimination
Observations.
ABG personnel shall conduct the Hazard Elimination Observations and consult with Line Management to establish
appropriate corrective actions.
3.0 TRAINING
Appropriate employees will be trained on the Observation Process. The training will define who is trained in
general employee awareness and ensure that all employees involved in the process are trained in the classroom
or on the job.
Types of training will include Management, new employees and refresher.
The training program will include:
 Program objectives and incident metrics reviewed;
 How to conduct the observation;
 How to complete the observation form;
 Teach what the behaviors mean;
 Feedback training and role play (mentor and coach);
 Advise employees to be aware they may be monitored at any time.
4.0 HAZARD ELIMINATION OBSERVATION
Hazard Elimination Observations is an important safety management tool utilized to observe a job or task,
employee behavior, work site conditions, and many other key aspects of daily work activities. All hazards that can
be corrected on the spot should be corrected.
This should be carried out in an open and non-threatening manner and this is best achieved by open discussion
with the person/s doing the job if or not any “at risk” items are discovered during the observation process.
Using the Hazard Elimination Observation’s, the observers must fill in their name, date, and specific job location
information at the top of the form. The observer must then complete the Hazard Elimination Observation specific
columns placing checks in the boxes for any hazards noted during the observation process. No hazard found – No
check marks are required in either column. Any hazard noted that is not immediately corrected shall be listed in

Page 75
ABG
the “List of Remaining Uncorrected Hazards” section and a corrective action assigned in the “Corrective Actions
Taken on Items Listed Above” section of the observation form.
Observations should be conducted as follows:
 Observers can introduce themselves to the person / persons doing the job and
explain the observation process;
 Observers watch work activities and record any identified hazards or at risk activity.
 The observers will speak to the individuals who were observed at the end of the
observation process to provide positive feedback outlining safe work practices
observed and bring an awareness level to those activities that were observed that
had a potential for injury;
 Employees on the crew will then be given the opportunity to make suggestions for
improvement and identify barriers to working safely on the job.
When carrying out any it is important to make this a worthwhile experience for both the observers and the person
carrying out the job. This can be achieved by following some basic rules. These are as follows:
 Set the scene by explaining what you would like to do in an open, honest and friendly
manner;
 Focus on the problem, not the person. Don’t be critical of the person;
 When making written comments don’t use names or apportion blame;
 Keep questions simple and to the point;
 Seek verbal feedback from the person doing the job and listen to what is said;
 Verify understanding by asking questions until it is clear; and
 End on a positive note and try to remain enthusiastic.
Note: The process is a NO NAME – NO BLAME process. The process is fact finding, NOT fault finding so
there is no need to put employee names on the observation forms.
5.0 DATA COLLECTION AND STATISTICAL COMPARISONS
Individual operational departments within ABG, as well as the company as a whole, will compare these
measurements and track results so that numerical and statistical comparisons can be made over time.
The data collected while performing observations will be used to identify barriers to working safely so that they
can be addressed – whether it be procedure changes or purchasing different personal protective equipment etc.
the data will also be tracked as a pro-active measure of safe behavior on the site. Reports and Hazard Elimination
Observation information will be shared with employees at Toolbox Meetings.
Once the trend analysis is complete, appropriate action plans must be developed to address unsafe behaviors.
Action plans are carried out over the course of a set time period and follow-up is necessary to ensure the closure
of all actions listed within the action plan.
Action planning and follow-up needs to include:
 Evaluate unsafe behaviors for trend analysis and prioritize;
 Develop action plan for unsafe behaviors based on comments and feedback from
data sheets;

Page 76
ABG
 Designate responsible parties and time frames within the action plan;
 Define who is responsible for action planning;
 Ensure management support;
 Define a frequency for review of action plans
 Assign accountability for closeout of action plans within the organization;
 Archive action plans.
A copy of the completed Hazard Elimination Observation Form must be forwarded to the Lake Charles, LA. HSE
Department by Wednesday of the following week for the previous week the observations were completed.
Forward all completed Hazard Elimination Observation Forms to the following fax or email:
ABG Health, Safety & Environmental
Attn: Nazar Salman
777 Hwy 397
Lake Charles, LA. 70615
Any person required to take action as a result of the Hazard Elimination Observation process must also
be issued a copy of the observation form. All follow up and corrective action items identified through the
Hazard Elimination Observation process are to be closed out by the end of the shift.

Page 77
HAZARD ELIMINATION OBSERVATION FORM
Name: Date:
Supervisor: Job Number:
Craft: Project Location:
Note: ALL hazards that can be corrected on the spot should be corrected. Hazards that cannot be corrected should be reported to your supervisor or safety representative.
Housekeeping C UC Check Your Vehicles/Mobile Equipment C UC

Area clean Business Group Equipment inspections
Walkways clear Seat belts provided and used
East – 555
Material/equipment properly stored Flagger / spotters utilized
West – 551
Cords/hoses elevated/trip hazards Equipment used properly
Power – 750
Puncture/cut hazards/sharp edges Central – 553 Licenses / certifications
Trash receptacles provided Demo – 561 Fire Protection C UC
Barricades maintained/tagged SES East – 756 Flammables stored properly
SES Central – 748
Rebar caps installed/hole covers Oxygen/combustibles separated
SES West - 749
PPE C UC Containers labeled as to content
Hard hats worn / worn properly Fire extinguishers inspected
Hearing protection Flash arrestors installed
Proper eye protection / worn properly Cylinders secured properly
Proper foot protection Containment of hot work /sparks
C=CORRECTED
Face shield and / or goggles Regulators / Gauges / Bottle carts
UC-UNCORRECTED
Respirators / Fresh air mask / hoses Obstructing Fire / Safety Equip.
Proper gloves Permits/Procedures C UC
Proper protective clothing Work permits in order
Personal flotation devices worn STAs /JSAs complete
Fall Protection C UC Procedures being followed
Harness worn in a proper manner Body Work Positioning C UC
Proper anchorage point used Check only the hazard that Overexertion
Barricades / Perimeter guarding you observed. Proper lifting techniques
Harness straps securely fastened Proper work platform / standing on
Fall protection used correctly Proper body positioning
Fall protection maintained / inspect Body part(s) not in Line of Fire
Excavations C UC
Sloped and shored properly
TOTAL # OF HAZARDS IDENTIFIED
Access / Egress every 25'
Documented Daily Inspection
Scaffolds/Extension Ladders C UC
TOTAL # OF HAZARDS CORRECTED
Built per specification
Proper access/ egress Check if the hazard was
Tagged correctly / current inspection corrected or uncorrected. List of remaining uncorrected hazards:
Proper ladder for the job
Ladder extends past landing by 3 ft.
Properly secured from movement
Hoisting/Lift Equipment C UC
Good condition / current color code Corrective actions taken on items listed above:
Softeners used
Proper rigging techniques used

Tools and Equipment C UC
Maintained in safe condition
Properly carried and stored
Pneumatic / hydraulic hoses /pins Reviewed by Site Management:
Proper tools used for the job Date:
Grinders / Impacts / Hand tools Signature:

ABG
BENZENE AWARENESS
BENZENE AWARENESS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 75
SCOPE76
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................76
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................76
1.1. Exposure Limits..........................................................................................................................................76
2.0 METHODS OF REDUCING EXPOSURE.............................................................................................................76
2.1. Engineering and Work Practices Controls..................................................................................................76
2.2. Respiratory Protection...............................................................................................................................76
2.3. Additional Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).......................................................................................77
3.0 EMPLOYEE TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................77
4.0 REGULATED AREAS........................................................................................................................................77
5.0 EXPOSURE MONITORING...............................................................................................................................78
5.1. Initial Monitoring.......................................................................................................................................78
5.2. Periodic Monitoring...................................................................................................................................78
5.3. Employee Notification...............................................................................................................................78
5.4. Observation of Monitoring........................................................................................................................79
5.5. Atmospheric Testing..................................................................................................................................79
6.0 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE................................................................................................................................79
6.1. Initial and Periodic Medical Evaluations....................................................................................................79
6.2. Medical Evaluations as a Result of Emergency Exposures.........................................................................79
6.3. Medical Records........................................................................................................................................79
7.0 EXPOSURE HAZARDS......................................................................................................................................79
7.1. Routes of Entry..........................................................................................................................................79
7.2. Effects of Overexposure............................................................................................................................80
A. Acute.........................................................................................................................................................80
B. Chronic......................................................................................................................................................80
7.3. First Aid Procedures...................................................................................................................................80
7.4. Physical Data.............................................................................................................................................80

Page 80
ABG
BENZENE AWARENESS
PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to minimize occupational exposure to benzene and meet the requirements of the
OSHA Benzene Standard 29 CFR 1910.1028.
SCOPE
This procedure applies to projects where exposures to benzene can occur. This plan is to be reviewed as part of
the annual corporate assessment, any time that monitoring data indicates there is an increase in exposure levels
or there is a change in a process.
APPLICATION
This procedure will apply to all work places for all project and contract personnel at all project locations.
DEFINITIONS
This procedure contains no unique definitions.
1.1. Exposure Limits
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) 1.0 ppm (parts per million) averaged over 8 hours.
Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL) 5.0 ppm averaged over 15 minutes.
Action Level (AL) - The exposure level at which various parts of the benzene standard are required to be
implemented, for example, medical surveillance and training. The AL is 0.5 ppm averaged over 8 hours.
2.0 METHODS OF REDUCING EXPOSURE
2.1. Engineering and Work Practices Controls
Employer should be aware of Owners contingency plan provisions. Employees must be informed where benzene
is used in host facility and aware of additional plant safety rules.
Where feasible, benzene exposures should be controlled through engineering controls and work practices.
Respirators and protective clothing should be used to control exposures that are intermittent or caused by
emergency conditions and while awaiting engineering controls to be implemented.
2.2. Respiratory Protection
Respiratory Protection shall be NIOSH approved and as outlined below;

Benzene Concentration Respirator* Cartridge
Unknown (i.e., no air Supplied Air Not applicable
sampling information and/or
emergency response for a

Page 81
ABG
BENZENE AWARENESS
release)
Less than 1.0 ppm None required Not applicable
Greater than or equal to 1.0 Half-Mask Air Organic vapor (Black) or
ppm, but less than 10 ppm Purifying organic vapor / acid gas
*Yellow) cartridges
Greater than or equal to 10 Full Face Air Organic vapor (Black) or
ppm, but less than 50 ppm Purifying or organic vapor / acid gas
supplied Air *Yellow) cartridges
Equal to or above 50 ppm Supplied Air Not Applicable
2.3. Additional Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
When liquids containing benzene are present, additional PPE i.e., aprons, chemical suites, gloves, boots, goggles
and face protection shall be used to prevent eye contact and limit dermal exposure. PPE must meet the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.133 and provided at no cost to employees.
3.0 EMPLOYEE TRAINING
All employees working in areas with potential benzene exposures must be properly trained.
Training will be conducted upon initial employment and repeated annually or any time there is a change in this
procedure.
Employees must receive additional training if there is a change in or addition of a process or operation that
creates the potential for exposure. The project HSE department is responsible for tracking and maintaining
employee training records.
Training will include the specific hazards of benzene, the contents of the benzene standard medical surveillance
program and the appropriate protective measurements to control benzene exposures during normal operations
and emergency situations.
Area emergency alarms and evacuation routes, the location of emergency eye wash stations and showers and
emergency phone numbers are to be included as part of the employees pre-job STA.
4.0 REGULATED AREAS
Potential locations where employees may be exposed to Benzene are:

 Petroleum refining sites
 Tank Gauging (tanks at producing, pipeline and refining operations
 Field maintenance
Toxicity, Color, Odor, Solubility, Flammability and Toxic by-products are characteristics of Benzene.
Whenever airborne concentrations of benzene in an area or specific operation exceed or can be reasonably
expected to exceed 1.0 ppm the areas and or operations are to be identified and regulated. The project HSE
Manager is responsible for contacting the client HSE department to ascertain area(s) or operations that are or
have the potential to exceed 1.0 ppm level.

Page 82
ABG
BENZENE AWARENESS
The project HSE Manager shall identify the areas or operations on a facility plot plan. The plot plan is to be
included as part of the New Hire Orientation program, Hazard Communication Program and Benzene Exposure
training module.
The following are examples of activities that can be reasonably expected to be a Benzene Regulated Area:
 Venting, draining, blinding or opening process equipment and piping containing or
having contained greater than I0% benzene.
 Unplanned releases or spills greater than 5 gallons of liquids which contain 0. I% or
more of benzene (i.e., gasoline, crude oil, crude ethyl benzene, mixed xylenes).
To limit access to authorized personnel, the regulated area should be posted with the appropriate warning signs.
Warning signs should contain the following warning:
DANGER
BENZENE
CANCER HAZARD
FLAMMABLE - NO SMOKING
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION REQUIRED
Once established, an area will remain regulated until monitoring indicates the concentration of benzene in the air
is less than 1.0 ppm.
Only employees trained in the hazards of benzene are permitted to enter a benzene regulated area.
All personnel entering a regulated area will wear all appropriate respiratory protection and protective clothing.
5.0 EXPOSURE MONITORING
Personal exposure monitoring will be coordinated by the Project HSE Department.

5.1. Initial Monitoring
Initial personal monitoring will be performed to determine representative exposures for each job function in
which exposures to benzene may exceed the OSHA action limit or short-term exposure limit.
5.2. Periodic Monitoring
For job functions in which initial monitoring indicates benzene exposure above the action level, a periodic
monitoring program will be established.
Periodic Monitoring will be completed depending on exposure levels. For employees who are or may be exposed
to benzene at or above the action level 30 or more days per year -above the PEL 20 or more days-for employees
who have been exposed to more than 10 PPM of benzene for 30 or more days in a year.
 Periodic monitoring will be conducted semi-annually when engineering controls or
work practices do not reduce benzene exposure below the PEL or STEL.
 Periodic monitoring will be conducted annually when engineering controls or work
practices do not reduce benzene exposures below the action level.

Page 83
ABG
BENZENE AWARENESS
5.3. Employee Notification
Each employee monitored will be notified in writing of his/her personal monitoring result within 15 days of the
receipt of analytical results.
In the event of overexposure, the individual will be notified of any corrective action through his/her supervisor.
5.4. Observation of Monitoring
The monitoring process may be observed by all employees whom the monitoring affects.
5.5. Atmospheric Testing
Benzene specific Draeger tube, bag sample and gas chromatograph (GC) analysis shall be used to conduct
atmospheric testing. Atmospheric testing will be conducted for confined spaces that have contained benzene or
other areas that have been identified as benzene regulated area.
6.0 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE
6.1. Initial and Periodic Medical Evaluations
Employees working in areas who have potential exposure to benzene shall receive pre-employment and periodic
medical evaluations.
If initial or periodic medical evaluations indicate an abnormal condition, further evaluations will be given and
referrals made as determined by the project physician.
Medical evaluations will be done periodically for individuals that have been identified as having benzene
exposures above 10 ppm for 30 or more days per year.
Health effects of Benzene include eye and skin irritations and short term breathless, Irritability, Euphoric, etc.
6.2. Medical Evaluations as a Result of Emergency Exposures
In the event of exposure, without the use of proper respiratory protection, to an unforeseen release of benzene-
containing vapor or liquid, the employee shall provide a urine specimen to the Project HSE Department. The
specimen must be collected no sooner than 6 hours and no later than 8 hours following the exposure.
If the urine specimen indicates an abnormal condition further evaluation will be performed and referrals made as
determined by the project physician.
6.3. Medical Records
Medical records associated with benzene medical surveillance will be maintained by the Project HSE Department.
An employee’s medical records shall be made available to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected
employees and designated employee representatives.
7.0 EXPOSURE HAZARDS
Benzene is listed as a carcinogen; therefore any exposure to benzene should be avoided.

Page 84
ABG
BENZENE AWARENESS
Benzene liquid is highly flammable and vapors may form explosive mixtures in air. Fire extinguishers must be
readily available. Smoking is prohibited in areas where benzene is used or stored.
7.1. Routes of Entry
Inhalation is the primary route of entry into the body. Exposures may occur during accidental spills and release or
in/near confined spaces. These exposures typically can be experienced in operations such as sampling, liquid
draining and equipment maintenance.
Skin Contact presents a possible route of absorption, but generally at a much lower rate than through the
respiratory system. Benzene is poorly absorbed through the skin, but can find its way into the blood stream
through cuts, cores, etc. Benzene is a solvent and an irritant to the skin. The primary effect of skin contact is
defatting, resulting in dermatitis.
Ingestion of benzene is a remote form of exposure and is mainly due to poor personal hygiene practices such as
failure to wash hands before eating, chewing, dipping or smoking.
7.2. Effects of Overexposure
A. Acute
Overexposure to high concentrations of benzene may result in feelings of breathlessness, irritability, euphoria, or
light headiness. Irritation of the eyes, nose and respiratory tract may be experienced. Headaches, dizziness,
nausea, or intoxication may develop. Severe exposure may lead to convulsions and loss of consciousness.
B. Chronic
Repeated or prolonged exposure to benzene, without the use of personal protective equipment, may result in
various blood disorders. Anemia and leukemia, a fatal cancer of the blood, are examples of adverse effects that
may result from exposure to benzene.
7.3. First Aid Procedures
Remove exposed employee to an uncontaminated atmosphere. Wash exposed skin with soapy water. Remove
benzene wetted clothing immediately. If benzene is ingested, do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention.
7.4. Physical Data
Color Clear and colorless

Odor Characteristic pleasant acrid odor at low concentrations;
disagreeable at higher concentrations.
Odor Threshold Greater than 4.6 PPM
Explosive Limits 1.4 - 8%
Boiling point 176 F
Specific Gravity 0.879 Floats on water
Vapor Density 2.8 Heavier than air

Page 85
ABG
BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 75
SCOPE82
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................82
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................82
2.0 EXPOSURE CATEGORIES.................................................................................................................................83
2.1 Category I.....................................................................................................................................................83
2.2 Category II....................................................................................................................................................83
3.0 ENGINEERING CONTROLS..............................................................................................................................83
4.0 WORK PRACTICE CONTROLS..........................................................................................................................83
5.0 PROCEDURE...................................................................................................................................................84
5.1 Limited Access............................................................................................................................................84
5.2 Category I and II Employees.......................................................................................................................84
5.3 Smoking/Drinking.......................................................................................................................................84
5.4 Housekeeping Guidelines...........................................................................................................................85
5.5 Regulated Waste........................................................................................................................................85
5.6 Vaccination, Post Exposure Evaluation, and Follow-Up.............................................................................85
5.7 Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow Up...................................................................................................86
5.8 Information Provided to the Healthcare Professional................................................................................86
5.9 Healthcare Professional’s Written Opinion................................................................................................86
5.10 Incident Evaluation....................................................................................................................................86
6.0 RECORDKEEPING............................................................................................................................................87
7.0 INFORMATION AND TRAINING........................................................................................................................87
8.0 ATTACHMENTS..............................................................................................................................................87

Page 86
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for reducing occupational exposure to and transmission of Hepatitis “B”
Virus (HBV), Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV), and other infectious diseases. “Universal precautions” as
advocated by the Centers for Disease Control will be made an integral part of these exposure and control
measures. It also provides necessary precautions to all employees who could be “reasonably anticipated” to
come into contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials as the result of performing their job duties.
SCOPE

 Exposure Categories
 Engineering Controls
 Work Practice Controls
 Procedure
 Recordkeeping
 Information and Training
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Occupational Exposure – Reasonably anticipated skin, eye, mucous membrane, or parenteral (piercing mucous
membranes or the skin barrier through a needle stick, human bite, cut, abrasion, and avulsion) contact with blood
or other potentially infectious materials that may result from the performance of an employee’s duties.
Other Potentially Infectious Materials – Any body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood and all body fluids
in situations where it is difficult or impossible to differentiate between body fluids and any unfixed tissue or organ
(other than intact skin).
This practice provides guidelines for the necessary precautions to be taken by all employees who have the
potential of coming in contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials while performing their job
functions. This practice is specifically designed to reduce the occupational exposure to and transmission of HBV,
HIV, and other infectious diseases. Universal precautions, as advocated by the Centers for Disease Control, will be
made an integral part of these exposure control and prevention measures.
When the normal work routine involves no exposure to blood, body fluids, or tissues, an employee’s exposure
would not be considered occupational. Employees who perform janitorial services will wear rubber or latex
gloves at all times when cleaning or emptying trash cans as a means of protection against normal bacteria. Tasks

Page 87
ABG
that involve handling implements or utensils, use of public or shared bathroom facilities or telephones, and
personal contacts such as handshaking are also not considered an occupational exposure.
EXPOSURE CATEGORIES
This exposure classification applies to tasks rather than to individuals when, during their daily activities,
individuals may move from one exposure category to another as they perform various tasks.
Category I
Tasks That Involve Exposure to Blood, Body Fluids, or Tissues

Job-related tasks with the potential for mucous membrane or skin contact with blood, body fluid, or tissue, or for
spills or splashes of such, are Category I tasks. Use of universal precautions is required for employee(s) engaged in
Category I tasks. Employees included in this category are first-aid attendants, medics, nurses, physicians’
assistants, and qualified HSE representatives.
Category II
Tasks That Involve No Exposure to Blood, Body Fluids, or Tissues, but May Require Performing Unplanned
Category I Tasks
The normal work routine involves no exposures to blood, body fluid, or tissues; but the potential for exposure
exists. Protective measures must be readily available for employee(s) engaged in Category II tasks. Employees
included in this category are secretaries, clerks, and those listed in Attachment 01.
ENGINEERING CONTROLS
Engineering controls will be used as the primary method of reducing employee exposure to harmful substances.
At a minimum, the following controls will be implemented:
 Isolation or containment of the hazard
 Disposable, puncture-resistant containers that are
closeable and leak-proof on the sides and bottom and
properly labeled with the universal BIOHAZARD symbol
will be used for urine, used needles, blades, sharps, and
other one-time use implements of treatment. These
containers will be placed in the use area.
 Hand-washing facilities with anti-bacterial soap and running water will be made
available. If running water cannot be supplied, germicide hand wipes will be
provided.
 Appropriate and accessible personal protective equipment (PPE) will be used.
WORK PRACTICE CONTROLS
Work practice controls will be established to reduce the likelihood of exposure when a task is being performed.
Examples of some work practice controls include the following:
 Universal precautions will be in effect in all occupational exposures.

Page 88
ABG
 Recapping of needles or other sharps by hand is not allowed.

 Pipetting or suctioning by mouth (siphoning) is forbidden.
 Storing food or drink is forbidden in areas of potential occupational exposure.
 Eating, drinking, and smoking are forbidden in areas of potential occupational
exposure.
PROCEDURE
Limited Access
There will be limited access to areas where there is a potential for reasonably anticipated contact with blood or
other potentially infectious materials. Areas where the difference between body fluid types is difficult or
impossible to determine will be considered limited access areas.
Category I and II Employees
Category I employees and Category II employees (where the potential for exposure exists) will routinely use
applicable universal precautions during patient contact, or handling of body fluids; appropriate (PPE) will be
provided for protection against an occupational exposure at no cost to the employee. Appropriate equipment is
defined to mean equipment that does not permit blood or other potentially infectious material to contact, pass
through, or be absorbed onto the employee’s clothes, undergarments, skin, eyes, mouth, or other mucous
membranes.
PPE will be removed before leaving the work area and placed in an appropriately marked container for disposal,
storage, or decontamination. PPE will be repaired and replaced as needed to maintain its effectiveness. PPE
includes, but is not limited to, gloves, gowns, laboratory coats, face shields, masks, eye protection, mouthpieces,
resuscitation bags, pocket masks, or other artificial ventilation devices.
Disposable gloves (rubber or latex surgical type) must be properly worn to protect skin and mucous membrane
when in contact with blood and body fluids. Gloves will be changed and hands washed between each first-aid
case (patient).
To prevent exposure of mucous membranes of the mouth, eyes, and nose, masks (surgical type) and protective
eye wear or face shields will be worn during procedures that are likely to generate droplets of blood or other body
fluids.
Gowns or aprons will be worn during procedures that are likely to generate splashes of blood and other body
fluids. Hands and other skin surfaces will be washed immediately after gloves are removed.
Saliva has not been implicated in any blood borne pathogen; however, protective instruments such as
mouthpieces, resuscitating (ambu) bags, or other ventilation devices will be available for use in areas where the
need for mouth-to-mouth resuscitation is predictable. Ventilating devices will be fitted or contain one-way valves.
Ventilation devices that do not contain one-way valves will not be used.
Category I and II employees who have skin lesions or weeping dermatitis should refrain from all direct first-aid
(patient) care and from handling first-aid-type equipment until the condition clears up.

Page 89
ABG
Employees in Category I and II environments who are pregnant are at greater risk to exposure and should be
especially familiar with and strictly adhere to these precautions to minimize the risk of bloodborne pathogen
exposure.
Smoking/Drinking
Smoking, drinking, eating, applying any type of cosmetic or chapping balm to face or mouth, and inserting or
handling contact lenses are strictly prohibited in areas identified as having occupational exposure.
Housekeeping Guidelines
The HSE Representative or healthcare person will have a written schedule for cleaning and methods of
decontamination for areas of occupational exposure. This schedule must be based upon the location within the
facility, type of surface and implements to be cleaned, types of contaminants to expect, and the types of tasks
being performed in the area. The written schedule will include the following as a minimum:
 Implements of treatment, pails, bins, containers, or similar receptacles (including
protective coverings and work surfaces) must be cleaned and decontaminated after
contact with blood or other potentially infectious material and at the end of the work
shift.
 Glassware that has broken in the treatment area must be picked up mechanically
and not by hand (for example, with a dust pan and broom or brush with nylon
bristles).
The mechanics of cleaning must be conducted using forceps-type implements. All items and spills must be
cleaned with a germicide or a solution of sodium hypochlorite (a 1:8 dilution of household bleach).
Regulated Waste
Regulated waste means liquid or semi-liquid blood or other potentially infectious contaminated materials that
would release blood or other potentially infectious material in a liquid or semi-liquid state if compressed. Certain
practices regarding the handling, disposal, and storage of contaminated sharps and other regulated waste are as
follows:
 Contaminated, reusable sharps will not be stored or processed in a manner that
allows employees to reach them by hand. The engineering of the storage method
must be such that when the lid is lifted, the reusables will extract themselves from
the container. Throwaway, contaminated sharps must be discarded immediately in
containers as described under Engineering Controls. During use, these containers
must be easily accessible, kept upright, replaced routinely, and not allowed to be
overfilled. When containers of contaminated sharps and implements are moved, the
containers must be securely closed to prevent spillage or leakage of the regulated
waste.
 Contaminated laundry must be handled as little as possible and only by employees
who are wearing appropriate PPE. It must be containerized and in appropriately
labeled BIOHAZARD or “red” leak-proof bags and must not be washed or rinsed at

Page 90
ABG
the project/site of use. For purposes of offsite regulated waste disposal, contact
your client environmental contact or Business Unit/Line HSE Lead.
Vaccination, Post Exposure Evaluation, and Follow-Up
The HSE Representative (or designee) will select a licensed healthcare professional (as defined by state law) to
administer the Hepatitis B vaccination and provide post-exposure medical evaluation and follow up. Employees in
Category I and Category II who test negative for HBV antibodies must be offered the Hepatitis B vaccination series
within 10 working days of initial assignment. Employees who decline the vaccination must sign a Waiver of
Hepatitis B Vaccination (refer to Attachment 02), indicating their choice; however, if the employee later chooses
to be inoculated with the Hepatitis B vaccination, he/she may do so at no cost. The HSE Representative (or
designee) will place the signed waiver in the employee’s confidential medical file. The HSE Representative (or
designee) will be responsible for supervision of this Program.
Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow Up
The selected healthcare professional will develop a procedure to provide post-exposure evaluation and follow-up
to employees who report an exposure incident. This procedure will include the following:
 Documentation of the routes of entry and circumstances surrounding the exposure
incident
 Identification of the source individual, if feasible
 Testing of the source individual’s blood, if consented to
 Post-exposure medical treatment, if indicated
 Counseling
Information Provided to the Healthcare Professional
The HSE Manager (or designee) will provide the healthcare professional who administers the Hepatitis B
vaccination and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up with the following information:
 A copy of the bloodborne pathogens standard
 A description of the exposed employee’s duties as these relate to the exposure
incident
 Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and circumstances under which exposure
occurred
 Results of the source individual’s blood testing, if available
 All medical records relevant to the appropriate treatment of the employee, including
vaccination status, which are the employer’s responsibility to maintain.
Healthcare Professional’s Written Opinion
The HSE Manager (or designee) will be responsible for obtaining and providing the employee with a copy of the
evaluating licensed healthcare professional’s written opinion within 15 days of completion of the evaluation. The
original will be placed in the employee’s confidential medical file by the HSE Manager (or designee). The written
opinion will be according to the requirements of local or regional legislation and/or client requirements.

Page 91
ABG
Incident Evaluation
Exposure incidents must be reported immediately to the exposed employee’s supervisor. The supervisor must
report the exposure to the HSE Manager (or designee) as soon as possible. With the same urgency, the HSE
Manager (or designee) must conduct and document an “exposure incident evaluation” containing at least the
following information:
 The circumstances under which exposure occurred
 The route(s) of entry
 Engineering controls in place at the time of the exposure incident
 Work practice controls in place at the time of the exposure incident
 PPE or clothing in use at the time of the exposure incident
 Any failures of the above controls at the time of the incident
 Identification, if possible, of the source individual
 Recommendations for avoidance of future exposure incidents in similar situations
RECORDKEEPING
The Project/Site Manager (or designee) must establish and maintain medical records to be kept confidential and
may not be disclosed without written consent of the employee. All medical records of exposure incidence will be
reviewed as required by the doctor of record and maintained for a period of at least 30 years past employment in
accordance with local or regional legislation and/or client requirements. The following information is to be
included on these records:
 The name and Social Security Number of the employee
 All Hepatitis B vaccination records and medical reports
 A copy of examinations, medical testing, and follow-up procedures
 A copy of the healthcare professional’s written opinion
 A copy of information provided to the healthcare professionals
Records will be maintained for a period of 3 years from the date of each session.
INFORMATION AND TRAINING
Employees who have been identified as having the potential for occupational exposure (exposure Categories I and
II) will participate in a training program (refer to Attachment 03) at no cost to the employee and during work
hours.
This training will be provided at the time of initial assignment to tasks where occupational exposure may take
place.
Employees will be provided retraining within 1 year of their previous training.
ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Employee Codes and Titles

Page 92
ABG
Attachment 02 Waiver of hepatitis B Vaccination

Page 93
ABG
WAIVER OF HEPATITIS B VACCINATION
I _____________________________________________, UNDERSTAND THAT DUE TO MY
POTENTIAL OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO BLOOD OR OTHER POTENTIALLY INFECTIOUS
MATERIALS, I MAY BE AT RISK OF ACQUIRING THE HEPATITIS “B” VIRUS (HBV) INFECTION. I
HAVE BEEN GIVEN THE OPPORTUNITY TO BE VACCINATED WITH HEPATITIS “B” VACCINE AT
NO CHARGE TO ME. HOWEVER, I DECLINE THE HEPATITIS “B” VACCINATION AT THIS TIME. I
UNDERSTAND THAT BY DECLINING THIS VACCINE, I CONTINUE TO BE AT RISK OF ACQUIRING
HEPATITIS “B”, A SERIOUS DISEASE.
IF, IN THE FUTURE, I CONTINUE TO HAVE OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO BLOOD OR OTHER
POTENTIALLY INFECTIOUS MATERIALS AND I WANT TO BE VACCINATED WITH HEPATITIS “B”
VACCINE, I CAN RECEIVE THE VACCINATION SERIES AT NO CHARGE TO ME.
EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE DATE
WITNESS DATE

Page 94
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 89
SCOPE90
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................90
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................90
1.0 Engineering Controls......................................................................................................................................91
2.0 Work Practices / PPE......................................................................................................................................91
3.0 Atmospheric Testing......................................................................................................................................92
4.0 Regulated Areas.............................................................................................................................................93
5.0 Air Sampling...................................................................................................................................................93
6.0 Medical Surveillance......................................................................................................................................94
7.0 Employee Information and Training..............................................................................................................95
8.0 Recordkeeping...............................................................................................................................................96
9.0 Butadiene Periodic Examinations..................................................................................................................96
9.1 Initial Examination Content.......................................................................................................................96
9.2 Annual Examination Content (minimum required)....................................................................................97
9.3 Emergency Examination Content..............................................................................................................97

Page 95
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
PURPOSE
This program has been developed to standardize work practices, set forth engineering practice, industrial hygiene
and medical standards involving the potential exposure to 1, 3-butadiene (CAS # 106-99-0) containing materials.
This program complies with 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication, 29 CFR 1910.1051 - 1, 3-Butadiene
and in accordance with sound industrial hygiene principles.
SCOPE
All ABG employees, Sub contractors and visitors whose work may involve exposure to 1, 3butadiene (1, 3-
butadiene > 0.1 percent) could be subject to possible exposure.
Butadiene may be present at refineries and petrochemical plants. Butadiene is used in the production of styrene-
butadiene rubber and polybutadiene rubber for the tire industry. Other uses include copolymer latexes for carpet
backing and paper coating, as well as resins and polymers for pipes and automobile and appliance parts. It is also
used as an intermediate in the production of such chemicals as fungicides.
Butadiene may also be found in some process stream lines and equipment within many of our client Petro
chemical facilities.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Action Level means an airborne concentration of 1, 3-butadiene of 0.5 ppm calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted
average.
Butadiene Characteristics: Butadiene is a flammable, colorless gas with a mile, aromatic odor at room
temperature and pressure. Butadiene may also exist as a cryogenic liquid. Butadiene is insoluble in water, stale
and reacts with oxidizers.
1, 3-butadiene: refers to liquid or gaseous 1, 3-butadiene. It includes 1, 3-butadiene contained in liquid mixtures
and the 1, 3-butadiene vapors released by these liquids.
Employee exposure: means exposure to airborne 1, 3-butadiene, which would occur if the employee were not
using respiratory protective equipment.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): refers to the concentrations to which an employee may be exposed and not
experience any adverse health effects.
Time-Weighted Average (TWA): refers to a concentration of 1, 3-butadiene in excess of one part of 1, 3-
butadiene per million parts of air (1 ppm) as an 8-hour TWA.
Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL): refers to an airborne concentration of 1, 3-butadiene in excess of five (5) ppm
as averaged over any 15 minute period.
Regulated Area: refers to any area where airborne concentrations of 1,3-butadiene exceed or can reasonably be
expected to exceed the permissible exposure limits, either the 8-hour TWA of 1 ppm or the STEL of 5 ppm for 15
minutes

Page 96
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
Engineering Controls
Breathing very high levels of butadiene for a short time can cause central nervous system effects, blurred vision,
nausea, fatigue, headache, decreased blood pressure and pulse rate as well as unconsciousness. There are no
recorded cases of accidental exposures at high levels that have caused death in humans, however this can occur.
Breathing lower levels of butadiene may cause irritation of the eyes, nose and throat. Skin contact with liquefied
butadiene can cause irritation and frostbite. Butadiene is a carcinogen.
The following task(s) involve potential exposures at or above the action level for 1.3-butadiene:
 Welders, Boilermakers and Pipefitters working around handling or sampling of
catalyst in Butadiene areas. These workers are required to don appropriate PPE for
protection against butadiene.
 Opening flanges, exchangers, piping systems or performing first line breaks on
equipment. (Appropriate PPE and respiratory protection is required.)
 Entering confined spaces or other regulated where the concentration of butadiene is
known to be present.
The following engineering controls may be used:

 A leak prevention, detection, and repair program (Environmental Dept).
 The use of pump exposure control technology such as, but not limited to, mechanical
double sealed or seal-less pumps.
 Closed-loop quality control sampling systems. Failure to properly use these systems
may result in personnel exposure. Any malfunction of these systems should be
reported immediately to the Operations Shift Supervisor.
 When engineering controls are deemed infeasible or do not reduce the exposure
below the action level, respiratory protection and standardized work practices shall
be implemented.
Fire extinguishers should be readily available in areas where butadiene is present of where butadiene may be
released.
1.0 Work Practices / PPE
Eye and skin protection should be worn where exposures to liquid butadiene may occur. Respirators may be
required where exposures are above the permissible exposure limit, and emergency respirators may be required
where releases could occur. Contact lenses should not be worn when working with this chemical.
Equipment preparation for maintenance shall be the responsibility of the Operations Department.
Equipment shall be rendered as free as possible of 1, 3-butadiene containing material prior to opening for
maintenance.
Processes and equipment containing 1, 3-butadiene shall not be depressured, vented, or drained to atmosphere.
Use of the Flare Header shall be considered in each circumstance prior to depressuring, venting, or draining.
For those circumstances when 1, 3-butadiene containing equipment must be opened , drained, vented, or
depressured to atmosphere the following considerations must be taken:

Page 97
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
 Affected personnel must wear appropriate respiratory protection and protective

clothing.
 Operations personnel shall be responsible for establishing a Regulated Area as
outlined in Section 4.0.
 Near by personnel shall be evacuated from the affected area, and Hot Work
suspended in the affected work areas.
 All 1, 3-butadiene-containing materials shall be contained and residual immediately
removed form the area.
Failure to follow the above listed practices may result in violation of State and Federal Safety and Environmental
regulations. Willful violation of this safety procedure by any Refinery employee or contractor will result in
disciplinary action.
Any respiratory protection will comply with 29 CFR 1910.134. If a cartridge respirator is used, a label must be
attached to each filter element indicating the date and time the filter was first installed on the respirator. Organic
Vapor or Butadiene cartridges must be used on the cartridge respirators.
Respiratory protection for 1, 3-butadiene-containing materials shall be selected according to atmospheric testing
and in accordance with the following table:
Atmospheric Respiratory Protection
Concentration
0.5 - 10 ppm Half-mask chemical cartridge (cartridges changed
every 3 hours) or supplied air
10 - 50 ppm Full-face chemical cartridge (cartridges changed
every (1) hour) or supplied air
50 -1000 ppm Full-face supplied air pressure demand mode or
other positive pressure
Unknown Full-face supplied air in pressure demand or other
positive pressure mode with escape pack
For line breaking operations or those tasks involving 1,3-butadiene containing liquids in which a splash potential
exists, a chemical protective suit including eye/facial protection, shall be utilized in conjunction with respiratory
protection.
Disposable Kappler “CPF III” chemical protective suit for 1, 3- butadiene containing materials should be requested
for any ABG employees that may be working around Butadiene.
If contaminated, they should be discarded immediately per customer procedures.
2.0 Atmospheric Testing
ABG will be responsible for ensuring that Atmospheric Testing for 1, 3-butadiene has been conducted in areas
where exposure is possible
Atmospheric testing for 1, 3-butadiene may be accomplished through the use of colorimetric detection tubes.

Page 98
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
Only qualified personnel shall perform line break atmospheric testing for 1, 3- butadiene by use of colorimetric
detection tubes (i.e., Draeger tubes).
3.0 Regulated Areas
ABG and all ABG employees should be aware of the owner’s contingency plan provisions. Employees must be
informed where butadiene is used in the host facility and made aware of additional plant safety rules.
Exposure Limits
Organization
OSHA 1 ppm Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
OSHA 5 ppm for 15 minute(s) Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL)
1 ppm Recommended Exposure Limit (REL) for 8-hour Time Weighted
NIOSH
Average (TWA)
Regulated Areas shall be established whenever job tasks (line breaking, depressurizing, etc.) result in or can
reasonably be expected to create airborne concentrations above either the TWA of 1.0 ppm or the STEL of
5.0 ppm.
Regulated Areas shall be defined by use of Danger Tape (color coded red/black or worded DANGER DO NOT
ENTER) and appropriate signs.
Signs shall be worded and consistent with the following format:
DANGER
REGULATED AREA
1, 3-BUTADIENE
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION REQUIRED
NO SMOKING
The size and boundaries of the Regulated Area shall be determined by atmospheric testing, wind conditions and
prior experiences.
Smoking is prohibited in areas where butadiene is present or where butadiene may be released and will not be
authorized in or near REGULATED AREAS
4.0 Air Sampling
Participation in 1, 3-butadiene air sampling is based on federal regulations, sound Industrial Hygiene practice and
prior air sampling data. All exposure monitoring will comply with 29 CFR1910.1051 (d).
1, 3-butadiene air sampling for all other field personnel is done on an as needed basis.
All 1, 3-butadiene air samples shall be collected and analyzed in accordance with NIOSH Method 1024 - 1,3-
Butadiene.
All 1, 3-butadiene air samples, 8 hour Time-Weighted Average, Short Term Exposure Limit, taken for personnel
exposure measurement shall be collected by active or passive Sampling.

Page 99
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
For short-term exposure passive sampling, all data that exceeds the action limit must be confirmed via active
sampling or with a direct reading instrument.
Air sampling results shall be verbally provided to affected employees within 15 working days of receipt of
laboratory analysis for either routine monitoring or monitoring from overexposure.
Employees or their representative have the opportunity to observe any monitoring of employee exposure to 1, 3-
butadiene.
5.0 Medical Surveillance
Medical Surveillance Program shall be administered by a PRE DETERMINED Occupational Medical Facility. If
needed, a medical screening and surveillance program will be provided for any affected ABG employees.
Employees within the Butadiene Regulated areas are to be included in this medical surveillance program
1, 3-butadiene (BD) is a probable human carcinogen believed to increase the risk of cancers of the
lymphohematopoietic system (leukemia, non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma and anemia), as well as potential reproductive
toxicity.
All examination and test fees will be paid for by ABG. If additional testing is negative, approval from the workers’
compensation or medical service provider will be required. Testing or follow-up procedures outside the range of
the Butadiene exposure examination will be the responsibility of the employee.
All examinations are to be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician and all laboratory tests
are to be conducted by an accredited laboratory.
Any employee using a respirator must comply with all of the requirements identified in the ABG Respiratory
Protection Policy.
Medical screening will be provided as follows:
 An initial physical examination if twelve months or more have elapsed since the last
physical examination conducted as a part of a medical screening program for BD
exposure.
 Before assuming duties by employee in a job with a known potential for BD
exposure.
 At least every three years after the initial physical examination (all employees have
annual medical exams).
 At the discretion of the physician or other health professional reviewing the annual
health questionnaire/ history and CBC.
 At the time of employee reassignment to an area where exposure to BD is below the
action level, if the employee’s past exposure history does not meet the criteria for
continued coverage in the screening and surveillance program and if twelve months
or more have elapsed since the last physical examination.
 At termination of employment if twelve months or more have elapsed since the last
physical examination.
 Following an emergency situation, as quickly as possible, but no later than forty-eight
hours past exposure.

Page 100
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
Medical Screening may include, an Initial Examination to be done before the assuming duties in a job with BD
exposure, Annual Examinations, and an Emergency Examination must be done when an employee is exposed to
BD in an emergency situation within 48 hours.
When the results of the medical screening indicate abnormalities of the hematopoietic or reticuloendothelial
systems for which a non-occupational cause is not readily apparent, the examining physician may refer the
employee to an appropriate specialist for further evaluation and will make available the results of the medical
screening to the specialist after consultation with the Medical Director. The specialist will determine the
appropriate content for the medical evaluation.
ABG will provide the following information to the physician or other licensed health care professional.
 A copy of the standard.
 A description of the affected employee’s duties as they relate to the BD exposure.
 The employee’s actual or representative BD exposure level during employment
tenure, including documented exposures incurred in an emergency situation.
 A description of pertinent personal protective equipment used or to be used.
 Information, (when available,) from previous employment related medical
evaluations of the affected employee
For each medical evaluation the physician must provide a written opinion to the employer and the employee
within fifteen business days of the evaluation, which will be limited to the following:
 The occupationally pertinent results of the medical evaluation.
 A medical opinion concerning whether the employee has any detected medical
conditions which would place the employee’s health at risk of material impairment
from exposure to BD.
 Any recommended limitations upon the employee’s exposure to BD.
 A statement that the employee has been informed of the results of the medical
evaluation and any medical condition resulting from BD exposure that may require
further explanation of treatment.
When the results of the medical screening indicate abnormalities of the hematopoietic of reticuloendothelial
systems for which a non-occupational cause is not readily apparent, the examining physician may refer the
employee to an appropriate specialist for future evaluation after consultation with the Refinery’s workers’
compensation medical services provider. Results of the medical screening should be made available to the
specialist and the specialist will determine the appropriate content for the medical evaluation.
ABG will maintain an accurate record for each employee subject to medical screening and surveillance. The
record will include the following:
 The name and social security number of the employee.
 Physician’s written opinions.
 A copy of the information provided to the physician.
 Medical screening and surveillance records will be maintained for each employee for
the duration of employment plus thirty years.

Page 101
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
 When the employer ceases to do business, the employer will transfer records to the
successor employer.
6.0 Employee Information and Training
Training should be provided on the health hazards and any use or handling requirements for butadiene at time of
initial assignment and annually.
Employees will be made aware of the hazards of 1,3-butadiene during initial training, when assigned to a unit
where 1,3-butadiene could be present, or when performing non-routine jobs in which they may become exposed
to 1,3-butadiene.
Training will comply with both 29 CFR 1910.1200 and 29 CFR 1910.1051 (l).
Employees who may be exposed to levels of 1, 3-butadiene above the action level or STEL, will have records
maintained of their training along with a record of the contents of the training to ensure the employees are
participating in the training. This training will be conducted on an annual basis as a minimum. Employees
will have to demonstrate they have understood the training.
Employees may access the butadiene standard by requesting a copy from the ABG Corporate Safety Department.
Employees will be instructed of all evacuation routes and assembly areas at the on site orientation
7.0 Recordkeeping
Air monitoring and medical records shall be retained in compliance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 and 29 CFR 1910.1051
(m).
8.0 Butadiene Periodic Examinations
8.1 Initial Examination Content
Health History (respiratory questionnaire): obtain information related to hematopoietic and reticuloendothelial
systems and reproductive difficulties.
CBC with differential and platelet count, including:
 Leukocyte count with differential
 Quantitative thrombocyte count
 Hematocrit
 Hemoglobin
 Erythrocyte count
 Erythrocyte indices
 MCV
 MCH
 MCHC
Physical Examination should be directed at identification of signs of lymphohematopoietic disorders, including

lymph node enlargement, splenomegaly, hepatomegaly, and skin.

Page 102
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
Appropriate additional tests will be performed as necessary in the opinion of the examining physician, as a result
of alterations in the components of the blood or other signs which may be related to butadiene exposure. These
tests may include:
Blood Chemistry including:
 Glucose
 Sodium
 Potassium
 Chloride
 Blood Urea Nitrogen
 Creatinine
 BUN/Creatine Ration
 Uric Acid
 Phosphate
 Calcium
 Cholesterol
 High Density Lipoprotein (HDL)
 Triglycerides
 Albumin
 Globulin
 Alb/Glob Ratio
 Total Protein
 Total Bilirubin
 Alkaline Phosphatase
 Transaminase, SGO (SGOT)
 Transaminase, SPP (SGPT)
 L.D.H.
 Urinalysis with microscopic evaluation
 Stool for occult blood
 Chest x-ray, PA & LAT
 Audiogram
 Pulmonary function
 Resting EKG
 Stress EKG if age forty, or above
 Vision, near distant and color
 Tonometry if age forty, or above
8.2 Annual Examination Content (minimum required)
 Health History (respiratory questionnaire)

 CBC with differential and platelet count

Page 103
ABG
BUTADIENE AWARENESS
8.3 Emergency Examination Content
CBC and differential with a platelet count within forty-eight hours of exposure and then monthly for three
months.
Physical examination if the employee reports blurred vision, coughing, drowsiness, nausea, headache, or irritation
of eyes, nose, throat, lungs or skin.
Other testing should be done at the discretion of the physician.
Continued employee participation in the medical screening and surveillance program will be at the discretion of
the physician

Page 104
ABG
CADMIUM POLICY & PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................... 98
SCOPE99
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................99
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................99
1.1 Hexavalent Chromium.............................................................................................................................100
A. Welding, Cutting, Burning........................................................................................................................100
B. Plasma and Air Arc Cutting and Gouging..................................................................................................101
2.0 PROCESS......................................................................................................................................................101
3.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................104

Page 105
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for the use and handling of materials that expose employees to cadmium
and hexavalent chromium.
SCOPE
 Process
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
Whenever work activities may result in employee exposure to chromium or cadmium, or materials containing
chromium or cadmium, the Project HSE Representative (for chromium) or a Competent Person (for cadmium)
must assess the exposure potential before the start of work.
Note: A Competent Person is designated in accordance with Practice 000.653.1000, HSE
General Requirements.
Construction work activities that result in exposure to chromium or cadmium may include, but are not limited to,
the following:
 Demolition or salvage of structures where chromium or cadmium, or materials
containing chromium or cadmium, are present
 Removal or encapsulation of materials containing chromium or cadmium
 New construction, alteration, repair, or renovation of structures and substrates that
contain chromium or cadmium
 Installation of products containing chromium or cadmium
 Working with/around Portland cement (in powder or dust form – chromium only)
 Torch-cutting chromium/cadmium-containing paints
 Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of chromium or cadmium, or
materials containing chromium or cadmium
 Maintenance operations associated with construction activities
 Welding, cutting, burning, or grinding stainless steel, chromium/cadmium-containing
alloy steel, and chromium/cadmium-containing alloys
Note: Exposure to chromium (especially hexavalent chromium) has also occurred when
the welding rod or wire in use contains chromium.

Page 106
ABG
The permissible exposure limit (PEL) for cadmium and hexavalent chromium is 5 micrograms calculated as an
8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) over a work shift.
The action level (AL) of 2.5 micrograms will trigger the following requirements:
 Pre-task planning includes, as needed, a thorough identification of chromium or
cadmium materials. Identification may include the product name, a material safety
data sheet (MSDS) or International Chemical Safety Card (ICSC) with the MSDS/ICSC
number (if available) or a sample content analysis. Sampling data includes location,
sampling method, sampling dates, laboratory identification, and analytical method.
Note: Refer to Practice 000.653.2000, Industrial Hygiene Program Requirements,

regarding forms to use to document/communicate monitoring results.
 If documentation is not feasible or has been determined by the Project HSE

Representative to be unavailable or unreliable, a chromium or cadmium content
sufficient to exceed the AL for chromium or cadmium is assumed.
Where the PEL is likely to be exceeded, a Job Safety Analysis (JSA) (Form 000.653.F0100 or equal – also known as
a “compliance plan”) will be developed.
Results of bulk sampling, calculations of potential chromium or cadmium exposure, and other data that
demonstrate compliance with this practice (as well as the pertinent standards) will be attached to the
JSA/compliance plan.
Where chromium or cadmium exposure above the AL is suspected, and in the absence of monitoring data, interim
protective measures will be established that are equal to or greater than the assumed exposure level.
Personal protective equipment, appropriate to the type and extent of the hazard/exposure, will be provided to
employees at no cost.
1.1 Hexavalent Chromium
A. Welding, Cutting, Burning
Certain welding and cutting activities have been shown to expose the welder/cutter, and potentially helpers, to
hexavalent chromium above the action level when exhaust ventilation is not used. The activities have included
the following:
 Shielded metal arc welding
 Gas metal arc welding
 Flux cored arc welding
 Sub arc welding
 Torch cutting through chromate-containing paints
 Grinding chromium-containing metals
The types of metal involved have been stainless steel, chromium-containing alloy steel, and chromium-containing
nonferrous alloys. Exposure has also occurred when the welding rod or wire in use contains chromium, and
exhaust ventilation is not used.

Page 107
ABG
Therefore, exhaust ventilation must always be prescribed as a control measure when activities with the materials
mentioned above are in use unless historical personal monitoring data performed when similar materials, using
similar methods, under similar environmental conditions are used shows conclusively that the welder/cutter and
helper (if applicable) are not exposed above the action level without regard to respiratory protection.
Additional controls may also be appropriate to be in compliance with 29 Code of Federal Regulation
(CFR) 1926.1126, depending on the results of evaluations of the materials to be used, environmental conditions,
and length of the work process/activity.
B. Plasma and Air Arc Cutting and Gouging
Plasma and air arc cutting and gouging operations have been shown to expose the employees and helpers within
10 feet (3.1 meters) of the work to levels of hexavalent chromium above the PEL under most circumstances and
conditions. Therefore, exhaust ventilation and respiratory protection (at least a half-face, tight-fitting respirator
with a HEPA filter/cartridge) must always be prescribed as control measures when activities with the materials
mentioned above are in use; a higher level of respiratory protection may be prescribed, depending on conditions.
Note: Each discrete task must begin with ventilation and respiratory protection control
measures in place. Respiratory protection may be down graded only upon
conclusive results of breathing zone monitoring of the employee(s) involved in
each discrete task showing exposure to be less than 50 percent of the protection
factor of the respirator relative to the concentration and PEL of hexavalent
chromium. Respiratory protection may be eliminated only upon conclusive results
of breathing-zone monitoring of the employee(s) involved in each discrete task
showing exposure to be less than the PEL as an 8-hourTWA.
Additional controls may also be appropriate to be in compliance with 29 CFR 1926.1126, depending on the results
of evaluations of the materials to be used, environmental conditions, and length of the work process/activity.
Employees will be informed, by the JSA review process, of the hazards of chromium or cadmium, and the
precautions to take to avoid exposure (refer to Practice 000.653.2007, Hazard Communications).
Employees who are exposed at or above the AL 30 days or more per year will be enrolled in a medical surveillance
program.
Personal hygiene is very important while working with chromium or cadmium products. To avoid accidental
ingestion of chromium or cadmium, employees must wash thoroughly (regardless of other controls) before
eating, chewing, smoking, or drinking.
2.0 PROCESS
Management/supervision supported by the Project HSE Representative, the medical provider, and training
providers will conduct the following basic steps to control exposure to chromium or cadmium:
 Determine the types of projects, activities, and operations that could involve
chromium or cadmium, or chromium or cadmium-containing materials. For those
jobs, conduct hazard identification as part of the work design, planning, and control
process. Ensure that the Project HSE Representative participates in, or conducts, the
hazard identification.

Page 108
ABG
 If chromium or cadmium materials are involved, ensure that the Project HSE
Representative (for chromium) or a Competent Person (for cadmium) conducts a
hazard evaluation to determine the potential exposure and to recommend initial
controls.
 Implement requirements of the applicable chromium standard (29 CFR 1926.1126 or
other) and/or the cadmium standard (29 CFR 1926.1127 or other) when a potential
chromium or cadmium hazard is present. Requirements include:
 Potential exposure determination
 Breathing zone exposure monitoring, or developing a justification for not
conducting monitoring based on previous monitoring/historical data or objective
data (refer to section (n)(2) of the cadmium standard for the definition of
objective data) demonstrating that exposure will not exceed the AL
 Engineering controls
 Consideration of respiratory protection
 Protective clothing
 Housekeeping
 Hygiene areas and practices (including consideration of shower facilities)
 Consideration of medical surveillance
 Training
 Record keeping
 Specific cadmium requirements that should also be considered for chromium:
Regulated areas
Warning signs
 Develop and implement a JSA when exposure is or is likely to be above the PEL. The
JSA (or equal) addresses the scope of work activities; provides initial exposure
assessment; and prescribes exposure controls, air-monitoring requirements, work
practices, PPE, and additional information as required.
 Determine chromium or cadmium exposure initially and periodically as work is
conducted.
 Air monitoring for chromium or cadmium may be waived provided the following
conditions are met:
 Monitoring has been performed in the last 12 months.
 Data from historical monitoring originates from work operations that closely
resemble the planned work operations.
 Workplace and environmental conditions (such as indoors or outdoors,
temperature, wind speed, ventilation, and space configuration) are similar to
those when the monitoring was performed.
 The processes, types of material, control methods, and work practices are similar.
Note: A copy of the data that meets the above criteria is available in the general
workplace; justification for waving initial monitoring is included in the JSA or
equal. Employees involved are briefed regarding the existence of such data.

Page 109
ABG
 Notify each affected employee, in writing, of the results of monitoring within

5 working days.
 Provide employees with appropriate training and medical surveillance.
 Incorporate recommendations from the Project HSE Representative for chromium or
cadmium hazard control measures into JSA and work control documents.
 Provide appropriate types of training for employees who are exposed to chromium
or cadmium. This training includes:
 Hazard communication training for potentially exposed employees
 Training specified by the applicable chromium or cadmium standard for
employees exposed at the AL for any one day, or who are exposed to chromium
or cadmium compounds that are skin irritants
 Respirator training if respirators are to be used
Note: Hazard communication training can be given in pre-task briefings, safety

meetings, daily meetings, and other appropriate forums.
 Provide information to employees regarding task-specific chromium or cadmium

hazards and controls, the JSA, work practices, and other applicable information,
including any changes that are made to these controls.
 Provide training annually, as appropriate, to employees who continue to have
exposure to chromium or cadmium at or above the AL on any one day.
The Project HSE Representative will perform the following:

 As part of the JSA and other hazard evaluation processes, identify and evaluate
chromium or cadmium hazards and potential exposures during planning and the
conduct of work.
 Review and approve the JSA (or equal).
 As necessary, quantitatively determine the presence of chromium or cadmium in
materials, substrates, and other media. This may involve the collection of samples
for analysis by a qualified laboratory or field testing using acceptable test methods.
Note: The (cadmium) Competent Person may perform the quantitative or qualitative
determination in lieu the Project HSE Representative.
 Provide results of chromium or cadmium surveys to management/supervision, along

with information regarding hazard potential and control measures. As appropriate,
make recommendations to management/supervision to maintain, modify, upgrade,
or downgrade controls accordingly.
 Take prompt corrective measures (or supports any Competent Person in this role) to
eliminate hazards; such as recommending to management/supervision to implement
or modify engineering, administrative, work practice, and personal protection
(including respiratory protection) controls.
 Conduct periodic exposure assessments, as appropriate.

Page 110
ABG
 As appropriate, assist management/supervision in ensuring that employees have the

necessary training and medical surveillance based upon the activity and hazard.
 Ensure that medical monitoring is conducted in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1126
(for chromium) or 29 CFR 1926.1127 (for cadmium), including imposition of work
restrictions where appropriate and reviewing results of medical monitoring.
 In evaluating chromium or cadmium hazards and specifying controls for a job, (a) use
reliable historical exposure monitoring data generated for other similar operations or
activities (b) use objective data, and/or (c) plan and conduct initial monitoring to
determine exposures and assess the effectiveness of hazard controls.
 Determine the 8-hour TWA exposure for each employee exposed to chromium (VI).
 Perform initial monitoring to determine the 8-hour TWA exposure for each employee
on the basis of a sufficient number of personal breathing zone air samples to
accurately characterize full shift exposure on each shift, for each job classification, in
each work area.
 If initial monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level,
monitoring may be discontinued for those employees whose exposures are
represented by such monitoring.
 If monitoring reveals employee exposure to be at or above the action level, perform
periodic monitoring at least every 6 months.
 If monitoring reveals employee exposures to be above the PEL, perform periodic
monitoring at least every 3 months.
 Conduct initial and periodic exposure monitoring in accordance with National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)/OSHA methods if lacking
historical or objective data.
 Maintain effective records of jobs monitored, so that a historical database can be
used to specify controls and eliminate unnecessary and redundant monitoring for
future activities.
 Support project management/supervision in responding to exposures above the PEL
when employees were not adequately protected.
 As appropriate, participate in pre-task and daily employee briefings regarding
task-specific chromium or cadmium hazards and controls, work practices/plans (such
as JSAs), and other applicable information, including any changes that are made to
controls or to the work practices or plans.
3.0 REFERENCES

000.653.2000 Industrial Hygiene Program Requirements
000.653.2007 Hazard Communications

Page 111
ABG

Forms:
Non-ABG Documents
29 CFR 1926.1126 Chromium
29 CFR 1926.1127 Cadmium

Page 112
ABG
COMPRESSED AIR EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................105
SCOPE106
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................106
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................106
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................................................................106
1.1 Whip Check..............................................................................................................................................106
2.0 PRESSURIZED/COMPRESSED AIR EQUIPMENT.............................................................................................106
2.1 Inspections..............................................................................................................................................107
2.2 Cleaning...................................................................................................................................................107
3.0 Compressed gas cylinders............................................................................................................................107
3.1 Procurement Specifications and Limits....................................................................................................107
3.2 Transporting and Moving Cylinders.........................................................................................................108
3.3 Placing Cylinders......................................................................................................................................108
3.4 Storing Cylinders......................................................................................................................................109
3.5 Using Cylinders........................................................................................................................................109
3.6 Refilling Gas Cylinders.............................................................................................................................111
4.0 MANIFOLDS.................................................................................................................................................111
5.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................113

Page 113
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for operating or using pressurized or compressed air equipment.
SCOPE
 Pressurized/Compressed Air Equipment
 Compressed Gas Cylinders
 Manifolds
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Pressurized Equipment  Includes but is not limited to any equipment, such as line, hose, vessel, or container,
which is subjected to pressure above or below that of one atmosphere.
All connections on pressurized/compressed air hoses or lines must have a positive means of coupling to prevent
the connection from uncoupling.
All hoses will have a containment device fitted to prevent whipping should it become detached.
Whip Check
If inadequately restrained or “whip-checked,” the resulting whipping effect may, and has previously, caused
equipment damage and significant injury to, or death of, employees. Consequently, all pressurized equipment
must be restrained, or whip-checked through the use or combined use of the following:
 Single leg cable stocking
 Sling (such as 1 or 2 leg slings)
 Internal reinforcement
 Double or 2-leg cable stocking, or
 Proprietary fittings or fixtures
Particular attention must be given to the securing and whip checking of:
 Hydraulic lines and pressure units
 High-pressure water lines, pumps, and vessels
 Air compressors and lines
 Associated tools and accessories

Page 114
ABG
PRESSURIZED/COMPRESSED AIR EQUIPMENT
Only certified pressure vessels are permitted.

Employees required to use pressurized equipment must be trained in the use of such equipment and fully
conversant with the hazards associated with pressurized equipment.
Most pressurized equipment fails through:
 Mistreatment
 Sharp edges
 Poor handling techniques
 Incorrect installation or fitting
 Incorrect fitting of whip-check system
 Incorrect flow rate
Before compressed air equipment is brought to the project/site, it must be inspected and deemed fit for the
intended purpose.
Certificates of inspection for air receivers must be provided before arriving on the project/site. Bleed-/pressure-
relief valves, as well as air diffusers, must be fitted to air-powered equipment.
Air lines must be protected from being driven over by machinery and kept away from walkways and supported by
cable stands where practicable.
Inspections
Pressure vessels must be inspected/certified according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, and applicable
codes/standards (such as ASTM, ASME, and in-country).
Air compressors and similar equipment will be inspected daily with results documented on Form 000.653.F0107z,
Inspection Report – General Line Equipment: Air Compressors; and monthly with results documented on Form
Note: Forms used to document inspections (000.653.F0107 series) and performance
evaluations (000.653.F0218 series) are specific to the machine. Both forms have a
sub-letter designation for nearly every type of machine. For example, F0107 “b”
and F0218 “b” are used for aerial lifts; F0107 “c” and F0218 “c” are used for
scissor lifts; F0107 “x” is used for a welding machine; and F0107z is used for an air
compressor.
Cleaning
Compressed air must not be used for cleaning purposes unless the pressure is reduced to less than 30 psi — and
then only with effective chip guarding and adequate personal protective equipment.

Page 115
ABG
Compressed gas cylinders
Procurement Specifications and Limits
Requisitions for cylinders and hardware will include the following specifications when applicable:
 Portable cylinders used to store and ship compressed gas will be constructed and
maintained in accordance with U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations,
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 171-179, or applicable in-country
standards.
 Devices used on compressed gas cylinders must comply with applicable Compressed
Gas Association (CGA) Standards, or applicable in-country standards.
Transporting and Moving Cylinders
When compressed gas cylinders are hoisted, they must be secured on a cradle, cylinder truck/dolly, sling board, or
pallet; cylinders must not be hoisted using slings choked around the body nor with unapproved devices or
attachments.
When cylinders are moved with powered vehicles, they will be secured in a vertical position, regulators will be
removed, and valve protection caps put in place.
When cylinders are manually handled, unless cylinders are firmly secured on a cylinder truck, regulators will be
removed and valve protection caps put in place before cylinders are moved in any fashion or by any means.
Whenever cylinders are moved, the valve will be in a closed position.
Regulators must be removed and, when provided for, valve-protection caps put back in place before moving
cylinders.
Proper support racks will be provided in vehicles used to transport cylinders.
The driver/operator will ensure cylinders filled for transportation (bulk loads) comply with DOT regulations or
applicable in-country standards, on the following subjects:
 Ownership and authorization to fill
 Type of shipping cylinders for each gas
 Charging cylinders – amount of gas and conditions of filling
 Marking and labeling
 Placarding transport vehicles
 Type(s) of pressure relief devices, where required
Compressed gas cylinders must not be transported in automobiles or in closed-bodied

vehicles.
Shipping compartments will be adequately ventilated.

Page 116
ABG
Placing Cylinders
Cylinders will be secured in an upright position, even when being hoisted or moved.
Cylinders will be placed where they cannot become part of an electrical circuit and will be kept away from piping
systems and layout tables that may be used for grounding electrical circuits.
When cylinders are in use, they will be placed with the valve end up, and a steadying device used to keep them
from being knocked over. Cylinders will not be placed where they will be exposed to open flames, hot metal, or
other sources of heat.
Note: This requirement does not apply to cylinders as follows (as prescribed in CGA and
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards:
 Cylinders designed to remain stable without being secured (for example, LPG
cylinders commonly used with gas grills and weed burners)
 Cylinders with a maximum water capacity < 2.7 pounds
 Compressed gas and oxygen cylinders must not be placed in confined/enclosed or
non-ventilated areas.
Storing Cylinders
Compressed gas cylinders must be stored in areas that are safe, dry, well-ventilated, and protected from direct
sun and weather conditions; do not expose cylinders to temperatures above 125 F (51 C).
Compressed gas cylinder storage areas will be clearly identified and posted with the name(s) of the gas(es) stored
in the area.
The quantity of gas in cylinders allowed in storage (inside or outside) will be in accordance with NFPA
Standards 51 and 55.
Cylinders will not be stored near elevators, gangways, stairwells, or any other place where they are likely to be
knocked down or interfere with traffic.
Empty cylinders will be segregated from other cylinders and labeled or tagged “Empty” or “MT.”
Oxygen cylinders not in use must not be stored within 20 feet (6.1 meters) of cylinders containing flammable
gases unless separated by a fire wall at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) tall and having a fire-resistance rating of at least
1/2 hour.
Cylinders containing oxidizing gases must be stored away from flammable substances such as oil and volatile
liquids.
Smoking is prohibited within 20 feet of flammable gas cylinder storage areas. NO SMOKING signs must be posted
in storage areas containing flammable gases.
Valves on empty cylinders will be closed and capped.
Storage areas will be constructed so that they are dry, well-ventilated, and made with noncombustible materials;
ensure shelves are able to support cylinders.

Page 117
ABG
Dry vegetation and combustible materials must be cleared for a minimum distance of 15 feet (4.6 meters) from
around the storage area.
Physical protection (barriers) will be provided to prevent damage from vehicles.
Using Cylinders
Gas welding and cutting equipment must be inspected by the user at the beginning of each shift to identify any of
the following defects:
 Leaking or damaged hose or hose couplings
 Leaking or damaged fuel-gas pressure regulators and gauges and related connections
 Leaking or damaged torch heads or shutoff valves and related connections
 Clogged tip openings
Before connecting a regulator to the valve, the valve will be opened slowly to clear debris from the valve nozzle
and closed immediately. This action will be taken in an area where there are no possible sources of ignition, and
the employee will stand to one side when taking this action.
Safety devices will not be tampered with.
Cylinders must be clearly identified as to their contents in accordance with local hazardous substance legislation.
Do not strike an arc on a cylinder.
Hoses from compressed gas cylinders must be removed from confined spaces when not in use and during breaks.
Flashback devices must be installed at both the regulator and torch end, on both lines, of oxygen/fuel gas
systems.
Regulators and hoses used with flammable compressed gas cylinders will be leak tested immediately after they
are connected to the cylinders.
Cylinders must be kept far enough away from the actual welding/cutting operation to prevent sparks, hot slag,
and flames from reaching them.
Acetylene cylinder valves will be opened 3/4 of a turn or less; do not open acetylene cylinder valves more than
1-1/2 turns.
Acetylene regulators will be adjusted so the low-pressure gauge indicates a delivery pressure of less than 100 kPa
(15psig) to the hose and torch.
Cylinders will be considered full and must be handled accordingly.
Approved reducers and regulators must be used; do not use gas directly from cylinders without pressure being
reduced through specifically approved regulators; do not tamper with safety devices on regulators or on cylinder
valves.
Cylinders will be protected from damage; do not drag, drop, or strike; do not use cylinders with signs of damage.

Page 118
ABG
Cylinders will not be used as rollers or supports or for any purpose other than to store and dispense the original
contents.
Oxygen cylinders and fittings must be kept away from oil, grease, and other combustible/flammable materials;
keep cylinders, cylinder caps and valves, couplings, regulators, hoses, and apparatus free from oil and greasy
substances, and do not handle with oily hands or gloves; do not direct oxygen at oily surfaces or greasy clothes.
Gaseous hydrogen systems will be equipped with pressure-relief devices and protected from tampering. Relief
devices will be arranged so that if actuated, they have an unobstructed upward vent path to open air.
Users will verify that compressed gas cylinders indicate the following:
 Date the last hydrostatic test was performed (stamp).
 Cylinder contents (label with either chemical or trade name).
Cylinder tags or markings will not be removed or altered.

Mixing gases, transferring them from one cylinder to another, or refilling cylinders is prohibited.
Valve protective caps will be kept on the cylinder except when the cylinder is secured and connected to
dispensing equipment.
Cylinder valves must be opened slowly.
Users will ensure reverse-flow gas check valves and flashback arrestors are installed on both lines of all oxygen
and fuel-gas setups.
Special wrenches, when required, will be left in position on the stem of the valve while the cylinder is in use; in
the case of coupled cylinders or cylinders connected with a manifold, at least one such wrench must be available
for immediate use.
When the work is complete, or at the end of the shift, valves and regulators will be closed; gas lines and regulators
must be drained and the adjusting screw “backed out.”
Note: This does not apply to cylinders connected with a manifold.
Regulators and pressure gauges will be used only for the gases that they are designed and intended for. Repair,
modification, or alteration on cylinders, valves, or attachments will be performed only by the
manufacturer/authorized service center.
Difficult connections must not be forced; threads on regulators must match to those on the cylinder valve outlet.
Cylinders will not be dragged, dropped, rolled, or struck in horizontal position, or allowed to strike each other or
another surface violently.
When transporting cylinders, a suitable hand truck, forklift, or similar handling device will be used with the
cylinder properly secured to the device and the valve cap on.
Cylinders may be rolled only for short distances, using the curved bottom edge of the cylinder.
Cylinders will not be lifted using the protective cap or with a magnet.

Page 119
ABG
When disconnecting regulators and hose, the valve must be closed and the hoses purged before removing the
regulators, and storing.
Torches and hoses will be completely depressurized (bled) before storage, or at the end of each shift.
Torch, hose, and regulators must be completely contained within any box for storage. Storage of torches or hose
with one end out of the box is strictly prohibited, regardless of the regulators being connected to a compressed
gas cylinder.
Refilling Gas Cylinders
Compressed gas cylinders may only be refilled by the owner or authorized employees in compliance with
applicable standards.
MANIFOLDS
Use manifolds and manifold parts only for the gas(es) they are designed for.
Cylinder manifolds are installed under the supervision of an employee who is familiar with the uses of the gas at
that facility. Installations comply with applicable standards for construction and use.
Ensure compressed gas manifolds are designed to meet NFPA Standard 51.
Ground and bond flammable gas piping systems in accordance with NFPA Standard 51.
When acetylene cylinders are connected by a manifold, approved flash arrestors are installed between each
cylinder and the coupler block. One flash arrestor installed between the coupler block and regulator is acceptable
only for outdoor use or if the number of cylinders coupled does not exceed 3.

Page 120
ABG
REFERENCES
Document ID Document ID
Forms:
000.653.F0107z Inspection Report – General Line Equipment: Air
Compressors
000.653.F0108 Monthly Inspection Report – Construction
Non-ABG Documents
49 CFR Parts 171-179 Department of Transportation Regulations
(Hazardous Materials and Carriage)
NFPA Standard 51 Design and Installation of Oxygen and Fuel Gas
Systems for Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes
NFPA Standard 55 Compressed and Liquefied Gases in Portable
Cylinders

Page 121
ABG
CONFINED SPACE / PERMIT CONFINED SPACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Company Policy.........................................................................................................................................114
Hazard Evaluation for Permit Spaces..................................................................................................................115
Preventing Unauthorized Entry..........................................................................................................................115
Safe Permit Space Entry Procedures..................................................................................................................116
Permit System................................................................................................................................................116
The entry supervisor......................................................................................................................................116
Entry Permit.......................................................................................................................................................116
Pre-Entry Evaluation...........................................................................................................................................117
Co-Inhibited Permitted Confined Work Space....................................................................................................117
Certification........................................................................................................................................................117
Equipment..........................................................................................................................................................117
Duties & Responsibilities....................................................................................................................................119
Authorized Entrants.......................................................................................................................................119
Attendants.....................................................................................................................................................119
Entry Supervisors...........................................................................................................................................120
Rescue ..............................................................................................................................................................121
Training Program................................................................................................................................................121
Review-Procedures............................................................................................................................................121
Enforcement.......................................................................................................................................................122
Additional Requirements...............................................................................................................................122

Page 122
ABG
General Company Policy
The purpose of this program is to inform interested persons, including employees that ABG is complying with the
OSHA Confined Space Standard. We have determined that this workplace needs written procedures for the
evaluation of confined spaces, and where permit-required spaces are identified, we have developed and
implemented a permit-required confined space entry program. This program applies to all work operations at ABG
where employees must enter a permit-required confined space as part of their job duties.
Site Supervisor is the person having overall responsibility for the Permit-Required Confined Space Program. Site
Safety Manager will review and update the program, as necessary.
Copies of the written program may be obtained from the Site Safety Manager office.
Under this program, we identify permit-required spaces in ABG and provide training for our employees according
to their responsibilities in the permit space. These employees receive instructions for safe entry into our specific
type of confined spaces, including testing and monitoring, appropriate personal protective equipment, rescue
procedures, and attendant responsibilities.
This program is designed to ensure that safe work practices are utilized during all activities regarding the permit
space to prevent personal injuries and illnesses that could occur.
If, after reading this program, you find that improvements can be made, please contact Site Supervisor or SITE
SAFETY MANAGER. We encourage all suggestions because we are committed to creating a safe workplace for all
our employees and a safe and effective permit-required confined space entry program is an important component
of our overall safety plan. We strive for clear understanding, safe work practices, and involvement in the program
from every level of the company.
Hazard Evaluation for Permit Spaces
To determine if there are permit-required confined spaces in the ABG Process unit, the SITE SAFETY MANAGER or
his designee will conduct a hazard evaluation of our workplace. This evaluation will provide the information
necessary to identify the existence and location of permit-required confined spaces in our workplace that must be
covered by the Permit-Required Confined Space Entry Program. This written hazard evaluation is kept in Site
Safety Managers office.
Preventing Unauthorized Entry
To provide a safe work environment and to prevent exposed employees from accidentally entering a permit
space, we post danger signs to inform all employees of the existence, location, and danger posed by permit
spaces at ABG.

Page 123
ABG
Upon completing work within the confined space, all entry points must be secured with red barricade tap and a
sign posted “CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT REQUIRED.” “DO NOT ENTER”

Page 124
ABG
Safe Permit Space Entry Procedures
The Entry Supervisor is responsible for authorizing entry and issuing entry permits for work in our permit spaces.
The file of permits and related documents are kept in Site Safety Manager’s office. The procedures we follow for
preparing, issuing, and canceling entry permits includes the following elements:
Permit System
o Before entry is authorized, the Company shall document the completion of measures required by
OSHA regulations by preparing an entry permit.
o Before entry begins, the entry supervisor identified on the permit shall sign the entry permit to
authorize entry.
o The completed permit shall be made available at the time of entry to all authorized entrants or
their authorized representatives, by posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective
means so that the entrants can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been completed.
o The duration of the permit may not exceed the time required to complete the assigned task or job
identified on the permit in accordance with OSHA regulations.
- The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry permit when:
o The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed; or
o A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space.
- The Company shall retain each canceled entry permit for at least 1 year to facilitate the review of the
permit-required confined space program required by OSHA regulations. Any problems encountered
during an entry operation shall be noted on the pertinent permit so that appropriate revisions to the
permit space program can be made.
Entry Permit
The entry permit that documents compliance with this section and authorizes entry to a permit space shall
identify:
- The permit space to be entered;

- The purpose of the entry;
- The date and the authorized duration of the entry permit;
- The authorized entrants within the permit space;
- The personnel, by name, currently serving as attendants;
- The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, with a space for the signature or initials of
the entry supervisor who originally authorized entry;
- - The hazards of the permit space to be entered;
- The measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit space hazards before
entry;

Page 125
ABG
o NOTE: Those measures can include the lockout or tagging of equipment and procedures for
purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces.
- The acceptable entry conditions;
- The results of initial and periodic tests performed under OSHA regulations, accompanied by the names or
initials of the testers and by an indication of when the tests were performed;
- The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means (such as the equipment to use
and the numbers to call) for summoning those services;
- The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and attendants to maintain contact during
the entry;
- Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment, communications equipment,
alarm systems, and rescue equipment, to be provided for compliance with this section;
- Any other information whose inclusion is necessary, given the circumstances of the particular confined
space, in order to ensure employee safety; and
- Any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been issued to authorize work in the permit space.
Pre-Entry Evaluation
To ensure the safety and health of our employees, before allowing authorized workers to enter a permit space,
we evaluate conditions in that space to determine if the conditions are safe for entry. Any employee, who enters
the space, or that employee’s authorized representative, has the opportunity to observe the pre-entry and any
subsequent testing. The authorized entrant or that employee’s representative also has the option of requesting a
reevaluation of the space if they feel that the evaluation was not adequate.
Our company follows the procedures to evaluate each permit space before entry according to OSHA regulations.
This includes testing the internal atmosphere with a calibrated direct-reading instrument for oxygen content,
flammable gases and vapors, and potential toxic air contaminants. We also periodically test the atmosphere of the
space to ensure that the continuous ventilation is preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere.
Co-Inhibited Permitted Confined Work Space
ABG recognizes that from time to time it will be necessary to occupy the same confined space with other
contractors. ABG will account for it employees and assist with helping evacuate other contractors. ABG will
inform the other contractors of the activities ABG is performing and the dangers associated with those activities.
However, ABG will not accept any liabilities for other contractors.
Certification
Our company verifies that the space is safe for entry and that the pre-entry measures required by OSHA
regulations have been taken, through a written certification that contains the date, location of the space, and

Page 126
ABG
signature of the person providing the certification. The Site Safety Manager is responsible for verifying these
procedures. The certification is made before entry and is available to each employee entering the space.
Equipment
ABG provides appropriate equipment to all employees who work in or near our permit spaces.

Page 127
ABG
Duties & Responsibilities
Authorized Entrants
o Those persons who have completed the training and are authorized to enter our permit spaces
(authorized entrants) are assigned specific duties and responsibilities that they must perform
when they work in the permit space.
o The Company trains each authorized entrant so that they have an understanding, knowledge, and
the skills necessary to safely perform their duties and responsibilities.
o Their duties and responsibilities include:
 Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,
signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure;
 Properly use equipment as required by OSHA regulations;
 Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant
status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as
required by OSHA regulations;
 Alert the attendant whenever:
 The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous
situation, or
 The entrant detects a prohibited condition; and
 Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:
 An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor,
 The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous
situation,
 The entrant detects a prohibited condition, or
 An evacuation alarm is activated.
Attendants
o Persons who have been designated as permit space attendants are assigned specific duties and
responsibilities that they must perform in permit space job duties. The Company trains each
attendant so that they have an understanding, knowledge, and the skills necessary to safely
perform their duties and responsibilities.
 Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,
 Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants;
 Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and
ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants accurately identifies who is in
the permit space;
 Remains outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another
attendant;

Page 128
ABG
 Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to

alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space;
 Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to
remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space
immediately under any of the following conditions:
 If the attendant detects a prohibited condition;
 If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in an
authorized entrant;
 If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the
authorized entrants; or
 If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required
under applicable OSHA regulations;
 Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that
authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards;
 Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space
while entry is underway:
 Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space;
 Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have
entered the permit space; and
 Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons
have entered the permit space;
 Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the Company's rescue procedure; and
 Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to monitor and
protect the authorized entrants.
 Attendant can only observe one permitted confined space at a time. ABG does not allow
multiple monitoring.
Entry Supervisors
o Those persons who have completed the training and have been designated as permit space entry
supervisors are assigned specific duties and responsibilities that they must perform in permit
space job duties. The Company trains each entry supervisor so that they have an understanding,
knowledge, and the skills necessary to safely perform their duties and responsibilities.
 Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,
 Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all
tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment
specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to
begin;
 Terminates the entry and cancels the permit;
 Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are
operable;

Page 129
ABG
 Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space
during entry operations; and
 Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and
at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space that entry
operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry
conditions are maintained.
Rescue
ABG does not perform confined space rescue. An agreement with the owners to provide such service must be in
place prior to entry. Confined Space Entries that are considered to be IDLH will require a rescue team on site
during initial entry and must remain on site until the entry has successfully been completed.
Training Program
Every employee at ABG who faces the risk of confined space entry is provided with training so that each
designated employee acquires the understanding, knowledge and skills necessary for the safe performance of the
duties assigned to them. Site Supervisor or SITE SAFETY MANAGER conducts our permit-required confined space
training. All training related materials, documents, and signed certificates are kept in Site Safety Manager’s office.
We use the following criteria to determine which employees must receive permit-required confined space
training:
- The area they work in;

- Whether or not any confined spaces exist in that area; and/or
- They will be required to enter a confined space or assist in confined space entry.
New employees are always trained before their initial assignment of duties. When changes occur in permit-
required confined space areas of our company, we provide training. If we have reason to believe that an
employee has deviated from a previously trained upon procedure or that their knowledge seems inadequate, we
provide training.
Upon successful completion of ABG permit-required confined space training program, each participant receives a
certificate which they sign verifying that they understand the material presented, and that they will follow all
company policies and procedures regarding permit space entry.
Refresher training is conducted on an annual basis for all employees involved in Permit-Required Confined Space
Entry.
Review-Procedures

Page 130
ABG
To ensure that all employees participating in entry operations are protected from permit space hazards, ABG
reviews the Permit-Required Confined Space Entry Program on a regular basis. We use the retained canceled
permits from the past 12 months within one year after each entry and revise the program as necessary. ABG
performs a single annual review covering all entries performed during a 12-month period. If no entry is performed
during a 12-month period, no review will be performed.
Enforcement
Constant awareness of and respect for permit-required confined space entry hazards, and compliance with all
safety rules are considered conditions of employment. Supervisors and individuals in the Safety and Personnel
Department reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to and including termination, for
failure to follow the guidelines of this permit entry program.
Additional Requirements
- Fuels or gases cannot be taken into confined spaces.

- In vessels that held flammable liquids, disconnect lines that convey hazardous materials.
- If using an ignition source, empty the vessel and purge flammable vapors. Then test for flammability of
vapors, and allow no source of ignition if the combustible vapor is greater than 0 percent of the LEL.
- Keep adequate fire extinguishing equipment close at hand.
At least one standby person at the site needs to be trained and immediately available to perform rescue and
emergency services.

Page 131
Confined Space Permit
ALL SECTIONS OF THIS PERMIT MUST BE COMPLETED AND AUTHORIZED
PRIOR TO ENTRY TO THE SPACE
Date:
Permit Requested By: Permit No.:
1 Location of Space Signature:
2 Description of Work to be Done
3 Equipment to be Used Inside the Space
4 Isolation of Confined Space
5 The Items Below Have Been Isolated or Made Safe
(a) Pipelines (water, steam, gases, raw material, product, etc.) Yes N/A
(b) Mechanical and/or electrical drives
(c) Electrical supply services (including batteries and emergency backup)
(d) Sludges, deposits, wastes
(e) Locks and tags securely attached to isolation points
(f) Warning signs posted
(g) Other (specify)
Authorized Permit
Issuer:

6 Atmosphere Monitoring
(Acceptable Limits: Oxygen 19.5 – 23.5%; LEL less than 10%; other contaminants as per MSDS) Testing Frequency
Required:
Date Time Oxygen% LEL% CO Tester’s Signature
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Authorized Permit Issuer:
7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required

The following PPE must be worn: Yes N/A
(a) Foot protection
Eye protection (safety glasses, full face shield, other – specify)
(b)
(delete that which is inapplicable)
(c) Hearing protection
(d) Hand protection (specify type)
(e) Safety helmets
(f) Protective clothing (specify if other than normal work wear)
Safety harness – with or without safety line (delete that which is
(g)
inapplicable)
(h) Air-purifying respirators
(i) Supplied-air respirators

8 Hot Work
Hot work is allowed inside the space: Yes N/A
(a) Combustible materials removed from the area or made safe
(b) Drains within 49 feet (14.9 meters) covered with fireproof blanket
(c) Appropriate type and number of fire extinguishers at worksite
(d) A water hose run to job and tested and/or left running
(e) Sparks from work more than 6.5 feet (2 meters)above floor level to be
completely enclosed by suitable enclosure
(f) Welding machine earthed directly to equipment being welded, as close to
the welding point as possible
(g) Power leads not draped over pipelines, steelwork, or access ways
(h) Electrical trace on pipes isolated
9 Chemical Substances (insert data as required)

Only those chemical substances listed below may be taken into the space: Yes N/A
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
10 Standby Person/Observer Personnel and Rescue Arrangements

Standby person(s) are:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Yes N/A
Rescue and emergency procedures have been posted:

11 Confined Space Entry Permit Checklist
Yes N/A
(a) Access ways secured in an open position?
(b) Adequate supply of fresh air available for the duration?
(c) Adequate access and egress provided to access ways/entrances?
(d) Adequate access and egress provided to internal work platforms?
(e) Ladders required for internal access?
(f) Personal monitors required to be used by entrants?
(g) A confined space rescue plan in place?
(h) Entry and emergency instructions have been given to attendant/standby person(s)?
(i) The risk assessment and safe work practices have been prepared and documented?
12 Authorization
This permit is valid from: a.m./p.m. on ……/….../…. to ….… a.m./p.m. on ……/….../….
Authorized Permit Issuer: Time: Date: ……./……./….
The confined space described above is in my opinion in a safe condition for the work as described in Item 2 to proceed,
provided that the precautions noted are fully observed.
Personnel Permitted Entry
I/We understand the requirements required for entry and work in the confined Trained
space described and the protective measures and equipment to be used.
Yes N/A
Signed Date Time
Signed Date Time
Signed Date Time
Signed Date Time
Signed Date Time
13 Entry Supervisor Responsible for the Work
Name:
Signature:
14 Signing Out
All personnel have left the confined space and further entry will not be permitted unless a new entry permit is authorized.
N/A = Not Applicable

ABG
CONFINED SPACE PERSONNEL ENTRY LOG
Personnel Entering Confined Space Gas Testing

Time Time Test Test Gas
Name Company Signature Tester’s Signature
In Out Result Time Tested
Duties of an Attendant/Standby Person

Maintain continuous communication with personnel in the space. This may be verbal, visual, or physical (such as rope
signals).
Confirm that all personnel sign the permit before entering the space and after leaving it.
Verify that conditions specified on the permit are complied with.
Prevent the fouling of airlines and/or lifelines when these are used.
Have available the means to call for assistance and/or raise the alarm.
While personnel are in the space, you must remain at your post except to get help/raise the alarm in an emergency. If
for any reason you must leave your post, then all personnel within the space must exit the space for the duration of your
absence, or you must be relieved by another attendant/standby person.
In the event of an emergency, your first duty is to raise the alarm and initiate emergency procedures.
DO NOT attempt to rescue personnel in the space.
Order personnel from the space if hazardous conditions are observed; if any person in the space exhibits behavioral or
other symptoms; if for any reason you can’t perform your duties; or when the emergency evacuation alarm sounds.
All permits are cancelled in the event of an emergency on site and must be reissued prior to reentry into the space.

ABG
THIS DOCUMENT TO REMAIN AT ENTRY POINT

Plant Area: Equipment No.: P&ID No.:
Equipment Description:
Confined Space Data Sheet No.: Work Permit No.:

Job Description
Precautions
Atmosphere Testing
Frequency of Tests
Continuous Monitoring Yes No
Minimum 2 Hourly
Oxygen
Max
23.5%
Min %LEL
Date Time Tester 19.5% <10% Other Other Other
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :

ABG
Authorization
The confined space described above is in my opinion in a safe condition for the work to be done, provided that the
precautions above are fully observed.
Signature of Atmosphere Tester Date Time Valid for (hours)

ABG
Attendant/Standby Person
I understand the work to be done within the confined space plus my duties as attendant/standby person.
Print Name Signature Date Time
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
___/___/___ :
Persons Entering Confined Space
I have read and discussed this permit and I am fully aware of and will observe all of its precautions.
Time Time Complete
Print Name Signature Date Signature Signature
Entered Exited Yes/No
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___
___/___/ : :
___

ABG
Time Time Complete

Print Name Signature Date Signature Signature
Entered Exited Yes/No
Job Complete
The plant item concerned has been examined by me and is now in a clean and safe condition to be returned to
service.
Other Remarks:
Signature of Confined Space Entry Authorized Permit Issuer Date Time

ABG
CRANE & DERRICK OPERATION PROCEDURE
Flowchart for Confined Space Permit Issue

Page 141
ABG
DUTIES OF A CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ATTENDANT/STANDBY PERSON
DUTIES OF A CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ATTENDANT/STANDBY PERSON
Above all else, a Confined Space Entry Attendant/Standby Person is assigned for the protection
of people within the confined space.
Should a person be injured, collapse, or display abnormal behavior inside the space, your
immediate duty is to summon help. DO NOT enter the space and risk your own well-being and
that of others.
Before the work begins:
Discuss the job with the person assigning you to attendant/standby person duties and obtain a copy of
page 2 of the Confined Space Entry Register (Form 000.653.F0114).
Verify that you are clear about:

The confined space to be entered
The work to be done
The potential hazards that exist
The precautions to be observed
The Confined Space Entry Permit (Form 000.653.F0115) and other permits associated with the job.
Make you known to the person(s) authorized to enter the confined space.
If required on the Confined Space Entry Permit, establish radio contact with the project/site office or other
nominated person/location. Contact the project/site office or other nominated person/location
stating clearly who you are, the number of the Confined Space Entry Permit, and who is about to enter
the confined space.
During the work, be aware that:

You are authorized to instruct people to leave the confined space at any time.
You, or a relief assigned by the Confined Space Entry Authorized Permit Issuer, must be in attendance
whenever anyone is inside the confined space. If this is not possible, the confined space must be
vacated.
You need to maintain maximum contact with person(s) in the space. Visual contact is obviously preferred
but is not always possible. In this event, maintain contact by verbal means, listen for sounds from the
space, or have an arranged signaling method using a lifeline or other lines or hoses (but not air-supply
hoses).
You need to confirm there are no emissions in the near vicinity of the confined space such as vehicles and
diesel-powered welders.
Wind direction changes may bring new hazards.
Completion of the Work:

Verify the confined space is clear and welding leads or gas-cutting gear has been removed.
Confirm those who were in the confined space signed off the Confined Space Entry Permit.
Advise the Confined Space Entry Authorized Permit Issuer that the above activities have been completed.

Page 142
ABG
CRANE & DERRICK OPERATION PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................134
SCOPE135
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................135
Standard or Regulation:.....................................................................................................................................135
Administrative Duties.........................................................................................................................................136
Training..............................................................................................................................................................136
Initial Training.....................................................................................................................................................137
Training Certification..........................................................................................................................................137
Performance Evaluation.....................................................................................................................................138
Current Crane/Derrick Operators.......................................................................................................................138
Initial Inspections...............................................................................................................................................138
Frequent Inspections.....................................................................................................................................138
Pre-Operational Site Activity and Inspection......................................................................................................138
Periodic Inspections...........................................................................................................................................138
Operating Procedures........................................................................................................................................139
General Procedures............................................................................................................................................139
Procedures for Operators..............................................................................................................................139
Procedures for All Employees........................................................................................................................140
Procedures for Employees Using the Suspended Personnel Platform Hoist..................................................140
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................................140
Posting ..............................................................................................................................................................141
Recordkeeping & Certification...........................................................................................................................141
Maintenance Records.........................................................................................................................................142

Page 143
ABG
PURPOSE
These written Crane & Derrick Operation Procedures establish guidelines to be followed for the use of cranes or
derricks owned or operated by ABG. These procedures establish uniform requirements designed to ensure that
crane and derrick safety training, operation, and maintenance practices are communicated to and understood by
the affected employees. These requirements are also designed to ensure that procedures are in place to protect
the health and safety of all employees.
SCOPE
All crawler, truck, or locomotive cranes in use shall meet the applicable requirements for design, inspection,
construction, testing, maintenance and operation as prescribed in the ANSI B30.5-1968, Safety Code for Crawler,
Locomotive and Truck Cranes. However, the written, dated, and signed inspection reports and records of the
monthly inspection of critical items prescribed in section 5-2.1.5 of the ANSI B30.5-1968 standard are not
required. Instead, the employer shall prepare a certification record which includes the date the crane items were
inspected; the signature of the person who inspected the crane items; and a serial number, or other identifier, for
the crane inspected.
APPLICATION
These rules are established to:
- Provide a safe working environment,

- Govern operator use of cranes and derricks, and
- Ensure proper care and maintenance of cranes and derricks.
It is our intent to comply with OSHA requirements for construction activities. These regulations have requirements
for crane and derrick operations. Subcontractors must also comply with the applicable requirements of:
Name: Details:
Standard or Regulation:
ANSI B15.1-1958 Safety Code for Mechanical Power For guarding

Transmission Apparatus
ANSI B30.5-1968 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes

or or
SAE J959-1966 Lifting Crane, Wire-Rope Strength Factors
for Rope Safety Factors

Page 144
ABG
Name: Details:
Standard or Regulation:
ANSI B30.6-1969 Safety Code for Derricks For derricks
Power Crane and Shovel

Association Mobile Hydraulic Crane
Standard No. 2
SAE J743a-1964 Pipe Layers and Side Booms—Tractor For side boom cranes mounted
Mounted-Specifications and Tests on wheel or crawler tractors
29 CFR 1926.106 Working Over or Near Water For work over water
29 CFR 1926, Subpart M Fall Protection For fall protection
29 CFR 1926.605 Marine Operations and Equipment For marine vessels
49 CFR 177 Carriage by Public Highway For transporting fuel by

vehicles on public highways
49 CFR 393 Parts and Accessories Necessary for Safe For transporting fuel by
Operation vehicles on public highways
Administrative Duties
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER is responsible for developing and maintaining the written Crane & Derrick Operation
Procedures. These procedures are kept in the Jobsite Trailer and/or Site Safety Manager office.
As specified under OSHA regulations, our Crane & Derrick Operation Procedures are administered under the
direction of the Company’s competent person(s), someone capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards
in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who
has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Training
It will be the policy of ABG to permit only trained and authorized personnel to operate cranes and derricks. ABG
prefers all operators have the NCCO or NCCER Crane and Rigging Certification if possible. The Site Safety Manager
will identify all new employees in the employee orientation program and make arrangements with department
management to schedule training.

Page 145
ABG
Before training a new employee, the Crane & Derrick Operation competent person determines if the potential
crane or derrick operator is capable of performing the duties necessary to be a competent and safe operator. This
is based upon his/her physical and mental abilities to perform job functions that are essential to the operation of
the crane or derrick
These capabilities include the level at which the operator must:
- See and hear within reasonably acceptable limits. This includes the ability to see at distance and
peripherally;
- Endure the physical demands of the job; and
- Endure the environmental extremes, such as the ability of the person to work in areas of excessive cold or
heat. An operator must be able to climb onto and off of a crane, to sit in the crane for extended periods of
time, and to turn his/her body to look in the direction of travel when driving in reverse.
Once the competent person determines that a potential operator is capable of performing crane and derrick
duties he/she and the competent person will conduct initial training and evaluation. This/These instructor(s) have
the necessary knowledge, training, and experience to train new crane and derrick operators.
Initial Training
Training will include both classroom and practical instruction.
The work areas where these cranes or derricks are being used also present particular hazards. For these reasons,
it is impractical to develop a single "generic" training program that fits all of our cranes and derricks. Accordingly,
during training, the SITE SAFETY MANAGER must cover the operational hazards of our cranes and derricks,
including:
- Hazards associated with the particular make and model of the crane and derrick;
- Hazards of the workplace; and
- General hazards that apply to the operation of all or most cranes and derricks.
Each potential operator who has received training in any of the elements of the training program for the types of
cranes or derricks which that employee will be authorized to operate and for the type of workplace in which the
cranes or derricks will be operated need not be retrained in those elements before initial assignment in our
workplace if the SITE SAFETY MANAGER has written documentation of the training and if the employee is
evaluated to be competent.
Training Certification
After an employee has completed the training program, the instructor will administer a performance test or
practical exercise to determine whether the potential operator can safely perform the job. At this point the

Page 146
ABG
instructor will determine if the training has been adequate. All crane and derrick trainees are tested on the type of
equipment they will be operating.
The Site Safety Manager is responsible for keeping records certifying that each operator has successfully
completed training and testing. Each certificate includes the name of the operator, the date(s) of the training, and
the signature of the person who did the training and evaluation.

Page 147
ABG
Performance Evaluation
Each certified crane/derrick operator is evaluated annually to verify that the operator has retained and uses the
knowledge and skills needed to operate safely. This evaluation is done by Site Safety Manager and the Supervisor.
If the evaluation shows that the operator is lacking the appropriate skills and knowledge, the operator is retrained
by our instructor(s). When an operator has an accident or near miss or some unsafe operating procedure is
identified, we do retraining.
Current Crane/Derrick Operators
Under no circumstances shall an employee operate a crane or derrick until he/she has successfully completed the
company's crane/derrick training program. This includes all new operators regardless of claimed previous
experience.
Initial Inspections
The company inspects and tests all cranes and derricks to ensure they are capable of safe and reliable operation
when initially set or placed in service and after any major repairs or design modification. The Maintenance
Department is responsible for these inspections and tests. The attached checklist is a minimum and can be used to
assist in performing the Initial Inspection.
Frequent Inspections
The company requires a competent person to perform pre-operational crane and derrick checks prior to
beginning each shift. This person walks around the crane or derrick looking for defects or problem areas.
Components that have a direct bearing on the safety of the crane or derrick and whose status can change from
day to day with use, must be inspected daily, and when possible, observed during operation for any defects that
could affect safe operation. There are four frequent inspections: Pre-Operational Site Activity and Inspection, Pre-
Operational (Daily) Walk Around Inspection, Pre-Start-Up (In Cab) Inspection, and Crane Operation Checklist.
Pre-Operational Site Activity and Inspection
Accidents can be avoided by careful job planning. The Supervisor has a clear understanding of the work to be
performed and considers all potential dangers at the job site.
Periodic Inspections

Page 148
ABG
Periodic inspections include both monthly and annual inspections.
Operating Procedures
Cranes and derricks can create certain hazards that only safe operation can prevent. That’s why we have created a
set of operating procedures. Our operating procedures follow:
General Procedures
- Outriggers will be visible to the operator or a signal person during extension or setting.
- No one except the oiler, instructor, or competent person will be allowed on an operating crane.
- All equipment will comply with the manufacturer's specifications and limitations at all times.
- All attachments used with heavy construction equipment will not exceed the capacity, rating, or scope
recommended by the manufacturer.
- A 5BC or higher rated fire extinguisher shall be accessible and available at all operator’s stations or cab of
the equipment.
Procedures for Operators
- Do not operate a crane or derrick unless you are qualified and properly designated. A qualified person is
one who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive
knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve or resolve
problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or the project. A designated person is an authorized
person approved or assigned by the employer to perform a specific type of duty or duties or to be at a
specific location or locations at the job site.
- Do not hoist, lower, swing, or travel while anyone is on the load or hook. This includes riding a bare hook
or a load of material such as beams, girders, or concrete buckets.
- Do not use a crane or derrick to handle materials or loads stored under electric power line. A minimum of
15 feet safe distance between the equipment and any power line rated at 50 KV must be maintained.
- Use nonconductive taglines, rather than direct contact lines, to stabilize the load.
- Use insulating boots and gloves when connecting loads or contacting the crane or derrick while in the
vicinity of overhead lines.
- Signal persons must understand the hand signals for the type of crane you are working with. (These hand
signals are posted at the job site.)
- When performing duties on the horizontal boom of hammerhead tower cranes that do not protect you
with guardrails, protect yourself against falling by wearing safety belts and lanyards attached to lifelines.
- Keep the crane clean and free of clutter.
- Know how to read the load rating chart.
- Do not lift a load without knowing whether it is within the rated capacity of the crane or derrick.

Page 149
ABG
- Stay within the rated load capacity and working radius. Under adverse field conditions, reduce the load
capacity until it is determined the crane or derrick can safely handle the lift.
- When working at boom lengths or radii between the figures shown on the load capacity chart, use the
next lower capacity rating. It is dangerous to guess the capacity for boom lengths or radii between those
listed on the rating plate.
- Do not lift a load when winds create an unsafe or hazardous condition. Even a light wind can blow the
load out of control, collapse a boom, or tip the machine.
- Take proper precautions when the velocity of wind exceeds 20 mph. If possible, lower or secure booms
under high wind conditions.
- Do not use counterweights heavier than the manufacturer’s specified weight.
- When the machine set is not level, understand that the crane capacity and structural integrity can be
adversely affected.
- Keep your feet on the pedals while foot pedal brake locks are in use. Brakes could cool allowing the load
to fall.
Procedures for All Employees
- All employees will be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and suspended loads.
Procedures for Employees When Using the Suspended Personnel Platform Hoist
Employees can also contribute to safe personnel hoisting operations and help to reduce the number of accidents
and injuries associated with personnel hoisting operations. Employees must adhere to the following safe work
practices:
- Never ride the load; use only platforms specifically designed for personnel lifting.
- Use tag lines where they are practical and do not create an unsafe condition.
- Keep all body parts inside the platform during raising, lowering, and positioning.
- Make sure the platform is secured before exiting or entering unless it creates an unsafe situation.
- Use fall protection equipment properly. (Refer to appropriate OSHA regulations).
- Do not hoist any load while personnel platforms are in use.
- Perform any movement slowly and cautiously without any sudden jerking of the crane or platform.
- Stay in view of or in direct communication of the signal person. If this is not possible, and use of a signal
person would create a greater hazard, direct communication alone, such as by radio, may be used.
- Do not hoist personnel while the crane is traveling except when the employer demonstrates that it is the
least hazardous way to accomplish a task or when portal, tower, or locomotive cranes are used. When
cranes are moving while hoisting personnel, obey these rules:
o Restrict travel to a fixed track or runway.
o Limit travel to the radius of the boom during the lift.
o Keep the boom parallel to the direction of travel.

Page 150
ABG
o Do not allow employees to occupy the platform until a complete trial run has been performed.
o Do not hoist personnel until the condition and air pressure of the tires (if made of rubber) is
checked and the chart capacity for lifts is applied to remain under the 50 percent limit of the
hoist’s rated capacity.
Maintenance
Any deficiencies found in our cranes and derricks are repaired, or defective parts replaced, before continued use.
However, no modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment may be made
without the manufacturer’s written approval. If such modifications or changes are made, the capacity, operation,
and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals, must be changed accordingly. In no case may the original
safety factor of the equipment be reduced. The Company is responsible for ensuring the cranes and derricks are
capable of safe and reliable operation after any major repair or design modification.
While defective parts may be found, we prefer to invest time and effort into the proper upkeep of our equipment,
which results in day-to-day reliability. Keeping up with the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedules,
and completing the proper records, will also increase our cranes’ and derricks’ longevity and enhance their resale
value.
The Maintenance Department completes a receiving or delivery inspection whenever our company purchases
cranes or derricks, and he/she/they performs the recommended "breaking in" inspections and maintenance.
The Company follows the manufacturer’s operator instruction manual for daily maintenance. Periodic
maintenance (those completed monthly or less frequently) is done by a factory-trained-expert, or a dealer.
Posting
In order to aid in the use of consistent hand signals for crane and derrick operations, we post the signals at the job
site.
Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings, i.e., electrical power line
clearance requirements, or instructions, and are posted and visible to the operator while at the control station.
Recordkeeping & Certification
The Company is responsible for maintaining the following records on file:
- The log of all monthly periodic inspections on critical items in use (i.e., brakes, crane hooks, and ropes),
and include:
o The date the crane items were inspected,

Page 151
ABG
o The signature of the person who inspected the crane items,

o A serial number, or other identifier, for the crane inspected, and
o The most recent certification record (maintained on file until a new one is prepared).
o The most recent monthly periodic inspection (certification) record.
- A record of the annual inspection for each hoisting machine and piece of equipment used, including the
dates and results of the inspection.
- Inspection reports for the annual magnetic particle or other suitable crack detecting inspection.
Maintenance Records
Any results of any equipment specifications and limitations made by a qualified engineer (If we do not have
manufacturer's specifications and limitations for our equipment, determination of those limitations is made by a
qualified engineer).
Any written approval from the manufacturer of any modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe
operation of our equipment. In no case will the original safety factor of the equipment be reduced.
Any tests to see that employees are not exposed to unsafe concentrations of toxic gasses or oxygen-deficient
atmospheres (If our crane is going to be operated in an enclosed space, tests will be made).

Page 152
Critical Lift Permit
Project Project No. Date of Lift Time of Lift
Location Date Lift Plan Received (required for types B & C)
Crane Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Total Boom/Jib Length (ft.) at Time of Lift
Maximum Radius During Lift (pick, swing, and set) Swing Direction and Degree of Swing
Lift Elevation Boom Angle Manufacturer-rated Capacity

Max Min Pick Set
Will a Jib Be Used? Length (ft) Erected: ( ) Choker Size and Condition
Yes No Weight (lbs) Stowed: ( )
Component Weights Load Description and Weight
Jib/Boom Extension
Jib Ball and Hook Who Determined Weight of Load and Lift?
Upper Boom Point
Upper Point Ball and Hook Total Lift Load
Load Block
Slings and Miscellaneous Lifting Equipment Load Percent
Wire Rope Beneath Tip (if applicable)
Lifting Beam or Bars Rigging Safety Factor 5 To 1
TOTAL
Tag Line Required? Parts of Wire Rope on Block Weather Conditions (wind, rain, etc.)
Yes No
Electrical Hazards (if yes, explain) Soil Conditions
Underground Hazards? Yes No Other Hazards? Yes No

(if yes, explain): (if yes, explain):
Crane Operator’s Name Rigger’s Name Signal Person’s Name
SIGNATURES
Operator Craft Supervisor
Equipment Supervision Rigging Supervisor
Rigging Engineer Critical Lift Permit Issuer
Project/Construction Manager HSE Representative

ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE145
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................145
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................145
1.1 Potential Exposures.................................................................................................................................145
1.2 Properties and Effects..............................................................................................................................146
A. Physical Data...........................................................................................................................................146
B. Acute.......................................................................................................................................................146
C. Chronic....................................................................................................................................................148
D. First Aid...................................................................................................................................................148
1.3 Exposure Limits and Routes.....................................................................................................................148
A. Action Level.............................................................................................................................................148
B. Exposure Limits.......................................................................................................................................148
C. Routes of Entry........................................................................................................................................149
1.4 Plans........................................................................................................................................................149
2.0 MONITORING...............................................................................................................................................149
2.1 Request Past Sampling Results from Client.............................................................................................149
2.2 Notification of Results.............................................................................................................................149
2.3 Observation of Monitoring......................................................................................................................149
2.4 Industrial Hygiene Monitoring Methods..................................................................................................149
2.5 Monitoring Results..................................................................................................................................149
3.0 HSE SUPPORT TO LINE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................150
4.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................150
5.0 WORK PRACTICES........................................................................................................................................150
6.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................151

Page 154
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for minimizing exposure to silica.
SCOPE
 Monitoring
 HSE Support to Line Management
 Training
 Work Practices
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Action Level (AL) – Refers to an exposure one half the allowable limit (TLV-TWA).
Respirable Fraction – In an industrial hygiene (IH) sample, refers to those particles between 2 and 5 micrometers
in diameter that are small enough to penetrate the nose and upper respiratory system and be deposited deep
into the lungs. Particles that penetrate deeply into the respiratory system are generally beyond the ability of the
body’s natural clearance mechanisms of cilia and mucous, and are more likely to be retained.
Threshold Limit Value – Time-Weighted Average (TLV-TWA) – The TWA concentration for a conventional 8-hour
workday and a 40-hour work week, to which it is believed that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed, day
after day, without adverse effect.
Threshold Limit Value – Short-Term Exposure Limit (TLV-STEL) – The concentration to which it is believed that
workers can be exposed continuously for a short period of time without suffering from irritation, chronic or
irreversible tissue damage, or narcosis of sufficient degree to increase the likelihood of accidental injury, impair
self-rescue, or materially reduce work efficiency, and provided that the daily TLV-TWA is not exceeded. A STEL is a
15-minute TWA exposure that should not be exceeded at any time during a workday even if the 8-hour TWA is
within the TLV-TWA.
General Requirements
Potential Exposures
Work conducted in/around the following industries/activities may result in exposure to employees:
 Sand storms (naturally occurring)
 Mining (cutting, blasting, or drilling through sandstone and granite)
 Foundry work (grinding, moldings, shakeout, core room)
 Ceramics, clay, and pottery
 Stone cutting (sawing, abrasive blasting, chipping, grinding)

Page 155
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
 Glass manufacturing
 Dirt work or vehicular traffic on dirt roads
 Abrasive blasting
 Railroad (setting and laying track)
 Manufacturing and use of abrasives
 Manufacturing of soaps
 Demolition, removal, or salvage of structures where materials containing silica are
present
 Hand- or machine-mixing materials to create concrete or grout
 Construction (sandblasting/rock drilling/masonry work/jack hammering/tunneling)
 New construction, alteration, repair, or renovation of structures and substrates
containing silica
The industries/activities listed above are examples. The project HSE Representative will identify the areas or
operations involving the disturbance of silica that are likely to generate visible amounts of silica. The identified
areas or operations will be discussed as part of the new hire orientation, hazard communication, and, if required,
silica exposure training courses for employees.
Additionally, activities conducted using silica/silica-containing products—or that result in visible airborne silica—
will be identified on the Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Form 000.653.F0100, or the Safety Task Analysis (STA), Form
000.653.F0101, with controls established.
Properties and Effects
Silica occurs as a natural component of many materials in the construction and general industry. Crystalline silica
is always present in substantial quantities in sand, sandstone, and granite. Exposure over a long period of time
leads to fibrosis of the lung tissues with a subsequent loss of lung tissue — this is called silicosis. Employees
affected by silicosis usually suffer from shortness of breath and find it difficult to walk short distances on stairs.
Silicosis is incurable. Crystalline silica is a recognized human carcinogen.
Physical Data
Appearance: White powder

Odor: None
Odor Threshold: N/A
Explosive Limits: N/A
Melting Point: 3110 °F (1710 °C)
Vapor Pressure: N/A
Vapor Density: N/A
Ignition Temperature: Nonflammable
Acute
Irritant: Mild
Sensitization: Unlikely

Page 156
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
Eye Effects: Low concentrations may cause irritation to the lining of the eye. Repeated exposure to low
concentrations is reported to cause inflammation of the eye tissues, sensitivity to light, tearing, pain, and blurred
vision.
Skin Effects: May irritate sensitive skin.
Ingestion Effects: Ingestion is unlikely.

Page 157
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
Inhalation Effects:
An acute form of silicosis has occurred in a few workers exposed to very high concentrations of silica over periods
of as little as a few weeks. The history is one of progressive shortness of breath, fever, cough, and weight loss.
Chronic
Teratogen (may cause birth defects): No

Reproductive Hazard: No
Mutagen (may cause damage to DNA): No
Synergistic Effects
(more toxic when mixed with other chemicals): None reported
Carcinogenicity: NTP: Yes
IARC: Yes
OSHA: Yes
Medical Conditions
Aggravated by Exposure: Respiratory and heart
Chronic silicosis, the most common form of the disease, may go undetected for years in the early stages; in fact, a
chest X-ray may not reveal an abnormality until after 15 or 20-years of exposure. The body’s ability to fight
infections may be overwhelmed by silica dust in lungs, making workers more susceptible to certain illnesses such
as tuberculosis. As silicosis progresses, one or more of the following symptoms may develop:
 Shortness of breath following physical exertion
 Severe cough
 Fatigue
 Loss of appetite
 Chest pains
 Fever
Inhalation of quartz is classified as a human carcinogen.

First Aid
Skin/Eyes: Flush with clean, low-pressure water for 5–15 minutes.

Severe inhalation: Remove from contaminated area immediately. Give oxygen. If not breathing, give artificial
respiration. Do not attempt to rescue unless wearing self-contained breathing apparatus
Exposure Limits and Routes
Action Level
0.015 mg/m3 respirable fraction of crystalline silica.

Exposure Limits
0.025 mg/m3 respirable fraction of crystalline silica (ACGIH TLV).

Page 158
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
Routes of Entry
Skin Contact: Yes

Skin Absorption: No
Eye Contact: Yes
Inhalation: Yes
Ingestion: Unlikely
Plans
Where exposure limits are likely to be exceeded, a “silica compliance plan” or a JSA must be developed. The plan
will:
 Address the scope of work activities.
 Provide an initial exposure assessment.
 Prescribe exposure controls (such as water sprays, exhaust ventilation, working
inside enclosures with filtered air supplies), air-monitoring requirements, work
practices, dust control measures, personal protective equipment, and additional
information/requirements as appropriate.
Results of air or bulk sampling, calculations of potential silica exposure, and other data that demonstrate
compliance with this practice are attached to the plan/JSA.
MONITORING
Request Past Sampling Results from Client
Before working in operating facilities or areas with known sources of silica, each project will formally request
information from the client on past IH, air quality, or other sample results that may be used to indicate the levels
of exposure likely to be encountered by ABG and contractor employees. This request will be in writing and
documented in accordance with the project’s document control procedures. The written request and any
response will become part of the project records and will be retained in accordance with Practice 000.653.1500,
Records Management and Document Control.
Notification of Results
Notification of monitoring results will be in accordance with Practice 000.653.2007, Hazard Communications.
Observation of Monitoring
The monitoring process may be observed by employees whom the monitoring affects.
Industrial Hygiene Monitoring Methods
The common IH monitoring methods for silica are NIOSH laboratory analysis methods (as appropriate) 7500,
7501, 7601, 7602, and 7603 (http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/nmam/pdfs/7500.pdf)

Page 159
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
Monitoring Results
Monitoring results will be sent to the Corporate IH Manager in accordance with the schedule in Practice
000.653.2000, Industrial Hygiene Program Requirements.
HSE SUPPORT TO LINE MANAGEMENT
The HSE Representative, with support from the Corporate IH Manager, will perform the following:
 As part of the JSA and other hazard evaluation processes, identify and evaluate
crystalline silica hazards and potential exposures during the planning and conduct of
work.
 Review and approve the silica compliance plan or JSA.
 As necessary, quantitatively determine the presence of silica in materials, substrates,
and other media. This may involve review of material safety data sheets (MSDS), or
the collection of samples (bulk and/or airborne) for analysis by a qualified laboratory.
 Provide results of silica survey to management/supervision, along with information
regarding hazard potential and control measures. As appropriate, make
recommendations to management/supervision to maintain, modify, upgrade, or
downgrade controls accordingly.
 Take prompt corrective measures to eliminate hazards; such as recommending to
management/supervision to implement or modify engineering, administrative, work
practice, and personal protection (including respiratory protection) controls.
 Conduct an exposure assessment, as appropriate.
 In evaluating silica hazards and specifying controls for an operation, (a) use the best
available historical exposure monitoring data generated for other similar operations
or activities, (b) use objective data, and/or (c) plan and conduct initial monitoring to
determine exposures and assess the effectiveness of hazard controls.
 Determine exposure to crystalline silica periodically as work is conducted.
 Maintain effective records of jobs monitored, so that a historical database can be
used to specify controls and eliminate unnecessary and redundant monitoring for
future activities.
 Support project management/supervision in responding to exposures above
allowable limits when workers were not adequately protected.
 As appropriate, participate in pre-job and daily worker briefings regarding task-
specific crystalline silica hazards and controls, the silica compliance plan/JSA, work
practices, and other applicable information, including any changes that are made to
controls or to the silica compliance plan/JSA.
TRAINING
Training will be conducted in accordance with Practice 000.653.2007, Hazard Communication, for employees who
will or may be exposed to silica at/above the AL on any day.

Page 160
ABG
CRYSTALLINE SILICA
WORK PRACTICES
The following work practices will be implemented whenever activities that disturb materials containing more than
0.1 percent crystalline silica by weight are conducted:
 A JSA will be developed in accordance with Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task
Planning/Risk Analysis, to determine and document in writing those exposure control
measures determined to be needed. The JSA must be maintained with the project
records in accordance with Practice 000.653.1500, Records Management and
Document Control.
 Exposed surfaces will be maintained as free as practicable of silica-containing dust.
 Surfaces will not be blow-cleaned with compressed air or other forced air (such as
leaf blowers).
 Wet sweeping or vacuuming will be used to clean areas. If vacuuming is used for
cleaning, the exhaust air will be properly filtered to prevent release of airborne silica
back into the workroom – such as by using a HEPA-filtered vacuum.
 Clothes contaminated with silica will not be blown or shaken to remove dust.
 Carcinogen warnings will be placed on containers of materials containing more than
0.1 percent crystalline silica by weight. An intact pallet load of bricks while still
banded or packaged as it was received is considered a container.
 ABG- or contractor-owned/operated vehicles hauling shipments of crushed stone off
site must include hazard warnings concerning the carcinogenicity of crystalline silica
on their shipping papers or bills of lading.
REFERENCES

Forms:

Page 161
ABG
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................152
SCOPE153
Policy Statement.....................................................................................................................................................153
Employee Information and Training.......................................................................................................................153
General Offences requiring a warning and can lead to termination:.................................................................153
Training...................................................................................................................................................................154
Supervision.........................................................................................................................................................154
Employee Involvement...........................................................................................................................................154
Appropriate Control Measures...............................................................................................................................155
Consistent Enforcement.........................................................................................................................................155
Documentation.......................................................................................................................................................155
Class of Violations

Page 162
ABG
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
PURPOSE
The disciplinary system does not exist primarily to punish employees. Its purpose should be to control the work
environment so that workers are protected and accidents are prevented. A disciplinary system helps ensure
workplace safety and health by letting the ABG employees know what is expected of them. It provides workers
with opportunities to correct their behavior before an accident happens.
SCOPE
A disciplinary system is one of the keys to successfully implementing ABG’s safety and health program. It ensures
that the ABG rules and safe working practices are taken seriously by employees and are actually followed. It lets
employees know how ABG expects them to operate in relation to the goals of the safety and health program. And
it lays out the actions ABG will take if individuals do not meet the expectations. The employee’s supervisor and all
members of management are responsible for the enforcement of this disciplinary program.
Policy Statement
Employees need to know the ABG’s position on safety and health and what ABG expects of them. They need a
clear understanding of the rules and the consequences of breaking those rules. This is true in all areas of work, but
it is especially important for worker safety and health. As part of the policy statement, and in the employee safety
handbook, ABG has a written statement setting forth the disciplinary policy. ABG managers and supervisors will
always be on the lookout for safety violations and will conscientiously and vigorously enforce the commitment to
safety.
Employee Information and Training
It is important that employees understand the system and have a reference to turn to if they have any questions.
Therefore, in addition to issuing a written statement of the ABG’s disciplinary policy, ABG has drawn up a list of
what it considers major violations of company policy and less serious violations. This list specifies the disciplinary
actions that will be taken for first, second, or repeated offenses. This list is not all-inclusive other types of
violations can result in specific levels of disciplinary action relative to the seriousness of the violation and entirely
at ABG’s discretion.
General Offences requiring a warning and can lead to termination:
- Drinking alcohol, and/or drug abuse prior to or during working hours

- Fighting, provoking or engaging in an act of violence against another person on ABG (and owner/client)
property
- Theft
- Willful damage to property

Page 163
ABG
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
- Not using safety harnesses and lanyards when there is a potential for falling
- Removing and/or making inoperative safety guards on tools and equipment
- Tampering with machine safeguards or removing machine tags or locks
- Removing barriers and/or guardrails and not replacing them
- Failure to notify ABG of a hazardous situation and
- Other major violations of ABG rules or policies
- Minor traffic violations while using ABG (owned and/or rented) vehicles
- Failure to wear Personal Protective Equipment (eye protection, hearing protection, safety helmets, etc.).
- Failure to follow recognized industry practices
- Failure to follow rules regarding the use of company equipment or materials
- Major traffic violations while using a company vehicle
- Creating unsafe or unsanitary conditions or poor housekeeping habits
- Threatening an act of violence against another person while on company property
- Misrepresentation of facts
- Unauthorized use of ABG property
- Excessive tardiness and late to work
- Disrespect and/or insubordination to authority
- Other violations of ABG policies and rules
- Engaging in horseplay
Training
Training can reduce the need for disciplinary action. ABG shall instruct employees in the importance of workplace
safety and health, the need to develop safety habits, operations, safe work practices, and the hazards they
control, and the standards of behavior that ABG expects. ABG employees must understand the disciplinary system
and the consequences of any deliberate, unacceptable behavior.
Supervision
Supervision includes both training and corrective action. Ongoing monitoring of ABG employees' work and safety
habits gives ABG supervisors the opportunity to correct any problems before serious situations develop. In most
cases, effective supervision means correcting a problem before issuing any punishment.
Where the relationship between employees and their supervisors is open and interactive, problems are discussed
and solutions are mutually agreed upon. This type of relationship fosters a work environment where the need for
disciplinary action is reduced. When such action is needed, the parties are more likely to perceive it as corrective
than punitive.
Employee Involvement

Page 164
ABG
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
Employees are encouraged to help informally in the enforcement of rules and practices. The intent here is not to
turn employees into spies and informers, but to encourage them to be their "brother's keeper" and to watch out
for the safety and health of their colleagues. Many employers successfully have encouraged an atmosphere -- a
company "culture" – where employees readily speak up when they see an easily corrected problem, for example,
a coworker who needs reminding to put on safety goggles.
ABG employees deserve the opportunity to correct their own behavior problems. An effective disciplinary system
is a two-way process. Once a problem is spotted, discuss it with the employee, who should be given one
opportunity to change the behavior or correct the problem. Only after this discussion should disciplinary action be
taken, however the severity and type of behavior problem will ultimately determine the disciplinary action.
Appropriate Control Measures
Disciplinary actions need to be proportionate to the seriousness of the offense and the frequency of its
occurrence
Disciplinary procedures should be followed with an explanation. ABG will provide feedback to the employee on
what behavior is unacceptable, why the corrective action is necessary, and how the employee can prevent future
violations and disciplinary action. In addition, take time to recognize an employee who improves or corrects
his/her behavior.
Consistent Enforcement
Workers must realize that safe work practices are a condition of employment and that unsafe practices will not be
tolerated. It is necessary, therefore, that the employer has a disciplinary system that is implemented fairly and
consistently.
If the ABG disciplinary system is to work well and be accepted by the ABG workforce, the system applies equally
to everyone. This includes subjecting managers and supervisors to similar rules and similar or even more stringent
disciplinary procedures.
For minor violations, supervisors shall meet with the employee to discuss the infraction and inform the employee
of the rule or procedure that was violated AND describe the corrective action needed to remedy the situation.
Documentation
One key to ensuring fairness and consistency in a disciplinary system is keeping good records. It is in the best
interest of both ABG and the employee to have written rules and disciplinary procedures. It is just as important to
document instances of good or poor safety and health behavior, including discussions with the employee, and to
place relevant information in the employee's personnel file.

Page 165
ABG
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
Documentation serves a variety of purposes. It helps ABG to track the development of a problem, corrective
actions, and the impact of measures taken. It provides information so ABG can keep employees informed of
problems that need correction.
When ABG is evaluating the managerial and supervisory skills of a supervisor, it provides a useful record of how
they handled problems.
If warnings, retraining, and other corrective actions fail to achieve the desired effect, and if ABG decides to
discharge an employee, then documentation becomes even more critical. Conversely, ABG will conduct an annual
clearing of the personnel files of employees whose good overall safety records are marred by minor warnings.

1005-a01.doc Class Of Violations
1005-a03.doc Disc. Process. Verbal Reprimand
1005-a02.doc Disc. Process. Written Reprimand Rec.

Page 166
ABG
DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................152
SCOPE158
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................158
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................158
1.1 Contractor Selection Criteria...................................................................................................................158
1.2 Monitoring Project Performance.............................................................................................................160
2.0 SURVEYS AND INSPECTIONS........................................................................................................................160
2.1 Initial Survey............................................................................................................................................160
2.2 Ongoing Inspections................................................................................................................................160
3.0 DEMOLITION PLAN.......................................................................................................................................160
4.0 LOCK, TAG, TRY, AND TEST...........................................................................................................................161
5.0 STRUCTURES SUBJECT TO COLLAPSE...........................................................................................................161
6.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.............................................................................................................................161
7.0 BARRICADING..............................................................................................................................................162
8.0 ACCESS.........................................................................................................................................................162
9.0 TEMPORARY BRACING.................................................................................................................................162
10.0 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................................................162
11.0 HOUSEKEEPING............................................................................................................................................162
12.0 MATERIALS DISPOSITION.............................................................................................................................163
13.0 BLASTING.....................................................................................................................................................163
14.0 PROJECT CONCLUSION.................................................................................................................................163
15.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................164
16.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................164

Page 167
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for demolition operations.
SCOPE
 Surveys and Inspections
 Demolition Plan
 Lock, Tag, Try, and Test
 Structures Subject to Collapse
 Hazardous Materials
 Ongoing Inspection
 Barricading
 Access
 Temporary Bracing
 Equipment
 Housekeeping
 Materials Disposition
 Blasting
 Project Conclusion
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Competent Person - One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or
Demolition generally will start at the top of a structure and progress downward.
Stairways and other access ways will be inspected and maintained as long as possible and will be lighted and
maintained in a safe condition.
1.1 Contractor Selection Criteria
Site demolition generally requires the services of contractors specializing in demolition operations. Those
contractors may, in turn, use subcontractors and hire special equipment to satisfactorily perform any demolition.
Those responsible for selecting demolition contractors must ensure that an appropriately experienced company is
engaged.

Page 168
ABG
To protect the interest of ABG and the plant owner, contractor selection criteria must include the contractor’s
ability to manage the safety and environmental impact of its operations. If a trade organization regulates or
represents dismantling and demolition contractors in a particular country, Site Management should ask members
of that body to submit tenders. Management should also carry out a pre-contractual evaluation of potential
candidates with respect to safety and environmental awareness and competence, as well as relevant experience
and incident statistics. When possible, onsite visits to locations where candidates are working should be
arranged.
Refer to Attachment 02 for an example of questions that should be asked of contractors before selection.
After demolition begins, technical or commercial factors may require changes to the original plan. The contract
terms should delineate the principal contractor’s responsibility to inform Site Management in advance of any
proposed modification. Site Management should then approve any acceptable modification.
Once demolition begins, site management and the contractor must meet at least once each week to monitor
progress. Any problems that may have arisen during the previous week should be resolved during these
meetings. The proposed work plan for the coming week should be reviewed and relevant safety or environmental
control aspects highlighted. Meeting minutes should be issued to al attendees as quickly as possible after each
meeting to ensure that all action items are completed.
In addition to weekly coordination meetings, Site Management should safeguard its interests by monitoring the
contractor’s performance. Matters to be monitored, either by written agreement with the contractor or through
the contract itself, include the following:
 Right of access to the site by representatives
 Frequency of safety reviews and method of reporting
 Grounds for halting work and procedures for resolving disputes over HSE
related-matters
 Defining responsibilities of all parties for dealing with emergencies
Where appropriate, each contract should incorporate provisions that enable ABG to terminate a contractor’s
services and the services of employees or of subcontractors in the event of unsatisfactory HSE performance.
Site Management should require documentary evidence of the following:
 Current and valid certificates of periodic examination of cranes, lifting tackle, air
receivers, and other critical equipment
 Trained, experienced vehicle drivers
 Reporting program for accidents and incidents
 Ongoing, adequate monitoring of employees exposed to toxic or radiation hazards,
including any evidence required of satisfactory initial medical examination; hazards
include lead, asbestos, and X-ray
 Correct use of personal protective equipment
 Safe treatment and disposal of hazardous substances
 Observance of agreed working hours; shift changes should be coordinated so that
adequate safety, medical, and fire coverage is always available
 Appropriate safe work practices for handling debris, fumes, dust, and spillages to
minimize risk to personnel in adjacent areas

Page 169
ABG
 The correct use of scaffolding, ladders, chutes, cranes, hoists, vehicle, and cutting
equipment
1.2 Monitoring Project Performance
Before a demolition begins, Site Management, contractors’ site representatives, and where appropriate, local HSE
authorities should meet to address the proposed plan of work and any HSE management features of the contract.
2.0 SURVEYS AND INSPECTIONS
2.1 Initial Survey
Before starting any dismantling or demolition operations (such as structures, piping, walls, and floors), the
possibility of unplanned collapse must be assessed/surveyed by a Competent Person. Competent Persons are
designated in accordance with Practice 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements.
Those assigned the responsibility of planning must ensure that appropriate permits are issued.
The survey will aid in determining the nature and extent of hazards, and to facilitate the creation of an
appropriate tender document. During the survey subsequent phases of a project, the Competent Person should
be assisted by personnel familiar with such processes as electrical services, isolation systems, drains, methods of
cleaning or shutting down contaminated plants, and interaction with third parties in the case of pipelines and
jetties.
An example of a survey report is attached as Attachment 01.
The survey must include the condition of the structure to be demolished as it pertains to framing, floors, walls,
risk of unplanned collapse, and any adjacent structure where employees may be exposed to risk. Work will be so
planned that no employee will cut beams that support his work platform.
The Competent Person performing the survey will provide a written report the Site Manager or designee. The
survey report becomes the basis for developing a demolition plan.
2.2 Ongoing Inspections
A Competent Person will continually inspect the structure to ensure the stability of remaining columns and walls
where employees are working.
3.0 DEMOLITION PLAN
Once a firm directive of demolition has been issued, a written plan outlining the specific sequence of events for
demolition must be prepared. This plan must be approved by the management team overseeing the project and
reviewed by the HSE Representative before demolition work begins. The final demolition plan may not be
deviated from unless a safer method of demolition is discovered, and reviewed and approved by the original plan
approvers. Any changes must be documented in the plan.
All planned lifts must be reviewed to determine which may qualify as “critical lifts.”

Page 170
ABG
All critical lifts must conducted in accordance with Practice 000.502.0100, Administrative Practice for Rigging and
000.502.1000, Cranes and Rigging – Operations (Site-Specific).
The Demolition Plan will cover items such as the following:
 Precisely define the scope of work.
 Identify each process material or service to be isolated and specifying the method of
isolation. All pipe work, ducting, and cables, both above and below ground, must be
taken into account.
 Identify all hazardous substances that should be removed under supervision before
demolition commences. Specialist contractors may be required to safely remove
asbestos, lead compounds, and sludge.
 Critically examine systems and procedures for controlling hot work.
 Note any limiting conditions or circumstances that a contractor might need to be
aware of to prepare a realistic tender. Such conditions include limits on work hours,
permit system operations, and special environmental considerations.
 Specify requirements for initial medical examination of all contractor employees,
especially if site cleanup involves burning lead or lead-coated materials.
These precautions are intended to place most of an installation into a clean state, from oil, gas, and other
residues, and reduce the possibility of incidents arising through errors or misunderstandings once demolition
contractors are on site.
4.0 LOCK, TAG, TRY, AND TEST
As directed in Practice 000.653.3315, Hazardous Energy Control, all electric, gas, steam, or other process or utility
lines must be identified, verified at the source before capping/blinding, or otherwise cut before any work is
begun.
5.0 STRUCTURES SUBJECT TO COLLAPSE
Where personnel are required to enter structures that are subject to collapse due to ongoing demolition work,
work areas must have adequate shoring in place to prevent untimely collapse. Structures will be inspected daily
by a Competent Person, and inspections will be documented and filed.
6.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Asbestos or other toxic insulation materials, glass, and other hazardous materials must be removed, or otherwise
ensured to be safe, before the start of general structural demolition.
 Identification of the materials and the proper abatement/removal processes will be
implemented. Hazardous substances, process materials, and services include the
following:
 Residual feedstocks, process materials, and products in pipelines, piping and
equipment, and storage vessels and drains
 Catalyst materials in process vessels
 Residual chemical stocks in treatment systems

Page 171
ABG
 Surface deposits such as lead in tankage, pyrophoric iron, and vanadium in fired
heaters and boilers
 Insulation materials, particularly asbestos
 Electrical, water, steam, compressed air, and any other services unnecessary for
any remaining activities
 Interconnecting piping such as flare or blowdown systems
 All sources of ionizing radiation
 Disposal of materials will be in accordance with applicable standards.
7.0 BARRICADING
Openings in elevated workplaces will be protected with barricades.

Where debris is dropped through floor openings or through walls to the ground below, chutes will be used to
control flying debris, dust, and other hazards. Chute openings will be protected and gates provided to close
chutes when the discharge end is not protected.
Single-story drop areas will be barricaded with a clear area around it proportional to the height from which
materials are dropped.
8.0 ACCESS
Entrances to the building will be covered with sheds or canopies designed to allow employees safe access and
provide overhead protection from falling debris. They will extend at lest 6 feet (1.8 meters) away from the
structure and be at least 2 feet (0.6 meter) wider than the entrance and capable of withstanding a loading of 5
lb./sq. ft.
All other access ways will be barricaded.
Safe, temporary access ways to all work areas will be provided where permanent access ways are removed.
9.0 TEMPORARY BRACING
Walls left standing must be capable of self-support or will be shored. Wind loading will be factored in as required.
No cement or masonry walls will be knocked down onto above ground floors unless they are designed to handle
the anticipated impact loading.
Skeleton steel will be dismantled tier by tier and no lower load-bearing members cut until upper stories are
removed. Steel left in place will be self-supporting or will be adequately braced.
Structural supports and beams left up will be cleared of loose materials as demolition progresses downward.
10.0 EQUIPMENT
Demolition equipment will meet appropriate crane and heavy equipment safety requirements.
The demolition ball will not exceed 50 percent of the cranes rated capacity at specified boom length/angle and
will not exceed 25 percent of the line-breaking strength.
The ball will be connected by a swivel-type attachment.

Page 172
ABG
11.0 HOUSEKEEPING
Debris and trash will be continually wetted to keep dust levels down.
Trash and debris will be removed daily so as to minimize fire hazards and maximize safe access to, and egress
from, the work area.
Hazardous materials will be separated and disposed of in accordance with applicable standards.
12.0 MATERIALS DISPOSITION
The environmental impact of the demolition material may be considerable; therefore, Site Management should
seek the advice of professional environmental services where necessary.
Environmental issues to be considered include the following:
 Dumping rubble or potential spillage of material
 Potential traffic hazards while in transit
 Disposal of contaminated soil and sludge
 Cutting up and removing plant components
 Burning wood and other combustibles, taking into account possible toxic fumes from
contaminants
 Draining lakes and reservoirs and pumping out sumps, tanks, and drains
 Filling shafts, pits, trenches, sumps, and tunnels
 Removing or making safe underground pipe work, cabling, foundations, and piling
 Removing superstructure and piling from jetties
 Access to and method of excavating cross-country pipelines, particularly where they
cross rivers, roads, railways, and utilities
 Landscaping, regrading, and reinstating land or fences for cross-country pipelines
 Transporting or towing heavy plant or structures to another site or location for
breaking
13.0 BLASTING
Demolition by blasting will require specific written permission from the client.
Blasting must be conducted by certified blasters in compliance with applicable standards.
14.0 PROJECT CONCLUSION
At the conclusion of demolition operations, ABG should perform a final HSE review with the contractor to
determine whether the site is ready for a new owner or can be left without further attention. Careful supervision
of the contractor during the final phases of a project is required to ensure that safe conditions are established
before the contractor leaves the site.

Page 173
ABG
15.0 REFERENCES

000.502.0100 Administrative Practice for Rigging (ABG)
(ABG)
16.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Sample Questions for an Initial Survey Report
Attachment 02 Sample Questions for Contractor Selection

Page 174
ABG
DRIVING SAFETY
DRIVING SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................165
SCOPE166
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................166
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................166
1.0 TRAVEL BY AUTOMOBILE...............................................................................................................................166
2.0 TRAVEL BY AIR TRANSPORTATION.................................................................................................................167
3.0 HOTELS...........................................................................................................................................................167
4.0 REFERENCES...................................................................................................................................................168

Page 175
ABG
DRIVING SAFETY
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for traveling by vehicle or airplane.
SCOPE
 Travel by Automobile
 Travel by Air Transportation
 Hotels
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
TRAVEL BY AUTOMOBILE
When traveling by automobile, the following should be considered:
 Each project support organization should have a process developed and
communicated to affected employees to verify that the immediate supervisor is
notified of travel being undertaken and that the travel route and departure and
arrival times are known.
 Each project support organization should have a process developed and
communicated to affected employees to notify management of an accident and
arrange for appropriate emergency response/assistance.
Only vehicles equipped with seat belts will be used. Seat belts must be worn at all times, whether you are a driver
or a passenger in the vehicle. Where possible, use vehicles equipped with air bags.
Before operating a vehicle, the driver/operator will make sure it is mechanically sound and properly equipped for
safety; check for fluid leaks, lights, tires and tools, dashboard controls, brakes, and wipers to make sure they are in
good working condition and adjusted for your convenient/emergency use.
All traffic signs, laws, rules, and regulations must be obeyed.
No one is allowed to operate any vehicle while under the influence of drugs or alcohol.
Drivers/operators will not pick up hitchhikers or unknown motorists whose vehicles are disabled; notify
authorities or call for assistance when it is convenient to stop.
Vehicle operators must comply with established and accepted safe procedures, including this practice and the
following statutory requirements and consensus standards:
 State motor vehicle laws, including having a valid state driver’s license in their
possession.

Page 176
ABG
DRIVING SAFETY
 U.S. Department of Transportation regulations or in-country requirements as

applicable.
Operators of company vehicles must notify their immediate supervisor upon suspension or revocation of their
state driver’s licenses.
Before entering a motor vehicle, the driver/operator will walk completely around the vehicle to check for the
following:
 Obstructions (such as posts, fire hydrants, and holes)
 Top and side clearances
 Body and glass damage
 Tire inflation
 Obvious mechanical defects
Driver/operators will not wear any device that restricts or impairs hearing or vision (such as radio headphones or
eyeglass side shields made of opaque material).
Driver/operators will not load any vehicle in a manner that obscures the driver’s view or that interferes with
operating the vehicle safely; ensure that vehicles with obstructed views to the rear are fitted with side view
mirrors; do not operate vehicles with materials on the dashboard.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements, regarding the use of a cellular phone, and the
prohibition of the use of hand-held devices.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1001. Training and Orientation, regarding the recommendation of a Defensive Driving
course for ABG employees who drive a great deal (16 hours per month or more) as part of their position
description.
TRAVEL BY AIR TRANSPORTATION
Employees are prohibited from piloting personal or rented aircraft on company business or on any trip that could
be construed as ABG business unless they are employed by ABG as pilots.
Employees will be responsible for the following:
 Prepare for a potential flight emergency by listening carefully to the flight
attendant’s safety orientation.
 Locate the nearest emergency exit.
 Use care when entering or exiting the airplane.
 Use handrails and be cautious of low headroom conditions and overhead storage
compartments at eye level.
 Open overhead storage compartments carefully because their contents may shift
during flight.
 Keep your seat belt fastened at all times when you are in your seat.
 Communicate known pre-existing medical conditions and required actions to the
flight attendant.
 In case of injury, insist that a crewmember fill out an accident report.

Page 177
ABG
DRIVING SAFETY
 Make reservations for approved carrier and routing through the company travel
department or an approved provider.
HOTELS
Employees will be responsible for the following:

 Check for travel warnings at the local Embassy
 Where possible, reserve rooms on the lower floors
 Locate the nearest exit
 Always review the hotel’s emergency evacuation procedures
 Do not smoke in bed
 Do not provide your room number to strangers
REFERENCES

000.653.1001 Training and Orientation

Page 178
ABG
EARTHWORK CONCRETE & MASONARY
EARTHWORK, CONCRETE & MASONRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................165
SCOPE170
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................170
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................170
2.0 EARTHWORK................................................................................................................................................170
2.1 Motorized Heavy Equipment Operation (Including Drivers and Operators)............................................170
2.2 Haul Road and Work Area.......................................................................................................................170
2.3 Working Near Overhead Power Lines......................................................................................................171
3.0 CONCRETE....................................................................................................................................................171
3.1 General Requirements.............................................................................................................................171
3.2 Mixing......................................................................................................................................................172
3.3 Equipment and Tools...............................................................................................................................172
3.4 Forms and Shoring...................................................................................................................................172
3.5 Bracing.....................................................................................................................................................173
3.6 Climbing Formwork.................................................................................................................................174
3.7 Rebar.......................................................................................................................................................174
3.8 Transport.................................................................................................................................................174
3.9 Pumping..................................................................................................................................................174
3.10 Stripping..................................................................................................................................................175
3.11 Precast Concrete.....................................................................................................................................175
4.0 MASONRY....................................................................................................................................................175
5.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................175

Page 179
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for earthwork, concrete, and masonry construction.
SCOPE
 Earthwork
 Concrete
 Masonry
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Qualified Person— One who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who
by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve or resolve
problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Equipment will be inspected according to manufacturer’s recommendations and maintained in a safe condition. If
a deficiency has the potential for causing bodily injury to employees, the equipment must be tagged with a
Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag, Form 000.653.F0301 or equal, to avoid operation. The supervisor must be
notified when equipment is tagged out of service.
2.0 EARTHWORK
2.1 Motorized Heavy Equipment Operation (Including Drivers and Operators)
Refer to Practice 000.653.3200, Motorized Heavy Equipment and Light Vehicles.

2.2 Haul Road and Work Area
Before being placed into service, earthwork equipment will have a weed clearance certificate and be fitted with a
2-way radio that provides communications for operators and supervisors on site and can be used in the event of
an emergency.
Before commencement of any work, a Permit to Work must be obtained detailing the location of earthwork and
clearing of vegetation. Refer to Practice 000.653.1302, Permit to Work.
The responsible work supervisor will verify that the construction (including the width, gradient, camber, and
radius of curvature of bends) of each road and area at the site will enable the safe operation of motorized heavy

Page 180
ABG
equipment authorized to travel on the road or in the area. The construction will also take into account the size,
speed, loads, and operating characteristics of the equipment to be used and site conditions, including the effects
of weather.
Haul roads must be at least 3 times the width of the largest vehicle running on it where practical.
Employees (such as surveyors) who are required to work around earthwork equipment will wear high visibility
clothing.
Access ways, direction, and speed of travel on site roads must be arranged before work commences, and a
physical plan or drawing made available before work commences.
Excavation material will be removed if practical and stored at an agreed upon location until backfilling is required.
Overburden material will be stored at an agreed upon location until remediation operations commence. Excess
diggings and redundant civil materials such as concrete and reinforcing will be stored or disposed in accordance
with the project Environmental Management Plan.
The driver of a haul or dump truck must not enter or leave the cab while the truck is being loaded.
The driver of a shovel or loader must not cause the bucket of the shovel or loader to be traversed over the driver’s
cab of a truck or other motor vehicle during loading operations.
The responsible work supervisor must confirm that the design, layout, construction, and maintenance of any
dump or stockpile takes into account:
 The nature of the material dumped
 The size and weight of the equipment used
 The site conditions, including stability of the area on which the dump is built
 The weather conditions
Rock or other material must not be dumped from a haul or dump truck over a bank or into a bin unless there is an
effective backstop provided or an employee (spotter) suitably stationed to guide and direct the driver to a safe
dumping position, via radio communications or hand signals.
Marker guides, lighting, or other effective signs must be placed to indicate to the driver the limit of safe approach
to the tipping area when dumping is being carried out (whether by day or night).
Drivers of trucks delivering materials to site in multi-stage tippers or side un-loaders must take into account the
gradient of the ground on which they are tipping, the nature of the material being discharged and to watch out
for "hang up" of material during discharge. If necessary, a spotter must be used to direct discharge via radio
communication or hand signals.
The contractor or earthwork superintendent will decide to suspend earth-moving activity or relocate to other
areas in the event of inclement weather.
Roads will be maintained regularly, swept clean of rubble, holes filled, and watered to suppress dust.

Page 181
ABG
3.0 CONCRETE
3.1 General Requirements
When performing lift-slab operations, the requirements of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard
A10.9, Section 11, or applicable in-country standard(s), must be followed.
Scaffolds will be constructed, maintained, and used in accordance with Practice 000.653.3303, Scaffolds.
Construction loads will not be placed on a concrete structure or portion of a concrete structure unless, based on
information received from a Qualified Person, the structure or portion of the structure is capable of supporting
the loads.
Employees (except those who are essential) are not permitted behind the jack during tensioning operations. Signs
and barricades will be erected to limit employees' access to the post-tensioning area during tensioning
operations.
Employee are not permitted to ride in concrete buckets or work under concrete buckets while buckets are being
elevated or lowered into position. Employees will be required to wear proper clothing (such as boots, gloves,
hard hats, and safety glasses) to prevent cement burns. Employees applying cement, sand, and water mixtures
through a pneumatic hose must wear face protection in addition to safety glasses.
3.2 Mixing
Storage bins, silos, and containers must be equipped with conical or tapered bottoms and have mechanical or
pneumatic control to pour the material. Entry into storage facilities will be permitted in accordance with lock and
tag procedure in effect at that time.
Mixers with 1 cubic yard or larger loading skips must be equipped with a mechanical device to clear the skip of
materials, with guardrails installed on each side of the skip.
Note: All potentially hazardous energy sources must be locked out and tagged before
performing maintenance or repair on equipment.
3.3 Equipment and Tools
Manually guided, powered, and rotating concrete toweling machines will be equipped with a control switch
(deadman switch) that automatically shuts off the power whenever the operators remove their hands from the
equipment handles.
Concrete buggy handles must not extend beyond the wheels on either side of the buggy.
Concrete buckets equipped with hydraulic or pneumatic gates must have positive safety latches or equivalent
safety devices to prevent premature or accidental dumping.
Tests for carbon monoxide must be made frequently when using fuel-powered machines inside enclosed spaces
or buildings.
Blades of masonry saws must be covered with a semicircular enclosure to retain blade fragments. A method for
retaining blade fragments must be incorporated in the design of the semicircular enclosure.

Page 182
ABG
Where there is a possibility of contact with energized electrical conductors, handles on bull floats will be
constructed of nonconductive material or insulated with nonconductive sheath.
3.4 Forms and Shoring
Formwork and shoring will be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained so as to safely support any
and all vertical and lateral loads that may be imposed upon it during placement of concrete. Drawings of plans
showing the jack layout, formwork, shoring, working decks, and scaffolding will be available at the jobsite.
Sills for shoring will be sound, rigid, and capable of safely carrying vertical and lateral loads that may be imposed
upon them at any time. Base-plates, shore heads, extension devices, and adjustment screws will be in firm
contact with the footing sill and the form material. Eccentric loads on shore heads and similar members must be
designed for such loading. Ground load compaction must be checked to verify that the imposed load can be
sustained.
Shoring for tiered single post shores and erected shoring must be designed and inspected by a qualified designer
and by an engineer qualified in structural design.
Shoring equipment must be inspected before erecting. If shoring equipment is unsafe, do not use it and dispose
of it safely so that no one else will use it.
Forms and shores (except those used for slab-on-grade and slip forms) will not be removed until it is determined
that the concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its weight and superimposed loads. Determination is
based on compliance with one of the following:
 Plans and specifications stipulate conditions for removal of forms and shores, and
these conditions have been followed.
 The concrete has been properly tested with an appropriate American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard test method designed to indicate the
concrete compressive strength, and the test results indicate that the concrete has
gained sufficient strength to support its weight and superimposed loads.
Erected shoring equipment must be re-inspected immediately after placement of concrete.

Concrete forms and shoring will not be removed until the concrete gains sufficient strength to support its weight
and superimposed loads.
Employees removing formwork or shoring at elevations in excess of 6 feet (1.8 meters) must wear and use fall
protection equipment (refer to Practice 000.653.3001, Fall Protection).
When climbing formwork, forms must be designed and adequately braced to prevent excessive distortion.
3.5 Bracing
Single post shores must be vertically aligned, spliced to prevent misalignment, and adequately braced in
2 mutually perpendicular directions at the splice level. Each tier also must be diagonally braced in the same
2 directions. Single post shores should not be adjusted after the placement of concrete.
The spacing between towers and cross-brace spacing in erected shoring will not exceed that shown on the layout,
and all locking devices will be in the closed position.

Page 183
ABG
Shoring will be laterally supported by attachment to the structure.

Freestanding masonry walls will be braced and supported to provide lateral stability against wind or other forces.
Re-shoring must be erected, as original forms and shores are removed, whenever the concrete is required to
support loads in excess of its capacity.
3.6 Climbing Formwork
Steel rods or pipes of vertical slip forms on which jacks climb or by which forms are lifted must be specifically
designed and adequately braced when not encased in concrete. Forms must be designed to prevent excessive
distortion of the structure during the jacking operation. Vertical slip forms must be provided with scaffolds or
work platforms where employees are required to work or pass.
Jacks and vertical supports must be positioned so that the loads do not exceed the rated capacity. Jacks or other
lifting devices must be provided with mechanical dogs or other automatic holding devices to support the slip
forms in case of power supply or lifting mechanism failure.
The form structure must be maintained within all design tolerances during the jacking operation and must not
exceed the safe rate of lift.
3.7 Rebar
Employee are not permitted to place or tie reinforcing steel more than 6 feet (2 meters) above any working
surface unless the employee is protected by the use of a safety harness or equivalent fall protection.
All protruding reinforcing steel onto and into which employees could fall, must be (for vertical rebar) guarded to
eliminate the possibility of impalement, or (for horizontal rebar) capped to prevent abrasion/laceration injury.
Note: To protect from impalement, guards, caps, or covers must be manufactured for
that purpose or otherwise withstand a drop test of 250 pounds (114 kilograms)
from a 10-foot (3.05-meter) elevation.
Employees working adjacent to rebar (presenting an impalement hazard) must wear a work-positioning belt and a
safety harness attached to a lifeline or suitable anchorage point.
Employees must wear gloves when placing or tying rebar.
Reinforcing mats (used as a walkway) will be provided with planking to provide safe footing. A 2-part sling will be
used when moving bundles of rebar by crane over 20 feet (6 meters) in length. Wire mesh rolls will be secured at
each end to prevent a recoiling action. Rebar for walls, piers, columns, and similar vertical structures must be
properly guyed and supported to prevent collapse
3.8 Transport
Positive safety latches or similar safety devices must be installed on hydraulic or pneumatic gates of concrete
buckets to prevent premature or accidental dumping.
Buckets will be suspended from shackles or approved safety-type hooks.

Page 184
ABG
3.9 Pumping
Pipe supports of concrete pumping system will be designed to 100 percent overload. Compressed air hoses will
use only fail-safe joint connectors to prevent separation of sections when pressurized. Tremies, elephant trunks,
and other such sections will be secured with fail-safe chain or wire rope in addition to regular couplings or
connections.
Concrete buggies (Georgia buggy) handles will not extend beyond the wheels on either side of the buggy.
3.10 Stripping
Forms and shores (except those used for slabs-on-grade and slip forms) must not be removed until the concrete
gains sufficient strength to support its weight and superimposed loads. Compliance with the plans and
specifications for removal of forms and shores, and proper testing with an appropriate American Society of
Testing Material (ASTM) standard test method can help determine if the concrete has gained sufficient strength.
Re-shoring also must not be removed until the concrete being supported has gained adequate strength to support
its weight and loads upon it.
Employees removing formwork or shoring at elevations of 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more will wear and use safety
harnesses with lanyards being attached to a lifeline or the structure, or work from a suitably guarded platform;
refer to Practice 000.653.3001.
3.11 Precast Concrete
Precast wall units, structural framing, and tilt-up wall panels must be adequately supported to prevent
overturning and to prevent collapse until permanent connections are completed.
A limited access area must be established and barricaded before precast concrete work begins. Only employees
actively engaged in erecting the precast will be permitted to enter this area. Employees will not be permitted
under precast concrete members when they are being tilted or lifted.
Lifting inserts that are embedded or otherwise attached to tilt-up precast concrete members must be capable of
supporting at least 2 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to them. Other lifting inserts must
be capable of supporting at least 4 times the maximum intended load.
Lifting hardware also must be capable of supporting at least 5 times the maximum intended load.
4.0 MASONRY
Whenever a masonry wall is constructed, a limited access zone must be established as follows:
 Establish the limited access zone before starting construction of a masonry wall.
 Make the zone equal to the height of the wall to be constructed plus 4 feet
(1.2 meters) for the entire length of the wall.
 Establish the limited access zone on the opposite side of the wall from the scaffold.
 Restrict the zone to those actively engaged in the wall construction.

Page 185
ABG
The zone will be kept in place until the wall is supported well enough to prevent it from overturning or collapsing.
If the wall is over 8 feet (2.4 meters) high, the zone will be kept in place until the permanent supporting elements
of the structure are in place.
5.0 REFERENCES

000.653.1302 Permit to Work
000.653.3001 Fall Protection
000.653.3200 Motorized Heavy Equipment and Light Vehicles
Forms
Non-ABG Documents:
ANSI A10.9, Section 11 Safety Requirements for Concrete and Masonry
Work

Page 186
ABG
EATING AND SANITATION FACILITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................177
SCOPE178
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................178
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................178
1.0 EATING FACILITIES..........................................................................................................................................178
2.0 WASHING FACILITIES......................................................................................................................................178
3.0 DRINKING WATER..........................................................................................................................................179
4.0 TOILET FACILITIES...........................................................................................................................................179

Page 187
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the minimum requirements for maintaining the sanitation of eating areas, restrooms, and
other related facilities used by employees at a project/field site.
SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections
 Eating Facilities
 Washing Facilities
 Drinking Water
 Toilet Facilities
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
1.0 EATING FACILITIES
The location of eating facilities will be identified at the start of any project/site. Eating facilities will be located in
areas that will allow employees to eat without exposure to work activities, chemicals, fumes, or airborne
contaminates from nearby process or operations activities.
Designated eating areas will be provided with suitable tables and chairs (or picnic tables) adequate for the
number of employees that will be using the facility. The eating facility should, at a minimum, be covered to
provide shade and protection from rain and snow. The shelter that is built over any designated eating area must
be designed and built to withstand anticipated forces associated with poor weather conditions relative to the
climate (such as snow loads, heavy rain, and wind).
Designated eating facilities must be kept clean and orderly at all times. Debris and food scraps will not be allowed
to accumulate anywhere in or near the facility. An adequate number of waste receptacles will be provided, which
will be of appropriate construction and equipped with snug-fitting lids for the purpose of minimizing the attraction
of insects, mice, and other vermin. All waste receptacles will be emptied daily.
Vending machines and other electrical appliances must be installed according to all applicable electrical codes.
Electrical installations and appliances must be sheltered from wet weather.
An adequate number of fire extinguishers will be provided in the immediate vicinity where electrical devices are in
use and/or where smoking is allowed.
The use of torches, space heaters, and other heat-producing devices not intended for heating or cooking food will
not be used for heating or cooking food.

Page 188
ABG
2.0 WASHING FACILITIES
Where employees are engaging in the application of paints, coatings, etc., or in other operations involving
substances that may be harmful to the employees, additional cleansing facilities must be provided in proximity of
the work area and will be equipped to enable employees to remove such substances. These washing facilities
may be equipped with ordinary soap and water, or with special compounds designed specifically for the removal
of harmful chemicals and other contaminants from the skin.
Washing facilities for other employees should be appropriately provided throughout the site.
3.0 DRINKING WATER
An adequate supply of potable drinking water must be available in the work areas at all times.
Portable containers used to dispense drinking water will be equipped with a tap, faucet, or drinking fountain, and
must be capable of being tightly closed and sealed. These containers must be designed, constructed, and serviced
so that sanitary conditions are maintained. Employees will not be allowed to dip from any drinking water
container.
Containers used to store or dispense drinking water will be clearly marked as to the nature of its contents and the
date of the water, and must not be used for any other purpose.
Common/shared drinking cups are prohibited. Where single-service cups are supplied, a sanitary container for
the unused cups and a receptacle for disposing of the used cups will be provided.
4.0 TOILET FACILITIES
Toilet facilities, whether portable or permanent, must be kept clean, maintained in good working order, and
provided with an adequate supply of toilet paper.
Project/Site Management will provide sanitation services for all toilet facilities used by ABG and contractor
employees, to include cleaning and servicing on a scheduled basis that will prevent the facilities from becoming
unsanitary and unusable.
Each portable toilet facility must include both a toilet seat and a urinal.
Toilets will be provided for employees according to the following:
Number of Employees Minimum Number of Facilities
20 or fewer 1
20 or more 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 20 employees
200 or more 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 employees
Toilet facilities that have become inoperable due to water supply, plumbing problems, or full and cannot be used
in a sanitary manner must be removed from service immediately.

Page 189
ABG
ELECTRICAL HIGH VOLTAGE CAL/OSHA
ELECTRICAL HIGH-VOLTAGE CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................180
SCOPE181
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................181
RESPONSIBILITIES...................................................................................................................................................181
Managers/Supervisor.........................................................................................................................................181
The HSE Manager...........................................................................................................................................181
Operations Managers and Supervisors..........................................................................................................181
Operations Managers....................................................................................................................................181
Employees......................................................................................................................................................181
General Requirements for High Voltage Systems...................................................................................................181
Safe Access to Work Locations...........................................................................................................................181
ABG Responsibilities...............................................................................................................................................182
Qualified Electrical Workers...............................................................................................................................182
Observers...........................................................................................................................................................182
Suitable Temporary Barriers or Barricades.........................................................................................................183
Overhead and Energized High-Voltage Power Lines...........................................................................................183
Minimum Approach Distances...........................................................................................................................183
Requirements Before Work is Performed on Exposed Energized Parts Equipment...........................................183
Lock Out/Tag Out....................................................................................................................................................184
Inspections.........................................................................................................................................................184
Periodic Testing..................................................................................................................................................184
Repairs ..............................................................................................................................................................185
Ladders..............................................................................................................................................................185
Switches, Circuit Breakers and Disconnects.......................................................................................................185
Contractors.........................................................................................................................................................185
Fire Extinguishers...............................................................................................................................................185
Equipment Grounding........................................................................................................................................185
Electric Shock-CPR..........................................................................................................................................186

Page 190
ABG
PURPOSE
The purpose of this program is to prevent injuries due to electrical exposure to high voltage for employees and
contractors when working in California.
SCOPE
This program is applicable at every California work area where high voltage electrical exposure may occur. When
work is performed on a non-owned or operated site, the operator's program shall take precedence, however, this
document covers ABG employees and contractors and shall be used on owned premises, or when an operator's
program doesn't exist or is less stringent.
PURPOSE
The purpose of this program is to set forth procedures for the safe use of high voltage electrical equipment, tools,
and appliances at ABG.
RESPONSIBILITIES
Managers/Supervisor
The HSE Manager will develop electrical safety programs and procedures in accordance with CAL/OSHA
requirements and/or as indicated by events and circumstances.
Operations Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that only qualified employees and or qualified
contractors perform electrical repairs or installations.
Operations Managers are also responsible for ensuring all applicable electrical safety programs are implemented
and maintained at their locations.
Employees are responsible to use electrical equipment, tools, and appliances according to this program, for
attending required training sessions when directed to do so and to report unsafe conditions to their supervisor
immediately.
General Requirements for High Voltage Systems
Safe Access to Work Locations
All work locations shall be safely accessible whenever work is to be performed. Examples include:
 A clear working space must be maintained in the front, back and on each side of all electrical enclosures
and around electrical equipment for a safe operation and to permit access for maintenance and
alteration.
 A minimum two-foot working floor space in front of panels and enclosures shall be painted yellow.
 Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts unless adequate illumination is
provided. Illumination shall be provided as needed to perform the work safely.

Page 191
ABG
 Housekeeping in distribution rooms must receive high priority to provide a safe working and walking area
in front of panels and to keep combustible materials to the minimum required to perform maintenance
operations.
 All enclosures and distribution rooms must have “Danger: High Voltage – Authorized Personnel Only”
posted on the front panel and on entrance doors.
 Flammable materials are strictly prohibited inside distribution rooms (Boxes, rags, cleaning fluids, etc.)
 When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space that contains exposed energized parts, the
employee shall isolate the energy source and turn off the source and lock and tag out the energy source
(Only qualified electricians can work on an exposed energy source).
 Protective shields, protective barriers or insulating materials as necessary shall be provided.
ABG Responsibilities
ABG shall furnish such safety devices and safeguards as may be necessary to make the employment or place of
employment as free from danger to the safety and health of employees as the nature of the employment
reasonably permits. ABG shall examine or test each safety device at such intervals as may be reasonably necessary
to ensure that it is in good condition and adequate to perform the function for which it is intended. Any device
furnished by ABG found to be unsafe shall be repaired or replaced.
Employees shall be instructed to inspect each safety device, tool or piece of equipment, each time it is used and
to use only those in good condition. ABG shall require the use of safety devices and safeguards where applicable.
Insulating equipment designed for the voltage levels to be encountered shall be provided by ABG. Insulating
equipment designed for the voltage levels to be encountered shall be provided and employees shall be instructed
to use the equipment.
Qualified Electrical Workers

Only qualified electrical workers shall work on energized conductors or equipment connected to energized high-
voltage systems. Except for replacing fuses, operating switches, or other operations that do not require the
employee to contact energized high-voltage conductors or energized parts of equipment, clearing "trouble" or in
emergencies involving hazard to life or property, no such employee shall be assigned to work alone. Employees in
training, who are qualified by experience and training, shall be permitted to work on energized conductors or
equipment connected to high-voltage systems while under the supervision or instruction of a qualified electrical
worker.
Observers
During the time work is being done on any exposed conductors or exposed parts of equipment connected to high-
voltage systems, a qualified electrical worker, or an employee in training, shall be in close proximity at each work
location to:
 Act primarily as an observer for the purpose of preventing an accident, and
 Render immediate assistance in the event of an accident. Such observer will not be required in
connection with work on overhead trolley distribution circuits not exceeding 1,500 volts D.C. where there
is no conductor of opposite polarity less than 4 feet there from, or where such work is performed from
suitable tower platforms or other similar structures.

Page 192
ABG
Suitable Temporary Barriers or Barricades

Covers or barriers must be installed on boxes, fittings and enclosures to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
Suitable temporary barriers or barricades shall be installed when access to opened enclosures containing exposed
energized equipment is not under the control of an authorized person.
In locations where electric equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so
arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage.
Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous
warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
Placement of Warning Signs When Equipment is Working Around or Near Overhead Power Lines
ABG or the owner, agent, or employer responsible for the operations of equipment shall post and maintain in
plain view of the operator and driver on each crane, derrick, power shovel, drilling rig, hay loader, hay stacker, pile
driver, or similar apparatus, a durable warning sign legible at 12 feet reading: "Unlawful To Operate This
Equipment Within 10 Feet Of High-Voltage Lines of 50,000 Volts Or Less."
Overhead and Energized High-Voltage Power Lines

Safe guards shall be in place when working on or near overhead power lines. ABG nor any person, firm, or
corporation, or agent of same, shall require or permit any employee to perform any function in proximity to
energized high-voltage lines; to enter upon any land, building, or other premises and there engage in any
excavation, demolition, construction, repair, or other operation; or to erect, install, operate, or store in or upon
such premises any tools, machinery, equipment, materials, or structures (including scaffolding, house moving,
well drilling, pile driving, or hoisting equipment) unless and until danger from accidental contact with said high-
voltage lines has been effectively guarded against.
Safe Clearance Distance During Operations of Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment from Overhead Power
Lines
The erection, operation or dismantling of any boom-type lifting or hoisting equipment, or any part thereof, closer
than the minimum clearances from energized overhead high-voltage lines set forth is strictly prohibited.
Minimum Approach Distances

When performing work with live line tools, minimum clear distances shall be maintained. Conductor support
tools, such as link sticks, strain carriers and insulator cradles shall be permitted to be used provided that the clear
insulation is at least as long as the insulator string or the minimum distance specified for the operating voltage.
Requirements Before Work is Performed on Exposed Energized Parts of Equipment or Systems

Work shall not be performed on exposed energized parts of equipment or systems until the following conditions
are met:
 Responsible supervision has determined that the work is to be performed while the equipment or systems
are energized.
 Involved personnel have received instructions on the work techniques and hazards involved in working on
energized equipment.

Page 193
ABG
 Suitable personal protective equipment and safe guards (i.e., approved insulated gloves or insulated
tools) are provided and used.
Conductive measuring tapes, ropes or similar measuring devices and conductive fish tapes shall not be used when
working on or near exposed energized conductors or parts of equipment. Conductive fish tapes shall not be used
in raceways entering enclosures containing exposed energized parts unless such parts are isolated by suitable
barriers.
Lock Out/Tag Out

 While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have
been deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both.
 If any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been
deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both.
 All electrical equipment and systems shall be treated as energized until tested or otherwise proven to be
de-energized.
 Per ABG policy all electrical will be outsourced and performed only by qualified and licensed electrical
contractors who are familiar with the use of special precautionary techniques, PPE, insulating and
shielding materials and insulated tools. Any equipment being made ready for maintenance will be locked
out using ABG’s Control of Hazardous Energy – Lock Out/Tag Out Program. Lockouts are performed by the
HSE Manager, Shop Foreman or Branch Manager. Designated employees in some branches may be
trained by local management to lock out equipment. If live sources are to be worked it will only be
performed with the knowledge of local management. Only certified electricians may work on electric
circuit parts or equipment.
 Authorized Person duties after the required work on an energized system or equipment - The authorized
person shall be responsible for removing from the work area any temporary personnel protective
equipment and reinstalling all permanent barriers or covers.
 Authorized personnel will be trained in lock out/tag out procedures.
 Affected personnel will be notified when lock out/tag out activities are being performed in their work
area.
Inspections
 Employees shall be instructed to inspect each safety device, tool or piece of equipment. Employees shall
be instructed to inspect each safety device, tool or piece of equipment, each time it is used and to use
only those in good condition.
 ABG requires the use of safety devices and safeguards where applicable.
 The use of a hard fixed GFCI or a portable GFCI adapter shall be used with all portable hand tools, electric
extension cords, drop lights and all 110 volt equipment.
 Defective insulating equipment is removed from service immediately. Insulating equipment and any
other electrical equipment or material found to be defective or damaged shall be immediately removed
from service.

Page 194
ABG
Periodic Testing
 Periodic visual and electrical re-testing of all insulating gloves, sleeves and blankets shall be made at the
prescribed intervals. Insulated gloves, sleeves and blankets must be visually inspected and electrically re-
tested periodically at prescribed intervals or when found to be damaged or defective.
 Insulating equipment shall be marked with the latest test date or the next test due on. Gloves, sleeves
and blankets shall be marked to indicate compliance with the re-test schedule and shall be marked with
either the date tested or the date the next test is due.
Repairs
 Only Qualified Personnel, who have been authorized by the department supervisor or manager, may
make repairs to supply cords on electrical tools and to extension cords.
 The names of employees authorized to make repairs will be posted in the workplace.
 Only certified electricians shall be allowed to make repairs to electrical equipment and wiring systems.
 The supervisor obtaining the services of a certified electrician is responsible to verify the electrician’s
credentials.
 Employees shall not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts unless qualified and proper
illumination exists to enable employees to work safely.
 Employees shall not wear conductive apparel such as rings, watches, jewelry, etc. (unless they are
rendered non-conductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means) while working on or near
open energized equipment this includes batteries on trucks, forklifts, phone backup systems or other such
equipment.
 If employees are subject to handle long dimensional conductor objects (ducts or pipes), steps for safe
work practices shall be employed to ensure the safety of workers.
Ladders
 Only approved, non-conductive ladders, may be used when working near or with electrical equipment,
which includes changing light bulbs.
 Ladders must be either constructed of wood, fiberglass, or have non-conductive side rails.
 Wood ladders should not be painted, which can hide defects, except with clear lacquer.
 When using ladders they shall be free from any moisture, oils, and greases.
Switches, Circuit Breakers and Disconnects

 All electrical equipment and tools must have an on and off switch and may not be turned on or off by
plugging or unplugging the supply cord at the power outlet.
 Circuit breaker panel boxes and disconnects must be labeled with the voltage rating.
 Each breaker within a breaker panel must be labeled for the service it provides.
 Disconnect switches providing power for individual equipment must be labeled accordingly.
Contractors
 Only approved, certified, electrical contractors may perform construction and service work on COMPANY
or client property.
 It is the Manager/Supervisors responsibility to verify the contractor’s certification.

Page 195
ABG
Fire Extinguishers
 Approved fire extinguishers must be provided near electrical breaker panels and distribution centers.
 Water type extinguishers shall not be located closer than 50 feet from electrical equipment.
Equipment Grounding
 All gas compressors, air compressors, separators, vessels, etc. shall be grounded by means of using a lug
and ground strap, nominal in size to a ½” bolt or larger, attached to a ground rod six feet or longer.
 Equipment bonding jumpers shall be of copper or other corrosion-resistance material.
 The transfer of hazardous or flammable material from a metal or plastic container with a flash point of
100 degrees F or less shall have a ground strap from the container and attached to the skid or a ground
rod placed in the ground.
Training
All affected employees will be trained in high voltage electrical safety requirements and the training shall be
documented.
Safe work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting for either direct or
indirect electrical contacts when work is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be
energized.
Electric Shock-CPR
 If someone is discovered that has received an electric shock and is unconscious, first check to see if their
body is in contact with an electrical circuit. Do not touch a person until you are sure there is no contact
with an electrical circuit.
 When it is safe to make contact with the victim, begin CPR if the person’s heart has stopped or
they are not breathing. Call for help immediately.

Page 196
ABG
ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE CAL/OSHA
ELECTRICAL LOW-VOLTAGE CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 188
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................188
Responsibilities.......................................................................................................................................................188
Managers/Supervisor.........................................................................................................................................188
General Requirements for Low Voltage Systems....................................................................................................188
Suitable Temporary Barriers or Barricades.........................................................................................................188
Requirements Before Work / Exposed Energized Parts of Equipment...........................................................189
Lock Out/Tag Out....................................................................................................................................................189
Inspections.............................................................................................................................................................190
Repairs....................................................................................................................................................................190
Extension Cords......................................................................................................................................................190
Outlets....................................................................................................................................................................191
Double Insulated Tools...........................................................................................................................................191
Ladders...................................................................................................................................................................191
Confined or Enclosed Work Spaces........................................................................................................................191
Switches, Circuit Breakers and Disconnects............................................................................................................191
Enclosures, Breaker Panels, and Distribution Rooms.....................................................................................191
Contractors.............................................................................................................................................................192
Fire Extinguishers....................................................................................................................................................192
Electric Welders......................................................................................................................................................192
Equipment Grounding............................................................................................................................................192
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters...........................................................................................................................192
Training...................................................................................................................................................................193
Electric Shock-CPR..................................................................................................................................................193

Page 197
ABG
Purpose
The purpose of this program is to prevent injuries due to electrical exposure to low voltage (less than or equal to
600 volts) for employees and contractors when working in California.
Scope
This program is applicable at every California work area where low voltage electrical exposure may occur. When
work is performed on a non-owned or operated site, the operator's program shall take precedence, however, this
document covers ABG employees and contractors and shall be used on owned premises, or when an operator's
program doesn't exist or is less stringent.
Purpose
The purpose of this program is to set forth procedures for the safe use of low voltage electrical equipment, tools,
and appliances at ABG.
Responsibilities
Managers/Supervisor
The HSE Manager will develop electrical safety programs and procedures in accordance with CAL/OSHA
requirements and/or as indicated by events and circumstances.
Operations Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that only qualified employees and or qualified
contractors perform electrical repairs or installations.
Operations Managers are also responsible for ensuring all applicable electrical safety programs are implemented
and maintained at their locations.
Employees are responsible to use electrical equipment, tools, and appliances according to this program, for
attending required training sessions when directed to do so and to report unsafe conditions to their supervisor
immediately.
General Requirements for Low Voltage Systems

 Only qualified persons may work on electrical equipment or systems.
 Maintenance of electrical installations is required to ensure their safe condition.
 Electrical equipment and wiring must be protected from mechanical damage and environmental
deterioration.
Suitable Temporary Barriers or Barricades

Covers or barriers must be installed on boxes, fittings and enclosures to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
Suitable temporary barriers or barricades shall be installed when access to opened enclosures containing exposed
energized equipment is not under the control of an authorized person.

Page 198
ABG
Energized parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more shall be guarded against accidental contact by
use of approved cabinets or other forms of approved enclosures or by any of the following means:
 By location in a room, vault or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons.
 By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens so arranged that only qualified persons will have
access to the space within reach of the energized parts. Any openings in such partitions or screens shall
be so sized and located that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with the energized
parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them.
 By location on a suitable balcony, gallery or platform so elevated and otherwise located as to prevent
access by unqualified persons; or
 By elevation of 8.0 feet (2.44 m) or more above the floor or other working surface.
In locations where electric equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so
arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage.
Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous
warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
Requirements Before Work is Performed on Exposed Energized Parts of Equipment or Systems

Work shall not be performed on exposed energized parts of equipment or systems until the following conditions
are met:
 Responsible supervision has determined that the work is to be performed while the equipment or systems
are energized.
 Involved personnel have received instructions on the work techniques and hazards involved in working on
energized equipment.
 Suitable personal protective equipment and safe guards (i.e., approved insulated gloves or insulated
tools) are provided and used.
Conductive measuring tapes, ropes or similar measuring devices and conductive fish tapes shall not be used when
working on or near exposed energized conductors or parts of equipment. Conductive fish tapes shall not be used
in raceways entering enclosures containing exposed energized parts unless such parts are isolated by suitable
barriers.
Lock Out/Tag Out

 While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have
been deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both.
 If any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been
deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both.
 All electrical equipment and systems shall be treated as energized until tested or otherwise proven to be
de-energized.
 Per ABG policy all electrical work will be outsourced and performed only by qualified and licensed
electrical contractors who are familiar with the use of special precautionary techniques, PPE, insulating
and shielding materials and insulated tools. Any equipment being made ready for maintenance will be
locked out using ABG’s Control of Hazardous Energy – Lock Out/Tag Out Program. Lockouts are performed

Page 199
ABG
by the HSE Manager, Shop Foreman or Branch Manager. Designated employees in some branches may be
trained by local management to lock out equipment. If live sources are to be worked it will only be
performed with the knowledge of local management. Only certified electricians may work on electric
circuit parts or equipment.
 Authorized Person duties after the required work on an energized system or equipment - The authorized
person shall be responsible for removing from the work area any temporary personnel protective
equipment and reinstalling all permanent barriers or covers.
 Authorized personnel will be trained in lock out/tag out procedures.
 Affected personnel will be notified when lock out/tag out activities are being performed in their work
area.
Inspections
 Electrical equipment, tools, and appliances must be inspected prior to each use.
 The use of a hard fixed GFCI or a portable GFCI adapter shall be used with all portable hand tools, electric
extension cords, drop lights and all 110 volt equipment.
 Faulty equipment, tools, or appliances shall be removed from service immediately and tagged “Out of
Service”, dated and signed by the employee applying the tag.
Repairs
 Only Qualified Personnel, who have been authorized by the department supervisor or manager, may
make repairs to supply cords on electrical tools and to extension cords.
 The names of employees authorized to make repairs will be posted in the workplace.
 Only certified electricians shall be allowed to make repairs to electrical equipment and wiring systems.
 The supervisor obtaining the services of a certified electrician is responsible to verify the electrician’s
credentials.
 Employees shall not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts unless qualified and proper
illumination exists to enable employees to work safely.
 Employees shall not wear conductive apparel such as rings, watches, jewelry, etc. (unless they are
rendered non-conductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means) while working on or near
open energized equipment this includes batteries on trucks, forklifts, phone backup systems or other such
equipment.
 If employees are subject to handle long dimensional conductor objects (ducts or pipes), steps for safe
work practices shall be employed to ensure the safety of workers.
Extension Cords
 Use only three-wire, grounded, extension cords and cables that conform to a hard service rating of 14
amperes or higher, and grounding of the tools or equipment being supplied.
 Only commercial or industrial rated-grounded extension cords may be used in shops and outdoors.
 Cords for use other than indoor appliances must have a rating of at least 14 amps.
 Cords must have suitable strain relief provisions at both the plug the receptacle ends.
 Work lamps (drop lights) used to power electrical tools must have a 3 wire, grounded outlet, unless
powering insulated tools.

Page 200
ABG
 Adapters that allow three wire, grounded prongs, connected to two wire non-grounded outlets are strictly
prohibited.
 Cords must have a service rating for hard or extra-hard service and have S, AJ, ST, SO, SJO, SJT, STO, or
SJTO printed on the cord.
 Cords may not be run through doorways, under mats or carpets, across walkways or aisles, concealed
behind walls, ceilings or floors, or run through holes in walls, or anywhere where they can become a
tripping hazard.
 High current equipment or appliances should be plugged directly into a wall outlet whenever possible.
o All extension cords shall be plugged into one of the following:
o A GFCI outlet;
o A GFCI built into the cord;
o A GFCI adapter used between the wall outlet and cord plug.
 All extension cords and or electrical cords shall be inspected daily or before each use, for breaks, plug
condition and ground lugs, possible internal breaks, and any other damage. If damage is found, the
extension cord or electrical cord shall be remove from service and repaired or replaced.
 Extension cords shall not be used on compressor skid to operated heat tapes or any other type of
equipment on a temporary basis. Heat tapes or other equipment shall be hard wired per applicable
electrical codes.
Outlets
 Outlets connected to circuits with different voltages must use a design such that the attachment plugs on
the circuits are not interchangeable.
 Multiple outlet boxes must be plugged into a wall receptacle.
 Multiple outlet boxes must not be used to provide power to microwave ovens, toasters, space heaters,
hot plates, coffeepots, or other high-current loads.
Double Insulated Tools

 Double insulated tools must have the factory label intact indicating the tool has been approved to be used
without a three wire grounded supply cord connection.
 Double insulated tools must not be altered in any way, which would negate the factory rating.
Ladders
 Only approved, non-conductive ladders, may be used when working near or with electrical equipment,
which includes changing light bulbs.
 Ladders must be either constructed of wood, fiberglass, or have non-conductive side rails.
 Wood ladders should not be painted, which can hide defects, except with clear lacquer.
 When using ladders they shall be free from any moisture, oils, and greases.
Confined or Enclosed Work Spaces

 When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space that contains exposed energized parts, the
employee shall isolate the energy source and turn off the source and lock and tag out the energy source
(Only qualified electricians can work on an exposed energy source).
 Protective shields, protective barriers or insulating materials as necessary shall be provided.

Page 201
ABG
Switches, Circuit Breakers and Disconnects

 All electrical equipment and tools must have an on and off switch and may not be turned on or off by
plugging or unplugging the supply cord at the power outlet.
 Circuit breaker panel boxes and disconnects must be labeled with the voltage rating.
 Each breaker within a breaker panel must be labeled for the service it provides.
 Disconnect switches providing power for individual equipment must be labeled accordingly.
Enclosures, Breaker Panels, and Distribution Rooms

 A clear working space must be maintained in the front, back and on each side of all electrical enclosures
and around electrical equipment for a safe operation and to permit access for maintenance and
alteration.
 A minimum two-foot working floor space in front of panels and enclosures shall be painted yellow.
 Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts unless illumination is provided that
enables the employees to work safely.
 Housekeeping in distribution rooms must receive high priority to provide a safe working and walking area
in front of panels and to keep combustible materials to the minimum required to perform maintenance
operations.
 All enclosures and distribution rooms must have “Danger: High Voltage – Authorized Personnel Only”
posted on the front panel and on entrance doors.
 Flammable materials are strictly prohibited inside distribution rooms (Boxes, rags, cleaning fluids, etc.)
Contractors
 Only approved, certified, electrical contractors may perform construction and service work on ABG or
client property.
 It is the Manager/Supervisors responsibility to verify the contractor’s certification.
Fire Extinguishers
 Approved fire extinguishers must be provided near electrical breaker panels and distribution centers.
 Water type extinguishers shall not be located closer than 50 feet from electrical equipment.
Electric Welders
 A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit for each motor-generator arc welder, and
for each AC transformer and DC rectifier arc welder which is not equipped with a disconnect mounted as
an integral part of the welder.
 A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by which each resistance welder and its control equipment
can be isolated from the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means may not be less
than the supply conductor ampacity.
Equipment Grounding
 All gas compressors, air compressors, separators, vessels, etc. shall be grounded by means of using a lug
and ground strap, nominal in size to a ½” bolt or larger, attached to a ground rod six feet or longer.
 Equipment bonding jumpers shall be of copper or other corrosion-resistance material.

Page 202
ABG
 The transfer of hazardous or flammable material from a metal or plastic container with a flash point of
100 degrees F or less shall have a ground strap from the container and attached to the skid or a ground
rod placed in the ground.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

All 120-volt, single-phase 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets on construction or maintenance sites, which are
not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and which are in use by employees, shall have
approved ground fault circuit interrupters for personnel protection.
 All hand portable electric tools and extension cords shall use a GFCI.
 Additionally, approved GFCI’s shall be used for 240-Volt circuits in the same service as described above.
 GFCI’s must be used on all 120 volt, single-phase 15 amp and 20 amp receptacles within 6 feet of a sink,
damp areas or on installed outdoor equipment.
 The GFCI must be the first device plugged into a permanent receptacle.
 The GFCI must be tested before each use.
Training
All regular full time and temporary employees will be trained in low voltage electrical safety requirements and the
training shall be documented.
Safe work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting for either direct or
indirect electrical contacts when work is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be
energized.
Electric Shock-CPR
 If someone is discovered that has received an electric shock and is unconscious, first check to see if their
body is in contact with an electrical circuit. Do not touch a person until you are sure there is no contact
with an electrical circuit.
 When it is safe to make contact with the victim, begin CPR if the person’s heart has stopped or they are
not breathing.
 Call for help immediately.

Page 203
ABG
ELECTRICAL SAFETY AWARENESS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................194
Equipment Grounding Conductor Program............................................................................................................196
Equipment Grounding Conductor Inspection.........................................................................................................196
Equipment Grounding Conductor Testing..............................................................................................................196
Recordkeeping........................................................................................................................................................197
Working On Electric Circuit Parts or Equipment.....................................................................................................197
Overhead Lines.......................................................................................................................................................197
Warnings and Barricades........................................................................................................................................197
Working Clearances................................................................................................................................................198
Working space about electric equipment..........................................................................................................198
Working clearances............................................................................................................................................198
TABLE 1 WORKING CLEARANCES............................................................................................................................198
Clear spaces........................................................................................................................................................199
Access and entrance to working space...............................................................................................................199
Front working space...........................................................................................................................................199
Headroom..........................................................................................................................................................199
Guarding of live parts.............................................................................................................................................199
Additional State Requirements - Low-Voltage Installations (<600 volts)............................................................199
Over 600 Volts, Nomina..........................................................................................................................................206
General................................................................................................................................................................... 206
Enclosure for Electrical Installations.......................................................................................................................206
Installations Accessible To Qualified Persons Only.................................................................................................206
Installations Accessible To Unqualified Persons.....................................................................................................207
Workspace About Equipment.................................................................................................................................207
Working Space........................................................................................................................................................207
MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT..............................................................207
Lighting Outlets and Points of Control....................................................................................................................208
Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts..........................................................................................................................208
ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE............................................................208
Entrance and Access To Workspace.......................................................................................................................208
Vehicular and Mechanical Equipment....................................................................................................................208
Illumination............................................................................................................................................................209
Confined or Enclosed Work Spaces........................................................................................................................209
Conductive Materials and Equipment....................................................................................................................209
Portable Ladders.....................................................................................................................................................210
Conductive Apparel................................................................................................................................................210
Housekeeping Duties..............................................................................................................................................210
Lockout and Tagging of Circuits..............................................................................................................................210

Page 204
ABG
De-energizing Equipment.......................................................................................................................................211
Application of Locks and Tags.................................................................................................................................211
Verification of De-energized Condition..................................................................................................................212
Re-Energizing Equipment.......................................................................................................................................212
Additional State Requirements - High-Voltage Electrical Installations (>600 Volts)...............................................214
Training...................................................................................................................................................................221
Training for Unqualified Employees...................................................................................................................222
Electrical Safety Rules for Non-Qualified Workers:............................................................................................222
Training for Qualified Employees.......................................................................................................................222
Program Evaluation................................................................................................................................................222

Page 205
ABG
Purpose
The Electrical Safety program is designed to prevent electrically related injuries and property damage. This
program also provides for proper training of maintenance employees to ensure they have the requisite knowledge
and understanding of electrical work practices and procedures. Only employees qualified in this program may
conduct adjustment, repair or replacement of electrical components or equipment. Electricity has long been
recognized as a serious workplace hazard, exposing employees to such dangers as electric shock, electrocution,
fires and explosions.
A written description of the program, including the specific procedures adopted by us, is available at all job sites
for inspection and copying by OSHA and any affected employee.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Program

This written plan is intended to establish and implement specific procedures for equipment grounding conductor
program covering:
- all cord sets,

- receptacles which are not a part of the building or structure, and
- equipment connected by cord and plug which are available for use or used by employees.
These requirements apply to all of ABG's construction job sites.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Inspection
Each cord set, attachment cap, plug and receptacle of cord sets, and any equipment connected by cord and plug,
except cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage, are visually inspected by Site
Supervisor before each day's use for external defects, such as deformed or missing pins or insulation damage, and
indications of possible internal damage.
Equipment found damaged or defective is not to be used until repaired, and is to be removed from service
immediately by the person finding it and handed over to Site Supervisor.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Testing
The following tests are performed on all cord sets, receptacles which are not a part of the permanent wiring of
the building or structure, and cord- and plug-connected equipment required to be grounded:
All equipment grounding conductors are tested for continuity and are electrically continuous.
Each receptacle and attachment cap or plug is tested by a qualified person for correct attachment of the
equipment grounding conductor. The equipment grounding conductor is connected to its proper terminal.
All required tests are performed:

Page 206
ABG
- Before first use.

- Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs.
- Before equipment is used after any incident which can be reasonably suspected to have caused damage
(for example, when a cord set is run over).
- At intervals not to exceed 3 months, except that cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not
exposed to damage will be tested at intervals not exceeding 6 months.
ABG does not provide or permit employees to use any equipment which has not met the requirements of this
program.
Recordkeeping
Tests performed as required in this program are recorded. The test records identify each receptacle, cord set, and
cord- and plug-connected equipment that passed the test, and indicate the last date it was tested or the interval
for which it was tested.
The ABG corporate safety director is responsible for maintaining these records.
This record is kept by means of an inspection log and is maintained until replaced by a more current record. The
record is made available on the job site for inspection by OSHA and any affected employee.
Working On Electric Circuit Parts or Equipment
Only qualified personnel are permitted to work on electric circuit parts or equipment that has not been de-
energized. Qualified personnel will be made familiar with the use of special precautionary techniques, including
but not limited to the following:
- Proper personal protective equipment.

- Insulating and shielding materials.
- The use of insulated tools to ensure safety.
Overhead Lines
If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines will be de-energized and grounded, or other protective
measures will be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be de-energized, arrangements will be made
with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to de-energize and ground
them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating, are provided, these precautions will
prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive
materials, tools, or equipment.

Page 207
ABG
Warnings and Barricades
Warnings and barricades will be employed to alert unqualified Employees of the present danger related to
exposed energized parts. The following rules apply:
- Safety signs, warning tags, etc., must be used to warn Unqualified Employees of the electrical hazards
present, even temporarily, that may endanger them.
- Non-conductive barricades will be used with safety signs to prevent Unqualified Employees access to
exposed energized parts or areas.
- Where barricades and warning signs do not provide adequate protection from electrical hazards, an
Attendant will be stationed to warn and protect Employees.
Working Clearances
600 Volts, Nominal, or Less
Working space around electric equipment. Sufficient access and working space will be provided and maintained
about all electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment.
Working clearances. Except as required or permitted elsewhere in this Chapter, the dimension of the working
space in the direction of access to live parts operating at 600 volts or less and likely to require examination,
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while alive will not be less than indicated in Table 1.
In addition to the dimensions shown in Table 1, workspace will not be less than 30 inches (762 mm) wide in front
of the electric equipment. Distances will be measured from the live parts if they are exposed or from the
enclosure front or opening if the live parts are enclosed. Walls constructed of concrete, brick or tile, are
considered to be grounded.
Working space is not required in back of assemblies such as dead-front switchboards or motor control centers
where there are no renewable or adjustable parts such as fuses or switches on the back and where all connections
are accessible from locations other than the back.
TABLE 1 WORKING CLEARANCES
Nominal voltage to ground Minimum clear distance for conditions 1

(a) (b) (c)
2 2
Feet Feet Feet 2
0 - 150 ......................................... 3 3 3
151 - 600 ....................................... 3 i½ 4
1
Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the
other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by insulating material.

Page 208
ABG
Insulated wire or insulated bus bars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live
parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace (not
guarded as provided in Condition (a)) with the operator between.
2
NOTE: For International System of Units (SI): one foot = 0.3048 m.
Clear spaces. Working space required will not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are
exposed for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or general open space will be guarded.
Access and entrance to working space. At least one entrance will be provided to give access to the working space
about electric equipment.
Front working space. Where there are live parts normally exposed on the front of switchboards or motor control
centers, the working space in front of such equipment will not be less than 3 feet (914 mm).
Headroom. The minimum headroom of working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panel boards, or
motor control centers will be 6 feet 3 inches (1.91 m).
Guarding of live parts.
Except as required or permitted elsewhere, live parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more will be
guarded against accidental contact by cabinets or other forms of enclosures, or by any of the following means:
- By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons.
- By partitions or screens so arranged that only qualified persons will have access to the space within reach
of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or screens will be so sized and located that persons are
not likely to come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact
with them.
- By location on a balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons.
- By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or more above the floor or other working surface and so installed as to
exclude unqualified persons.
- In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards will be
so arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage.
- Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts will be marked with
conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
Additional State Requirements - Low-Voltage Electrical Installations and Equipment (<600 volts)
- Suitable insulated gloves must be worn for voltages in excess of 300 volts, nominal.
- Suitable accident prevention tags must be used to control a specific hazard. Such tags must provide the
reason for placing tag, the name of person placing the tag and how that person may be contacted, and
the date the tag was placed.

Page 209
ABG
- No electrical power source, permanent or temporary, may be connected to a premise wiring system, or
parts of such a system, unless positive means are used to prevent the transmission of electricity beyond
the premises wiring system, or beyond any intentionally segregated parts of such system.
- Equipment intended to break current at fault levels must have an interrupting rating sufficient for the
system voltage and the current, which is available at the line terminals of the equipment. Equipment
intended to break current at other than fault levels must have an interrupting rating at system voltage
sufficient for the current that must be interrupted.
- Attics, furred ceilings, and under-floor spaces must have minimum unobstructed access openings of 22
inches by 30 inches.
- Each motor controller must be legibly marked to indicate the motor it controls, and each motor must
have the same marking unless located and arranged so that the control point is evident.
- When a circuit is abandoned or discontinued, its conductors must be removed from the raceways, or be
maintained as if in use.
- Open wiring and cables must be 16 feet above areas (other than thoroughfares) where it is possible to
drive vehicles, and 12 feet above areas accessible to pedestrians only.
- Conductors run above the top level of a window may be less than 3 feet above the window provided that
they are at the maximum practical distance and that in no case are they less than 1 foot above the
window.
- Under the following conditions, the frame of a portable or a vehicle-mounted generator need not be
grounded and will be permitted to serve as the grounding electrode for a system supplied by the
generator:
o the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment located on the vehicle and the equipment
grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator or vehicle frame;
and
o the generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle or the generator and/or cord- and
plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the vehicle or on the generator; and
o the frame of a vehicle-mounted generator is bonded to the vehicle frame; or
o the generator is single-phase, portable or vehicle-mounted, rated not more than 5 KW, and the
circuit conductors of the generator are insulated from the generator frame and all other
grounded surfaces.
o Circuits for electric cranes operating over combustible fibers in Class III locations must not be
grounded.
- Exposed, noncurrent-carrying metal parts of the following kinds of equipment, regardless of voltage, must
be grounded:
o switchboard frames and structures supporting switching equipment (except frames of DC, single-
polarity switchboards where effectively insulated, and marked "Switchboard Frame Not
Grounded," or equivalent wording);
o generator and motor frames in an electrically operated organ (except where the generator is
effectively insulated from ground and from the motor driving it, and marked "Generator Frame
Not Grounded," or equivalent wording);
o motor frames;
o enclosures for motor controllers, except lined covers of snap switches;

Page 210
ABG
o electric equipment for elevators and cranes;

o electric equipment in garages, theaters, and motion picture studios;
o electric signs and associated equipment, except where insulated from ground and from other
conductive objects and accessible only to qualified persons;
o motion picture projection equipment;
o equipment supplied by Class 1, 2, and 3 remote-control and signaling circuits; and
o Lighting fixtures.
- The path to ground from circuits, equipment, and conductor enclosures must have ample carrying
capacity to conduct safely any currents liable to be imposed on it, and have impedance sufficiently low to
limit the potential above ground and to facilitate the operation of the over-current devices in the circuit.
- Where an AC system is connected to a grounding electrode in or at a building, the same electrode must
be used to ground conductor enclosures and equipment in or on that building. Two or more electrodes
that are effectively bonded together will be considered as a single electrode in this sense.
- For the grounding of noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures, the
following requirements apply:
o Individually covered or insulated grounding conductors must have a continuous outer finish that is
either green, or green with one or more yellow stripes.
o An insulated conductor larger than No. 6, and (where the conditions of maintenance and
supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the installation) an insulated conductor
in a multi-conductor cable may, at the time of installation, be permitted to be permanently
identified as a grounding conductor at each end and at every point where the conductor is
accessible. Identification must be accomplished by stripping the insulation from the entire
exposed length, coloring the exposed insulation green, or marking the exposed insulation with
green colored tape or green colored adhesive labels.
o Bare, covered, or insulated equipment grounding conductors are permitted.
- Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of cord- and plug-connected equipment, where required to be grounded,
must be grounded by means of:
o the metal enclosure of the conductors supplying such equipment, if a grounding-type attachment
plug with one fixed grounding contact is used for grounding the metal enclosure, and if the metal
enclosure of the conductors is secured to the attachment plug and to equipment by connectors
approved for the purpose;
o a grounding conductor run with the power supply conductors in a cable assembly or flexible cord
properly terminated in a grounding-type attachment plug with one fixed grounding contact; or
o a separate flexible wire or strap, insulated or bare, protected as well as practicable against
physical damage, where part of approved portable equipment.
- The metal noncurrent-carrying parts of the following equipment must be effectively bonded together:
o service raceways, cable trays, or service cable armor or sheath;
o all service equipment enclosures containing service-entrance conductors, including meter fittings,
boxes, or the like, interposed in the service raceway or armor; and
o any metallic raceway or armor enclosing a grounding electrode conductor.

Page 211
ABG
- An equipment bonding jumper must be used to connect the grounding terminal of a grounding-type
receptacle to a grounded box, with certain exceptions.
- Equipment bonding jumpers must be of copper or other corrosion-resistant material, and may be installed
inside or outside of a raceway or enclosure. Where installed on the outside, the length of the equipment
bonding jumper must not exceed 6 feet and must be routed with the raceway or enclosure.
- Where available on the premises, a metal underground water pipe must always be used as the grounding
electrode, regardless of its length and whether supplied by a community or a local underground water
piping system or by a well on the premises. Where the buried portion of the water pipe (including any
metal well casing effectively bonded to the pipe) is less than 10 feet long or where the water pipe is or is
likely to be isolated by insulated sections or joints so that the effectively grounded portion is less than 10
feet long, it must be supplemented by the use of an additional electrode. The interior metal cold water
piping system must always be bonded to the service-equipment enclosure, the grounded conductor at the
service, the grounding electrode conductor where of sufficient size, or to the one or more grounding
electrodes used. Where a water system is not available, the grounding connection must be made to:
o the metal frame of the building, where effectively grounded;
o an electrode encased by at least 2 inches of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a
concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth, consisting of at least 20
feet of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less than 1/2-inch diameter, or consisting
of at least 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG;
o an electrically continuous metal underground gas piping system that is uninterrupted with
insulating sections or joints and without an outer nonconductive coating (if acceptable to the gas
supplier and the authority having jurisdiction); or
o other local metal underground systems or structures, such as piping systems and underground
tanks.
- Where none of the electrodes specified above is available, one of the following must be used:
o rod and pipe electrodes at least 8 feet long, or
o plate electrodes that expose at least 2 square feet of surface to exterior soil. A single electrode
consisting of a rod, pipe, or plate, which does not have a resistance to ground of 25 ohms or less,
must be augmented by one additional electrode.
- Connection devices or fittings that depend on solder must not be used.

- Where more than one equipment grounding conductor of a branch circuit enters a box, all such
conductors must be in good electrical contact with each other and the arrangement must be such that the
disconnection or removal of a receptacle, fixture, or other device fed from the box will not interfere with
or interrupt the grounding continuity.
- A connection must be made between the one or more equipment grounding conductors and a metal box
by means of a grounding screw, which must be used for no other purpose, or an approved grounding
device. One or more equipment grounding conductors brought into a nonmetallic outlet box must be so
arranged that a connection can be made to any fitting or device in that box requiring grounding.
- For temporary wiring, multi-conductor cords and cables must be hard service type or equivalent, with
multi-conductor fittings, and open wire taps, not exceeding 6 inches in length, may be made from
permanent wiring outlet boxes to supply approved lamp holders.

Page 212
ABG
- The minimum size of a temporary wood pole must be 6 inches by 6 inches (nominal) if square, or have a
top diameter of at least 5 inches if round, and be of sufficient length to maintain all required overhead
clearances, but at least 20 feet long. The lower end must be embedded at least 4 feet in the ground.
- Open exposed wiring must not be installed in any building or portion of a building, except in substations,
transformer vaults, transformer enclosures, on the supply side of electric furnace electrodes, or in tunnels
or similar locations, where such spaces are restricted to electrical use and are accessible to qualified and
authorized persons only.
- All manually operated switches must be of an approved externally operable type, unless operating at 50
volts or less, and must be enclosed in boxes or cabinets.
- Grounding conductors must be continuously marked with a green color or a green color with one or more
yellow stripes, and must not be used for anything other than grounding purposes. The identifying color(s)
must be on the insulation or on a braid.
- Lamp holders, fixtures, or standard receptacles rated 15 amperes or less must not be supplied by voltages
exceeding 150 volts to ground, with some exceptions.
- Attachment plugs or other connectors supplying equipment at more than 300 volts must be of the skirted
type, unless designed so that the arc will be confined within the body or case of the device.
- All new or replacement 15- and 20-ampere attachment plugs must be of dead-front construction such
that there are no exposed current-carrying metal parts except the prongs, blades, or pins.
- Grounding-type receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs must be provided with one fixed
grounding pole in addition to the circuit poles. Grounding-type receptacles, adapters, cord connectors,
and attachment plugs must be grounded.
- All smoothing irons and portable electrically heated appliances that are rated at more than 50 watts and
produce temperatures in excess of 250°F on surfaces with which the cord is likely to be in contact must be
provided with approved heater cords.
- Portable immersion-type electric heaters must be constructed and installed so that current-carrying parts
are effectively insulated from electrical contact with the substance in which they are immersed.
- Each electrically heated appliance that is intended by size, weight, and service to be located in a fixed
position must be so placed as to provide ample protection between the appliance and adjacent
combustible material.
- Each smoothing iron and other portable electrically heated appliance intended to be applied to
combustible material must be equipped with an approved stand, either as a separate piece of equipment
or a part of the appliance.
- Electrically heated appliances intended to be applied to combustible material must be provided with a
signal, unless provided with an integral temperature-limiting device.
- Infrared heating lamps rated at 300 watts or less are permitted with lamp holders of the medium-base,
un-switched porcelain type or other types approved for the purpose. Screw shell lamp holders must not
be used with infrared lamps over 300 watts rating.
- A separable connector or a plug and receptacle combination in the supply line to an oven or cooking unit
used only for ease in servicing or for installation must not be installed as the disconnecting means, and
must be approved for the temperature of the space in which it is located.
- All heating elements that are rated over one ampere, replaceable in the field and a part of an appliance
must be legibly marked with the ratings in volts and amperes, or in volts and watts, or with the
manufacturer's part number.

Page 213
ABG
- If an appliance is to be used on a specific frequency or frequencies, or when motor overload protection

external to the appliance is required, it must be so marked. The marking on an appliance consisting of a
motor with other load(s) or motors with or without other load(s) must specify the minimum circuit size
and the maximum rating of the circuit over-current protective device (with some exceptions).
- Means must be provided to disconnect the heater, controller(s), and over-current protective device(s) of
all fixed electric space heating equipment from all ungrounded conductors. Switches and circuit breakers
used as disconnecting means must be of the indicating type. Duct heater controller equipment must be
accessible with the disconnecting means installed at or within sight from the controller, unless the
disconnecting means is arranged to be locked in the "open" position.
- All fixed outdoor electric de-icing and snow melting equipment must be provided with a means for
disconnection from all ungrounded conductors. Where readily accessible to the user of the equipment,
the branch circuit switch or circuit breaker may serve as the disconnecting means. Switches used as
disconnecting means must be of the indicating type.
- The presence of electric pipeline and vessel heating equipment must be evident by the posting of
appropriate signs or other markings at frequent intervals in the area involved. Means must be provided to
disconnect all fixed electric pipeline or vessel heating equipment from all ungrounded conductors. The
branch circuit switch or circuit breaker, where readily accessible to the user of the equipment, may serve
as the disconnecting means. Switches used as disconnecting means must be of the indicating type, and
must be provided with a positive lockout in the "off" position. The factory-installed attachment plug of
cord-connected equipment, rated 20 amperes or less and 150 volts or less to ground is an acceptable
means of disconnection.
- A motor-running overload device that can restart a motor automatically after overload tripping must not
be installed unless approved for use with the motor it protects. A motor that can restart automatically
after shutdown may not be installed if its automatic restarting can result in injury to persons.
- Where a transformer or other device is used to obtain a reduced voltage for the control circuit and is
located in the controller, the transformer or other device must be connected to the load side of the
disconnecting means for the control circuit.
- Each motor controller must be capable of starting and stopping the motor it controls, and must be
capable of interrupting the stalled-rotor current of the motor. An autotransformer starter must provide
an off position, a running position, and at least one starting position. It must be so designed that it cannot
rest in the starting position or in any position that will render the overload device in the circuit
inoperative. Motor-starting rheostats must be so designed that the contact arm cannot be left on
intermediate segments. The point or plate on which the arm rests when in the starting position must have
no electrical connection with the resistor. Motor-starting rheostats for direct current motors operated
from a constant voltage supply must be equipped with automatic devices that will interrupt the supply
before the speed of the motor has fallen to less than 1/3 its normal value.
- The controller must have a horsepower rating not lower than the horsepower rating of the motor, with
certain exceptions. The controller does not have to open all conductors to the motor.
- Capacitors containing more than 3 gallons of flammable liquid must be enclosed in vaults or outdoor
fenced enclosures. Capacitors must be enclosed, located, or guarded so that persons cannot come into
accidental contact or bring conducting materials into accidental contact with exposed energized parts,
terminals, or buses associated with them.
- The residual voltage of a capacitor must be reduced to 50 volts or less within one minute after the
capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. The discharge circuit must be either permanently

Page 214
ABG
connected to the terminals of the capacitor or capacitor bank, or provided with automatic means of
connecting it to the terminals of the capacitor bank on removal of voltage from the line. Manual means of
switching or connecting the discharge circuit must not be used.
- A disconnecting means must be provided in each ungrounded conductor for each capacitor bank, unless a
capacitor is connected on the load side of a motor-running over-current device. The disconnecting means
is not required to open all ungrounded conductors simultaneously, and may disconnect the capacitor
from the line as a regular operating procedure. The rating of the disconnecting means must not be less
than 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitor.
- Some states have classified and adopted special precautions for vehicle service and repair operations,
aircraft hangars, gasoline dispensing and service stations, bulk storage plants, finishing area (locations
where paints, lacquers, or other flammable finishes are applied), wastewater wells, and oil and gas wells.
- Some states have adopted a variety of specific electrical requirements for the following:
o places of assembly;
o theaters;
o motion-picture studios;
o motion-picture projectors; and
o sound recording equipment.
- The bottom of sign and outline lighting enclosures must be at least 16 feet above areas accessible to
vehicles, unless protected from physical damage. Other specific clearances for signs and outline lighting
systems must be followed.
- - For cranes and hoists, the following requirements apply:

o Where a crane or hoist operates over readily combustible material, the resistors must be placed
in a well ventilated cabinet composed of noncombustible material so constructed that it will not
emit flames or molten metal.
o On floor operated overhead cranes a suitable work platform with means of access must be
provided, attached to the building structure, or on the overhead crane bridge, giving ready and
safe access to electrical control cabinets for service, maintenance, or repair.
o On every new installation, major replacement, modification, or repair made after 3/15/72, the
dimension of the working space in the direction of access to energized parts which are likely to
require examination, adjustment, service, or maintenance while energized must be in accordance
with §2340.16.
o All cranes using a lifting magnet must have a magnet circuit switch of the enclosed type with
provision for locking in the "open" position. A separate means for discharging the inductive load
of the magnet must be provided.
o Conductors must be enclosed in a raceway or must be Type MC or MI cable, with certain
exceptions.
o Some states have adopted numerous requirements for crane and hoist controls.
- Each welder must have over-current protection rated or set at not more than 200 percent of the rated
primary current of the welder.

Page 215
ABG
- For data processing systems, the following requirements apply:

o The branch-circuit conductors to which one or more units of a data processing system are
connected to a source of supply must have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the total
connected load.
o The data processing system may be connected by means of computer or data processing cable or
flexible cord and an attachment plug cap or cord-set assembly specifically approved as a part of
the data processing system. Separate units may be interconnected by means of flexible cords and
cables specifically approved as part of the data processing system. When run on the surface of the
floor, they must be protected against physical damage.
o Power cables, communications cables, and interconnecting cables associated with the data
processing equipment are permitted under a raised floor provided the raised floor is of suitable
construction, and the branch-circuit supply conductors to receptacles are in rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, metal wire way, metal surface raceway
with metal cover, flexible metal conduit, liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, mineral-insulated,
metal-sheathed cable, metal-clad cable, or Type AC cable, and ventilation in the under-floor area
is used for the data processing equipment and data processing area only.
- For electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines. The following requirements apply:
o Irrigation cable must be secured by approved straps, hangers, or similar fittings so designed and
installed as not to injure the cable. Cable must be supported at intervals not exceeding 4 feet.
o Fittings must be used at all points where irrigation cable terminates. The fittings must be designed
for use with the cable and suitable for the conditions of service.
o All electrical equipment on the irrigation machine, all electrical equipment associated with the
irrigation machine, metallic junction boxes and enclosures, and control panels or control
equipment that supply or control electrical equipment to the irrigation machine must be
grounded. Grounding is not required on machines where the machine is electrically controlled but
not electrically driven, the control voltage is 30 volts or less, and the control or signal circuits are
current limited.
o A cord-connected swimming pool filter pump must incorporate an approved system of double
insulation or its equivalent, and must be provided with means of grounding only the internal and
non-accessible noncurrent-carrying metal parts of the appliance. The means for grounding must
be an equipment grounding conductor run with the power-supply conductors in the flexible cord
that is properly terminated in a grounding-type attachment plug having a fixed grounding contact
member.
o All electric equipment, including power-supply cords, used with storable swimming pools must be
protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.
- Circuits, systems, and equipment intended to supply power for illumination and special loads, in the event
of failure of the normal supply, must be tested periodically on an approved schedule to assure their
maintenance in proper operating condition. Where battery systems or unit equipments are involved,
including batteries used for starting or ignition in auxiliary engines, the authority having jurisdiction will
require periodic maintenance. A written record must be kept of such tests and maintenance. Means for
testing all emergency lighting and power systems during maximum anticipated load conditions must be
provided. Where emergency lighting is necessary, the system must be so arranged that the failure of any
individual lighting element, such as the burning out of a light bulb, cannot leave any space in total

Page 216
ABG
darkness. All manual switches for controlling emergency circuits must be in convenient locations. In places
of assembly, such as theaters, a switch for controlling emergency lighting systems must be located in the
lobby or at a place conveniently accessible thereto, never in a motion picture projection booth or on a
stage. The branch circuit over-current devices in emergency circuits must be accessible to authorized
persons only.
- In electroplating and electro stripping processes, when access to the process while energized is necessary,
the entrance door guarding the electrolytic process must be electrically interlocked so that access by
employees will be prevented when the voltage exceeds 50 volts DC.
Over 600 Volts, Nominal
General
Conductors and equipment used on circuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, will comply with all applicable
provisions of the OSHA standard.
Enclosure for Electrical Installations
Electrical installations in a vault, room, and closet or in an area surrounded by a wall, screen, or fence, access to
which is controlled by lock and key or other equivalent means, are considered to be accessible to qualified
persons only. A wall, screen, or fence less than 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not considered adequate to prevent
access unless it has other features that provide a degree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot (2.44-m) fence. The
entrances to all buildings, rooms or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at
over 600 volts, nominal, will be kept locked or will be under the observation of a qualified person at all times.
Installations Accessible To Qualified Persons Only
Electrical installations having exposed live parts will be accessible to qualified persons only and will comply with
the applicable provisions of the OSHA standard.
Installations Accessible To Unqualified Persons
Electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons will be made with metal-enclosed equipment or will
be enclosed in a vault or in an area, access to which is controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed switch-gear, unit
substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other similar associated equipment will be marked
with appropriate caution signs. If equipment is exposed to physical damage from vehicular traffic, guards will be
provided to prevent such damage. Ventilating or similar openings in metal-enclosed equipment will be designed
so that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts.

Page 217
ABG
Workspace About Equipment
Sufficient space will be provided and maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and
maintenance of such equipment. Where energized parts are exposed, the minimum clear workspace will not be
less than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (measured vertically from the floor or platform), or less than 3 feet (914
mm) wide (measured parallel to the equipment). The depth will be as required in Table 2. The workspace will be
adequate to permit at least a 90-degree opening of doors or hinged panels.
Working Space
The minimum clear working space in front of electric equipment such as switchboards, control panels, switches,
circuit breakers, motor controllers, relays, and similar equipment will not be less than specified in Table 2 unless
otherwise specified in this Chapter. Distances will be measured from the live parts if they are exposed, or from the
enclosure front or opening if the live parts are enclosed. However, working space is not required in back of
equipment such as dead-front switchboards or control assemblies where there are no renewable or adjustable
parts (such as fuses or switches) on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than
the back. Where rear access is required to work on de-energized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a
minimum working space of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally will be provided.
TABLE 2 MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORKING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Nominal voltage to ground Conditions 1

(a) (b) (c)
Feet2 Feet2 Feet 2
601 to 2,500 .............................................. 3 4 5
2,501 to 9,000 ............................................ 4 5 6
9,001 to 25,000 ........................................... 5 6 9
25,001 to 75 kV ........................................... 6 8 10
Above 75 kV ............................................. 8 10 12
1
Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the
other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by insulating material.
Insulated wire or insulated bus bars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live
parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of concrete, brick or tile, are
considered to be grounded surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace (not guarded as
provided in Condition (a)) with the operator between.
2
NOTE: For SI units: one foot = 0.3048 m.

Page 218
ABG
Lighting Outlets and Points of Control
The lighting outlets will be so arranged that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the lighting system will
not be endangered by live parts or other equipment. The points of control will be so located that persons are not
likely to come in contact with any live part or moving part of the equipment while turning on the lights.
Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts
Unguarded live parts above working space will be maintained at elevations not less than specified in Table 3.
TABLE 3 ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE
Normal voltage between phases Minimum elevation
601 - 7,500 ............................................ 8 feet 6 inches 1

7,501 - 35,000 .......................................... 9 feet
Over 35 kV ............................................. 9 feet + 0.37 inches per kV above 35 kV
1
NOTE: For SI units: one inch = 25.4 mm; one foot = 0.3048 m.
Entrance and Access to Workspace
At least one entrance not less than 24 inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high will be provided to
give access to the working space about electric equipment. On switchboard and control panels exceeding 48
inches (1.22 m) in width, there will be one entrance at each end of such board where practicable. Where bare
energized parts at any voltage or insulated energized parts above 600 volts are located adjacent to such entrance,
they will be guarded.
Vehicular and Mechanical Equipment
Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead
lines will be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the
clearance will be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under any of the following
conditions, the clearance may be reduced:
- If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the
voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance will be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10 kV over that voltage.
- If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines, and if the barriers are rated for the
voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its raised

Page 219
ABG
structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed working dimensions of the
insulating barrier.
- If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved, and if the work is performed by a
qualified person, the clearance (between the un-insulated portion of the aerial lift and the power line)
may be reduced per the OSHA standard.
- Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical equipment or any of its
attachments, unless:
- The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage; or
- The equipment is located so that no un-insulated part of its structure (that portion of the structure that
provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than permitted in the
OSHA standard.
If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead
lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at
the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as
the use of barricades or insulation, will be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials,
depending on earth resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward
from the grounding point.
Illumination
Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts, unless illumination is provided that enables
the employees to perform the work safely.
Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation of the work to be performed, employees may
not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas which may contain
energized parts.
Confined or Enclosed Work Spaces
When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains exposed
energized parts, ABG will provide, and the employee will use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating
materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like will be
secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the employee to contact exposed energized
parts.
Conductive Materials and Equipment
Conductive materials and equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body will be handled in a
manner that will prevent them from contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. If an employee
must handle long dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, ABG

Page 220
ABG
will institute work practices (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material handling techniques) which will
minimize the hazard.
Portable Ladders
Portable ladders will have nonconductive side rails, if they are used where the employee or the ladder could
contact exposed energized parts.
Conductive Apparel
Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such a watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized
aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear) may not be worn if they might contact exposed
energized parts. However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping,
or other insulating means.
Housekeeping Duties
Where live parts present an electrical contact hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping duties at such
close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of contact, unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating
equipment or barriers) are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials (including conductive solids such as
steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be used in
proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed which will prevent electrical contact.
Lockout and Tagging of Circuits
This portion of the plan has been created to maintain a written copy of procedures to be followed during work on
or near enough to exposed de-energized parts of conductors and electric equipment to expose employees to any
electrical hazard they present. The requirements apply to all of ABG construction job sites.
This written procedure includes procedural steps for each one of the following:
- de-energizing equipment,
- application of locks and tags,
- verification of de-energized condition, and
- re-energizing equipment.

Page 221
ABG
While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been de-
energized, the circuits energizing the parts will be locked out or tagged or both according to the requirements of
this written plan.
Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been de-energized but have not been locked out or tagged
according to these procedures will be treated as energized parts.
The requirements must be followed in the order in which they are presented.
ABG maintains this written copy of procedures RSO's Office and makes it available for inspection by employees
and the Assistant Secretary of Labor (the head of OSHA) and his or her authorized representatives.
De-energizing Equipment
Safe procedures for de-energizing circuits and equipment will be determined by Site Supervisor before circuits or
equipment are de-energized.
The circuits and equipment to be worked on will be disconnected from all electric energy sources. Control circuit
devices, such as push buttons, selector switches, and interlocks, may not be used as the sole means for de-
energizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks for electric equipment may not be used as a substitute for lockout and
tagging procedures.
Stored electric energy which might endanger personnel will be released. Capacitors will be discharged and high
capacitance elements will be short-circuited and grounded, if the stored electric energy might endanger
personnel.
If the capacitors or associated equipment are handled in meeting this requirement, they will be treated as
energized.
Stored non-electrical energy in devices that could re-energize electric circuit parts will be blocked or relieved to
the extent that the circuit parts could not be accidentally energized by the device.
Application of Locks and Tags
A lock and a tag will be placed on each disconnecting means used to de-energize circuits and equipment on which
work is to be performed. Employees can obtain these locks and tags from Site Supervisor.
The lock will be attached so it prevents persons from operating the disconnecting means unless they resort to
undue force or the use of tools.
Each tag will contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized operation the disconnecting means and removal of the
tag.

Page 222
ABG
If a lock cannot be applied, or if ABG can demonstrate that tagging procedures will provide a level of safety
equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock, a tag may be used without a lock.
If a tag is used without a lock, the tag will be supplemented by at least one additional safety measure that
provides a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lock. Examples of additional safety measures
include the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, or opening of an extra
disconnecting device.
A lock may be placed without a tag only under the following conditions:
- Only one circuit or piece of equipment is de-energized, and

- The lockout period does not extend beyond the work shift, and
- Employees exposed to the hazards associated with re-energizing the circuit or equipment are familiar with
this procedure.
Use of either of these exceptions must be approved by Site Supervisor
Verification of De-energized Condition
The following requirements must be met before any circuits or equipment can be considered and worked as de-
energized:
1. A qualified person will operate the equipment operating controls or otherwise verify that the equipment
cannot be restarted.
2. A qualified person will use test equipment to test the circuit elements and electrical parts of equipment to
which employees will be exposed and will verify that the circuit elements and equipment parts are de-
energized.
The test will also determine if any energized condition exists as a result of inadvertently induced voltage or
unrelated voltage back feed even though specific parts of the circuit have been de-energized and presumed to be
safe. If the circuit to be tested is over 600 volts, nominal, the test equipment will be checked for proper operation
immediately before and immediately after this test.
Only authorized employees that have been trained and designated as qualified persons are authorized to perform
duties in that capacity.
Re-Energizing Equipment
The following requirements will be met, in order given, before circuits or equipment are re-energized, even
temporarily:

Page 223
ABG
1. A qualified person will conduct tests and visual inspections, as necessary, to verify that all tools, electrical
jumpers, shorts, grounds, and other such devices have been removed, so that the circuits and equipment
can be safely energized.
2. Employees exposed to the hazards associated with re-energizing the circuit or equipment will be warned
to stay clear of circuits and equipment.
3. Each lock and tag will be removed by the employee who applied it or under his or her direct supervision.
However, if this employee is absent from the workplace, then the lock or tag may be removed by a
qualified person designated to perform this task provided that the employee who applied the lock or tag
is not available at the workplace, and the employee is aware that the lock or tag has been removed before
he or she resumes work at that workplace.
4. There will be a visual determination that all employees are clear of the circuits and equipment.

Page 224
ABG
See the Lockout Tagout Program for complete details.
Additional State Requirements - High-Voltage Electrical Installations and Equipment (>600 volts)
1. All switches, circuit breakers, and other control devices must be located or marked to indicate clearly the
equipment controlled by them.
2. No building or premises may be supplied at more than one service point, except under certain conditions.
3. Overhead or underground services or service entrance conductors must not supply one building through
another.
4. Open service entrance conductors must be attached to the building at one point only, and must be
suitably guarded against accidental contact. The length of open conductor between such point of
attachment and the point where the conductors enter the building or the raceway must be as short as
practicable, but in no case greater than 3 feet. There must be a conspicuous and permanent "HIGH
VOLTAGE" sign placed on the outside immediately adjacent to the point of attachment.
5. Conductors other than service entrance conductors and grounding conductors must not be installed in
service entrance raceways.
6. Service switching devices must simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors supplied through
the service entrance conductors, with certain exceptions.
7. Surge and lightning protection equipment must be connected to the source side of switching devices.
8. Service entrance conductors must have a protective device in each ungrounded conductor on the load
side of or as an integral part of the service entrance switch. The protective device must be capable of
detecting and interrupting all values of current in excess of its minimum trip setting or minimum melting
point, which can occur at its location.
9. Each set of service entrance conductors must have a service entrance switch which is group operated to
open each set of ungrounded service entrance conductors, and it must be capable of being padlocked in
the open position.
10. A means must be provided to isolate the load and each over-current protective device in the service
entrance conductors from all sources of supply.
11. Two or more feeders or sets of service entrance conductors, which can be operated in parallel, must be
provided with a suitable means to isolate each set or feeder from all others. Operation of paralleling
switches must be restricted to qualified and authorized persons only. A written switching procedure must
be made available to and followed by such personnel.
12. Each feeder must be arranged so that it can be isolated from all sources of supply except that isolating
switches are not required for taps.
13. If a high-voltage system is to be grounded, a grounding connection must be made to the system neutral if
available. This connection must be made at or on the source side of the service entrance equipment.
Grounding connections must be arranged to prevent objectionable current in the equipment grounding
conductor during normal system operation. Grounding equipment and connections must have ample
thermal capacity to carry safely any current, which may be imposed on them by the system. Grounding
connections must be clamp type, pressure type, welded, or other approved type, and grounding
electrodes must be of corrosion-resistant material and of adequate size, number, and location to
effectively ground the system. Local piping systems, well casings, building frames, and the like must not

Page 225
ABG
be used as system grounding electrodes unless their resistance to ground will be maintained low enough
to insure effective grounding.
14. Effective grounding of all equipment must be assured by the use of an equipment grounding conductor,
where feasible, such that the path to ground will have impedance sufficiently low to limit the potential
above ground, and to facilitate the operation of the over-current or ground fault detecting devices in the
system. Where the conduit is intended to function as the equipment grounding conductor, approved
threaded couplings, hubs, and joints, or double locknuts and bushings with bonding jumpers are required.
Unless grounding conductors are an integral part of the cable, they must be no smaller than No. 6 AWG
for mechanical strength. Grounding conductors must be of corrosion-resistant approved material, or must
be suitably protected against corrosion, and must have thermal capacity for the conditions imposed on
them by the system.
15. Portable high-voltage equipment must be supplied from a system having its neutral grounded through
impedance. Where a delta-connected high-voltage system is used to supply portable equipment, a system
neutral must be derived. The product of the maximum ground fault current and the impedance of the
ground return conductor must be such as to limit the voltage developed between the portable equipment
frame and ground (by the flow of ground fault current) to not more than 100 volts.
16. Conductors of high-voltage and low-voltage systems must not occupy the same wiring enclosure or pull
and junction boxes except in approved switchgear and control assemblies.
17. Raceways, except those used for exposed work and having a removable cover, must first be installed as a
complete raceway system without the conductors. Pull wires, if used, must not be installed until the
raceway system is in place. Approved pulling compound may be used as a lubricant in inserting
conductors in raceways. Cleaning agents or lubricants having a deleterious effect on conductor coverings
must not be used.
18. Conductors must not be bent to a radius less than 8 times the overall diameter for non-shielded
conductors or 12 times the diameter for shielded or lead-covered conductors during or after installation.
19. 19. Pull boxes must be of sufficient size and design to accommodate the installation and maintenance of
all conductors installed in them without damaging the insulation on any conductor. Where permanent
barriers are installed in a box, each section must be considered as a separate box. One or more sides of a
pull box must be removable. Horizontal conductors of 6 feet or more in length inside the box must be
supported.
20. Pull boxes must be made of material inherently resistant to corrosion or must be suitably protected both
internally and externally, by enameling, galvanizing, plating, or other equivalent means. Suitable bushings,
shields, or fittings having smooth rounded edges must be provided where conductors pass through
partitions and at other locations where necessary. Pull boxes must be so installed that the wiring is
accessible without removing any part of the building. Pull boxes must be of a type approved for the
respective location in which they are installed.
21. Covers for pull and junction boxes used in high-voltage raceway systems must be labeled "HIGH
VOLTAGE" in block letters at least 1/2 inch high.
22. Some state’s rules specify the minimum spacing, in inches, between bare energized parts and adjacent
surfaces.
23. Bus runs having sections located both inside and outside of a building must provide a vapor seal at the
building wall to prevent interchange of air between indoor and outdoor sections unless forced cooled.
Fire barriers must be provided at walls where fire separation is required.

Page 226
ABG
24. Flexible or expansion connections must be provided in long, straight runs of bus to allow for temperature
expansion or contraction, or where the bus run crosses building vibration insulation joints. All conductor
termination and connection hardware must be accessible for installation, connection, and maintenance.
Where bus enclosures terminate at machines cooled by flammable atmospheres, seal-off bushings,
baffles, or other means must be provided to prevent accumulation of flammable gas in the bus enclosure.
25. Switching devices or disconnecting links provided in the bus run must have the same momentary rating as
the bus. Disconnecting links must be plainly marked to be removable only when the bus is de-energized.
Switching devices which are not load break must be interlocked to prevent operation under load, and
disconnecting link enclosures must be interlocked to prevent access to energized parts.
26. Each bus run must be provided with a permanent nameplate listing rated voltage, rated continuous
current, rated frequency, rated impulse withstand voltage, rated 60-cycle withstand voltage (dry), rated
momentary current, and the manufacturer's name and address.
27. Drain plugs, filter drains, or similar methods must be provided to remove condensed moisture from low
points in bus runs.
28. Secondary control devices and wiring which are provided as part of the metal-enclosed bus run must be
isolated by grounded metal barriers from all primary circuit elements with the exception of short lengths
of wire, such as at instrument transformer terminals.
29. Continuous rigid cable supports may extend vertically through floors and platforms if the cable support is
totally enclosed where it passes through the floor or platform opening and for a distance of 6 feet above
the floor or platform to provide protection from physical damage.
30. A working space of 24 inches minimum must be maintained on one side of each rigid cable support. A
minimum vertical clearance of 6 inches must be maintained from the top of the rigid cable support to all
ceilings, beams, and other similar obstructions exceeding 24 inches, measured along the length of the
cable support.
31. Metal-clad cable may be installed on metal racks, trays, troughs, or continuous rigid cable supports which
are effectively grounded. Each cable must be supported at intervals not exceeding 6 feet and within 2 feet
of every box or fitting, and each cable must be attached to the support at intervals of not more than 10
feet horizontally and 2 feet vertically.
32. For metal-clad cable, the flexible metal enclosure must provide the equivalent mechanical strength of not
less than .025 inch of steel.
33. Cable supplying energy to mobile equipment or machinery must be IPCEA Type SHD-GC or other approved
portable type.
34. Suitable fencing, barriers, or other means must be provided to prevent access of other than authorized
and qualified personnel to temporary wiring.
35. Temporary wiring must not be used for longer than 90 days, except for construction purposes in which
case it may be used for up to one year. All temporary wiring must be removed immediately upon the
completion of construction or purpose for which the wiring was installed; or upon the expiration of the
time limit specified above.
36. When a cable is suspended by its conductor(s), the total suspended weight must not be greater than one-
seventh of the ultimate tensile strength of the supporting conductor(s). Cable supports must be designed
to carry adequately the weight of the cable. Separate supports must be provided for the sheath of
unarmored lead-sheathed cable. When a cable is suspended by wire armor or messenger, the total
suspended weight must not be greater than one-fifth of the ultimate tensile strength of the armor or
messenger. When wire mesh mechanical holding devices are used, either as the sole means of support or

Page 227
ABG
in conjunction with other means of support, the total suspended weight on each device and the distance
between devices must not exceed recommendations of the cable and wire mesh manufacturers.
37. Vault interior walls must be of assemblies of materials approved for not less than one-hour, non-
combustible fire-resistive construction. Door openings to vaults must be protected by approved one-hour
rated fire door and frame assemblies. Vault ceiling access opening covers or grates weighing less than 100
pounds must be securely fastened in place. Openings must be a minimum of 26 inches in diameter or 24
inches by 26 inches in size. Safe access must be provided from the opening to the floor or other working
surface. All ventilating flues or ducts must be of noncombustible construction. Ventilating openings must
not be through the vault door, except where the door opens to outdoors. Vaults must be provided with
adequate ventilation. Where drainage from sumps in vaults is to a sewage system, a suitable trap must be
installed capable of preventing the entrance of sewer gas into the vault. Pipelines such as sewer, water,
gas, oil, etc., must be installed outside the vault enclosure unless they constitute an integral part of
operation of the equipment installed in the vault. Where it is impracticable for such lines to be installed
outside the vault, they must contain no appurtenances (such as valves, faucets, or fittings) inside the vault
that require maintenance.
38. In vaults containing oil-filled equipment, walls, roofs, and floors (other than when laid on earth) must be
of assemblies of materials approved for three-hour non-combustible fire-resistive construction. Door
openings to vaults must be protected by approved three-hour rated fire doors and frame assemblies. A
door sill or curb of sufficient height (at least 4 inches) to confine within the vault the oil from the largest
oil-filled equipment must be provided. Ventilating openings must be located as far away as practicable
from building doors, windows, fire escapes, and combustible material. All openings from vaults into
buildings, except approved fire door openings and viewing ports, must be connected to a non-
combustible duct or flue leading directly to the exterior, or must be equipped with approved three-hour
rated fire doors or fire dampers. Ducts and flues must not be connected with any other ventilating or air
distribution system, except that ventilation may be supplied from conditioned air systems into the vault,
provided approved three-hour rated fire doors or fire dampers are installed in each opening. Water-type
fire sprinkler systems are prohibited.
39. Electrical equipment containing flammable gas or more than 10 gallons of flammable oil per unit must not
be installed indoors except in a vault or a separate building. Neither the building nor its contents may
present a fire hazard to any other building or property, and the building must be used only for supplying
electrical service.
40. Electrical equipment may be installed on the roof of a building, provided that the building structure has
sufficient strength to support the entire installation, and where oil-insulated equipment is used, the roof
must be of two-hour, non-combustible fire resistive construction, and a curb high enough to contain the
oil from the largest oil-filled equipment (at least 6 inches) must be provided. A drain must be provided
from the curbed enclosure to carry any oil away from the building.
41. Permanent and conspicuous warning signs must be posted on all doors or gates that provide access to
enclosures containing exposed energized parts and conductors. The signs must be legible at 12 feet and
must read substantially as follows: "WARNING—HIGH VOLTAGE—KEEP OUT."
42. The height of fenced or walled enclosures must be at least 8 feet, or floor to ceiling if the ceiling is less
than 8 feet, or 10 feet where any exposed energized part is more than 8 feet above the ground (unless the
energized part is located more than 5 feet horizontally from the enclosure). The enclosure must be
constructed so that it cannot be readily climbed. The size and location of openings in fences or similar
enclosures must be such that persons are not liable to come into accidental contact with energized parts,

Page 228
ABG
or to bring conducting objects into contact with them. The gate or door in the enclosure must have
minimum dimensions of 2 feet 6 inches wide and 6 feet 6 inches high, and must be readily operable. No
reduction in enclosure height at the door or gate is permitted. Metal gates or doors must be grounded or
bonded to a grounded metal enclosure.
43. Where oil-filled apparatus is installed within an enclosure adjacent to combustible material or
combustible buildings, provision must be made to confine within the enclosure the largest amount of oil
contained in a single piece of apparatus. Pressure relief devices of oil-filled apparatus must be designed
and located to minimize the hazard to persons from escaping oil.
44. The inside measurement of any manhole, subway, chamber, or underground room containing any
electrical wiring or equipment must be at least 4 feet between the end walls and between the side walls,
or if circular in shape, at least 4 feet in diameter inside measurement, and at least 6-1/2 feet at all points
between the floor and the top or ceiling. Any access opening to outer air must be at least 26 inches if
circular in shape, or at least 24 inches by 26 inches clear measurement if rectangular in shape.
45. The ampacities of conductors must be as shown in IPCEA Publication No. P46-426, Volumes I and II,
"Power Cable Ampacities," published September 1, 1966 by the Insulated Power Cable Engineers
Association.
46. Underground ducts of rigid metallic steel conduit, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, or equivalent, containing
cables operating at a potential above 35,000 volts, must be installed at a depth of at least 36 inches, with
certain exceptions. A lesser depth is permitted for ducts containing cables operating at 35,000 volts or
less, if the duct is rigid metallic conduit, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, or equivalent, or if the duct has a layer
of concrete at least 3 inches thick above the duct.
47. Direct buried cables or cables in flexible nonmetallic enclosures must be installed at a depth of at least 36
inches. Lesser depths may be employed if the cable is armored with a minimum of No. 12 BWG steel wire
closely wound or two layers of steel tape each at least 0.020 inch thick, or if the cable is protected by a
layer of concrete at least 3 inches thick above the cable.
48. Some state’s rules contain specific, detailed requirements for:
o pole- and structure-supported risers;
o interrupter switches;
o power fuses;
o expulsion-type distribution cutouts and fuse links;
o oil-filled cutouts;
o metal-enclosed power switchgear and industrial control assemblies;
o transformers;
o rotating machinery and its control apparatus;
o capacitors;
o resistors and reactors;
o minimum clear distances when performing work with live line tools;
o fall protection;
o aerial lift equipment and derrick trucks, cranes, and other lifting equipment;
o material handling related to electrical equipment;
o work on or in proximity to overhead high voltage lines;
o metal tower construction;
o the washing of insulators supporting energized conductors or equipment;

Page 229
ABG
o tubular steel poles;

o work on or in proximity to underground high-voltage cables, conductors, or equipment;
o work on or in proximity to conductors and equipment in high-voltage stations or switchyards;
o access and workspaces at electric utilities;
o operations in proximity to overhead lines;
o line clearance tree trimming operations; and
o signs and outline lighting exceeding 600 volts.
49. The covers of all terminal enclosures must be posted with a permanent "HIGH VOLTAGE" warning sign
having letters at least 1/2 inch high.
50. Where installed in buildings, cables energized above 35,000 volts must be encased in at least 3 inches of
concrete or equivalent fire-resistant material.
51. Cables must be labeled at all circuit terminals, sectionalizing points, vaults, rooms, etc. The labels must, as
a minimum, show phase and circuit designation and nearest sectionalizing points.
52. All cables normally operated above 5,000 volts must have insulation shielding, except that shielding is not
required for series street lighting circuits operating at less than 7,500 volts. Metallic shielding (or each
section thereof) at terminations must be effectively grounded.
53. Circuits must be labeled at all accessible points with suitable warning signs stating the locations from
which feedback may occur because of circuits energized by manually or automatically operated
equipment, circuit configurations or connections, circuits feeding a load which can be connected to
auxiliary generating equipment, or circuits feeding synchronous motor-driven generator sets which can be
energized by reverse power flow from batteries or other sources.
54. Provision must be made to observe the position of the blades of disconnecting switches. If viewing
windows are provided, they must be shatterproof, of adequate size, and suitably located to permit
viewing of all contacts.
55. Disconnecting switches must have a permanent and legible nameplate showing the continuous current
rating, maximum voltage rating, and momentary current rating. Suitable barriers must be installed on
both sides of each pole of disconnecting switches mounted indoors.
56. Unless interlocked so that they cannot be opened under load, disconnecting switches must be provided
with permanent warning signs having letters at least 2 inches high and reading as follows: "Warning—
Disconnecting Switch—Do Not Open Under Load."
57. Circuit breakers must comply with all the provisions of American National Standard ANSI/IEEE C37.04--
1979, Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis.
58. Circuit breakers must:
o have an accessible mechanical or other approved means for manual tripping, independent of
control power;
o be release free (trip free);
o have positive means to prevent unintended operation during inspection or maintenance;
o open and close the main contacts independent of the speed of the manual operation, when
operated manually while energized; and
o be equipped with a mechanical position indicator to show the open or closed position of the main
contacts.
59. Circuit breakers must have a permanent and legible nameplate that includes the manufacturer's name or
trademark, manufacturer's type or identification number, continuous current rating, interrupting rating in
MVA or amperes, and maximum voltage rating.

Page 230
ABG
60. Means must be provided to isolate each circuit breaker or circuit breaker installation from all sources of
potential. The isolating means must provide a visible gap in the electrical circuit adequate for the
operating voltage. Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting rating) must be mechanically
interlocked with the circuit breaker or provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent
switching load current.
61. Automatic circuit re-closers must comply with all the provisions of American National Standard ANSI/IEEE
C37.60-1981, Requirements for Overhead, Pad Mounted, Dry Vault, and Submersible Automatic Circuit
Re-closers and Fault Interrupters for AC Systems.
62. Lightning arresters (e.g., expulsion arresters, valve arresters with external series gap, etc.) that produce
or expel ionized gases to the atmosphere during normal operation must not be used in flammable
atmosphere locations. All parts of the arrester must be at least 10 feet above ground, unless enclosed in
such a way as to prevent access to unauthorized persons. Connections to lightning arresters must be
adequate to carry the discharge current, but must not be smaller than No. 6 AWG copper or equivalent.
Lightning arresters must have a permanent and legible identification including the name of the device,
manufacturer's name and/or trademark, manufacturer's type and identification number, and voltage
rating of the arrester.
63. On portable and/or mobile high-voltage power distribution and utilization equipment, the metallic
enclosures covering the terminals of the power cable and the energized switching and control parts must
be marked "DANGER--HIGH VOLTAGE."
64. Electrical controls for a tunnel ventilation system must be so arranged that the air flow can be reversed.
65. Switch or contactor enclosures in tunnels must not be used as junction boxes or raceways for conductors
feeding through or tapping off to other switches, unless special designs are used to provide adequate
space for this purpose.
66. Portable ladders may be used to provide access to the working space around electrical equipment
installed on platforms, balconies, mezzanine floors, or in attic or roof rooms or spaces.
67. In the table showing the minimum depth of clear working space about electrical equipment, some states
have modified the federal requirements by altering the voltage ranges. Specifically, the voltage of 9,000
has been reduced to 7,500.
68. Employers must furnish such safety devices and safeguards as may be necessary to make the employment
or place of employment as free from danger to the safety and health of employees as the nature of the
employment reasonably permits. The employer must examine or test each safety device at such intervals
as may be reasonably necessary to ensure that it is in good condition and adequate to perform the
function for which it is intended. Any device furnished by the employer found to be unsafe must be
repaired or replaced.
69. Employees must be instructed to inspect each safety device, tool, or piece of equipment each time it is
used and to use only those in good condition. The employer must require the use of safety devices and
safeguards where applicable.
70. Except for replacing fuses, operating switches, or other operations that do not require an employee to
contact energized high-voltage conductors or energized parts of equipment, clearing "trouble" or in
emergencies involving hazard to life or property, no such employee may be assigned to work alone.
71. While work is being done on any exposed conductors or exposed parts of equipment connected to high-
voltage systems, a qualified electrical worker, or an employee in training, must be in close proximity at
each work location to act primarily as an observer for the purpose of preventing an accident, and to
render immediate assistance in the event of an accident.

Page 231
ABG
72. Work on or from structures must be discontinued when adverse weather, such as high winds, ice on
structures, or the progress of an electrical storm in the immediate vicinity, makes the work hazardous,
except during emergency restoration procedures.
73. When work is performed over or near water and when danger of drowning exists, suitable protection
must be provided.
74. Whenever rubber gloves are used, they must be protected by outer canvas or leather gloves. Insulating
equipment fabricated of material other than rubber must provide electrical and mechanical protection at
least equal to that of rubber equipment.
75. Employers are responsible for the periodic visual and electrical re-testing of all insulating gloves, sleeves,
and blankets, according to ASTM standards. Gloves, sleeves, and blankets must be marked to indicate
compliance with the re-test schedule and must be marked with either the date tested, or the date the
next test is due.
76. When not being used, insulating gloves and sleeves must be stored in glove bags or suitable containers.
Insulating blankets must be stored in a canister or other means that offers equivalent protection.
77. Insulating equipment must be stored away from direct sunlight, steam pipes, radiators, and other sources
of excessive heat and must be protected from physical damage. Gloves, sleeves, and blankets must not be
folded while in storage; however, blankets may be rolled for storage.
78. Insulating equipment must be visually inspected for defects and damage, and must be cleaned prior to
use each day.
79. Rubber gloves must be air and water tested at the beginning of each work period and at any other time
when the glove's condition is in doubt. The gloves must be visually examined over their entire inner and
outer surface for any defects (i.e., burns, cuts, cracks, punctures and weak spots), and must have the cuff
stretched to detect abrasions and weak spots.
80. Portable conductive ladders must be legibly marked with signs reading “Caution--Do Not Use Near
Energized Electrical Equipment” or equivalent wording.
81. Live line tools must be visually inspected for defects before use each day. Tools to be used must be wiped
clean and if defects are indicated the tools must not be used.
82. Hydraulic and pneumatic tools used on or near exposed energized conductors or equipment must use
non-conductive hoses having adequate strength for normal operating pressures. In addition, such
pneumatic tools must have an accumulator on the compressor to collect moisture. Hydraulic fluids used
for the insulated sections of derrick trucks, aerial lifts, and hydraulic tools that are used on or near
energized conductors or equipment must be of the insulating type.
83. Lines used for emergency rescue such as lowering a person to the ground must have a minimum breaking
strength of 2650 pounds and must be readily available on the job site.
84. Employers must ensure that each employee who is exposed to the hazards of flames or electric arcs does
not wear clothing made from acetate, nylon, polyester, or rayon, either alone or in blends, unless treated
with flame retardant.
85. When working near energized lines or equipment, aerial lift trucks must be grounded or barricaded and
considered as energized equipment, or the aerial lift truck boom must be insulated for the voltage being
worked on.
86. During construction, operation, or maintenance of power transmission and distribution systems,
employees operating equipment such as cranes, booms, or derricks must not be permitted to stand on a
grounded surface, other than the equipment itself, when such equipment is operated within 6 feet of
exposed energized high voltage conductors or equipment. During movement of such cranes, booms, or

Page 232
ABG
derricks, employees on the ground must be required to stay clear of the equipment. Also, wire rope or
chains, except slings, must not be used to raise or lower transformers, poles or any other material within
6 feet of exposed energized high voltage conductors or equipment.
87. Before contacting the high voltage side of de-energized transformer(s), or conductor(s) connected
thereto, all possible sources of back feed must be eliminated by disconnecting or grounding the high
voltage side, or disconnecting or short circuiting the low voltage side.
88. The owner, agent, or employer responsible for the operations of equipment must post and maintain in
plain view of the operator and driver on each crane, derrick, power shovel, drilling rig, hay loader, hay
stacker, pile driver, or similar apparatus, a durable warning sign legible at 12 feet reading: "Unlawful To
Operate This Equipment Within 10 Feet Of High-Voltage Lines of 50,000 Volts Or Less." In addition, the
following statement in small lettering must be provided on the warning sign: "For Minimum Clearances of
High-Voltage Lines In Excess of 50,000 Volts.
Training
Training is provided to ensure that employees are familiar with the requirements of this plan. This training is
provided to employees at the time of hire and annually thereafter.
Safety Manager, RSO is responsible for conducting training.
The training program addresses the required written elements for electrical safety for:
1. The assured equipment grounding conductor program.

2. Lockout and tagging procedures to be used when working on exposed de-energized parts.
Training for Unqualified Employees
Training for Unqualified Employees is general electrical safety precautions to provide an awareness and
understanding of electrical hazards.
Electrical Safety Rules for Non-Qualified Workers:
1. Do not conduct any repairs to electrical equipment

2. Report all electrical deficiencies to your supervisor
3. Do not operate equipment if you suspect and electrical problem
4. Water and electricity do not mix.
5. Even low voltages can kill or injure you
6. Do not use cords or plugs if the ground prong is missing
7. Do not overload electrical receptacles

Page 233
ABG
Training for Qualified Employees
Training for Qualified Employees includes specific equipment procedures and requirements of applicable OSHA
standards.
Program Evaluation
The Electrical Safety Plan is evaluated and updated annually by RSO to ensure the continued effectiveness of the
program.

Page 234
ABG
EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN
EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................... 223
Administrative Duties...............................................................................................................................................224
Emergency Reporting and Weather Monitoring Procedures....................................................................................225
Evacuation Procedures.............................................................................................................................................225
Fire .......................................................................................................................................................................226
Tornado.................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Earthquake................................................................................................................................................................227
Hazardous Chemical Release....................................................................................................................................228
Medical Emergencies................................................................................................................................................229
Plan Administrator Duties.........................................................................................................................................229
Training..................................................................................................................................................................... 230
Emergency Action Diagram.......................................................................................................................................230

Page 235
ABG
Purpose
ABG is dedicated to the protection of its employees from emergencies such as tornadoes and fires. When
emergencies do occur, our Emergency Action Plan (EAP) is initiated. This EAP is in place to ensure employee
safety from emergencies during regular hours and after hours. It provides a written document detailing and
organizing the actions and procedures to be followed by employees in case of a workplace emergency.
OSHA's Emergency Action Plan requirements require ABG to have a written emergency action plan (EAP). This
EAP addresses emergencies that our ABG expects may reasonably occur at any of its sites.
The EAP communicates to employees, policies and procedures to follow in emergencies. This written plan is
available, upon request, to employees, their designated representatives, and any OSHA officials who ask to see it.
The Safety Director (or designee) is the EAP administrator, who has overall responsibility for the plan. This
responsibility includes the following:
- Developing and maintaining a written Emergency Action Plan

- Notifying the local fire or police departments of an emergency affecting the facility;
- Taking security measures to protect employees;
- Integrating the Emergency Action Plan with any existing general emergency plan covering the building or
work area occupied;
- Distributing procedures for reporting emergencies, the location of safe exits, and evacuation routes to
each employee;
- Conducting drills to acquaint employees with emergency procedures and to judge the effectiveness of
the plan;
- Training designated employees in emergency response such as the use of fire extinguishers and the
application of first aid;
- Deciding which emergency response to initiate (evacuate or not);
- Ensuring that equipment is placed and locked in storage rooms or desks for protection;
- Maintaining records and property as necessary; and
- Ensuring that our facility meets all local fire codes, building codes, and regulations.
The Safety Director is responsible for reviewing and updating the plan as necessary. Copies of this plan may be
obtained from the Safety Director's office.
The Safety Director has full authority to decide to implement the EAP if he believes an emergency might threaten
human health. The following potential emergencies might reasonably be expected at this facility or work areas
and thus call for the implementation of this EAP:
- Fire emergencies (process area fires, non-pressurized tank fires, pressurized tank fires, fires at loading
facilities, warehouse fires, office building fires, electrical fires)
- Toxic gas releases

Page 236
ABG
- Flammable gas releases

- Hazardous liquid spills
- Oil spills
- Release of radiation
- Tornadoes
- Winter storms
- Flooding
- Earthquakes
- Bomb threat/Civil disturbance.
- First-aid emergencies
The Safety Director can be contacted regarding further information about duties under this written Emergency
Action Plan
Key management personnel home telephone numbers are kept in a safe place, on office and work area bulletin
boards, and in ABG vehicles, for immediate use in the event of an emergency. These telephone numbers of key
management personnel have been distributed all supervisors to be retained in their homes for use in
communicating an emergency occurring during non-work hours:
If, after reading this plan, you find that improvements can be made, please contact the plan administrator or Site
Safety Manager. We encourage all suggestions because we are committed to the success of our Emergency
Action Plan. We strive for clear understanding, safe behavior, and involvement in the program from every level of
the ABG.
Emergency Reporting and Weather Monitoring Procedures
In the Event of an Emergency Requiring Evacuation
When employees detect an emergency that requires an evacuation, such as a fire or hazardous release, they
should activate the fire alarm and exit the facility to the designated safe area for a headcount. The fire
department will be notified via telephone.
In the Event of a Tornado Watch
We monitor tornadoes by severe weather radio. When available, our backup method for monitoring tornadoes
includes city and county tornado sirens
Evacuation Procedures
Some emergencies require evacuation or escape procedures, while some require employees to stay indoors, or in
a safe area. Our emergency escape procedures are designed to respond to many potential emergencies,
depending on the degree of seriousness. Nothing in these procedures precludes the plan administrator's
authority in determining whether employees should remain inside or evacuate.

Page 237
ABG
At this ABG, the following types of emergency evacuations exist:
- total and immediate evacuation

- partial evacuation
Our emergency escape procedures and assignments are designed to respond to many potential emergencies that
require them, including: fire, tornado, bomb threat, and chemical release.
Employees need to know what to do if they are alerted to a specific emergency. After an alarm is sounded to
evacuate, employees should take the following steps:
- Cease work immediately and proceed to the nearest available exit.

- Go to your designated safe area for a headcount and further instructions.
Procedures to Account for Employees
Trained evacuation personnel assist in safe and orderly evacuation for all types of emergencies that require
evacuation. Once evacuation is complete, they conduct head counts. The employees selected are trained in the
complete workplace layout and the various alternative escape routes from the workplace. All trained personnel
are made aware of employees with disabilities who may need extra assistance, such as using the buddy system,
and of hazardous areas to be avoided during emergencies. Before leaving, these employees check rooms and
other enclosed spaces in the workplace for employees who may be trapped or otherwise unable to evacuate the
area.
Frontline supervisors must be aware of the locations of those employees working on a particular day when an
emergency occurs, and be aware of who is absent or otherwise away from the premises. Accounting for
employees will aid local responding fire/rescue departments in determining whether rescue efforts are
necessary.
Once each evacuated group of employees have reached their evacuation destinations, each trained evacuation
employee:
- Takes roll of his or her group,

- Makes sure all persons are accounted for,
- Reports in to a central checkpoint managed by Site Supervisor and
- Assumes role of department contact to answer questions.
Head count results should be given to the Fire Chief or firefighter, if requested.
No employees are to return to their work area until advised by Site Supervisor or designee (after determination
has been made that such re-entry is safe).

Page 238
ABG
Fire
Upon sounding the alarm, all personnel shall evacuate the work area by the most direct route. The routes are
shown on the work place maps posted on the bulletin boards.
Prior to exiting, turn off machine at your work station or close the valves on gas operated equipment such as
oxygen/acetylene carts. Do not try to retrieve items or tools.
Site Safety Manager or his representative, prior to exiting the area, shall ensure that all equipment is secured and
all areas are checked to ensure that no employee remains in his area.
All employees shall go directly upon sounding the alarm to the parking lot and assemble with your Supervisor for
a head count. At no time will you leave this area unless directed by management or supervision. Do not try to re-
enter the work area to obtain personal items or tools. Supervisors will report to Site Safety Manager or his
representative with the names of all employees counted and any unaccounted for personnel as soon as the head
count is completed.
Should an employee discover a fire, he or she will notify the Supervisor in that area who will advise Site Safety
Manager or his representative. At the same time the Supervisor will direct the use of fire extinguishers against
the fire and evacuate when he or she deems it necessary.
Site Safety Manager will be responsible for furnishing any further information to the employees concerning this
plan.
Tornado
Upon being advised of the distinct possibility that a tornado may strike the area Site Safety Manager or his
representative shall sound the alarm. All personnel shall seek shelter immediately by either crawling under
sturdy work benches, equipment, inside rooms or basements within the shop after shutting off power to
machines.
Upon sounding the all clear signal which will be a voice signal and providing the tornado missed the shop, all
personnel shall resume normal production duties.
If the tornado strikes the shop and the all clear is sounded by the U.S. Weather Bureau, it may be necessary to
evacuate part of the work area.
Personnel in each building will be advised by voice communication by Site Safety Manager or his or her
representative as to what action is necessary. If evacuation is deemed necessary, those personnel to be
evacuated will proceed directly to the parking lot. Do not try to retrieve personal items or tools. Head counting
procedures will be the same as for fires. At no time will you leave this area unless directed by management or
supervisory personnel.

Page 239
ABG
All fire fighting, rescue and medical duties will be performed by fire department, police department, and hospital
medical personnel. At no time will our personnel attempt, on their own initiative, a rescue after departing the
work area.
Site Safety Manager will be responsible for furnishing any further information to the employees.
Earthquake
Upon realization that an earthquake is occurring, get under the nearest workbench or equipment, that will
provide you overhead protection from falling objects. Try to stay away from electrical lines and overhead storage
racks containing heavy objects.
Upon sounding the alarm, all personnel shall evacuate the area by the most direct exit. The routes are shown on
the work place maps posted on bulletin boards. Prior to your exit turn off your machine at your work station and
close the valves on gas operated equipment such as oxygen/acetylene welding carts. Do not try and retrieve
personal items or tools.
Site Safety Manager or his representative, prior to exiting the work area, shall ensure that all equipment is
secured and all areas are checked to ensure that no employee remains on the work area.
All employees shall go directly upon sounding of the alarm to the parking lot and assemble with your Supervisor
for a head count. At no time will you leave the area unless directed by management or supervisory personnel. Do
not try to re-enter the work area to obtain personal items or tools. Supervisors report to Site Safety Manager or
his representative, the names of personnel counted and any unaccounted personnel as soon as the head count is
completed.
Any rescue or medical duties will be performed by fire departments, police departments, or hospital medical
personnel. At no time will our personnel attempt, on their own initiative, a rescue or fire suppression after
departing the work area.
Hazardous Chemical Release
In the event of an accidental release of hazardous chemicals, an evacuation would be required if the release is in
a significant amount to cause, or have potential to cause, harm to employees.
After it is determined that there is a hazardous chemical emergency, the Management Team will be notified and
make the decision whether to evacuate any areas. All unqualified Employees should remain clear of any spill or
release of any hazardous material. If evacuation procedures have been initiated, ALL EMPLOYEES MUST LEAVE
THE PLANT and proceed to the designated meeting area
NO ONE MAY ENTER THE RELEASE/SPILL/AFFECTED AREAS WITHOUT PROPER PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT AND MANAGEMENT PERMISSION.

Page 240
ABG
PPE is required at all times until the hazard has been dissipated with proof by proper testing procedures.
Maintenance Manager will proceed directly to the emergency area to determine if evacuation or outside help is
necessary.
Management will activate the Emergency Response Team if required.
Management will implement the Emergency Spill Procedures of the Spill Prevention Control &
Countermeasures Plan if any hazardous material is released.
Notification of State Department of Environmental Monitoring and EPA is required if spilled oil material
discharges or threatens to discharge into a waterway of the State causing a visible sheen on or a discoloration of
the surface water or shorelines, or if a reportable quantity for a hazardous substance is discharged or may
unavoidably be discharged to a waterway of the State.

Page 241
ABG
Medical Emergencies
All Medical Treatment provided by OHCP employed by ABG shall follow the Medical Directives and Nursing
Procedures for Emergency Care
After a medical emergency has been identified, the Assigned Manager, Occupational Health Care Professional or
Senior Management Team Member and Area Supervisor should be notified immediately. The Area Supervisor has
the responsibility to assure that the Assigned Manager, OHCP or Senior Management Team Member has been
notified.
The severity of the medical emergency and level of action required will be determined by the on-site OHCP.
All Medical Emergency Care Providers will use the proper PPE’s as outlined in the Control of Bloodborne
Pathogens Program and will follow the proper standards of care.
All injured or ill Employees requiring emergency medical care for life/death medical emergencies will be
transported by local Emergency Medical Services (EMS) to the nearest local Hospital.
All non-life/death medical emergencies will be managed by the OHCP and ABG Physician following proper
standards of care.
All Employees who are involved in an injury or accident shall be screened for drugs and alcohol as prescribed by
ABG policy.
During any emergency, the OHCP or Assigned Manager will have the responsibility to set-up the emergency
medical care station at a location directed by the Senior Management Team Member depending on the
emergency and relevant conditions.
Plan Administrator Duties
During an emergency, the Site Supervisor or designee will do the following:
- Take all necessary measures to contain the hazard and prevent its spread to other nearby areas, with the
assistance of emergency personnel.
- If the emergency is a hazardous material spill, ensure that the hazardous material and any material with
which in came into contact (gravel, soil, etc.,), will be scraped up using shovels and/or brooms. All this
combined material will be considered hazardous waste unless analysis shows otherwise.
- Provide for collection, treatment, and disposal of the waste and contaminated material by the
emergency crew or outside contractor, as appropriate.
- Ensure that contaminated soil, liquids, or other material is placed in drums and handled as a hazardous
waste.
- Ensure that the emergency crew restores all emergency equipment to full operational status.

Page 242
ABG
- Assisted by other qualified persons, begin to investigate the cause of the emergency and take steps to
prevent a recurrence of such or similar incidents.
- Ensure that the cause of the emergency has been eliminated and that cleanup and restoration have
progressed at least to the point of not jeopardizing the health and safety of the employees, and that EPA,
state, and local authorities have been notified, if required.
- Ensure that for spills or releases involving a hazardous substance at or above its reportable quantity, the
following necessary information is recorded and reported: name of chemical(s) involved, whether the
substance is listed under 40 CFR 302—extremely hazardous substances, estimated quantity of the
released substance, time of the release and duration, medium into which the substance was released,
health risks associated with the release, precautions taken to respond to the release, name and
telephone numbers of persons who can be contacted for further information.
Training
Our Plan Administrator reviews with each of our employees at the following times, those parts of the Emergency
Action Plan that employees must know to protect themselves in the event of an emergency:
- Initially when the plan is developed,
- Whenever an employee's responsibilities or designated actions under the plan change, and
- Whenever the plan is changed.
Emergency Action Diagram
The ABG Emergency Action Diagram showing the following:
- Exit Locations
- Fire Extinguisher Locations
- Storage Locations for Hazardous/Flammable Materials
- Storage Area for Spill Response Supplies and Personal Protective Equipment
- Tornado Shelters
A copy of this diagram is posted on ABG bulletin boards and near each exit.

Page 243
ABG
Emergency Telephone Numbers Template
Emergency Telephone Numbers Template
For all emergencies, dial _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Office Local Hospital
Police
Fire Service
Ambulance Service
Hospital
Emergency Calls
If reporting an emergency, provide the following required information:

 Clearly/calmly state WHO you are.
 Clearly/calmly state LOCATION of the emergency; include landmarks and signs.
 Clearly/calmly state the TYPE of emergency such as accident, fire, or medical; include number of
people involved.
 Clearly/calmly state what ASSISTANCE IS REQUIRED such as ambulance or fire truck.
DO NOT HANG UP until instructed to do so as you may be required to assist or guide.

Page 244
ABG
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT & GENERAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................232
SCOPE235
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................235
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................235
1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................235
1.1 Environmental Management Objectives.................................................................................................236
1.2 Program of Work.....................................................................................................................................236
2.0 POLICY..........................................................................................................................................................236
3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES.........................................................................................................................................236
3.1 Whole Project Team................................................................................................................................236
3.2 ABG..........................................................................................................................................................237
3.3 ABG Project Manager..............................................................................................................................237
3.4 Client.......................................................................................................................................................237
3.5 Contractors..............................................................................................................................................237
3.6 The Project Team.....................................................................................................................................237
4.0 SITE LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................................238
5.0 ISSUES OF CONCERN....................................................................................................................................238
5.1 Water Quality..........................................................................................................................................239
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................239
B. Legislation and Project-Specific Requirements........................................................................................239
C. Possible Risks...........................................................................................................................................239
D. Background Data.....................................................................................................................................240
E. Mitigation Measures...............................................................................................................................240
F. Environmental Protective Measures.......................................................................................................243
G. Monitoring..............................................................................................................................................243
5.2 Air Quality................................................................................................................................................243
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................243
B. Relevant Legislation and Guidance..........................................................................................................243
C. Possible Risks...........................................................................................................................................243
D. Mitigation Measures...............................................................................................................................244
E. Monitoring...............................................................................................................................................245
5.3 Noise and Vibration.................................................................................................................................245
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................245
B. Possible Restrictions................................................................................................................................245
C. Background information..........................................................................................................................246
D. Relevant Guidance..................................................................................................................................246
E. Possible Risks...........................................................................................................................................246
F. Vibration and Noise Management Objectives.........................................................................................246

Page 245
ABG
G. Mitigation Measures...............................................................................................................................247
H. Monitoring..............................................................................................................................................248
I. Environmental Protective Measures.......................................................................................................248
5.4 Waste Management................................................................................................................................249
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................249
C. Waste Minimization................................................................................................................................249
D. Control Measures....................................................................................................................................249
E. Aerosol Can Disposal...............................................................................................................................250
F. Environmental Protective Measures.......................................................................................................251
G. Monitoring...............................................................................................................................................251
5.5 Traffic Management................................................................................................................................251
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................251
B. Relevant Legislation................................................................................................................................252
C. Management Measures..........................................................................................................................252
D. Monitoring..............................................................................................................................................252
5.6 Contaminated Land.................................................................................................................................252
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................253
B. References...............................................................................................................................................253
C. Relevant Legislation and Guidance..........................................................................................................253
D. Mitigation Measures...............................................................................................................................254
E. Monitoring Requirements.......................................................................................................................254
5.7 Public Relations.......................................................................................................................................254
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................254
B. Responsibilities........................................................................................................................................254
C. Management Measures..........................................................................................................................255
D. Complaints Register................................................................................................................................255
5.8 Flora, Fauna, and Natural Features.........................................................................................................255
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................255
B. Relevant Legislation................................................................................................................................255
C. Baseline Data and Sensitive Receptors....................................................................................................256
D. Management Measures..........................................................................................................................256
5.9 Visual Intrusion........................................................................................................................................257
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................257
B. Management Measures..........................................................................................................................257
5.10 Archaeology.............................................................................................................................................257
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................257
C. Baseline Data...........................................................................................................................................258
5.11 Worksite Housekeeping...........................................................................................................................258
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................258
B. Management Measures..........................................................................................................................258
C. Housekeeping..........................................................................................................................................259

Page 246
ABG
D. Order and Arrangement..........................................................................................................................259

E. Personal Pathways...................................................................................................................................260
F. Aerosol Can Storage................................................................................................................................260
5.12 Emergency Response Plans.....................................................................................................................260
A. Introduction............................................................................................................................................260
B. References...............................................................................................................................................261
C. Reporting Requirements.........................................................................................................................261
E. Documentation........................................................................................................................................262
6.0 AUDITING AND REPORTING.........................................................................................................................262
7.0 RECORDS......................................................................................................................................................263
8.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................263
8.1 Environmental Awareness/Orientation...................................................................................................263
8.2 Environmental Management Training.....................................................................................................264
A. Responsibilities.......................................................................................................................................264
B. Positions..................................................................................................................................................264
9.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................266
10.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................266

Page 247
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the basic requirements for environmental management controls to mitigate potential
environmental impacts at ABG project sites. This practice applies to NEW Construction Management.
SCOPE
 Introduction
 Policy
 Site Location and Description
 Issues of Concern
 Water Quality
 Air Quality
 Noise and Vibration
 Waste Management
 Traffic
 Contaminated Land
 Public Relations
 Flora and Fauna
 Visual Intrusion
 Archaeology
 Housekeeping
 Emergency Response Plans
 Auditing and Reporting
 Records
 Training
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Environmental Incident – An adverse impact on the environment wholly or partially resulting from an
organization’s activities, products, or services.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
ABG has overall responsibility for the development and implementation of an environmental management plan
(EMP) for each project. However, the client maintains responsibility for site-specific conditions and contaminants
that were present on the site before ABG’s arrival (such as contaminated soil); thus, the client may require the
project to “adopt” or work under the client’s EMP and identify unique controls or actions in job safety analyses
(JSAs), safety task assignments (STAs), or other project work plans..

Page 248
ABG
ABG and contractors will be required to include environmental controls to mitigate potential environmental
impacts, prevent pollution, and provide sufficient equipment and resources to effectively implement the
requirements of the EMP.
On top of the applicable legislation, this document identifies relevant environmental protection that is applicable
to all ABG projects and any other commitments. It details action to be taken to meet the target of 100 percent
environmental compliance.
1.1 Environmental Management Objectives
Objectives for environmental management will be included in the project-specific EMP.

Issues that could be considered include the following:
 Target 100 percent environmental compliance
 Target no environmental complaints
 Noise levels
 Minimum impact on the surrounding environment
 Maximum reinstatement of original environment after construction – particularly
appropriate for pipeline projects
 Maximum recycling of materials
1.2 Program of Work
Project Management must prepare an overview of the work and identify the elements of this work for which ABG
is responsible, and which elements may have been completed before ABG starting work at the site.
2.0 POLICY
ABG expects all parties involved in projects to comply with all applicable HSE legislation as a minimum. The
adoption of best practice will be positively encouraged, and all parties will be required to demonstrate their
application of best practice and innovation in order to reduce adverse environmental impacts.
For each project, it is necessary to specifically define which party is responsible for the following:
 Submitting appropriate applications
 Obtaining appropriate licenses
 Communicating with the relevant authorities regarding use of licenses and any
environmental incidents that occur
3.1 Whole Project Team
The client, ABG field execution and contractors and their management, supervisory, and field
execution/commissioning staff are collectively responsible for executing their work in a manner that prevents
environmental harm. They will identify at the earliest opportunity any deterioration of the target of 100 percent
compliance and instigate any remedial action necessary.

Page 249
ABG
3.2 ABG
ABG (or as indicated in contractual language) has overall responsibility for overseeing that the EMP is fully
implemented for the duration of the construction works. ABG is also responsible for auditing the
implementation of the EMP to verify that agreed environmental objectives are achieved. If the EMP is found not
to achieve stated objectives, ABG will have overall responsibility for changes in working practices to meet the
objectives, in consultation with the client.
ABG will keep a record of all environmental incidents and remedial action taken in an incident logbook (refer to
Form 000.653.F0193, Project Incident Logbook). Recommended action to prevent recurrence will be detailed
and brought to the attention of the workforce. All incidents will be discussed with the client and at weekly
coordination meetings.
3.3 ABG Project Manager
ABG’s Project Manager has overall responsibility for HSE matters on the project. These responsibilities include
the following:
 Effective implementation of the EMP, including training, site inspection, and audit
coordination.
 Inclusion of relevant environmental provisions into contractual documents for
contractors’ activities.
 Informing contractors of their duties in relation to environmental protection.
 Liaison with the client over consent applications, licenses, permits, and specific
environmental incidents.
 Coordination of investigation and response to environmental complaints relating to
the performance at the site.
 Implementing and maintaining the appropriate actions and controls during project
execution.
3.4 Client
The client has overall responsibility for the site and is responsible for all communications with third parties,
including the relevant authorities and neighbors.
The client is responsible for providing ABG with all relevant information pertinent to the project such as previous
environmental investigations and assessments, including baseline studies.
3.5 Contractors
Before commencement of any work, contractors will submit procedures or plans, including the measures that
will be taken to protect the environment, for acceptance by ABG and the client.
All contractors and their employees will be responsible for implementing and maintaining the provisions of the
EMP that are relevant to their particular activities during their work at the site.

Page 250
ABG
3.6 The Project Team
The following information should be maintained in a readily available location for each of the site owner, client,
ABG Project Management, HSE Representative, Engineering, and Construction Manager:
 Name
 Location
 Telephone number
 Facsimile number
4.0 SITE LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
Environmental aspects of the site and its surroundings must be evaluated including the following:
 Surface water
 Draining and discharge of water
 Ecological value, nature reserve value, and protected areas
 Agricultural value
 Archaeological/historical value
 Soil composition
 Previous land use and associated impacts
 Previous environmental inspection reports
 Groundwater conditions
 Underground composition
 Environmental features that require protection
5.0 ISSUES OF CONCERN
Environmental issues of concern must be identified for the project/site. If an Environmental Impact Assessment
(EIA) has been undertaken as part of the project, it will provide the basis of the evaluation. If an EIA has not been
undertaken, then previous reports on site conditions and client information should be used to identify the site-
specific environmental issues of concern.
The environmental and management issues that should be specifically considered include the following:
 Water quality
 Air quality, including dust, emissions, and odors
 Noise and vibration
 Waste management
 Traffic management
 Contaminated land
 Public relations and liaison with consultees
 Wildlife, flora and fauna, and natural features
 Archaeology
 Visual intrusion, signage, and lighting
 Worksite housekeeping

Page 251
ABG
 Emergency response plans
For sites with no formal EIA, the following documents may be used to evaluate environmental issues:
 Previous reports on environmental risk assessments
 Environmental investigation reports
 Environmental sampling reports
 Monitoring results
 Conditions to discharge
 Contaminated soil reports
 Waste categorization
5.1 Water Quality
A. Introduction
Activities that have the potential to affect water quality of controlled water sources in the vicinity of ABG-
managed activities at the site, namely perched water tables, groundwater, surface water dikes, lakes, and rivers
must be identified.
It is vital that surface water and effluent discharges are properly managed and controlled to protect the
environment. Any pollutants getting into a surface water dike, surface water drain, or groundwater could enter
lakes and rivers.
B. Legislation and Project-Specific Requirements
Project Management must evaluate legislation for applicability to the site; this activity should be done well in
advance of work starting on site. This evaluation should also include project-specific requirements such as
permit conditions and client specifications. This action will identify any specific requirements that can be
incorporated into the design of the facility and the project-specific EMP.
C. Possible Risks
Project Management must list the possible risks that exist due to the nature of the site and the nature of the
construction activities proposed on the site.
Risk may include the following:
 Lateral migration of contaminants already in the soil into the nearby sensitive
receptors (such as surface water dikes, rivers, and lakes.)
 Movement and storage of contaminated soil causing contamination
 Contamination of groundwater during earthwork operations
 Migration of leached contaminants arising from the reuse of crushed demolition
materials
 Discharge of effluent from wheel washing or other cleaning processes
 Discharge of pumped groundwater from dewatering or excavations
 Incorrect disposal of storm water and other silty waters

Page 252
ABG
 Spillages of pollutants due to bad storage and handling of materials, or inadvertent

disposal to surface water drains rather than sewer
 Washout from concreting operations.
Listed below are typical questions that the project team should consider in developing the potential risk:
 Is the groundwater under the site subject to some tidal influence?
 Can contamination of the site potentially cause harm to sensitive receptors in the
vicinity?
 Does the groundwater and/or the surface water on the site contain levels of some
materials in excess of legal standards?
D. Background Data
If it exists, Project Management must provide data on existing water quality and levels around the site.
Management must provide details of the location of existing local watercourses and mark the position of surface
water drains and sewers on site, using color-coding to distinguish them.
E. Mitigation Measures
ABG and contractors are specifically required to implement pollution prevention measures, based on the
potential risk identified in Paragraph C above.
Typical mitigation measures based on the potential risks must be identified.
Some examples are provided below.
GROUNDWATER
 No groundwater will discharge from the site to controlled water unless this has
been previously agreed to with the relevant authorities and the relevant
permissions are in place and the composition of the groundwater can be discharged
within the conditions of the permission.
 If it is necessary to dewater the site to allow field execution operations to be
undertaken, an appropriate approval must be obtained from the local authorities.
SURFACE WATER/CONTROLLED WATER PROTECTION

 If discharges need to be made from the site, including the storm water runoff, the
appropriate permits need to be sought from the local authorities, notifications filed,
and the discharges need to be made within the conditions of the permit.
Monitoring may be a requirement of the permit conditions.
 Management and control of surface waters on the site should eliminate the
potential for contaminated runoff to impact local water quality. Water collection
systems should be adequately sized to allow for the controlled release of storm
flows. Silty water disposal measures should be reviewed and accepted by the local
authorities. A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan may be required before
commencement of construction activities.

Page 253
ABG
 Suitable protective measures must be installed around open sections of surface

water to prevent surface water ingress into the construction area.
 Collection of any soil arising from construction before offsite disposal should be well
away from any surface water and should be arranged in such a way as to minimize
the potential generation of leachate.
 Minimize the potential for lateral migrations of contaminants into nearby sensitive
receptors by minimizing the time excavations are open.
FUEL/CHEMICAL STORAGE
 Development of a dedicated fuel/chemical storage area must provide for adequate
containment.
 Environmental protective measures in relation to work involving the use,
movement, and storage of fuel or chemicals will be fully documented and accepted
by ABG before the commencement of work.
 Fuel storage areas will be surrounded by secure impervious dikes providing a
containment capacity of at least 110 percent of the largest tank or 25 percent of the
total capacity of the tanks, whichever is the larger. All associated valves and
pipework must be contained within the dike.
 Fuel storage facility must be inspected on a daily basis by the owner of the facility.
 Dike water must be tested before pumping and be disposed in agreement with the
client and the local authorities.
 The design of the fuel storage facility will incorporate a roof structure to prevent
rainwater accumulation.
 All hazardous materials, including chemicals, paints, cleaning agents, solvents, and
solvent-containing products will be properly sealed in containers at the end of each
day by the contractor before storage in appropriately protected and diked storage
areas.
 Appropriate spill containment equipment will be stored on site, local to points of
material storage and use as appropriate.
VEHICLE REFUELING
 ABG (or as indicated in contractual language) will review and authorize any fuel and
refueling activities on the site required by ABG or its contractors. Contractors are
responsible for compliance with client and ABG EMP, HSE plans, and regulatory
standard.
 Refueling and tank filling will be carried out in designated protected refueling areas,
except where the nature of the machinery makes this impractical.
 Double-walled self-contained fuel tanks and pumps will be used for refueling of
equipment where use of dedicated refueling area is impractical.
 During the process of refueling, a fuel spillage kit must be available in order to
contain any spillage and prevent contamination.
 An emergency spill kit containing sand or suitable absorbent materials must be kept
readily available in case of spillage in the main fuel storage area.

Page 254
ABG
 Fueling stations must be equipped with an automatic shutoff mechanism.

 Trained personnel must supervise refueling operations.
 Valves and taps must not be left open when unattended and must be locked when
not in use.
 Persons carrying out refueling will to be made aware of the requirements listed in
this practice and be trained in the use of spill kits and emergency procedures.
EQUIPMENT AND MAINTENANCE

 Small items of equipment such as pumps and generators must be placed on a
suitable “drip tray” in order to contain any spillage and leakage.
 Equipment with visible leakage must not be used on site. It must be removed for
maintenance or repaired in-situ, if necessary, to prevent pollution caused by
removal.
 If there is insufficient space on site to provide a dedicated area for the maintenance
of equipment, then wherever possible, emergency equipment repair and essential
maintenance must be undertaken within a temporarily protected zone constructed
within the immediate area of the equipment to be repaired or maintained.
 A temporarily protected zone can be constructed by forming a spillage containment
area using sandbags to form a dike wall of sufficient height to contain twice the
maximum possible spillage that could occur, with an internal heavy gauge
polyethylene liner overlaid with a sand mat or timber grillage onto which the item of
equipment can be placed to undertake the maintenance or repair required.
 For larger heavy items of equipment such as crawler cranes and earth-moving
equipment, repair/maintenance can be undertaken in-situ provided localized
containment of spillage is provided and an adequate number of emergency spill kits
are available.
 Should any contaminant spillage occur outside of a protected zone, the contractor
will be responsible for containing the spillage and disposing of any waste and
contaminated soil off site in compliance with the relevant legislation and the project
procedures.
WHEEL WASHING
If required by the local authorities and/or the client, permanent wheel-washing facilities will be provided at the
site, as described below:
 Provision of suitably sized settlement tanks to enable settlement of suspended
solids from wheel-washing activities will be made.
 A permanent wheel-washing facility will be installed with water-recycling units.
 Periodic removal and disposal of contaminated sludges/waters will be arranged to
maintain the effectiveness of the units. All materials will be disposed at a licensed
waste disposal facility via a licensed hauler.

Page 255
ABG
ROAD SWEEPING
 Sweeping and cleaning of the public or client roads immediately adjacent to the site
will be undertaken on a regular basis or as deemed necessary to prevent nuisance or
hazards to other road users. Collected debris will be disposed at a licensed waste
disposal facility.
 In dry weather, mud and oils can build up on areas of hard standing. If these areas
are not cleaned frequently, a sudden shower can wash mud and oils into
watercourses, giving high-pollutant loads; therefore, hard standing and surface
roads will be kept swept clean.
CONTAMINATED WATER DISCHARGE

Potentially contaminated wastewater will be discharged to an appropriate treatment system or to an approved
sewer system.
Site drainage will be coded in accordance with local and/or client requirements for easy identification.
Identification may be based on color.
F. Environmental Protective Measures
 Before commencement of work, ABG Construction Management and contractors

will submit environmental protective measures that will be taken to protect the
environment, for approval by ABG Project Management and the client.
 Environmental protective measures in relation to work involving the use movement,
and storage of fuel or chemicals will be fully documented and accepted by ABG
before commencement of work.
G. Monitoring
Regular inspections of all discharges, drainage systems, collection ditches, lagoons, interceptors, and
watercourses will be undertaken to check that these items are in good order.
5.2 Air Quality
A. Introduction
Those activities that have the potential to affect local air quality and cause environmental nuisance to local
residential and surrounding areas must be identified. Project Management must adopt appropriate control
measures to mitigate these impacts.
Dust, emissions and odors can adversely affect air quality.
B. Relevant Legislation and Guidance
Legislation applicable to a site must be evaluated; this activity should be done well in advance of work starting on
site. This evaluation should also include project-specific requirements such as permit conditions and client
specifications. This action will identify any specific requirements that can be incorporated into the design of the
facility and the EMP for the site.

Page 256
ABG
C. Possible Risks
Dusty emissions escaping the site may cause nuisance through surface impact, loss of visual amenity through
deposition, and effects on flora and fauna.
The most prominent cause for concern to the surrounding land users is likely to be dust and may arise from
activities such as the following:
 Demolition
 Site preparation
 Excavation
 Earth movements
 Air pollution from poorly maintained vehicles and equipment
 Poorly maintained unpaved roads
D. Mitigation Measures
ABG and contractors are specifically required to implement pollution prevention measures, based on the
potential risk identified above.
Typical mitigation measures based on the potential risks must be identified.
Listed below are some examples of typical mitigation measures:
 Since it is difficult to suppress dust once it is airborne, it is preferable to prevent
dust from being generated in the first place, where possible.
 Control measures and dust suppression techniques are to be implemented in order
to protect the health of site workers and the general public and to comply with
occupational exposure standards.
 Plan, locate, and control worksite activities that have the potential to generate dust
or smoke so that nearby sensitive receptors are not adversely affected.
 Consider additional protection measures such as screening and covering and
implement as appropriate.
 Enclosed chutes will be used for dropping to ground level demolition materials that
have the potential to cause dust.
 Crushing equipment will be kept away from sensitive areas.
 During earthworks and excavations, the area will be kept damp during dry weather
and will be re-vegetated, sealed, or completed as soon as possible.
 If needed, an appropriate wheel-washing facility will be maintained at the site to
minimize and reduce the risk of dust emissions and deposition of material on the
public roads. This facility will operate for the duration of work at the site as deemed
necessary to control dust emissions and nuisance.
 Contractors and employees will be informed during orientation and further training
about the need to minimize dust emissions to neighboring property and residents
and of the health hazards associated with exposure to emissions.
 Equipment and vehicles will be maintained in good repair and conform to the
relevant legislative requirements and emission standards. Mitigation measures

Page 257
ABG
could include low-sulfur fuels, soot filters, and catalytic emission controls as
specified by project-specific requirements. The use of vehicles and equipment that
fails to meet emission limits will not be permitted until such time as they have been
serviced and re-tested. ABG will maintain records of equipment maintenance and
defect reports.
 Vehicle exhausts will be directed vertically upwards where possible and directed
away from the ground as a minimum. Stationery equipment will be placed as far
from inhabited buildings as possible.
 Wherever possible, vehicles and equipment will not be left running for long periods
when not directly in use. Where appropriate, electrically powered equipment will
be used instead of gasoline or diesel powered equipment.
 Stationery equipment will be located as far from sensitive receptors and inhabited
buildings as is reasonably practical.
 Vehicles transporting materials, capable of generating dust, to and from site will be
suitably covered on each journey to prevent release of materials and particulate
matter. The sheeting material will be maintained in good order, free from excessive
rips and tear.
 Speed limits on unpaved surfaces will be set to minimize dust generation where
practicable. In populated areas, maximum speed limits will be set to minimize
exposure.
 Unsurfaced roads will be routinely dampened especially during dry periods and
according to weather conditions.
 Where haul routes run over materials with a high dust-raising potential that cannot
be satisfactorily controlled by watering or other methods, temporary surfacing will
be considered by ABG.
 Burning of wastes or unwanted materials will not be permitted on site.
 Hazardous materials including chemicals, paints, cleaning agents, solvents, and
solvent-containing products will be properly sealed in containers at the end of each
day by the contractor before storage in appropriately protected and diked storage
areas.
 Where it is necessary to use soil stockpiles, they will be kept to the minimum
number and size practicable, and gentle slopes will be used. They will be kept out of
the wind if possible, and if necessary compacted and the surface covered.
 Materials will be stored away from the site boundary and downwind of sensitive
receptors.
 Large quantities of concrete will be mixed in enclosed/shielded areas. Where
necessary, vacuuming will be used in preference to blowing to remove dirt before
concrete pours.
 Dust extractors will be used to minimize dust from cutters and saws, as necessary.

Page 258
ABG
E. Monitoring
Whether or not quantitative dust monitoring is required on the site, it is recommended that ABG
management/supervision maintain a daily log that notes weather conditions, field activities, their location on
site, and visible dust-generating activities. Photographic records will be kept of dust control measures employed.
If monitoring is required, the type and method should be documented. It is important that the monitoring is
undertaken upstream and downstream of the field activities to allow the impact to be properly assessed. It is
preferable to establish baseline monitoring during the same seasons before the start of field work, if problems
are envisaged.
5.3 Noise and Vibration
A. Introduction
Activities that have the potential to cause environmental nuisance to client operations, local residents, local
wildlife, and surrounding commercial activities must be identified. The adoption of appropriate control
measures, monitoring, and close liaison with the client will assist in the mitigation of these impacts.
B. Possible Restrictions
Project Management must list any site-specific restrictions to noise and vibration management.
Listed below are examples of possible restrictions:
 Operations that are audible at the site boundary will be carried out only during
designated hours.
 General accepted practicable means to reduce noise to a minimum will be
employed.
 Equipment and machinery in use will be properly silenced and maintained in
accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.
 Any emergency deviation from these conditions will be reported to ABG Project
Management without delay.
C. Background information
Background noise levels should be obtained, if appropriate, before field operations begin. The methods of
monitoring and the locations for monitoring should be determined based on relevant local guidance and the
proximity of local sensitive receptors, using local consultants as appropriate.
If the proposed field methods are likely to give rise to vibration, it is useful to survey sensitive locations and
structures before the start of work.
D. Relevant Guidance
site. This action will identify any specific requirements that must be incorporated into the design of the facility
and the EMP for the site.

Page 259
ABG
E. Possible Risks
Possible risks that exist due to the nature of the site and the nature of the activities proposed on the site must be
listed. Risk may include the following:
 Earthworks
 Excavations and groundworks
 Breaking out with pneumatic tools
 Falling-ball demolition
 Piling and structure works
 Fabrication and assembly of structural steel
 Transportation
F. Vibration and Noise Management Objectives
Vibration and noise management objectives must be listed for the project. Some typical points at which noise
limits may be set are:
 65 dBA(A) at a distance of 3 feet (0.9 meter) from existing building facades
 75 dBA (A) at the site boundaries neighboring roads and car parks
 80 dBA(A) at all other site boundaries
G. Mitigation Measures
The following factors influence noise levels at a given point:

 Planning
 Execution method
 Execution sequence
 Tool and equipment selection
ABG and contractors will be specifically required to implement noise/vibration prevention/mitigation measures
based on the potential risk identified above.
Mitigation measures fall into a number of categories namely:
 Effective site management
 Engineering control
 Acoustic screening
 Restricted hours of working
 Liaison with the local community
 Provision of sound insulation
 Noise monitoring
 Vehicle speed restriction
Some examples of typical mitigation measures include the following:

Page 260
ABG
 Keep neighbors informed regarding the work that is to be undertaken on the site
and the associated duration.
 Before commencement of particularly noisy operations, a plan detailing the method
of works, program of work, predicted noise levels, and manufacturer’s specifications
for equipment and machinery will be submitted to Project Management and the
client for acceptance.
 ABG, before work commences, will assess particularly noisy operations and their
timing and scheduling.
 Consideration will be given to reducing noise by undertaking noisy assembly
practices off site where practicable.
 Where appropriate, noise-reduction methods (such as fencing or stockpiles for
screening) will be used. These methods will be maintained for the duration that
they are required.
 Particularly noisy activities will be limited to certain periods of the day where
appropriate.
 Vehicles, compressors, and mobile equipment will be equipped with effective
silencers and noise-reducing insulation.
 Work practices will be adopted such that noise emissions are kept to a minimum,
(equipment not in constant use will be switched off, excessive revving of vehicles
will not be permitted, and noise suppressions covered will be closed at all times).
 Where possible, noisy equipment will be located away from sensitive noise
boundaries. Where this is not possible, noise emissions will be controlled by the
erection of acoustic shielding, or sitting behind site accommodation or spoil heaps
as appropriate.
 Loading and unloading of vehicles, dismantling of site equipment such as
scaffolding, or moving equipment or materials around the site will be conducted in
such a manner as to minimize noise generation and where possible will be
conducted away from noise sensitive areas.
 If elevated noise or vibration levels are encountered, the source of noise or
vibration is to be identified and alternative methods or additional control measures
will be implemented.
 A maximum speed limit of 10 mph (16.1 kph) will apply on the site for the safety of
the workforce and to minimize disturbance from noise and dust.
 Where possible, electrically powered equipment will be used in preference to diesel
or gasoline powered equipment, as it is quieter.
 Mobile equipment and machinery will be properly maintained to minimize noise
generation.
 ABG will investigate noise complaints and excesses of agreed-to maximum
acceptable levels immediately.
 In the event of vibration becoming a concern, an assessment will be undertaken in
accordance with applicable standards.

Page 261
ABG
H. Monitoring
If required, regular noise monitoring will be performed at site boundaries, as agreed to with the client, and
should take into account local requirements as documented in Section 5.3.B and Section 5.3.D.
Monitoring should be required for the following:
 Occupational exposure (noise and vibration)
 Noise levels at the site boundary and sensitive receptors
 Vibration levels at the site boundary and sensitive receptors
If vibration monitoring is required, it should be undertaken inside rooms when assessing for nuisance and
measured on the structure outside when assessing for damage. For sensitive structures, visual monitoring and
the measurement of crack widths is the best way to determine whether damage is being caused.
I. Environmental Protective Measures
Before commencement of site work, ABG construction or contractors (as applicable) will submit a “noise
management plan” covering their area of work for acceptance by ABG Project Management and the client. This
plan must refer specifically to the area of development work concerned, the equipment to be used, the control
measures to be used, and monitoring requirements.
Before commencement of particularly noisy operations, environmental protective measures detailing the work
process, program of work, predicted noise levels, and manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and
machinery will be submitted to the client for acceptance.
Deviation from client-approved environmental protective measures will occur only with prior approval from the
client.
5.4 Waste Management
A. Introduction
ABG is responsible for implementing effective waste management at the site, complying with all waste
management legislation, and introducing waste minimization objectives. The client maintains responsibility for
site-specific conditions and contaminants that were present on the site before ABG’s arrival (such as
contaminated soil). The client’s responsibility includes disposal of the soils or contaminants under the client’s
site-specific waste disposal registration number (or EPA/state identification number, whichever is appropriate).
The client retains ownership of these materials from generation through disposal. ABG’s name will not be noted
on the waste manifest without Business Unit approval.
Site Management and contractors and their employees will be responsible for minimizing the amount of waste
produced by their activities, and are expected to fully cooperate with client requirements and legal requirements
for waste minimization and proper handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous and nonhazardous wastes.
A principle objective of each project will be to reduce the amount of waste generated and exported from the site.

Page 262
ABG
site. This action will identify any specific requirements that can be incorporated into the design of the facility and
the EMP for the site. In addition, for locations where hazardous wastes are to be tracked for proper disposal, the
project should specify which party will be designated as the liable generator of such wastes related to
construction of the facility.
C. Waste Minimization
Waste minimization is a ABG objective and strategy for waste management. Site Management and contractors
should consider the following:
 Reuse of materials, reducing the need for the use of primary materials, through
quarrying and mineral extraction (reducing the impacts associated with transport of
both waste and primary materials)
 Minimization of road transport, where possible.
 Minimization of packaging materials, agreement with manufacturers and suppliers
 Reuse of excavated soils generated by earthworks in development works
 Onsite segregation, recycling, and processing of waste materials
 Preferential energy recovery from any remaining wastes in lieu of landfill disposal,
where practical
D. Control Measures
Project Management must list details of the project-specific control measures.

Some examples of waste control measures are:
 ABG will establish a dedicated area and implement a system for waste management
and segregation of incompatible wastes. Waste segregation should occur at
generation.
 ABG Site Management and contractors will be required to maximize the
opportunities for reuse and recycling of materials and to minimize waste.
 ABG Site Management and contractors will produce a waste control plan detailing
waste collection and removal from the site. The plan will identify where waste of
different categories will be collected in separate stockpiles, bins, etc., and
appropriate signage will be provided to clearly identify the category of each
collection stockpile, bin, etc.
 Hazardous wastes, as defined by the applicable regulations, will be stored
separately from nonhazardous wastes in accordance with applicable regulations,
project-specific requirements, and good waste management practices.
 ABG Site Management and contractors will use provided disposal systems only after
written authorization of ABG and the client.
 Compliance with the appropriate waste management legislation covering the
storage, removal from site, transport, and disposal of wastes is mandatory.

Page 263
ABG
 Suitable protection measures will be incorporated in the design of the waste

management areas to prevent pollution.
 The ABG will inspect and manage the area to verify that stored wastes are covered
to prevent accidental spills and wastes from being blown away. Any deviation from
site standards will be immediately corrected.
 Waste disposal containers will be appropriately labeled, and waste will be correctly
segregated on site.
 ABG Site Management, contractors, and employees will be required to use suitable,
appropriately labeled containers that are maintained in suitable conditions for
temporary waste storage.
 ABG Site Management, contractors, and employees should be vigilant for the
presence of additional hazardous waste that may have not been removed from the
site during site preparation. Where suspected hazardous waste is identified, all
activities in the vicinity will be suspended until ABG has carried out an inspection
and defined an appropriate course of action.
 Contaminated soil waste being collected before disposal will be stored so as to
protect local surface water, minimize the potential for leachate formation, and
minimize the potential for dust generation.
 When leaving the site, haul truck loads will be covered with sheeting to prevent any
escape of materials onto the public roadways.
 The site must be left in a clean and tidy condition at the end of each working day.
 Surplus materials and waste will be transferred to the waste management area.
E. Aerosol Can Disposal
At the time of disposal, any aerosol can that contains chemicals that would be a listed or characteristic hazardous
waste is considered a hazardous waste container.
If the can is empty – that is, it contains no propellant or product and is at atmospheric pressure – the can will not
be regulated as hazardous waste and may be recycled as scrap metal or land-filled.
Each site will collect empty aerosol cans at a central location approved by the client and Project Manager. A
designated person will puncture the cans with an approved device designed for puncturing aerosol cans and
collect the remaining propellant or product before disposal. Before the designated person punctures and collects
the remaining contents of the can, they will ensure that the contents are compatible with the contents of the
collection container. The recovered contents should be analyzed to determine if they are a listed or
characteristic hazardous waste and labeled and disposed of accordingly.

Page 264
ABG
F. Environmental Protective Measures
ABG Site Management and contractors will be required to produce a waste strategy for acceptance by ABG
Project Management and the client. The waste strategy must reflect the project aim of waste minimization and
compliance with relevant waste management legislation.
Details will be provided concerning estimates of waste quantities, waste characterization procedures, methods of
processing and storage, the routes and destination of materials, the parties involved, and proposed
end-use/disposal of materials.
Hazardous waste documentation requirements and identification of the responsible generator of such wastes (as
applicable) will be described as defined in the project contractual agreements. In general, the client or property
owner is normally the designated generator of hazardous construction wastes.
ABG Project Management may elect a qualified, local waste management contractor for the day-to-day waste
management activities at the site.
G. Monitoring
The monitoring program should be approved by the client and should take into account requirements under
applicable standards as documented in Section 5.4.B.
Listed below are examples of the types of monitoring that could be required:
 ABG will be responsible for implementing a program of waste monitoring to assess
quantities and sources of waste. Contractors will be expected to contribute to the
success of the waste monitoring and measurement program, and to seek to reduce,
reuse, and recycle wherever possible.
 ABG will regularly review the volumes and types of waste disposed as part of the
overall assessment of the environmental performance of the site, and any
significant changes will be investigated.
 ABG may audit waste haulers and waste disposal sites to verify compliance with
legislation. This audit may include random checks to verify waste is disposed
correctly.
 ABG Site Management and contractors will be required to provide ABG Project
Management and the client with copies of all relevant waste management
documentation/information.
5.5 Traffic Management
A. Introduction
Depending on the site location and the nature of the construction activities to be undertaken, there are a
number of traffic management issues that may need to be recognized and mitigated. These issues include the
following:

Page 265
ABG
 Potential for traffic movements associated with construction activities to impact on

existing client operations, other construction activities, and the local community and
environment
 Traffic management strategy, covering issues such as congestion, access, noise, car
parking, and waiting areas
B. Relevant Legislation
the EMP for the site.
C. Management Measures
ABG will provide details of site-specific traffic management measures. Typical measures that may be included
are:
 Parking will be permitted only in designated areas. Parking on other areas of the
site or on the public highway will not be permitted.
 Traffic and deliveries will arrive via an offsite truck parking lot to facilitate
appropriate traffic management when necessary.
 All vehicles exiting the site must pass through the wheel-washing facility and the site
security compound.
 Special arrangements and prior agreement with the police/local authorities (in
consultation with the client) will be obtained for the routing and timing of any
abnormal and large loads to or from the site.
 ABG will control all deliveries and traffic entering and exiting the site.
 Working hours will be limited. Working outside of these hours will require the
approval of the client and the appropriate authorities.
 A maximum speed limit of 10 mph (16.1 kph) will apply on the site for the safety of
the workforce and to minimize disturbance from noise and dust. At large sites in
unpopulated areas with significant distances between site facilities, this speed limit
may be modified.
 Contractors and employees will be required to maintain clear and safe pedestrian
access to office areas.
D. Monitoring
ABG Site Management will conduct regular inspections to verify adequate implementation of traffic management
measures. Deviations from site requirements will be corrected.
5.6 Contaminated Land
Some sites will be located where previous activities may have resulted in the contamination of the soil and/or
groundwater. Before the start of any work on site, it is important to review any existing assessments and
investigations to identify the potential risks and any areas of contamination. If no assessments/investigations

Page 266
ABG
have been undertaken and there are reasons to believe that the site may be contaminated, then steps should be
taken to evaluate the site conditions and confirm responsibilities for the existing site conditions and any
associated problems due to field activities, before starting work.
The client maintains responsibility for site-specific conditions and contaminants that were present on the site
before ABG’s arrival (such as contaminated soil and groundwater). The site evaluation will confirm site
conditions and help to determine clear responsibilities for existing site conditions and associated problems.
The client’s responsibility includes disposal of the soils or contaminants under the client’s site-specific waste
disposal registration number (or EPA/state identification number, whichever is appropriate). The client retains
ownership of these materials from generation through disposal. ABG’s name will not be noted on the waste
manifest without Business Unit approval. Any assessments or investigations will be agreed to with the client.
The potential for contamination to be present on the site is normally determined in 2 phases:
Phase 1 – Desk study to identify previous land uses that may have resulted in contamination. These land uses
can be on or adjacent to the site. Information relevant to a preliminary investigation includes the following:
 History of the site
 Processes used
 Layout of the site above and below ground at each stage of development
 Presence of waste disposal pits, abandoned pits, and quarries with or without
standing water
 Mining history
 Information on geology and hydrogeology (including the presence of groundwater
and surface water)
 Potential contamination uses of sites, past or present, in the area adjacent to the
site
If Phase 1 assessment finds that contamination is probable, a Phase 2 exploratory investigation should be
undertaken.
Phase 2 – Site investigation to identify land areas that may have contamination from previous uses and confirm
presence or absence of contamination. This investigation should establish the type, concentration, and aerial
and vertical extent of contamination on the site.
A. Introduction
Project Management must provide details of the previous land uses and the areas of the site that have been
identified as contaminated or potentially contaminated.
Project Management must also provide details of the contaminants that are present or may be present, the type
and extent of the contamination, and the disposal requirements associated with any material removed from the
site or reused on the site.
B. References
References that have been used to identify the contaminated land issues on the site must be listed.

Page 267
ABG
C. Relevant Legislation and Guidance
site. This action will identify specific requirements that can be incorporated into the design of the facility and the
EMP for the site.
D. Mitigation Measures
ABG and contractors are specifically required to implement mitigation measures on the site due to the nature of
the contamination/potential contamination on the site.
Listed below are examples of typical measures:
 Do not stockpile contaminated soil unless it cannot be avoided. Water draining
from a stockpile may be contaminated and need controlling and potentially treating.
 If any of the following visual signs of contamination or unusual odors are
discovered, they must be immediately reported to ABG supervision/management.
All work in the vicinity will be suspended and the area sealed until ABG has carried
out an inspection and implemented an appropriate action plan. Visual signs of
potential contamination include the following:
 Discolored soil (such as chemical residue)
 Fibrous texture to the soil (such as asbestos)
 Presence of foreign objects (such as chemical/oil containers)
 Evidence of previous soil workings
 Evidence of underground structures and tanks
 Existence of waste pits
 Fill material/made ground
 Old drain runs and contamination within buildings, tanks, and flues
 Appropriate waste management procedures will be used as described in
Section 5.4.C.
 Appropriate measures should be undertaken to protect the controlled waters in the
vicinity of the site as described in Section 5.1.E.
 Personal protective equipment will be used as defined in the project-specific HSE
Plan.
E. Monitoring Requirements
ABG will develop a list of site-specific monitoring requirements based on the applicable standards and
discussions with the client and the authorities.
5.7 Public Relations
A. Introduction
Activities that have the potential to affect neighbors, client operations, and the general public must be identified.
ABG Site Management, contractors, and employees will be required to comply with these procedures.

Page 268
ABG
ABG Project Management will strive to establish and maintain good public relations at all times. Complaints will
be handled swiftly and, where appropriate, remedial action will be taken.
B. Responsibilities
Overall responsibility for the implementation of this EMP lies with ABG.
ABG or client management will undertake all communications with third parties.
Complaints received on site will immediately be logged and reported to the client by ABG.
C. Management Measures
Listed below are examples of typical measures:

 ABG Site Management, contractors, and employees are responsible for fully
implementing the provisions of the EMP where they are relevant to the specific
activities of an individual, whether explicitly specified in the contract or not.
 ABG will address queries about environmental management or implementation of
the EMP.
 ABG and the client will seek to set up and maintain good public relationship via an
appropriate program of informing the public of the project and its schedules and
being available to answer questions about the project in an informed and consistent
manner.
 In the event of unusual activities being carried out, including nonstandard hours of
work, ABG will notify the client in advance, who will in turn notify all relevant
neighbors or ask ABG to do so.
 Complaints from neighbors or other parties will be treated seriously, and the cause
investigated fully. ABG, who will notify the appropriate client contact, will log the
complaint. Where appropriate, remedial action will be taken, and the complainant
informed by ABG or the client of the action that has been taken.
 Neighborhood liaison issues will be routinely discussed at site management
meetings. Complaints will be actively pursued by ABG, and corrective action will be
taken as appropriate.
D. Complaints Register
A complaints register will be maintained by ABG and will provide a permanent record of the performance of the
project.
5.8 Flora, Fauna, and Natural Features
A. Introduction
Construction activities that have the potential to affect wildlife, flora or fauna, and natural features will be
identified. Project Management must adopt appropriate control measures to mitigate those impacts.

Page 269
ABG
In particularly sensitive locations, it may be necessary to avoid disturbance during certain times of the year, such
as hibernation, mating, or birthing seasons. Activities will be scheduled in consideration of sensitive times of the
year. In addition, it may be necessary to avoid designated wetland areas on or adjacent to the site.
B. Relevant Legislation
the site. This action will identify specific requirements that can be incorporated into the design of the facility and
C. Baseline Data and Sensitive Receptors
ABG will identify any sensitive receptors that may be impacted. Where an EIA has been undertaken, the baseline
data will form part of the project. The EIA should be referenced in the documentation. Where an EIA has NOT
been undertaken, it is important to establish if there are any sensitive receptors in the area. If applicable, a
wetlands delineation survey should also be performed and appropriate approvals and permits secured.
ABG should request information on the wildlife, flora, fauna, and natural features from the client along with any
baseline data. These data should then be referenced and used to identify sensitive receptors and plan
appropriate mitigation procedures.
There are 3 main ecological issues that have to be considered on sites:
 Where species or areas of the site have been identified for particular protection,
studies will need to be undertaken in advance of work starting, and appropriate
working methods must be developed to protect the specified areas on species.
 Where protected species are discovered when work has already started on site,
work in the affected areas will immediately cease and ABG will seek expert advice
through the client and the authorities. The best way forward will then be agreed.
 Protection of the natural environment as a whole will be covered by the
management measures listed below.
D. Management Measures
Examples of typical management measures are:

 ABG Site Management and contractors will be required to include environmental
controls within their environmental procedures to prevent damage to the protected
wildlife, flora and fauna, and wetlands and to provide sufficient equipment and
resources to effectively implement the requirements of the EMP.
 Site Management will ensure that ABG and contractor employees are aware of
environmental restrictions related to sensitive areas on and adjacent to the site.
implementing and maintaining the provisions for the EMP where they are relevant
to the specific activities of an individual, whether explicitly specified in the contract
or not.
 Work in close proximity to surface water should proceed with care.

Page 270
ABG
 If protected species are discovered or suspected, they must not be killed, expelled,
or disturbed. Where suspected protected habitats are discovered, they must not be
destroyed or disturbed. In such circumstances, work in affected areas will
immediately cease, and ABG will seek expert advice through the client and the
authorities.
 Storage of granular or liquid materials will not be permitted adjacent to surface
water or other systems draining to controlled waters (such as surface water,
groundwater, lakes, and ponds), to minimize the risks to wildlife.
 In the event that other wildlife issues are identified during the course of the project,
ABG will consult with the client in order to develop and agree to an appropriate
management strategy.
 ABG will conduct regular inspections to verify adequate implementation of any
control measures that are required. Any deviation from the requirement will be
corrected.
 ABG will address questions about the environmental management procedures or
the implementation of the EMP.
Any specific measures that are required due to the presence of protected species or ecology should be listed.
5.9 Visual Intrusion
A. Introduction
ABG is responsible for creating an environment that has minimal impact on the local surroundings, through visual
intrusion or stray lighting.
B. Management Measures
Listed below are examples of typical management measures:

implementing and maintaining the provisions of the EMP where they are relevant to
the specific activities of an individual, whether explicitly specified in the contract or
not.
 ABG is responsible for appropriately securing the site at all times.
 Site operations and storage of equipment will be conducted in such a manner to, as
far as possible, minimize the effects of visual intrusion to adjacent properties.
 Nighttime lighting will be such that it is sufficient to allow safe passage, but without
causing shadows or visual intrusion to adjacent properties or land.
 Temporary lighting of the building and the site will be designed to minimize light
pollution and maintain safety. Only the lighting essential for safety and security will
be kept in operation overnight. An effective switching system to provide for this
requirement will be incorporated within the scheme of lighting and power.
 ABG will treat any complaint relating to visual intrusion or glare from stray lighting
seriously. In the event of a complaint being received, the complaint will then be
logged and the cause investigated fully. Where appropriate, remedial action will be

Page 271
ABG
taken, and the complainant will be informed through the client of what action has
been taken.
 ABG will conduct regular inspections to verify adequate implementation of any
control measures that are required. Deficiencies will be corrected immediately.
5.10 Archaeology
A. Introduction
Archaeological remains are a valuable part of a country’s national heritage. Activities that have the potential to
damage archeological remains will be listed.
C. Baseline Data
Depending on the nature of the project and the location, work may be carried out to investigate the archaeology
of the site during the planning stage.
If an investigation is conducted, the findings of this investigation should be listed. If not, then a statement should
be made that an investigation was not felt to be necessary and has not been undertaken.
Examples of typical management measures are:

 If any material of an archaeological nature, such as burnt or blackened material,
brick or tile fragments, coins, pottery or bone fragments, skeletons, timber joists or
post holes, or brick or stone foundations are encountered, they should be
immediately reported to ABG supervision/management. All work in the vicinity will
be suspended and the area sealed off until ABG has carried out an inspection and
implemented an appropriate action plan.
 If a skeleton is discovered, work will stop immediately and the local authorities will
be contacted.
5.11 Worksite Housekeeping
A. Introduction
Arrangements for worksite housekeeping must be made during site work.

B. Management Measures

Page 272
ABG
 ABG will be responsible for the successful implementation of the requirements of

this EMP and for managing worksite housekeeping at the site.
implementing and maintaining the provisions of the EMP where they are relevant to
the specific activities of an individual, whether explicitly specified in the contract or
not.
 Burning of rubbish, waste, or other material will not be permitted.
 ABG Site Management and contractors are required to contribute to the clean and
tidy state of the site at all times. At regular intervals, rubbish will be removed and
disposed in the correct manner.
 Worksite fencing will be maintained to comply with site conditions.
 Toilets, offices, and canteen areas will be kept tidy at all times.
 Wastes and excess materials will be promptly removed (such as at the end of each
shift) from the immediate work area to the designated temporary storage areas.
 Waste will be segregated as it is produced.
 Eating, drinking, and smoking will not be permitted on site, except in designated
areas.
 No vehicles leaving the site will carry debris onto the public highways, and all
vehicles will pass through an inspection/wheel-wash point.
 ABG Site Management and contractors will be responsible for storing and using
building materials and equipment in accordance with HSE requirements and for
confirming that chemical drums, fuels, oils, and the like are stored upright and
properly sealed when not in use in designated protected storage areas.
 In the event of any spillage of diesel, fuel, oil, or chemicals, the contractor will clean
the spillage immediately.
 ABG will conduct regular inspections to verify that good housekeeping measures are
maintained at all times.
 Contractors are responsible for training employees in the proper lifting techniques
when handling materials.
C. Housekeeping
 Work areas will be kept clean on an ongoing basis or at a minimum daily.

 Oily rags and packing materials will not be allowed to accumulate on floors or in
gang boxes.
 Trash barrels, recycling containers, dumpsters, lugger tubs, and roll-off boxes will be
placed as needed so that employees can discard trash without having to walk long
distances.
 Drinking water kegs, power woodcutting saws, and insulation applications must have
trash receptacle for each location. The containers will be identified as to their
intended content.
 Small, round objects such as pieces of conduit, pipe, and welding rods will be properly
discarded and never left on the ground.

Page 273
ABG
Note: Welding rods and some nuts and bolts can fall through grating and must not
be left on grating.
 Waste paints or solvents must be stored or staged in areas designated as flammable

storage.
 Scrap lumber will be de-nailed, stacked, and then removed daily from work areas.
 Containers for scrap metal will be provided and used.
D. Order and Arrangement
 Material storage areas will be clearly identified and properly maintained. Material
should not be delivered to the work area until it is needed.
 Do not park floats, wagons, toolboxes, or equipment in a “helter-skelter” or
hap-hazardous manner.
 Tape barricades will be maintained at approximately 42 inches (106.9 centimeters)
above ground.
 Ladders will not be left lying around on floors or leaning upright. Return them to
proper storage when not in use.
 Material stored inside buildings or structures under construction must not be placed
within 6 feet (1.8 meters) of any hoistway or other inside floor opening, or within
10 feet (3.1 meters) of any exterior wall that does not extend above the top of the
material stored.
 Material must be properly stacked and secured to prevent sliding or collapse.
 Aisles, stairs, and passageways must be kept clear to provide access in emergencies.
 Unprotected cardboard containers will not be used in areas exposed to the weather.
 Store frequently accessed materials at waist height to minimize bending and
stooping.
 Stored materials must not block fire-fighting equipment, aisles, stairways, or exits
from any building.
E. Personal Pathways
 Clearly mark entrances to barricaded work areas.

 Post signs at the jobsite entrance warning of hazardous conditions.
 Ensure pathways have adequate lighting (not less than 5 foot-candles) if nighttime
access is required.
 When planning pathways, make provisions to store material as close as possible to
work areas.
 Never store material in pathways or at ingress/egress areas such as at the bottom of
ladders.
 Isolate hoses, cords, and welding leads from walking surfaces and doorways.
 Hoses and cords will be kept 7 feet (2.1 meters) above walkways wherever possible.

Page 274
ABG
 Where cords or hoses are laid on the ground, they will lie flat with no loops and be
covered with protective runways (bridges) where exposed to vehicle or personnel
traffic.
 Ensure that any pathway bridge has handrails, midrails, and toeboards, is anchored
on either side of the ditch, and is sufficiently strong to carry the intended loads.
F. Aerosol Can Storage
Due to the potential, flammable, and combustible nature of aerosol cans, they should be stored in approved
flammable storage containers when they are not in use.
5.12 Emergency Response Plans
A. Introduction
Activities that have the potential to lead to an environmental emergency must be identified, and the procedures
to be followed in the event of an environmental incident or emergency event must be developed. In the event of
an environmental incident or emergency event, actions taken will be in accordance with the Emergency
Response Plan outlined in Practice 000.653.1200, Emergency Preparedness (Medical, Fire, Chemical, Weather).
An environmental emergency is an incident involving, or having the potential to cause harm to, the environment.
This section outlines the activities to be followed in the event of an environmental incident to minimize the
damage caused to the environment or human health.
An Environmental Incident is defined as “An adverse impact on the environment wholly or partially resulting from
an organization’s activities, products, or services.”
B. References
ABG Site Management and contractors should make reference to the current client and ABG site emergency
plans in addition to the specific requirements of this EMP.
An example spill prevention, containment, and counter measure (SPCC) summary is presented in Form
000.653.F0203, Spill Prevention and Countermeasure Plan. Refer to applicable standard (such as the United
States Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 112) for detailed SPCC requirements.
Refer to Attachment 01 for an example emergency plan.
C. Reporting Requirements
Environmental incidents that must be reported (refer to Form 000.653.F0198, Incident Investigation Report) are
spills or discharges to atmosphere, water supplies, sewerage systems, rivers, and other watercourses, or to the
ground of:
 Any chemical product or formulation
 Oils and fuels
 Effluents
 Waste or contaminated materials
 Gas or fumes

Page 275
ABG
In addition, report damage to:

 Trees
 Wildlife
 Flora
 Fauna
 Existing local habitat
Also, report any environmental incident that could lead to:

 Local authority or regulatory enforcement
 Public complaint
 Media attention

 ABG Project Management will incorporate the findings of the review of emergency
events leading to environmental impacts, undertaken as part of the HSE risk
assessments of field activities.
 Environmental considerations in planning the response to environmental
emergencies will include the following:
 List of appropriate pollution prevention equipment
 Maintenance regime for equipment
 Environmental training records for employees
 Potential locations and circumstances of environmental incidents
 After work hours contact number for key personnel
 Details of employee responsibilities for contacting authorities and neighbors
 Details of employee responsibilities for coordination of response to
environmental incidents
 In the event of an environmental emergency or incident, immediate action should
be taken to prevent pollutants from spreading.
 Environmental emergency incidents will be reported immediately to this site
emergency response team.
 Regularly check that the contents of the spill kits held on site are complete. The
content of the spill kit will depend on the site, but they may contain the following:
 oil-absorbent granules
 “pigs” or “sausages”
 floating booms
 absorbent materials
 polyethylene sheeting
 polyethylene sacks

Page 276
ABG
 They should be stored in a marked bag or wheeled bin in a well sign-posted location.
It is best if kits are stored near to where they may be needed. Buckets of sand,
earth, and straw bales are good for cleaning up small spills.
 Appropriate training will be provided in the use of the spill kits.
An example of a typical emergency plan is presented in Attachment 01.

E. Documentation
 ABG will maintain a record of all environmental incidents (refer to Form

000.653.F0198) occurring on site and remedial action taken in an incident logbook.
 All environmental incidents will be reported to the client.
 Records of correspondence complaints received will also be recorded and
investigated. All correspondence will be directed through the appropriate client
contact, and records will be maintained by ABG according to the schedule provided
in Practice 000.653.1500.
6.0 AUDITING AND REPORTING
ABG is responsible for auditing the implementation of the EMP to verify that environmental objectives are
achieved. If the system is found not to achieve the objectives, ABG will have overall responsibility for changes in
work practices to meet the objectives. HSE auditing and reporting will occur in accordance with Practice
000.653.1305, Inspections/Assessments and Audits.
ABG Site Management will conduct daily site inspections and will conduct a formal, documented HSE audit on a
regular basis. Weekly audits will be summarized and recorded on the form presented in Form 000.653.F0202,
Key Result Area (KRA) Performance Index – Weekly Environmental Audit Summary Sheet.
ABG will generate a monthly report that will document the environmental performance of the site including any
incidents that have occurred.
7.0 RECORDS
ABG will maintain all relevant documentation and correspondence related to environmental management
according to the schedule provided in Practice 000.653.1500, Records Management and Document Control.
General environmental recordkeeping requirements include the following:
 Correspondence with local, state, region, federal, in-country, and similar authorities
records
 Records of all environmental incidents associated with waste management and
remedial action taken
 Air quality monitoring
 Recorded and investigated complaints relating to waste management will be
recorded and investigated
 Vehicle and equipment maintenance

Page 277
ABG
 Correspondence from the client relating to waste management for the duration of
the project (these records will be made available to the authorities and the client
upon request)
 Water contamination
 Discharge consents
Also refer to Section 5.12.E.

8.0 TRAINING
8.1 Environmental Awareness/Orientation
Environmental awareness training will be provided to employees and contractors working on the site in
conjunction with other site orientation topics.
Training will include the following:
 General introduction to environmental concerns relating to activities on the site
 Overview of legal requirements in relation to environmental performance on the
site
 Overview of the provisions of the site-specific EMP
 Importance of good housekeeping
 Good practices in dealing with potential pollutants
 Emergency procedures
 Management of wastewater
 Waste management practices and facilities on site
 Description of key control measures to achieve project-/site-specific requirements
 Personal responsibilities and liabilities
Additional training areas may include the following:

 Proper use of the waste management system
 Completion of environmental logs/incident reports
 Use of pollution response equipment
 Use of wheel-wash facilities
 Maintenance and use of wastewater system
8.2 Environmental Management Training
This section describes positions and responsibilities for management of dangerous waste activities. Legislation
often requires employees in this category to be trained and certified.
No employee will perform tasks for which they are not properly trained, except to gain required experience while
under the direct supervision of a supervisor or coworker who is properly trained.
Training will be completed for targeted employees within 6 months of the date of hire, within 6 months of
assignment to a workplace, or within 6 months of assignment to a new position.

Page 278
ABG
Regulations often require a written description of the type and amount of both introductory and continuing
training required for each dangerous waste management position. Federal, state, or in-country regulations
should be consulted for specific training requirements.
The job title, job description, and name of employee will be maintained for each position related to dangerous
waste management at the facility. The job description will include requisite skills, education, and other
qualifications and duties for each position.
A. Responsibilities
Project/Site Management will oversee and ensure the implementation of applicable dangerous waste
management training. Management will ensure that employees assigned to a specific position complete the
required training and become thoroughly familiar with applicable contingency plans, operations, activities,
location and properties of all wastes handled, location of all records, and the building layout. Employees working
in an area where incidents or upsets involving dangerous waste could occur will be properly trained to respond
to the incident or upset condition.
Management will be responsible for identifying the waste management training requirements for employees,
based on position and responsibilities described in this practice.
Management will ensure annual refresher training is provided in sufficient detail to make certain each employee
is trained to handle dangerous waste properly within the scope of assigned job responsibilities.
B. Positions
Positions are defined by the project. A suggested categorization of waste worker positions is as follows:
All Employees – This category is inclusive of administrative and technical/professional personnel, engineers,
designers, administrative assistants, clerks, and support organizations touring or providing oversight. This
position includes personnel who gain access to the site to complete work in controlled areas where their work
does not involve management of dangerous waste. Personnel in this category are not categorized into one of the
other 3 worker positions.
Waste Worker – This category is inclusive of employees with waste management duties and responsibilities who
require unescorted access and whose responsibilities are limited to the initial generation of dangerous waste and
placement of the waste into pre-approved containers, or who conduct dangerous waste inspections. Employees
who function as waste workers may include, but are not limited to, craft, transporters, and technical support.
Pre-approved containers can include those in a satellite accumulation area, 90-day accumulation area, or
temporary storage and disposal unit. These employees can be responsible for generating dangerous waste while
working on a non regulated system. The work may be unsupervised or completed under the supervision of
trained employees. A waste worker must also fulfill the position for “all employees.”
A waste worker’s assigned duties and responsibilities include the following:
 Place waste into pre-approved containers and filling out log sheets, where
applicable.
 Load packaged containers into trucks or moving containers.
 Respond to a spill or release of known contents where the duties and
responsibilities are limited to containing the spill/release, returning the drum to an

Page 279
ABG
upright position, and placing the known spilled material or waste into a pre-
approved container.
 Apply container markings or labels based on direction received from others.
 Respond to the regulatory agency compliance inspector’s questions about waste
management procedures.
 Perform an inventory of dangerous waste.
 Conduct inspections of dangerous waste.
Advanced Waste Worker – Advanced waste workers are those whose duties and responsibilities concerning
dangerous waste exceed those of a waste worker (therefore, an advanced waste worker may fulfill the role of a
waste worker). Examples of duties include, but are not limited to the following:
 Determine container markings (such as label and shipping requirements)
 Sample waste
 Designate waste materials
 Classify waste materials before shipment
Waste Worker Supervisor/Manager – Various types of managers and non-managers are included in this position.
Employees are assigned to this category if they direct waste worker or advanced waste worker activities related
to dangerous waste management and compliance activities. Examples of duties and responsibilities assigned to
the waste worker supervisor/manager include, but are not limited to the following:
 Emergency coordinator or alternate
 Building emergency director or building warden, as appropriate
 Environmental programs manager
 Immediate manager of waste workers or advanced waste workers (such as area
mangers)
Note: Site-specific dangerous waste management training materials can be developed

on request to the HSE Representative or Regional Safety Manager.
9.0 REFERENCES

000.653.1200 Emergency Preparedness (Medical, Fire, Chemical,
Weather)
000.653.1305 Inspections/Assessments and Audits
Forms:
000.653.F0198 Incident Investigation Report
000.653.F0202 Key Result Area (KRA) Performance Index – Weekly
Environmental Audit Summary Sheet

Page 280
ABG

000.653.F0203 Spill Prevention and Countermeasure Plan
10.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Example of a Typical Emergency Plan

Page 281
ABG
FALL PROTECTION SAFETY PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................267
SCOPE268
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................268
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................268
2.0 ENGINEERED CONTROLS..............................................................................................................................271
2.1 Guardrail System.....................................................................................................................................271
2.2 Permanent Fixed Platform/Walkway.......................................................................................................271
2.3 Permanent Industrial Fall Arrest System.................................................................................................271
3.0 PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS...............................................................................................................271
3.1 Lanyards..................................................................................................................................................272
3.2 Energy Absorbers (Personal/Industrial)...................................................................................................272
3.3 Retractable Lifelines................................................................................................................................273
3.4 Horizontal and Vertical Lifeline................................................................................................................273
3.5 Rope Grab................................................................................................................................................273
3.6 Industrial Rope Access.............................................................................................................................274
3.7 Work Practices.........................................................................................................................................274
4.0 ANCHORAGES..............................................................................................................................................274
5.0 WORKING FROM LADDERS..........................................................................................................................275
6.0 SCAFFOLDS...................................................................................................................................................275
7.0 MOBILE OR AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS.......................................................................................................275
8.0 CRANE-SUSPENDED PLATFORMS.................................................................................................................275
9.0 WORKING ON ROOFS...................................................................................................................................276
9.1 Alternatives to Fall Protection Systems...................................................................................................276
9.2 Safety Monitoring Systems......................................................................................................................276
9.3 Warning Lines..........................................................................................................................................277
10.0 POSITIONING DEVICES (FALL RESTRAINT)....................................................................................................277
11.0 WALKING/WORKING SURFACES..................................................................................................................278
11.1 Stairways.................................................................................................................................................278
11.2 Floor and Roof Strength..........................................................................................................................279
11.3 Floor Holes...............................................................................................................................................279
12.0 GRATING/GUARDrail removal......................................................................................................................279
13.0 PROTECTION FROM FALLING OBJECTS........................................................................................................279
14.0 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND TESTING......................................................................................................280
15.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................280
16.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................280
17.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................281

Page 282
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the requirements for selecting, using, and inspecting fall protection systems.
SCOPE
 Engineered Controls
 Personal Fall Arrest Systems (PFAS)
 Anchorages
 Guardrail Systems
 Working From Ladders
 Scaffolds
 Mobile or Aerial Work Platforms
 Crane-Suspended Platforms
 Working on Roofs
 Positioning Devices (Fall Restraint)
 Walking/Working Surfaces
 Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal
 Protection From Falling Objects
 Equipment Inspection and Testing
 Training
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Anchor Point - A secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards, or deceleration devices. An anchorage must
be capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of 5,000 pounds (2268 kilograms) for each person attached to
it.
Floor Hole - An opening measuring less than 12 inches (30.5 centimeters) but more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters)
in its least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, through which materials but not persons may
fall, such as a belt hole, pipe opening, or slot opening.
Floor Opening - An opening measuring 12 inches (30.5 centimeters) or more in its least dimension, in any floor,
platform, pavement, or yard through which persons may fall, such as a hatchway, stair or ladder opening, pit, or
large manhole. Floor openings
Floor Opening Covers - The construction of floor opening covers may be of any material that meets the strength
requirements. Covers projecting not more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) above the floor level may be used

Page 283
ABG
providing all edges are chamfered to an angle with the horizontal of not over 30 degrees. All hinges, handles,
bolts, or other parts will set flush with the floor or cover surface.
Guardrail - A barrier secured to uprights and erected along the exposed sides and ends of platforms to prevent
falls.
Lanyard - A rope (nylon or steel cable) suitable for supporting one employee.
Lifeline - A vertically suspended rope with one end attached to a stationary object (such as a structural member)
capable of supporting at least 5000 pounds (2268 kilograms) of dead weight, with the other end attached to a
lanyard or safety harness.
Open Sides and Ends - The edges of a platform that are more than 14 inches (35.6 centimeters) away
horizontally from a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface (such as a building wall) or a sturdy, continuous horizontal
surface (such as a floor), or a point of access. Exception: For plastering and lathing operations, the horizontal
threshold distance is 18 inches (45.7 centimeters).
Personal Fall Arrest System – A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of an
anchorage, connectors, a body harness, and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable
combinations of these.
Qualified Person - One who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who
by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve or
resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Retractable Lifeline or Inertia Reel - A fall-arrest device that allows free travel, without slack rope, but locks
instantly when a fall begins. Retractable lifelines may be used, but horizontal movement must be limited.
Rope Grabs - Automatic lifeline devices that act by inertia (resistance to movement) to grab the lifeline if a fall
occurs. Rope grabs are used when vertical movement is required such as work from boatswain chairs or
suspended scaffolds.
Safety Harness - An approved design of straps that may be secured about the employee’s body in a manner to
distribute the fall-arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest, and shoulders, with a means for
attaching it to other components of a PFAS.
Safety Nets - Safety nets will be provided when workplaces are more than 25 feet (7.6 meters) above the ground
or water surface, or other surfaces where the use of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary floors, safety
lines, or safety harnesses is impractical.
Static Line or Catenary Line - A cable or rope strung horizontally and/or vertically from one substantial object to
another, providing a means of traveling between those two objects while maintaining fall protection between
those objects.
Wall Opening - An opening at least 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) high and 18 inches (45.7 centimeters) wide, in
any wall or partition, through which employees may fall such as a yard-arm doorway or chute opening.

Page 284
ABG
To ensure employees are not inadvertently exposed to fall hazards, each work area must be evaluated to identify
where engineering controls are in place to prevent exposure to fall hazards 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more.
Engineered barriers (guardrail systems, approved work platforms, scaffolds, or vehicle-mounted elevated work
platforms) will be used wherever feasible to eliminate potential fall exposure.
Where engineered barriers/controls are not feasible, fall protection — in the form of PFAS, safety nets, etc. — is
required in the following circumstances:
 In elevated locations 6 feet (1.8 meters) in height or more where there is no other
means of fall protection (guardrails, warning lines)
 On stages, floats, and any other type of suspended scaffolding (refer to Section 6.0)
 On scaffolds with incomplete decking or guardrails (refer to Section 6.0)
 On sloping roofs (refer to Section 9.0)
 Within 15 feet (4.6 meters) of the edge of floors or roofs where there are no
protective guardrails (refer to Section 9.0)
Note: Within 6 feet (1.8 meters) of the edge of roofs when roofing work is being
performed.
 When removing/replacing floor planks, hole covers, or grating from the last panel of
a temporary floor
 Working from a ladder 6 feet (1.8 meters) in height or more (does not apply when
using a ladder for access only) (refer to Section 5.0)
 In precarious positions at any elevation (less than 6 feet [1.8 meters] leaning or off
balance)
 In areas exposed to protruding, unprotected objects or reinforcing steel at any
height
 When operating a boom-type elevating work platform from inside the “basket,” and
certain scissor lifts (refer to Section 7.0)
 In crane-suspended work platforms (refer to Section 8.0)
 Around floor openings, roofs, ceiling, and other surfaces where there is a fall-
through hazard
The requirements for the use of PFAS in this practice do not apply to the following:
 Use of portable ladders for access to landings (distance cannot exceed 24 feet
[7.3 meters])
 Accessing tanker trucks and servicing large mobile equipment
The hazard assessment/need for PFAS will be documented in accordance with Attachment 01. A Fall Protection
Work Plan, Form 000.653.F0307 (or equal), must be developed when using safety monitor, warning-line systems,
and other unconventional means/processes.

Page 285
ABG
Employees required to wear PFAS equipment will wear no less than a Class III full-body harness with
a deceleration device (such as a shock-absorbing lanyard or inertia reel) attached to suitable attachment point.
Lanyards used in PFAS must be designed and used to limit a person’s fall to no more than 6 feet (1.8 meters).
Note: For “power transmission lineman” activities, approved body belts with straps may
be used in lieu of a full-body harness/deceleration device.
Note: For positioning devices (sometimes called fall restraint devices), refer to
Section 10.0.
The lanyard or reel must be attached to a suitable anchorage at all times while the person is in an exposed
position. At times, this requirement may necessitate the use of 2 lanyards so that one can be left attached while
the second is being moved to the next anchorage.
PFAS equipment exposed to impact loading will be removed from service and recertified (documented by the
manufacturer) or destroyed.
2.0 ENGINEERED CONTROLS
2.1 Guardrail System
Guardrail systems will be provided as the primary fall prevention system for walking/working surfaces, unless the
use of a guardrail system is infeasible. Where guardrail systems are infeasible, fall protection will be worn.
Work areas that have open-sided floors, floor openings, platforms, or runways that present a fall hazard of 4 feet
(1.2 meters) or more to a lower level will be protected by a guardrail system. If a guardrail system is infeasible,
fall protection is worn.
A guardrail system is an edge protection rail system with the top edge height of toprails at 42 inches
(106.7 centimeters) plus or minus 3 inches (7.6 centimeters) above the walking/working level. A toprail must be
capable of withstanding without failure a force of at least 200 pounds (890 newtons) applied within 2 inches
(5.1 centimeters) of the top edge in any outward or downward direction (not to go below 39 inches
[99.1 centimeters]) at any point along the top edge. A midrail or mesh panel and a fender (toe) board must be
securely fixed and designed to withstand, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (667 newtons) applied in
any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member.
Guardrail systems must block access to the fall hazard except at ladders and stairs (a swing gate will be placed
across a ladder opening unless the opening is barricaded or offset).
2.2 Permanent Fixed Platform/Walkway
A permanently engineered standard platform with handrails attached to a permanent structure (such as a work
platform or access way) may be used.

Page 286
ABG
2.3 Permanent Industrial Fall Arrest System
An engineer-designed permanent system attached to suitable anchor points— in accordance with applicable
federal, state, or in-country standards — can be used (such as steel cable static lines, steel cable ladder climbing
systems, and rigid rail ladder-climbing systems).
3.0 PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS
Safety harness and lanyard assemblies are capable of withstanding a tensile loading of 5,000 pounds
(22.3 kilonewtons) force without cracking, breaking, or taking a permanent deformation.
A PFAS must be used if working outside approved work platforms or guardrail systems.
A Snaphook will only be attached to another connector that is part of the PFAS; do not hook the connector back
onto the lanyard unless the lanyard is approved for that application. Back-hooking and the tying of knots in a
lanyard are not permitted.
Each harness and lanyard must have a label that displays the manufacturing date. If the date is more than
5 years from the current date, the harness or lanyard must be destroyed and a new one obtained.
When designing individual anchorage points for fall protection devices, the weight factor for employees will be
based on 310 pounds (140.6 kilograms), including tools.
When using horizontal lifelines, they must be installed and used under the supervision of a Qualified Person.
Note: Horizontal lifelines will maintain a safety factor of at least 2.
Only 1 employee will be allowed on a vertical lifeline at a time.

The attachment point of a body harness must always be in the center of the wearer’s back between the shoulder
blades.
PFAS components must be used only for the employee’s protection and not for hoisting materials unless
approved by the manufacturer for that purpose.
If employees are exposed to a fall hazard when working near a floor or wall opening to handle materials, they
must wear a PFAS rigged in a fall restraint configuration.
Fall protection will be designed into new construction in accordance with Attachment 02.
Prompt rescue of employees who fall, or a means for employees to rescue themselves, must be provided.
Elevated work requiring the use of fall protection will be stopped whenever inclement weather conditions are
present (such as snow, ice, thunderstorms, and winds greater than 30 miles per hour [26 knots or 48.3 kilometers
per hour]).
3.1 Lanyards
Must meet the following requirements:

 Maximum length of a lanyard is 6 feet (1.8 meters) in length, and it must be
equipped with self-locking hooks on each end.
 The lanyard must be equipped with shock absorber.

Page 287
ABG
 Snaphooks must be of a double-locking design to prevent accidental

disengagement. When not in use, the lanyard must be secured and attached to the
harness to prevent tripping or snagging.
 The lanyard must not be dragged.
 The lanyard must not be hooked back into itself unless designed for that purpose.
 Knots must not be tied in a lanyard. This will reduce the strength of the lanyard.
3.2 Energy Absorbers (Personal/Industrial)
Any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards,
and automatic self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, that serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a
fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.
3.3 Retractable Lifelines
A retractable lifeline is a fall-arresting device used in conjunction with other components of a fall-arrest system.
A retractable lifeline should be used by only 1 person at a time.
A properly inspected and maintained retractable lifeline, when correctly installed and used within the fall-arrest
system, will automatically stop a person’s descent a short distance after the onset of an accidental fall.
Retractable lifelines should be considered for use when working in areas such as roofs and scaffolds, tanks,
towers, vessels, and manholes. Also, retractable lifelines should be considered when climbing such equipment as
vertical fixed ladders and telescoping derricks.
Before using a retractable lifeline, the supervisor and/or the user must address the following:
 Has the user been trained to use a retractable lifeline correctly?
 Is retractable lifeline being used in conjunction with a complete fall-arrest system?
 Is the equipment under a regular maintenance program?
Other considerations include:

 DO NOT USE ROPE.
 Attach self-retracting devices using shackles or carabiner.
 Equipment must be hung up or placed loosely in a clean, dry area when storing.
3.4 Horizontal and Vertical Lifeline
Horizontal lifelines must be installed and used according to manufacturer’s specifications. The following
guidelines should also be followed:
 Softeners must be used where lifelines contact sharp edges such as beam flanges.
 Temporary lifelines must be removed at the completion of a job.
 A vertical lifeline will be used by only 1 employee at a time.
 Anchor points, connectors, and other system components must be capable of safely
supporting 1 employee falling 6 feet (1.8 meters).

Page 288
ABG
3.5 Rope Grab
The rope grab must be used with a rope that meets or exceeds the following:
 Rope grab size must match rope size.
 Minimum diameter of 5/8 inch (1.6 centimeters) rope.
 Made of polypropylene, nylon, or polyester.
 Minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (2268 kilograms).
 When rope grabs are used with wire rope, it must be a complete system. (Rope
grab must be designed for a specific type and size of wire rope.)
3.6 Industrial Rope Access
An industrial rope access system using 2 separate anchor points, 2 ropes, and specialized access equipment may
be used by trained persons.
Note: Permits for use are required for each occasion when using industrial rope access.
3.7 Work Practices
The following are special requirements associated with working at elevated locations or while using fall-arresting
equipment:
 Employees must avoid climbing on equipment such as pumps, exchangers, valve
hand wheels, transformers, electric motors, handrails, structures, or any other
facilities not specifically designed for climbing.
 Climbing on conduit, cable trays, or other similar equipment is not permitted.
Climbing of vertical beams is not permitted.
 Employees must not climb a ladder while another employee is above or below on
the same ladder.
4.0 ANCHORAGES
Anchor points for lanyards/harnesses and vertical lifelines must meet the following:
 Be able to safely support 1 person falling 6 feet (1.8 meters).
 Be installed in a manner that prevents accidental disengagement from support
structures.
 Be inspected by a Competent Person on a periodic basis.
 Be placed where attachment and detachment can be done without causing loss of
balance.
 Be placed above shoulder height to reduce fall distance.
 Be free of sharp edges to avoid cutting the lanyard.
Anchorages for fall arrest will be designed to withstand a tensile force of 5,000 pounds (22.3 kilonewtons) per
employee.

Page 289
ABG
Note: Fall-arrest anchorage may be reduced to 3,000 pounds (13.3 kilonewtons) per
employee when a self-retracting lifeline is used as part of the PFAS. Special
consideration must be given to locating the anchorage directly at or above the
mid-shoulder D-ring so that in the event of a fall, fall arrest begins immediately
and produces minimal shock loading to the anchorage and the employee.
Anchorages will be approved by a Competent Person to meet the strength requirements, or a recognized typical
structural member as shown in Attachment 02 will be used.
Anchorages will be designed for fall restraint to withstand a tensile force of 4 times the intended load (such as
the weight of the employee plus tools).
Do not make the anchorage part of the work surface; locate it to start arresting the fall before 6 feet (1.8 meters)
and to prevent falling or swinging into other structural members or equipment.
Note: The potential for injury is minimized when an anchorage is selected for the
shortest free-fall distance possible, either by selection of the anchorage itself or
by using the shortest lanyard possible; limit free fall to less than 2 feet
(0.6 meters) when feasible.
5.0 WORKING FROM LADDERS
When working from ladders, fall protection must be used (when appropriate) whenever working at heights of
6 feet (1.8 meters) or above, as measured from the ladder base to the employee’s feet.
Exception: When using a ladder (less than 24 feet or 7.3 meters in height) for access
only to another level.
Refer to Practice 000.653.3302, Portable Ladders.
6.0 SCAFFOLDS
Employees working from swinging scaffolds or boatswain’s chairs must use PFAS where the lanyard or lifeline is
attached to an attachment point independent from the scaffold or chair.
Employees involved in the erection or disassembly of a scaffold will use fall protection when appropriate. If
scaffold members are to be used as attachment points for PFAS:
 each member must be approved by the Competent Person as meeting the
5000-pound (2268-kilogram) attachment point criteria, and
 the scaffold will be adequately secured.
Refer to Practice 000.653.3303, Scaffolds.

Page 290
ABG
7.0 MOBILE OR AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS
Employees working from elevated work platforms or aerial lifts must wear a PFAS attached to a designated
anchorage point on the platform (according to the manufacturer’s instructions).
Note: Including scissor lifts when manufacturer requires use of PFAS and an engineered
anchorage is specified by the manufacturer.
When exiting a work platform or aerial lift, employees will maintain continuous fall protection when appropriate.
Refer to Practice 000.653.3204, Aerial Lifts, Elevating Work Platforms, and Material/Personnel Hoists.
8.0 CRANE-SUSPENDED PLATFORMS
Employees working from or riding a crane-suspended platform must use a PFAS attached to an independent
source (such as a support cable attached above the block or headache ball).
When exiting or entering a suspended platform, employees will use continuous fall protection when appropriate.
Refer to Practice 000.502.1000, Cranes and Rigging — Operations (Site-Specific).
9.0 WORKING ON ROOFS
Employees engaged in roofing activities, with unprotected sides and edges 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more above
lower levels or where “fall through” hazards exist will be protected by fall protection systems.
For high-pitched roofs (slope of more than 4 in 12) that have unprotected edges, employees will be protected by
either a guardrail system or PFAS.
When performing roofing work on low-pitched roofs (slope of 4 in 12 or less), employees working within 6 feet
(1.8 meters) of an unprotected edge are protected by a guardrail system, combination of a warning line with
a safety monitor, or PFAS.
Refer to Practice 000.653.3304, Working on Roofs.
9.1 Alternatives to Fall Protection Systems
When conventional fall protection systems are infeasible or create a greater hazard, a Fall Protection Work Plan
will be developed and alternative fall protection systems (such as warning-line systems or controlled access
zones) will be used.
When employees are working on a low-sloped roof, and they are not within 6 feet (1.8 meters) of a fall,
a warning line must be erected to delineate the unprotected edges of the roof.
9.2 Safety Monitoring Systems
Note: Safety monitors may only be used on roofs when roofing work is being
performed.
Safety monitoring systems will be used to establish a controlled access zone to limit access to authorized
employees as follows:

Page 291
ABG
 Mark and barricade the control access zone with a warning line 15 feet (4.6 meters)
where feasible, but no closer than 6 feet (1.8 meters) to an unprotected edge.
 Mark the controlled access zone by placing a warning line 34 to 39 inches (86.4 to
99.1 centimeters) high, mark with a high visibility tape every 6 feet (1.8 meters),
supported at 6-foot (1.8-meter) intervals, resistant to tipover, and secured at each
support.
 Do not allow the warning line to be strung near the unprotected edge except at an
access point such as a ladder.
Assigned safety monitors:

 Are physically located on the same level as the employees.
 Are located close enough to the employees to watch the work and provide verbal
warnings to them about a fall hazard or an unsafe act.
 Are distinguishable from other employees by wearing vests, other clothing, or
different-colored hardhats.
 Can monitor 8 employees.
 Have no other assignment except to observe the employees and their activity.
9.3 Warning Lines
A warning-line system will consist of a rope, wire rope, cable, or chain with supporting posts, visibly marked
every 6 feet (1.8 meters), erected 34 to 39 inches (86.4 to 99.1 centimeters) above the walking/working surface,
and not less than 6 feet (1.8 meters) from the roof’s edge. The warning line and posts must be capable of
resisting, without tipping over, at least 16 pounds force (71 newtons) applied horizontally against the post.
The warning line will be attached at each post in such a way that pulling on the line between posts does not
result in the line going slack in an adjacent section.
Points of access, material handling areas, and hoisting areas will be connected to the work area by an access path
that is formed by 2 warning lines.
Employees will not be allowed to enter the area between the warning line and the roof’s edge, unless the
employee is performing work in that area and is closely observed. Employees working in the area between the
warning line and the roof’s edge will be distinguished from other members of the work crew by wearing highly
visible/distinctive apparel readily distinguishing them from other crew members. This apparel is only worn while
working in that area.
10.0 POSITIONING DEVICES (FALL RESTRAINT)
Positioning device systems will be allowed if they conform to the following requirements:
 Positioning devices are rigged so that an employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet
(0.6 meters).
 Positioning devices are secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least twice
the potential impact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kilonewtons),
whichever is greater.

Page 292
ABG
 Connectors are drop-forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent

materials.
 Connectors have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges are smooth
to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system.
 Connecting assemblies have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds
(22.2 kilonewtons).
 Dee-rings and snaphooks are proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of
3,600 pounds (16 kilonewtons) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent
deformation.
 Snaphooks are of a locking type Snaphook designed and used to prevent
disengagement of the Snaphook by the contact of the Snaphook keeper by the
connected member.
 Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections,
snaphooks may not be engaged directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; to each
other; to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached; to a
horizontal lifeline; or to any object that is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in
relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the
connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself.
 Positioning device systems must be inspected before each use for wear, damage,
and other deterioration, and defective components must be removed from service.
 Body belts (allowed for use in positioning device systems and power transmission
lineman activities only) must be used only for employee protection and not to hoist
materials.
11.0 WALKING/WORKING SURFACES
Wall openings and chutes where there is a drop of 4 feet (1.2 meters) or more must be properly guarded to
prevent falls. A toeboard or equivalent protection must be provided where there is exposure below to falling
materials.
Window wall openings at a stairway landing, floor, platform, or balcony, where there is a drop of 4 feet
(1.2 meters) or more, and where the bottom of the opening is less than 3 feet (0.9 meters) above the platform or
landing must be guarded. If the window opening is below the landing or platform, a standard toeboard must be
provided.
Open-sided floors or platforms 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more above the adjacent floor or ground level must be
guarded on all open sides by a standard railing or the equivalent, except where there is an entrance to a ramp,
stairway, or fixed ladder.
11.1 Stairways
Stairs, ladders, or ramps will be provided for elevated areas used on a routine basis.
Handrails will be provided for stairs with 4 or more risers or those over 30 inches (76.2 centimeters) high. A
landing will be provided where doors or gates open directly onto a stairway.

Page 293
ABG
11.2 Floor and Roof Strength
The facility landlord must confirm that floors have the structural strength to support the intended work activities
and equipment or storage anticipated for the area.
Fixed load capacity signs will be securely posted on elevated floors or storage areas and must be visible to
personnel. Posted load capacities must not be exceeded.
Note: The area design load limit must be posted in areas where the load amount and
location is changing, such as in storage areas on elevated floors or above
basements. Grade or slab construction does not require posting floor-loading
limits.
Fireproof or security-type cabinets and floor-to-ceiling retrieval systems may exceed the concentrated load limit
in an office. A structural engineer must be contacted when additional loading is being considered or when there
is a change to storage occupancy.
Ensure that the roof is strong enough to support the intended work activities and equipment use anticipated for
the project when a roof becomes a walking/working surface.
Ensure that the roof passes required inspection/assessments in accordance with Practice 000.653.3304 before
access is authorized.
11.3 Floor Holes
Refer to Practice 000.653.3301, Barricades, Signs, and Tags.

12.0 GRATING/GUARDRAIL removal
Refer to Practice 000.653.3323, Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal.

13.0 PROTECTION FROM FALLING OBJECTS
Employees working below another work area must inform the employees above of their presence. Should tools
and equipment be raised or lowered to the upper work area, this work will be performed by crane or be raised
and lowered by hand using a rope (minimum 0.64 inches [1.6 centimeters] diameter) with the tools and
equipment securely tied. These lifting areas will be barricaded to prevent unintentional access beneath the
suspended load.
Employees will be protected from objects falling from overhead work by wearing hard hats and using one of the
following measures:
 Barricade off the area.
 Use toeboards, screens, or mesh on the guardrail system to keep small or unstable
materials from falling to the lower work surface.
 Erect a canopy over the hazard area that is capable of withstanding the force of any
material that might fall, and set material back from the edge.
 Keep tools and equipment secured or in buckets/pouches.

Page 294
ABG
14.0 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND TESTING
Pre-use and periodic inspections of fall protection equipment will be performed by a Competent Person in
accordance with Attachments 03 and 04.
15.0 TRAINING
A Competent Person will train employees to this practice who might be exposed to fall hazards. Training will be
documented according to Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
Training includes (at least) the following topics:
 General requirements of this practice
 Recognition of fall hazards
 Nature of fall hazards
 Correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall
protection systems to be used
 Use and operations of guardrail systems, PFAS, safety net systems, warning-line
systems, safety monitoring systems, controlled access zones, and other protection
used
 Proper anchoring and attachment techniques
 Limitations on use of mechanical equipment during work on low-sloped roofs
 Correct procedures for handling and storage of equipment and materials, and the
erection of overhead protection
 Role of employees in fall protection work plans
 Rescue considerations
 Role of each employee in safety monitoring system (when in use)
16.0 REFERENCES

000.502.1000 Cranes and Rigging — Operations (Site-Specific)
000.653.3204 Aerial Lifts, Elevating Work Platforms, and
Material/Personnel Hoists
000.653.3302 Portable Ladders
000.653.3304 Working on Roofs

Page 295
ABG

000.653.3323 Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal
Forms:
000.653.F0161 Safety Harness and Lanyards Inspection Checklist
000.653.F0307 Fall Protection Work Plan
Non ABG Resources
United States - OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M, Fall Protection
17.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Fall Protection Documentation Requirements
Attachment 02 Engineering Controls, Typical Anchorage Points,
and Structural Members Sizes
Attachment 03 Personal Fall Protection Equipment Inspection by
Attachment 04 Periodic Inspections by Competent Persons

Page 296
ABG
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS BY A COMPETENT PERSONS
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS BY COMPETENT PERSONS
1. Visual inspections will be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements — at least

once each quarter — on all safety belts, harnesses, lifelines, and lanyards. Inspections are made
by a Competent Person who examines for general condition and damage by cuts, abrasions, and
burns. The Competent Person will ensure that the following fall protection equipment
components, at minimum, are inspected:
Stitching Acid and burn damage

D-Rings Metal rivets
Deterioration (such as excessive wear or Hook safety latch
damage) Body pad (if applicable)
Frayed or broken fabric/leather General condition
Lanyard Certification or data tag
Buckles (include tongue) Other (as required by
Splices manufacturer)
Note: None of the items listed above will be altered in any way. During inspections, look for additional holes
punched in tongue, excessive tongue cut off, and parts of D-Ring or belts altered or removed.
2. The inspection will be documented in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements/inspections

on the manufacturer-supplied tag, along with appropriate color code. Color coding will be
affixed to personal fall arrest systems and parts according to the following schedule:
January to March Red

April to June Green
July to September Blue
October to December Yellow
3. Equipment or component(s) found defective or altered must be removed from service and
destroyed or identified in such a manner as to prohibit their use in employee safeguarding.

Page 297
ABG
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS BY A COMPETENT PERSONS
PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT INSPECTION BY USERS
1. Inspect fall protection equipment before each use. Ensure that a periodic inspection has been
performed and documented in accordance with Attachment 04. Equipment found to have
missed a required, periodic inspection is tagged “Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag” (Form
000.653.F0301) and returned for inspection and tagging in accordance with Attachment 04.
2. Use the following examples to help identify potential defects in fall protection equipment:
 The hole in the D-ring is not round or the D-ring has been twisted.
 A buckle is stretched so the tongue does not reach the buckle.
 Threads are coming loose in any part of the webbing or lanyard (stitching around the connectors, such as
buckles or D-rings, show wear or damage).
 The Snaphook keeper does not close against the hook.
 Snaphooks are not double-locking (a double-locking Snaphook requires the user to push a button or pull on
a latch or trigger before the gate can be opened or the lock operated).
 Harness or lanyard webbing is significantly stained or stiff compared to the rest of the harness.
 Harness or lanyard webbing shows evidence of burns or extreme heat.
 The manufacturer’s label is missing.
 Equipment shows signs of being stretched. For example, holes are elongated in the webbing used to adjust
length of straps that go around the thigh.
 Any part of the system shows evidence of having been cut off.
 Connectors have sharp edges or nicks that could damage other parts of the system.
 The cable in a self-retracting lifeline does not retract smoothly or the braking system does not activate when
the line is pulled quickly.
 The retracting lifeline shows evidence of damage (such as cuts, twists, or worn or broken strands).
 The self-retracting lifeline makes unusual noises, such as grinding or rubbing sounds, or feels as if there is grit
inside the system.
 A user reports any concern with the equipment.
3. If the equipment has a defect, it is tagged out-of-service and withdrawn from use immediately.
4. To ensure good working condition of the personal fall arrest system, the equipment is stored in
an area that is clean and dry and free from moisture, chemicals, and direct sun light.

Page 298
Fall Protection Work Plan
Project No./Contract No.: Date:
Area: Location:
Company Name:
Note Employees MUST review the requirements of this fall protection work plan prior to starting work. This plan is available at the jobsite during work activities.
Job Location Description:
1. Identify all fall hazards 6 ft (1.83 m) or more in the work area:
Leading Edge Stairways Floor Openings

Perimeter Edge Ladders Steel Erection
Scaffold Erection/Disassembly Through a Roof
Other (describe):
2. Method of fall protection to be provided:
Fall Restraint Guardrails Warning Line

Fall Arrest Catch Platform Safety Monitor
Describe:
3. Describe the correct procedure for assembly, maintenance, inspection, and disassembly of the fall protection system to be used:
4. Describe the correct procedure for handling, storage, and securing of tools and material:
5. Describe the method of providing overhead protection for employees who may be in, or pass through, the area below the work site:
Barricading Toeboards on Scaffolds and Floor Openings

Hard Hats Required Warning Signs
Describe:

6. Describe the method for prompt, safe removal of injured employees:
Initiate Emergency Response (911) Use Drop Lines or Retraction Devices Use Ladders
Use Lift Truck or Personnel Platform Utilize Scaffolds
Other (describe):
7. Describe the method used to determine the adequacy of attachment points:
Manufacturer’s Data Existing Engineering/Design Documents

Evaluation by Qualified Engineer Good Faith Assessment
8. Identify the employees working at/near a “leading edge.”
9. Identify the safety monitor(s) (if used – or N/A)
10. Justify selecting controlled access zone and/or safety monitor (if used – or N/A):
Approvals
Fall Protection Plan Completed By:

Approved By:
Responsible Supervisor Date HSE Representative Date

ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................286
SCOPE287
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................287
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................287
Responsibilities...................................................................................................................................................287
Project Manager............................................................................................................................................287
Camp Management.......................................................................................................................................288
Line Supervisors.............................................................................................................................................288
Employees......................................................................................................................................................288
Medical Evaluation.............................................................................................................................................288
Work Shifts and Schedules.................................................................................................................................289
Work Hours....................................................................................................................................................289
Night Shifts.....................................................................................................................................................290
Type of Work..................................................................................................................................................290
Commuting (Flying/Driving)...........................................................................................................................290
Environmental and Climatic Conditions.........................................................................................................291
Nutrition and Lifestyle........................................................................................................................................291
Stress ..............................................................................................................................................................291
ASSIGNING EMPLOYEES TO WORK ALONE.............................................................................................................291
REFERENCES...........................................................................................................................................................292

Page 301
ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
PURPOSE
This practice provides the requirements for identifying, assessing, and controlling employee fatigue, and to
provide appropriate control measures for employees who must work alone.
SCOPE
 Work Hour Control (Fatigue Management)
 Assigning Employees to Work Alone
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Extended Work Hours — Work hours in excess of established rostered hours, overtime.
Fatigue — An impaired physical and mental condition that arises from an individual’s exposure to physical and
mental exertion and inadequate or disturbed sleep.
Home Base — The usual place of employment at which the employee receives operational instructions or
directions regarding operational tasks to be performed during any one shift.
Residence — An employee’s residence during nonoperational hours. This may include camp/camp facilities.
Work Cycle/Roster — The working period scheduled between significant breaks away from work.
Work Schedules — The hours to be worked each day, shift, week, month, and year as scheduled by the employer.
Work Shifts — The hours of work between the start and finish of a shift and overtime included in the shift.
WORK HOUR CONTROL (FATIGUE MANAGEMENT)

Responsibilities
Project Manager
 Implement, and ensure compliance with, this practice by putting in place adequate measures to prevent
loss caused through fatigue of project employees.
 Ensure that relevant employees and management know the risks associated with fatigue and how to
control risks.
 Ensure that supervisors structure and manage working hours, shift rosters, and shift cycles to avoid or
minimize fatigue.
 Verify that employees who are authorized to operate vehicles complete and maintain the vehicle journey
log as referenced in Practice 000.653.3211, Traffic Management.
 Provide continued support and resources for effective implementation.
 Initial and/or annual training on how to recognize fatigue, how to control fatigue through appropriate
work and personal habits and reporting fatigue to supervision.

Page 302
ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
Camp Management
 Provide conditions at site-based accommodations that are conducive to sleep.

 Provide a balanced diet for project personnel.
Line Supervisors
 Inform all employees under his/her control, who may be exposed to fatigue, of the hazards and
established control measures.
 Develop a Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Form 000.653.F0100, or Safety Task Assignment (STA), Form
000.653.F0101, before beginning work and review for the potential for fatigue.
 Structure and manage work hours, shift rosters, and shift cycles to avoid/minimize fatigue.
 Implement and maintain adequate surveillance to control exposure to workplace contaminants such as
noise and hazardous materials within acceptable limits.
 Remove employees from the work area who appear to be, or who have stated they may be, fatigued to
the extent of being a potential safety/health risk.
 Monitor and enforce compliance with the requirements of this practice.
 Counsel employees who may exhibit the effects of fatigue.
Employees
 Avoid activities outside of work hours that might impede on their ability to carry out their at-work duties
without risk to their own or to others safety and health.
 Get adequate sleep before commencing a shift.
 Report to the immediate supervisor personal medical signs or symptoms related to their own or others
ability to conduct tasks in a safe and proficient manner.
 Report to the immediate supervisor if they feel fatigued to the extent where they believe it might affect
their own and others personal safety.
 Employees must report fatigue or tiredness and lack of mental acuity to their supervisor and supervision
must take appropriate actions to prevent any loss.
 Avoid the use of over-the-counter or prescription drugs to increase mental alertness. Employees should
be discouraged from taking any substance known to increase fatigue, including fatigue that sets in after
the effects of the drug wear off.
Medical Evaluation
Employees working on a project/site are required to undertake a medical examination (refer to Practice
000.653.2100, Pre-Project Medical Examination) when required by regulations/standards.
Medical examinations will also apply to potential employees who have:
 Previous experience with shift work (or abnormal hours inclusive of overtime)
 Previous or current sleep disorders

Page 303
ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
For tasks requiring employees to work extended hours on various shifts, it is recommended that additional
monitoring programs, substantiated with medical assessments, be implemented in addition to the standard
medical assessments for employees.
Results of monitoring will be communicated to the Project Manager.
Work Shifts and Schedules
Employees subject to the U.S. requirements for a “certified driver’s license” (CDL), or similar in-country standards,
must comply with the work-hour (and all other) provisions of such requirements.
The scope of work and time frame limitations will impact upon the type and duration of shifts implemented
during a project.
Before approving extended work hours or additional shifts, managers and supervisors will consider the following
factors. (This list is not all-inclusive and is a guide to the factors that should be considered when deciding whether
to extend employee work hours):
 Could the employees create a risk to themselves or others as a result of fatigue?
 Is it vital that work be performed on overtime? (That is, will there be an adverse effect on health, safety,
or the environment if the task is not continued by employees working for extended periods, or will it
prevent a regulatory noncompliance?)
Project Managers, and to a lesser extent supervisory staff, must evaluate the demands placed on employees by:
 Work schedules, including the examination of structure of work and irregular and unplanned work
schedules such as call-out shift work (such as emergency personnel)
 Staffing levels, including shift length, physical and mental demands of the work, and commuting
requirements (method of travel, distance, frequency, risk of incidents whilst commuting)
 Overtime restrictions for employees on call-out or similar duties, including emergency services, security,
and medical staff such as nurses
 Compensating for the absence of key employees, without endangering or exposing others to additional
risk
 Monitoring systems for efficient performance, including heat, vibrations (machinery operation), stressors
(working at heights and confined spaces), humidity, light, noise and diet requirements/balance
Work Hours
Supervisors should use the following guidelines in assigning extended work hours:
 Employees should not work continuously for more that 16 hours in any 24-hour period, excluding shift
turnover time.
 Employees should not work more than a total of 24 hours in any 48-hour period, excluding shift turnover
time.
 Employees should not work more than 64 hours in any 7-day period, excluding shift turnover time.
 Employees should not work more than 14 consecutive days without at least 2 consecutive days of rest
before the next workday, excluding shift turnover time
 Drivers should not be permitted to drive in excess of the following limits:

Page 304
ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
 More than 10 hours, following 8 consecutive hours off duty

 Any period after having been on duty 15 hours, following 8 consecutive hours off duty
 More than 60 hours in any 7consecutive days
Rest periods between shifts should be at least 10 hours. In the event that an employee is required to work longer
than the normal allocated hours, consideration must be given to their start time for the next shift.
Where an employee is required to change shifts (from days to nights for example), they should be given a full
24-hour rest period before commencing the new shift.
Night Shifts
Nightshift operation will cause performance levels to be affected, as aspects of human performance are at there
lowest during the night.
It is critical for all personnel, regardless of position, to understand that nightshift operations may disrupt an
employee’s circadian rhythm. Consequently, the responsibility to control and minimize the effects of fatigue is
shared by both the employee and immediate supervisor.
Sleep deprivation is most likely to accumulate when working at night, and generally lost sleep (a sleep debt) is
only replaced at the rate of 1 hour per night. (Eight hours lost sleep may take up to 8 to 9 days to recover from.)
Potential control measures for the implementation of nightshift operations where accommodation is provided,
may include, but are not limited to:
 Isolated blocks for employees required working at night or on shifts different from others.
 Restricted areas preventing other scheduled daytime activities from interrupting or disturbing nightshift
crews while sleeping.
 Rescheduled activities for servicing amenities in areas of nightshift crews (such as cleaning and sheet
changes to be conducted when the nightshift has commenced work and not during normal operational
hours when employees are sleeping).
Type of Work
Employees may experience fatigue when exposed to the following types of work:
 Physically demanding tasks
 Monotonous tasks
 Mentally demanding tasks
 Confined space
 Working at height
 Hot environments
Supervisors must understand that employees may become fatigued from various physically demanding work
activities, and consequently will require attention to verify that the potential for fatigue is adequately controlled.

Page 305
ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
Controlling employee fatigue is a core consideration that supervisors must keep at the forefront of planning.
Hence, rotation of employees and adjustment or alterations of task priorities may be required.
Commuting (Flying/Driving)
Excessive commuting time combined with extended work hours may reduce the time available for adequate
recovery periods and therefore, substantially increase fatigue.
Potential control measures implemented to address this issue may include, but are not limited to:
 Suitable travel arrangements.
 Adjustment of work shifts hours.
 Inclusion of transportation hours in the calculation of the overall work schedule hour.
 Adjustment of the daily shift length (particularly relevant to those employees required to fly in and out
from remote areas).
 Variations to work conducted during the various phases of a work schedule or roster cycle.
Environmental and Climatic Conditions
Continued work over extended periods in extreme temperatures and climatic conditions is physically demanding.
Contractors must assess the workload and effects of continued exposure in extreme conditions on the employee.
Potential control measures may include scheduling physically demanding tasks to cooler or less stressful periods
of the day and planning work activities with suitable control measures such as canopies and regular rest breaks.
ABG will provide equipment such as anti-fatigue mats for standing, lift assist devices for repetitive lifting and other
ergonomic devices as deemed appropriate. Periodic rest breaks will be provided to all employees as well as
chairs/benches to sit periodically. PS will also evaluate and improve work tasks to control fatigue periodically.
Supervisors are responsible for monitoring their employees and ensuring that they are sufficiently rested,
hydrated, and capable of performing their allocated tasks. These issues are to be discussed on a regular basis.
Nutrition and Lifestyle
Through orientation training and information sessions, employees should be advised/reminded of the benefits to
their fitness-for-work through nutrition and lifestyle, especially while residing in a camp environment.
Stress
Results of stress often become evident in the workplace. Signs of stress in employees normally result in, but are
not limited to:
 Mood swings
 Anger/aggressiveness
 Emotional displays
 Inattentiveness
 Quietness
 Poor quality work

Page 306
ABG
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
Supervisors are responsible to monitor employees at all times and report changes in the performance or signs and
symptoms of stress. Employees should be continually reminded that stress would affect their safety and
performance within the workplace.
ASSIGNING EMPLOYEES TO WORK ALONE
Supervisors responsible for assigning employees to work in isolated or hazardous locations will:
 Analyze each work assignment to decide whether it requires 2 employees to ensure work safety.
 Contact the employee working alone periodically (either face-to-face or by other 2-way
communications) to verify that the employee is not hurt or at risk.
 Contact an employee working alone often enough to allow the supervisor to take appropriate action if the
employee does not respond. (The specific frequency of communication should be determined and
agreed to between the supervisor and the employee before the work begins).
Note: It is impossible to provide a list of all jobs that require more than one employee be assigned to ensure
worker safety. The following are examples of jobs that analysis and experience have shown where
2 employees should be assigned:
 Work on hazardous machinery that must be performed without the machine guards and the
machinery cannot be locked out
 Work with hazardous materials
 Working 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more off the ground (floor or other platform) where no guardrail is
installed.
 Removing and transporting potentially shock-sensitive materials/wastes.
 Work involving heavy machinery or equipment operations at isolated or hazardous locations.
REFERENCES

000.653.2100 Pre-Project Medical Examination
Forms:

Page 307
ABG
FIRE PROTECTION / EXTINGUISHERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................... 293
Site Safety Managers Responsibilities.......................................................................................................................294
Potential Ignition Sources.........................................................................................................................................295
Fire Protection Equipment........................................................................................................................................295
Maintenance of Fire Protection Equipment..............................................................................................................296
Housekeeping Procedures........................................................................................................................................296
Training..................................................................................................................................................................... 297
Fire Prevention Equipment.......................................................................................................................................297

Page 308
ABG
Purpose
The ABG Fire Safety Plan has been developed to work in conjunction with company emergency plans and other
safety programs. Fire prevention measures reduce the incidence of fires by eliminating opportunities for ignition
of flammable materials.
This FPP is in place at this company to control and reduce the possibility of fire and to specify the type of
equipment to use in case of fire. This plan addresses the following issues:
- Major workplace fire hazards and their proper handling and storage procedures.
- Potential ignition sources for fires and their control procedures.
- The type of fire protection equipment or systems which can control a fire involving them.
Under this plan, our employees will be informed of the plan's purpose, preferred means of reporting fires and
other emergencies, types of evacuations to be used in various emergency situations, and the alarm system. The
plan is closely tied to our emergency action plan where procedures are described for emergency escape
procedures and route assignments, procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been
completed, rescue and medical duties for those employees who perform them. Please see the emergency action
plan for this information.
Site Supervisor is the program coordinator, who has overall responsibility for the plan. The written program is
kept in Site Safety Manager’s office. He/she will review and update the plan as necessary. Copies of this plan may
be obtained in the Site Safety Manager office.
The FPP communicates to employees, policies and procedures to follow when fires erupt. This written plan is
available, upon request, to employees, their designated representatives, and any OSHA officials who ask to see it.
SITE SAFETY MANAGER Responsibilities
Here at ABG the SITE SAFETY MANAGER is responsible for the following activities. He/she must:
- Develop a written fire prevention plan

- Train designated employees in the use of fire extinguishers and the application of medical first-aid
techniques.
- Keep key management personnel home telephone numbers in a safe place in the office for immediate use
in the event of a fire. Distribute a copy of the list to key persons to be retained in their homes for use in
communicating a fire occurring during non-work hours.
- Decide to remain in or evacuate the workplace in the event of a fire.
If evacuation is deemed necessary, the SITE SAFETY MANAGER ensures that:
- All employees are notified and a head count is taken to confirm total evacuation of all employees.

Page 309
ABG
In locations where the building owner/superintendent is not available, security measures to protect employee
records and property are arranged as necessary.
Potential Ignition Sources
Flammable or combustible materials may not ignite on their own without an external source of ignition.
Many of the thousands of chemicals in use in the workplace are both highly toxic and highly volatile. Extreme
caution must be used to prevent and fight fires resulting from chemical spills and accidents. Chemicals can cause
serious injuries through physical (fire or explosion) or health (burns or poisons) hazards. Chemicals are classified
by the inherent properties that make them hazardous.
- Flammable - these chemicals catch fire very easily; hazards include property damage, burns and injuries
that result when toxic and corrosive compounds are released into the air.
- Reactive - a reactive material is one that can undergo a chemical reaction under certain conditions;
reactive substances can burn, explode, or release toxic vapor if exposed to other chemicals, air or water.
- Explosive - an explosive is a substance that undergoes a very rapid chemical change producing large
amounts of gas and heat; explosions can also occur as a result of reactions between chemicals not
ordinarily considered explosive.
The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has classified four general types of fires, based on the
combustible materials involved and the kind of extinguisher needed to put them out. The four fire classifications
are A, B, C and D.
- Class A. This type of fire is the most common. The combustible materials are wood, cloth, paper, rubber
and plastics. The common extinguisher agent is water, but dry chemicals are also effective. Carbon dioxide
extinguishers and those using sodium or potassium bicarbonate chemicals are not to be used on this type
of fire.
- Class B. Flammable liquids, gases and greases create class B fires. The extinguishers to use are foam,
carbon dioxide and dry chemical. Also, water fog and vaporizing liquid extinguishers can be used.
- Class C. Class C fires are electrical fires and a non-conducting agent must be used. Carbon dioxide and dry
chemical extinguishers are to be used. Never use foam or water-type extinguishers on these fires.
- Class D. Combustible metals, such as magnesium, titanium, zirconium and sodium fires are class D. These
fires require specialized techniques to extinguish them. None of the common extinguishers should be
used since they can increase the intensity of the fire by adding an additional chemical reaction.
There are only two dry chemical extinguishers that can be used on A, B, and C fires, and those are multi-purpose
ABC extinguishers, either stored pressure or cartridge operated. Multi-purpose extinguishers (ABC) will handle all
A, B, and C fires.
All fire extinguishers are labeled with either ABC, or A, or B, or C.

Page 310
ABG
It is important to know what type of fire is in progress. If you use a fire extinguisher, be sure to use one only on
fires for which that fire extinguisher is designed. Using the wrong agent on a fire may increase the intensity of the
fire. Check the label on the fire extinguisher; it should list the fire class it is meant to put out.
Fire Protection Equipment
Fire protection equipment, selected and purchased by Site Supervisor in use at this company includes the
following extinguishers to protect from the various types of fire hazards.
Type of Fire: A, combustibles like wood, paper, etc.

Type of Extinguisher: A or ABC, water or dry chemicals
Type of Fire: B, flammable liquids, gases and greases

Type of Extinguisher: B or ABC, foam, carbon dioxide, dry chemicals
Type of Fire: C, electrical fires

Type of Extinguisher: C or ABC, non-conducting agent such as carbon dioxide and dry chemicals
Type of Fire: D, combustible metals such as titanium and sodium.

Type of Extinguisher: This type of fire calls for specialized techniques for which the fire department will be
called.
Maintenance of Fire Protection Equipment
Once hazards are evaluated and equipment is installed to control them that equipment must be monitored on a
regular basis to make sure it continues to function properly. Strict guidelines for maintaining the equipment are
followed. Fire extinguishers are inspected on a monthly basis with each receiving an annual hydrostatic test.
Housekeeping Procedures
Our company controls accumulations of flammable and combustible waste materials and residues so that they do
not contribute to a fire.
The following procedures have been developed to eliminate or minimize the risk of fire due to improperly stored
or disposed of materials:
- All aisles, emergency exits, fire extinguishers, eye wash stations, etc., will be kept clear (a minimum of
three feet in front of and to either side) of product storage, material storage, fork trucks and pallet jacks
at all times.

Page 311
ABG
- Storage areas will be maintained orderly at all times. When supplies are received, the supplies will be
stored properly.
- Spills will be cleaned-up immediately and wastes disposed of properly.
- All process leaks will be reported to supervision and maintenance for immediate repair and clean-up.
- All refuse and waste materials will be placed in the recognized waste containers for disposal keeping floor
free of paper or saw dust, storing oily rags in specially designed containers, storing all flammables in fire
cabinets when not in use.
- At the end of the business day, turn off all office equipment (area heaters, lamps, coffee-maker, PCs, etc.)
and lights to save energy and prevent fires. All space heaters must be un-plugged at the end of the day to
assure they have been turned-off.

Page 312
ABG
Training
Employees will be instructed on fire protection upon initial assignment and at least annually thereafter.
At the time of a fire, employees should know what type of evacuation is necessary and what their role is in
carrying out the plan. In cases where the fire is large, total and immediate evacuation of all employees is
necessary. In smaller fires, a partial evacuation of nonessential employees with a delayed evacuation of others
may be necessary for continued plant operation. We must be sure that employees know what is expected of them
during a fire to assure their safety.
Training, conducted on initial assignment, includes:
- What to do if employee discovers a fire

- Demonstration of alarm, if more than one type exists
- How to recognize fire exits
- Evacuation routes
- Head count procedures (see EAP for details)
- Return to work after the "all-clear" signal
The Company must inform employees of the fire hazards of the materials and processes to which they are
exposed.
The Company reviews with each employee upon initial assignment those parts of the fire prevention plan which
the employee must know to protect the employee in the event of an emergency.
The written plan shall be kept in the workplace and made available for employee review.
Fire Prevention Equipment
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER provides training for each employee who is required to use fire prevention
equipment. Employees shall not use fire prevention equipment without appropriate training. Training, before an
individual is assigned responsibility to fight a fire, includes:
- Types of fires
- Types of fire prevention equipment
-
- Location of fire prevention equipment
- How to use fire prevention equipment
- Limitations of fire prevention equipment
- Proper care and maintenance of assigned fire prevention equipment and
Employees must demonstrate an understanding of the training and the ability to use the equipment properly
before they are allowed to perform work requiring the use of the equipment.

Page 313
ABG
If the SITE SAFETY MANAGER has reason to believe an employee does not have the understanding or skill
required, the employee must be retrained. The SITE SAFETY MANAGER certifies in writing that the employee has
received and understands the fire prevention equipment training.

Page 314
ABG
FIRST AID / CPR
FIRST AID / CPR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................... 298
ABG Policy.................................................................................................................................................................299
First Aid Station.........................................................................................................................................................299
First Aid Kits..............................................................................................................................................................300
Minor First Aid Treatment........................................................................................................................................301
Non-Emergency Medical Treatment.........................................................................................................................301
Emergency Medical Treatment.................................................................................................................................301
Program Evaluation..................................................................................................................................................302

Page 315
ABG
FIRST AID / CPR
Purpose
ABG is dedicated to the protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries and illnesses. However, when injuries
or illnesses do occur, we are prepared to see that the needs of the injured or ill are met.
This written First Aid Program is intended to ensure that ABG meets the requirements of applicable OSHA
regulations.
Site Supervisor is our First Aid Program Administrator, is responsible for establishing and implementing the
written First Aid Program. This person has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure the success of this
program. Copies of this written program may be obtained from SITE SAFETY MANAGER in his office. If after
reading this program, you find that improvements can be made, please contact Site Supervisor. We encourage all
suggestions because we are committed to the success of this written program.
ABG Policy
In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, or hospital in near proximity to the workplace which is used for the
treatment of all injured employees, a person or persons are adequately trained to render first aid and adequate
first aid supplies are readily available.
The Company provides a First Aid Kit on the premises. It is there for employee’s use in the treatment of minor
scratches, burns, headaches, nausea, etc. All employees shall know the location of the First Aid Kit and shall notify
their supervisor if they need to use the First Aid Kit.
If an employee has a work related injury or illnesses that requires professional medical assistance, they shall notify
their supervisor and let him/her know before they receive this assistance. If they fail to notify their supervisor,
they may be ineligible for Workers’ compensation, benefits to pay for doctor’s bills, and/or lost wages.
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER shall inspect First Aid Kits before the kits are sent out to each area and on a weekly
basis to insure that they are filled and complete
In all cases requiring emergency medical treatment, immediately call, or have a co-worker call, to request
emergency medical assistance.
Refer to the “Emergency Medical Treatment” section of this program for a list of ABG personnel who are trained
in CPR and First Aid.
First Aid Station

Page 316
ABG
FIRST AID / CPR
If a fixed establishment employs more than 200 employees at one central location, First-aid stations shall be
located as close as practicable to the highest concentration of personnel. First-aid stations are being well-marked
and available to personnel during all working hours. One person holding a valid first-aid certificate shall be
responsible for the proper use and maintenance of the first-aid station. First-aid stations are equipped with a
minimum of two first-aid kits, the size of which shall be dependent upon the number of personnel normally
employed at the work site. One first-aid kit may be a permanent wall-mounted kit, but in all cases the station
shall be equipped with at least one portable first-aid kit. When required by the circumstances, the station shall be
equipped with two wool blankets and a stretcher in addition to first-aid kits. A roster, denoting the telephone
numbers and addresses of doctors, hospitals and ambulance services available to the work site, shall be posted at
each first-aid station.
First Aid Kits
First-aid kits and required contents are maintained in a serviceable condition. Unit-type kits have all items in the
first-aid kit individually wrapped, sealed, and packaged in comparable sized packages. The commercial or cabinet-
type kits do not require all items to be individually wrapped and sealed, but only those which must be kept sterile.
Items such as scissors, tweezers, tubes of ointments with caps, or rolls of adhesive tape, need not be individually
wrapped, sealed, or disposed of after a single use or application. Individual packaging and sealing shall be
required only for those items, which must be kept sterile in a first-aid kit. First-aid kits shall contain at least the
following items:
- 10 Package Kit:
o 1 Pkg. Adhesive bandages, 1" (16 per pkg.)
o 1 Pkg. Bandage compress, 4" (1 per pkg.)
o 1 Pkg. Scissors* and tweezers (1 each per pkg.
o 1 Pkg. Triangular bandage, 40" (1 per pkg.)
o 1 Pkg. Antiseptic soap or pads (3 per pkg.)
o 5 Pkgs. of consulting physician's choice
- 16 Package Kit:
o 1 Pkg. Absorbent gauze, 24" x 72" (1 per pkg.)
o 1 Pkg. Adhesive bandages, 1" (16 per pkg.)
o 2 Pkgs. Bandage compresses, 4" (1 per pkg.)
o 1 Pkg. Eye dressing (1 per pkg.)
o 1 Pkg. Scissors* and tweezers (1 each per pkg.)
o 2 Pkgs. Triangular bandages, 40" (1 per pkg.)
- 24 Package Kit:
o 2 Pkgs. Absorbent gauze, 24" x 72" (1 per pkg.)
o 2 Pkgs. Adhesive bandages, 1" (16 per pkg.)

Page 317
ABG
FIRST AID / CPR
o 1 Pkg. Eye dressing (1 per pkg.)

o 6 Pkgs. Triangular bandages (1 per pkg.)
- 36 Package Kit:
o 4 Pkgs. Absorbent gauze, 24" x 72" (1 per pkg.)
o 2 Pkgs. Adhesive bandages, 1" (16 per pkg.)
o 2 Pkgs. Eye dressing (1 per pkg.)
o 8 Pkgs. Triangular bandages, 40" (1 per pkg.)
Scissors shall be capable of cutting 2 layers of 15 oz. cotton cloth or its equivalent. The first-aid kits are
maintained at the ten, sixteen, twenty-four or thirty-six package level. Where the eyes or body of any person may
be exposed to injurious chemicals and/or materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes
and body are provided, within the work area, for immediate emergency use. A poster shall be fastened and
maintained either on or in the cover of each first- aid kit and at or near all phones plainly stating, the phone
numbers of available doctors, hospitals, and ambulance services within the district of the work site.
Minor First Aid Treatment
First aid kits are stored in the main office building and in each ABG vehicle. The contents of the first aid kits shall
be checked before being sent out to each job & at least weekly on each job to ensure that the expended items are
replaced. If an employee sustains an injury or are involved in an accident requiring minor first aid treatment, they
shall:
- Inform their supervisor.

- Administer first aid treatment to the injury or wound.
- If a first aid kit is used, indicate usage on the accident investigation report.
- Access to a first aid kit is not intended to be a substitute for medical attention.
- Provide details for the completion of the accident investigation report.
Non-Emergency Medical Treatment
For non-emergency work-related injuries requiring professional medical assistance, management must first
authorize treatment. If an employee sustains an injury requiring treatment other than first aid, they shall:
- Inform your supervisor.

Page 318
ABG
FIRST AID / CPR
- Proceed to the posted medical facility. Your supervisor will assist with transportation, if necessary.
- Provide details for the completion of the accident investigation report.
Portable eye wash stations shall be used in the event an employee accidentally spills or splashes injurious
chemicals or liquids on their clothing or body. Employees shall notify their supervisor if they use an eye wash
station.
Emergency Medical Treatment
If an employee sustains a severe injury requiring emergency treatment:
1. Call for help.

2. Fixed line telephones and mobile or cellular phones are available to contact emergency medical service.
3. Use the emergency telephone numbers and instructions posted next to the telephone in your work area
to request assistance and transportation to the local hospital emergency room.
4. Provide details for the completion of the accident investigation report.
Refer to the ABG’s Emergency Action Plan for a complete list of emergency telephone numbers.
Program Evaluation
The Safety Director will thoroughly evaluate and, as necessary, revise our program. We ensure our program's
effectiveness and prevent or eliminate any problems. Program evaluation is performed annually

Page 319
ABG
FIRST BREAK PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................303
SCOPE304
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................304
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................304
2.0 PREPARING AND AUTHORIZING FIRST LINE BREAKS....................................................................................305
2.1 Lockout/Tagout Plan................................................................................................................................305
2.2 Permits....................................................................................................................................................305
2.3 Showers and Barricades..........................................................................................................................305
2.4 Attendant/StandBAy Person....................................................................................................................306
2.5 Spill Containment....................................................................................................................................306
3.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT...........................................................................................................306
3.1 Respirators..............................................................................................................................................306
3.2 Acid and Hot Suits....................................................................................................................................306
4.0 PROCESS......................................................................................................................................................307
5.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................307

Page 320
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice provides the requirements for breaking into established (used) piping systems and related
equipment. This practice also applies to subsequent breaks in all undrained lines.
SCOPE
 Preparing and Authorizing
 Personal Protective Equipment
 Process
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Cleared Lines  Pipelines or equipment that have been drained, vented, flushed, and verified to be clear of any
hazardous residue, pluggage, or pressure.
First Line Break  The initial opening of lines or equipment after appropriate preparation.
Hot Tap  A mechanical method of adding a new tie-in or drain point to an existing piping service or equipment
without interruption of the existing service.
Line Break  Opening of drained or undrained lines or equipment by disconnecting flanges, opening valves,
breaking pipe joints, removing blanks, or opening ports or penetration of a line by mechanical or other means.
Undrained Lines  Any line or equipment system that has not been drained or flushed clear through existing
drains, vents, or bleed valves.
The need for line or system breaks must be determined by the client’s operations personnel who must then
initiate a request to ABG for those breaks.
A Safety Task Assignment (STA) must be developed before any line breaking tasks are executed; refer to Practice
000.653.1304, Pre-Task Planning, Risk Analysis.
No ABG employee may begin making a line break until he/she receives and understands specific safety
instructions from his/her supervisor.
Only employees who have been approved by ABG’s Project/Site Management and appropriately trained to make
first line breaks will perform this type of work. ABG Project/Site Management must maintain a list of approved
employees.

Page 321
ABG
Employees must be instructed in emergency first-aid procedures (such as washing or applying cold packs).
Employees must seek immediate first aid if any hazardous process or other toxic substances comes in contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or shoes, or if they inhale a hazardous or other toxic substance.
2.0 PREPARING AND AUTHORIZING FIRST LINE BREAKS
Management cannot guarantee that all piping systems or equipment are completely drained, contain no plugs, or
are free of pressure even after the first connection has been broken.
Warning! When cooling occurs, a vacuum that may be holding liquids in pockets could
break without warning and liquid may be released and flow to the lowest
point. Plugs (particularly solidified process materials) can move and release
materials after the first connection has been broken.
All systems have the potential to discharge hazardous liquid from open ends of lines or broken flanges. This can
occur at any time, even after the line has been drained and vented.
2.1 Lockout/Tagout Plan
The client’s operations personnel must furnish a lockout/tagout plan identifying each break point. The client
representative and a ABG supervisor then must physically mark each break point. The client representative and
the ABG supervisor must agree on the location of first breaks.
The client representative must close isolating valves and stop pumps in the system. The system must be locked,
tagged, tried, and tested in accordance with Practice 000.653.3315, Hazardous Energy Control.
The client representative must prepare the system for safe opening by depressurizing, draining, flushing, and
venting the system.
All efforts must be made to confirm that no unknown substances or chemicals are in, or processes are feeding the
system. A plan must be in place for collecting or containing and disposing of spilled materials.
2.2 Permits
If the ABG supervisor and the client representative agree that ABG will do the work, permits must be completed
and signed.
If the permit to work process is in place, a Permit to Work must be issued (refer to Practice 000.653.1302, Permit
to Work) as well as a Line Break Permit.
Before a line break can be performed, a Line Break Permit, Form 000.653.F0129, will be completed by
the supervisor and the required approvals obtained.
The appointment and training of Line Break Authorized Persons is similar to Permit to Work and Confined Space
Entry Permit Authorized Person (refer to Practice 000.653.1302). However, in addition, they will have sound and
thorough knowledge in matters relating to the preparation and conduct of line breaks. Practical experience in
preparing line break permits under guidance will be an integral part of training. Appointment is made in writing
on Form 000.653.F0205, Authorized Permit Issuers, by the Project Manager.
Note: When performing a line break in an operating facility, it is a common requirement
to use the facility “line break permit process” instead of the process described
above.

Page 322
ABG
2.3 Showers and Barricades
Each employee must be shown the location of the nearest exit, safety shower, and eyewash station before
starting work.
The entire work area and adjacent areas must be barricaded to prevent potential exposure. The volume and
pressure of the system must be considered when placing barricades. Maintain a minimum of a 10-foot
(3.1-meter) barricade around all hot suit jobs.
No unauthorized personnel will be allowed inside barricades. Personnel required to enter barricaded area must
be protected by the same clothing and equipment as the employee(s) making the line break.
2.4 Attendant/Standby Person
It will be the responsibility of the Line Break Permit Issuer to determine if an attendant/standby person is
required. The requirement for an attendant/standby person must be specified on the permit.
2.5 Spill Containment
Spill containment measures will be in place before opening any line or equipment.
3.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Required personal protective equipment (PPE) and clothing must be indicated on the line break permit.
Employees must be trained in the use of special protective equipment such as air-supplied respirators, self-
contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), and respirators. PPE must be worn until the line is broken and the system
has been cleared.
3.1 Respirators
Respirators must be worn where concentrations of a toxic substance might exceed allowable exposure limits.
3.2 Acid and Hot Suits
Acid and hot suits must consist of chemical resistant rubber boots, pants, jacket, long gauntlet gloves, and hood.
Suits must be constructed of materials designed for the corrosive (acid or base) that is suspected to be present.
Acid suits must be issued to employees through the toolroom or otherwise signed for and returned.
 A complete acid suit must be worn when disconnecting and removing lines or
equipment pieces that have contained a corrosive. All chemicals previously
contained in the line will be specified on the Line Break Permit.
 ABG Project/Site Management must approve the purchase of acid suits.
 To store, hot suits must be hung on hangers so that they are not creased. This action
will reduce the possibility of physical damage.
 Before wearing the acid suit, each employee must be instructed by the supervisor to:
 Inspect suit for physical defects before wearing (a defective suit should not be
worn).
 Inspect suit for leaks by standing under an operating safety shower (if suit leaks, it
is defective or was put on improperly).

Page 323
ABG
 Identify and test safety showers in close proximity to the work.

 While performing assigned work, the hot suit must be kept on until job is finished.
If sprayed with hot liquid, take measures to cool liquid before removing hot suit.
 Decontaminate the suit in designated areas to remove any hazardous material(s)
after performing work and with the suit still on. A procedure to
decontaminate/sanitize suit must be developed at the project/site.
 Properly store suit, after thorough decontamination, in the proper place to make
sure it is not contaminated or physically damaged.
Note: Never tuck pant legs of an acid suit inside of rubber boots.
4.0 PROCESS
ABG supervision must be present when the first break is made. The client representative should also be present.
Standard practice for breaking a flange is to loosen the bolts on the lower and opposite side from the mechanic,
keeping the bolts nearest the employee tight and allowing the line to separate in a manner that causes any
spillage to flow away from the employee. The flange should then be spread apart. The employee should always
be positioned on the upwind side of the flange being broken.
When a valve bonnet is removed, the line must be drained, and the valve must be placed in the open position
before the bonnet bolts are loosened.
Ball and plug valves may have pressure in the cavity under the stem packing and bonnet, regardless of the
position of the valve and the pressure in adjacent lines. Ball and plug valves that are to be removed from the
system must be opened, closed, and reopened to relieve pressure only after the line is drained.
If a plugged condition is discovered or suspected, work must be stopped immediately, and a plan developed to
dislodge the plug.
Note: Spill containment measure will be in place prior to opening any line or equipment.
5.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0129 Line Break Permit

Page 324
ABG
FIT FOR DUTY POLICY
FIT FOR DUTY POLICY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General................................................................................................................................................................... 308
Pre-Employment.....................................................................................................................................................309
Training...................................................................................................................................................................309
Drug Free Workplace..............................................................................................................................................310
Safety Equipment...................................................................................................................................................310
Protective Clothing.................................................................................................................................................311
Modified Work (Light Duty)....................................................................................................................................311
Non-Occupational Illnesses and Injuries.................................................................................................................311
Return to Work Policy........................................................................................................................................312

Page 325
ABG
FIT FOR DUTY POLICY
General
Each employee has an individual responsibility to prevent accidents. It is to the benefit of all employees and ABG
that you report any situation or condition you believe may present a safety hazard, including any known or
concealed dangers in your work area. In addition, employees must also be responsible for ensuring they are
physically and mentally fit to perform their job functions safely. Employees are responsible for notifying their
supervisor if they are fatigued to the point of not being able to perform their duties safely. Employees must take
responsibility for their own safety as well as not reporting to work in a condition as to endanger the safety of their
fellow workers.
ABG encourages you to report your concern either to your immediate supervisor or to a member of the Safety
Committee. The supervisor or Safety Committee will take immediate action to investigate the matter.
Pre-Employment
Pre-employment physicals should be included in the hiring process, and also when changing into certain job
functions and different environments. These assessments may include functional capacity testing as follows:
Strength and endurance of the individual in relation to work goals. Equipment and methods that quantify and
measure strength and conditioning levels may be utilized; i.e., ergometers, dynamometers, treadmills, measured
walking tolerances; commercial strength and exercise devices, free weights, circuit training. Goals for each worker
are dependent on the demands of their respective jobs.
Simulation of the critical work demands, the tasks and the environment of the job the worker will return to. Job
simulation tasks that provide for progression in frequency, load and duration are essential. They must be related
to the work goal and include a variety of work stations that offer opportunities to practice work related positions
and motions, i.e., clerical, plumbing, electrical.
Education that stresses body mechanics, work pacing, safety and injury prevention and that promotes worker
responsibility and self-management will be required. The education component may have direct therapist/worker
interaction. The role of exercise and the worker’s responsibility in self-treatment must be covered.
Training
To be effective, and safe, employees need to be trained in every aspect of their job, such as: training specific to
their assigned task. Examples might be welding, instrumentation, scaffold building, equipment operator
qualifications, respirator fit test, etc. Training must include ABG‘s health and safety orientation for new
employees plus any additional training specific to the nature of hazards on the job; employees must complete this
training before they can work unsupervised. All new employees must attend the new employee orientation
within the first month of employment.
Managers should identify training needs for the job classifications for which they are responsible. Please refer to
specific chapters in this manual for further information on training requirements. Consult with the Responsible

Page 326
ABG
FIT FOR DUTY POLICY
Safety Supervisor about other training needs and requirements. Training not provided by Responsible Safety
Supervisor, such as on-the-job training, is the responsibility of line management. This includes information on
procedural changes or system modifications that impact safety. Responsible Safety Supervisor provides several
health and safety training courses, technical assistance on training needs, and resources to help supervisors fulfill
their training responsibilities.
Training not provided by Responsible Safety Supervisor, such as on-the-job training, is the responsibility of line
management. This includes information on procedural changes or system modifications that impact safety.
Responsible Safety Supervisor provides several health and safety training courses, technical assistance on training
needs, and resources to help supervisors fulfill their training responsibilities. Safe work procedures must be in
place. Examples might include, hot work permitting, confined space, LO/TO, PSM, Electrical Safety, Operator
Safety, etc.
Educational resources such as fact sheets, hazard summaries, and other written materials, as well as videos or
slide shows, are available from Responsible Safety Supervisor. Supervisors can get a catalog from Responsible
Safety Supervisor describing audio-visual materials that may be used to supplement safety training programs.
All health and safety training must be documented. Supervisors must note the participants' names and employee
numbers, topics discussed, instructor(s), and date. Supervisors are responsible for maintaining training records. A
copy of this information should be sent to the Responsible Safety Supervisor training/education coordinator for
inclusion in ABG's training data base.
Drug Free Workplace
It is the policy of ABG to have a drug-free workplace. Drug and alcohol testing shall be as prescribed by DOT or
host facilities. All employees are expected to report to work in a drug-free physical and mental condition that will
allow them to perform their work in a safe and competent manner.
As part of our substance abuse program, new workers may be given an initial drug screening/ test. Workers who
test positive for drugs or other signs of substance abuse will not be hired. Employees must report all medications
they are taking. Over-the-counter medications such as allergy or cold and flu medications could also impair one's
ability to perform safely and must also be reported to their supervisor. Additionally, random drug testing may be
performed throughout your term of employment at ABG’s discretion.
Workers already employed by ABG who test positive for drugs may be terminated, or referred to a community
substance abuse program for help, disciplinary action, or notification of authorities, at the discretion of the
employer. Employee’s activities and behaviors should be monitored to determine if employee should be removed
from the work site.
Safety Equipment
Proper safety equipment is necessary for your protection. The company provides the best protective equipment

Page 327
ABG
FIT FOR DUTY POLICY
it is possible to obtain.
Use all safeguards, safety appliances, or devices furnished for your protection and comply with all regulations that
may concern or affect your safety. Wear your gear properly - all snaps and straps fastened, cuffs not cut or rolled.
Your supervisor will advise you as to what protective equipment is required for your job.
Certain jobs require standard safety apparel and appliances for the protection of the employee. Your supervisor is
aware of the requirements and will furnish you with the necessary approved protective appliances. These items
shall be worn and effectively maintained as a condition of your continued employment and part of our mutual
obligation to comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act.
Safety goggles, glasses and face shields shall correspond to the degree of hazard, i.e., chemical splashes, welding
flashes, impact hazard, dust, etc. Do not alter or replace an approved appliance without permission from your
supervisor.
Rubber gloves and rubber aprons shall be worn when working with acids, caustics or other corrosive materials.
Specified footwear must be worn.
No jewelry shall be worn around power equipment.
Hearing protection appliances (approved muffs or plugs) shall be worn by all employees working within any area
identified as having excess noise levels. Your supervisor will instruct you in the proper use of the appliance.
Protective Clothing
Proper safety equipment is necessary for your protection. The company provides the best protective equipment
it is possible to obtain. Use all safeguards, safety appliances, or devices furnished for your protection and carry
out all regulations that may concern or affect your safety. Wear your gear properly - all snaps and straps
fastened, cuffs not cut or rolled.
Your supervisor will advise you as to what protective equipment is required for your job.
Modified Work (Light Duty)
It is the policy of ABG to provide modified work to persons who have been injured on the job or become ill
because of an occupational exposure. Work provided for employees will be compatible with their work
restrictions, and will not expose the employee to additional harm or injury.
Employees who are injured or become ill must provide the company with a written medical statement of release
from their treating physician or other licensed provider. Upon return to work, this release must be submitted to

Page 328
ABG
FIT FOR DUTY POLICY
their supervisor or other authorized ABG representative prior to being assigned to perform any work.
The policy of ABG is to not schedule persons on modified duty work status to work overtime. Persons who are
permitted to return to work on a modified duty status will be scheduled to work their normal work schedule not
including any overtime hours they would have normally worked unless the supervisor or other responsible
management person directs otherwise.
Non-Occupational Illnesses and Injuries
Employees who are injured or become ill at home or during non-work hours must provide ABG with a written
medical release without restrictions upon returning to work. Employees who have been injured severely or have
had a contagious illness must provide ABG with written proof that they have recovered from their condition. If an
injury or illness is of a serious nature the RSM, ABG Safety Director, Nazar Salman and Human Resources must be
consulted before a person is permitted to return to work.
Return to Work Policy
In all cases employees who have sustained an on-the-job injury or illness must provide written medical proof of
their condition and ability to perform their work upon their return to work.

Page 329
ABG
FORKLIFT & INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................313
Administrative Duties.............................................................................................................................................314
Training...................................................................................................................................................................314
Initial Training.........................................................................................................................................................315
Truck-Related.....................................................................................................................................................315
Workplace Related:............................................................................................................................................315
Our practical training includes these formats:...................................................................................................316
Truck-Related:................................................................................................................................................316
Workplace Related:........................................................................................................................................316
Training Certification......................................................................................................................................317
Performance Evaluation.................................................................................................................................317
Refresher Training..........................................................................................................................................317
Current Certified Truck Operators.................................................................................................................317
Pre-Operational Inspection Procedures.........................................................................................................318
Periodic Inspection Procedures..........................................................................................................................319
Operating Procedures........................................................................................................................................319
Driving............................................................................................................................................................319
Load Lifting and Carrying................................................................................................................................321
Fuel Handling and Storage.................................................................................................................................323
Battery Charging and Changing..........................................................................................................................324
Carbon Monoxide Awareness............................................................................................................................326
Pedestrians.........................................................................................................................................................328
All powered industrial truck operators must:................................................................................................328
All pedestrians must:.....................................................................................................................................328
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................................328
Appendices.........................................................................................................................................................329

Page 330
ABG
PURPOSE
This written Forklift Operation Program establishes guidelines to be followed whenever any of our employees
work with powered industrial trucks at this company. The rules established are to be followed to:
- Provide a safe working environment,

- Govern operator use of powered industrial trucks, and
- Ensure proper care and maintenance of powered industrial trucks.
The procedures here establish uniform requirements designed to ensure that powered industrial truck safety
training, operation, and maintenance practices are communicated to and understood by the affected employees.
These requirements also are designed to ensure that procedures are in place to safeguard the health and safety of
all employees.
It is our intent to comply with the requirements of OSHA's regulations. These regulations have requirements for
powered industrial truck operations, including that for battery care and charging. We also comply with applicable
requirements of design, construction, stability, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operation of ASME/ANSI
B56.1-1969, Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks. However, the powered industrial trucks we operate
in our storage and maintenance yards and warehouses comply with OSHA regulations.
The Site Supervisor is the Forklift Operation Program Coordinator, who has overall responsibility for the plan.
Copies of this written program may be obtained from the Site Safety Manager office.
Training
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER will identify all new employees in the employee orientation program and make
arrangements with department management to schedule training.
Before we begin training a new employee, our Forklift Operation Program Administrator, Site Safety Manager
and/or the Area Supervisor, determines if the potential powered industrial truck operator is capable of
performing the duties necessary to be a competent and safe driver. This is based upon his/her physical and
mental abilities to perform job functions that are essential to the operation of the vehicle.
These capabilities include the level at which the operator must:
- See and hear within reasonably acceptable limits, (this includes the ability to see at a distance and
peripherally, and in certain instances, it is also necessary for the driver to discern different colors,
primarily red, yellow, and green);
- Endure the physical demands of the job; and

Page 331
ABG
- Endure the environmental extremes of the job, such as the ability of the person to work in areas of
excessive cold or heat. An operator must be able to climb onto and off of a truck, to sit in the vehicle for
extended periods of time, and to turn his/her body to look in the direction of travel when driving in
reverse.
Once our Administrator determines that a potential operator is capable of performing powered industrial truck
duties, the following person(s) will conduct initial training and evaluation: SITE SAFETY MANAGER and/or Area
Supervisors. These instructor(s) have the necessary knowledge, training, and experience to train new powered
industrial truck operators.
Initial Training
During an operator’s initial training, the instructor(s) combine(s) both classroom instruction and practical training.
Our classroom instruction includes the following formats:
Lecture
Discussion
Video
Handouts
Classroom instruction, itself, covers the following topics:
Truck-Related:
- Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types of trucks the operator will be authorized
to operate;
- Differences between the truck and automobiles;
- Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what they do, and how they work;
- Engine or motor operation;
- Steering and maneuvering;
- Visibility (including restrictions due to loading);
- Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use limitations;
- Vehicle capacity;
- Vehicle stability;
- Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be required to perform;
- Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries;
- Operating limitations;
- Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions listed in the operator’s manual for the types of
vehicle that the employee is being trained to operate.

Page 332
ABG
Workplace Related:
- Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated;

- Composition of loads to be carried and load stability;
- Load manipulation, stacking and un-stacking;
- Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated;
- Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will be operated;
- Hazardous locations where the vehicle will be operated;
- Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle’s stability;
- Closed environments and other areas where insufficient ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could
cause a buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust;
- Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions in the workplace that could affect safe
operation.
Our practical training includes these formats:
Truck-Related:
- Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types of trucks the operator will be authorized
to operate;
- Differences between the truck and automobiles;
- Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what they do, and how they work;
- Engine or motor operation;
- Steering and maneuvering;
- Visibility ( including restrictions due to loading);
- Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use limitations;
- Vehicle capacity;
- Vehicle stability;
- Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be required to perform;
- Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries;
- Operating limitations;
- Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions listed in the operator’s manual for the types of
vehicle that the employee is being trained to operate.
Workplace Related:
- Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated;

- Composition of loads to be carried and load stability;
- Load manipulation, stacking, and un-stacking;
- Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated;
- Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will be operated;
- Hazardous locations where the vehicle will be operated;

Page 333
ABG
- Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle’s stability.
- Closed environments and other areas where insufficient ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could
cause a buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust;
- Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions in the workplace that could affect safe
operation. All powered industrial truck operators are trained and tested on the equipment they will be
driving before they begin their job;
- Each type of powered industrial truck has a different “feel” to it, and that makes operating it slightly
different from operating other industrial trucks. The work areas where these trucks are being used also
present particular hazards. For these reasons, it is impractical to develop a single “generic” training
program that fits all of our powered industrial trucks. Accordingly, during training, ABG covers the
operational hazards of our powered industrial trucks, including:
o General hazards that apply to the operation of all or most powered industrial trucks;
o Hazards associated with the particular make and model of the truck;
o Hazards of the workplace in general; and
o Hazards of the particular workplace where the vehicle is operated.
If each potential operator has received training in any of the elements of our training program, and is evaluated to
be competent, they need not be retrained in those elements before initial assignment in our workplace. The
training must be specific for the types of trucks that employee will be authorized to operate and for the type of
workplace in which the trucks will be operated.
After an employee has completed the training program, the instructor will determine whether the potential driver
can safely perform the job. At this point, the trainee will take a performance test or practical exercise through
which the instructor(s) will decide if the training has been adequate. All powered industrial truck trainees are
tested on the equipment they will be driving.
Site Supervisor is responsible for keeping records certifying that each employee who has successfully completed
operator training and testing. Each certificate includes the name of the driver, the date(s) of the training, and the
name of the person who did the training and evaluation.
Performance Evaluation
Each certified powered industrial truck operator is evaluated at least once every 3 years to verify that the
operator has retained and uses the knowledge and skills needed to drive safely. This evaluation is done by SITE
SAFETY MANAGER and/or Area Supervisor. If the evaluation shows that the operator is lacking the appropriate
skills and knowledge, the operator is retrained by our instructor(s).
Refresher Training

Page 334
ABG
Refresher training is triggered by any of the following situations:
- If the operator is involved in an accident or a near-miss incident;

- If the operator has been observed driving the vehicle in an unsafe manner;
- When the operator is assigned to a different type of truck;
- If it has been determined during an evaluation that the operator needs additional training; or
- When there are changes in the workplace that could affect safe operation of the truck. This could include
a different type of paving, reconfiguration of the storage racks, new construction leading to narrower
aisles, or restricted visibility.
Current Certified Truck Operators
Under no circumstances shall an employee operate a powered industrial truck until he/she has successfully
completed this company’s powered industrial truck training program. Regardless of claimed previous experience,
all new operators must at least undergo a performance evaluation.
Pre-Operational Inspection Procedures
The company requires operators to perform pre-operational equipment checks on powered industrial trucks prior
to the beginning of each shift in which those trucks will be utilized to ensure the safe operating condition of the
vehicle. The pre-operational check is performed by completing a daily truck inspection checklist.
See an attached sample form. A supply of these forms is provided in each charging and parking area within user
areas.
No blank spaces are allowed on the form. If an item does not apply, we use the code N/A. We also require that
operators fill out the comment section thoroughly and accurately if there are any operational or visual defects.
That way our Maintenance Department can pinpoint and repair the problem before the truck becomes unsafe to
operate.
Our pre-operational inspection procedures used by operators include:
- If a completed checklist form is not present on the powered industrial truck, then the truck may not be
operated until a checklist is completed.
- If the powered industrial truck is safe to operate, the operator must:
o Place the completed checklist form in the holder provided on the vehicle. The checklist must
remain in the vehicle’s holder for the duration of the shift. This serves as a visual notice to all area
operators that this piece of equipment was inspected at the beginning of the shift and may be
used during the shift without another inspection.

Page 335
ABG
- At the end of the shift, operators must turn the checklist in to the department/area manager or
supervisor. The manager or supervisor is responsible for reviewing the checklists for accuracy,
completeness, and any noted defects.
- If the powered industrial truck is unsafe to operate, the operator is to:
o Remove the key from the powered industrial truck;
o Place a DANGER DO NOT OPERATE tag on the steering wheel or control lever of the powered
industrial truck;
o Report the problem to his/her immediate supervisor;
o Not use the truck until the problem has been identified and fixed. No one else may use the truck
until the problem has been identified and fixed.
Appropriate disciplinary action will be enforced for anyone violating this policy.
Area Supervisor is responsible for retaining all daily truck inspection checklist forms for each vehicle for 6 months.
Periodic Inspection Procedures
Periodic inspections are in conjunction with the particular powered industrial truck’s maintenance or service
schedule. Maintenance schedules are normally expressed in days and operating or running hours. Qualified
Maintenance Personnel perform(s) inspection and maintenance monthly. Most manufacturers’ operator
instruction manuals contain the recommended maintenance schedule. Inspections and maintenance or repair
beyond the recommended service schedules are done by authorized workshops and/or service technicians.
See an attached sample of our periodic truck inspection checklist. A supply of these forms is provided in each
charging and parking area within user departments. Maintenance Department is responsible for retaining all
periodic truck inspection checklist forms for each vehicle.
Powered industrial trucks can create certain hazards that only safe operation can prevent. That’s why we have
created sets of operating procedures. Our operating procedures follow.
Driving
Driving a powered industrial truck is fundamentally different than driving a car or other trucks. In fact, powered
industrial trucks:
- Are usually steered by the rear wheels,

- Steer more easily loaded than empty,
- Are driven in reverse as often as forward,
- Are often steered with one hand, and

Page 336
ABG
- Have a center of gravity toward the rear, shifting to the front as forks are raised.
Unlike cars, some powered industrial trucks have a greater chance of tipping over when suddenly turned. Because
of the design of powered industrial trucks, they have a very short rear wheel swing. This means that, at high
speeds, sudden turns can tip them and could result in serious injury and damage. Speed can cause the center of
gravity to shift dramatically. Similarly, speeding over rough surfaces can cause tipping.
Although structurally different than cars, powered industrial trucks, like cars, can collide with property and
people. Therefore it is our policy for all operators to follow these driving procedures:
- Use only powered industrial trucks approved for the location of use.
- Only start/operate a powered industrial truck from the designated operating location.
- Observe all traffic regulations, including plant speed limits and keeping to the right.
- Yield the right of way to pedestrians and emergency vehicles.
- Maintain safe distances from powered industrial trucks (typically three truck lengths).
- Travel at speeds that will permit vehicles to stop safely at all times, under all road and weather conditions.
- Avoid quick starts/changes of direction.
- Turns must be negotiated by reducing speed and turning the steering wheel with a smooth, sweeping
motion.
- Maintain forks in proper position.
- Drive properly in reverse.
- Cross railroad tracks at an angle, never a right angle.
- Do not engage in stunt driving and horseplay.
- Drive slowly over wet or slippery floors.
- When the forks are empty, travel with the forks at a negative pitch as low to the floor as practical. Adjust
the height of the forks to a safe level when the operating terrain warrants.
- When operating a narrow aisle reach truck that is unloaded, do not travel until the forks are fully
retracted and positioned at a negative pitch as low to the floor as practical.
- Approach elevators slowly and squarely. Once on an elevator, neutralize controls, shut off power, and set
the brakes.
- Direct motorized hand trucks into elevators with loads facing forward.
- Do not run over loose objects on roadway surfaces.
- Slow down and sound the horn and look at intersections, corners, and other locations where vision is
obstructed.
- Do not pass other trucks traveling in the same direction at intersections, blind spots, or other dangerous
locations.
- Maintain a clear view of the direction of travel at all times. Look in direction of travel.
- Keep unauthorized personnel from riding on powered trucks, and provide a safe place to ride where
riding on trucks is authorized.
- Keep all body parts within truck.
- Do not allow anyone to place their arms or legs between the uprights of the mast or outside the running
lines of the truck.
- Do not drive trucks up to anyone standing in front of a bench or other fixed object.

Page 337
ABG
- A vehicle is considered “unattended” when an operator is 25 feet or more away from a vehicle which
remains in view, or whenever an operator leaves a vehicle and it is not in view. Unattended trucks must
be secured by:
o Fully lowering forks or other attachments (when unloaded, tilt the forks forward first and then
lower them to the ground until the tips of the forks come in contact with the ground;
o Neutralizing controls;
o Shutting off power; and
o Setting brakes.
- Secure trucks when dismounted operators are within 25 feet of a vehicle still in view by:
o Fully lowering the load;
o Neutralizing controls; and
o Setting brakes.
- Be aware of headroom under overhead installations, lights, pipes, door beams, and sprinkler systems.
- Do not block access to fire or emergency exits, stairways, fire equipment, or electrical panels.
- Sound the horn or other audible warning device at all intersections and corners to warn pedestrians.
- Maintain safe distances from the edges of ramps or platforms while on any elevated dock, platform, or
freight car.
- Dockboards and bridgeplates must be secured before vehicles cross over them. Be sure they do not
exceed rated weight limits.
- When ascending or descending a grade or incline:
o Proceed slowly and with caution;
o Tilt or raise the forks and attachments only as far as necessary to clear the road surface; and
o Sound the horn before ascending or descending.
- Do not park on inclines, ramps, or dock plates. If you must park on an incline, block the wheels.
- Do not use powered industrial trucks for any purpose other than what they were designed.
- Clean up all fluid leaks (oil, hydraulic, transmission, etc.) from the floor.
- Do not operate a powered industrial truck with a leak in the fuel system until the leak has been corrected.
- If the warning device (like a warning lamp or sound-producing device) comes on, stop the truck as soon as
possible.
- Follow manufacturer’s recommended emergency procedures for fire or tip-over and be familiar with
manufacturer’s emergency equipment.
- Do not modify a powered industrial truck.
- Report all powered industrial truck accidents involving employees, building structures, and equipment to
department management.
Load Lifting and Carrying
Powered industrial trucks can lift only so much. Each truck has its own load capacity, which is indicated on the
rating plate. Powered industrial trucks also have three-point suspension that forms an imaginary triangle from the
left front wheel to the right front wheel to the point between the two back wheels. The center of gravity for a

Page 338
ABG
powered industrial truck must lie somewhere within this triangle or else the truck will tip over. The load and its
position on the forks, as well as traveling speed and slopes, all affect the center of gravity. Loads, themselves,
have gravity with which to contend. Loads need special care so that they do not fall. In order to prevent tipping
and load falling hazards, we have established the following load lifting and carrying procedures:
- Handle loads only within the capacity rating of the truck.

- Use a forking system which suits the load.
- Do not allow anyone to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any truck whether empty or loaded.
- Do not start a powered industrial truck or operate any of its functions or attachments from any position
other than from the designated operator’s position.
- Keep a clear view of the path of travel and look for other traffic, personnel and safe clearances. If the load
being carried obstructs forward view, travel with the load trailing.
- When traveling with a load on the forks, travel with the load as low to the floor as practical with the load
tilted back slightly for improved stability.
- When ascending or descending a grade or incline:
o Drive with the load positioned upgrade or uphill when the truck is loaded.
- When unloading or loading semi-trailers:

o Engage dock lock mechanism and light before entering the trailer.
o Check condition of dock leveler plate and trailer floor before entering.
o Set the brakes of the semi-tractor.
o Chock the rear wheels of the trailer prior to loading or unloading.
- When unloading or loading the 28 foot trailers:

o Engage dock lock mechanism and light before entering the trailer.
o Check condition of dock leveler plate and trailer floor before entering.
o Be sure the semi-tractor is coupled to the trailer, or the fixed jack on the front of the trailer is
lowered to the ground to prevent these two trailers from tipping forward.
o Set the brakes of the semi-tractor.
o Chock the rear wheels of the trailer.
- Use the following backup procedure and sequence:

o Pivot at the waist and inspect the area of operation in the rear of the fork truck, watching for
obstructions and pedestrians.
o Blow the horn to alert any pedestrians that may or may not be visible.
o Engage the directional lever to the reverse position.
o Concentrate on the removal of the forks from the load to avoid any load disturbance, as you back
the fork truck out of the load.
o Stop the fork truck 18” to 24” away from the load’s resting location and lower the forks to the
proper travel height and angle.
- During load placement:

o Square the fork truck with the load resting location.
o Stop the fork truck 18” to 24” away from the load resting location.

Page 339
ABG
o Raise the load to proper entry height.

o Drive forward with the load and position the load over its resting location.
o Lower the load to a height of 4” if possible.
o Tilt the load forward to a level position.
o Lower the load to its resting platform.
o Back up the unit using proper back up procedures and sequence.
o Do not attempt to move loads with broken pallets.
- During load retrieving:

o Tie together unstable loads.
o Square the fork truck with the load resting location.
o Stop the fork truck 18” to 24” away from the load resting location.
o Raise the forks to eye level and level the forks to a horizontal position.
o Raise the forks to the proper entry height.
o Slide the forks into the load and maintain the clearance around the forks to avoid load
disturbance. Be sure to place the heaviest part of the load closest to the backrest.
o Raise the load so it is completely suspended from its resting platform. Be sure to support and
center the load so that it will not fall forward or sideways.
o Tilt the load back.
o Visually inspect the rear area of the fork truck to ensure no pedestrians are behind or around the
unit.
o Back up the unit using proper back up procedures and sequence.
o Back up the fork truck 18” to 24” and stop.
o Know the load limits of elevators.
o Whenever a truck is equipped with vertical controls only, or vertical and horizontal controls
elevatable with the lifting carriage or forks for lifting personnel, use these precautions:
 Use a safety platform that is firmly secured to the lifting carriage and/or forks.
 Provide a way for the person on the platform to shut off power to the truck.
 Provide protection from falling objects.
Fuel Handling and Storage
Some of our powered industrial trucks operate with highly flammable and combustible fuels.
The storage and handling of liquid fuels, including gasoline and diesel fuel are done in accordance with NFPA
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA 30-1969).
The storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gas fuel is done in accordance with NFPA Storage and Handling of
Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA 58-1969).

Page 340
ABG
All employees who handle or use flammable liquids are instructed by SITE SAFETY MANAGER and/or Area
Supervisors in their safe handling and use and made aware of the specific OSHA requirements for what they are
doing with the liquids. More specifically, employees are instructed in the following procedures:
- The storage and handling of liquid fuels such as gasoline and diesel fuel shall be in accordance with NFPA
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA No. 30-1969), which is incorporated by reference as
specified in the OSHA standard.
- The storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gas fuel shall be in accordance with NFPA Storage and
Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA No. 58-1969), which is incorporated by reference as
specified in the OSHA standard. General industry employers may also find more information under the
applicable OSHA standards.
Additional Information is found in 29 CFR 1926.152 and 1926.153.
If your employees are required to handle or use flammable liquids they must be instructed in their safe handling
and use and be made aware of the specific OSHA requirements for the tasks they perform with the liquids. Here
are some good fuel storage and handling procedures you can use:
- Never smoke in fueling areas.

- Prevent open flames, sparks, or electric arcs while fueling.
- Never fuel a powered industrial truck while the engine is running.
- Keep solvent waste, oily rags, and flammable liquids (liquids having a flashpoint below 140 deg. F and
capable of being easily ignited, burning intensely, or having a rapid rate of flame spread) in fire resistant
covered containers until removed from the workplace.
- To change an liquid petroleum (LP) gas tank:
o Put on leather work gloves and goggles.
o Disconnect powered industrial truck valve from the empty LP cylinder.
o Replace with full cylinder.
NOTE: The pin on the lift truck must fit into the cut out hole(s) provided on the LP cylinder. This is
required by law.
o Strap in the cylinder and re-connect the truck valve securely to the cylinder outlet.
o Open cylinder valve and listen for leaks.
o If leaking, close cylinder valve and slowly uncouple the fuel valve. Try to re-connect. If still leaking,
try a different cylinder and notify department management of faulty cylinder.
o If no leaks are present, lift truck may be utilized.
Battery Charging and Changing
Batteries present a hazard because they contain corrosive chemical solutions, either acid or alkali. During
recharging, a worker may be exposed not only to the acid solution but also to hydrogen gas that is produced
during the recharging process. Because of the hazards involved in battery charging and changing, only personnel,
who have been trained in the appropriate procedures, understand the dangers involved, and know the
appropriate precautions to take may be allowed to perform this work.

Page 341
ABG
We have an area in our facility specifically for charging or changing batteries. This area is separate from the main
aisles.
Good housekeeping procedures are essential. We keep the area clean and free of any combustible materials. We
also maintain a moderate temperature range suitable for battery maintenance.
ABG has installed the following safety features:
- An eyewash station for workers.

- A hose and floor drain for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolyte.
- The charging apparatus is protected to prevent damage from vehicles.
- Because we use on-board chargers, our designated charging area meets the electrical requirements of the
charger and facility for fire protection.
- Smoking is prohibited in charging areas. Battery charging generates hydrogen gas that may present an
explosion hazard. This precaution also applies to open flames, sparks, or electric arcs. An effective means
of fire protection must be provided in the area.
Electric lift trucks are an excellent choice for moving materials inside a facility. They are much cleaner and quieter
than trucks propelled by liquid fuels and they do not create a carbon monoxide hazard. This type of vehicle,
however does have potentially dangerous situations associated with it—hazards that occur during battery
recharging or changing.
There are two types of batteries that are commonly used in electric lift trucks: lead and nickel-iron. These
batteries present a hazard because they contain corrosive chemical solutions, either acid or alkali. If battery acid is
splashed on a person, it will burn the skin; if splashed in the eyes, it can cause blindness; and if it gets on clothing,
it will eat holes in it. During recharging, a worker may be exposed not only to the acid solution, but to hydrogen
gas which is produced during the recharging process. Hydrogen gas may present an explosive hazard. Therefore,
smoking, open flames, sparks, and electric arcs are prohibited in charging areas. An effective means of fire
protection must be provided in the area. Because of the hazards involved in battery charging and changing, only
personnel who have been trained in the appropriate procedures, understand the dangers involved, and know the
appropriate precautions to take should be allowed to perform this work.
Due to the hazards above, it is necessary for the company to:
- Provide battery charging installations located in areas designated for that purpose.
- Provide fire protection, in the form of a fire extinguisher or standpipe system.
- Provide for quick drenching of the eyes and body within 25 feet of battery handling areas.
- Provide facilities for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolyte.
- Provide a means of protecting charging apparatus from damage by trucks.
- Ventilate the battery charging area to prevent the build-up of hydrogen gas.
- Treat racks and trays to make them resistant to electrolyte in the battery handling area.
- Provide acid resistant floors in the battery handling area unless protected from acid accumulations.

Page 342
ABG
- Provide a conveyor, overhead hoist, or equivalent material handling equipment for handling batteries.
- Provide appropriate personal protective equipment like eye and face protection, gloves, protective
footwear, long-sleeved shirts, and aprons.
- Provide an easily accessible first aid kit in the charging/changing area.

Page 343
ABG
Here are some good battery charging/changing procedures:
- When removing battery covers to add or inspect electrolyte levels, wear proper goggles, face shield,
rubber gloves, and an apron. Protective equipment is not required when filling batteries equipped with an
automatic filler.
- Wear appropriate foot protection where there is the risk of foot injury.
- If the powered industrial truck is not put on a charge during off shifts or weekends, disconnect the battery
plug from the truck plug. NOTE: During normal production operation, the powered industrial truck may
remain plugged into the battery when left unattended.
- Do not smoke in the battery charging area.
- Wear hearing protection in the battery charging area if necessary.
- Prevent open flames, sparks, and electric arcs in the battery charging area.
- Keep tools and other metallic objects away from the tops of uncovered batteries.
- Keep the charging area clean.
- Keep the charging area work surface dry and slip-resistant.
- When batteries are being charged, keep the vent caps in place to avoid electrolyte spray.
- Take care to assure that vent caps are functioning. The battery (or compartment) cover(s) must be open
to dissipate heat.
- When charging batteries, acid must be poured into water; water must not be poured into acid.
- Provide carboy tilter or siphon for handling electrolyte.
- Clean up spilled materials or liquids in the charging area immediately.
- Test all non-supervised fire alarm systems near battery charging/changing areas bimonthly.
- Test all supervised fire alarm systems (ones that have a device to indicate a system malfunction) yearly.
- Always use a battery replacement that is within the weight range specified on the nameplate of the truck
in order to maintain vehicle stability.
- Properly position and secure reinstalled batteries to the truck.
- Securely position and set the brakes of a truck before attempting to change or charge the battery.
- Ensure that all workers in the immediate area of the changing area stay clear when the battery is moved.
- Know where the eyewash station is located.
- Know where the first aid kit is located.
Carbon Monoxide Awareness
Powered industrial trucks with internal combustion engines produce carbon monoxide (CO), an odorless,
colorless, and deadly gas produced by the incomplete burning of any material that contains carbon. These
materials include gasoline, natural gas, propane, coal, and wood. The most common source of CO is the internal
combustion engine. Trucks, cars, forklifts, floor polishers, pressure washers, or any other machine powered by
fossil fuels generates CO.
If inhaled, CO restricts the ability of your blood system to carry oxygen to the body tissues that need it.
Overexposure combined with less oxygen results in carbon monoxide poisoning. Mild poisoning can result in
headaches, tightness in the chest, dizziness, drowsiness, inattention, fatigue, flushed face, or nausea. If you
continue exposure lack of coordination, confusion, weakness, or loss of consciousness may result. A heart

Page 344
ABG
condition, smoking, taking drugs or alcohol, and pregnancy can aggravate CO poisoning. Physical activity, too, can
make a situation worse. That’s because your body needs more oxygen to exert itself. Severe poisoning can kill you
within minutes, sometimes without warning symptoms. The more CO there is in the air and the longer the
exposure, the greater the danger.
DEFINITION OF CO: an odorless, colorless, and deadly gas common in many workplaces and produced by the
incomplete burning of any material that contains carbon. These materials include gasoline, natural gas, propane,
coal, and wood. The most common source of CO is the internal combustion engine. Trucks, cars, forklifts, floor
polishers, pressure washers, or any other machine powered by fossil fuels generates CO.
SYMPTOMS OF CO POISONING
If inhaled, CO restricts the ability of your blood system to carry oxygen to the body tissues which need it.
Overexposure combined with less oxygen results in carbon monoxide poisoning. Mild poisoning can result in
headaches, tightness in the chest, dizziness, drowsiness, inattention, fatigue, flushed face, or nausea. If you
continue exposure lack of coordination, confusion, weakness, or loss of consciousness may result. A heart
condition, smoking, taking drugs or alcohol, and pregnancy can aggravate CO poisoning. Physical activity, too, can
make a situation worse. That’s because your body needs more oxygen to exert itself. Severe poisoning can kill you
within minutes, sometimes without warning symptoms. The more CO there is in the air and the longer the
exposure, the greater the danger.
ABG will make every attempt to prevent CO poisoning. When feasible and practical the company will:
- Install an effective ventilation system in place if powered industrial trucks are used indoors;
- Purchase trucks which comply with national safety standards;
- Ensure that powered industrial trucks are maintained in good order. Be sure to address the carburetor, air
cleaner, and ignition timing;
- Only allow qualified persons to modify powered industrial trucks but only if approved by the
manufacturer;
- Use original parts instead of replacement parts when a new part is needed;
- Switch from fossil fuel-powered to battery-powered trucks where possible;
- Use fuels with high octane levels so that fuels will burn slower and more efficiently;
- Try a CO emissions controller to be added to the fuel system to control the mixture of fuel and air. CO
controller parts include a computer control box, a warning light, an oxygen sensor, and a solenoid air
valve;
- Add a catalytic converter to truck exhaust systems, but only if trucks are used continually during the shift
(if converter temperature does not rise above operating temperature, the converter will fail);
- Install CO monitors and regularly test air levels;
- Provides initial and periodic medical exams for exposed workers and instructs workers in the hazards of
CO.

Page 345
ABG
NOTE: According to a letter of interpretation dated 1/18/94 about ASME/ANSI B56.1-1988, if a powered industrial
truck is equipped with a seat belt or other restraining device, the operator must use these devices. This will
reduce the risk of entrapment of the head and torso between the truck and the ground.
All operators required to wear this equipment are trained:
- When PPE is necessary;

- What PPE is necessary;
- How to properly put on, take off, adjust, and wear PPE;
- Limitations of the PPE; and
- Proper care, maintenance, useful life, and disposal of PPE.
See the Written Personal Protective Equipment Program for more details.
Pedestrians
Because powered industrial trucks are typically used near pedestrians, we require both pedestrians and powered
industrial truck operators to watch out for each other.
All powered industrial truck operators must:
- Yield the right of way to pedestrians and emergency vehicles.

- Sound the horn or other audible warning device at all intersections and corners to warn pedestrians.
- When backing up pivot at the waist and inspect the area of operation to the rear of the powered
industrial truck, watching for obstructions and pedestrians and blow the horn to alert any pedestrians
that may or may not be visible.
- When retrieving a load and before backing up, visually inspect the rear area of the powered industrial
truck to ensure no pedestrians are behind or around the unit.
- Never allow riders on any powered industrial truck.
- Never engage in horseplay.
- Do not allow pedestrians to walk under loads.
- Do not allow anyone to place their arms or legs between the uprights of the mast or outside the running
lines of the truck.
- Do not drive trucks up to anyone standing in front of a bench or other fixed object.
All pedestrians must:
- Use designated pedestrian walkways.

- Look out for powered industrial trucks and give them the right of way.
- Listen for horns and other warning devices.
- Use any provided mirrors to assist with vision around corners.

Page 346
ABG
- Do not walk in front of, behind, or beside a powered industrial truck.

- Never walk or stand under a raised load.
- Do not hitch a ride on a powered industrial truck.
Maintenance
The Maintenance Department completes a receiving or delivery inspection whenever our company purchases
powered industrial trucks, and they perform the recommended “breaking in” inspections and maintenance.
Area Supervisors or the Forklift Operator follow(s) the manufacturer’s operator instruction manual for daily or
weekly maintenance.
Periodic maintenance (those completed monthly, every 6 months, or annually) is done by a factory-trained expert
or a dealer. Maintenance Department retains all maintenance records.
Appendices
The following documents have been attached to this written program:
- Daily Inspection Checklist

- Monthly Inspection Checklist
- Forklift Operator’s Initial Certification
- Forklift Operator’s Re-Evaluation Certification

Page 347
Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment: Forklift
Company Name Date

Equipment No. Serial No.
Type of Equipment Model No.
Make/Model Location
Hours Project No./Contract No.
Initial/Date Initial/Date Initial/Date Initial/Date Initial/Date
Good Repair N/A Good Repair N/A Good Repair N/A Good Repair N/A Good Repair N/A
1. GENERAL APPEARANCE
Paint
Panels/Hood/Fenders, etc.
Tires/Wheel Front
Tires/Wheel Rear
Tracks and Pads
Undercarriage
Lights
2. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Belts
Hoses, Lines
Fan and Shroud
Leaks
Oil Levels/Condition
Coolant - Level - Protection
Air Intake System
Air Filter Element
Exhaust System
Electrical Components
Battery/Condition and Cables
Cracks
Loose Bolts, Mounts
Hydraulic Oil Level & Condition

3. UNDERSIDE
Cracks
Leaks
Belly Pans
Fluid Levels
Drive Train
Loose Bolts, Mounts

Steering Linkage
Axles
Brake Pads
Trunnion
4. OPERATOR’S POSITION
Gauges and Alarms
Switches
All Controls for Operator
Decals and Labels
Lights
Horn
Parking Brake
Engine Condition
- Minor Repair
- Major Repair
- Smoking or Blow By
- Oil Pressure
- Transmission
- Pressure
4. OPERATOR’S POSITION (cont.)
- Speeds
- Forward and Reverse
Glass and Mirrors
Backup Alarm
Fire Extinguisher
5. FORKLIFT
Forks
Mast
Structural Condition
Lift Capacity Displayed
6. OTHER
Operator’s Manual
Parts Book
Accessories
Structural Welds/Condition

SIGNATURES:
Inspected By: Estimated Hours to Repair:
Approved By:

Forklift Truck Operators Training Course – Written Test
NAME: ________________________________________ JOB NO. ___________________

SS#: _________________________ LOCATION: ________________
DATE: _____________
Note: The following is a group of questions designed to evaluate the skill level in your craft. This test does not have an affect on
your employment, but will assist us in determining the position most suited to your skill level. (Circle the letter of the correct answer
or fill in the blanks.)
1. A lift truck-training program will help us:
a. Reduce maintenance costs.

b. Increase efficiency.
c. Reduce accidents.
d. All of the above.
2. The rear end steering of forklift trucks:
a. Causes the rear end to swing more than an auto.

b. Is about the same as an auto.
c. The rear end swings less than an auto.
d. Allows the truck to take sharp turns at high speeds.
3. Lift Trucks should be inspected:
a. Weekly.
b. Daily.
c. When they start to develop trouble.
4. From a safety standpoint, one of the most serious truck defects is:
a. Brake failure.
b. Low fuel or battery charge.
c. Broken horn.
d. Worn tires.
5. The truck horn should be used:
a. To warn pedestrians and other traffic at intersections and blind corners.

b. To make workers get out of your path when you get too close to them.
c. To let your supervisor know that you are busy.
d. To let everyone know you have the right of way.

TRUE OR FALSE (Circle T or F, whichever is more correct.)
T F 1. The maximum allowable load should be shown on the nameplate of the truck.
T F 2. The load should not be handled if it is so unstable or so insecure that it might come loose being moved.
T F 3. It is good practice to keep the load back against the truck mast as much as possible.
T F 4. Violation of safety rules, near misses and occasional damage to stock probably indicates a high accident
and maintenance rate.
T F 5. Repairs to industrial trucks should be made only by persons trained and authorized to make them.
T F 6. If you see a loose object in your path it is better to remove it or avoid it than to run over it.
T F 7. Slippery spots caused by oil and water may increase braking distance or cause loss of steering control.
T F 8. If you are not able to see because of a large load in front of you, it is better to drive backwards that to try
to
see around it on one side.
T F 9. If they ask, maintenance men or repairmen may be lifted on the forks to reach their work.
T F 10. Under no conditions should anyone be permitted under the elevated forks or loads.
T F 11. When loading a highway truck or trailer, its wheels should be chocked or blocked even though the driver
says he set the brakes.
T F 12. Smoking is permissible in refueling areas providing you see no leaking fuel.
T F 13. Parked trucks should never block fire equipment, fire doors or exits.
T F 14. A careful driver may hang his legs outside the truck as long as he is protected by a wide load.
T F 15. A professional operator checks each load for stability before moving it.
T F 16. Passing another truck in a narrow aisle is safe if it is going no more than eight (8) miles per hour.
T F 17. When going through doorways and under pipes, an operator must know clearance of large
elevated loads.
T F 18. A really proficient driver should demonstrate his ability by turning corners as quickly as possible.
T F 19. It is permissible to let another person operate your truck if he says he knows how.
T F 20. When traveling with a load the mast should be tilted back.

FORKLIFT TRUCK OPERATOR TRAINING COURSE
ANSWER KEY
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1. D
2. A
3. B
4. A
5. A
TRUE OR FALSE
1. T 11. T
2. T 12. F
3. T 13. T
4. T 14. F
5. T 15. T
6. T 16. F
7. T 17. T
8. T 18. F
9. F 19. F
10. T 20. T
FORKLIFT TRUCK OPERATOR

GRADING SCALE
# Wrong Percentile
0 100
1 96
2 92
3 88
4 84
5 80
6 76
7 72
8 68
FORKLIFT TRUCK OPERATOR PERFORMANCE TEST
NAME: JOB NO.

SS#: LOCATION
DATE: ______________________
1. Operator’s ability to perform check-sheet inspection for safe operation of truck prior to use.

Uses check-sheet satisfactorily
Failed to check safety item
2. Proper use of controls (understand proper technique and proper direction of movement of control to get desired direction
of movement.
a. Clutch operation. Yes No

b. Inching control (auto transmission) . Yes No
c. Tilt control. Yes No
d. Lift control. Yes No
e. Attachment controls. Yes No
f. Steering techniques for type of machine being used by operator. Yes No
g. Proper positioning of all controls, switches, parking
brakes when leaving machine unattended. Yes No
h. Service brake. Yes No
i. Parking brake. Yes No
3. Maneuvering skills.
a. Smooth starting and stopping.
Acceptable Needs practice Poor control
b. Sharp turns forward and reverse.
Proper speed. Yes No

Looks in direction of travel. Yes No
Carries fork low. Yes No
Clears obstacles by safe distance. Yes No
4. Selecting loads.
a. Proper capacity for truck used. Yes No

b. Proper size load for visibility and safety of handling. Yes No
c. Load tilted back against backrest. Yes No
d. Carries load low (just high enough to clear
floor obstacles) Yes No
5. Driving with load.
a. Smooth starting and stopping. Yes No

b. Proper speed. Yes No
c. Sounds horn at intersection corners. Yes No
d. Keeps to the right in aisles used for two-way traffic. Yes No
e. Travels at least three lengths behind other vehicles. Yes No
f. Handles load in manner to prevent product damage. Yes No
6. Stacking.
a. Approaches load squarely. Yes No

b. Stacks straight and squarely. Yes No
c. Does not tier too high. Yes No
d. Deposits load safely; does not use excessive tilt action. Yes No
e. When selecting top load for pickup, uses proper
form spread for load. Yes No

f. Removes load and lowers to safe level before making
turn to proceed in direction of desired travel. Yes No
ADD ANYTHING THAT MAY PERTAIN TO YOUR PARTICULAR PROJECT ON WHICH YOU MAY WANT TO TEST YOUR OPERATORS’
PERFORMANCE.
ABG
FORK TRUCK OPERATOR PERMIT
Name:
Employee No.:
Issued By:
IS QUALIFIED TO OPERATE: RESTRICTIONS:
Fork Truck None

JLG Corr. Lenses
Other
Expires
Operator’s Signature:
Instructor’s Signature:
JLG BOOM LIFT SAFE OPERATION AND QUALIFICATION QUIZ
NAME: ____________________________________ JOB NO. ___________________

SS#: ____________________________ LOCATION ________________
DATE: __________________
Note: The following is a group of questions designed to evaluate your knowledge in the safe operation of this specific manned
mechanical equipment. This questionnaire does not have effect on your employment, but will assist us in determining the position
most suited to your skill level.
1. Where can the maximum platform capacity ratings always be found on a JLG Lift?
a. Unit serial number plate

b. On the unit Chassis

c. In the operation and safety handbook
d. At the ground control station
2. You should not accept responsibility for the operation of a JLG boom lift until
a. You are given the ignition key

b. You have been properly trained and read and understood the operator’s manual.
c. You check that the fuel tank is full
d. You have five years experience on the unit
3. What is the minimum clearance distance to be maintained between a JLG boom lift and an energized power line?
a. 10 ft. up to 5,000 volts

b. 50 ft. up to 10,000 volts
c. 50 ft. up to 30,000 volts
d. 10 ft. up to 50,000 volts
4. What can be used to extend the maximum reach of a JLG boom lift?
a. Scaffolding
b. Nothing
c. A stepladder, if properly secured
d. A spruce 2x4 and two barrels
5. When using a safety harness on a JLG boom lift, the belt should be worn around the waist with one end of the lanyard
attached to the designated attach point on the platform and the other to the belt where?
a. At your side
b. Doesn’t matter where
c. At the center of your back
d. At the center of your front
6. What is the primary safety factor in operating a JLG boom lift?
a. The foot Switch

b. The operator
c. The safety belt
d. 2 to 1 margin of stability

7. What is the first thing to be done if a malfunction of the JLG boom lift occurs?
a. Yell for help

b. Stop the unit
c. Check the hydraulic oil
d. Park the unit
8. If you put to much load in the basket of a JLG boom lift, you may
a. Tip the unit over

b. Cause the boom of the unit to bend
c. Lose your job
d. All the above
9. The auxiliary power system of a JLG boom lift should be used
a. To make the unit go faster

b. Only if the batteries are dead
c. Only in an emergency
d. Only if more than one person is in the basket
10. You should take time to read the warning decals on a JLG boom lift because
a. They will tell you how to start the unit

b. OSHA requires that you do
c. They may contain information, which may save your life
d. Both a. and b. above

ABG
JLG Boom Lift Safe Operation and Qualifications Quiz
JLG Boom Lift Safe Operation and Qualifications Quiz
TRUE OR FALSE
11. Tire pressure does not affect the stability of the JLG Boom Lift. T F
12. On a JLG Boom Lift, all lift functions can be operated from the T F
ground control station.
13 A safety harness with an appropriate lanyard must be worn T F

when operating the JLG boom lift.
14. Anything can be lifted with the JLG Boom Lift as long as long as T F
the lift capacity is not exceeded.
15. The boom of a JLG Boom Lift can be lifted above horizontal only T F
if the unit is on a smooth, level and firm surface.
16. On all JLG HA models, the boom must be fully raised before T F
telescoping the tower boom.
17. JLG Boom Lifts are equipped with hi-engine, hi-drive switch, which T F
allows the unit to travel faster with the boom above horizontal.
18. JLG Boom Lifts are not insulated against electrical shock, should T F
they contact an energized electrical line.
19. If a JLG Boom Lift becomes stuck while traveling on soft ground, T F
the boom should be used to release the unit.
20. On JLG Boom Lifts with multiple capacity ratings, you can lift T F
maximum capacity even if the capacity indicator is broken.

ABG
ABG Bundle – Straddle Carrier Operator Quiz
JLG BOOM LIFT

QUALIFICATION QUIZ
Answer Key
1. A 11. F
2. B 12. T
3. D 13. T
4. B 14. F
5. C 15. T
6. B 16. T
7. B 17. F
8. D 18. T
9. C 19. F
10. C 20. F
JLG BOOM LIFT

QUALIFICATION QUIZ
GRADE SCALE
# Wrong Percentile
0 100
1 95
2 90
3 85
4 80
5 75
6 70
7 65
8 60

ABG
ABG- Bundle – Straddle Carrier Operator Quiz
Name Job No.
SS# Location
Date
1. What three things should an operator do at the start of each shift prior to operating the straddle carrier?
1.
2.
3.
2. If the bundle is too heavy and the lift will not hold, it’s okay to keep the lift engaged for a short distance.
True or False
3. From a safety standpoint, one of the most serious carrier defects is:

ABG
1 - brake failure
2 - low fuel
3 - broken horn
4. The straddle carrier is higher and bigger than most other vehicles, so it always has the right of way.
True or false
5. At all times when operating, the operator must have his or her seat belt secured and fastened.
True or false
6. The straddle carrier is very high, therefore the possibility of hitting low pipe racks and overhead obstructions, such as
power lines, and fixed plant equipment is very great and a hazard.
True or false

ABG
GAS HAZARDS
GAS HAZARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................343
Training Requirements...................................................................................................................................344
Documentation..................................................................................................................................................344
Personal gas detectors...................................................................................................................................344
Calibrations of gas monitors..........................................................................................................................345
Bump test.......................................................................................................................................................345
Site specific contingency/emergency plan.....................................................................................................345

Page 362
ABG
GAS HAZARDS
Purpose
ABG performs services within the Petrochemical and Refining industry as well as the Power Utility Companies.
During the course and scope of performing this work, ABG employees may encounter gases which could be
hazardous to their health. This procedure addresses General Gas Hazard Awareness training. Training must be
provided prior to initial assignment and annually thereafter.
Training Requirements
As a minimum, training will include gas characteristics, health effects and personal protection equipment.
1. Location of alarm stations-Each facility ABG works in will have specific guidelines as to what alarms
represent and at what interval testing will be done.
2. Gas monitoring equipment-Portable gas detectors will be provided to each employee at no cost and are
required to be worn in the breathing zone in those work sites that require them. In addition, most units
that ABG employees work in have fixed gas detectors and training is provided in the site specific
orientation.
3. Gas alarms-When gas alarms sound, ABG employees are to follow the evacuation procedure outlined by
the owner. ABG employees must know the primary as well as the secondary assembly area when alarms
are sounded.
4. Gas Hazards-Due to the different types of gasses present in the work place, ABG employees are provided
with the MSDS for all gases, on the job site. A review of the MSDS will provide information regarding
characteristics of gases, oxygen deficiency, oxygen or nitrogen enrichment, carbon monoxide and
hydrogen sulfide. Information on the signs and symptoms of overexposure will also be found in the MSDS.
5. Personal rescue procedure-As outlined in the site specific orientation, ABG employees are subject to self
rescue if capable to safely do so. Under no circumstances should a rescue of anyone else be attempted
without proper rescue training.
6. Use and care of self contained breathing apparatus -ABG will train its employees on the use of SCBA
when and where required. The training will include the donning and doffing of the SCBA along with its
limitations. Under no circumstance will ABG employees use SCBA other than for escape only.
7. Evacuation procedure-ABG employees are required to follow the owners’ evacuation plan when
necessary. The employee should know where to go and follow the direction of the owner agents’
commands.
8. Staging Area-Staging areas are set by the owners and communicated during site orientation. ABG
employees are to know where these locations are and must report to either the Primary or Secondary
staging area in an evacuation.
Documentation
Gas Hazard Awareness training will be documented and made available for review to properly identified
owners or agents. The date, location, name, address, phone number and craft will be identified in the records.

Page 363
ABG
GAS HAZARDS
Personal gas detectors

Each ABG employee will be issued a personal gas detector for high hazard areas at the start of the project. It
is their responsibility to wear and maintain this equipment. Should any become inoperable, the old unit must
be turned in and a new one will be issued.
Calibrations of gas monitors

All gas monitors capable of calibration will be calibrated per manufacturer’s recommendation. A current
calibration sticker will be affixed to the monitor indicating the date of the last calibration. Monitors with
expired dates (1 month) will be recalibrated and so noted with a new sticker.
Bump test
Prior to each shift and after any gas release the monitor will be bump tested to ensure that the system is
working properly and the alarm is functional.
Site specific contingency/emergency plan

ABG employees will be made aware of the owner’s contingency plan which includes evacuation routes and
alarms. When and where required, ABG employees will participate in scheduled emergency evacuation drills
and practice self rescue procedures.

Page 364
ABG
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE....................................................................................................................................................................346
SCOPE 347
APPLICATION..............................................................................................................................................................347
DEFINITIONS...............................................................................................................................................................347
1.0 SAFETY TOPICS.................................................................................................................................................347
2.0 HIERARCHY OF CONTROLS.................................................................................................................................347
3.0 POSTING REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................348
4.0 PROJECT HSE BOOKLET......................................................................................................................................348
5.0 SAFETY COMMITTEES........................................................................................................................................348
6.0 TOOLBOX MEETINGS.........................................................................................................................................349
7.0 COMPETENT PERSON DESIGNATIONS.................................................................................................................349
8.0 OPERATION OF CELLULAR TELEPHONES..............................................................................................................350
9.0 PERSONAL JEWELRY..........................................................................................................................................351
10.0 TOOL/EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS...................................................................................................................351
11.0 RESOLVING HSE CONCERNS AND ISSUES.............................................................................................................351
12.0 ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE...................................................................................................................351
13.0 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS.......................................................................................................................352
14.0 BROWNFIELD oPERATIONs lIAISON AND INTEGRATION........................................................................................352
15.0 HANDOVER REPORT..........................................................................................................................................352
16.0 EXCLUSIONS.....................................................................................................................................................353
17.0 REFERENCES.....................................................................................................................................................353
18.0 ATTACHMENTS.................................................................................................................................................353

Page 365
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies topics that are not contained in a stand-alone practice but are important to a successful and
comprehensive health, safety, and environmental (HSE) program.
SCOPE
 Safety Topics
 Hierarchy of Controls
 Posting Requirements
 Project HSE Booklet
 Safety Committees
 Toolbox Meetings
 Competent Person Designations
 Operation of Cellular Telephones
 Personal Jewelry
 Tool/Equipment Modifications
 Resolving HSE Concerns and Issues
 Environmental Tobacco Smoke
 Adverse Weather Conditions
 Brownfield Operations Liaison and Integration
 Handover Report
 Exclusions
APPLICATION
This practice applies to all work activities and employees under the control of ABG and its subcontractors.
DEFINITIONS
working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has
authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Qualified Person — One who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who
by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve
or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
SAFETY TOPICS
All meetings with more than 4 attendees will commence with a Safety topic. The topic will be presented by an attendee
nominated by the leader or a volunteer and will be an item relevant to the project. The topic may be work or home-related.
1.0 HIERARCHY OF CONTROLS
Hazards will be controlled by the following hierarchy:

 Substitution
 Engineering controls, where technically feasible
 Administrative controls
 Personal protective equipment (PPE)

Page 366
ABG
2.0 POSTING REQUIREMENTS
The following safety-related notices, forms, and signs must be posted on company information bulletin boards wherever
employees normally congregate:
 Emergency telephone numbers/contact persons
 Workers’ compensation information specified by state requirements
 Required state/federal/in-country posters (such as Attachment 01)
3.0 PROJECT HSE BOOKLET
A Project HSE Booklet will be available for all project employees and visitors at the commencement of field activities. The
contents of the booklet will include as a minimum:
 HSE Policy and Principles
 General HSE requirements
 Project and industry-specific HSE rules
 Discipline
 Fitness for work
 General rules regarding specific equipment and work practices
 Fire and emergency
 Personal protective equipment
 First aid
 Environmental protection
 Security
4.0 SAFETY COMMITTEES
Several clients (such as the Department of State) routinely require the establishment and continuous, positive function of a
project/site HSE committee. Additionally, several OSHA state plans (such as Oregon) require a safety committee for
construction projects/sites. In such cases, the contractually-imposed standards may prescribe the membership
responsibilities, authority, duties, and administration of the committee. In the absence of prescriptive standards, ABG Project
HSE and ABG Project/Construction Management will determine the charter for the safety committee.
On projects/sites where the requirement for a safety committee is not imposed, ABG Corporate HSE recommends that
a safety committee be established at the discretion of the Project Director/Manager.
The Project HSE Committee may be comprised as follows:
 Project/Construction Manager (chairperson)
 HSE Manager/Representative
 Project employee representatives
 Contractor management nominees
 Contractor employee representatives
The project may be divided into several areas. Each area will have an HSE subcommittee that will meet at least monthly.
Each subcommittee will be represented on the Project HSE Committee.
The Project HSE Committee will meet monthly.
Examples of Project HSE Committee functions are:

Page 367
ABG
 Act in an advisory capacity.

 Create and maintain an active interest in project HSE and assist in reducing work injuries,
work-related illnesses, environmental impacts, and hazards.
 Consider measures for the training and education in, and promotion of, HSE management
and make recommendations in relation to those measures.
 Review standards, rules, and procedures relating to HSE that are to be carried out or
complied with at the workplace and suggest enhancements.
 Review the circumstances surrounding recent work injuries, work-related illnesses, and
environmental workplace incidents and make such recommendations as the Committee
considers desirable.
 Review planned site inspections and audits and make recommendations to correct
unsatisfactory levels of performance.
 Initiate programs aimed at arousing and maintaining interest in the workplace HSE program.
 Maintain records of meetings including any recommendations.
A record of attendees and of matters discussed will be kept for all Project HSE Committee meetings. The chairperson of each
meeting is responsible for maintaining records and distributing records to members of the Committee and each work group
and posting on project HSE notice boards.
5.0 TOOLBOX MEETINGS
Toolbox meetings to discuss workplace HSE issues will be conducted by the immediate supervisor for his/her individual work
groups. Toolbox meetings will be held at least weekly and will be attended by all members of the work group.
The agenda for toolbox meetings will be directed toward the activities and tasks associated with the work group’s activities.
Typically, such agenda items may include:
 Safety topic
 Follow-up items raised at previous Toolbox Meetings
 Review of accidents/near misses
 Follow-up discussion of inspections/audits
 Items of general HSE importance to the project
 Items of HSE interest to the work group
 HSE Policy
 HSE initiatives and review of job safety analyses
 HSE performance
 Environmental aspects
The Project Manager will maintain minutes of toolbox meetings and lists of attendees.
6.0 COMPETENT PERSON DESIGNATIONS
Construction Managers, Project Managers, and Engineering Managers must designate Competent Persons and Qualified
Persons when required, and document on Form 000.653.F0310, Competent/Qualified Person Designations. Competent
Persons must be designated when the following activities are part of project/site or office operations:
 Aerial lift trainer
 Asbestos
 Cadmium
 Compressed air (tunneling)

Page 368
ABG
 Demolition
 Excavation, trenching, shoring
 Fall protection
 Ionizing radiation
 Ladders (portable)
 Lead abatement
 Rigging
 Roof work safety monitor
 Scaffolds
 Steel erection
Note: On projects/sites where the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual, EM 385-1-1, is imposed, Competent Persons must also be
designated for the following:
 Confined space entry

 Environmental management
 Hazardous materials usage
 Hearing protection/conservation
 Respiratory protection
 Roof inspection
 Safety manager
 Safety Supervisor
 Safety technician
 Safety trainer
Competent Persons may be designated for other activities using the same process.
Qualified Persons must be designated for the following:
 Concrete and masonry construction

 Crane maintenance and repair persons
 Excavation, trenching, and shoring design
 Fall protection system design
 Hoisting and rigging (personnel platform design)
 Scaffold design
7.0 OPERATION OF CELLULAR TELEPHONES
Cellular telephone operation requirement and/use limitations are applicable to all ABG employees, temporary employees,
subcontractor and lower-tier contractor personnel, and other third party personnel who operate company cars, industrial
vehicles, rentals, and personal vehicles while on ABG company business or on project/site property.
Cellular phones that must be hand-held to the ear to hear/speak should not be used by the vehicle operator while driving. In
an emergency or where a call must be made or answered using this type of phone by the vehicle operator, the operator
should pull off and stop at a safe location. It is recommended that vehicle operators not answer an incoming call; but, after
safely pulling over, dial the person back. “Hands-free,” voice-operated or speed-dial phones with a speaker or single earpiece
capability may be used by the vehicle operator while driving, with discretion, depending on an assessment of driving

Page 369
ABG
conditions. Even with the voice-activated, hands-free devices, long or extended phone conversations while driving are
discouraged.
Note: Several states in the United States of America (USA), as well as communities around the
world, have laws in force prohibiting the use of hand-held cellular telephones. In such
states/communities, ABG will also prohibit such use (whether the offense is considered a
first or second/subsequent level violation).
8.0 PERSONAL JEWELRY
Finger rings, bracelets, necklaces, and dangling-type jewelry (such as earrings) should not be worn. Dangling earrings are
defined as an earring that extends outside of or below the earlobe perimeter.
Exception: Medic alert bracelets or necklaces.
Electrical Engineering, Maintenance Electrical employees, or other classifications performing as primary duties electrical work
in panels or on high-voltage systems must not wear any type of metal wristband.
9.0 TOOL/EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS
No modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of tools or equipment may be made without the
manufacturer’s written approval. If the manufacturer does not approve modifications or changes, written approval from a
registered professional engineer may be considered. If such modifications or changes are made, the capacity, operation, and
maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals must be changed accordingly.
10.0 RESOLVING HSE CONCERNS AND ISSUES
All employees and contractor personnel are give the opportunity to voice concerns and issues without fear of reprisal.
Employees should discuss HSE issues and concerns with their immediate supervisor, as the issues and concerns become
apparent. These discussions may take place during pre-job briefings, formal or informal walkthroughs, safety meetings, or
may be a scheduled meeting with the supervisor.
Employees may contact their safety committee members/representative at any time to help resolve safety concerns.
Employees may contact Project HSE at any time to discuss HSE concerns. Such concerns may be provided orally, or in writing
using Form 000.653.F0275, Hazardous Elimination Form, or equal. Employees may request confidentiality or anonymity,
which will be honored.
Personal stop-work authority is granted to and implemented as required by ABG employees and supported by all levels of
supervision and management. (Subcontractor employees have stop-work authority in any imminent danger situation, unless
their employer grants them full stop-work authority.)
Concerns may be communicated to ABG management through the confidential Ethics Hotline (1-800-223-1544).
Resolution of employee HSE concerns should be communicated to the employee(s).
If disagreement exists between the employee and the supervisor as to whether or not a hazard exists, or if there is
disagreement over what rectification measures should be taken, the process shown in Attachment 02, Reporting and
Resolving HSE Issues Flowchart, will be followed:
 During the course of the resolution process an employee may be reassigned to other duties
not affected by the reported hazard.
 Should a resolution not be agreed to, elevate the issue/concern to the next level of
management or notify the HSE Representative.

Page 370
ABG
11.0 ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE
Smoking tobacco is prohibited indoors, unless smoking areas are specifically designated and allowed under local regulations.
Smoking is prohibited in outdoor locations as follows:
 Close to windows and doors
 Close to air intakes
 Other openings that may allow airflow into the building(s)
Smoking tobacco is prohibited in vehicles and equipment associated with the project/site and office.
12.0 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
Projects/sites must establish a process to receive “adverse weather condition” warnings, and to communicate actions to
employees and contractor personnel on the project/site.
Projects/sites subject to ice, snow, rain, wind, or other adverse weather conditions must address the protection of employees
and equipment on the pre-job planning documents, including area-specific requirements.
13.0 BROWNFIELD OPERATIONS LIAISON AND INTEGRATION
When work is undertaken in live or operational environs of facilities, it is critical that proposed work is scheduled,
coordinated, and approved by all parties concerned. The parties should include the following:
 Operations team
 Project/site leadership team, including but not limited to:
 Construction Manager
 HSE Representative
 Superintendents, inspectors, and engineers
 Contractor leadership team
 Subcontractor leadership team
 Emergency personnel, including but not limited to:
 Emergency services representative(s)
 Project/site operations representative
The above personnel must schedule regular meetings in order to schedule and coordinate plant operations and vessel
movements.
Where the client has procedures in place that meet or exceed these minimum requirements, generally the client’s
procedures will be used.
14.0 HANDOVER REPORT
Supervisors must report the current day’s activities and outstanding issues to their replacement supervisors if they have not
been able to correct the hazard or issues themselves.
A handover report should include the following as applicable:
Time on and off site Employees accounted for
Progress (forecast and actual) HSE issues unresolved
HSE issues resolved Ongoing hot work
Permits issued Medical services – if any

Page 371
ABG
State of emergencies – if any Equipment issues unresolved

Equipment issues resolved Area report general
Area report (specific)
Once presented and understood, the handover report will be signed off by both supervisors. Copies will be maintained in the
applicable management office (contractor or ABG).
The oncoming supervisor then becomes responsible for resolution of outstanding or unresolved issues during his shift. If
disagreement on the safety of the workplace exists between supervisors during the handover, the next higher manager will
resolve the issue/assign responsibilities before work commences, if possible.
During the course of the next higher manager resolving handover issues, employees may complete alternate duties in areas
not affected.
Should a resolution not be achieved by the next higher manager, he/she should elevate the issue to his/her manager, and so
on up the chain-of-command.
15.0 EXCLUSIONS
In the unusual circumstance where a safety requirement or assignment is not feasible, inappropriate for the specific and
unique situation, or presents a greater risk to the employee, a written justification for exclusion may be submitted to the
supervisor responsible for the work and the HSE Representative for review.
A written justification from a contractor requires additional approval of the assigned contracts engineer/administrator.
Once the justification is approved, the exclusion is included in the Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Form 000.653.F0100, or Safety
Task Assignment (STA), Form 000.653.F0101, as applicable, and all affected employees are informed during a pre-job briefing.
The pre-job briefing is documented in accordance with Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task Planning/ Risk Analysis.
16.0 REFERENCES

Forms
000.653.F0310 Competent/Qualified Person Designations
17.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 HSE Information Poster
Attachment 02 Reporting and Resolving HSE Issues Flowchart

Page 372
ABG
GRADING GUARDRAILS & FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL
GRADING, GUARDRAILS & FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................354
SCOPE355
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................355
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................355
PERMITS.................................................................................................................................................................356
Permit to Work...................................................................................................................................................356
Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal......................................................................................................356
Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Permit Issuer Training and Authorization............................................356
GRATING AND FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL/REINSTALLING.........................................................................................357
Removal.............................................................................................................................................................357
Reinstalling.........................................................................................................................................................357
REFERENCES...........................................................................................................................................................358

Page 373
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the requirements for removing grating, floor plate, and guardrails, and protecting
personnel from potential fall hazards as a result.
SCOPE
 Permits
 Grating and Floor Plate Removal/Reinstalling
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
A Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Checklist and Permit (Form 000.653.F0170) must be completed and
approved before any grating, floor plate, or guardrail or clamp, clip, or other retaining piece is loosened, adjusted,
modified, or removed (whether partial or fully).
Supervision must ensure that removal of grating, floor plate, or guardrail is necessary to perform the task. Once it
is established that removal is necessary, supervision must review the work to minimize the amount of grating,
floor plate, and/or guardrail to be removed.
Supervisors, together with the HSE Representative, must review the actual work location to confirm that removal
of the grating, floor plate, or guardrail is the only way to perform the task safely.
Only those crafts/trades that are specifically trained to perform such work (such as “structural steel workers”) will
be allowed to remove/replace grating, floor plate, and guardrail.
Fall protection must be provided for those working inside a barricade, as required by Practice 000.653.3001.
No opening must ever be left unguarded … post a watch if necessary.
When working in the area of removed grating or floor plate, ensure adequate lighting is provided to illuminate the
opening.
Warn and inform other personnel in the area of the removed grating or floor plate.
All grating or floor plate must either be reinstalled at the completion of the work task or at the end of the shift, or
a floor hole cover is installed that meets the requirements of section 3.1. No opening must remain beyond the
end of a shift, unless a new permit is obtained.
General rules for handling floor grating and floor plate include the following:
 Comply with all building, area, and site safety rules.

Page 374
ABG
 Wear the minimum personal protective equipment (such as safety glasses, leather gloves, and toe
protection).
 Use safety harness and life lines as required by Practice 000.653.3001, Fall Protection.
 Determine the weight of the item to be lifted before attempting the lift.
 Ensure the appropriate lifting tools/equipment will be used; do not use hands unless hand-holds or
handles are provided.
 Avoid placing hands near the opening of grating, floor plate, decking, or manhole covers when removing
or replacing them.
 Be alert for pinch points.
 Request assistance in lifting when necessary, then lift together and coordinate movements carefully.
 Maintain proper footing when prying or lifting.
 Be aware of potentially unsafe conditions that may exist if a pry/lifting bar should slip.
Barricaded areas will be large enough to maintain adequate work area space and good housekeeping practices in
accordance with Practice 000.653.3300, Housekeeping.
Permanent lifting handles must be installed if grating or floor plate is routinely removed for maintenance access.
Floor penetrations will be adequately protected with “kick plates.”
PERMITS
Permit to Work
If the permit to work process is in use, a Permit to Work must be obtained (Form 000.653.F0181) in accordance
with Practice 000.653.1302, Permit to Work.
Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal
Before grating, floor plate, or guardrail can be removed, a Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Checklist and
Permit will be completed by the supervisor and the required approvals obtained. A copy of the checklist and
permit must be placed in the general area where the grating/floor plate/guardrail is removed, with the original
filed in the project office.
The requirements of this permit must be addressed during the pre-task safety meeting held with all involved
employees before work commences.
Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Permit Issuer Training and Authorization
The appointment and training of Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Authorized Permit Issuers is similar to
Permit to Work and Confined Space Entry Permit Authorized Permit Issuers (refer to Practice 000.653.1302).
However, in addition, they will have sound and thorough knowledge in matters relating to the preparation and
conduct of grating, floor plate, and guardrail removal. Practical experience in preparing grating/floor
plate/guardrail removal permits under guidance may be appropriate. Appointment is made in writing on Form
000.653.F0205, Authorized Permit Issuers, by the Project Manager.

Page 375
ABG
Note: When performing grating/floor plate/guardrail removal in an operating facility, it

is a common requirement to use the facility “grating/floor plate/guardrail removal
permit process” instead of the process described above.
GRATING AND FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL/REINSTALLING
Removal
A hazard checklist and Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Form 000.653.F0100, and a Safety Task Assignment (STA), Form
000.653.F0101, will be completed.
A piece of grating or floor plate will never be removed or left out without:
 installing a rigid barricade, guardrail, or equivalent, which will entirely encompass the opening, or
 properly covering the opening.
If a floor hole cover(s) is used, it must:

 Be constructed to adequately support without failure, at least twice the weight of any person(s) and/or
equipment to which the cover may be subjected
 Be cleated or secured by means of wire tie downs, clips, or other equivalent fastening method
 Visibly identify the hazard on the cover, DANGER – HOLE COVER – DO NOT REMOVE (refer to Practice
000.653.3301, Barricades, Signs, and Tags).
If rigid barricading or guardrail is used, it will:

 Be constructed of wood (2 inches by 4 inches/5.1 centimeters by 10.2 centimeters), angle iron or rigid
material of comparable strength, or a combined system of components capable of achieving the same level
of protection such as wire rope and stanchions
 Have a complete toprail (no voids)
 Have a toprail height of not less than 39 inches (99.1 centimeters) and not more than 42 inches
(106.9 centimeters) above the grate floor
 Have a complete midrail installed at a point midway between the top edge of the toprail and the grate
floor, with exception of the designated access point to the removed grate(s) opening
Employees working inside the barricaded area will wear appropriate fall protection.
The area below the intended opening (whether grating, floor plate, or guardrail removal) that may be affected by
the overhead hazard(s) will be barricaded and sign-posted to prevent access.
Reinstalling
The remaining grates/floor plates bordering the removed grate(s)/floor plate(s) opening must be protected from
movement or slippage. The existing grating/floor plate can be secured by wiring down, installing clips, or other
means capable of being secured.
Grating/floor plates must be set in an area so as not to create a tripping hazard or interfere with other contractors
or work activities.

Page 376
ABG
Stacks will be organized and uniform in accordance with floor-loading limits, and not present a safety hazard.
When reinstalling gratings and floor plates, ensure that the grating/floor plate is correctly positioned and
fastened.
After work has been completed and before the barricade is removed, all grating, floor plates, and guardrails must
be checked to verify that all clamps and clips have been secured.
REFERENCES

000.653.3300 Housekeeping
Forms:
000.653.F0170 Grating/Floor Plate/Guardrail Removal Checklist
and Permit
000.653.F0181 Permit to Work
000.653.F0205 Authorized Permit Issuers

Page 377
ABG
HAND AND / OR POWER TOOLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................360
SCOPE360
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................360
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................360
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................................360
ELECTRICALLY POWERED TOOLS.............................................................................................................................361
PNEUMATIC TOOLS................................................................................................................................................361
HYDRAULIC POWER TOOLS.....................................................................................................................................361
POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS...................................................................................................................................362
ABRASIVE WHEELS AND TOOLS..............................................................................................................................363
WOODWORKING TOOLS.........................................................................................................................................363
BANANA WEDGE – SAFE USE GUIDELINES..............................................................................................................363
Training..............................................................................................................................................................363
Proper Wedge Configuration..............................................................................................................................364
Inspection Procedures........................................................................................................................................364
Hierarchy of Controls.........................................................................................................................................364
Hazard Assessment / Pre Task Planning.............................................................................................................364
Personal Protective Equipment..........................................................................................................................364
Unprotected / Exposed Blade Cutting Devices.......................................................................................................364
GENERAL HAND TOOL SAFETY................................................................................................................................365
Portable (Power Operated) Tools & Equipment ................................................................................................365
Powder Actuated Tools......................................................................................................................................366
Machine Guarding..............................................................................................................................................366
Lockout Blockout Procedures.............................................................................................................................367
Electrical.............................................................................................................................................................367
ABG employees are prohibited from working on energized lines or equipment over 600 volts............................368
REFERENCES...........................................................................................................................................................369

Page 378
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for the selection, use, and maintenance of hand tools and portable,
power-operated tools, including those activated by an explosive powder charge.
SCOPE

 Electrically Powered Tools
 Pneumatic Tools
 Hydraulic Power Tools
 Powder-Actuated Tools
 Abrasive Wheels and Tools
 Woodworking Tools
 Jacks – Lever and Hatchet, Screw, and Hydraulic
 Chain Saws
 Banana Wedge – Safe Use Guidelines
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
No modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of tools will be made without the
manufacturer’s written approval. If the manufacturer will not approve modifications or changes, written approval
from a registered professional engineer or the ABG HSE Representative may be considered. If such modifications
or changes are made, the capacity, operation, and/or maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals must be
changed accordingly.
Supervisors will ensure that tools covered by this practice are:
 Inspected before use.
 Tagged or identified as defective and turned in for repair or replacement if found
defective.
 In conformance with manufacturer’s attachment and energy-level specifications.
 Equipped with required guards.
 Disconnected from their energy source when changing attachments or conducting
repairs/maintenance on the tool.
 Not hoisted or carried by attached hoses or electrical cords.
 Used with appropriate eye, face, hand, foot, hearing, and respiratory protection.

Page 379
ABG
 Connected to a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) when used in conjunction with

an extension cord or other temporary power source.
Supervisors will ensure that hand tools are maintained and used properly, and that:
 Wrenches with sprung jaws are not used.

 Impact tools such as drift pins, wedges, and chisels are kept free of mushroomed
heads.
 Portable power saws and grinders are equipped with approved blade or wheel
guards. Blades and wheels must have the proper rating and revolutions per minute
for the tool.
 Wooden handles of tools are kept free of splinters or cracks and are kept tight in the
tool.
 Employees using hand and power tools and exposed to the hazard of falling, flying,
abrasive, and splashing objects, or exposed to harmful dust, fumes, mists vapors, or
gases are provided with particular personal protective equipment necessary to
protect them from the hazard.
ELECTRICALLY POWERED TOOLS
Supervisors will ensure that portable electrical tools are:

 Double-insulated or grounded in accordance with Practice 000.653.3309, Electrical
Work Safety.
 UL-listed, 115 or 220 volts AC or AC/DC marked accordingly by the manufacturer.
 Equipped with a constant pressure switch that shuts off power when pressure is
released by the operator.
Note: Hand-held power grinders with wheels 2 inches (5.1 centimeters) or less in
diameter, and routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, scroll saws,
and jig saws with blade shanks 1/4 inch (0.6 centimeters) wide or less, may be
equipped with a positive “ON-OFF” switch.
PNEUMATIC TOOLS
Supervisors will ensure that portable pneumatic tools are equipped with:
 A tool retainer to prevent the tool from being ejected. Equip nailers or staplers that
operate at more than 690 kPa (100 psi) pressure and have automatic fastener feed
with a safety device on the muzzle to prevent unexpected ejection of the fasteners.
 Pressure reduction devices to prevent any hose with an inside diameter of 1/2 inch
(1.3 centimeters) or greater from whipping in the event of hose failure.
 “Deadman” switches.
 A positive means to secure the tool to the hose or whip to prevent the tool from
becoming accidentally expelled.

Page 380
ABG
HYDRAULIC POWER TOOLS
Fluids used in hydraulic powered tools will be fire-resistant fluids approved under Schedule 30 of the Bureau of
Mines.
POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS
Supervisors will ensure that:

 Operators of powder-actuated tools are qualified (and “licensed” if applicable) in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and this qualification is
documented.
 Powder-actuated tools and loads are locked in a container, stored in a safe place
when not in use, and are accessible only to authorized employees.
 Tools are operated in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Only
the types of fastener and powder loads recommended by the tool manufacturer are
used.
Note: Potential exposure to lead is assessed in accordance with Practice

000.653.2005, Lead Exposure.
Employees are responsible for the following:

 Before use, inspect and test the tool in accordance with the testing methods
recommended by the manufacturer to determine if it is in proper working condition.
 Know, to the extent possible, what is on the other side of material(s) being fastened.
 Before driving a fastener, check the line of fire to ensure that no one may be hurt if
the fastener penetrates completely through the work surface.
 Use with the correct shield, guard, and/or attachments specified by the
manufacturer.
 Fasteners are not to be driven into very hard or brittle materials; including cast iron,
glazed tile, hardened steel, glass block, natural rock, hollow tile, or face brick.
 Fasteners are not to be driven into easily penetrated materials or materials of
questionable resistance, unless backed by a material that prevents the fastener from
passing completely through the other side.
 Tools are not loaded until just before the intended firing time.
 Neither loaded nor empty tools are pointed at any person; hands are kept clear of
the open barrel end.
 The tool is held perpendicular to the work surface when fastening into any material,
except for specific applications recommended by the tool manufacturer.
 In the event of a misfire, the operator holds the tool firmly against the work surface
for a period of 30 seconds and then follows the explicit instructions set forth by the
tool manufacturer.
 A sign, at least 8 × 10 inches (20.3 x 25.4 centimeters) using boldface type at least
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) in height, is posted in plain sight in areas where these tools
are used. The sign says: “POWDER-ACTUATED TOOL IN USE” or something similar.

Page 381
ABG
 The tool is not used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.

 Tools are inspected, cleaned, maintained, and tested after each 1,000 fastenings.
Documentation of each inspection, cleaning, and testing is retained in the workplace.
 When misfired, cartridges are handled and disposed of according to the material
safety data sheet/International Chemical Safety Card (ICSC).
ABRASIVE WHEELS AND TOOLS
Supervisors will ensure that employees working with grinding machines, cut-off machines, or other applications
for abrasive wheels are trained in their safe operation and maintenance.
Employees are responsible for the following:
 Abrasive wheels are handled and stored in a manner that prevents damage to the
wheels.
Note: Do not allow abrasive wheels to be placed in a manner that could collect foreign
materials such as dirt.
 Abrasive wheels and the mounting hardware or components of machines on which

they are mounted are not modified or altered.
 Abrasive wheels are the correct size and type for the machine on which they are to
be mounted and for the work to be performed.
 Abrasive wheels are “ring tested” before mounting, and visually inspected before use
daily.
 After mounting, new wheels are run at least 1 minute at full speed before work is
applied or employees stand in front of, or in-line with, the wheel.
WOODWORKING TOOLS
Portable, power-driven circular saws must be equipped with a blade diameter greater than 2 inches
(5.1 centimeters) with guards above and below the bare plate or shoe. The upper guard covers the saw to the
depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. The lower
guard covers the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to allow proper retraction
and contact with the work. The lower guard automatically and instantly returns to covering position when the
tool is withdrawn from the work.
Radial arm saws will be equipped with an automatic brake.
BANANA WEDGE – SAFE USE GUIDELINES
Training
All employees who may be tasked with utilizing banana wedges must be trained on the proper usage of the tool.
This training must be completed on each job before using the banana wedges. The training must be recorded on
the Training / Education Attendance Log 000.653.F0269, and kept in the project file. Training must include the
following elements:

Page 382
ABG
 Hazard Assessment
 Proper PPE
 Inspection procedures
 Proper Configuration / Use
It is the responsibility of the Site Manager to ensure that all employees that may be tasked with utilizing banana
wedges receive this training.
Proper Wedge Configuration
Wedges must be purchased with ¼ inch holes, approximately 1 ½ inch from the tip of the barrel and will be linked
together with 1/8 inch poly coated wire rope and a compression clamp that will withstand failure should the
wedges dislodge.
The barrel of all banana wedges shall be painted red from the tip of the barrel to the end of the flat surface. This
will identify a stop point when the red reaches the flange surface.
Inspection Procedures
Banana wedges must be visually inspected before each use.

Deficiencies to look for are, broken or loose connections, faded or missing paint, chipped metal, bent wedges, or
mushroomed heads.
Banana wedges that are do not pass visual inspection must be placed out of service if repairs are needed. If the
wedges cannot be repaired they must be removed from the jobsite.
Hierarchy of Controls
Flange Spreaders or similar alternative means are to be considered as the primary choice for opening flanges
where feasible. Only after exhausting other options are banana wedges to be considered as a means of
completing the task.
Hazard Assessment / Pre Task Planning
A supervisor must complete a hazard assessment to determine if banana wedges are the appropriate tool for the
task. The supervisor is to examine the work area, consider potential body positioning, places to secure wedges,
etc.
During the pre-task planning process, the entire crew must be involved in the Safety Task Assignment meeting
and will discuss the hazards involving banana wedges. Banana wedges must be listed on the STA along with the
risks they pose, and how those risks are to be mitigated. Each crew member must sign on to the STA.
All work above head level will require a work platform sufficient enough to keep the employee from over
extending while performing the task.

Page 383
ABG
Personal Protective Equipment
Face shields shall be worn at all times when utilizing banana wedges. All employees assisting in the task that are
in the immediate area must also wear face shields. When full-face respirators are in use face shields will not be
required.
Unprotected / Exposed Blade Cutting Devices
The use of personal pocket knives, utility knives, retractable cut off blades, or other similar unprotected / exposed
blade cutting devices are strictly prohibited for use on ABG jobsites. These tools are not an approved cutting
device and shall not be used. Alternative tools such as cutting shears, scissors, and other protected blade cutting
tools shall be utilized for cutting of job site materials in order to minimize the potential for employee injury.
GENERAL HAND TOOL SAFETY
 When using hand tools i.e. wrenches, etc. the employee must ensure correct body postion is utilized to
minimize body twisting, excessive back strain, and the face is not in the line of fire.
 All tools and equipment shall be in good condition. Broken or defective tools shall be identified by red
tape and physically removed from service until replaced or repaired.
 Hand tools such as chisels, punches, which develop mushroomed heads during use, reconditioned or
replaced as necessary.
 Broken or fractured handles on hammers, axes and similar equipment replaced promptly.
 Worn or bent wrenches replaced regularly.
 Appropriate handles used on files and similar tools.
 Employees made aware of the hazards caused by faulty or improperly used hand tools.
 Appropriate safety glasses, face shields, and similar equipment used while using hand tools or equipment
that might produce flying materials or be subject to breakage.
 Jacks checked periodically to assure they are in good operating condition.
 Tool handles wedged tightly in the head of all tools.
 Tool cutting edges kept sharp so the tool will move smoothly without binding or skipping.
 Tools stored in dry, secure location where they won't be tampered with.
 Eye and face protection used when driving hardened or tempered spuds or nails.
Portable (Power Operated) Tools & Equipment (The use of employee owned power tool is prohibited)
 Grinders, saws, and similar equipment provided with appropriate safety guards.
 Power tools used with the correct shield, guard or attachment recommended by the manufacturer.
 Portable circular saws equipped with guards above and below the base shoe.
 Circular saw guards checked to assure they are not wedged up, thus leaving the lower portion of the
blade unguarded.
 Rotating or moving parts of equipment guarded to prevent physical contact.
 All cord-connected, electrically operated tools and equipment effectively grounded or of the approved
double insulated type.
 Effective guards in place over belts, pulleys, chains, and sprockets, on equipment such as concrete mixers,
air compressors, and the like.

Page 384
ABG
 Portable fans provided with full guards or screens having openings 1/2 inch or less.
 Hoisting equipment available and used for lifting heavy objects, and are hoist ratings and characteristics
appropriate for the task.
 Ground-fault circuit interrupters provided on all temporary electrical 15 and 20 ampere circuits, used
during periods of construction.
 Pneumatic and hydraulic hoses on power-operated tools checked regularly for deterioration or damage.
Abrasive Wheel Equipment Grinders
 The work rest used and kept adjusted to within 1/8 inch of the wheel.
 The adjustable tongue on the top side of the grinder used and kept adjusted to within 1/4 inch of the
wheel.
 Side guards cover the spindle, nut, and flange and 75 percent of the wheel diameter.
 Bench and pedestal grinders permanently mounted.
 Goggles or face shields always worn when grinding.
 The maximum RPM rating of each abrasive wheel compatible with the RPM rating of the grinder motor.
 Fixed or permanently mounted grinders connected to their electrical supply system with metallic conduit
or other permanent wiring method.
 Each grinder has an individual on and off control switch.
 Each electrically operated grinder effectively grounded.
 Before new abrasive wheels are mounted, they are visually inspected and ring tested.
 Dust collectors and powered exhausts provided on grinders used in operations that produce large
amounts of dust.
 Splashguards mounted on grinders that use coolant, to prevent the coolant reaching employees.
 Cleanliness maintained around grinder.
Powder Actuated Tools
 Employees who operate powder-actuated tools shall be trained in their use and carry a valid operator's
card.
 The powder-actuated tools being used have written approval of the Division of Occupational Safety and
Health.
 Each powder-actuated tool stored in its own locked container when not being used.
 A sign at least 7" by 10" with bold type reading "POWDER-ACTUATED TOOL IN USE" conspicuously posted
when the tool is being used.
 Powder-actuated tools left unloaded until they are actually ready to be used.
 Powder-actuated tools inspected for obstructions or defects each day before use.
 Powder-actuated tools operators have and use appropriate personal protective equipment such as hard
hats, safety goggles, safety shoes and ear protectors.
Machine Guarding
 There is a training program to instruct employees on safe methods of machine operation.

 There is adequate supervision to ensure that employees are following safe machine operating procedures.

Page 385
ABG
 There is a regular program of safety inspection of machinery and equipment.

 All machinery and equipment kept clean and properly maintained.
 Sufficient clearance provided around and between machines to allow for safe operations, set up and
servicing, material handling and waste removal.
 Equipment and machinery securely placed and anchored, when necessary to prevent tipping or other
movement that could result in personal injury.
 There is a power shut-off switch within reach of the operator's position at each machine.
 Electric power to each machine is locked out for maintenance, repair, or security.
 The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrically operated machines bonded and grounded.
 Foot-operated switches guarded or arranged to prevent accidental actuation by personnel or falling
objects.
 Manually operated valves and switches controlling the operation of equipment and machines clearly
identified and readily accessible.
 All emergency stop buttons colored red.
 All pulleys and belts that are within 7 feet of the floor or working level properly guarded.
 All moving chains and gears properly guarded.
 Splashguards mounted on machines that use coolant, to prevent the coolant from reaching employees.
 Methods provided to protect the operator and other employees in the machine area from hazards
created at the point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotating parts, flying chips, and sparks.
 Machinery guards secure and so arranged that they do not offer a hazard in their use.
 Special hand tools are used for placing and removing material to protect the operator's hands.
 Revolving drums, barrels, and containers required to be guarded by an enclosure that is interlocked with
the drive mechanism, so that revolution cannot occur unless the guard enclosure is in place, so guarded.
 Arbors and mandrels have firm and secure bearings and are they free from play.
 Provisions made to prevent machines from automatically starting when power is restored after a power
failure or shutdown.
 Machines constructed so as to be free from excessive vibration when the largest size tool is mounted and
run at full speed.
 Machinery is cleaned with compressed air, is air pressure controlled and personal protective equipment
or other safeguards used to protect operators and other workers from eye and body injury.
 Fan blades protected with a guard having openings no larger than 1/2 inch, when operating within 7 feet
of the floor.
 Saws used for ripping, equipped with anti-kick back devices and spreaders.
 Radial arm saws so arranged that the cutting head will gently return to the back of the table when
released.
Lockout Blockout Procedures
 All machinery or equipment capable of movement, required to be de-energized or disengaged and

blocked or locked out during cleaning, servicing, adjusting or setting up operations, whenever required.
 The locking-out of control circuits in lieu of locking-out main power disconnects prohibited.
 All equipment control valve handles provided with a means for locking-out.
 The lockout procedure require that stored energy (i.e. mechanical, hydraulic, air,) be released or blocked
before equipment is locked-out for repairs.

Page 386
ABG
 Appropriate employees provided with individually keyed personal safety locks.

 Employees are required to keep personal control of their key(s) while they have safety locks in use.
 It is required that employees check the safety of the lock out by attempting a start up after making sure
no one is exposed.
 The power disconnecting means for equipment does not also disconnect the electrical control circuit:
 The appropriate electrical enclosures identified.
 Means provided to assure the control circuit can also be disconnected and locked out.
Electrical
 Workplace electricians familiar with the OSHA Electrical Safety Regulations.

 Specify compliance with OSHA for all contract electrical work.
 All employees required to report as soon as practicable any obvious hazard to life or property observed in
connection with electrical equipment or lines.
 Employees instructed to make preliminary inspections and/or appropriate tests to determine what
conditions exist before starting work on electrical equipment or lines.
 When electrical equipment or lines are to be serviced, maintained or adjusted, necessary switches are
opened, locked-out and tagged whenever possible.
 Portable electrical tools and equipment grounded or of the double insulated type.
 Electrical appliances such as vacuum cleaners, polishers, vending machines grounded.
 Extension cords being used have a grounding conductor.
 Multiple plug adapters prohibited.
 Ground-fault circuit interrupters installed on each temporary 15 or 20 ampere, 120 volt AC circuit at
locations where construction, demolition, modifications, alterations or excavations are being performed.
 All temporary circuits protected by suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors at the junction
with permanent wiring.
 Exposed wiring and cords with frayed or deteriorated insulation is repaired or replaced promptly.
 Flexible cords and cables free of splices or taps.
 Clamps or other securing means provided on flexible cords or cables at plugs, receptacles, tools, and
equipment and is the cord jacket securely held in place.
 All cord, cable, and raceway connections intact and secure.
 In wet or damp locations, electrical tools and equipment are appropriate for the use or location or
otherwise protected.
 The location of electrical power lines and cables (overhead, underground, underfloor, other side of walls)
is determined before digging, drilling or similar work is begun.
 Metal measuring tapes, ropes, hand lines or similar devices with metallic thread woven into the fabric
prohibited where they could come in contact with energized parts of equipment or circuit conductors.
 All disconnecting switches and circuit breakers labeled to indicate their use or equipment served.
 Disconnecting means always opened before fuses are replaced.
 All interior wiring systems include provisions for grounding metal parts of electrical raceways, equipment
and enclosures.
 All electrical raceways and enclosures securely fastened in place.
 All energized parts of electrical circuits and equipment guarded against accidental contact by approved
cabinets or enclosures.

Page 387
ABG
 Sufficient access and working space is provided and maintained about all electrical equipment to permit
ready and safe operations and maintenance.
 All unused openings (including conduit knockouts) in electrical enclosures and fittings closed with
appropriate covers, plugs or plates.
 Electrical enclosures such as switches, receptacles, junction boxes, etc., provided with tight-fitting covers
or plates.
 Disconnecting switches for electrical motors in excess of two horsepower, capable of opening the circuit
when the motor is in a stalled condition, without exploding. (Switches must be horsepower rated equal to
or in excess of the motor hp rating).
 Low voltage protection is provided in the control device of motors driving machines or equipment, which
could cause probably injury from inadvertent starting.
 Each motor disconnecting switch or circuit breaker is located within sight of the motor control device.
 Each motor located within sight of its controller or the controller disconnecting means is capable of being
locked in the open position or is a separate disconnecting means installed in the circuit within sight of the
motor.
 The controller for each motor is in excess of two horsepower, rated in horsepower equal to or in excess of
the rating of the motor is serves.
ABG employees are prohibited from working on energized lines or equipment over 600 volts.
REFERENCES
000.653.2005 Lead Exposure
000.653.3309 Electrical Work Safety
Forms
000.653.F0269 Training/Education Attendance Log

Page 388
ABG
HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM (HAZCOM)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................370
List of Hazardous Chemicals...............................................................................................................................371
Safety Data Sheets (SDSs)...................................................................................................................................371
NFPA Signs and Placards.....................................................................................................................................373
Employee Training..............................................................................................................................................376
Training Content.................................................................................................................................................376
Hazards of Non-routine Tasks............................................................................................................................378
Hazards of Unlabeled Pipes................................................................................................................................378
Appendix............................................................................................................................................................380

Page 389
ABG
PURPOSE
Our company is complying with the requirements of OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard for construction by
compiling a list of hazardous chemicals, using safety data sheets (SDSs), ensuring that containers are labeled or
provided other forms of warning, and training our worksite employees. In addition, we share information with
other employers involved in a specific project so that they may keep their employees informed.
This program applies to all work operations at PLANT PERFORMANCE SERVICES (ABG) where employees may be
exposed to hazardous chemicals under normal working conditions or during an emergency situation. Under this
program, our employees will be informed of the contents of the Hazard Communication Standard, the hazards of
chemicals with which they work, safe handling procedures, and measures to take to protect themselves from
these chemicals, among other training elements.
Site Supervisor, the Hazard Communication Program Coordinator, has overall responsibility for the program,
including, reviewing and updating the program, as necessary. Copies of this written program may be obtained
from site Superintendant or Safety Manager who keeps the program in the field safety office. Moreover, all
employees, or their designated representatives, may obtain further information about this written program, the
Hazard Communication Standard, applicable SDSs, and our chemical list from site Superintendant or Safety
Manager.
Finally, if after reading this program, you find that improvements can be made, please contact site Superintendant
or Safety Manager. We encourage all suggestions because we are committed to the success of our written Hazard
Communication Program. We strive for clear understanding, safe behavior, and involvement in the program from
every level of the company.
List of Hazardous Chemicals

Our "chemical inventory" is a list of product identifiers of hazardous chemicals known to be present at our
workplace. Anyone who comes in contact with the hazardous chemicals on the list needs to know what those
chemicals are and how to protect themselves. That is why it is so important that hazardous chemicals are
identified, whether they are found in a container or generated in work operations (for example, welding fumes,
dusts, and exhaust fumes). The hazardous chemicals on the chemical inventory can cover a variety of physical
forms including liquids, solids, gases, vapors, fumes, and mists. Sometimes hazardous chemicals can be identified
using purchase orders. Identification of other chemicals may require an actual survey of the workplace.
Site Superintendant or Safety Manager updates the hazardous chemical inventory as necessary. Any ABG chemical
used on the projects must have a MSDS sheet or SDS on file at the job site.
The inventory is attached to this written Hazard Communication Program. However, the Program Coordinator also
keeps a copy of the chemical inventory list located for each ABG chemical kept onsite in the site superintendant or
field Safety Managers office, where it is accessible during work hours. The chemical inventory serves as a list of
every hazardous chemical for which an SDS must be maintained.

Page 390
ABG
Safety Data Sheets (SDSs)

SDSs are basically fact sheets for chemicals that pose a physical or health hazard in the workplace. These sheets
provide our employees with specific information on the chemicals in their work areas.
The ABG Superintendant or the site safety manager is responsible for obtaining and maintaining the SDSs at our
workplace and will contact the chemical manufacturer or vendor if additional chemical information is needed. All
new procurements for the company must be cleared by the ABG Superintendant or the site safety manager.
SDSs are kept readily accessible to all employees during each work shift at the following location(s): The site safety
manager or field superintendants office. Employees may obtain access to them by: Requesting a copy from the
field safety manager or project superintendant.
The procedure followed if the SDS is not received with the first shipment is as follows: We determine whether an
SDS for the chemical was already sent with a previous shipment.
If so, no further action to obtain an SDS is required.
If an SDS was not already sent, we determine whether or not an SDS is required based on whether the chemical
falls under 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication.
If an SDS is not required, then no further action to obtain an SDS is required.
If an SDS is required, we complete, copy, and send a letter to the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor
requesting an SDS for the chemical.
We file the copy of the letter with the site Safety Managers Office for documentation purposes.
If the SDS is received, we supply a copy at all appropriate SDS stations.
After 30 days, if the SDS has not been received, we contact OSHA at (800)321-3742 or visit the OSHA Regional
Area Directory @ http://www.osha.gov/html/RAmap.html for assistance in obtaining an SDS.
Labels and Other Forms of Warning
In most cases, hazardous chemical containers at the workplace must be clearly labeled, tagged, or marked in
accordance with the Hazard Communication Standard, either with:
 The product identifier, signal word, hazard statement(s), pictogram(s), and precautionary statement(s); or
 The product identifier and words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof, which provide at least
"general" information regarding the hazards of the chemicals, and which, in conjunction with the other
information immediately available to employees under the Hazard Communication Program, will provide

Page 391
ABG
employees with the "specific" information regarding the physical and health hazards of the hazardous
chemical.
While not required for in-house labeling, the name and address of the manufacturer, importer, or other
responsible party may also be found on the label, tag, or marking because shipped containers of hazardous
chemicals must bear this information. Hazards not otherwise classified, if any, do not have to be addressed on a
container but must be addressed on the SDS.
Because the product identifier is found on the label, the SDS, and our chemical inventory, the product identifier
links these three sources of information, permitting cross-referencing. The product identifier used by the supplier
may be a common or trade name, a chemical name, or a number. Employees should be aware that label
information can be verified by referring to the corresponding SDS.
Site Safety Manager or Project Superintendant is responsible for ensuring that all hazardous chemicals in
containers at the workplace have proper labels or other forms of warning that are legible, in English (although
other languages may also be included), and displayed clearly on the container or readily available in the work area
throughout each work shift, as required. This person will update labels, as necessary. Site Safety Manager or
Project Superintendant also ensures that newly purchased chemicals are checked for labels when containers are
received.
Site Safety Manager or Project Superintendant is responsible for ensuring the proper labeling, tagging, or marking
of any shipped containers leaving the workplace. These labels, tags, or marks must provide not only the product
identifier, signal word, hazard statement(s), pictogram(s), and precautionary statement(s) but also the name,
address, and telephone number of the chemical manufacturer, importer, or other responsible party.
A poster is displayed to inform employees about the Hazard Communication Standard. It is a right-to-know poster.
If employees transfer chemicals from a labeled container to a portable, secondary container that is intended only
for their IMMEDIATE use, no labels, tags, or markings are required on the portable container. Otherwise portable
containers must be labeled, tagged, or marked in accordance with our in-house labeling system for workplace
containers.
The in-house labeling system we use for workplace container labeling is: NFPA labeling system.
OSHA also allows for alternatives to labeling, tagging, and marking conveying the required information, as long as
the containers to which the alternative method is applicable are identified. We use the following alternative
method(s) to label, tag, or mark workplace chemical containers: A sticker identifying the contents, manufacturer,
date and SDS information.
NFPA Signs and Placards.

Finally, the following procedures are used to review and update label information when necessary, to ensure that
labels that fall off or become unreadable are immediately replaced. All incoming chemical containers must be

Page 392
ABG
checked for a label.
We check to see that all incoming hazardous chemical containers are labeled with the product identifier, signal
word, hazard statement(s), pictogram(s), and precautionary statement(s).
We place any replacement labels that come with the shipment in the site safety/superintendent office.
To obtain a proper label when not received with a shipment:
If an incoming container is not labeled properly or is missing a label, we determine whether or not a label is
required based on 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication.
If a label is required, we either send the shipment back with the transporter to the distributor, importer, or
manufacturer OR store the chemical until it can be labeled.
If the chemical will be stored, we store it in a chemical storage locker on site, and a chemical marking placed on
the container. Then complete, copy, and send a letter to the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor
requesting a label for the chemical.
We file the copy of the letter in the on site safety job box for documentation purposes.
If the label is received, we affix the label to the container.
After 30 days, if the label has not been received, then we contact OSHA at 1-800-321-OSHA (6742) Toll Free U.S.
for assistance in obtaining a label.
To re-label or dispose of chemical containers upon discovery:
When a chemical container is discovered with a label that is soiled, unreadable, or missing, we instruct employees
not to move, touch, or use the chemical.
We determine whether or not a label is required based on 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication. (Certain
portable containers do not require labeling if conditions described at 1910.1200(f)(8) are met.)
If a label is required, we attempt to identify the chemical.
If the chemical cannot be identified, we dispose of the chemical according to proper federal, state, and local
disposal requirements, which are as follows: All DOT Hazmat regulations must be followed when transporting the
chemical to a local hazardous materials facility for proper disposal.
If the chemical can be identified, we either re-label the container with an extra label already provided by the
chemical distributor or manufacturer, re-label the container using NFPA, OR store the chemical until it can be
labeled with a label ordered from the manufacturer, importer, or distributor.

Page 393
ABG
If the container will be relabeled with an extra label, we retrieve the extra label from the manufacturer and affix
the label.
If the container will be re-labeled with NFPA, we enter the proper information on a blank label and affix the label.
If the chemical will be stored, we store it in an onsite chemical locker with a NFPA sticker and complete, copy, and
send a letter to the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor requesting a label for the chemical.
We file the copy of the letter in the onsite safety job box and later in the corporate safety office for
documentation purposes.
If the label cannot be obtained from the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor, and no other labeling
options are available, we dispose of the chemical according to the chemicals safety data sheet and other proper
federal, state, and local disposal requirements, which are as follows: A local hazardous chemical removal company
will be contacted to remove, transport and deliver the chemical(s) to an approved hazardous waste site for a
proper disposal.
To re-label or dispose of chemicals upon regular audits:
ABG performs a weekly Hazard Elimination audit that includes onsite hazardous chemical inspections.
If you discover a chemical container whose label is soiled, unreadable, or missing, we instruct employees not to
move, touch, or use the chemical.
We attempt to identify the chemical.
If the chemical cannot be identified, we dispose of the chemical according to proper federal, state, and local
disposal requirements, which are as follows: A local hazardous chemical removal company will be contacted to
remove, transport and deliver the chemical(s) to an approved hazardous waste site for a proper disposal.
If the chemical can be identified, we determine whether or not a label is required for the chemical based on 29
CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication. (Certain portable containers do not require labeling if conditions
described at 1910.1200(f)(8) are met.)
If a label is required, we will re-label the container with an extra label already provided by the chemical
distributor, importer, or manufacturer; re-label the container using a blank NFPA with the known chemical
information on it, OR store the chemical until it can be labeled with a label ordered from the manufacturer,
importer, or distributor.
If the container will be re-labeled with an extra label, we retrieve the extra label from the chemical manufacturer
and affix the label.

Page 394
ABG
If the container will be re-labeled with our NFPA label, we enter the proper information on a blank label and affix
the label.
If the chemical will be stored, we store it in the onsite chemical storage cabinet and complete, copy, and send a
letter to the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor requesting a label for the chemical.
We file the copy of the letter in the onsite safety or supervisors job box for documentation purposes.
If the label cannot be obtained from the chemical manufacturer, importer, or distributor, and no other labeling
options are available, we dispose of the chemical according to the chemical’s safety data sheet and other proper
federal, state, and local disposal requirements, which are as follows: A local hazardous chemical removal company
will be contacted to remove, transport and deliver the chemical(s) to an approved hazardous waste site for a
proper disposal.
To properly label portable containers as necessary:
An employee who transfers hazardous chemicals from a labeled container to a portable container, is required to
contact site Supervisor or Safety Manager if more than one employee will be using the chemical, if the chemical
will be used for more than one shift, if the employee who transferred the chemical will not be in control of the
chemical the entire time.
Once notified, the site Safety Manger or Superintendant will label the portable container with a blank NFPA label
with known chemical information and store it in the site chemical storage cabinet.
Training
Employee Training
ABG will communicate hazard communications to non-English speaking employees by have training and
communication materials in the employee’s language and/or through the use of an interpreter.
Everyone who works with or is potentially "exposed" to hazardous chemicals on the job will receive initial training
on the Hazard Communication Standard and the safe use of those hazardous chemicals before starting work.
"Exposure" means that "an employee is subjected in the course of employment to a chemical that is a physical or
health hazard, and includes potential (e.g., accidental or possible) exposure." Whenever a new chemical hazard is
introduced or an old hazard changes, additional training is provided. All training is conducted by The Site Safety
Manager or Project Superintendant.
Effective information and training is a critical part of the Hazard Communication Program. We train our employees
to read and understand the information on labels and SDSs, determine how the information can be obtained and
used in their own work areas, and understand the risks of exposure to the chemicals in their work areas, as well as

Page 395
ABG
ways to protect themselves. Our goal is to ensure employees know that they are exposed to hazardous chemicals,
have the skills to read and use labels and SDSs, and understand how to appropriately follow the protective
measures we have established. We urge our employees to ask The Site Safety Manager or Project Superintendant
questions for greater comprehension.
As part of the assessment of the training program, The Site Safety Manager or Project Superintendant asks for
input from employees regarding the training they have received and their suggestions for improving it. In this
way, we hope to reduce any incidence of chemical-related illness or injury.
Any employee that is potentially exposed to chemicals must be safety trained on the affects of the chemicals.
Training Content
Employees receive training on all chemicals/chemical hazards present at the site. Employees will receive on the
job training from their supervisor. This training will cover the proper use, inspection and storage of necessary
personal protective equipment and chemical safety training for the specific chemicals they will be using or will be
working around.
Annual Hazard Communication refresher training will be conducted as part of the company's continuing safety
training program.
The format of the training program used is Employees receive training on all chemicals/chemical hazards present
at the site.
The training program emphasizes these elements:
 Summary of the Hazard Communication Standard.

 What hazardous chemicals are present in operations in employee work areas.
 Chemical and physical properties of hazardous chemicals (e.g., flash point, reactivity, etc.) and how to
detect the presence or release of these chemicals (including chemicals in unlabeled pipes).
 Physical hazards of chemicals (e.g., potential for fire, explosion, etc.).
 Health hazards, including signs and symptoms of overexposure, associated with exposure to chemicals
and any medical condition known to be aggravated by exposure to them.
 Any simple asphyxiation, combustible dust, and pyrophoric hazards, as well as hazards not otherwise
classified, of chemicals in work areas.
 Any steps the company has taken to reduce or prevent exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as
engineering controls.
 Procedures to protect against hazards and exposure (e.g., work practices or methods to assure proper use
and handling of chemicals and any required personal protective equipment and its proper use and
maintenance).
 Procedures for reporting and responding to chemical emergencies.
 How to read and use both the workplace labeling system and labels received on shipped containers.
 The order of information found on SDSs and how to read the information and what it means.
 How to access SDSs and the written Hazard Communication Program, including the chemical inventory.

Page 396
ABG
The procedure to train new employees at the time of their initial assignment is Employees are to be trained at the
time they are assigned to work with a hazardous chemical. The intent of this provision is to have information prior
to exposure to prevent the occurrence of adverse health effects. This purpose cannot be met if training is delayed
until a later date.
We train employees when a new hazard is introduced by a new or changed process, procedure, control measure,
machine, production area, or exposure hazard involves a hazardous chemical exposure under normal operating
conditions or in foreseeable emergencies, we also identify the employees who will need hazard communication
training or retraining.
Every six months we make arrangements with department management and safety to schedule hazard
communication retraining session(s).
Safety presents retraining via audiovisual materials, quiz, classroom instruction, demonstration, etc. and covers
the following: Hazardous chemicals awareness, MSDS, PEL, STEL, notification, signs, marking, contact info, PPE,
respiratory protection, and proper storage.
We document all hazard communication retraining using HAZCOM Com Training form and file this documentation
at the ABG Corporate Safety office, located at 777 Hwy 397, Lake Charles, LA 70615.
Training logs are signed by employees upon completion of their training and are kept in the ABG Corporate Safety
office, located at 777 Hwy 397, Lake Charles, LA 70615.
Hazards of Non-routine Tasks

Periodically, employees are required to perform non-routine tasks that involve hazardous chemicals. When
employees will be required to perform hazardous non-routine tasks, such as working on, near, or with unlabeled
piping, unlabeled containers of an unknown substance, confined space entry where a hazardous substance may
be present and/or a one-time task using a hazardous substance differently than intended (example: using a
solvent to remove stains from tile floors)., that have the potential to expose employees to hazardous chemicals,
we inform them of these hazards by: Before a non-routine project or task, we determine chemical exposure
hazards involved in that task, including any potential hazards at other worksites employees may visit or work
areas occupied by contractor employer activity. Note: Some examples of non-routine tasks are: confined space
entry, tank cleaning, and painting reactor vessels.
We make arrangements with department management and the HAZCOM trainer to schedule non-routine task
hazard training session(s) to ensure that employees who need it, receive it work with or near hazardous chemicals
during the non-routine task.
Hazcom trainer presents information to the affected employees about the hazardous chemicals they may
encounter during their non-routine task. This information includes: specific chemical hazards, protective and
safety measures, engineering controls, and emergency procedures.
We document all non-routine task training using Hazcom training log and file this documentation at the corporate

Page 397
ABG
safety office.
.
Hazards of Unlabeled Pipes

Work activities are sometimes performed by employees in areas where hazardous chemicals are transferred
through unlabeled pipes. We inform employees of the hazards of chemicals contained in unlabeled pipes in their
work areas by: For all unlabeled pipes in the facility, site safety or supervision determines and documents the
following items: location, chemical in pipes, potential hazards, safety precautions, methods to detect presence of
chemical, etc.
If work activities are performed by employees in areas where chemicals are transferred through unlabeled pipes:
As part of the supervisor training program, employees will be informed about the hazardous chemicals in
unlabeled pipes.
Prior to starting work in these areas, the employee shall contact the Executive Director or the Director of Facilities
Services for information regarding:
Chemicals in the Pipes

B) Potential Hazards
C) Safety and Handling Precautions
Site safety or supervision ensures that all chemicals in unlabeled pipes are listed on the chemical inventory.
Prior to work in areas where chemicals are transferred through unlabeled pipes, employees must contact the site
safety or supervisor to schedule unlabeled piping training.
Prior to work in the areas, site safety or supervisor presents information to the affected employees about
chemical in pipes, potential hazards, safety precautions, methods to detect presence of chemical.
We document all unlabeled piping training using Hazcom Training log and file this documentation at the Lake
Charles, LA. safety office, located at 777 Hwy 397, Lake Charles, LA 70615.

Page 398
ABG
Additional Information
As stated earlier, all employees, or their designated representatives, may obtain further information on this
written program, the Hazard Communication Standard, applicable SDSs, and the chemical inventory from site
Superintendant or Safety Manager.
Appendix
We have attached to this written program our chemical inventory and other information to ensure better
understanding of our program.

Page 399
ABG
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIGICATION SYSTEM GUIDE (HMIS/HMIG)
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM/GUIDE (HMIS/HMIG)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................381
Training..............................................................................................................................................................386
Training Content.................................................................................................................................................386
Hazards of Non-routine Tasks............................................................................................................................387
Hazards of Unlabeled Pipes................................................................................................................................387

Page 400
ABG
PURPOSE
This system (HMIS II) uses a label with 4 color bars and a space at the top where the name of the hazardous
material should be written (refer to figure this page). The blue, red, and yellow colored bars indicate,
respectively, the health, flammability, and reactivity hazard associated with the material. These 3 bars use a
numbering scale ranging from 0 to 4. A value of “0” means that the material poses essentially no hazard; a rating
of “4” indicates extreme danger. If the second box holds an asterisk (*), then the health hazard associated with
the material is a chronic (long-term) effect.
The fourth white bar is marked “Protective Equipment” in the HMIG system, and “Personal Protection” in the
HMIS system. Both systems (HMIG and HMIS) place a letter in this bar to indicate the kind(s) of personal
protective equipment (PPE) that should be used in order to handle the material safely. The letters used are A - K -
and X.

Page 401
ABG
Symbol Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required

A Safety Glasses
Safety Glasses
B
Gloves
Safety Glasses
C Gloves
Apron
Face Shield
D Gloves
Apron
Safety Glasses
E Gloves
Dust Respirator
Safety Glasses
Gloves
F
Apron
Dust Respirator
Safety Glasses
G Gloves
Vapor Respirator
Splash Goggles
Gloves
H
Apron
Vapor Respirator
Safety Glasses
I Gloves
Dust and Vapor Respirator
Splash Goggles
Gloves
J
Apron
Dust and Vapor Respirator
Air Line Hood or Mask
Gloves
K
Full Suit
Boots

Page 402
ABG
X Ask supervisor or safety specialist for handling instructions.

Page 403
ABG

Page 404
ABG
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) HAZARD SYSTEM
HEALTH HAZARD FIRE HAZARD

4 DEADLY FLASH POINTS
3 EXTREME DANGER 4 BELOW 73° F
2 HAZARDOUS 3 BELOW 100° F
1 SLIGHTLY RED 2 BELOW 200° F
1 ABOVE 200° F
HAZARDOUS FIRE
0 WILL NOT BURN
0 NORMAL
MATERIAL
BLUE YELLOW
HEALTH REACTIVITY
SPECIFIC HAZARD REACTIVITY

ACID ACID WHITE 4 MAY DETONATE
ALK ALKALI SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
3 SHOCK AND HEAT
COR CORROSIVE MAY DETONATE
OXY OXIDIZER
2 VIOLENT CHEMICAL CHANGE
P POLYMERIZATION
RADIOACTIVE 1 UNSTABLE IF HEATED
USE NO WATER 0 STABLE
W
CHEMICAL N AME ______________________

Page 405
ABG
Training
Everyone who works with or is potentially "exposed" to hazardous chemicals on the job will receive initial training
on the Hazard Communication Standard and the safe use of those hazardous chemicals before starting work.
"Exposure" means that "an employee is subjected in the course of employment to a chemical that is a physical or
health hazard, and includes potential (e.g., accidental or possible) exposure." Whenever a new chemical hazard is
introduced or an old hazard changes, additional training is provided. All training is conducted by The Site Safety
Manager or Project Superintendant.
Effective information and training is a critical part of the Hazard Communication Program. We train our employees
to read and understand the information on labels and SDSs, determine how the information can be obtained and
used in their own work areas, and understand the risks of exposure to the chemicals in their work areas, as well as
ways to protect themselves. Our goal is to ensure employees know that they are exposed to hazardous chemicals,
have the skills to read and use labels and SDSs, and understand how to appropriately follow the protective
measures we have established. We urge our employees to ask The Site Safety Manager or Project Superintendant
questions for greater comprehension.
As part of the assessment of the training program, The Site Safety Manager or Project Superintendant will ask for
input from employees regarding the training they have received and their suggestions for improving it. In this
way, we hope to reduce any incidence of chemical-related illness or injury.
Training Content
Employees receive training on all chemicals/chemical hazards present at the site. The format of the training
program used is Employees receive training on all chemicals/chemical hazards present at the site.
.
The training program emphasizes these elements:
 Summary of the Hazard Communication Standard.

 What hazardous chemicals are present in operations in employee work areas.
 Chemical and physical properties of hazardous chemicals (e.g., flash point, reactivity, etc.) and how to
detect the presence or release of these chemicals (including chemicals in unlabeled pipes).
 Physical hazards of chemicals (e.g., potential for fire, explosion, etc.).
 Health hazards, including signs and symptoms of overexposure, associated with exposure to chemicals
and any medical condition known to be aggravated by exposure to them.
 Any simple asphyxiation, combustible dust, and pyrophoric hazards, as well as hazards not otherwise
classified, of chemicals in work areas.
 Any steps the company has taken to reduce or prevent exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as
engineering controls.
 Procedures to protect against hazards and exposure (e.g., work practices or methods to assure proper use
and handling of chemicals and any required personal protective equipment and its proper use and
maintenance).
 Procedures for reporting and responding to chemical emergencies.
 How to read and use both the workplace labeling system and labels received on shipped containers.

Page 406
ABG
 The order of information found on SDSs and how to read the information and what it means.
 How to access SDSs and the written Hazard Communication Program, including the chemical inventory.
The procedure to train new employees at the time of their initial assignment is Employees are to be trained at the
time they are assigned to work with a hazardous chemical. The intent of this provision is to have information prior
to exposure to prevent the occurrence of adverse health effects. This purpose cannot be met if training is delayed
until a later date.
We train employees when a new hazard is introduced by If a new or changed process, procedure, control
measure, machine, production area, or exposure hazard involves a hazardous chemical exposure under normal
operating conditions or in foreseeable emergencies, we identify the employees who will need hazard
communication training or retraining.
Training logs are signed by employees upon completion of their training and are kept by the site
safety/supervisor.
Hazards of Non-routine Tasks

Periodically, employees are required to perform non-routine tasks that involve hazardous chemicals. When
employees will be required to perform hazardous non-routine tasks, such as working on, near, or with unlabeled
piping, unlabeled containers of an unknown substance, confined space entry where a hazardous substance may
be present and/or a one-time task using a hazardous substance differently than intended: using a solvent to
remove stains from tile floors that have the potential to expose employees to hazardous chemicals, we inform
them of these hazards by:
 Before a non-routine project or task, we determine chemical exposure hazards involved in that task,
including any potential hazards at other worksites employees may visit or work areas occupied by
contractor employer activity. Note: Some examples of non-routine tasks are: confined space entry, tank
cleaning.
We make arrangements with department management and chemical trainer to schedule non-routine task
hazard training session(s) to ensure that employees who need it receive it prior to working with the
chemical or near hazardous chemicals during the non-routine task.
The chemical trainer presents information to the affected employees about the hazardous chemicals they
may encounter during their non-routine task. This information includes: specific chemical hazards,
protective and safety measures, engineering controls, and emergency procedures, etc.
We document all non-routine task training using STA and file this documentation in the on site
safety/supervisors office.
.

Page 407
ABG
Hazards of Unlabeled Pipes
Work activities are sometimes performed by employees in areas where hazardous chemicals are transferred
through unlabeled pipes. We inform employees of the hazards of chemicals contained in unlabeled pipes in their
work areas by: For all unlabeled pipes in the facility, site Safety/Supervision determines and documents the
following items: Location, chemical in pipes, potential hazards, safety precautions, methods to detect presence of
chemical, etc..
If work activities are performed by employees in areas where chemicals are transferred through unlabeled pipes:
As part of the supervisor training program, employees will be informed about the hazardous chemicals in
unlabeled pipes.
Site Safety/Supervision ensures that all chemicals in unlabeled pipes are listed on the chemical inventory.
Prior to work in areas where chemicals are transferred through unlabeled pipes, employees must contact the
safety department to schedule unlabeled piping training.
Prior to work in the areas, the ABG safety/supervisor trainer presents information to the affected employees
about chemical in pipes, potential hazards, safety precautions, and the methods to detect presence of chemical.
We document all unlabeled piping training using the HAZCOM training log and file this documentation with the
site Safety/Supervisor office.

Page 408
ABG
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & RISK ASSESSMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Program Overview..................................................................................................................................................389
Hazard identification..............................................................................................................................................390
The Importance of Getting the Hazard Identification Right................................................................................390
Features of HAZID..............................................................................................................................................390
TABLE OF CONTENTS..........................................................................................................................................390
Past, Present and Future Hazards......................................................................................................................391
HAZOP 391
Checklists............................................................................................................................................................391
Jobsite Hazard Analysis (JHA’s)...........................................................................................................................391
Risk assessment..................................................................................................................................................392
Control measures...................................................................................................................................................392
Using a Risk Control Hierarchy to Determine Control Measures........................................................................392
Selecting and Rejecting Control Measures.........................................................................................................393
Involving Employees in Control Measures..........................................................................................................393
Reviewing and Revising Control Measures.........................................................................................................393
Investigating and Analyzing Control Measures...................................................................................................394

Page 409
ABG
Program Overview
Hazard identification (HAZID) and risk assessment involves a critical sequence of information gathering and the
application of a decision-making process. These assist in discovering what could possibly cause a major accident
(hazard identification), how likely it is that a major accident would occur, and the potential consequences (risk
assessment) and what options there are for preventing and mitigating a major accident (control measures). These
activities should also assist in improving operations and productivity and reduce the occurrence of incidents and
near misses.
Hazard identification
ABG , in consultation with its employees and subcontractors, through JSA’s, will identify all reasonably foreseeable
hazards at the jobsite that may cause a major accident; and the kinds of major accidents that may occur at the
jobsite, the likelihood of a major accident occurring, and the likely consequences of a major accident.
The Importance of Getting the Hazard Identification Right
Major accidents by their nature are rare events, which may be beyond the experience of many employers. These
accidents tend to be low frequency, high consequence events. However, the circumstances or conditions that
could lead to a major accident may already be present, and the risks of such incidents should be proactively
identified and managed. Therefore, the hazard identification process should be used for routine and non-routine
activities as well as new processes, changes in operation, products or services as applicable.
Features of HAZID
ABG will expect:
 a clear method statement or description of the HAZID process, defining when it was conducted, how
it was planned and prepared, who was involved, and what tools and resources were employed;
 that the HAZID process was based on a comprehensive and accurate description of the facility,
including all necessary diagrams, process information, existing conditions and modifications; and
 That the overall HAZID process did not rely solely on data that was historical or reactive and that
employers ensured that predictive methods were also used.
The HAZID process must identify hazards that could cause a potential major accident for the full range of
operational modes, including normal operations, start-up, shutdown, and also potential upset, emergency, or
abnormal conditions. Employers should also reassess their HAZID whenever a significant change in operations has
occurred or a new substance has been introduced.

Page 410
ABG
Past, Present and Future Hazards
To identify all hazards, the HAZID will need to consider past, present and future conditions, hazards and potential
incidents. Past incidents, at the jobsite or similar facilities, provide an indication of what has gone wrong in the
past and what could go wrong in the future.
A wide range of hazards and potential incidents will be present in the facility. New hazards and incidents could be
created in the future as a result of planned or unplanned changes. The management of change process described
in the SMS should identify new conditions during the planning of modifications or new activities. This should then
trigger further HAZID studies and risk assessments, with the identification of control measures as appropriate.
HAZOP
Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP) is a highly structured and detailed technique, developed primarily for
application to chemical process systems. A HAZOP can generate a comprehensive understanding of the possible
‘deviations from design intent’ that may occur. However, HAZOP is less suitable for identification of hazards not
related to process operations, such as mechanical integrity failures, procedural errors, or external events. HAZOP
also tends to identify hazards specific to the section being assessed, while hazards related to the interactions
between different sections may not be identified. Therefore, HAZOP may need to be combined with other hazard
identification methods, or a modified form of HAZOP used, to overcome these limitations.
Checklists
There are many established hazard checklists which can be used to guide the identification of hazards. Checklists
offer straightforward and effective ways of ensuring that basic types of events are considered. Checklists may not
be sufficient on their own, as they may not cover all types of hazards, particularly facility-specific hazards, and
could also suppress lateral thinking. Again, this technique should only be used in combination with other
techniques for jobsite purposes.
Jobsite Hazard Analysis (JHA’s)
This is a technique developed to address human factors, procedural errors and ‘man-machine interface’ issues.
This type of hazard identification is useful for identifying potential problems relating to procedural failures, human
resources, human errors, fault recognition, alarm response, etc.
Jobsite Hazard Analysis can be applied to specific jobs such as lifting operations, moving equipment off-line, or to
specific working environments such as control rooms. Jobsite Hazard Analysis is particularly useful for looking at
areas of a facility where there is a low fault-tolerance, or where human error can easily take a plant out of its safe
operating envelope.

Page 411
ABG
Risk assessment
The aims of risk assessment are to:
 provide a basis for identifying, evaluating, defining and justifying the selection of control measures for
eliminating or reducing risk, and to therefore lay the foundations for demonstrating the adequacy of
the standards of safety proposed for the facility;
 identify hazards that are classified, prioritized and addressed based on the risk associated with the
task (Risk analysis matrix outlining severity and probability);
 provide the employer and employees with sufficient objective knowledge, awareness and
understanding of the risks of major accidents at the facility;
 capture knowledge of risk of a major accident at the facility so it can be managed, disseminated and
maintained. The management of knowledge generated in the risk assessment will also greatly assist
the efficient development of a safety report for the facility, for example, by handling assumptions and
actions arising; and
 provide practical effect to the employer's safety report philosophy. For example, if the employer
intends to base the safety report largely on the facility’s compliance with specific codes or standards,
the risk assessment should address corresponding issues such as the basis of the codes and standards
and their applicability to the facility.
Control measures
The previous sections discussed key elements for the range of control measures that should be in place at a
jobsite. This section provides more detailed guidance on how to select and judge the effectiveness of specific
control measures. Choosing the best control measures and being able to demonstrate their effectiveness is a
critical feature of compliance with the Regulations.
Using a Risk Control Hierarchy to Determine Control Measures
In an occupational health and safety context, risk control is often categorized according to an effectiveness
hierarchy; often simply called the “risk control hierarchy”. The hierarchy lists the type of control measures in a
priority order, based on the extent each measure has an impact on risk. Once control measures are assessed,
countermeasures shall be employed to mitigate or reduce the hazards. This shall be determined by the
Supervisor, RSO, Site Safety Manager/Supervisor, or designated representative. Typically, this is performed by
dedicated assignment of task, appropriate documentation of completion of task, and implemented controls.
In the context of jobsites, a useful effectiveness hierarchy of control measures is as follows:
 eliminate hazards;

Page 412
ABG
 prevent incidents;
 reduce consequences; and
 mitigate the harm.
The different categories are defined below.
Selecting and Rejecting Control Measures
There are several factors to consider when selecting or rejecting control measures. These factors have a bearing
on the fundamentally important requirement to:
 justify the adequacy of control measures (where “adequacy” means “adequate to eliminate risk or
reduce it so far as practicable”);
 identify potential common mode failures; and
 define performance indicators for the control measures.
The text below sets out a series of core questions that the employer may consider using when selecting or
rejecting control measures:
Involving Employees in Control Measures
The Regulations require employers to consult with employees and contractors (where practicable) in all
decision-making processes associated with controlling risks. The employer should consider defining roles for
employees in relation to adopting or reviewing control measures. Through this involvement, employees are able
to provide their knowledge of how the facility is operated in practice and assist in identifying the control measures
actually in place. The employees’ knowledge may also assist in providing an understanding of how control
measures function in practice, and how they may fail or be defeated. Employees will be aware of issues such as
compatibility and maintainability of alternative control measures and are vital to the process of selecting or
rejecting control measures. The objective is to make use of employees’ knowledge and experiences in the working
of the facility.
In practice, only particular employees are involved in this way, however, all employees must be provided with
information, instruction and training on the adopted control measures. In addition, employees will be trained in
the hazard identification process, including the use and care of proper PPE, regardless of their involvement in the
review and assessment activities. This ensures that all individuals understand the control measures to the extent
necessary to perform their work safely. Evidence of genuine participation by employees in all aspects of selecting
control measures will make an important contribution to the quality of the safety report.
Reviewing and Revising Control Measures

Page 413
ABG
Control measures must remain valid or effective for the conditions at the jobsite. Ordinarily, it is improbable that
all control measures will always remain valid or effective, given changes at the facility and new knowledge about
hazards, risks and control measure options.
Reviews of control measures should be triggered whenever a situation arises that would indicate that control
measures are no longer valid or effective. For example, if there is a proposal to modify the facility, if there has
been a major accident, or if a control measure fails to meet the set performance standard.
In addition, a periodic review process helps avoid creating new hazards derived from the corrective measures.
Investigating and Analyzing Control Measures
Throughout the above steps, the employer will be reflecting upon existing or potential new control measures in
the determination of causes, likelihood, consequence and risk. It is essential to be explicit about what control
measures are being included and how they are considered to affect risk levels.

Page 414
TAILGATE SAFETY MEETING / HAZARDOUS ASSESSMENT
CUSTOMER: ____________________________ UNIT: __________ DATE: _________ TIME: ________
CONTACT: __________________________________ JOB DESCRIPTION: _________________________________
Supervisor / Operator: _______________________________ Plant Emergency Phone # _____________________
ALARMS: FIRE _________ RELEASE _________ ALL CLEAR ___________ WIND SOCK: ______________________
WIND DIRECTION: ______________ MSDS Required: Yes __ No __ MSDS Received: Yes __ No __
EVACUATION ROUTES UNIT: ________________________________________________________________
EGRESS ROUTE: _____________________________________________________________________________
Consider the following and check the items, which apply to the job, review with work crew:
Permits: Emergency Equipment: Hazards (Environmental):

_____ Required _____ Fire Extinguishers _____ Heat Stress / Heat
_____ Cold Work _____ Safety Shower / Eye Wash Exhaustion
_____ Hot Work _____ Retrieval Device _____ Heavy Objects
_____ Entry Permit _____ Rescue Package _____ Hot/Cold Surfaces or
_____ All Conditions Met _____ First Aid Kit Material
Signed Off When Complete _____ Other: __________ _____ Inadequate Lighting
_____ Lockout/Tagout _____ Noise
_____ Other: ____________ Tools: _____ Congested Area
____ Current Inspection _____ Poor Housekeeping
Personal Protection Equipment: _____ Proper Tools for Job _____ Sharp Objects
_____ Rubber Gloves _____ Good Condition _____ Other: _____________
_____ Leather Gloves _____ Qualifications
_____ Acid Suit _____ Other: ___________ Hazards (Chemical):
_____ Skin Contamination _____ Chemical Burn Skin/Eyes
_____ Safety Goggles Overhead Work: _____ Flammable
_____ Electrical Shock _____ Barricades _____ Ingestion
_____ Face Shield _____ Signs _____ Inhalation
_____ Breathing Air _____ Scaffold _____ Rubber Boots
_____ Ear Protection _____ Handrail
_____ Safety Harness _____ Other: __________ Hazards (Body):
_____ Metatarsal Boots _____ Fall Potential
_____ Respirator / Type __________ _____ Pinch Points
_____ Other: ___________________ _____ Slip/Trip Potential
_____ Other ___________
Potential Hazards:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Personnel Acknowledgement: _______________________________ _____________________________
_______________________________ _____________________________
_______________________________ _____________________________

ABG
HEAT ILLNESS PREVENTION PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................396
SCOPE407
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................407
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................407
1.0 GENERAL......................................................................................................................................................407
2.1 Site/Project Managers.............................................................................................................................408
2.2 Supervisors..............................................................................................................................................408
2.3 Employees...............................................................................................................................................408
2.4 First-Aid and Healthcare Providers..........................................................................................................408
3.0 HAZARD ASSESSMENT.................................................................................................................................408
4.0 CONTROL STRATEGIES.................................................................................................................................409
4.1 Strategies.................................................................................................................................................409
4.2 Work/Rest Regimens...............................................................................................................................410
5.0 PLAN PREPARATION.....................................................................................................................................413
6.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................413
7.0 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY..............................................................................................................................414
8.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................414
9.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................415

Page 416
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for the management of work in severe heat in order to protect employees
from the effects of heat stress.
SCOPE
 Control Strategies
 Plan Preparation
 Training
 Confined Space Entry
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Acclimatization – Is the gradual adapting of the human body to cope with higher heat exposure. Acclimatization
occurs over a period of approximately 2 weeks but may be lost within 1 week of removal of the heat exposure.
There can be a noticeable decrease in acclimatization over a weekend off work.
Heat Stress – The general term that describes a variety of symptoms produced when the human body is exposed
to a combination of heat and work that interferes with the body’s ability to dissipate the heat energy. Heat stress
is a function of total heat load and includes the level of activity and environmental conditions.
Heat Rash – Often referred to as “prickly heat”. This skin rash is caused by excess sweating or the skin being wet
with sweat. The rash usually disappears with acclimatization or removal from heat.
Heat Stroke – This is a serious, life-threatening medical condition. The person has a temperature in excess of 104
degrees F (40 degrees C), sweating often stops, the skin is hot, pulse is rapid, there may be dizziness, weakness,
headache, nausea, and visual disturbances. The person may be aggressive and irrational and convulsing. Urgent
medical attention must be sought.
Heat Exhaustion – Heat exhaustion may take many days to develop and be characterized by a progressive decline
in work performance; lack of appetite; headache; cold, clammy, pale skin; rapid, weak pulse; nausea; and
vomiting. The person may collapse.
Heat Cramp – There are painful muscle cramps of the limbs and/or abdomen, muscle twitching, tingling, or pins
and needles in the hands and feet. The person may experience tiredness and nausea. The symptoms may be due
to a salt imbalance.

Page 417
ABG
1.0 GENERAL
Heat stress generally describes the effect of heat, from any source, on the organs of the body and the person as a
whole. The stresses of heat on the body manifest themselves in 5 common ailments:
 Heat exhaustion
 Heat cramps
 Heat stroke
 Heat syncope
 Heat rash.
When heat levels become higher than 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) for whatever reason (natural weather
conditions or mechanical heat sources), a plan must be developed and implemented such that employees do not
develop heat-related illnesses. This plan can be a stand-alone document or a section in the job safety analysis
(JSA).
Different parts of the country and world have different environmental conditions that must be considered when
developing the plan.
2.1 Site/Project Managers
Site/Project Managers are responsible for compliance with this practice. Managers, both ABG and contractor,
share concurrent responsibility with HSE and occupational healthcare providers to develop the plan to avoid heat-
related illnesses.
2.2 Supervisors
When and where there is a potential for heat stress to occur, supervisors are responsible for communicating the
plan/process to employees. Supervisors will implement the plan to avoid heat-related illnesses; this will include,
but not be limited to, conducting an assessment of tasks in order to identify possible work practices or
environments that have the potential to cause heat stress.
Supervisor, and team leaders, must continually monitor their employees and instruct them to comply with plan
elements.
2.3 Employees
Employees are expected to respond to work instructions. There should be no unilateral cessation of work.
2.4 First-Aid and Healthcare Providers
Healthcare professionals will monitor employees and report to the HSE Representative all cases that involve, or
are suspected of involving, occupational heat-related illnesses. An emergency plan for handling heat-related
illness must be developed by healthcare professionals and implemented as required.

Page 418
ABG
3.0 HAZARD ASSESSMENT
An assessment of tasks will be undertaken in order to identify possible work practices or environments that have
the potential to cause heat stress. Potential heat stress situations include, but are not limited to:
 Working close to furnaces, ovens, etc.
 Working outside in hot climate conditions.
 Heavy physical work when wearing occlusive protective clothing such as acid suits
and disposable overalls.
 Working in confined spaces where there may be reduced air movement, high
humidity increased workload, and higher temperatures.
 Working in close proximity of uninsulated metal wall or roof cladding.
4.0 CONTROL STRATEGIES
4.1 Strategies
When working in heat, employees must take appropriate precautions for themselves and those working around
or adjacent to them. Strategies to control or minimize the effects of working in heat include the following:
 Obtain long-range weather forecasts and regularly update the forecasts to provide
the maximum possible warning period of inclement weather conditions.
 Consider earlier starting and finishing times to avoid the hottest part of the day.
 Program heavy, physical work for the early or cooler times of the day.
 Identify hot spots or areas of work to be avoided during extreme heat.
 Re-program work in hot spots to another time of the day or to another day.
 Hold toolbox meetings, training programs, and HSE meetings in cool areas or
air-conditioned areas at the hottest part of the day.
 Alternate work crews to provide rest periods.
 Provide regular rest periods at intervals appropriate to the work conditions in cool,
shaded, or air-conditioned environments.
 Provide ample cool drinking water at the work location.
 Consider drinks with electrolyte replacement available at the work location.
Note: It must be stressed to employees working in heat that excessive use of such
drinks may be detrimental to their health.
 Consider engineering factors to prevent heat stress, such as increasing air

movement, shielding sources of radiant heat, and insulating hot areas.
 Mechanize the task.
 Review the potential impacts of protective clothing.
 Provide regular rest periods and strictly adhere to schedule appropriate to the work
conditions and in cool/shaded or air-conditioned environments.
 Change working hours to avoid peak heat-load periods.

Page 419
ABG
 Provide suitable mineral and electrolyte replacements at the first-aid facility.

However, it must be stressed to employees working in heat that excessive use of
such drinks may be detrimental to their health.
Note: Salt tablets are not recommended.
 Provide additional personal protective equipment (PPE). Items of PPE that may be of
benefit are:
 A hat to protect face, neck, and ears. Where practicable, hard hats should be
fitted with broad brims and neck flaps.
 Sunscreens should be selected in accordance with the skin type and working
conditions of the user. In general, sunscreens should be 30+ SPF broad
spectrum water-resistant types.
 Eye protection should be provided through the use of glasses that provide
adequate UV and impact protection.
Note: PPE will be used as a control measure only where other measures are
impracticable or inadequate.
 Reduce heat source (such as install shaded areas, cooling fans, and insulation).
or adjacent to them.
4.2 Work/Rest Regimens
Heat stress is dependent on the activity level and the environment around the employee. Specialized help to
assess the risk must be consulted when radiant heat is a major contributor. When no radiant heat is present, the
following can be used as guidance for the maximum exposure time to high temperature.
Estimate the activity level with the aid of Table 1. Read the maximum exposure temperature (wet temperature)
in Table 2 — this is the maximum exposure temperature at 100 percent humidity. Usually the humidity is lower,
more heat can be removed by sweating, and a higher dry temperature is allowed. This dry temperature is the
temperature normally referenced and can be derived from the wet temperature and the relative humidity with
the aid of Chart 3.

Page 420
ABG
Table 1 – Activity Level

# Class Example
description
0 Resting Resting
1 Low activity rate Sitting at ease: light manual work (writing, typing,
drawing, sewing, book-keeping); hand and arm work
(small bench tools, inspection, assembly or sorting of
light materials; arm and leg work (driving vehicle in
normal conditions, operating foot switch or pedal).
Standing: drill (small parts); milling machine (small parts);

coil winding; small armature winding; machining with low
power tools; casual walking (speed up to 2.2 mph [3.5
km/h]
2 Moderate Sustained hand and arm work (hammering in nails,
activity rate filling); arm and leg work (off-road operation of lorries,
tractors ,or field execution equipment); arm and trunk
work (work with pneumatic hammer, tractor assembly,
plastering, intermittent handling of moderately heavy
material, weeding, hoeing, picking fruit or vegetables);
pushing or pulling light weight carts or wheelbarrows;
walking at a speed of 2.2 to 3.4 mph (3.5 to 5.5 km/h)
forging
3 High activity Intense arm and trunk work; carrying heavy material;
rate shoveling; sledge hammer work; sawing, planning, or
chiseling hard wood; hand mowing; digging; walking at a
speed of 3.4 to 4.3 mph (5.5 to 7 km/h)
Pushing or pulling heavily loaded handcarts or

wheelbarrows; chipping castings; concrete block laying
4 Very high Very intense activity at fast to maximum pace; working
activity rate with an axe; intense shoveling or digging; climbing stairs,
running, walking at a speed greater than 4.3 mph (7
km/h)
Table 2 – Maximum Exposure Temperatures (wet temperature at 100% humidity)
Class Maximum exposure temperature (F / C, wet at 100%

#
description humidity)
Person not acclimatized
Person acclimatized to heat
to heat

Page 421
ABG
0 Resting 91 F/33 C 90 F/32 C

1 Low activity rate 86 F/30 C 84 F/29 C
Moderate
2 82 F/28 C 79 F/26 C
activity rate
No sensible No sensible
Sensible air Sensible air
High activity air air
3 movement movement
rate movement movement
79 F/26 C 73 F/23 C
77 F/25 C 72 F/22 C
Very high
4 73 F/23 C 77 F/25 C 64 F/18 C 68 F/20 C
activity rate
Chart 3 – Conversion Wet Temperature to Dry Temperature
Example: What is the corresponding dry temperature for 30 ºC (wet) when humidity is at 60 percent?

Page 422
ABG
Look up the top curved line with the indication 100 percent.
Find 30 ºC.
Follow the straight line towards the right-hand bottom corner till curved line indicating 60
percent is met.
Follow the vertical line to the bottom of the chart.
Read the temperature (= 37 ºC).
Note: ºC = (ºF x 5/9) –32
ºF = (ºC x 9/5) + 32
5.0 PLAN PREPARATION
The plan should contain the following:

 Conditions in the workplace that are based upon environmental factors including
ambient temperature, relative humidity, air velocity, and thermal radiation.
Note: Document results of measurements on Form 000.653.F0283 (Heat Stress/WBGT

Monitoring Log) or similar.
 On the basis of temperatures measured, a ratio of work time versus rest periods,
with work periods decreasing while rest periods increase as temperature/humidity
rises.
 A medical monitoring regimen for those employees exposed to heat stress, especially
those who are likely to be susceptible to heat stress (the obese, unacclimatized with
cardio circulatory diseases, and employees who may be taking medications or using
alcohol heavily).
 A process for handling heat stroke and severe heat exhaustion (heat-related medical
emergencies)
 Training to include dietary needs, water consumption, and avoidance of alcohol.
An example plan is provided in Attachment 01.
6.0 TRAINING
Supervisors and their employees who are potentially exposed to heat stress-inducing conditions must receive
training to include the following topics:
 Physiological aspects of heat stress
 Causes of heat related illness:
 High air temperature/humidity
 Lack of air movement
 Radiant heat
 Lack of fluids
 Lack of acclimatization
 High rate of physical activity

Page 423
ABG
 Symptoms of heat stress

 Heat stress – tiredness, irritability, cramps, cool clammy skin, profuse sweating
 Heat stroke – headache, nausea/vomiting, dizziness, irritability, confusion, dry
skin, flushed, increased body temperature
 Influence of radiated, convected, and metabolic heat; air movement; clothing; and
work rates
 Importance of fluid intake
 Detrimental effects of alcohol
 Work/rest regimens
 Control strategies
 Measures for the prevention of heat-related illness are as follows:
 Drink approximately 2-3 gallons (8-11 liters) of water per day.
 Schedule physical work during cooler periods of the day.
 Avoid alcohol and excessive sugar drinks.
 Regular rest breaks.
 Wear appropriate clothing.
 Protect from direct sun.
 Acclimatization.
Supervisors must receive training on identifying heat-related illness as follow:

 Remove the affected employee to a cool area as soon as possible.
 Seek medical or paramedic assistance.
 Attempt to cool the body by means of water.
 Where possible give the affected employee water to drink.
First-aid providers must receive specific training in the recognition, treatment, and management of heat stress
victims.
Training will be conducted as follows:
 During site orientation
 Before commencement of the job/task that poses the risk
 Before the risk period (such as start of summer months)
7.0 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
Where a potential heat stress situation is identified in a confined space workers entering the space will receive
specific instructions regarding the precautions necessary
The heat-related hazard will be recorded on the confined space entry permit.
The standby person/attendant will be trained in the recognition and initial, first-aid
treatment of heat-related illnesses.

Page 424
ABG
8.0 REFERENCES

000.653.F0283 Heat Stress/WBGT Monitoring Log
9.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Sample Heat Stress Plan
HEAT ILLNESS PREVENTION PROGRAM CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE407
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................407
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................407
TABLE OF CONTENTS..............................................................................................................................................406
GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................407
1.1 Site/Project Managers.............................................................................................................................408
1.2 Supervisors..............................................................................................................................................408
1.3 Employees...............................................................................................................................................408
1.4 First-Aid and Healthcare Providers..........................................................................................................408
2.0 HAZARD ASSESSMENT.................................................................................................................................408
3.0 CONTROL STRATEGIES.................................................................................................................................409
3.1 Strategies.................................................................................................................................................409
3.2 Work/Rest Regimens...............................................................................................................................410
4.0 PLAN PREPARATION.....................................................................................................................................413
5.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................413
7.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................414
8.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................415

Page 425
ABG
This practice defines the requirements for the management of work in severe heat in order to protect employees
from the effects of heat stress.
SCOPE
 Control Strategies
 Plan Preparation
 Training
 Confined Space Entry
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Acclimatization – Is the gradual adapting of the human body to cope with higher heat exposure. Acclimatization
occurs over a period of approximately 2 weeks but may be lost within 1 week of removal of the heat exposure.
There can be a noticeable decrease in acclimatization over a weekend off work.
Heat Stress – The general term that describes a variety of symptoms produced when the human body is exposed
to a combination of heat and work that interferes with the body’s ability to dissipate the heat energy. Heat stress
is a function of total heat load and includes the level of activity and environmental conditions.
Heat Rash – Often referred to as “prickly heat”. This skin rash is caused by excess sweating or the skin being wet
with sweat. The rash usually disappears with acclimatization or removal from heat.
Heat Stroke – This is a serious, life-threatening medical condition. The person has a temperature in excess of 104
degrees F (40 degrees C), sweating often stops, the skin is hot, pulse is rapid, there may be dizziness, weakness,
headache, nausea, and visual disturbances. The person may be aggressive and irrational and convulsing. Urgent
medical attention must be sought.
Heat Exhaustion – Heat exhaustion may take many days to develop and be characterized by a progressive decline
in work performance; lack of appetite; headache; cold, clammy, pale skin; rapid, weak pulse; nausea; and
vomiting. The person may collapse.
Heat Cramp – There are painful muscle cramps of the limbs and/or abdomen, muscle twitching, tingling, or pins
and needles in the hands and feet. The person may experience tiredness and nausea. The symptoms may be due
to a salt imbalance.
GENERAL
Heat stress generally describes the effect of heat, from any source, on the organs of the body and the person as a
whole. The stresses of heat on the body manifest themselves in 5 common ailments:

Page 426
ABG
 Heat exhaustion
 Heat cramps
 Heat stroke
 Heat syncope
 Heat rash.
When heat levels become higher than 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) for whatever reason (natural weather
conditions or mechanical heat sources), a plan must be developed and implemented such that employees do not
develop heat-related illnesses. This plan can be a stand-alone document or a section in the job safety analysis
(JSA).
Different parts of the country and world have different environmental conditions that must be considered when
developing the plan.
10.1 Site/Project Managers
Site/Project Managers are responsible for compliance with this practice. Managers, both ABG and contractor,
share concurrent responsibility with HSE and occupational healthcare providers to develop the plan to avoid heat-
related illnesses.
10.2 Supervisors
When and where there is a potential for heat stress to occur, supervisors are responsible for communicating the
plan/process to employees. Supervisors will implement the plan to avoid heat-related illnesses; this will include,
but not be limited to, conducting an assessment of tasks in order to identify possible work practices or
environments that have the potential to cause heat stress.
Supervisor, and team leaders, must continually monitor their employees and instruct them to comply with plan
elements.
10.3 Employees
Employees are expected to respond to work instructions. There should be no unilateral cessation of work.
10.4 First-Aid and Healthcare Providers
Healthcare professionals will monitor employees and report to the HSE Representative all cases that involve, or
are suspected of involving, occupational heat-related illnesses. An emergency plan for handling heat-related
illness must be developed by healthcare professionals and implemented as required.
11.0 HAZARD ASSESSMENT
An assessment of tasks will be undertaken in order to identify possible work practices or environments that have
the potential to cause heat stress. Potential heat stress situations include, but are not limited to:
 Working close to furnaces, ovens, etc.
 Working outside in hot climate conditions.

Page 427
ABG
 Heavy physical work when wearing occlusive protective clothing such as acid suits
and disposable overalls.
 Working in confined spaces where there may be reduced air movement, high
humidity increased workload, and higher temperatures.
 Working in close proximity of uninsulated metal wall or roof cladding.
12.0 CONTROL STRATEGIES
12.1 Strategies
or adjacent to them. Strategies to control or minimize the effects of working in heat include the following:
 Obtain long-range weather forecasts and regularly update the forecasts to provide
the maximum possible warning period of inclement weather conditions.
 Consider earlier starting and finishing times to avoid the hottest part of the day.
 Program heavy, physical work for the early or cooler times of the day.
 Identify hot spots or areas of work to be avoided during extreme heat.
 Re-program work in hot spots to another time of the day or to another day.
 Hold toolbox meetings, training programs, and HSE meetings in cool areas or
air-conditioned areas at the hottest part of the day.
 Alternate work crews to provide rest periods.
 Provide regular rest periods at intervals appropriate to the work conditions in cool,
shaded, or air-conditioned environments.
 Provide ample cool drinking water at the work location.
 Consider drinks with electrolyte replacement available at the work location.
Note: It must be stressed to employees working in heat that excessive use of such
drinks may be detrimental to their health.
 Consider engineering factors to prevent heat stress, such as increasing air

movement, shielding sources of radiant heat, and insulating hot areas.
 Mechanize the task.
 Review the potential impacts of protective clothing.
 Provide regular rest periods and strictly adhere to schedule appropriate to the work
conditions and in cool/shaded or air-conditioned environments.
 Change working hours to avoid peak heat-load periods.
 Provide suitable mineral and electrolyte replacements at the first-aid facility.
However, it must be stressed to employees working in heat that excessive use of
such drinks may be detrimental to their health.
Note: Salt tablets are not recommended.
 Provide additional personal protective equipment (PPE). Items of PPE that may be of
benefit are:

Page 428
ABG
 A hat to protect face, neck, and ears. Where practicable, hard hats should be
fitted with broad brims and neck flaps.
 Sunscreens should be selected in accordance with the skin type and working
conditions of the user. In general, sunscreens should be 30+ SPF broad
spectrum water-resistant types.
 Eye protection should be provided through the use of glasses that provide
adequate UV and impact protection.
Note: PPE will be used as a control measure only where other measures are
impracticable or inadequate.
 Reduce heat source (such as install shaded areas, cooling fans, and insulation).
or adjacent to them.
12.2 Work/Rest Regimens
Heat stress is dependent on the activity level and the environment around the employee. Specialized help to
assess the risk must be consulted when radiant heat is a major contributor. When no radiant heat is present, the
following can be used as guidance for the maximum exposure time to high temperature.
Estimate the activity level with the aid of Table 1. Read the maximum exposure temperature (wet temperature)
in Table 2 — this is the maximum exposure temperature at 100 percent humidity. Usually the humidity is lower,
more heat can be removed by sweating, and a higher dry temperature is allowed. This dry temperature is the
temperature normally referenced and can be derived from the wet temperature and the relative humidity with
the aid of Chart 3.

Page 429
ABG
Table 1 – Activity Level

# Class Example
description
0 Resting Resting
1 Low activity rate Sitting at ease: light manual work (writing, typing,
drawing, sewing, book-keeping); hand and arm work
(small bench tools, inspection, assembly or sorting of
light materials; arm and leg work (driving vehicle in
normal conditions, operating foot switch or pedal).
Standing: drill (small parts); milling machine (small parts);

coil winding; small armature winding; machining with low
power tools; casual walking (speed up to 2.2 mph [3.5
km/h]
2 Moderate Sustained hand and arm work (hammering in nails,
activity rate filling); arm and leg work (off-road operation of lorries,
tractors ,or field execution equipment); arm and trunk
work (work with pneumatic hammer, tractor assembly,
plastering, intermittent handling of moderately heavy
material, weeding, hoeing, picking fruit or vegetables);
pushing or pulling light weight carts or wheelbarrows;
walking at a speed of 2.2 to 3.4 mph (3.5 to 5.5 km/h)
forging
3 High activity Intense arm and trunk work; carrying heavy material;
rate shoveling; sledge hammer work; sawing, planning, or
chiseling hard wood; hand mowing; digging; walking at a
speed of 3.4 to 4.3 mph (5.5 to 7 km/h)
Pushing or pulling heavily loaded handcarts or

wheelbarrows; chipping castings; concrete block laying
4 Very high Very intense activity at fast to maximum pace; working
activity rate with an axe; intense shoveling or digging; climbing stairs,
running, walking at a speed greater than 4.3 mph (7
km/h)
Table 2 – Maximum Exposure Temperatures (wet temperature at 100% humidity)
Class Maximum exposure temperature (F / C, wet at 100%

#
description humidity)
Person not acclimatized
Person acclimatized to heat
to heat

Page 430
ABG
0 Resting 91 F/33 C 90 F/32 C

1 Low activity rate 86 F/30 C 84 F/29 C
Moderate
2 82 F/28 C 79 F/26 C
activity rate
No sensible No sensible
Sensible air Sensible air
High activity air air
3 movement movement
rate movement movement
79 F/26 C 73 F/23 C
77 F/25 C 72 F/22 C
Very high
4 73 F/23 C 77 F/25 C 64 F/18 C 68 F/20 C
activity rate
Chart 3 – Conversion Wet Temperature to Dry Temperature
Example: What is the corresponding dry temperature for 30 ºC (wet) when humidity is at 60 percent?

Page 431
ABG
Look up the top curved line with the indication 100 percent.
Find 30 ºC.
Follow the straight line towards the right-hand bottom corner till curved line indicating 60
percent is met.
Follow the vertical line to the bottom of the chart.
Read the temperature (= 37 ºC).
Note: ºC = (ºF x 5/9) –32
ºF = (ºC x 9/5) + 32
13.0 PLAN PREPARATION
The plan should contain the following:

 Conditions in the workplace that are based upon environmental factors including
ambient temperature, relative humidity, air velocity, and thermal radiation.
Note: Document results of measurements on Form 000.653.F0283 (Heat Stress/WBGT

Monitoring Log) or similar.
 On the basis of temperatures measured, a ratio of work time versus rest periods,
with work periods decreasing while rest periods increase as temperature/humidity
rises.
 A medical monitoring regimen for those employees exposed to heat stress, especially
those who are likely to be susceptible to heat stress (the obese, unacclimatized with
cardio circulatory diseases, and employees who may be taking medications or using
alcohol heavily).
 A process for handling heat stroke and severe heat exhaustion (heat-related medical
emergencies)
 Training to include dietary needs, water consumption, and avoidance of alcohol.
An example plan is provided in Attachment 01.
14.0 TRAINING
Supervisors and their employees who are potentially exposed to heat stress-inducing conditions must receive
training to include the following topics:
 Physiological aspects of heat stress
 Causes of heat related illness:
 High air temperature/humidity
 Lack of air movement
 Radiant heat
 Lack of fluids
 Lack of acclimatization
 High rate of physical activity

Page 432
ABG
 Symptoms of heat stress

 Heat stress – tiredness, irritability, cramps, cool clammy skin, profuse sweating
 Heat stroke – headache, nausea/vomiting, dizziness, irritability, confusion, dry
skin, flushed, increased body temperature
 Influence of radiated, convected, and metabolic heat; air movement; clothing; and
work rates
 Importance of fluid intake
 Detrimental effects of alcohol
 Work/rest regimens
 Control strategies
 Measures for the prevention of heat-related illness are as follows:
 Drink approximately 2-3 gallons (8-11 liters) of water per day.
 Schedule physical work during cooler periods of the day.
 Avoid alcohol and excessive sugar drinks.
 Regular rest breaks.
 Wear appropriate clothing.
 Protect from direct sun.
 Acclimatization.
Supervisors must receive training on identifying heat-related illness as follow:

 Remove the affected employee to a cool area as soon as possible.
 Seek medical or paramedic assistance.
 Attempt to cool the body by means of water.
 Where possible give the affected employee water to drink.
First-aid providers must receive specific training in the recognition, treatment, and management of heat stress
victims.
Training will be conducted as follows:
 During site orientation
 Before commencement of the job/task that poses the risk
 Before the risk period (such as start of summer months)
Where a potential heat stress situation is identified in a confined space workers entering the space will receive
specific instructions regarding the precautions necessary
The heat-related hazard will be recorded on the confined space entry permit.
The standby person/attendant will be trained in the recognition and initial, first-aid
treatment of heat-related illnesses.

Page 433
ABG
16.0 REFERENCES

000.653.F0283 Heat Stress/WBGT Monitoring Log
17.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Sample Heat Stress Plan

Page 434
ABG
HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM POLICY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 416

Applicability............................................................................................................................................................418
Exposure Limitations..............................................................................................................................................418
Definitions..............................................................................................................................................................419
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)............................................................................................................................420
Calculation of Time-Weighted Average Exposures.............................................................................................420
Employee Notification........................................................................................................................................421
Exposure Monitoring..........................................................................................................................................422
Observation of Monitoring.................................................................................................................................422
Regulated Areas.................................................................................................................................................422
Establishment.....................................................................................................................................................422
Demarcation.......................................................................................................................................................422
Access 422
Methods of Compliance.....................................................................................................................................423
Respiratory Protection............................................................................................................................................424
Protective Work Clothing and Equipment..............................................................................................................425
Provision and Use...............................................................................................................................................425
Removal and Storage.........................................................................................................................................426
Cleaning and Replacement.................................................................................................................................426
Hygiene Areas and Practices..............................................................................................................................427
Change Rooms....................................................................................................................................................427
Washing Facilities...............................................................................................................................................427
Eating and Drinking Areas..................................................................................................................................428
Prohibited Activities...........................................................................................................................................428
Housekeeping.....................................................................................................................................................428
General Requirements.......................................................................................................................................428
Cleaning Methods..............................................................................................................................................428
Disposal of Contaminated Materials..................................................................................................................429
Employees Provided Medical Surveillance.........................................................................................................429
Frequency of Medical Examinations...................................................................................................................430
Contents of the Examination..............................................................................................................................430
Information Provided to the PLHCP...................................................................................................................430
The Written Medical Opinion.............................................................................................................................431
Health Administration........................................................................................................................................431
Communication of CR (VI) Hazards to Employees..............................................................................................431
Training..............................................................................................................................................................432
Recordkeeping...................................................................................................................................................432
Air Monitoring Data............................................................................................................................................432
Historical Monitoring Data.................................................................................................................................433

Page 435
ABG
Objective Data....................................................................................................................................................433
Medical Surveillance..........................................................................................................................................433
One Page Summary of the Hazards of Chromium VI..........................................................................................434
Cancer ..............................................................................................................................................................434
Eyes ..............................................................................................................................................................434
Respiratory Tract................................................................................................................................................434
Skin ..............................................................................................................................................................434
1.1. Considered and Excluded........................................................................................................................441
1.2. Information from Other Sources.............................................................................................................441

Page 436
ABG
Scope
The standards apply to all occupational exposures to Cr (VI), with only limited exceptions. OSHA has separate
standards for Cr (VI) exposures in general industry, shipyards, and construction. Most of the requirements are the
same for all sectors.
Applicability
ABG will implement effective engineering and work practice controls if the exposure level on any project is above
the permissible limit for more than 30 days per year.
Cr (VI) is present in many different compounds that have a variety of industrial applications. Examples of major
industrial uses of Cr (VI) compounds include: chromate pigments in dyes, paints, inks, and plastics; chromates
added as anticorrosive agents to paints, primers, and other surface coatings; and chromic acid electroplated onto
metal parts to provide a decorative or protective coating.
 Examples of Cr (VI) compounds include:

o ammonium dichromate ((NH4)2Cr2O7);
o calcium chromate (CaCrO4);
o chromium trioxide or chromic acid (CrO3);
o lead chromate (PbCrO4);
o potassium chromate (K2CrO4);
o potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7);
o sodium chromate (Na2CrO4);
o strontium chromate (SrCrO4); and
o zinc chromate (ZnCrO4).
ABG can consult their suppliers or examine material safety data sheets (MSDS) to identify Cr (VI)-containing
materials that are present in the workplace. Cr (VI) can also be formed when performing “hot work” such as
welding on stainless steel, melting chromium metal, or heating refractory bricks in kilns. In these situations the
chromium is not originally hexavalent, but the high temperatures involved in the process result in oxidation that
converts the chromium to a hexavalent state.
The Cr (VI) standards do not apply in three situations:
 Exposures that occur in the application of pesticides;

 Exposures to Portland cement; and
 Where the company has objective data demonstrating that Cr (VI) concentrations cannot exceed 0.5
micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8-hour time-weighted average under any expected conditions of
use.

Page 437
ABG
Exposure Limitations
No employee shall be exposed in excess of the PEL of 5 micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8-hour TWA.
Definitions
Definitions are included in the standards to describe the meaning of a number of terms used. Some of these terms
are further explained as follows:
Action level is defined as an airborne concentration of2.5 micrograms of Cr (VI) per cubic meter of air (2.5 μg/m3)
calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted average(TWA) (i.e., employee exposures to Cr (VI) average 2.5μg/m3 over
an eight-hour time period). Exposures at or above the action level trigger certain requirements for exposure
monitoring and medical surveillance.
Chromium (VI) [Hexavalent chromium or Cr (VI)] means chromium with a valence of positive six, in any form or
chemical compound in which it occurs. This term includes Cr (VI) in all states of matter, in any solution or other
mixture, even if it is encapsulated by another substance. The term also includes Cr (VI) when it is created by an
industrial process, such as when welding on stainless steel generates Cr (VI) fume.
Emergency means any occurrence that results, or is likely to result, in an uncontrolled release of Cr (VI). Such an
occurrence may be the result of equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment. To
constitute an emergency, the exposure must be unexpected and significant. If an incidental release of Cr (VI) can
be controlled at the time of the release by employees in the immediate release area, or by maintenance
personnel, it is not considered an emergency. For example, a minor spill that can be cleaned up by an employee
with minimal airborne or dermal exposure to Cr (VI) would not be considered an emergency. Instances that do
constitute an emergency trigger requirements for medical surveillance and the use of respiratory protection.
Employee exposure means exposure to Cr (VI) that would occur if the employee were not using a respirator. Thus,
exposure levels should be determined outside of the respirator for those employees wearing a respirator.
Historical monitoring data is data from Cr (VI) exposure monitoring conducted prior to May 30, 2006 (the effective
date of this Cr (VI) standard). In order for a company to rely upon historical data, the data must have been
obtained during work operations conducted under workplace conditions that closely resemble the processes,
types of material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions in the company’s current
operations. Historical monitoring data must also comply with confidence and accuracy requirements specified in
the exposure determination section of the standard.
Objective data means information, other than employee monitoring that demonstrates the expected employee
exposure to Cr (VI) associated with a particular product or material or a specific process, operation, or activity.
Information that can serve as objective data includes, but is not limited to, air monitoring data from industry-wide
surveys; data collected by a trade association from its members; or calculations based on the composition or

Page 438
ABG
chemical and physical properties of a material. Use of objective data is discussed in the exposure determination
section under the “performance-oriented” option.
Physician or other licensed health care professional [PLHCP] is an individual whose legally permitted scope of
practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently provide or be delegated the
responsibility to provide some or all of the particular health care services required by the medical surveillance
provisions of this standard.
Regulated area means an area, demarcated by the company, where an employee’s exposure to airborne
concentrations of Cr (VI) exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the PEL. The company has the
responsibility to determine and demarcate the boundaries of the regulated area. OSHA has not included
requirements for regulated areas in construction or shipyard workplaces.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
Calculation of Time-Weighted Average Exposures
Both the PEL and the action level are expressed as time-weighted average (TWA) exposures. TWA measurements
account for variable exposure levels over the course of a work shift, averaging periods of higher and lower
exposures. The TWA exposure for an 8-hour work shift is computed using a simple formula:
TWA = (Ca Ta+Cb Tb+. . .Cn Tn) ÷8

Where:
TWA is the time-weighted average exposure for the work shift; C is the concentration during any period of time
(T) where the concentration remains constant; and T is the duration in hours of the exposure at the concentration
(C).
For example, assume that an employee is subject to the following exposure to Cr (VI):
Two hours exposure at 10 μg/m3

Two hours exposure at 5 μg/m3
Four hours exposure at 1 μg/m3
Substituting this information in the formula, we have:
(2x10 + 2x5 + 4x1)÷8 = 4.25 μg/m3
Since 4.25 μg/m3 is more than 2.5 μg/m3, the action level has been exceeded. However, as 4.25 μg/m3 is less
than 5 μg/m3, the PEL has not been exceeded.
The standards establish an 8-hour time-weighted average exposure limit of 5 micrograms of Cr (VI) per cubic
meter of air (5 μg/m3). This means that over the course of any 8-hour work shift, the average exposure to Cr (VI)
cannot exceed 5 μg/m3.

Page 439
ABG
ABG must determine the 8-hour time-weighted average exposure to Cr (VI) for each employee exposed to Cr (VI).
This assessment allows the company to identify and prevent overexposures; collect exposure data so that proper
control methods can be selected; and evaluate the effectiveness of those methods. An accurate exposure
determination also provides important information concerning occupational Cr (VI) exposures to the physician or
other licensed health care professional who performs medical examinations on employees. ABG can choose
between two options for performing exposure determinations: a scheduled monitoring option, or a performance-
oriented option. In addition, ABG must comply with certain requirements regarding employee notification of the
results of the exposure determination, accuracy of measurement methods, and observation of monitoring.
Requirements for periodic monitoring depend on the results of initial monitoring. If the initial monitoring
indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, no further monitoring is required unless changes in
the workplace may result in new or additional exposures. If the initial monitoring reveals employee exposures to
be at or above the action level but at or below the PEL, the company must perform periodic monitoring at least
every six months. If the initial monitoring reveals employee exposures to be above the PEL, the company must
perform periodic monitoring at least every three months. If periodic monitoring results indicate that employee
exposures have fallen below the action level, and those results are confirmed by consecutive measurements taken
at least seven days apart, the company may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are
represented by such monitoring. Similarly, after initial monitoring shows exposures above the PEL, if periodic
measurements indicate that exposures are at or below the PEL but are at or above the action level, the company
may reduce the frequency of the monitoring to at least every six months.
ABG must perform additional monitoring when workplace changes may result in new or additional exposures to
Cr (VI). These changes include alterations in the production process, raw materials, equipment, personnel, work
practices, or control methods used in the workplace.
In addition, there may be other situations which can result in new or additional exposures to Cr (VI) which are
unique to a company’s work situation. For instance, a welder may move from an open, outdoor location to an
enclosed or confined space. Even though the task performed and materials used may remain constant, the
changed environment could reasonably be expected to result in higher exposures to Cr (VI). In these special
situations, OSHA requires the company to perform additional monitoring whenever the company has any reason
to believe that a change has occurred which may result in new or additional exposures to Cr (VI). Additional
monitoring is not required simply because a change has been made, if the change is not reasonably expected to
result in new or additional exposures to Cr (VI). For example, monitoring may be conducted in an establishment
when welding was performed on steel with 15%chromium content. If the establishment switches to steel with
10% chromium content without changing any other aspect of the work operation, then additional exposures to Cr
(VI) would not reasonably be expected, and additional monitoring would not be required.
Employee Notification
ABG must notify each affected employee if the exposure determination indicates that their exposure to Cr (VI)
exceeds the PEL. “Affected employees” are all employees considered to be exposed above the PEL, including
those employees who are not actually subject to personal monitoring, but who are represented by an employee
who is sampled. Affected employees also include employees whose exposures have been deemed to be above the

Page 440
ABG
PEL on the basis of historical or objective data. The company must either notify each affected employee in writing
or post the determination results in an appropriate location accessible to all affected employees (e.g., a bulletin
board accessible to all employees). In addition, the written notification must describe the corrective action(s)
being taken by the company to reduce the employee’s exposure to or below the PEL (e.g., use of respirators or
the engineering controls that will be implemented).
The general industry standard requires ABG to notify employees within 15 working days from when monitoring
results are received (or when the exposure determination is made for those following the performance-oriented
option). In construction and shipyards, ABG must notify each affected employee as soon as possible but not more
than 5 working days later. A shorter time period for notification is mandated in construction and shipyards
because of the often short duration of operations and employment in particular locations in these sectors.
Exposure Monitoring
ABG shall provide for monitoring or measuring of employee exposure. Periodic monitoring shall be conducted at
least every 6 months if initial monitoring shows employee exposure. Air monitoring will be performed at the
beginning of each job task. If exposure monitoring results indicate exposure is above the PEL, employer must
include in written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce exposure to or below the PEL.
ABG must provide affected employees or their designated representatives an opportunity to observe any
monitoring of employee exposure to Cr (VI) required by this standard. When observation of monitoring requires
entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required, the company must provide the
observer with these items, and assure that the observer uses them and complies with all other safety and health
procedures.
Regulated Areas
The Cr (VI) standard for general industry includes requirements for regulated areas. The purpose of a regulated
area is to ensure that employees are aware of the presence of Cr (VI) at levels above the PEL, and to limit Cr (VI)
exposure to as few employees as possible by requiring the company to mark areas where employee exposure is
likely to exceed the PEL and limit access to these areas to authorized persons. The standard includes provisions for
establishment of regulated areas; demarcation of regulated areas; and access to regulated areas. The
requirements are not included in the standards for construction or shipyards because they are considered
generally impracticable in these environments.
Establishment
ABG must establish regulated areas wherever an employee’s exposure to Cr (VI) is, or can reasonably be expected
to be, in excess of the PEL. Information obtained during the exposure determination can be used along with

Page 441
ABG
reasonable judgment to determine where regulated areas are required, and to establish the boundaries of
regulated areas.
Demarcation
Regulated areas must be distinguished from the rest of the workplace in a manner that adequately establishes
and alerts employees of the boundaries of the regulated area. The standard does not specify how ABG is to
demarcate regulated areas. Warning signs, barricades, lines and textured flooring, or other methods may be
appropriate. Whatever methods are chosen must effectively warn employees not to enter the area unless they
are authorized, and then only if they are using proper protective equipment, such as respirators.
Access
ABG must limit access to regulated areas. The only individuals allowed access to a regulated area are:
 Persons authorized by the company and required by work duties to be present in the regulated area (this
may include maintenance and repair personnel, management, quality control engineers, or other
personnel if job duties require their presence in the regulated area);
 Any person entering the area as a designated representative of employees to observe Cr (VI) exposure
monitoring; or
 Any person authorized by the Occupational Safety and Health Act or regulations issued under it to be in a
regulated area (e.g., OSHA enforcement personnel).
Methods of Compliance
ABG must use engineering and work practice controls as the primary means to reduce and maintain employee
exposures to Cr (VI) to or below the PEL, unless the company can demonstrate that such control measures are not
feasible. Engineering controls include:
 Substitution (e.g., using a less toxic material instead of Cr (VI), or substituting a process that results in
lower exposures for another type of process that results in higher exposures);
 Isolation (e.g., enclosing the source of exposure, or placing a barrier between employees and the source
of exposure); and
 Ventilation (e.g., local exhaust systems that capture airborne Cr (VI) near its source and remove it from
the workplace, or general ventilation that dilutes Cr (VI) concentrations by circulating large quantities of
air – a local exhaust system is generally preferred to dilution ventilation because it provides a cleaner and
healthier work environment).
Work practice controls involve adjustments in the way a task is performed. In many cases, work practice controls
complement engineering controls in providing employee protection. For example, periodic inspection and
maintenance of control equipment such as ventilation systems is an important work practice control. Frequently,

Page 442
ABG
equipment which is in disrepair will not perform normally. If equipment is routinely inspected, maintained, and
repaired or replaced before failure is likely, there is less chance that hazardous exposures will occur.
Employees must know the way to perform their job tasks in order to minimize their exposure to Cr (VI) and to
maximize the effectiveness of control measures. For example, if an exhaust hood is designed to provide local
ventilation and an employee performs a task that generates Cr (VI) aerosols away from the exhaust hood, the
control measure will be of no use. Good supervision further ensures that proper work practices are carried out by
employees. Employees’ exposures can also be controlled by scheduling operations with the highest exposures at a
time when the fewest employees are present.
For example, routine cleanup operations that involve Cr (VI) releases might be performed at night or at times
when the usual production staff is not present. If feasible engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient
to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL, the company must use them to reduce the exposure to the
lowest level achievable. Respirators must then be used to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. The
standards require primary reliance on engineering and work practice controls because they are generally reliable,
provide consistent protection to a large number of employees, can be monitored, and can efficiently remove Cr
(VI) from the workplace. Although an important method of protecting employees, effective use of respirators is
more difficult to achieve. Use of respirators in the workplace also presents other safety and health concerns due
to the physiological burdens on employees using respirators, and limitations on auditory, visual, and odor
sensations.
There are two exceptions to the general requirement for primary use of engineering and work practice controls to
reduce employee exposure to within permissible limits.
 The first exception applies to the painting of aircraft or large aircraft parts (e.g., the interior or exterior of
whole aircraft, aircraft wings or tail sections, or comparably sized aircraft parts) in the aerospace industry.
When such painting is performed, the company must use engineering and work practice controls to
reduce employee Cr (VI) exposures to or below 25 μg/m3 unless the company can demonstrate that such
controls are not feasible. Use of respirators is then required to limit exposures to or below the PEL.
 The second exception to the general requirement for primary reliance on engineering and work practice
controls applies where ABG do not have employee exposures above the PEL for 30 or more days per year
(12 consecutive months) from a particular process or task. Thus, if a particular process or task results in
employee exposures to Cr (VI) that exceed the PEL on 29 or fewer days during any 12 consecutive months,
the company is allowed to use any combination of controls, including respirators alone, to achieve the
PEL. The burden of proof is on the company to demonstrate that a process or task will not cause
employee exposures to remain above the PEL for 30 or more days per year. Historical data, objective data,
or exposure monitoring data may be used for this purpose. Other information, such as production orders
showing that processes involving Cr (VI) exposures are conducted on fewer than 30 days per year, may
also be used.
ABG is not permitted to rotate employees to different jobs as a means of achieving compliance with the PEL.
However, there is no general prohibition on employee rotation. ABG may rotate employees for other reasons,
such as to provide cross-training on different tasks or to allow employees to alternate physically demanding tasks
with less strenuous activities.

Page 443
ABG
Respiratory Protection
When engineering and work practice controls cannot reduce employee exposure to Cr (VI) to within the PEL, ABG
must provide employees with respirators. Specifically, respirators are required during:
 Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls;
 Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities, for which engineering and work practice
controls are not feasible;
 Work operations for which an company has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice
controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL;
 Work operations where employees are exposed above the PEL for fewer than 30 days per year, and the
company has elected not to implement engineering and work practice controls to achieve the PEL; or
 Emergencies (i.e., uncontrolled releases of Cr (VI) that result in significant and unexpected exposures; see
definition of “Emergency” at pg. 5).
Where respirator use is required, the company must establish a respiratory protection program in accordance
with OSHA’s Respiratory Protection standard (29 CFR 1910.134). The respiratory protection program addresses
procedures for properly selecting and using respirators in the workplace. OSHA has prepared a separate Small
Entity Compliance Guide for the Respiratory Protection standard (available at
http://www.osha.gov/pls/publications/pubindex.list# 118), which provides additional information on the
requirements of that standard.
Protective Work Clothing and Equipment
ABG must provide appropriate protective clothing and equipment wherever skin or eye contact with Cr (VI) is
likely to present a hazard to employees. The company is also required to ensure that employees use the clothing
and equipment provided, and follow a number of specified practices to ensure that protective clothing and
equipment is used and handled in a manner that is protective of employee health. Protective work clothing and
equipment is only that clothing and equipment that serves to protect employees from Cr (VI) hazards. Other
clothing, work uniforms, tools or other apparatus that do not serve to protect employees from Cr (VI) hazards are
not considered protective clothing and equipment under the standards.
Provision and Use
In order to provide appropriate protective work clothing and equipment, the company should assess the
workplace to identify areas where a hazard is present or is likely to be present from skin or eye contact with Cr
(VI). The company should exercise common sense and use appropriate expertise in assessing hazards. A walk-
through survey of the workplace is recommended to identify sources of employee Cr (VI) exposure. A review of
workplace injury and illness records is also recommended. Information obtained during this process provides a
basis for evaluating potential hazards. Exposures must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis, taking into account

Page 444
ABG
factors such as the acidity or alkalinity of the Cr (VI)-containing compound or mixture as well as the magnitude
and duration of exposure.
Where a hazard is identified, the company must select the clothing and equipment needed to protect employees
from Cr (VI) hazards. The type of protective clothing and equipment needed to protect employees from Cr (VI)
hazards will depend on the potential for exposure and the conditions of use in the workplace. Examples of
protective clothing and equipment that may be necessary include, but are not limited to, gloves, aprons, coveralls,
foot coverings, and goggles. The company must exercise reasonable judgment in selecting the appropriate
clothing and equipment to use to protect employees from hazards associated with Cr (VI) exposures. In some
instances gloves may be all that is necessary to effectively protect an employee from hazardous Cr (VI) exposure.
In other situations, such as when an employee is performing abrasive blasting on a structure covered with Cr (VI)-
containing paint, more extensive measures such as coveralls, head coverings, and goggles may be needed.
The chemical and physical properties of the compound or mixture may also influence the choice of clothing and
equipment to use. For example, a chrome splatter may require an apron, gloves, and goggles to protect against
possible splashes of chromic acid that could result in both Cr (VI) exposure and chemical burns. Other factors such
as the size, flexibility, and cut and tear resistance of clothing and equipment should be considered in the selection
process as well.
OSHA has issued a booklet, Personal Protective Equipment (OSHA Publication 3151, available at http://www.
osha.gov/Publications/osha3151.pdf), that provides more information on assessment of workplace hazards and
selection of appropriate protective clothing and equipment, as well as other factors related to the use of these
items.
ABG must provide the clothing and equipment at no cost to the employee. Where protective clothing and
equipment is required, the company must ensure that it is used in the workplace.
Removal and Storage
The company must ensure that employees remove protective clothing and equipment that has become
contaminated with Cr (VI) at the end of their work shift or when they complete their tasks involving Cr (VI)
exposure, whichever comes first. For example, if employees perform work tasks involving Cr (VI) exposure for the
first two hours of a shift, and then perform tasks that do not involve Cr (VI) exposure for the remainder of the
shift, they must remove their protective clothing after the exposure period (in this case, after the first two hours
of the shift). If, however, employees are performing tasks involving Cr (VI) exposure intermittently throughout the
day, or if employees are exposed to other contaminants where protective clothing and equipment are needed,
they may wear the clothing and equipment until the completion of their shift. This requirement is intended to
limit the duration of employees’ exposure, and to prevent contamination from Cr (VI) residues on protective
clothing reaching areas of the workplace where exposures would not otherwise occur.
The company must not allow any employee to remove contaminated protective clothing or equipment from the
workplace, except for those employees whose job it is to launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of the clothing or
equipment. This requirement is intended to ensure that clothing contaminated with Cr (VI) is not carried to

Page 445
ABG
employees’ cars and homes, which would increase the employee’s exposure as well as exposing other individuals
to Cr (VI) hazards. When contaminated protective clothing or equipment is removed for laundering, cleaning,
maintenance, or disposal, it must be stored and transported in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed,
impermeable containers. Bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing or equipment that are removed
for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal must be labeled in accordance with the requirements of
OSHA’s Hazard Communication standard (29 CFR 1910.1200). In general, the Hazard Communication standard
requires that each container of hazardous chemicals leaving the workplace include a label that indicates the
identity of the hazardous chemicals in the container, appropriate hazard warnings, and the name and address of a
responsible party who can provide additional information on the hazardous chemicals. Use of impermeable
containers and proper labeling practices serve to minimize contamination of the workplace and ensure that
employees who later handle these items are protected.
Cleaning and Replacement
The company must clean, launder, repair and replace protective clothing and equipment as necessary to ensure
that the effectiveness of the clothing and equipment is maintained. This requirement is intended to ensure that
clothing and equipment continues to serve its intended purpose of protecting employees. The standards do not
specify how often clothing and equipment must be cleaned, repaired, or replaced. The appropriate time intervals
may vary widely based on the types of clothing and equipment used, Cr (VI) exposures, and other circumstances
in the workplace. The obligation of the company is to keep the clothing and equipment in the condition necessary
to perform its protective functions.
Removal of Cr (VI) from protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses
Cr (VI) into the air or onto an employee’s body is prohibited. Such actions would result in increased risk to
employees from unnecessary exposure to airborne Cr (VI) as well as possible skin contact. The company must
inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with Cr (VI) of the
potentially harmful effects of Cr (VI) exposure, and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or
cleaned in a manner that minimizes skin or eye contact with Cr (VI) and prevents exposure to Cr (VI) in excess of
the PEL. This requirement is intended to ensure that employees who clean or launder Cr (VI)-contaminated items
are aware of the associated hazards so that they can take appropriate protective measures. The hazard warnings
required on labels for containers of Cr (VI)-contaminated clothing and equipment, required by OSHA’s Hazard
Communication standard, are sufficient to indicate the potentially harmful effects of Cr (VI). An additional
statement (i.e., a statement indicating that the clothing and equipment should be handled in a manner that
minimizes skin or eye contact with Cr (VI) and effectively prevents exposure to Cr (VI) in excess of the PEL) could
be added to the label to fulfill this requirement. The company is not expected to specify particular work practices
that must be followed to achieve these objectives. The company is responsible for ensuring that protective work
clothes and equipment are cleaned and properly disposed of. The company should also conduct inspections and,
when necessary, repair or replace protective work clothing and equipment to ensure its effectiveness.
Hygiene Areas and Practices

Page 446
ABG
ABG must provide adequate hygiene facilities and ensure that employees comply with basic hygiene practices that
serve to minimize exposure to Cr (VI). The standards include requirements for change rooms and washing
facilities, ensuring that Cr (VI) exposure in eating and drinking areas is minimized, and a prohibition on certain
practices that may contribute to Cr (VI) exposure.
Change Rooms
Where employees must change out of their street clothes to use protective clothing and equipment required by
the standard, change rooms must be provided. The change rooms must be equipped with separate storage
facilities (e.g., lockers) for protective clothing and equipment and for street clothes, and these facilities must
prevent contamination of street clothes. Preventing contamination of street clothing limits exposures that would
otherwise occur after the work shift ends, and avoids potential contamination of employees’ cars and homes.
Change rooms also provide privacy to employees while they change their clothes.
Change rooms are only required where removal of street clothes is necessary. For example, in a workplace where
gloves are the only protective clothing used, change rooms are not necessary. Similarly, if disposable protective
clothing can be effectively worn over street clothes, change room would not be required.
Washing Facilities
Readily accessible washing facilities capable of removing Cr (VI) from the skin must be provided where skin
contact with Cr (VI) occurs. Washing facilities must conform to OSHA’s existing sanitation requirements (29 CFR
1910.141 for general industry; 29 CFR 1926.51 for construction). The company must ensure that affected
employees use these facilities when necessary. Also, the company must ensure that employees who have skin
contact with Cr (VI) wash their hands and faces at the end of the work shift and prior to eating, drinking, smoking,
chewing tobacco or gum, applying cosmetics, or using the toilet. Washing diminishes the period of time that Cr
(VI) is in contact with the skin, removes any residual Cr (VI) contamination, and protects against further exposure.
Eating and Drinking Areas
Whenever a company allows employees to consume food or beverages at a worksite where Cr (VI) is present, the
company must ensure that eating and drinking areas and surfaces are maintained as free as practicable of Cr (VI).
ABG are also required to ensure that employees do not enter eating and drinking areas wearing Cr (VI)-
contaminated protective clothing or equipment, unless the protective clothing or equipment is properly cleaned
beforehand. The company may use any method to remove surface Cr (VI) from clothing and equipment, as long as
that method does not disperse Cr (VI) into the air or onto an employee’s body. For example, a HEPA filtered
vacuum may be used to remove Cr (VI) contamination from an employee’s clothing prior to entering the eating
and drinking area.
Prohibited Activities

Page 447
ABG
The standards prohibit certain activities that are likely to result in unnecessary Cr (VI) exposures. The company
must ensure that employees do not eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or apply cosmetics in regulated
areas, or in areas where skin or eye contact with Cr (VI) occurs. Products associated with these activities, such as
food or cigarettes, must not be carried into or stored in regulated areas or areas where skin or eye contact with Cr
(VI) occurs.
Housekeeping
The Cr (VI) standard for general industry includes requirements for housekeeping measures. Proper housekeeping
measures are important, where practicable, because they minimize additional sources of exposure to Cr (VI) that
engineering controls are generally not designed to address. The standard includes provisions addressing general
housekeeping requirements; cleaning methods; and disposal of materials contaminated with Cr (VI). These
requirements are not included in the standards for construction or shipyards because they are considered
generally impracticable in these environments.
ABG must ensure that:
 All surfaces are maintained as free as practicable of accumulations of Cr (VI); and

 All spills and releases of Cr (VI)-containing material are cleaned up promptly. Cr (VI) deposited on ledges,
equipment, floors, and other surfaces should be removed as soon as practicable to prevent it from
becoming airborne and to minimize the likelihood that skin contact will occur. Spills should be rapidly
contained and cleaned up without delay.
Cleaning Methods
Surfaces contaminated with Cr (VI) must be cleaned by HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other methods that minimize
exposure to Cr (VI). Other acceptable cleaning methods include wet methods, such as wet sweeping or wet
scrubbing. Dry methods (e.g., dry shoveling, dry sweeping, and dry brushing) are generally prohibited because of
the potential for dispersal of Cr (VI) into the air. ABG employees are only allowed to use dry methods in cases
where HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of exposure to Cr (VI) have been
tried and found not to be effective.
Use of compressed air for cleaning surfaces is also generally inappropriate because of the potential for dispersal
of Cr (VI) into the air. Compressed air must not be used for cleaning surfaces unless it is used in conjunction with a
ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud, or if no alternative method is feasible.
Cleaning equipment must be handled in a manner that minimizes the reentry of Cr (VI) into the workplace. HEPA-
filtered vacuum equipment must be cleaned and maintained carefully to avoid unnecessary exposures to Cr (VI).

Page 448
ABG
Filters must be changed when needed, and the contents of the bags must be disposed of properly to avoid
unnecessary Cr (VI) exposures.
Disposal of Contaminated Materials
Waste, scrap, debris, and any other materials contaminated with Cr (VI) that are consigned for disposal must be
disposed of in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. For example, the company
may wrap a pallet in plastic to create an impermeable barrier between employees and the Cr (VI) contaminated
waste, scrap or debris. Another example would be to use a sealed barrel. Bags or containers of waste, scrap,
debris, and any other materials contaminated with Cr (VI) that are consigned for disposal must be labeled in
accordance with the requirements of OSHA’s Hazard Communication standard (29 CFR 1910.1200).
Medical Surveillance
The intent of medical surveillance is to determine, where reasonably possible, if an individual can be exposed to
the Cr (VI) present in his or her workplace without experiencing adverse health effects; to identify Cr (VI)-related
adverse health effects when they do occur so that appropriate intervention measures can be taken; and to
determine an employee’s fitness to use personal protective equipment such as respirators. The standards specify
which employees must be offered medical surveillance; when medical examinations must be offered; the contents
of the examination; information that the company must provide to the physician or other licensed health care
professional (PLHCP) who performs the examination; and the contents of the written medical opinion that the
company must obtain from the PLHCP.
All medical examinations and procedures required by the standards must be performed by or under the
supervision of a PLHCP. Medical surveillance must be provided at no cost to employees, and at a reasonable time
and place. If participation requires travel away from the worksite, the company must bear the cost. Employees
must be paid for time spent taking medical examinations, including travel time.
Employees Provided Medical Surveillance
Medical surveillance must be provided to employees who are:
 Exposed to Cr (VI) at or above the action level (2.5 μg/m3 Cr (VI) as an 8-hour time-weighted average) for
30 or more days a year;
 Experiencing signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects associated with Cr (VI) exposure (e.g.,
blistering lesions, redness or itchiness of exposed skin, shortness of breath or wheezing that worsens at
work, nosebleeds, a whistling sound while inhaling or exhaling); or
 Exposed in an emergency (i.e., an uncontrolled release of Cr (VI) that results in significant and unexpected
exposures; see definition of “Emergency” at pg. 5).

Page 449
ABG
Frequency of Medical Examinations
Medical examinations must be provided:
 Within 30 days after initial assignment to a job involving Cr (VI) exposure, unless the employee has
received an examination that meets the requirements of the standard within the last 12 months;
 Annually;
o Within 30 days after a PLHCP’s written medical opinion recommends an additional examination;
o Whenever an employee shows signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects associated with Cr
(VI) exposure;
o Within 30 days after exposure during an emergency which results in an uncontrolled release of Cr
(VI); or
o At the termination of employment, unless the last examination provided was less than six months
prior to the date of termination.
Contents of the Examination
A medical examination provided under the standard consists of:
 A medical and work history which focuses on: the employee’s past, present, and anticipated future
exposure to Cr (VI); any history of respiratory system dysfunction; any history of asthma, dermatitis,
skin ulceration, or nasal septum perforation; and smoking status and history;
 A physical examination of the skin and respiratory tract; and
 Any additional tests that the examining PLHCP considers to be appropriate for that individual. The
standards do not specify specific tests or procedures that must be provided to all employees. Rather,
the information obtained from the medical and work history along with the physical examination of
the skin and respiratory tract (the main targets of Cr (VI) toxicity) allow the PLHCPs to use their
medical expertise to determine what tests, if any, are warranted.
Information Provided to the PLHCP
The company must ensure that the PLHCP has a copy of the Cr (VI) standard, and must provide the PLHCP with:
 A description of the affected employee’s former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to Cr
(VI) exposure;
 Information on the employee’s former, current, and anticipated Cr (VI) exposure levels;
 A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including
when and for how long the employee has used that equipment; and information from records of
employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the affected employee.

Page 450
ABG
The Written Medical Opinion
The company must obtain a written medical opinion from the PLHCP for each medical examination performed.
The written medical opinion must be obtained within 30 days of the examination, and must contain:
 The PLHCP’s opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical condition(s) that would
place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from further exposure to Cr
(VI);
Health Administration
 Any recommended limitations on the employee’s exposure to Cr (VI) or on the use of personal
protective equipment such as respirators; and
 A statement that the PLHCP has explained to the employee the results of the medical examination,
including any medical conditions related to Cr (VI) exposure that require further evaluation or
treatment, and any special provisions for use of protective clothing or equipment.
The PLHCP must not reveal to the company any specific findings or diagnoses that are not related to workplace Cr
(VI) exposure. The company is required to provide a copy of the written medical opinion to the examined
employee within two weeks after receiving it.
Communication of CR (VI) Hazards to Employees
To protect against illnesses and injuries from Cr (VI) exposures, it is critically important that employees recognize
the hazards associated with exposure to Cr (VI) and understand the measures they can take to protect
themselves. OSHA’s Hazard Communication standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) establishes requirements for ABG to
provide employees with information on hazardous chemicals such as Cr (VI) through comprehensive chemical
hazard communication programs that include material safety data sheets (MSDSs), labels, and employee training.
ABG must follow the requirements of the Hazard Communication standard with regard to employees exposed to
Cr (VI). These requirements include informing employees of any operations in their work area where Cr (VI) is
present and training employees on:
 The methods that may be used to detect Cr (VI) in the work area:
 The hazards of Cr (VI); and
 Measures employees can take to protect themselves from these hazards (e.g., appropriate work
practices, emergency procedures, and protective equipment to be used). In addition, the Cr (VI)
standards require the company to provide information and training sufficient to ensure that
employees exposed to Cr (VI) can demonstrate knowledge of:
o The requirements of the Cr (VI) standard; and
o The medical surveillance program required by the standard, including recognition of the signs and
symptoms of adverse health effects that may result from Cr (VI) exposure.

Page 451
ABG
The company must also make a copy of the Cr (VI) standard available without cost to all affected employees. The
standards do not specify how training is to be provided. Classroom instruction, video presentations, informal
discussions, written materials, or other methods may be appropriate. The company may select whatever methods
are most effective in a specific workplace. Similarly, the standards do not require ABG to provide additional
training at periodic intervals. Training must be provided as often as is necessary to ensure that employees are
aware of the Cr (VI) hazards in their workplace and understand.
Training
ABG will provide initial training prior to or at time of initial assignment. The company must provide training that is
understandable and ensure each employee can demonstrate knowledge of the health hazards associated with
Hexavalent chromium exposure; location, manner of use, and release of chromium in the workplace; engineering
controls and work practice controls; purpose, proper selection, fitting, proper use and limitations of respirators
and protective clothing; Emergency procedures; measures employees can take to protect themselves from
exposure; purpose and description of medical surveillance program; contents of the standard. Employers must
make a copy readily available without cost to all affected employees. Training shall be documented.
Recordkeeping
Accurate records can demonstrate company compliance with the standard, and can assist in diagnosing and
identifying workplace-related illnesses. Therefore, ABG is required to maintain records of employee Cr (VI)
exposures (including air monitoring data, historical monitoring data, and objective data) as well as records of
medical surveillance provided under the standard.
Air Monitoring Data
ABG must keep an accurate record of all air monitoring performed to comply with the standard.
The record must indicate:
 The date of the measurement for each sample taken;

 The operation involving exposure to Cr (VI) that was monitored;
 Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy;
 The number, duration, and results of samples taken;
 The type of personal protective equipment used (e.g., type of respirators worn); and
 The name, social security number, and job classification of all employees represented by the monitoring,
specifying which employees were actually monitored.
Historical Monitoring Data

Page 452
ABG
When a company relies on historical monitoring data to determine employee exposures to Cr (VI), an accurate
record of the historical monitoring data must be maintained. The record must show:
 That the data were collected using methods that meet the accuracy requirements of the standard (i.e.,
the method of monitoring and analysis used must measure Cr (VI) to within an accuracy of ± 25% and to
within a statistical confidence level of 95%);
 That the processes and work practices, the characteristics of the Cr (VI)-containing material being
handled, and the environmental conditions at the time the data were obtained are the same as those on
the job for which exposure is being determined; and
 Any other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, and employee exposures.
Objective Data
When a company relies on objective data to comply with the Cr (VI) standard, an accurate record of the objective
data must be maintained. The record must indicate:
 The chromium-containing material in question;

 The source of the objective data;
 The testing protocol and results of testing, or analysis of the material for the release of Cr (VI);
 A description of the process, operation, or activity and how the data support the determination; and
 Any other data relevant to the process, operation, activity, material, or employee exposures.
The company must maintain an accurate record for each employee provided medical surveillance under the
standard. The record must include the following information about the employee:
 Name and social security number;

 A copy of the PLHCP’s written opinions; and
 A copy of the information that the company was required to provide to the PLHCP (i.e., a description of
the employee’s duties as they relate to occupational Cr (VI) exposure; the employee’s Cr (VI) exposure
levels; a description of the personal protective equipment used by the employee; and information from
previous employment related medical examinations).
Exposure and medical records must be maintained and made available to employees and their representatives. A
separate OSHA standard (29 CFR 1910.1020, Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records) addresses
requirements for maintaining these records. In general, exposure records must be kept for at least 30 years, and
medical records must be kept for the duration of employment plus 30 years. It is necessary to keep these records
for extended periods because cancer often cannot be detected until 20 or more years after exposure, and
exposure and medical records can assist in diagnosing and identifying the cause of disease.

Page 453
ABG
One Page Summary of the Hazards of Chromium VI
Workers in many different occupations are exposed to hexavalent chromium (Chromium VI). Occupational
exposures occur mainly among workers who handle pigments containing dry chromate, spray paints and coatings
containing chromate, operate chrome plating baths, and weld or cut metals containing chromium, such as
stainless steel. Stainless steel welding involves the greatest exposure to Chromium VI.
Calcium chromate, chromium trioxide, lead chromate, strontium chromate, and zinc chromate are known human
carcinogens. An increase in incidence of lung cancer has been observed among workers in industries that produce
chromate and manufacture pigments containing chromate. An increased rate of lung cancer has also been
reported among producers and consumers of pigment containing chromate. One study of chromium-nickel alloy
foundry workers showed a statistically significant increase in lung cancers.
Cancer
 Chromium VI is considered a potential lung carcinogen. Studies of workers in the chromate production,
plating, and pigment industries consistently show increased rates of lung cancer.
Eyes
 Direct eye contact with chromic acid or chromate dusts can cause permanent eye damage.
Respiratory Tract
 Chromium VI can irritate the nose, throat, and lungs. Repeated or prolonged exposure can damage the
mucous membranes of the nasal passages and result in ulcers. In severe cases, exposure causes perforation
of the septum (the wall separating the nasal passages).
Skin
 Prolonged skin contact can result in dermatitis and skin ulcers. Some workers develop an allergic sensitization
to chromium. In sensitized workers, contact with even small amounts can cause a serious skin rash. Kidney
damage has been linked to high dermal exposures.
Note: The aforementioned toxicology comes from the Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) and
Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs), American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH),
6th Edition, Volume 1, and from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration web site.

Page 454
ABG
Dear _______,
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) issued a set of requirements for the
management of occupational exposures to hexavalent chromium. This letter serves to inform you that
material being laundered by you for us may be contaminated with hexavalent chromium. The OSHA
Standard requires ABG to notify our service providers who launder clothing potentially contaminated
with the hexavalent chromium. A portion of the relevant OSHA standard is cited below:
OSHA Standard 1910.1026(h)(3)(iii)
The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment
contaminated with chromium (VI) of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to chromium
(VI) and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or cleaned in a manner that
minimizes skin or eye contact with chromium (VI) and effectively prevents the release of
airborne chromium (VI) in excess of the PEL.
ABG requests that you respond in writing confirming receipt of this notification, acknowledging that you
are aware of the OSHA standard and that you are capable of continuing to handle our materials.
If you have any questions, please contact ______________________.
Sincerely,

Page 455
ABG
EMAIL SENT NOVEMBER 17, 2006

To Our HSE Managers:
Since March 2006, ABG HSE has been conducting industrial hygiene air sampling on different types of welding,
gouging, grinding and cutting processes at various project sites in response to the new OSHA hexavalent chromium standard.
Based on the preliminary analyses, the ABG HSE Group recommends the proper use of local exhaust ventilation equipment or
the following respiratory protection during welding and grinding activities when conducted on stainless steel, chromium-
containing alloy steel or chromium-containing non-ferrous alloys; or those using chromium-containing welding rod or wire.
1. Plasma Arc Cutting – Respiratory protection with an assigned protection factor (APF) of at least 50 such as full face air
purifying respirator with 100-level cartridges or a powered air purifying respirator. Those who assist with this process
and are within 5’ of the welding for prolonged periods of time (one hour or more) should also be in the same protection.
Those who are within 5’ of the welding for short periods of time (up to 1 hour) should wear an N95 Respirator. If your
activities are more than 5’ away from the welding, no respiratory protection is required.
2. Arc Gouging including Plasma Arc Gouging – Respiratory protection with an APF of at least 10 such as some makes
of N95 filtering facepiece welding respirators or a half-face respirator with 100-level cartridges. Be aware that not every
manufacturer of N95 welding respirators certifies their product for protection against hexavalent chromium. (the 3M
8514 N95 respirator is one appropriate choice) Those who assist with this process and are within 5’ of the welding for
prolonged periods of time (one hour or more) should also be in the same protection. For those who are within 5’ of the
welding for short periods of time (up to 1 hour) or are more than 5’ away from the welding, no respiratory protection is
required.
3. Welding Indoors - Respiratory protection with an APF of at least 10 such as some makes of N95 filtering facepiece
welding respirators or a half-face respirator with 100-level cartridges. Indoors is defined as any space with a roof over
the welder’s head. Those who assist with this process and are within 5’ of the welding for prolonged periods of
time (one hour or more) should also be in the same protection. For those who are within 5’ of the welding for short
periods of time (up to 1 hour) or are more than 5’ away from the welding, no respiratory protection is required.
4. Welding Outdoors Lasting More than 4 Hours or in Areas with Obstructed Free Air Movement - Respiratory protection
with an APF of at least 10 such as some makes of N95 filtering facepiece welding respirators or a half-face respirator with
100-level cartridges. Outdoors is defined as no roof over the welder’s head and there is plenty of free air
movement. Examples of obstructed free air movement would include welding up against a large wall or where closely
surrounded by equipment or other large obstacles. Outdoor welding activities lasting less than 4 hours do not require
respiratory protection.
5. Grinding Lasting More than 4 Hours - Respiratory protection with an APF of at least 10 such as some makes
of N95 filtering facepiece welding respirators or a half-face respirator with 100-level cartridges. Grinding activities lasting
less than 4 hours do not require respiratory protection.
6. Torch Cutting through Chromium-Based Coatings - Respiratory protection with an APF of at least 10 such as some makes
of N95 filtering facepiece welding respirators or a half-face respirator with 100-level cartridges. Grinding activities lasting
less than 4 hours do not require respiratory protection.

Page 456
ABG
SUMMARY OF CURRENT HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM SAMPLE RESULTS BY ACTIVITY

PLASMA ARC CUTTING
Range of Sample Results Range of Sample Results Number of Samples
Sample TWA (μg/m3) 8-hr TWA (μg/m3) [Date Collected]
90 12.4 1 [2/13/2006]
30.0 - 266.67 1.88 - 16.67 4 [9/20/2006]
116.14 36.3 1 [10/20/2006]
78 – 80 14.9 – 15.6 2 [12/5/2006]
PLASMA ARC GOUGING
25.0 1.56 1 [9/20/2006]
0.55 0.052 1 [10/19/2006]
WELDING: SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, FCAW, SAW
<0.11 – 0.85 <0.02 – 0.05 9 [2/13/2006]
0.003 – 41.67 0.00 – 2.6 10 [9/20/2006]
2.43 – 3.54 0.91 - 1.29 4 [10/17/2006]
0.08 – 5.54 0.021 – 1.73 4 [10/18/2006]
0.23 – 3.7 0.08 – 1.15 2 [10/19/2006]
< 0.05 < 0.013 1 [12/6/2006]
TORCH CUTTING THROUGH CHROMIUM-CONTAINING PAINTS
GRINDING
0.13 – 0.29 0.02 – 0.04 3 [2/13/2006]
Note: The Sample TWA (leftmost column) is the time-weighted average exposure an employee would receive if they
performed the activity for eight hours in a day. The 8-hr TWA (center column) is the time-weighted average an
employee actually received assuming the employee had no exposure except during the time being sampled. For
example, if an employee was plasma arc cutting for eight hours in a day their 8-hr TWA would be equal to their
Sample TWA. If that same employee was plasma arc cutting for only two hours in a day their 8-hr TWA would be one
fourth their Sample TWA.

Page 457
ABG
SUMMARY OF CURRENT HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM SAMPLE RESULTS WITH CONTEXT

Sample TWA 8-Hour TWA
LEV Indoors or Outdoors Windy or Calm MSDSs
(μg/m3) (μg/m3)
PLASMA ARC CUTTING
90 12.4 No Out C ??
 Feb 13, 2006
211.11 13.2 No In C ??
266.67 16.67 No Out C SS 10%-30% Cr
E8018-B8 Rod 5-7% Cr
111.67 6.98 No In C
SA213-T9 Tube 9% Cr
E8018-B8 Rod 5-7% Cr
30.0 1.88 No In C
SA213-T9 Tube 9% Cr
 Sep 20, 2006
116.14 36.3 No In C ??
 Oct 20, 2006
77.8 15.6 No In C ??
80.2 14.9 No In C ??
 Dec 5, 2006
PLASMA ARC GOUGING
25.0 1.56 No Out C SS 10%-30% Cr
 Sep 20, 2006
0.55 0.052 No In C ??
 Oct 19, 2006
WELDING: SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, FCAW, SAW
0.14 0.02 Yes In C ??
<0.11 <0.02 Yes In C ??
<0.11 <0.02 Yes In C ??
0.85 0.05 Yes In C ??
<0.04 <0.02 Yes In C ??
0.05 0.02 Yes In C ??
0.05 0.02 Yes In C ??
0.07 0.03 Yes In C ??
0.07 0.03 Yes In C ??
 Feb 13, 2006

Page 458
ABG

(μg/m3) (μg/m3)
E8018-B6 Rod 3-5% Cr
41.67 2.60 No In C
SA213-T9 Tube 9% Cr
E8018-B3 Rod 1-2% Cr
35.0 2.19 No In C
SA213-T22 Tube 2% Cr
E8018-B2 Rod 1% Cr
6.83 0.43 No In C
SA213-T11 Tube 1% Cr
E11018-M Rod <0.5% Cr
0.47 0.03 No In C
SS Plate <1% Cr
E308L-16 Rod 15-17% Cr
3.83 0.24 No In C
Stainless shields
E308L-16 Rod 15-17% Cr
16.67 1.04 No In C
Stainless shields
Air Lance 0.1% Cr
5.83 0.37 No In C
Stainless pipe 10-30% Cr
Hard rods 32% Cr
30.0 1.88 No In C Carbon steel plate <1%
Cr
6010(P5) 0% Cr
0.18 0.011 No In C Carbon steel plate <1%
Cr
ER80S-B8 (tig) 10.5% Cr
0.003 0.00 No In C
SA213-T9 tubing 9% Cr
 Sep 20, 2006
E8018 rod on
2.43 0.910 No In C
SA213-T9 tubing
E8018 rod on
3.54 1.165 No In C
SA213-T9 tubing
3.45 1.286 No In C Flux core welding
E8018 rod on
3.13 1.107 No In C
SA213-T9 tubing
 Oct 17, 2006
Welding with
0.134 0.030 No In C
INCONEL wire

Page 459
ABG

(μg/m3) (μg/m3)
Welding with
0.226 0.071 No In C
INCONEL wire
Welding with
0.084 0.021 No In C
INCONEL wire
5.537 1.730 No In (confined space) C 2N MIG on stainless steel
 Oct 18, 2006
3.691 1.146 No In (confined space) C Flux core on 309 SS
0.234 0.080 No In (confined space) C Flux core on 309 SS
 Oct 19, 2006
< 0.05 < 0.013 No In C ??
 Dec 6, 2006
TORCH CUTTING THROUGH CHROMIUM-CONTAINING PAINTS
GRINDING
0.29 0.04 No Out C ??
0.18 0.04 No In C ??
0.13 0.02 No In C ??
 Feb 13, 2006

Page 460
ABG
1.1. Considered and Excluded
In the effort to compile this information the following activities were considered and excluded for the reasons noted:
 Tack welding – Welding overall does not appear to present a high exposure hazard except in
certain circumstances. Due to the instantaneous nature of the process, when conducted by
hand it was assumed that the total amount of time an employee was actually welding over
the course of an 8-hour day would be insignificant and therefore not likely to lead to an
exposure above the action level. Further, when taking into account the amount of time
needed to position the materials between tacks, the total number of tacks would be limited.
 Handling water contaminated with hexavalent chromium – The primary exposure route is
through inhalation. So long as the water handling process does not produce a visible mist of
the contaminated water the handling of the water is not likely to lead to an exposure above
the action level. However, there is some evidence that the skin contact exposure route can
contribute to an overall exposure. Therefore, it is good practice to use handling methods that
limit the opportunities for skin contact.
 Spray painting with chromate containing paints within a proper spray painting booth – A
spray booth properly used is assumed to effectively control exposures to paint mists through
both the inhalation and the skin contact routes.
1.2. Information from Other Sources
The University Of Washington Field Research Group has published the following information. It seems to indicate that SMAW
(stick) and FCAW (flux core) welding have the highest exposure potential among the welding processes:
University of Washington Field Research Group
Range of Sample Results
Welding Process
8-hr TWA (μg/m3)
SMAW - Stick 0.04 – 99.1
FCAW – Flux core 2.85 – 17.1
GMAW - MIG 2.04 – 3.2
GTAW – TIG or Heli arc 0.09 – 0.25
Plasma arc gouging 0.7 – 11
Plasma arc cutting 2.45
Note: Most of these sample were collected while working on 304 (9), then 316 (8) then 309 (5) 308 wire for
304 stainless steel.
Northwest Occupational Health and Safety Center
Range of Sample Results
Welding Process
Sample TWA (μg/m3)
SMAW - Stick 0.02 - 244
FCAW – Flux core 0.16 - 41
GMAW - MIG 0.12 - 1.54
GTAW – TIG or Heli arc 0.01 - 5.6
Plasma arc gouging n/a
Plasma arc cutting 3 - 57

Page 461
ABG
HIGH PRESSURE WATER CLEANING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................442
SCOPE443
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................443
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................443
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................................443
2.0 BARRICADES.................................................................................................................................................444
3.0 SETUP, INSPECTION, AND TESTING..............................................................................................................445
4.0 OPERATION..................................................................................................................................................445
4.1 Back Thrust..............................................................................................................................................446
4.2 Do and Don’t List.....................................................................................................................................446
5.0 CLEANING METHODS...................................................................................................................................447
5.1 Tube Lancing............................................................................................................................................447
5.2 Line Moling..............................................................................................................................................447
5.3 Shotgun Single-Jet Blasting......................................................................................................................448
6.0 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR........................................................................................................................448
7.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................448
7.1 Training Requirements............................................................................................................................448
7.2 Skill Certification......................................................................................................................................449
8.0 EXCEPTIONS.................................................................................................................................................450
9.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................450
10.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................450

Page 462
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice provides the requirements for performing high-pressure water cleaning.
SCOPE
 Barricades
 Setup, Inspection, and Testing
 Operation
 Cleaning methods
 Maintenance and Repair
 Training
 Exceptions
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
High-Pressure Water Cleaning (HPWC) - The process of using of high-pressure water, with or without additives,
to remove unwanted matter from various surfaces where the pressure of the liquid jet exceeds 1,000 psig at the
opening.
High-Pressure Water Cleaning Systems - Water delivery systems that have nozzles or other openings, whose
function is to increase the speed of liquids. Solid particles or additional chemicals may also be introduced; all exit
as free stream. The system includes pumps (pressure-reducing devices), hoses, lances, nozzles, valves, safety
devices, heating elements, and injection systems attached thereto.
High-Pressure Water Cutting - The use of high-pressure water, with or without additives, to penetrate into
surfaces of a material for the purpose of cutting that material. The pressure of the liquid exceeds 1,000 psig.
Line Moling - An operation using a self-propelled jet nozzle (mole) and a high-pressure hose to clean the inside of
piping systems.
Dump Valve - A device that immediately shuts down the high-pressure water stream if the operator loses
control. Used in tube lancing and line moling water-cleaning process.
Lance - A rigid metal tube used to extend the nozzle from the end of a hose.
High-pressure water cleaning is normally performed using jet streams that can have a velocity greater than that of
a 45-caliber bullet and do as much damage. Therefore, extreme caution and strict compliance with requirements

Page 463
ABG
must be used to prevent the jet stream from striking the operator, other employees, or delicate equipment. No
portion of the body must ever be placed in front of a water jet; water jets can easily puncture and tear the skin or
penetrate deeper causing infection or serious internal damage.
Horseplay with such equipment is strictly forbidden.
Note: Employees who operate water-cleaning equipment below 1,000 psig can follow
the requirements of this practice or have a specific written operating procedure
identifying proper setup, use, and employee training.
Pressure below 1,000 psig does not mean that it cannot cause injury or requires any less attention to the
principles outlined in this practice. Adequate precautions are required at all pressures.
In addition to the required hard hat and safety glasses with side shields, employees performing high-pressure
water cleaning are required, at a minimum, to have the following personal protective equipment (PPE):
 Face Shields - Clear Shield nine (9) inches deep x fifteen and one-half (15 1/2) inches
wide x 0.60" thick (American National Standard Institute [ANSI] Z87.1 - 1979 or
equivalent).
 Rain Suit - Made of nylon fabric coated with Neoprene on both sides.
 Gloves - Made of Neoprene, rubber and PVC with rough wet grip finish.
 Waterproof (rubber, neoprene, PVC, etc.) "Steel Toe" Boots - Knee length with ribbed
steel shanks and heavy tread soles for non-slip traction (reference ANSI Z41.1 –
1967).
 Hearing Protection
When performing HPWC on equipment that could be contaminated with hazardous chemicals, the employee will
wear appropriate additional PPE.
If chemicals or other materials are added to the water, PPE must also provide protection against the additives.
When tube lancing or “shot-gunning,” boots provided with steel toe caps and metatarsal protection will be worn.
Note: At operating pressures of 5,000 psig and above, employees are required to wear
protective suits made of Kevlar or equivalent.
The required PPE does not provide protection from the jet, but does protect against other hazards encountered
while performing the work.
2.0 BARRICADES
The area around the job, pump, and hoses must be barricaded a minimum of 15 feet (4.6 meters) and signs
stating “DANGER - HIGH-PRESSURE WATER CLEANING” must be placed at the perimeters; barricades may be
constructed of rope, tape, barrels, etc., as long as they give an effective warning and are highly visible.
If the job is above ground level, barricades may be required below. Warning signs should be placed along those
portions of the high-pressure water hose that are outside of the barricades. When line moling, all pipe openings
must be properly barricaded.

Page 464
ABG
3.0 SETUP, INSPECTION, AND TESTING
Before starting the job, a visual inspection of the high-pressure components (including rupture disk pressure
rating) will be performed using Form 000.653.F0131, High-Pressure Water Cleaning Equipment Checklist. Hose
with exposed or damaged wire braid will be removed from high-pressure service. The assembled HPWC
components will be slowly pressurized to the maximum operating pressure to verify integrity of the system.
An automatic relief device must be installed on the high-pressure side of the pump set to relieve at not higher
than the maximum allowable working pressure of the lowest rated component in the high-pressure system and
must be tested annually. Documentation must be maintained on test results.
When maintaining or assembling HPWC systems, the correct size tool must be used. The use of adjustable tools
having serrated gripping jaws (such as pipe wrenches) that can damage equipment will not be used.
Only manufacturer’s parts will be used for repairs to equipment. Manufacturer’s equipment will not be altered or
modified under any circumstances.
A hose inspection and testing program will be conducted at least quarterly according to the manufacturer’s
specifications. This inspection test will be conducted at 1-1/2 times the maximum operating pressure and must
be observed and documented by employees responsible for the project/site procedure.
Hose failures usually occur near fittings due to bending stresses during use and handling.
4.0 OPERATION
The High-Pressure Water Cleaning Job Qualification (Form 000.653.F0130) must be completed before performing
any HPWC to determine if there are alternative methods for performing the task that are less hazardous.
The HPWC system will be depressurized when:
 Not in use
 Unauthorized or inadequately protected employees enter the barricaded area
 Replacement or repairs are being made to the system
 Recommended practices are violated
HPWC systems must be operated according to the following rules:

 Any incident, near miss, or abnormal occurrence will be immediately reported to the
responsible supervisor and an investigation conducted.
 A cleaning crew will be composed of at least 2 operators; each employee will be in
view of the other at all times.
 Employees will not operate equipment for more than 8 consecutive hours in any
16-hour period; employees should rotate their duties during the job to minimize
fatigue to the operator holding the tools.
 The employee nearest the high-pressure nozzle must always have a means of
immediately reducing pressure and interrupting flow to the nozzle.
 Hose-to-tool connections, which are in frequent contact with the operator, must be
shielded by a shroud to protect the operator; these shrouds must have sufficient
rigidity to resist bending to radius smaller than those recommended by the hose
manufacturer.

Page 465
ABG
 When hose drop exceeds 10 feet (3.1 meters), the hose must be securely tied off to a
rigid support with an appropriate rope to limit the pull due to hose weight;
bend-radius-limits (as identified by the manufacturer) must be maintained.
 At least 1 control valve or switch will control each high-pressure tool.
 An employee will operate only 1 high-pressure lance, mole, or shotgun at one time.
 HPWC hose will be positioned and handled to minimize bends and turns; sharp turns
and bends can result in hose failure.
 High-pressure hose connections will have safety cables, chains, or the equivalent
bridging across each joint.
 HPWC equipment must be designed and maintained to achieve a minimum safety
factor of 3:1 against maximum working pressure.
 Hose data (such as manufacturer’s symbol, serial number, working and test pressure,
and certified rating) will be recorded and retained in the project’s/site’s files.
 The pressure must be removed from the system before tightening or loosening
fittings.
 When the hose is pressurized, employees must not handle hose within 1 foot
(0.30 meter) of hose-to-hose connections.
4.1 Back Thrust
Reactive back thrust forces from the high-pressure water jets physically stress the operator and affect operator
control. Sound footing conditions must be established and maintained during cleaning.
Back thrust force results from water volume leaving the nozzle at high velocity. For HPWC above 1000 psig,
theoretical back trust in pounds (lb) and discharge of water in gallons per minute (GPM) are illustrated in
Attachment 01.
Employee operating the shotgun-type equipment will not be required to withstand a back thrust of more than 1/3
of their body weight.
If the area to be blasted is in a confined space or the operator must climb to an elevated position such as on a
ladder or scaffolding, it is required that a safety harness be used. Railings or other protection should be provided.
4.2 Do and Don’t List
Do:
 Wear protective clothing
 Stop unit to change nozzle, hose assemblies, and other parts
 Stop unit in case of leak
 Wear safety harness when in elevated position
 Use only manufacturer’s recommended chemicals
 Use sediment-free water
Don't:
 Tie gun lever or trigger down

Page 466
ABG
 Start unit with gun engaged

 Aim gun at people, light or unsecured objects, or other potential hazards
 Engage gun unless properly connected and held
 Lay gun in mud, dirt, or sand
5.0 CLEANING METHODS
Lancing, line moling, and shot-gunning are the basic HPWC methods. Different variations of each method are
available and increasing with new technology. Rotating nozzle jet assemblies, rotating lances, and orbital nozzles
are some variations available at this time.
Rotating equipment such as lances and nozzle tips must be guarded to prevent contact and injury to operating
employees. Loose clothing that can be caught in rotating equipment is not permitted.
A typical HPWC equipment layout is illustrated in Attachment 02.
5.1 Tube Lancing
Tube lancing is a repetitive operation using a rigid or flexible lance to clean the inside of tube bundles.
High-pressure water flow to the lance will be actuated through a fail-safe, contact-type switch or foot-operated
dump valve which, when released by the lance operator, interrupts pressure at the lance. The valve or switch
must have a guard to prevent inadvertent actuation. Use of the foot-operated dump valve is required.
A hand-held deflector or guard will be installed on the lance to prevent the high-pressure stream from contacting
the operator’s hand if the lance is accidentally withdrawn from a tube while activated. The inside diameter of the
deflector or guard will be less than the outside diameter of the jet nozzle so that the nozzle cannot inadvertently
slip through the guard and contact the operator.
An easily visible marker will be affixed 2 feet (0.6 meter) from the nozzle end of the lance to indicate nozzle
location as the lance is being inserted or withdrawn from the tube.
Note: Pressure will be applied to the nozzle only when the lance is 2 feet (0.6 meter)
inside the tube.
The back end of the tube or shell will be shrouded to guard employees from the jet stream, discharged
contaminants, and ejected nozzles.
Tube lancing is illustrated in Attachment 03.
5.2 Line Moling
Line moling is an operation using a self-propelled jet nozzle (mole) and a high-pressure hose to clean the inside of
piping systems (refer to Attachment 04).
High-pressure water to the mole will be controlled by a fail-safe, contact-type switch or foot-operated dump valve
which, when released by the operator nearest the mole, interrupts flow to the mole. The valve or switch will have
a guard to prevent inadvertent actuation. Use of a foot-operated dump valve is required.
To prevent mole reversal within the line, the length of the hose end coupling, mole tip, and any rigid pipe
extensions will equal or exceed the inside diameter of the pipe being cleaned.

Page 467
ABG
The mole hose will be marked 2 feet (0.6 meter) from the mole to indicate mole location when the hose is being
inserted or withdrawn from the pipe. The first 2 feet (0.6 meter) of pipe can be cleaned with a shotgun.
Note: Pressure will be applied to the nozzle only when the hose is in the pipe.
5.3 Shotgun Single-Jet Blasting
Shotgun single-jet blasting is a hand-held unit used to clean surfaces (refer to Attachment 05).
All shotguns will have a shoulder butt and at least 1 integral fail-safe valve or contact-type control switch on the
shotgun. When released by the operator, the valve control switch will immediately interrupt flow to the nozzle.
The valve/switch will be guarded to prevent accidental activation and will be positioned so that the operator’s
hands are required to initiate and sustain water flow to the nozzle. A typical shotgun blaster with integral and
remote fail-safe valve is illustrated in Attachment 05.
Minimum length of the shotgun from butt to nozzle is 66 inches (167.6 centimeters) to prevent the jet from
striking the body. Exceptions to the 66-inch (167.6-centimeter) length will be made by the Project/Site Manager
and the HSE Representative.
Note: Exceptions must not be approved if a shorter length shotgun will not provide a
safer operation.
Operators must not shotgun for more than 8 consecutive hours in any 16-hour period.
The rotating head surface cleaning tool design does not lend itself to the 66-inch (167.6-centimeter) minimum
length required for the shotgun tool. Potential for the tool jet to accidentally strike the operator is significantly
less than with a shotgun tool due to the low back thrust forces (better operator control). As protection against
potential injury, an 8-inch (20.3-centimeter) minimum diameter steering wheel-shaped bumper guard will be
attached to the discharge end of the tool (refer to Attachment 02).
6.0 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
Experienced employees will conduct servicing HPWC equipment according to manufacturer’s servicing
requirements.
The following items will be overhauled and inspected for proper functioning at manufacturer’s recommended
intervals:
 Pressure relief valve
 Bursting discs (if used)
 Pressure control valves
 Hand- or foot-operated dump control valve or dry shutoff valve
 Dry shutoff valve or dump systems
 Changeover valve
7.0 TRAINING
All employees involved in HPWC must satisfactorily complete the training course as identified in the High-Pressure
Water Cleaning Certification Program (Form 000.653.F0132).

Page 468
ABG
Employees must be retrained at least annually.

Employees who handle the cleaning tool must have at least 6 months on-the-job experience in HPWC.
7.1 Training Requirements
The training course will include, but not be limited to, the following:
 The cutting action of a high-pressure water stream and the potential hazard it poses
to the human body will be demonstrated through the use of audio-visual aids or
actual use of equipment (such as by cutting through a piece of lumber or a concrete
block).
 The need for and limitations of PPE must be explained. Instruction will be given as to
when and how specific clothing and protective devices must be worn.
 Operation of the high-pressure system and auxiliaries must be explained. Training
will include startup and shutdown procedures, potential equipment problems, and
appropriate corrective actions.
 Operation, identification, and purpose of all safety devices must be explained. The
importance of not tampering with any safety device, as well as the importance and
requirements of keeping them functional, must be stressed.
 The identification of high-pressure fittings, hoses, and accessories, and how to
distinguish between them will be demonstrated.
 The proper method of connecting hoses (lying out without kinks), protection from
excessive wear, and using the proper tools for hookups will be explained and
demonstrated.
 The proper stance for sound footing and how to identify and use the various devices
for lancing, shot-gunning, and moling will be demonstrated. The trainee, under close
supervision, will use the various devices while the unit is slowly pressurized.
 Employee(s) must demonstrate knowledge and skill in the proper application of
equipment through practical application.
 Operator retraining will be on an annual basis or more frequent, if needed.
7.2 Skill Certification
All employees who work with HPWC equipment either as an operator or assistant will be required to show their
knowledge and skills in the field of HPWC through a skill certification program.
There are 3 levels that employees will be required to successfully complete before becoming a certified operator:
 Level I (Apprentice) - Employees with less than 6 months on-the-job HPWC
experience will be required to show their knowledge of HPWC.
 Level II (Operator Assistant) - Employees with at least 6 months on-the-job HPWC
experience at Level I will be required to show their knowledge and skill
demonstration of HPWC.
 Level III (Operator) - Employees with at least 1 year on-the-job experience as a
HPWC operator will be required to show their knowledge and skill demonstration of
HPWC.

Page 469
ABG
An employee who is not successful in the knowledge and skills demonstration at their particular level will be
dropped to a lower level. The employee will then have to successfully show their knowledge and skills
demonstration at that level. If the employee is still unsuccessful, he/she will be dropped another level and go
through the same process.
Employees who are dropped from one level to another will not be eligible to recertify to the next level for
6 months.
Employees will be retrained and certified annually. Refer to the High-Pressure Water Cleaning Certification
Program.
Documentation will be maintained in accordance with Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation. This will
include tests (both knowledge and skills) regardless of outcome.
8.0 EXCEPTIONS
The Regional Safety Manager must approve exceptions to this practice or project-/site-specific procedures for
HPWC.
9.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0130 High-Pressure Water Cleaning Job Qualification
000.653.F0131 High-Pressure Water Cleaning Equipment Checklist
000.653.F0132 High-Pressure Water Cleaning Certification Program
Non-ABG Documents:
U.S. Water Jet Recommended practices for the use of manually

Technology Association operated, high-pressure, water-jetting equipment.
10.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 High-Pressure Water Cleaning Above 1000 psig
Attachment 02 Typical HPWC Equipment Layout
Attachment 03 Typical HPWC Lancing Arrangement
Attachment 04 Line Moling Used for Cleaning
Attachment 05 Typical Shotgun Blaster with Integral and Remote
Fail-Safe Valve

Page 470
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................451
SCOPE452
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................452
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................452
1.1 Permits....................................................................................................................................................452
1.2 Written Procedure...................................................................................................................................453
1.3 Hazard Analysis........................................................................................................................................453
1.4 Designs/Drawings....................................................................................................................................453
1.5 Pipelines and Operating Equipment........................................................................................................453
2.0 METALLURGY...............................................................................................................................................454
2.1 Burn-Through Prevention........................................................................................................................454
2.2 Metal Thickness.......................................................................................................................................454
2.3 Metal Temperature.................................................................................................................................454
2.4 Stress Relief.............................................................................................................................................454
2.5 Chemistry of Line or Vessel Contents......................................................................................................454
3.0 HOT TAP MACHINES....................................................................................................................................455
4.0 PREPARATION..............................................................................................................................................455
5.0 WELDING.....................................................................................................................................................456
6.0 EXCEPTIONS.................................................................................................................................................456
7.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................457

Page 471
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
PURPOSE
This practice provides the requirements for the safety aspects to be considered when welding a hot tap
connection onto a pipe or vessel fabricated from ferritic and austenitic steel installed in a refinery, chemical plant,
or other similar facility. Materials such as aluminum, copper, or cast iron are not addressed in this practice.
SCOPE
 Metallurgy
 Hot Tap Machines
 Preparation
 Welding
 Exceptions
APPLICATION
This practice does not apply to hot taps on gas or liquefied petroleum transmission pipelines or service taps on
gas distribution mains.
DEFINITIONS
None.
It is the Project/Site Manager’s responsibility to review and justify the need for performing hot taps (verify
alternatives have been exhausted) and for confirming that the Hot Tap Permit (Form 000.653.F0133) has been
completed and signed by all designees.
Client representatives should be included from initial designs through hot tap completion (safety, construction,
operations, and maintenance).
Hot tapping must be performed by trained and experienced professionals who specialize in performing such work
on a frequent basis.
1.1 Permits
If the permit to work process is in use, a Permit to Work must be issued (refer to Practice 000.653.1302) as well as
a Hot Tap Permit.
Before a hot tap can be performed, a Hot Tap Permit must be completed by the supervisor and the required
approvals obtained.
The appointment and training of Hot Tap Permit Issuers is similar to Permit to Work and Confined Space Entry
Permit Authorized Person (refer to Practice 000.653.1302, Permit to Work). However, in addition, they will have

Page 472
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
sound and thorough knowledge in matters relating to the preparation and conduct of hot taps. Practical
experience in preparing hot tap permits under guidance will be an integral part of training. Appointment is made
in writing on Form 000.653.F0205, Authorized Permit Issuers, by the Project Manager.
Note: When performing a hot tap in an operating facility, it is a common requirement to use the
facility “hot tap permit process” instead of the process described above.
1.2 Written Procedure
A detailed written procedure must be prepared for each hot tap. This procedure must meet the requirements of
American Petroleum Industry (API) 2201, latest edition, and those publications referenced therein.
1.3 Hazard Analysis
A Safety Task Assignment (STA) will be prepared and communicated: the STA will focus on hazards, controls, and
safe work practices for the area and associated tasks – not the hot tap process itself before the task is executed.
1.4 Designs/Drawings
An engineered design with a drawing approval cycle must be implemented for the proposed hot tap. The design
will include the following:
 Metallurgical analysis, including wall thickness, and determination by ultrasonic test
(UT)
 In-process controls and inspections to verify conformance to design
 Approval of contractor/subcontractor procedures
 A review by ABG Project/Site Management and client
1.5 Pipelines and Operating Equipment
Hot work on pipelines and other operating equipment will not be applied for pressures less than atmospheric or
greater than 700 pounds (317.5 kilograms) per square inch per grade (psig) and temperatures less than
70 degrees F (21.1 degrees C) or greater than 600 degrees F (315.6 degrees C) without additional extensive
engineering and/or consultation with appropriate industrial specialists.
 The pipe, tank, or vessel walls must be at least the minimum thickness for the design
temperature and pressure plus 3/32 inch [2.4 millimeters]), but in no case less than
3/16 inch [4.8 millimeters]). The thickness must be confirmed by ultrasonic testing.
 The metallurgy of the pipe, tank, or vessel will be fully determined before welding.
 Hot taps will not be performed upstream of rotating equipment without filters or
traps to retain cuttings.
 The chance of blow through is greatest on welds running longitudinal to the pipeline.
Therefore, on full encirclement fittings the only welds made directly to the pipe are
the end circumferential welds.
 Minimum velocity (flow) of the fluid/gas will be specified in the job plan for each hot
tap.
 Pipelines with high flow rates or refrigerated liquids tend to result in too rapid
quenching of the weld that may contribute to weld-cracking problems. Bolt-on tees

Page 473
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
suitable for the service may be used where weld cracking or stress relief is a
problem.
2.0 METALLURGY
Vessels or lines to be hot tapped must be properly inspected for adequate wall thickness and absence of
imperfections to minimize the risk of burn-through. Qualified welders will adhere to controlled welding
techniques to prevent overheating.
A thorough inspection of each connection area must verify that the metal thickness is adequate for the pressure
and temperature involved. T here must be no lamination or other imperfections. Hot taps should only be made in
lamination-free areas with adequate metal thickness.
2.1 Burn-Through Prevention
To minimize the possibility of burn-through, the first weld pass to the equipment should be made using applicable
guidelines and recommendations. Subsequent passes should be made with a 1/8 inch (3.2 millimeters) electrode
diameter or less if the metal thickness does not exceed 1/2 inch (12.8 millimeters). In many situations, low
hydrogen rods may be preferable to reduce the possibility of burn-through. For a wall thickness greater than
1/2 inch (12.8 millimeters) where burn-through is not a primary concern, larger diameter electrodes may be used.
2.2 Metal Thickness
Generally, a minimum base metal thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 millimeters) is recommended for hot tapping.
Exceptions to the recommended thickness may be permitted when engineering specifications allow. Welding on
thin material could result in overheating and burn-through. If practical, temporarily reduce the pressure and/or
temperature within the equipment to provide an additional safety factor while welding takes place.
2.3 Metal Temperature
If the metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10° degrees C), heating the weld area before welding should be
considered. Generally, welding should not be performed on lines or equipment when atmospheric temperature is
less than -50 degrees F (-45.6 degrees C) unless special consideration is given to the base metal characteristics,
electrodes, and a method of metal preheating. Hot tap machines should also be checked for suitability of use at
low temperatures. Under all circumstances, hot tapping should be limited to the pressure/temperature rating of
the machine.
2.4 Stress Relief
Some equipment is unsuitable for hot tapping because the metallurgy or thickness of metal requires stress
relieving, which normally cannot be done while the equipment is pressurized. Special treatment is required for
high tensile strength alloy steels; special-welding electrodes must be used. Hot tap fitting and weld rod
metallurgy must be compatible with the metallurgy of equipment to be tapped.
2.5 Chemistry of Line or Vessel Contents
The oxygen level within the equipment must be controlled to prevent the formation of a vapor/air mixture within
flammable or explosive ranges. In addition, contents of the line or vessel being hot tapped must not contain the
following:

Page 474
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
 Hydrogen, where the equipment has operated above the Nelson curve limits,
because of the possibility of hydrogen molecules attaching to the metal (refer to
API 941).
 Vapor/air or vapor/oxygen mixtures within flammable or explosive ranges.
 Acids, chlorides, peroxides, or other chemicals likely to decompose or become
hazardous from the heat of welding.
 Caustic or amine if the concentration and temperature are such that the fabrication
specifications call for stress relieving.
 Certain unsaturated hydrocarbons that may experience exothermic decomposition
reaction (ethylene, for example) if the metal temperature resulting from hot tapping
could initiate such a reaction at the maximum expected pressure. Such reactions
could have the potential for causing localized hot spots on pipe walls that could lead
to failure.
3.0 HOT TAP MACHINES
Hot tapping machines must be certified with documented proof of certification for maximum working pressure
and temperature rating. The machine must be able to positively retain and remove the blank or coupon. They
may be powered by hand, air, hydraulic fluids, or electricity.
A hot tap machine can be considered suitable if the pressure and temperature of the medium inside the line or
vessel falls within the working limits of the hot tap machine. The seals and materials of the hot tap machine must
be compatible with the fluids in the line or vessel, and the material of the drill or cutter must be suitable for
effective penetration of the metal of the pipe or vessel.
Before hot tapping is attempted, the machine, cutter, and pilot bit should be carefully inspected to verify that
they are in satisfactory condition and capable of being left in service, if necessary, in the event of mechanical
problems or hot tap valve leakage.
4.0 PREPARATION
Mounting, assembling, and operation of the hot tapping machine will be performed by personnel trained for this
purpose. Selection of the proper fitting and reinforcement for use in making the hot tap connection will be based
on the proper codes (refer to API). The overall fitting and valve assembly length must not exceed the machine
boring bar maximum travel. Weldolets, weld-ends, split tees, saddles, nozzles, branch-o-lets, or plain meters may
be used depending on the reinforcement needed. If hot tap diameter is greater than 50 percent of the run pipe
diameter, full encirclement pads or split tees will be used.
The geometry of the fitting attachment will be determined before welding. Careful measurements must be made
to verify that:
 The tapping machine has sufficient overhead clearance for its full travel.
 The valve is sufficiently deep so that the pilot bit clears the valve seat when
retracted.
 The tapping machine cutting rod is of sufficient length to cut entirely through the
pipe, vessel, or tank wall.
 For piping, the cutter does not cut the opposite wall of the pipe.

Page 475
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
 The cutter head is of sufficient depth to cut heavy wall vessels and pipes.
 The proper angularity (if kept between the nozzle and the wall) and all elements
(such as seat rings and bolt circles) are concentric with each other to prevent the
jamming or obstruction of the cutter in its travel.
If the hot tap is not vertical, a nipple with attached small gate valve will be welded to the bottom of the tapping
valve for blowing or washing cuttings out of the seating area.
5.0 WELDING
Welding will be conducted as follows:

 Welding must be performed using welders and procedures qualified to the
applicable code and specifications.
 On storage tanks, the liquid level will be at least 3 feet (0.9 meter) above any
welding. Floating roof tanks will have roofs floating. Welding should not be
permitted on the deck of a floating roof except under very carefully controlled
conditions. Emergency exit plans must be in place before starting work on such
roofs. Additionally, extreme caution is advised when welding in the following
locations of floating roof tanks:
 Inside the pontoon
 Between the deck and liquid surface near the tank roof gauge float compartment
 Near the roof seal vent
 Near the floating roof lift leg vent
 Between the primary and secondary seals
 Nozzles will be beveled 45 degrees – 50 degrees from the outside. The entire weld
on carbon steel nozzles will be made with American Welding Standards of
Engineering (A.W.S.E.) -7018 electrodes or equivalent.
 Nozzle pad will be air or nitrogen tested and soaped for leaks.
 Hot taps should be performed on flowing lines with exceptions requiring attention as
below:
 Static lines will be full and properly vented if run is less than 20 feet (6.1 meters).
 Welding will not be done on empty or partially full lines without proper purging
and testing.
 The degree of hazard on lines carrying gas under pressure will determine if a hot
tap can be performed safely.
 Hot taps within 18 inches (45.7 centimeters)) of a pipe anchor, expansion joint,
expansion loop, flanged connection, or threaded connection will be avoided.
 The hot tap fitting will be full-fusion welded to the equipment to be tapped
(normally) at a right angle. The fitting will be contoured to the shape with a nozzle
bevel and 1/8 inch (3.2 millimeters) gap to permit full penetration weld. Longitudinal
welds on encirclement tees, saddles, and sleeves will not tie onto pipe.
 Before the tap is made, a test on the branch will be carried out with valve in position
to test valve gaskets and packing and to check attachment weld. Hydrostatic testing
will be done at temperatures below 203 degrees F (95 degrees C). Pneumatic

Page 476
ABG
HOT TAP PROCEDURE
testing, using air or nitrogen, will be done at temperatures above 203 degrees F
(95 degrees C). Soaping for leaks will be used for pneumatic testing.
 Additional testing such as radiograph, dye penetrant, or magnetic particles may be
used for testing. These additional tests must not substitute for the pneumatic test.
6.0 EXCEPTIONS
Exceptions must be approved and signed-off by a Registered Professional Mechanical Engineer and the
Project/Site Manager.
7.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0133 Hot Tap Permit
Non-ABG Documents:
American Petroleum Institute (API):
API 941 Steels For Hydrogen Service At Elevated
Temperatures And Pressures In Petroleum
Refineries And Petrochemical Plants
API 2201 Safe Hot Tapping Practices in the Petroleum and
Petrochemical Industries

Page 477
ABG
HOUSEKEEPING
HOUSEKEEPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................458
SCOPE459
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................459
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................459
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................................459
WORK SURFACES AND WALKWAYS..........................................................................................................................459
HOSES AND CORDS...................................................................................................................................................460
EATING FACILITIES....................................................................................................................................................460
EMERGENCY ACCESS.................................................................................................................................................460
REFERENCES..............................................................................................................................................................460

Page 478
ABG
HOUSEKEEPING
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the expectations and requirements for housekeeping.

SCOPE

 Work Surfaces and Walkways
 Hoses and Cords
 Eating Facilities
 Offices and Storage Areas
 Emergency Access
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
Each employee is responsible for keeping his/her work area organized and uncluttered – and to prevent trash,
waste materials, and debris from accumulating. Those employees doing work in multiple areas are responsible for
cleaning up after they complete that job.
Employees leaving the work area before a job is completed (to take a break or go to lunch, for example) must
make sure that the area is left in a safe condition. This should include replacing barricades or safety chains,
removing tools and other items from walkways, and generally making sure that the work area does not pose a risk
to people who may enter the area while you are gone.
The supervisor assumes overall responsibility for housekeeping. The supervisor will periodically inspect each work
are to ensure that the housekeeping expectations are being met.
Housekeeping must be maintained on a daily basis; cleaning and sweeping will be done in a manner that
minimizes the contamination of the air with dust or particulate matter.
Work areas will be kept clean to the extent the nature of the work allows; the floor of every workroom will be
maintained, as far as practicable, in a dry condition.
When it is necessary that items must span walking and working surfaces, proper methods of support and/or
protection will be used. One method is to use plastic ties to support cords, and hoses along handrails (never use
metal “ties”). Another method is to use cord covers for electrical cords.
Refer to Practice 000.653.3305, Manual Handling.

Page 479
ABG
HOUSEKEEPING
WORK SURFACES AND WALKWAYS
Floors, working surfaces, and passageways must be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, loose boards, and
openings.
Employees will:
 Keep work surfaces orderly, free of tripping hazards, and free of other hazards that
could result in injury.
 Provide safe access to and from the work area.
 Arrange materials in a stable manner so that they do not protrude into walking
surfaces.
 Place materials stored above work surfaces back from edges or behind protective
barriers to protect workers below.
 Clean up spills or mark the area with safety barricades until the spill can be cleaned
up.
 Identify interior aisles, walkways, passageways, and floor surfaces for construction
buildings, warehouses, or shops.
Note: Walkways may be established by building layout, office cubicles or

partitions, arrangement of equipment or material storage racks, welding
curtains, painted stripes, or reflective or ABG florescent striping materials.
When mechanical handling equipment is in use, sufficient safe clearance must be allowed for aisles, at loading
docks, through doorways, and wherever turns or passages are made.
HOSES AND CORDS
Hoses and electrical conductors that cross aisles or passageways must be covered or suspended overhead so that
they pose no tripping hazard.
EATING FACILITIES
For areas in which food is stored or prepared, including lunch and break rooms, the requirements of Practice
000.653.2002, Eating and Sanitation Facilities, will be followed.
EMERGENCY ACCESS
Exits, fire alarm boxes, fire extinguishing equipment, electrical disconnect panels, and other emergency
equipment must be kept clear of obstructions at all times.
REFERENCES
000.653.2002 Eating and Sanitation Facilities
000.653.3305 Manual Handling

Page 480
ABG
HEALTH SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT - DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................458
SCOPE462
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................462
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................462
1.0 STRUCTURE..................................................................................................................................................463
1.1 Policy.......................................................................................................................................................463
1.2 Principles.................................................................................................................................................463
1.3 Practices..................................................................................................................................................464
1.4 Procedures and Plans..............................................................................................................................464
1.5 Office, Engineering, and Field Execution..................................................................................................464
2.0 COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................................................464
3.0 Continual Performance Improvement.........................................................................................................465
3.1 Commitment and Policy..........................................................................................................................465
3.2 Planning...................................................................................................................................................465
3.3 Implementation.......................................................................................................................................465
3.4 Measurement and Evaluation.................................................................................................................466
3.5 Review and Improvement.......................................................................................................................466
4.0 EXECUTION..................................................................................................................................................466
5.0 PRACTICES....................................................................................................................................................467
6.0 CONTROL.....................................................................................................................................................467
7.0 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES......................................................................................................................467
7.1 Chief Executive Officer of ABG.................................................................................................................467
7.2 ABG Executives........................................................................................................................................468
7.3 HSE Board................................................................................................................................................468
7.4 HSE Management Team..........................................................................................................................469
7.5 Sales and Marketing Employees..............................................................................................................469
7.6 Office Managers and Project/Site Managers...........................................................................................469
7.7 ABG Employees.......................................................................................................................................470
7.8 Procurement and Contracts Employees..................................................................................................470
7.9 Contractors..............................................................................................................................................470
8.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................472
9.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................472

Page 481
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice provides a detailed description of structure of the ABG corporate Health, Safety, and Environmental
(HSE) Management System. The Management System provides the framework for how HSE aspects in ABG’s
offices and on ABG-managed projects will be addressed, beginning with a philosophy and commitment detailed in
the HSE Policy and Principles and cascading to corporate practices and project/site-specific procedures and plans.
ABG’s corporate culture, supported by the HSE Management System, gives priority to HSE for its employees and
its stakeholders, and is fundamental for achieving profitability. The management system provides an integrated
tool for implementing the company’s commitment to continually improving HSE performance.
SCOPE
 Structure
 Communications
 Continual Performance Improvement
 Execution
 Practices
 Control
 Roles and Responsibilities
APPLICATION
This practice applies to all work activities and employees under the control of ABG and its contractors.
DEFINITIONS
ANSI Z-10 – American National Standards Institute standard for Occupational Health and Safety management
systems.
OHSAS 18002:2000 – Occupational health and safety management systems – Guidelines for the implementation
of OHSAS 18001.
ISO 14001:2004 – International Standards Organization standard designed to produce globally accepted systems
for environmental management.
Sustainable Development – Development that meets the needs of the present generation without compromising
the ability of future generations to meet their own needs (Brundtland Commission, 1987).
ZERO ACCIDENTS Program – 12 high-impact injury reduction techniques that have consistently shown exceptional
results when fully embraced, implemented, and audited by projects and offices. The 12 techniques are:
- Contractor Management
- Pre-Project HSE
- HSE Education and Orientation
- New Employee Development
- HSE Awareness Program
- Substance Abuse Program
- Recognition and Rewards

Page 482
ABG
- Incident Reporting and Investigation

- Pre-Task Planning
- Management in Action
- Audit/Assessments
- Use of Networking and Resources
1.0 STRUCTURE
The structure of ABG’s HSE Management System incorporates several levels of control documents as shown in
Figure 1.
ABG HSE Management System

Figure 1 HSE Management System
The HSE Management System includes consideration of:

 Sustainable development
 Risk management
 Accountability to community
 Cross-discipline cooperation
 Best practices
Requirements applicable to the scope of work (such as regulatory requirements,
in-country standards, and contract requirements)

Page 483
ABG
1.1 Policy
The HSE Policy outlines ABG’s commitment and position on HSE management. The HSE Management System has
been developed in response to this policy.
1.2 Principles
The HSE Principles provide the fundamental precepts upon which the HSE Management System is based and
executed. The Principles are contained in Attachment 02.
1.3 Practices
Practices establish the performance requirements to be met by offices, engineering, and projects. HSE practices
are available through KOL (Practice 000.653.0010, Health, Safety, and Environmental Management System – Table
of Contents).
1.4 Procedures and Plans
Procedures and plans are the implementation documents developed at the project level. Client procedures and
plans may be substituted or tailored for a particular project if these meet or exceed ABG requirements and are
required by the client. Where new or improved procedures have been developed, these should be forwarded to
the ABG HSE Board to be considered for future inclusion in the corporate HSE Management System practices.
A site-specific HSE “plan” is an overview of how the HSE program and procedures will be implemented. HSE plans
are typically 50 pages or less. Modification of Practice 000.653.0020, Health, Safety, and Environmental
Management System – Execution, is the preferred method to develop the site-specific HSE plan. However, the
HSE section of the Project Execution Plan (PEP) can be considered the site-specific HSE plan.
The site-specific HSE procedures supplement the PPM and describe in detail the HSE and security requirements to
be implemented at the project site.
Together, these 2 documents comprise the site HSE manual.
1.5 Office, Engineering, and Field Execution
While it is recognized that there are different, but related, requirements and responsibilities for office,
engineering, and field execution activities, the HSE Management System is designed to integrate these functions.
2.0 COMMUNICATION
HSE management will communicate the HSE Management System to ABG employees and other stakeholders
through training, KOL, printed documents, and other forms of communication. These communications will
facilitate the effective use of the HSE Management System and promote a high level of awareness regarding HSE
issues.

Page 484
ABG
3.0 Continual Performance Improvement
The HSE Management System is based on a continual improvement model, as contained in international
standards such as ANSI Z 10:2005, OHSAS 18002:2000, and ISO 14001:2004. This model is shown in Figure 2. The
basic elements in the model are described below.
Figure 2 Continual Improvement Model for HSE Management
3.1 Commitment and Policy
This element establishes the ABG commitment to the process by providing a documented company HSE policy.
The HSE policy is appropriate to the company’s business strategy and the ABG culture, and sets the direction of
the HSE Management System.
ABG is committed to providing a healthy and safe workplace for all people at each of its offices and projects, and
to protecting the environment in accordance with applicable laws and our HSE Policy. ABG’s commitment is
based on the principle that all accidents are preventable and risks will be controlled to a level that is “as low as
reasonably practicable.” The unequivocal commitment to HSE by ABG management is a basic foundation of ABG
Corporate values and culture and is reflected in the HSE Vision (refer to Attachment 03).
3.2 Planning
This element provides strategic direction, objectives, goals, and execution strategies in order to plan how the
policy should be implemented.
3.3 Implementation
This element describes the use of the HSE Management System by ABG employees and contractors.

Page 485
ABG
3.4 Measurement and Evaluation
Measurement tools are used to confirm that the HSE Management System is being executed and implemented
correctly. They also measure performance, monitor effectiveness, and evaluate changes to the system.
Evaluation and feedback loops are an integral part of the HSE Management System.
Measurement and evaluation tools include:

 Audit – Auditing is the primary tool for measuring performance. The following audit
protocols will be developed and executed:
 Systems audit – to measure implementation and effectiveness of the HSE
Management System
 Compliance audit – to measure compliance with the HSE practices and project-
specific procedures
 Performance audit – to measure whether the expected performance level is being
met
 Measurement Process – Performance measurement processes will be implemented
to assess the overall effectiveness of the HSE Management System. These processes
will include setting and measuring of strategies, objectives and goals, collation of
statistics, recording of HSE initiatives, and skill base identification.
 Client Review – An evaluation process will be developed at the project or business
line level to gain feedback from ABG clients.
 ABG Projects and Offices – Projects and offices will be given the opportunity to
evaluate the effectiveness of the HSE Management System and to provide
suggestions on continued improvements.
 HSE Alignment Process – HSE professionals involved in the alignment process before
and during project startup have the opportunity to identify key areas of the
project/site that require particular attention, and identify the need to adopt or
create procedures that are tailored to the project/site. A feedback loop will be
developed to capture such instances.
3.5 Review and Improvement
The HSE Management System will be reviewed at least annually to accommodate factors such as changing
expectations, new objectives, new legislation, organizational changes, and results from continual improvement
elements.
4.0 EXECUTION
People at ABG workplaces are responsible, empowered, and accountable to work together as a team to execute
HSE systems and processes.
ABG will facilitate execution of the HSE Policy by:
 Adopting recognized standards, applicable codes of practice, and relevant statutory
provisions as the foundation upon which ABG develops its own high standards

Page 486
ABG
 Incorporating recognized HSE standards into engineering and design processes, and
into the work methods executed at ABG workplaces
 Embracing, implementing, and auditing conformance to the ZERO ACCIDENTS SM
Program (refer to Practices 000.653.0020, .0100, and .1305).
 Providing effective training, efficient communication, and continual performance
review inherent in the HSE Management System
 Establishing realistic and challenging tasks for employees and performance targets
for ABG workplaces
 Setting company objectives and targets on an annual basis and assigning
accountability for meeting these objectives and targets
 Preparing and implementing HSE documentation for every project/site in accordance
with HSE Management System and client requirements
 Regularly auditing implementation of the HSE Management System in offices and on
projects/sites, as well as project/site HSE plans and procedures developed to execute
the HSE Management System
 Working with clients and contractors to continually improve HSE performance
 Developing communication and control networks
 Monitoring, measuring, and reporting of HSE performance
 Conducting training to help management, employees, contractors , and others to
understand their responsibility with respect to HSE management, and to empower
them to suggest improvements to their work processes
Refer to Practice 000.653.0020, for a detailed discussion on executing the HSE

Management System in offices, engineering disciplines, and on projects.
5.0 PRACTICES
A complete list of HSE practices is provided in Practice 000.653.0010. ABG’s HSE practices reflect the activities,
roles and responsibilities put into place to support the long term Vision for HSE within the company (refer to
Attachment 03), the Objectives required in the shorter term (refer to Attachment 04), and the clear, measurable
Goals that have been set to meet those Objectives (refer to Attachment 05).
6.0 CONTROL
The ABG HSE Board has overall responsibility for drafting, reviewing, requesting/resolving comments, and issuing
the ABG HSE Management System.
The most current and official revision of the HSE Management System is the electronic copy, which is available to
employees through the ABG KOL.
7.0 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
This section describes the roles and responsibilities of employees with regard to the HSE Management System.

Page 487
ABG
7.1 Chief Executive Officer of ABG
The Chief Executive Officer is ultimately responsible for all HSE issues within ABG. This responsibility is
communicated with the corporate commitment to maintain an appropriate HSE Management System and affect
ABG HSE culture from the highest level.
Roles
 Direct and endorse the HSE Policy, Principles, Vision, Objectives and Goals.
 Maintain ABG culture of high HSE standards.
 Endorse the HSE Management System.
 Review HSE performance.
Issue the ABG HSE Annual Report.
Responsibilities
 Review HSE Policy.
 Foster a culture that encourages a high standard of HSE management.
 Direct that the HSE Management System be executed companywide.
 Commission reports as necessary to verify that the expected level of HSE
performance is achieved.
 Review and approve the ABG HSE Annual Report.
7.2 ABG Executives
ABG executives have the responsibility to evaluate the HSE Management System and integrate into all areas of
ABG’s business within their area of authority.
Roles
 Direct, endorse, and execute the HSE Policy, Principles, Vision, Objectives, and Goals.
 Evaluate, promote, and execute the HSE Management System.
 Promote HSE culture.
Responsibilities
 Promote employee feedback loops and provide management level feedback.
 Execute the HSE Management System in each business line.
Allocate sufficient resources to allow implementation of the HSE Management System to
meet the HSE Policy, Principles, and Objectives.
7.3 HSE Board
The ABG HSE Board is the global leader of Corporate HSE. The Board provides leadership and support to ABG’s
HSE professionals, projects/sites, and clients worldwide. ABG’s organization charts are maintained on the ABG
News Online Home Page, including the organization chart for the HSE Board. The HSE Board Charter is included as
Attachment 06.
Roles

Page 488
ABG
 Represent ABG on HSE issues companywide.

 Represent Corporate HSE at executive management level.
Direct the HSE Management System.
Responsibilities
 Report company HSE performance.
 Develop, approve, and communicate HSE initiatives.
 Review and comment on revisions to the HSE Management System.
7.4 HSE Management Team
The HSE Management Team acts under the leadership of the HSE Board. The team advises and assists offices and
projects in the implementation and monitoring of the HSE Management System.
Roles
Provide high-quality HSE management services to ABG.
Responsibilities
 Provide HSE advice and assistance.
 Maintain and continually improve the HSE Management System.
 Advise ABG employees and contractors of their HSE responsibilities.
 Provide audit protocols and audit staff.
 Conduct audits.
 Identify HSE training needs and provide appropriate training.
 Prepare and review HSE documentation, as required.
 Monitor the effectiveness of the HSE Management System.
 Report office and project HSE performance.
Liaise with client representatives and regulatory bodies on HSE issues as required.
7.5 Sales and Marketing Employees
Sales and Marketing employees have a role in communicating the HSE Management System to clients in order to
show ABG excellence in HSE management.
Roles
 Promote ABG’s HSE Management System.
Liaise with the HSE Management Team on HSE issues.
Responsibilities
 Communicate information about the HSE Management System effectively to clients.
Consult with Corporate HSE for information and assistance in preparation of applicable
documentation, such as tender bids.

Page 489
ABG
7.6 Office Managers and Project/Site Managers
Managers are responsible for HSE management within their area of authority.
Roles
 Ensure project team members are trained on the HSE Management System.
 Ensure implementation of the HSE Management System.
 Liaise with HSE professionals for advice and assistance.
Manage HSE in project/site or office groups with assistance from dedicated HSE
professionals.
Responsibilities
Oversee the production and implementation of an HSE Management Plan and project-
specific HSE procedures for each office or project/site using the HSE Management
System as the “template.”
Identify and manage HSE risk.
Report and be accountable for HSE performance.
Promote and support personal stop-work authority.
7.7 ABG Employees
HSE demands individual participation at all levels of the ABG organization and on projects/sites. Employees are
expected to engage in HSE activities in their workplace.
Roles
Comply with the requirements of the HSE Management System, or project-specific HSE
procedures, as applicable.
Contribute to a ABG culture of high HSE management principles.
Responsibilities
 Maintain a high degree of professional competency, personal initiative, and
communication effectiveness.
 Assist with HSE Management System execution and provide feedback where
appropriate.
 Perform work in the safest manner practicable.
 Assist in identifying training needs and undertake training as required.
Exercise personal stop-work authority when appropriate.
7.8 Procurement and Contracts Employees
Roles
Uphold the requirements of the ABG HSE Management System.
Responsibilities

Page 490
ABG
 Communicate HSE requirements to suppliers.

Flow down requisite HSE requirements to suppliers in contractual documentation; refer
to Practice 000.653.1003, Contractor Selection and Alignment.
7.9 Contractors
Roles
Uphold the requisite HSE requirements as flowed down in contract documents.
Responsibilities
 Maintain high standards of HSE management.
 Communicate and cooperate with ABG on HSE issues.
 Refer to ABG HSE professionals where clarification of practices, procedures, or plans
is required.
 Adopt ABG project-specific HSE procedures, or develop and submit their own system
for review and comment.
 Perform work in the safest manner practicable.
 Assist in identifying training needs and undertake training as required.
Exercise personal stop-work authority when appropriate.

Page 491
ABG
8.0 REFERENCES

000.653.0020 Health, Safety, and Environmental Management
System – Execution
000.653.1003 Contractor Selection and Alignment
9.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 02 Health, Safety, and Environmental Principles
Attachment 03 Health, Safety, and Environmental Vision
Attachment 04 Health, Safety, and Environmental Objectives
Attachment 05 Health, Safety, and Environmental Goals
Attachment 06 Health, Safety, and Environmental Board Charter

Page 492
ABG
HEALTH SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT - EXECUTION
HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT – EXECUTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................473
SCOPE476
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................476
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................476
1.0 OBJECTIVES..................................................................................................................................................476
2.0 USE OF CORPORATE PRACTICES...................................................................................................................477
2.1 General....................................................................................................................................................477
2.2 Deviations................................................................................................................................................477
A. Collaboration with Others.......................................................................................................................478
B. Seconded Employees..............................................................................................................................478
C. Contracts/Subcontracts...........................................................................................................................478
2.3 Exceptions...............................................................................................................................................478
2.4 Legal Requirements.................................................................................................................................478
3.0 ZERO ACCIDENTSSM PROGRAM.....................................................................................................................478
4.0 SITE-SPECIFIC HSE DOCUMENTS..................................................................................................................479
4.1 HSE Procedures.......................................................................................................................................479
4.2 HSE Plan...................................................................................................................................................479
4.3 HSE Manual.............................................................................................................................................479
5.0 MAJOR PROGRAM ELEMENTS.....................................................................................................................479
5.1 General....................................................................................................................................................479
5.2 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Project Field Employees.......................................................................479
5.3 Project Requirements Checklist...............................................................................................................480
5.4 Setting Program Goals and Objectives.....................................................................................................480
5.5 Implementation.......................................................................................................................................480
A. HSE Monitoring.......................................................................................................................................480
B. Communications.....................................................................................................................................481
5.6 Employee Involvement............................................................................................................................481
5.7 Hazard/Risk Identification and Management..........................................................................................481
A. Methods of Hazard Identification...........................................................................................................482
B. Systems Approach to Managing Hazards and Risks.................................................................................483
C. Job Safety Analysis).................................................................................................................................483
D. Safety Task Assignment...........................................................................................................................484
6.1 Project Director/Managing Director/General Manager...........................................................................484
6.2 Project/Site Manager..............................................................................................................................484
6.3 Line Management....................................................................................................................................485
6.4 HSE Board................................................................................................................................................487
6.5 HSE Representative.................................................................................................................................487

Page 493
ABG
6.6 HSE Employee/Craft Representative.......................................................................................................488

6.7 All Personnel............................................................................................................................................488
6.8 Contractors..............................................................................................................................................489
6.9 Administration Manager/Office HSE Coordinator...................................................................................490
7.0 PROJECT STARTUP.......................................................................................................................................490
8.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING......................................................................................................................490
8.1 Water Quality..........................................................................................................................................491
8.2 Air Quality, Including Dust, Emissions, and Odors...................................................................................491
8.7 Public Relations and Liaison.....................................................................................................................492
8.8 Wildlife Flora and Fauna and Natural Features.......................................................................................492
8.9 Visual Intrusion, Signs, and Lighting........................................................................................................492
8.10 Archaeology.............................................................................................................................................492
9.0 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE........................................................................................................................493
10.0 TRAINING AND EDUCATION.........................................................................................................................493
10.1 Orientation..............................................................................................................................................493
10.2 Training....................................................................................................................................................493
10.3 Professional Credentialing.......................................................................................................................494
11.0 AUDITS.........................................................................................................................................................494
11.1 Planned Inspections.................................................................................................................................494
11.2 Project/Site Audits...................................................................................................................................494
12.0 CONTRACTOR SELECTION............................................................................................................................495
13.0 ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS MANAGEMENT...............................................................................................495
13.1 Incident Investigation and Reporting.......................................................................................................495
13.2 Critical Incident Management.................................................................................................................495
13.3 Reporting.................................................................................................................................................496
14.0 Substance Abuse Program...........................................................................................................................496
15.0 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION........................................................................................................................496
16.0 PERFORMANCE INDICATORS.......................................................................................................................496
17.0 AWARDS PROGRAMS...................................................................................................................................497
18.0 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND INJURY MANAGEMENT................................................................................497
19.0 Travel Safety................................................................................................................................................497
20.0 DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS................................................................................................................................497
21.0 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS.......................................................................................................................498
22.0 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MODIFICATION.....................................................................498
23.0 SITE ACCESS AND SECURITY.........................................................................................................................498
25.0 VEHICLES AND MOBILE EQUIPMENT...........................................................................................................498
26.0 OVERHEAD HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICES..........................................................................................................498
27.0 BURIED SERVICES.........................................................................................................................................498
28.0 FALL PROTECTION........................................................................................................................................498

Page 494
ABG
29.0 SCAFFOLDING..............................................................................................................................................498
30.0 LADDERS......................................................................................................................................................498
31.0 ELEVATED WORK PLATFORMS.....................................................................................................................499
32.0 SAFE WORK/ACT OBSERVATION..................................................................................................................499
33.0 WORKING IN HEAT.......................................................................................................................................499
34.0 MANUAL HANDLING....................................................................................................................................499
35.0 WORKING ALONE.........................................................................................................................................499
36.0 FLOOR GRATING REMOVAL.........................................................................................................................499
37.0 WORKING ON ROOFS...................................................................................................................................499
38.0 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT..............................................................................................................499
39.0 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT..............................................................................................................................499
40.0 LOADING, TRANSPORT, AND UNLOADING MATERIALS................................................................................499
41.0 HSE HANDOVER...........................................................................................................................................499
42.0 PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT...........................................................................................................................499
43.0 EARTHWORK, CONCRETE, AND MASONRY..................................................................................................499
44.0 DRILL AND BLAST OPERATIONS....................................................................................................................499
45.0 FIBROUS MATERIALS....................................................................................................................................500
46.0 RAILROAD SAFETY........................................................................................................................................500
47.0 MARINE OPERATIONS..................................................................................................................................500
49.0 ABRASIVE BLASTING....................................................................................................................................500
50.0 FIRST LINE BREAKS.......................................................................................................................................500
51.0 TANK AND PIPING SYSTEM..........................................................................................................................500
52.0 SHOP EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES..............................................................................................................500
53.0 HIGH-PRESSURE WATER CLEANING.............................................................................................................500
54.0 LAWN EQUIPMENT AND CHAIN SAWS.........................................................................................................500
55.0 hot tapping..................................................................................................................................................500
56.0 EATING AND SANITATION FACILITIES...........................................................................................................500
57.0 HAND & PORTABLE POWER TOOLS (Including Powder –Actuated Tools)....................................................500
58.0 MIER AND MSISR REPORTING......................................................................................................................501
59.0 RADIATION...................................................................................................................................................501
60.0 EXPOSURE TO HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS/AGENTS.......................................................................................501
61.0 PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT................................................................................................................501
62.0 STEEL ERECTION...........................................................................................................................................501
63.0 HAZARD COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................................................501
64.0 HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL..................................................................................................................501
65.0 HOT WORK (WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING)..............................................................................................501
67.0 ELECTRICAL WORK SAFETY...........................................................................................................................501
68.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.....................................................................................................................................501
69.0 HSE ENGINEERING.......................................................................................................................................501
70.0 RECORDS......................................................................................................................................................501
71.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................502

Page 495
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies and presents in some detail the strategies for executing the Health, Safety, and
Environmental (HSE) requirements that are common to office, engineering, and project/site (field) activities.
SCOPE
This practice includes references to over 50 processes and activities common to projects, engineering, and offices
worldwide, including the 12 high-impact injury reduction techniques of the ZERO ACCIDENTS SM Program.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
ZERO ACCIDENTSSM Program – 12 high-impact injury reduction techniques that have consistently shown
exceptional results when fully embraced, implemented, and audited by projects and offices. The 12 techniques
are:
- Pre-Project HSE
- Pre-Task Planning
- Audit/Assessments
1.0 OBJECTIVES
The practices are written to be in compliance with the U.S. Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA) standards and
regional regulatory requirements. Where an OSHA standard has not been promulgated, the practices are written
to be commensurate with recognized health, safety, and environmental (HSE) management programs, such as the
Voluntary Protection Program, International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 14001, and Occupational
Health and Safety Advisory Services’ 18002. Best management practices and in-country requirements from
countries around the world have also been included where applicable.
ABG’s objectives in implementing the ABG HSE Policy and Management System are to:
 Require personal responsibility and accountability for HSE management.
 Incorporate the highest recognized HSE standards into engineering, design, and work
processes implemented at all of ABG-managed workplaces.
 Adopt other recognized standards and relevant statutory provisions, as the basis
upon which ABG develops its own high standards.

Page 496
ABG
 Provide effective training, efficient communication, and continuous performance

review within the HSE Management System.
 Establish and monitor HSE performance targets for ABG’s workplaces, by the use of
audits; toolbox meetings; Job Safety Analyses (JSAs), Form 000.653.F0100 and Safety
Task Assignments (STAs), Form 000.653.F0101; and project targets (refer to
Section 13.0 of this practice).
2.0 USE OF CORPORATE PRACTICES
2.1 General
The ABG corporate HSE Management System provides an integrated tool—a set of “requirements documents”—
to execute the company’s commitment to continually improving HSE performance.
The requirements documents that make up the HSE Management System are called “practices” and provide
minimum HSE-related requirements, as well as how these requirements will be met.
Note: The practices contain excerpts from, and references to, numerous regulations,
codes, and standards. The practices do not state the requirements of these
regulations, codes, and standards in their entirety. Persons or organizations using
these practices must familiarize themselves with such regulations, codes, and
standards as appropriate.
These practices apply worldwide to ABG activities and recognize ABG's responsibility to meet––or wherever
practical surpass––the relevant statutory requirements, codes of practice, guidance notes, and industry codes and
standards. The corporate documents must be used to develop office and project/site-specific HSE procedures and
plans, as well as flowed down to contractors for them to either adopt or develop and implement an “equal” HSE
Management System.
This approach provides consistency and control in the management of HSE risks. Specific office and project/site
procedures and plans may be more stringent than the corporate practices. The more stringent of comparable
requirements documents will be used.
It is recognized that there are different requirements and different responsibilities at various locations and/or
activities of the corporation. Therefore, specific corporate HSE practices have been developed for office HSE and
engineering HSE, as well as those pertaining to project/site (field) HSE operations.
2.2 Deviations
It is understood that there may be valid reasons for deviations to be requested/granted to the corporate HSE
Management System practices, as driven by different contract and/or in-country requirements at the project
level. Where ABG HSE Management System practices relate to work functions that are not in the direct work
scope or area of responsibility, those HSE Management System practices need not be implemented; thus, no
request for deviation is required.
However, where HSE Management System practices do relate to the direct work scope and cannot be used,
deviations from the ABG HSE Management System practices must be submitted to, and approved by, the Business
Unit HSE “lead.” This is accomplished by completing the HSE Management System Compliance and Equivalency

Page 497
ABG
(Form 000.653.F0270) and submitting it for approval. When granting deviations, consideration should be given to
the impact on client requirements, and contractual and regulatory compliance.
A. Collaboration with Others
When ABG is engaged in collaboration with other parties, such as joint ventures, partnerships, limited liability
companies, or alliances, the extent to which the HSE Management System will be applied will be based on written
agreement between the collaborating parties.
B. Seconded Employees
When ABG employees work under the managerial control of another organization, such as in supplemental labor
arrangements (employees loaned to client organizations), their work may be performed in accordance with the
HSE management system of that organization, provided that Form 000.653.F0270 is completed indicating the
arrangement, and approved by the Regional Safety Manager.
C. Contracts/Subcontracts
The ABG HSE Management System practices are used unless a project develops its own equally robust
procedures.
When a request for proposal is prepared, Practice 000.653.0010, Health, Safety, Environmental Management
System – Table of Contents, is appended to the contract. If the successful bidder (contractor) elects to use ABG’s
HSE Management System, as indicated at the time of bid, this is noted on the first page of the appendix. If the
successful bidder (contractor) elects not to use ABG’s HSE Management System, as indicated at the time of the
bid, this is also noted on the appendix.
Therefore, it is important to determine the HSE Management System program that will be used on a project
before initiating work.
2.3 Exceptions
In an unusual circumstance where a safety requirement in any practice is not feasible, inappropriate for the
specific and unique situation, or presents a greater risk to the employee, a written justification for exception to
the requirement is submitted for approval to the immediate manager/supervisor and HSE Representative. A
written justification from a subcontractor requires additional approval of the assigned buyer’s technical
representative. Once approved, the exception/justification is included in the Job Safety Analysis (JSA)/Safety Task
Assignment (STA) and all affected employees are informed during a pre-job briefing. The pre-job briefing is
documented in accordance with Practice 000.653.1304.
2.4 Legal Requirements
Each user needs to verify that pertinent legislative and corporate governance requirements, including contract
requirements, are met in each specific office or project/site-specific procedure.
3.0 ZERO ACCIDENTSSM PROGRAM
Although they have been around for a while, the high impact ZERO ACCIDENTS reduction techniques continue to
show results when used on jobsites. ABG HSE believes these techniques are the basis of a good HSE program, and

Page 498
ABG
every project will benefit from implementing them. This program of incident reduction techniques has helped
ABG raise the level of expectation for HSE performance and provided the tools for us to make it happen.
ABG Corporate HSE audits (refer to Forms 000.653.F0272 and .F0950) measure how effectively projects and
offices execute the ZERO ACCIDENTS techniques. If projects or offices are not adhering to this program, they will
not perform well on their audits. Additionally, projects applying for ZERO Incident awards (One-Star through Five-
Star awards) are audited against these techniques.
4.0 SITE-SPECIFIC HSE DOCUMENTS
4.1 HSE Procedures
be used at the project site.
4.2 HSE Plan
4.3 HSE Manual

5.0 MAJOR PROGRAM ELEMENTS
5.1 General
HSE incident prevention is a primary responsibility of all levels of the organization. Each manager is directed to
use maximum initiative in communication, training, motivation, and monitoring techniques to apply every
reasonable precaution to prevent incidents. Each employee is expected to take appropriate steps to eliminate
incidents in the workplace.
HSE, as a professional staff function at the project/site level, will directly assist management in the execution of
the HSE Management System at the business unit, business line, regional, and project/site level. Each person
responsible for the HSE function must exhibit a high degree of professional competency, personal initiative, and
effective communication skills in performing his/her duties. Project/Site HSE Representatives will be responsible
for consulting with management in all matters affecting the environment and the health and safety of employees,
contractor personnel, clients, and the community. Incident prevention responsibilities of managers cannot be
delegated.

Page 499
ABG
5.2 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Project Field Employees
The ratio of ABG HSE representatives will be specified by the Business Unite HSE Lead. However, as a general
guide, the following will be used for planning purposes:
 When the onsite employee total equals or exceeds 25 employees, a ABG HSE
Representative will be dedicated full-time to the responsibilities of the onsite HSE
Representative; when the onsite employee total equals or exceeds 50 employees,
the HSE Representative will be an HSE professional.
Note: “Onsite employee total” includes employees of ABG, contractors, and

sub-/lower-tier contractors working full- or part-time on the ABG-managed
project site(s).
 Additional full-time HSE professionals will be assigned to the project for each
increase of 75 employees. Additional competent HSE Representatives may be
required due to geographic location, specific hazards, client requirements, or local
regulatory requirements at the discretion of the Regional Safety Manager or the
Project/Construction Manager.
 An HSE supervisor may be required for every 3 to 6 HSE professionals.
 An HSE manager may be required for every 3 to 6 HSE supervisors.
5.3 Project Requirements Checklist
ABG’s Project Requirements Checklist Workbook outlines typical project activities, issues, or services for all
project phases. The Workbook contains general checklists, as well as separate checklists, for each discipline
including HSE. Refer to Form 000.100.F1000, Project Requirements Checklist Workbook.
5.4 Setting Program Goals and Objectives
ZERO ACCIDENTS is the ABG corporate goal — this goal is adopted worldwide by ABG offices and projects. The
ZERO ACCIDENTS goal includes the more specific goals, “No environmental citations” and “No other regulatory
agency citations.”
Performance objectives are developed annually at the corporate level and adopted worldwide by ABG offices and
projects. Performance objectives are numerical incidence rates for total recordable cases, work-restricted cases,
and lost workday cases. Each performance objective is based on continuous improvement toward the ZERO
ACCIDENTS goal.
The goal and objectives apply to self-perform and subcontractor operations alike.
Project-specific goals/objectives are developed based on the needs, environmental conditions, and performance
at the project/site levels.

Page 500
ABG
5.5 Implementation
A. HSE Monitoring
A key element to the success of an HSE program is ongoing assessment and inspection. HSE monitoring will be
conducted by site management to ensure that ABG’s HSE requirements are properly executed, developed,
implemented, and maintained, and to verify compliance with national, in-country, and/or local HSE standards.
The business lines and site management are responsible for conducting the appropriate level of self-monitoring.
HSE monitoring by Corporate HSE may be conducted, without notice, on any project regardless of apparent
success or failure as reflected in the analysis of required HSE reports.
B. Communications
To aid in the execution, implementation, and continuing maintenance of the HSE Management System, the
following will be issued as required:
 HSE Practices  Directives that communicate requirements necessary to maintain
the HSE Management System. The ABG HSE Board issues the HSE practices.
 HSE Bulletins and Alerts - Current regulatory agency directives, company directives
related to incident prevention, and HSE guidelines that employees should know. HSE
Bulletins are issued by the ABG HSE Board.
ABG Corporation HSE Alerts, Regulatory Compliance Bulletins, and Special Bulletins
are issued to all company operations as a learning and incident prevention tool.
These Alerts and Bulletins often depict actual incident occurrences and lessons
learned.
5.6 Employee Involvement
Individual involvement in HSE management is based on the principle of shared employer/employee HSE
responsibility.
Individual involvement is provided and encouraged through:
 The Hazard Elimination Form (000.653.F0275)
 The HSE Perception Survey (Form 000.653.F0276)
 Establishment of open/honest communication among all levels of the organization
 The establishment of HSE committees at the worksites
 The participation in toolbox, supervisor, and other HSE meetings
 Participation in safe work observations
 Compliance with the requirements under relevant local acts and regulations
 Awareness of and work for the health//safety of themselves/others in the workplace
 Involvement in environmental activities
 Compliance with all safe-working directions given in the workplace
 Avoidance of misuse or damage to any equipment and materials

Page 501
ABG
5.7 Hazard/Risk Identification and Management
Responsibilities
Responsibility for hazard and risk identification and risk management is assigned to all levels of management and
to employees generally.
Risk management philosophy is based on the principle of reducing risk to a level that is “as low as reasonably
practicable” (ALARP) and is otherwise determined by comparison with and in consideration of:
 Design specifications
 Industry best practice
 Knowledge Online/lessons learned
 Statutory requirements
 Codes of practice
 Recognized standards
Risk Management and Assessment

The purpose of risk management and assessment is to define structured methods of identifying hazards and
assessing risk, and then develop work procedures to enable the work to be done in a safe and healthy manner
with respect for the environment.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task Planning/Risk Analysis.
Project Management will adopt a life cycle approach. This structured approach identifies, analyzes, and manages
areas of risk or hazard. In addition, other specific risk assessments and reviews may be used to analyze specific
areas of risk or hazard.
ABG has a commitment to achieve the highest possible level of hazard and risk identification. Consistent with this
commitment, ABG will strive to exceed the minimum standard of local legislation, standards, and codes of
practice. In accordance with this commitment, ABG will conduct assessments of activities such as construction
risk analysis, manual handling, noise, plant safety, confined space entry, and asbestos.
ABG also conducts regular audits of existing workplaces and will continue to identify hazards, assess these risks,
and instigate appropriate control measures. Constant monitoring and review of the practices keeps the process
working effectively, risks managed, and control measures executed.
Definitions
 Hazard - Anything that has the potential to cause injury/illness or damage.
 Risk - Measures the likelihood of harm arising from exposure to any hazard.
HSE Work Procedures

Project Management will verify that their HSE management systems addresses as a minimum the hazards
identified. The risks associated with each of these hazards will be addressed through the means of an HSE work
procedure.

Page 502
ABG
Each contractor will develop (or adopt) HSE procedures for its work scope. These procedures will be developed or
adopted with consideration of statutory and project requirements, and––if developed––must be submitted to the
Project HSE Representative or nominated delegate before commencement of work.
Procedures will be developed in consultation with personnel who will be directly involved with the particular
tasks. Procedures may be developed from hazard analysis processes, such as Hazard and Operability studies
(HAZOP) or JSAs.
STAs (and JSAs where applicable) or other hazard analysis techniques will be applied to all tasks that are
undertaken on the project. Particular attention will be paid to the tasks that are complex in nature or that have a
higher than normal level of risk (such as dual crane lifts, critical crane lifts, work on “live” equipment, and pressure
testing). This analysis will be done to maintain proactive control of issues that may adversely affect the efficient
and safe completion of the task.
A. Methods of Hazard Identification
Hazards in the workplace can be identified in a number of ways:

 Inspections - Workplace inspections provide a system of recognizing and correcting
hazardous conditions.
 JSA of specific jobs or tasks - JSAs assist in identifying particular hazards that may
occur during performance of a specific job or task.
 (STA before starting a job task - STAs are a form of hazard risk communication
directly related to daily activities.
 Experience - Collective experience of those personnel on the job can identify

hazards.
 Statistical Analysis - By analysis of HSE statistics, determinations can be made

regarding types of incidents that are experienced and how they are caused.
B. Systems Approach to Managing Hazards and Risks
To allow a systematic approach to managing hazards, the following process should be followed:
 Identification - The first step in the hazards/risk management process is to identify
the hazards in the workplace.
 Assessment - Once the hazards have been identified, it is necessary to assess what
risks they pose to personnel in the workplace. In this way, a measure of the risk can
be established and a determination of priority for corrective action can be made.
The level of risk is dependent on the exposure to the risk and the probability and
consequences of an event occurring.

Page 503
ABG
 Control - Control is the process of determining and implementing appropriate

measures to control risk. Legislation and codes of practice require that control of
factors assessed as posing increased risk be implemented ALARP.
 Evaluation - Evaluation means checking to see whether the introduced changes

reduce the risk previously assessed. It may involve repeating the process of hazard
identification, risk assessment, and risk control to confirm that HSE risks from a
particular hazard have been controlled as far as is practicable. Where the evaluation
of risk control measures reveals some remaining risk, the process continues.
 Monitor - To maintain the control measures, the measures must be monitored on a

regular basis.
C. Job Safety Analysis)
JSA is a procedure that identifies hazards associated with each step of a job and develops solutions for each
hazard that will either eliminate or control the hazard. A JSA requires the participation of all personnel in a work
group. Before commencing the JSA, it is important to define the scope of the job, including needed personnel,
tools, equipment, material, and work area.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1304.
D. Safety Task Assignment
STA is the process of identifying and communicating to each employee the task steps to be completed, the
hazards and risks associated with the task, and the safe work methods that are to be applied to complete the task
in a safe and healthy manner.
Titles will change from project to project, as will the responsibilities and tasks to some extent.
6.1 Project Director/Managing Director/General Manager
Responsibilities:
 Provide an environment that protects all personnel associated with the project and
the general public.
 Execute the ABG HSE Policy, Principles, and Objectives.
 Provide overall direction and support for the implementation of the ABG HSE
Management System.
 Provide sufficient resources to support approved ABG HSE initiatives.

Page 504
ABG
Tasks:
 Review proposals and approve the allocation of resources for practical and effective
HSE initiatives.
 Ensure that verification of project/site-specific HSE procedures are in place for site
activities required by the client.
Responsibilities:
 Provide direction and support for implementation of the HSE Management System.
 Verify that the project/site-specific HSE procedures protect personnel and the
general public.
 Hold line management accountable for HSE Management System implementation
and performance.
 Provide adequate HSE resources, facilities, and initiatives to effectively implement
and manage the HSE Management System.
 Require a critical review of engineering specifications in terms of HSE
standards/requirements at the design stage.
 Verify that process hazard analyses are performed during the engineering design
phase.
 Encourage the proactive involvement of all personnel in executing the HSE program.
 Verify that employees are aware of and understand their HSE responsibilities.
 Ensure appropriate skills training is provided to all employees.
 Ensure workers’ compensation cases are effectively managed.
 Require the suitability of contractors to work safely on the project.
 Oversee HSE performance on the project.
Tasks:
 Review the ABG HSE Management System on a regular basis.

 Coordinate the development of the HSE Management System Compliance and
Equivalency form.
 Sign, date, and return the form to the HSE Board Coordinator before initiating work
(existing projects are to continue work, and complete the form within 6 months of
the effective date of this practice).
 Review incident records and verify that all follow-up actions are completed in a
timely manner.
 Participate in audits and planned inspections of the site.
 Ensure incidents where personal injuries occur are thoroughly and appropriately
investigated.
 Review all onsite audit reports.
HSE initiatives.

Page 505
ABG
 Ensure that all orientations, including an HSE overview, are presented by the HSE
Representative or nominated delegate.
 Continuously monitor ABG HSE performance indicators and project inspection
reports.
 Conduct performance evaluations to include personal HSE involvement and
performance.
 Monitor the completion of hazard studies against the project schedule.
 Attend/chair the Project HSE Committee meetings.
 Expedite the final solution or outcome of recommendations that are identified in the
HSE-related reviews.
 Require formal HSE training for all ABG supervisors. This training must be
documented and conducted within 30 days of the employee’s appointment as a
supervisor.
6.3 Line Management
Responsibilities:
 Plan and direct the work in such a manner that the ABG HSE Management System,
together with the client’s HSE policy and procedures and statutory requirements, are
met.
 Implement procedures to eliminate injury to project personnel and the general
public, and damage to property and the environment.
 Possess a comprehensive knowledge of HSE rules pertaining to his/her job.
 Verify that each employee under his/her supervision has received an initial safety
orientation and a copy of the ABG Craft Employee Handbook and Safety Guidelines
(Form S1), and has signed an acknowledgment of the receipt of such handbook.
 Explain applicable HSE work practices to all employees under his/her direct supervision
and verify that each employee understands the rules and regulations.
 Consistently enforce HSE rules and regulations.
 Maintain a zero tolerance for unsafe acts.
Tasks:
 Read and sign Supervisor HSE Responsibilities (Form 000.653.F0145).

 Supervise the training of new employees, either personally or with the assistance of
experienced craftsmen, until he/she demonstrates the ability to work in a safe and
efficient manner.
 Monitor employees’ performance to ensure the use of safe work practices.
 Consistently develop and execute STAs and JSAs that effectively analyze work
activities to identify potential hazards and specify controls.
 Implement work procedures that incorporate control methods for identified hazards.
 Consult with the HSE Representative on HSE and injury management issues.
 Conduct scheduled and unscheduled inspections of the work areas.

Page 506
ABG
 Responsibly manage onsite injury treatment and follow up as necessary with

appropriate first aid.
 Investigate and report all incidents that occur in their respective areas of
responsibility.
 Apply appropriate ABG disciplinary actions to address breaches of the ABG HSE
Policy, practices, or procedures.
 Conduct toolbox meetings.
 Be visible in the workplace and acknowledge good HSE performance.
 Take appropriate remedial action on substandard HSE items.
 Promptly notify his/her direct supervisor and/or the Project/Site HSE Representative
concerning work areas where unique hazards exist and/or special assistance is
required.
 Promptly report to his/her direct supervisor all cases of employees who, in his/her
opinion, are not qualified for the work to which they have been assigned or who
engage in unsafe work practices.
 Immediately report all incidents that could have resulted in personal injury or
property/environmental damage.
 Immediately report all incidents that have resulted in personal injury or
 Periodically re-analyze work methods to establish necessary HSE work methods and
to simplify job processes.
 Assist the Project/Site HSE Representative in the preparation of departmental or
project/site safe work practices.
 Be responsible for housekeeping in his/her department and for the use and
maintenance of all personal protective devices, equipment, and safeguards.
6.4 HSE Board
Responsibilities:

 Develop and execute an HSE management system for use by all levels of
management.
 Communicate directly with management to facilitate the timely receipt of incident
prevention and HSE information.
 Assist management in recruiting, training, and evaluating HSE professionals.
 Develop written plans, programs, and materials as continuous training aids in
accident prevention and HSE.
 Coordinate HSE services furnished by the company’s insurer.
Tasks:
 Work with executive management to provide resources to execute the HSE

Management System.
 Annually review HSE practices and forms.

Page 507
ABG
6.5 HSE Representative
Responsibilities:
 Monitor and report on execution of the ABG HSE Management System at the
project/site level.
 Coordinate orientations and HSE training.
 Participate in any investigation relating to HSE issues.
 Verify that first-aid and emergency procedures are in place within a project.
 Manage and maintain the HSE-related records and documentation.
 Verify that material safety data sheets (MSDSs) are maintained.
 Attend HSE Committee meetings and consult with the Project/Site Manager(s) on
HSE issues.
 Participate with the area supervisor in area inspections on a regular basis.
 Report all hazards to their supervisor or the Project/Site Manager.
 Inform personnel in the area of ABG HSE issues.
 Through regular fieldwork, verify that all personnel are fully conversant with the
corporate and/or project HSE Management System, its procedures, and related HSE
instructions.
 Distribute materials on HSE education, promotion, and awareness.
 Maintain and update HSE Notice Board(s).
Tasks:
 Assist employees with HSE issues.

 Undertake regular inspections of the work area with the area supervisor.
 Coordinate the ABG HSE Committees and represent work group.
 Coordinate appropriate orientation training for personnel commencing employment.
 Coordinate general ABG HSE training for employees and contractor/client personnel
as appropriate.
 Coordinate thorough investigations of all incidents and prepare reports, as
appropriate.
 Coordinate audits to eliminate conditions and work practices that are hazardous to
the job.
 Conduct unscheduled and scheduled inspections of work areas.
 Attend ABG Toolbox meetings.
 Review and monitor emergency procedures.
 Develop and disseminate HSE material suitable for ABG Toolbox topics.
 Encourage hazard identification and reporting by all project/site personnel.
 Consult with employee and healthcare provider regarding an employee’s
rehabilitation and early return to work
 Arrange for new employees to read and sign the Employee HSE Responsibilities
(Form 000.653.F0147).

Page 508
ABG
6.6 HSE Employee/Craft Representative
Usually elected from the workforce.

Responsibilities:
 Participate with supervisor in area inspections on an as-required basis.

 Participate in investigations relating to HSE incidents.
 Report all hazards to immediate supervisor.
 Participate in HSE Committee.
Tasks:
 Represent work group at HSE Committee meetings.

 Assist or represent employees in any other meetings, dealing with HSE issues.
 Undertake regular inspections with area supervisor.
 Contribute to any investigations and the preparation of reports.
6.7 All Personnel
Responsibilities:
 Comply with, and constructively participate in, the ABG HSE program.
 Comply with ABG HSE requirements that apply to an individual’s work.
 Work within competencies held.
 Adhere to procedures to protect your safety, the safety of your fellow employees,
and the safety of the general public.
 Proactively be involved in the HSE program; this involvement may include some
aspects of planning, problem solving, priority setting, training, and improving work
practices.
 Analyze the work scope (conduct and or assist with JSAs and STAs) to identify and
assess HSE hazards and to provide for the development of safe work methods.
In compliance with an individual’s “duty of care,” all personnel will:

 Be aware of, and work for, the health and safety of everyone in the workplace.
 Comply with all safe-working directions given in the workplace.
 Not misuse or damage any equipment.
 Wear all appropriate protective clothing and equipment.
Tasks:
 Keep work area in an orderly condition and comply immediately with any lawful
directive given by ABG or the client.
 Immediately report all personal injuries, incidents, near misses, and hazards.

Page 509
ABG
 Report all breaches of safe work practices.

 Read and sign the Employee HSE Responsibilities form.
6.8 Contractors
Responsibilities:
 Comply with all HSE requirements of the contract.
 Proactively identify, assess, and manage HSE hazards associated with their scope of
work on the project in order to provide work methods acceptable to the project.
 Comply with all applicable statutory acts, regulations, and codes of practice.
 Implement the project contractual requirements and the requirements of their own
procedures and work methods.
 Include HSE as an agenda item for all contractor management meetings.
 Monitor execution of the work scope to support the consistent application of safe
work methods.
 Provide to ABG documentary evidence that their HSE system and safe working
procedures conform to and are equal to or exceed those set by ABG.
Tasks:
 Analyze their work scope to identify and assess HSE hazards and to provide for the
development of safe work methods.
 Provide or ensure that skills and other relevant training is provided, in a structured
and documented manner, for all personnel for whom the contractor is responsible.
 Provide or ensure that all personnel are supplied with and trained in the correct use,
fitting, and maintenance of personal protective equipment.
 Audit and inspect the worksite to correct nonconformance with safe work
procedures and identify improvements to work methods.
6.9 Administration Manager/Office HSE Coordinator
Responsibilities:
Ensure full compliance with Practice 000.653.1002, Office Safety.
Tasks:
 Conduct regular housekeeping inspections.
 Allocate, nominate, and verify appropriate training for emergency personnel.
 Verify that all office layouts conform to HSE requirements.
 Verify that procedures and work are undertaken with no injury to persons or damage
to equipment.
 Establish an HSE committee.
 Perform/assist with orientations for employees and visitors.

Page 510
ABG
The following process and activities are, for the most part, common to construction, precommissioning,
maintenance, and commissioning activities—some more or less than others, depending on the work scope.
7.0 PROJECT STARTUP
Refer to practice 000.653.1300, Project Startup — HSE Program. A project startup “kit” is available from the
Business Unit or Regional HSE Lead.
8.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
Environmental planning is required whenever projects/sites involve, or can potentially involve, the discharge or
emission of pollutants, contaminants, hazardous substances, or wastes into the environment (air, water, or land).
The degree to which environmental planning is implemented and the effort required depends on ABG’s
responsibility for regulatory permitting, due diligence, or environmental assessments.
Whether directly responsible or not, environmental issues must be addressed to ensure compliance with all in-
country, national, state, and local regulations. ABG’s scope may involve the application for, and acquisition of,
appropriate regulatory permits. More often, ABG’s scope involves assisting the client in the permitting process by
providing the client with information required by the regulations and/or the regulatory agency.
In-country, national, state and local environmental codes and regulations, industry standards, and the client’s
environmental documentation (such as permits, plans, assessments, notices, and consent decrees), must be
reviewed at the start of a project. The contract must also be reviewed to assess the degree of liability ABG may
have regarding potential environmental emissions.
The client may have already prepared a list of applicable codes and regulations, including a list of environmental
permits. This list should be reviewed against applicable regulations and any gaps identified. The limits of existing
permits must also be assessed to adequately determine potential limitations.
When included in ABG’s scope of work, ABG prepares the necessary permitting documents for the client’s review,
approval, and submission to appropriate regulatory agencies. After the permitting protocol has been determined
with the client, it is advisable to hold pre-application meetings with the permitting agency to better understand
the level of detail required for the permit application. Normally, if the applicant works closely with the permitting
agency, the permitting process will go more smoothly.
Before the pre-application meeting, it is advisable to develop a project checklist and to populate the checklist with
available information. This action demonstrates to the agency permit writer that the client has a basic
understanding of the permit requirements.
The Project Environmental Planning Checklist (Form 000.653.F0268) can be used to identify the responsibilities for
permitting, the agencies involved, the types of activities generally requiring a permit, applicable permit criteria,
and general application requirements. The Project HSE Representative or members of the HSE Board are available
to assist in completing this checklist.
8.1 Water Quality
This section of the practice refers to activities that have the potential to affect water quality of water sources in
the vicinity of the project/site, including perched water tables, ground water, surface water, storm water, dikes,
lakes, or river.

Page 511
ABG
8.2 Air Quality, Including Dust, Emissions, and Odors
This section of the practice relates to those activities that have the potential to affect local air quality and cause
environmental nuisance to local residential areas and surrounding commercial activities. Adoption of appropriate
control measures, monitoring, and close liaison with the client are required in the mitigation of these impacts.
This section of the practice relates to those activities that have the potential to cause environmental nuisance to
the community, including client facility, local residents, and local wildlife. Adoption of appropriate control
measures, monitoring, and close liaison with the client are required in the mitigation of these impacts.
This section of the practice is designed to execute effective waste management on the project, thereby complying
with all waste management legislation. Another purpose of this section is to introduce waste minimization
objectives.
Depending on the site location and the nature of the construction activities to be undertaken, there are a number
of traffic management considerations that may need to be recognized and planned, including the potential for
traffic movement associated with construction activities. Traffic movements can impact existing client operations
and the community through:
 Congestion
 Access
 Noise
 Vehicle parking
 Heavy vehicle waiting zone
 Laydown areas
Some construction sites will be located on contaminated land, where previous activities on the site may have
resulted in the contamination of the soil and/or ground water.
If no assessments/investigations have been undertaken and there are reasons to believe that the site may be
contaminated, then steps must be taken to evaluate the site conditions and confirm responsibilities for the
existing site conditions and any associated problems due to construction activities, before commencement of
work.
8.7 Public Relations and Liaison
Project Management will establish and maintain good public relations at all times. Any complaints will be handled
swiftly, and where appropriate, remedial action will be taken.

Page 512
ABG
8.8 Wildlife Flora and Fauna and Natural Features
This section of the practice refers to activities that have the potential to affect wildlife flora and/or fauna and
natural features during construction.
In very sensitive locations, it may be necessary to avoid disturbance. Examples are:
 During particularly sensitive times of year such as hibernation or mating seasons
 Indigenous heritage/areas of significance/sacred sites
 Nature preserves
8.9 Visual Intrusion, Signs, and Lighting
This section of the practice deals with the consideration of the visual impact of any signs erected in the local
environment.
Consideration must be given to the impact of high-powered lighting on the local community as well.
8.10 Archaeology
This section of the practice refers to activities that have the potential to impact archaeological sites during
construction. Archaeological remains are irreplaceable and are a valuable part of a country’s national heritage.
Depending on the nature of the project and the site location, investigate the archaeology of the site during the
planning stage.
This section of the practice refers to the minimum arrangements for worksite housekeeping during a construction
project.
These may include, but not be limited to:
 Adequate supply of waste product containers
 Regular garbage disposal
 Segregation of waste
 Regular inspection of worksites
 Spill cleanup program
For more information on any of these topics, refer to Practice 000.653.4000, Environmental Management.
9.0 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Changes to approved specifications, design materials, or work methods are required to be documented, analyzed,
and approved before such changes are adopted (refer to Practice 000.653.8606, HSE Management of Change).
Following their implementation, all management processes are subject to continuous monitoring and review.
Initial requests for changes must be submitted in writing and approved within the context of the workplace or
contract. Change requests must be analyzed by management before the changes are approved.
The analysis will include an evaluation of the proposed change for effects on:

Page 513
ABG
 System integrity
 Level of risk exposure
 Work scope
 Impact on HSE requirements
 Schedule
 Cost
Approval of such changes must also be given in writing. Resultant changes to “permanent” plant/equipment must
be recorded in “as built” documents.
The status of approved changes is subject to regular review until completion of the contract.
10.0 TRAINING AND EDUCATION
During the process of selecting new or replacement employees, the manager/supervisor will assess required
competencies and future training needs.
10.1 Orientation
All personnel must receive an initial orientation for the project/site(s) and offices at which they are to be
employed or for which they require regular access. Further training needs will be determined in accordance with
an individual’s changed responsibilities, changed duties, or changed location by their employer. Training will be
conducted and recorded in accordance with Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
10.2 Training
Typical training includes the following:

 Skills upgrading and refresher training
 Workplace procedures/methods such as “job start checklists and JSAs
 Competency training such as crane operator qualification
 Hot work procedures
 Work permit, lockout/tagout, and isolation procedures
 First aid
 Fire safety awareness and/or use of fire fighting equipment
 Environmental monitoring and protection
Personnel identified as part of the precommissioning team may require additional training.
Project/site employees must receive training on the HSE management system appropriate to the office or
project/site to which they are assigned.
10.3 Professional Credentialing
HSE professionals are encouraged to secure Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or Certified Industrial Hygienist
(CIH) status to maintain state-of-the-art knowledge in their profession (or technical discipline). This status is
obtained by qualifying for and successfully passing the CSP or CIH certification exam. Employees interested in
qualifying to take the examination(s) must be approved by the ABG HSE Board when it is determined that the

Page 514
ABG
registration provides enhancement to the employee’s current responsibilities with the company. The employee
must make all arrangements to obtain, complete, and submit all of the registration forms and pay all fees
required. Upon successfully passing the CSP or CIH certification examination, the employee will be eligible to
receive a reimbursement of reasonable, actual expenses up to $1,000 plus an incentive payment. If the time to
take the first professional registration test is scheduled during normal working hours, employees will be paid for
the time away from work. Employees who do not pass the registration exam on their first attempt will be required
to use TOWP for any additional time required away from work to retake the exam.
Details of ABG’s participation in the application and renewal process are provided in ABG Human Resources Policy
HR-152, Professional Registrations, Memberships, and Subscriptions.
The World Safety Organization also offers several globally recognized HSE certifications, which will serve to
enhance professional development. Contact the ABG HSE Board for details regarding the application process.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
11.0 AUDITS
11.1 Planned Inspections
Project/site/office management and employee representatives will conduct planned inspections of work areas.
Weekly HSE inspections will be conducted on all project/sites.
Planned inspections will be conducted by observation of the work activities and the actions of people in the
workplace.
Inspections will be reported in writing in accordance with project/site or office procedures.
Other regular workplace inspections may be required to comply with relevant local legislation and/or regulations.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1305, Inspections/Assessments and Audits.
11.2 Project/Site Audits
Project Management will develop an audit schedule and, during the term of the project, conduct regularly
scheduled project/site audits.
The scope of the audits will include all work areas (including offices) and cover:
 Project/site HSE management system
 Control measures for potential major hazards
 HSE records
 HSE work methods and practices
 Workplace inspections
Audits will examine the continued suitability of the project’s HSE management system procedures and associated
plans, and the effectiveness of their execution. The audits will be conducted and reported in writing in
accordance with the project procedures.

Page 515
ABG
12.0 CONTRACTOR SELECTION
Potential contractors must satisfy the project contractor selection requirements before being awarded any
contract related to the project.
Contractor selection procedures are designed to evaluate a potential contractor’s capacity and commitment for
identifying and controlling HSE risks.
Tender evaluation procedures will evaluate the HSE performance of the supervisors assigned to the project.
Before commencing work on site, all contractors must attend a Contractor Alignment (Kickoff) meeting.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1003, Contract Selection and Alignment.
13.0 ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS MANAGEMENT
13.1 Incident Investigation and Reporting
All incidents and hazards will be reported and investigated; all incidents must be reported to the HSE
Representative.
All personnel are responsible for reporting incidents (including near misses) and hazards to their immediate
supervisor as soon as practicable after the incident occurs or the hazard is identified. Whenever practicable, every
individual is required to immediately rectify identified hazards provided they do not expose themselves to any
danger.
Incidents may be subject to a detailed investigation and required reporting. The report will meet client and
corporate reporting requirements.
Disagreements over action taken in response to a reported hazard will be resolved in consultation with the HSE
Representative.
Refer to Practices:
 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements (resolving HSE issues)
 000.653.1202, Incident Reporting and Investigation
13.2 Critical Incident Management
ABG management is responsible for providing any person who is affected by any critical incident with:
 Appropriate counseling services
 Employee assistance program
 Immediate notification and contact with their family or next of kin
 Direct access to communications at all times (such as phones)
Applicable cultural aspects must be considered at all times and all information is to be treated with the strictest
confidentiality.
Refer to Practices 000.653.1201 and 000.653.1202.

Page 516
ABG
13.3 Reporting
The project/site will report its monthly statistics to the ABG Corporate Office in accordance with Practice
000.653.1203, MIER.
14.0 Substance Abuse Program
The substance abuse program must be followed by all ABG and contractor personnel, as amended by in-country
regulations.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1400, Substance Abuse Prevention Program.
15.0 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION
In locations where a workers’ compensation program is required, this program must be followed by ABG and
contractor personnel.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1201 for information on workers’ compensation programs.
16.0 PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS (KPIs)

ACTIVITY – Leading Indicators FREQUENCY RESPONSIBLE PERSON
HSE Representative
Safe Work Observations Daily Project/Construction Managers/Line
Management/Contractors
HSE Representative
Inspections (office and worksite) Weekly
Project and Construction Managers
Per the approved HSE Representative
Audits (contractors)
schedule Project/Construction Managers
HSE Representative
Investigations Complete Within 72 hours
Project/Construction Manager
HSE Committee Meetings Once per month Project/Construction Manager
Toolbox Meetings Weekly Supervisors
Pre-Start Meetings Daily Supervisors
JSA Reviews 10% per month Supervisors
Orientation compliance all personnel 100% HSE Representative
Competencies Compliance 100% HSE Representative
Equipment Tagged 100% Supervisors
Permit to Work System 100% Supervisors
Change Management 100% Supervisors

Page 517
ABG
ACTIVITY – Lagging Indicators FREQUENCY RESPONSIBLE PERSON

VIR (Vehicle Incident Rate) <20 HSE Representative
Zero Lost Time Injuries 0 HSE Representative
RCFR (Recordable Case Frequency
Set annually HSE Representative
Rate)
TIFR (Total Injury Frequency Rate) <50 HSE Representative
Zero Environmental Incidents 0 HSE Representative
17.0 AWARDS PROGRAMS
The ABG Awards Program will be used as the basis for awards programs throughout ABG.
Refer to Practices 000.653.1100, Awards Program and 000.653.1101, ABG Star Quality HSE Certification.
18.0 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND INJURY MANAGEMENT
The health management practices provide an outline of the health risk management controls that will be
employed to mitigate potential health impacts during construction activities.
These practices are designed to integrate appropriate health risk controls into project/site construction activities.
They provide an outline of the specific responsibilities and documentation to be maintained to facilitate internal
and external auditing.
Project management has overall responsibility for execution of these health management practices. Project
employers are required to include health risks controls within their method statements to mitigate against
potential health hazards and to provide that sufficient equipment and resources are available to effectively
execute the requirements of these health management practices.
Project management will provide first-aid facilities for personnel who are assigned to a project/site. Trained first-
aid attendants will be available to administer treatment at all times while personnel are at a site. A record of all
workplace first-aid/medical treatments will be maintained by the person administering the treatment.
A person must be appointed to oversee that employees who are injured or ill are placed in a rehabilitation
program and will submit a monthly report to the Project Manager on activities. The Project Manager will monitor
trends in injuries and occupational health through regular review of the treatment records.
Project Management will make provision for:
 Medical treatment and injury management - Practice 000.653.1201
 Medical examinations - Practices 000.653.2100 (International) and .2104 (U.S.)
 A fatigue management program – Practice 000.653.1401
 Management of infectious diseases – Practices 000.653.2101, .2102, and .2103
19.0 Travel Safety
Refer to Practice 000.653.1004, Travel Safety.

20.0 DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS

Page 518
ABG
Refer to Practice 000.653.1005, Disciplinary Process.

21.0 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS
Refer to Practice 000.653.1200, Emergency Preparedness (Medical, Fire, Chemical, Weather).

22.0 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MODIFICATION
Procedures for the maintenance, inspection, testing, and modification of equipment will be implemented. These
procedures are typically applied to:
 Mobile equipment
 Scaffolding and other equipment capable of working at height and load bearing (such
as elevated work platforms, ladders, and rigging gear)
 Portable electrical equipment and power generators (packs and generator sets)
 All forms of light vehicles and vehicle-mounted equipment
 Fire-fighting equipment
 Medical/first-aid equipment
 Rigging equipment
23.0 SITE ACCESS AND SECURITY
Refer to Practice 000.653.1600, Security.

Refer to Practices 000.653.3000, Personal Protective Equipment; and 000.653.3002, Respiratory Protection.
25.0 VEHICLES AND MOBILE EQUIPMENT
Refer to practices in the 000.653.32xx series.

26.0 OVERHEAD HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICES
Refer to Practices 000.653.1302, Permit to Work; and 000.653.3209, Working Near Overhead Power Lines.
27.0 BURIED SERVICES
Refer to Practice 000.653.3311, Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring.

28.0 FALL PROTECTION
Refer to Practices 000.653.3001, Fall Protection; and 000.653.3323, Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal.
29.0 SCAFFOLDING

30.0 LADDERS

Page 519
ABG
31.0 ELEVATED WORK PLATFORMS
Refer to Practices 000.653.3201, Cranes and Rigging — Introduction/Pre-use; and 000.653.3204, Aerial Lifts,
Elevating Work Platforms, and Material/Personnel Hoists.
32.0 SAFE WORK/ACT OBSERVATION
Refer to Practice 000.653.1306, Safe Work Observation.

33.0 WORKING IN HEAT
Refer to Practice 000.653.2003, Working in Heat.

34.0 MANUAL HANDLING

35.0 WORKING ALONE
Refer to Practice 000.653.1401, Work Hour Control/Working Alone.

36.0 FLOOR GRATING REMOVAL
Refer to Practices 000.653.1302, Permit to Work; and 000.653.3323, Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal.

38.0 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
Refer to Practice 000.653.3201, Cranes and Rigging — Introduction/Pre-use.

39.0 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
Refer to Practice 000.653.3211, Traffic Management.

40.0 LOADING, TRANSPORT, AND UNLOADING MATERIALS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3202, Loading and Unloading Material.

41.0 HSE HANDOVER
Refer to Practice 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements.

42.0 PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT
Refer to Practice 000.653.3103, Pressurized/Compressed Air Equipment and Compressed Gas

Cylinders/Operations.
43.0 EARTHWORK, CONCRETE, AND MASONRY
Refer to Practice 000.653.3312, Earthwork, Concrete, and Masonry.

Page 520
ABG
44.0 DRILL AND BLAST OPERATIONS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3314, Drill and Blast Operations.

45.0 FIBROUS MATERIALS
Refer to Practices 000.653.2000, Industrial Hygiene Program Requirements; and 000.653.3310, Excavating Fibrous
Materials.
46.0 RAILROAD SAFETY
Refer to Practice 000.653.3205, Railroad Operations.

47.0 MARINE OPERATIONS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3206, Marine Operations.

Refer to Practice 000.653.3322, Confined Space Entry.

49.0 ABRASIVE BLASTING
Refer to Practice 000.653.2004, Abrasive Blasting.

50.0 FIRST LINE BREAKS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3320, First Line Breaks.

51.0 TANK AND PIPING SYSTEM
Refer to Practice 000.653.3321, Tank and Piping System Testing.

52.0 SHOP EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES
Refer to Practice 000.653.3307, Shop Equipment and Facilities.

53.0 HIGH-PRESSURE WATER CLEANING
Refer to Practice 000.653.3319, High-Pressure Water Cleaning.

54.0 LAWN EQUIPMENT AND CHAIN SAWS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3308, Lawn Equipment and Chain Saws.

55.0 HOT TAPPING
Refer to Practice 000.653.3316, Hot Tapping.

56.0 EATING AND SANITATION FACILITIES
Refer to Practice 000.653.2002, Eating and Sanitation Facilities.

Page 521
ABG
57.0 HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS (INCLUDING POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS)
Refer to Practice 000.653.3306, Hand/Portable Power Tools.

58.0 MIER AND MSISR REPORTING
Refer to Practice 000.653.1203, MIER/MSISR/GIMS.

59.0 RADIATION
Refer to Practices 000.653.2300, Radiation Control; and 000.653.2301, Radiography.

60.0 EXPOSURE TO HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS/AGENTS
Refer to Practices 000.653.2005, Lead Exposure; 000.653.2006, Incidental Asbestos Handling; 000.653.2008,
Hydrogen Sulfide; 000.653.2010, Crystalline Silica; 000.653.2011, Control of Cadmium and Hexavalent Chromium;
and 000.653.2012, Benzene.
61.0 PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT
At locations where the client/owner has developed a Process Safety Management Program, ABG has certain
responsibilities. Refer to Practice 000.653.1303, Process Safety Management.
62.0 STEEL ERECTION
Refer to Practice 000.653.3317, Steel Erection.

63.0 HAZARD COMMUNICATIONS
Refer to Practice 000.653.2007, Hazard Communications.

64.0 HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL
Refer to Practice 000.653.3315, Hazardous Energy Control.

65.0 HOT WORK (WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING)
Refer to Practice 000.653.3101, Hot Work (Welding, Cutting, Burning).

Refer to Practice 000.653.3102, Hazardous Materials.

67.0 ELECTRICAL WORK SAFETY
Refer to Practice 000.653.3309, Electrical Work Safety.

68.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Refer to Practice 000.653.1501, Project Closeout.

69.0 HSE ENGINEERING

Page 522
ABG
Refer to practices, guidelines, and references in the 000.653.86xx; .87xx; .88xx, and .89xx series.
70.0 RECORDS
Records must be maintained according to a standardized schedule. Refer to Practice 000.653.1500, Records
Management and Document Control.
71.0 REFERENCES

ABG Policy HR-152 Professional Registrations, Memberships, and
Subscriptions
System – Table of Contents
000.653.1002 Office Safety
000.653.1004 Travel Safety
000.653.1005 Disciplinary Process
000.653.1100 Awards Programs
Weather)
000.653.1201 Injury Management and Workers’ Compensation
000.653.1202 Incident Reporting and Investigation
000.653.1203 MIER/MSISR/GIMS
000.653.1300 Project Start-up — HSE Program
000.653.1303 Process Safety Management
000.653.1306 Safe Work Observation
000.653.1400 Substance Abuse Prevention Program
000.653.1401 Work Hour Control/Working Alone

Page 523
ABG

000.653.1501 Project Closeout
000.653.1600 Security
000.653.2003 Working in Heat
000.653.2004 Abrasive Blasting
000.653.2006 Incidental Asbestos Handling
000.653.2008 Hydrogen Sulfide
000.653.2010 Crystalline Silica
000.653.2011 Control of Cadmium and Hexavalent Chromium
000.653.2012 Benzene
000.653.2100 Pre-Project Medical Examination — International
000.653.2101 Bloodborne Pathogens
000.653.2103 Infectious Disease Control
000.653.2104 Post-Employment Job-Related Questionnaire —
U.S.
000.653.2300 Ionizing Radiation Control
000.653.2301 Radiography
000.653.3000 Personal Protective Equipment
000.653.3101 Hot Work (Welding, Cutting, Burning)
000.653.3102 Hazardous Materials
000.653.3103 Pressurized/Compressed Air Equipment and
Compressed Gas Cylinders/Operations
000.653.3201 Cranes and Rigging — Introduction/Pre-use
000.653.3202 Loading and Unloading Material

Page 524
ABG

000.653.3203 Powered Industrial Trucks (Forklifts)
000.653.3205 Railroad Operations
000.653.3306 Hand and Portable Power Tools
000.653.3307 Shop Equipment and Facilities
000.653.3311 Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring
000.653.3312 Earthwork, Concrete, and Masonry
000.653.3316 Hot Tapping
000.653.3317 Steel Erection
000.653.3319 High-Pressure Water Cleaning
000.653.3320 First Line Breaks
000.653.3321 Tank and Piping System Testing
000.653.3322 Confined Space Entry
000.653.4000 Environmental Management
000.653.8606 HSE Management of Change
Forms:
000.653.F0145 Supervisor HSE Responsibilities

Page 525
ABG

000.653.F0147 Employee HSE Responsibilities
000.653.F0268 Project Environmental Planning Checklist
000.653.F0270 HSE Management System Compliance and
Equivalency
000.653.F0272 HSE Audit Protocol

Page 526
ABG
HSE OFFICE ENGINEERING & PROJECT / SITE ACTIVITIES
HSE OFFICE, ENGINEERING & PROJECT/SITE ACTIVITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................506
SCOPE509
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................509
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................509
OBJECTIVES.............................................................................................................................................................509
1.0 USE OF CORPORATE PRACTICES...................................................................................................................510
1.1 General....................................................................................................................................................510
1.2 Deviations................................................................................................................................................510
A. Collaboration with Others.......................................................................................................................511
B. Seconded Employees..............................................................................................................................511
C. Contracts/Subcontracts...........................................................................................................................511
1.3 Exceptions...............................................................................................................................................511
1.4 Legal Requirements.................................................................................................................................511
2.0 ZERO ACCIDENTSSM PROGRAM.....................................................................................................................511
3.0 SITE-SPECIFIC HSE DOCUMENTS..................................................................................................................512
3.1 HSE Procedures.......................................................................................................................................512
3.2 HSE Plan...................................................................................................................................................512
3.3 HSE Manual.............................................................................................................................................512
4.0 MAJOR PROGRAM ELEMENTS.....................................................................................................................512
4.1 General................................................................................................................................................512
4.2 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Project Field Employees....................................................................512
4.3 Project Requirements Checklist...........................................................................................................513
4.4 Setting Program Goals and Objectives.................................................................................................513
4.5 Implementation...................................................................................................................................513
A. HSE Monitoring.....................................................................................................................................513
B. Communications...................................................................................................................................514
4.7 Hazard/Risk Identification and Management..........................................................................................514
A. Methods of Hazard Identification.........................................................................................................515
B. Systems Approach to Managing Hazards and Risks..............................................................................516
C. Job Safety Analysis)...............................................................................................................................516
D. Safety Task Assignment........................................................................................................................517
5.1 Project Director/Managing Director/General Manager...........................................................................517
5.2 Project/Site Manager..............................................................................................................................517
5.3 Line Management....................................................................................................................................518
5.4 HSE Board................................................................................................................................................520

Page 527
ABG
5.6 HSE Employee/Craft Representative.......................................................................................................521

5.7 All Personnel............................................................................................................................................521
5.8 Contractors..............................................................................................................................................522
5.9 Administration Manager/Office HSE Coordinator...................................................................................523
6.0 PROJECT STARTUP.......................................................................................................................................523
7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING......................................................................................................................523
7.1 Water Quality..........................................................................................................................................524
7.2 Air Quality, Including Dust, Emissions, and Odors...................................................................................524
7.7 Public Relations and Liaison.....................................................................................................................525
7.8 Wildlife Flora and Fauna and Natural Features.......................................................................................525
7.9 Visual Intrusion, Signs, and Lighting........................................................................................................525
7.10 Archaeology.............................................................................................................................................525
8.0 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE........................................................................................................................526
9.0 TRAINING AND EDUCATION.........................................................................................................................526
9.1 Orientation..............................................................................................................................................526
9.2 Training....................................................................................................................................................526
9.3 Professional Credentialing.......................................................................................................................527
10.0 AUDITS.........................................................................................................................................................527
10.1 Planned Inspections.................................................................................................................................527
10.2 Project/Site Audits...................................................................................................................................527
11.0 CONTRACTOR SELECTION............................................................................................................................528
12.0 ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS MANAGEMENT...............................................................................................528
12.1 Incident Investigation and Reporting.......................................................................................................528
12.2 Critical Incident Management.................................................................................................................528
12.3 Reporting.................................................................................................................................................529
13.0 Substance Abuse Program...........................................................................................................................529
14.0 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION........................................................................................................................529
15.0 PERFORMANCE INDICATORS.......................................................................................................................529
16.0 AWARDS PROGRAMS...................................................................................................................................530
17.0 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND INJURY MANAGEMENT................................................................................530
18.0 Travel Safety................................................................................................................................................530
19.0 DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS................................................................................................................................530
20.0 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS.......................................................................................................................531
21.0 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MODIFICATION.....................................................................531
22.0 SITE ACCESS AND SECURITY.........................................................................................................................531
24.0 VEHICLES AND MOBILE EQUIPMENT...........................................................................................................531
25.0 OVERHEAD HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICES..........................................................................................................531
26.0 BURIED SERVICES.........................................................................................................................................531
27.0 FALL PROTECTION........................................................................................................................................531

Page 528
ABG
28.0 SCAFFOLDING..............................................................................................................................................531
29.0 LADDERS......................................................................................................................................................531
30.0 ELEVATED WORK PLATFORMS.....................................................................................................................532
31.0 SAFE WORK/ACT OBSERVATION..................................................................................................................532
32.0 WORKING IN HEAT.......................................................................................................................................532
33.0 MANUAL HANDLING....................................................................................................................................532
34.0 WORKING ALONE.........................................................................................................................................532
35.0 FLOOR GRATING REMOVAL.........................................................................................................................532
36.0 WORKING ON ROOFS...................................................................................................................................532
37.0 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT..............................................................................................................532
38.0 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT..............................................................................................................................532
39.0 LOADING, TRANSPORT, AND UNLOADING MATERIALS................................................................................532
40.0 HSE HANDOVER...........................................................................................................................................532
41.0 PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT...........................................................................................................................532
42.0 EARTHWORK, CONCRETE, AND MASONRY..................................................................................................532
43.0 DRILL AND BLAST OPERATIONS....................................................................................................................532
44.0 FIBROUS MATERIALS....................................................................................................................................533
45.0 RAILROAD SAFETY........................................................................................................................................533
46.0 MARINE OPERATIONS..................................................................................................................................533
48.0 ABRASIVE BLASTING....................................................................................................................................533
49.0 FIRST LINE BREAKS.......................................................................................................................................533
50.0 TANK AND PIPING SYSTEM..........................................................................................................................533
51.0 SHOP EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES..............................................................................................................533
52.0 HIGH-PRESSURE WATER CLEANING.............................................................................................................533
53.0 LAWN EQUIPMENT AND CHAIN SAWS.........................................................................................................533
54.0 HOT TAPPING...............................................................................................................................................533
55.0 EATING AND SANITATION FACILITIES...........................................................................................................533
56.0 HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS.........................................................................................................533
57.0 MIER AND MSISR REPORTING......................................................................................................................534
58.0 RADIATION...................................................................................................................................................534
59.0 EXPOSURE TO HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS/AGENTS.......................................................................................534
60.0 PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT................................................................................................................534
61.0 STEEL ERECTION...........................................................................................................................................534
62.0 HAZARD COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................................................534
63.0 HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL..................................................................................................................534
64.0 HOT WORK (WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING)..............................................................................................534
66.0 ELECTRICAL WORK SAFETY...........................................................................................................................534
67.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.....................................................................................................................................534
68.0 HSE ENGINEERING.......................................................................................................................................534
69.0 RECORDS......................................................................................................................................................534
70.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................535

Page 529
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies and presents in some detail the strategies for executing the Health, Safety, and
Environmental (HSE) requirements that are common to office, engineering, and project/site (field) activities.
SCOPE
This practice includes references to over 50 processes and activities common to projects, engineering, and offices
worldwide, including the 12 high-impact injury reduction techniques of the ZERO ACCIDENTS SM Program.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
ZERO ACCIDENTSSM Program – 12 high-impact injury reduction techniques that have consistently shown
exceptional results when fully embraced, implemented, and audited by projects and offices. The 12 techniques
are:
- Pre-Project HSE
- Pre-Task Planning
- Audit/Assessments
OBJECTIVES
The practices are written to be in compliance with the U.S. Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA) standards and
regional regulatory requirements. Where an OSHA standard has not been promulgated, the practices are written
to be commensurate with recognized health, safety, and environmental (HSE) management programs, such as the
Voluntary Protection Program, International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 14001, and Occupational
Health and Safety Advisory Services’ 18002. Best management practices and in-country requirements from
countries around the world have also been included where applicable.
ABG’s objectives in implementing the ABG HSE Policy and Management System are to:
 Require personal responsibility and accountability for HSE management.
 Incorporate the highest recognized HSE standards into engineering, design, and work
processes implemented at all of ABG-managed workplaces.
 Adopt other recognized standards and relevant statutory provisions, as the basis
upon which ABG develops its own high standards.

Page 530
ABG
 Provide effective training, efficient communication, and continuous performance

review within the HSE Management System.
 Establish and monitor HSE performance targets for ABG’s workplaces, by the use of
audits; toolbox meetings; Job Safety Analyses (JSAs), Form 000.653.F0100 and Safety
Task Assignments (STAs), Form 000.653.F0101; and project targets (refer to
Section 13.0 of this practice).
1.0 USE OF CORPORATE PRACTICES
1.1 General
The ABG corporate HSE Management System provides an integrated tool—a set of “requirements documents”—
to execute the company’s commitment to continually improving HSE performance.
The requirements documents that make up the HSE Management System are called “practices” and provide
minimum HSE-related requirements, as well as how these requirements will be met.
Note: The practices contain excerpts from, and references to, numerous regulations,
codes, and standards. The practices do not state the requirements of these
regulations, codes, and standards in their entirety. Persons or organizations using
these practices must familiarize themselves with such regulations, codes, and
standards as appropriate.
These practices apply worldwide to ABG activities and recognize ABG's responsibility to meet––or wherever
practical surpass––the relevant statutory requirements, codes of practice, guidance notes, and industry codes and
standards. The corporate documents must be used to develop office and project/site-specific HSE procedures and
plans, as well as flowed down to contractors for them to either adopt or develop and implement an “equal” HSE
Management System.
This approach provides consistency and control in the management of HSE risks. Specific office and project/site
procedures and plans may be more stringent than the corporate practices. The more stringent of comparable
requirements documents will be used.
It is recognized that there are different requirements and different responsibilities at various locations and/or
activities of the corporation. Therefore, specific corporate HSE practices have been developed for office HSE and
engineering HSE, as well as those pertaining to project/site (field) HSE operations.
1.2 Deviations
It is understood that there may be valid reasons for deviations to be requested/granted to the corporate HSE
Management System practices, as driven by different contract and/or in-country requirements at the project
level. Where ABG HSE Management System practices relate to work functions that are not in the direct work
scope or area of responsibility, those HSE Management System practices need not be implemented; thus, no
request for deviation is required.
However, where HSE Management System practices do relate to the direct work scope and cannot be used,
deviations from the ABG HSE Management System practices must be submitted to, and approved by, the Business
Unit HSE “lead.” This is accomplished by completing the HSE Management System Compliance and Equivalency

Page 531
ABG
(Form 000.653.F0270) and submitting it for approval. When granting deviations, consideration should be given to
the impact on client requirements, and contractual and regulatory compliance.
A. Collaboration with Others
When ABG is engaged in collaboration with other parties, such as joint ventures, partnerships, limited liability
companies, or alliances, the extent to which the HSE Management System will be applied will be based on written
agreement between the collaborating parties.
B. Seconded Employees
When ABG employees work under the managerial control of another organization, such as in supplemental labor
arrangements (employees loaned to client organizations), their work may be performed in accordance with the
HSE management system of that organization, provided that Form 000.653.F0270 is completed indicating the
arrangement, and approved by the Regional Safety Manager.
C. Contracts/Subcontracts
The ABG HSE Management System practices are used unless a project develops its own equally robust
procedures.
When a request for proposal is prepared, Practice 000.653.0010, Health, Safety, Environmental Management
System – Table of Contents, is appended to the contract. If the successful bidder (contractor) elects to use ABG’s
HSE Management System, as indicated at the time of bid, this is noted on the first page of the appendix. If the
successful bidder (contractor) elects not to use ABG’s HSE Management System, as indicated at the time of the
bid, this is also noted on the appendix.
Therefore, it is important to determine the HSE Management System program that will be used on a project
before initiating work.
1.3 Exceptions
In an unusual circumstance where a safety requirement in any practice is not feasible, inappropriate for the
specific and unique situation, or presents a greater risk to the employee, a written justification for exception to
the requirement is submitted for approval to the immediate manager/supervisor and HSE Representative. A
written justification from a subcontractor requires additional approval of the assigned buyer’s technical
representative. Once approved, the exception/justification is included in the Job Safety Analysis (JSA)/Safety Task
Assignment (STA) and all affected employees are informed during a pre-job briefing. The pre-job briefing is
documented in accordance with Practice 000.653.1304.
1.4 Legal Requirements
Each user needs to verify that pertinent legislative and corporate governance requirements, including contract
requirements, are met in each specific office or project/site-specific procedure.
2.0 ZERO ACCIDENTSSM PROGRAM
Although they have been around for a while, the high impact ZERO ACCIDENTS reduction techniques continue to
show results when used on jobsites. ABG HSE believes these techniques are the basis of a good HSE program, and

Page 532
ABG
every project will benefit from implementing them. This program of incident reduction techniques has helped
ABG raise the level of expectation for HSE performance and provided the tools for us to make it happen.
ABG Corporate HSE audits (refer to Forms 000.653.F0272 and .F0950) measure how effectively projects and
offices execute the ZERO ACCIDENTS techniques. If projects or offices are not adhering to this program, they will
not perform well on their audits. Additionally, projects applying for ZERO Accidents awards (One-Star through
Five-Star awards) are audited against these techniques.
3.0 SITE-SPECIFIC HSE DOCUMENTS
3.1 HSE Procedures
be used at the project site.
3.2 HSE Plan
3.3 HSE Manual

4.0 MAJOR PROGRAM ELEMENTS
4.1 General
HSE incident prevention is a primary responsibility of all levels of the organization. Each manager is directed to
use maximum initiative in communication, training, motivation, and monitoring techniques to apply every
reasonable precaution to prevent incidents. Each employee is expected to take appropriate steps to eliminate
incidents in the workplace.
HSE, as a professional staff function at the project/site level, will directly assist management in the execution of
the HSE Management System at the business unit, business line, regional, and project/site level. Each person
responsible for the HSE function must exhibit a high degree of professional competency, personal initiative, and
effective communication skills in performing his/her duties. Project/Site HSE Representatives will be responsible
for consulting with management in all matters affecting the environment and the health and safety of employees,
contractor personnel, clients, and the community. Incident prevention responsibilities of managers cannot be
delegated.

Page 533
ABG
4.2 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Project Field Employees
The ratio of ABG HSE representatives will be specified by the Business Unite HSE Lead. However, as a general
guide, the following will be used for planning purposes:
 When the onsite employee total equals or exceeds 25 employees, a ABG HSE
Representative will be dedicated full-time to the responsibilities of the onsite HSE
Representative; when the onsite employee total equals or exceeds 50 employees,
Note: “Onsite employee total” includes employees of ABG, contractors, and

project site(s).
 Additional full-time HSE professionals will be assigned to the project for each
increase of 75 employees. Additional competent HSE Representatives may be
required due to geographic location, specific hazards, client requirements, or local
regulatory requirements at the discretion of the Regional Safety Manager or the
Project/Construction Manager.
4.3 Project Requirements Checklist
ABG’s Project Requirements Checklist Workbook outlines typical project activities, issues, or services for all
project phases. The Workbook contains general checklists, as well as separate checklists, for each discipline
including HSE. Refer to Form 000.100.F1000, Project Requirements Checklist Workbook.
4.4 Setting Program Goals and Objectives
ZERO ACCIDENTS is the ABG corporate goal — this goal is adopted worldwide by ABG offices and projects. The
ZERO ACCIDENTS goal includes the more specific goals, “No environmental citations” and “No other regulatory
agency citations.”
Performance objectives are developed annually at the corporate level and adopted worldwide by ABG offices and
projects. Performance objectives are numerical incidence rates for total recordable cases, work-restricted cases,
and lost workday cases. Each performance objective is based on continuous improvement toward the ZERO
ACCIDENTS goal.
The goal and objectives apply to self-perform and subcontractor operations alike.
Project-specific goals/objectives are developed based on the needs, environmental conditions, and performance
at the project/site levels.

Page 534
ABG
4.5 Implementation
A. HSE Monitoring
A key element to the success of an HSE program is ongoing assessment and inspection. HSE monitoring will be
conducted by site management to ensure that ABG’s HSE requirements are properly executed, developed,
implemented, and maintained, and to verify compliance with national, in-country, and/or local HSE standards.
The business lines and site management are responsible for conducting the appropriate level of self-monitoring.
HSE monitoring by Corporate HSE may be conducted, without notice, on any project regardless of apparent
success or failure as reflected in the analysis of required HSE reports.
B. Communications
To aid in the execution, implementation, and continuing maintenance of the HSE Management System, the
following will be issued as required:
 HSE Practices  Directives that communicate requirements necessary to maintain
the HSE Management System. The ABG HSE Board issues the HSE practices.
 HSE Bulletins and Alerts - Current regulatory agency directives, company directives
related to incident prevention and HSE guidelines that employees should know. HSE
Bulletins are issued by the ABG HSE Board.
ABG Corporation HSE Alerts, Regulatory Compliance Bulletins, and Special Bulletins
are issued to all company operations as a learning and incident prevention tool.
These Alerts and Bulletins often depict actual incident occurrences and lessons
learned.
Individual involvement in HSE management is based on the principle of shared employer/employee HSE
responsibility.
Individual involvement is provided and encouraged through:
 The Hazard Elimination Form (000.653.F0275)
 The HSE Perception Survey (Form 000.653.F0276)
 Establishment of open/honest communication among all levels of the organization
 The establishment of HSE committees at the worksites
 The participation in toolbox, supervisor, and other HSE meetings
 Participation in safe work observations
 Compliance with the requirements under relevant local acts and regulations
 Awareness of and work for the health//safety of themselves/others in the workplace
 Involvement in environmental activities
 Compliance with all safe-working directions given in the workplace
 Avoidance of misuse or damage to any equipment and materials

Page 535
ABG
4.7 Hazard/Risk Identification and Management
Responsibilities
Responsibility for hazard and risk identification and risk management is assigned to all levels of management and
to employees generally.
Risk management philosophy is based on the principle of reducing risk to a level that is “as low as reasonably
practicable” (ALARP) and is otherwise determined by comparison with and in consideration of:
 Design specifications
 Industry best practice
 Knowledge Online/lessons learned
 Statutory requirements
 Codes of practice
 Recognized standards

The purpose of risk management and assessment is to define structured methods of identifying hazards and
assessing risk, and then develop work procedures to enable the work to be done in a safe and healthy manner
with respect for the environment.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task Planning/Risk Analysis.
Project Management will adopt a life cycle approach. This structured approach identifies, analyzes, and manages
areas of risk or hazard. In addition, other specific risk assessments and reviews may be used to analyze specific
areas of risk or hazard.
ABG has a commitment to achieve the highest possible level of hazard and risk identification. Consistent with this
commitment, ABG will strive to exceed the minimum standard of local legislation, standards, and codes of
practice. In accordance with this commitment, ABG will conduct assessments of activities such as construction
risk analysis, manual handling, noise, plant safety, confined space entry, and asbestos.
ABG also conducts regular audits of existing workplaces and will continue to identify hazards, assess these risks,
and instigate appropriate control measures. Constant monitoring and review of the practices keeps the process
working effectively, risks managed, and control measures executed.
Definitions
 Hazard - Anything that has the potential to cause injury/illness or damage.
 Risk - Measures the likelihood of harm arising from exposure to any hazard.
HSE Work Procedures

Project Management will verify that their HSE management systems addresses as a minimum the hazards
identified. The risks associated with each of these hazards will be addressed through the means of an HSE work
procedure.

Page 536
ABG
Each contractor will develop (or adopt) HSE procedures for its work scope. These procedures will be developed or
adopted with consideration of statutory and project requirements, and––if developed––must be submitted to the
Project HSE Representative or nominated delegate before commencement of work.
Procedures will be developed in consultation with personnel who will be directly involved with the particular
tasks. Procedures may be developed from hazard analysis processes, such as Hazard and Operability studies
(HAZOP) or JSAs.
STAs (and JSAs where applicable) or other hazard analysis techniques will be applied to all tasks that are
undertaken on the project. Particular attention will be paid to the tasks that are complex in nature or that have a
higher than normal level of risk (such as dual crane lifts, critical crane lifts, work on “live” equipment, and pressure
testing). This analysis will be done to maintain proactive control of issues that may adversely affect the efficient
and safe completion of the task.
A. Methods of Hazard Identification
Hazards in the workplace can be identified in a number of ways:

 Inspections - Workplace inspections provide a system of recognizing and correcting
hazardous conditions.
 JSA of specific jobs or tasks - JSAs assist in identifying particular hazards that may
occur during performance of a specific job or task.
 STA before starting a job task - STAs are a form of hazard risk communication
directly related to daily activities.
 Experience - Collective experience of those personnel on the job can identify

hazards.
 Statistical Analysis - By analysis of HSE statistics, determinations can be made

regarding types of incidents that are experienced and how they are caused.
B. Systems Approach to Managing Hazards and Risks
To allow a systematic approach to managing hazards, the following process should be followed:
 Identification - The first step in the hazards/risk management process is to identify
the hazards in the workplace.
 Assessment - Once the hazards have been identified, it is necessary to assess what
risks they pose to personnel in the workplace. In this way, a measure of the risk can
be established and a determination of priority for corrective action can be made.
The level of risk is dependent on the exposure to the risk and the probability and
consequences of an event occurring.

Page 537
ABG
 Control - Control is the process of determining and implementing appropriate

measures to control risk. Legislation and codes of practice require that control of
factors assessed as posing increased risk be implemented ALARP.
 Evaluation - Evaluation means checking to see whether the introduced changes

reduce the risk previously assessed. It may involve repeating the process of hazard
identification, risk assessment, and risk control to confirm that HSE risks from a
particular hazard have been controlled as far as is practicable. Where the evaluation
of risk control measures reveals some remaining risk, the process continues.
 Monitor - To maintain the control measures, the measures must be monitored on a

regular basis.
C. Job Safety Analysis)
JSA is a procedure that identifies hazards associated with each step of a job and develops solutions for each
hazard that will either eliminate or control the hazard. A JSA requires the participation of all personnel in a work
group. Before commencing the JSA, it is important to define the scope of the job, including needed personnel,
tools, equipment, material, and work area.
D. Safety Task Assignment
STA is the process of identifying and communicating to each employee the task steps to be completed, the
hazards and risks associated with the task, and the safe work methods that are to be applied to complete the task
in a safe and healthy manner.
Titles will change from project to project, as will the responsibilities and tasks to some extent.
5.1 Project Director/Managing Director/General Manager
Responsibilities:
 Provide an environment that protects all personnel associated with the project and
the general public.
 Execute the ABG HSE Policy, Principles, and Objectives.
 Provide overall direction and support for the implementation of the ABG HSE
Management System.
 Provide sufficient resources to support approved ABG HSE initiatives.

Page 538
ABG
Tasks:
HSE initiatives.
 Ensure that verification of project/site-specific HSE procedures are in place for site
activities required by the client.
Responsibilities:
 Provide direction and support for implementation of the HSE Management System.
 Verify that the project/site-specific HSE procedures protect personnel and the
general public.
 Hold line management accountable for HSE Management System implementation
and performance.
 Provide adequate HSE resources, facilities, and initiatives to effectively implement
and manage the HSE Management System.
 Require a critical review of engineering specifications in terms of HSE
standards/requirements at the design stage.
 Verify that process hazard analyses are performed during the engineering design
phase.
 Encourage the proactive involvement of all personnel in executing the HSE program.
 Verify that employees are aware of and understand their HSE responsibilities.
 Ensure appropriate skills training is provided to all employees.
 Ensure workers’ compensation cases are effectively managed.
 Require the suitability of contractors to work safely on the project.
 Oversee HSE performance on the project.
Tasks:
 Review the ABG HSE Management System on a regular basis.

 Coordinate the development of the HSE Management System Compliance and
Equivalency form.
 Sign, date, and return the form to the HSE Board Coordinator before initiating work
(existing projects are to continue work, and complete the form within 6 months of
the effective date of this practice).
 Review incident records and verify that all follow-up actions are completed in a
timely manner.
 Participate in audits and planned inspections of the site.
 Ensure incidents where personal injuries occur are thoroughly and appropriately
investigated.
 Review all onsite audit reports.
HSE initiatives.

Page 539
ABG
 Ensure that all orientations, including an HSE overview, are presented by the HSE
Representative or nominated delegate.
 Continuously monitor ABG HSE performance indicators and project inspection
reports.
 Conduct performance evaluations to include personal HSE involvement and
performance.
 Monitor the completion of hazard studies against the project schedule.
 Attend/chair the Project HSE Committee meetings.
 Expedite the final solution or outcome of recommendations that are identified in the
HSE-related reviews.
 Require formal HSE training for all ABG supervisors. This training must be
documented and conducted within 30 days of the employee’s appointment as a
supervisor.
5.3 Line Management
Responsibilities:
 Plan and direct the work in such a manner that the ABG HSE Management System,
together with the client’s HSE policy and procedures and statutory requirements, are
met.
 Implement procedures to eliminate injury to project personnel and the general
public, and damage to property and the environment.
 Possess a comprehensive knowledge of HSE rules pertaining to his/her job.
 Verify that each employee under his/her supervision has received an initial safety
orientation and a copy of the ABG Craft Employee Handbook and Safety Guidelines
(Form S1), and has signed an acknowledgment of the receipt of such handbook.
 Explain applicable HSE work practices to all employees under his/her direct supervision
and verify that each employee understands the rules and regulations.
 Consistently enforce HSE rules and regulations.
 Maintain a zero tolerance for unsafe acts.
Tasks:
 Read and sign Supervisor HSE Responsibilities (Form 000.653.F0145).

 Supervise the training of new employees, either personally or with the assistance of
experienced craftsmen, until he/she demonstrates the ability to work in a safe and
efficient manner.
 Monitor employees’ performance to ensure the use of safe work practices.
 Consistently develop and execute STAs and JSAs that effectively analyze work
activities to identify potential hazards and specify controls.
 Implement work procedures that incorporate control methods for identified hazards.
 Consult with the HSE Representative on HSE and injury management issues.
 Conduct scheduled and unscheduled inspections of the work areas.

Page 540
ABG
 Responsibly manage onsite injury treatment and follow up as necessary with

appropriate first aid.
 Investigate and report all incidents that occur in their respective areas of
responsibility.
 Apply appropriate ABG disciplinary actions to address breaches of the ABG HSE
Policy, practices, or procedures.
 Conduct toolbox meetings.
 Be visible in the workplace and acknowledge good HSE performance.
 Take appropriate remedial action on substandard HSE items.
 Promptly notify his/her direct supervisor and/or the Project/Site HSE Representative
concerning work areas where unique hazards exist and/or special assistance is
required.
 Promptly report to his/her direct supervisor all cases of employees who, in his/her
opinion, are not qualified for the work to which they have been assigned or who
engage in unsafe work practices.
 Immediately report all incidents that could have resulted in personal injury or
 Immediately report all incidents that have resulted in personal injury or
 Periodically re-analyze work methods to establish necessary HSE work methods and
to simplify job processes.
 Assist the Project/Site HSE Representative in the preparation of departmental or
project/site safe work practices.
 Be responsible for housekeeping in his/her department and for the use and
maintenance of all personal protective devices, equipment, and safeguards.
5.4 HSE Board
Responsibilities:

 Develop and execute an HSE management system for use by all levels of
management.
 Communicate directly with management to facilitate the timely receipt of incident
prevention and HSE information.
 Assist management in recruiting, training, and evaluating HSE professionals.
 Develop written plans, programs, and materials as continuous training aids in
accident prevention and HSE.
 Coordinate HSE services furnished by the company’s insurer.
Tasks:
 Work with executive management to provide resources to execute the HSE

Management System.
 Annually review HSE practices and forms.

Page 541
ABG
Responsibilities:
 Monitor and report on execution of the ABG HSE Management System at the
project/site level.
 Coordinate orientations and HSE training.
 Participate in any investigation relating to HSE issues.
 Verify that first-aid and emergency procedures are in place within a project.
 Manage and maintain the HSE-related records and documentation.
 Verify that material safety data sheets (MSDSs) are maintained.
 Attend HSE Committee meetings and consult with the Project/Site Manager(s) on
HSE issues.
 Participate with the area supervisor in area inspections on a regular basis.
 Report all hazards to their supervisor or the Project/Site Manager.
 Inform personnel in the area of ABG HSE issues.
 Through regular fieldwork, verify that all personnel are fully conversant with the
corporate and/or project HSE Management System, its procedures, and related HSE
instructions.
 Distribute materials on HSE education, promotion, and awareness.
 Maintain and update HSE Notice Board(s).
Tasks:
 Assist employees with HSE issues.

 Undertake regular inspections of the work area with the area supervisor.
 Coordinate the ABG HSE Committees and represent work group.
 Coordinate appropriate orientation training for personnel commencing employment.
 Coordinate general ABG HSE training for employees and contractor/client personnel
as appropriate.
 Coordinate thorough investigations of all incidents and prepare reports, as
appropriate.
 Coordinate audits to eliminate conditions and work practices that are hazardous to
the job.
 Conduct unscheduled and scheduled inspections of work areas.
 Attend ABG Toolbox meetings.
 Review and monitor emergency procedures.
 Develop and disseminate HSE material suitable for ABG Toolbox topics.
 Encourage hazard identification and reporting by all project/site personnel.
 Consult with employee and healthcare provider regarding an employee’s
rehabilitation and early return to work
 Arrange for new employees to read and sign the Employee HSE Responsibilities
(Form 000.653.F0147).

Page 542
ABG
5.6 HSE Employee/Craft Representative
Usually elected from the workforce.

Responsibilities:
 Participate with supervisor in area inspections on an as-required basis.

 Participate in investigations relating to HSE incidents.
 Report all hazards to immediate supervisor.
 Participate in HSE Committee.
Tasks:
 Represent work group at HSE Committee meetings.

 Assist or represent employees in any other meetings, dealing with HSE issues.
 Undertake regular inspections with area supervisor.
 Contribute to any investigations and the preparation of reports.
5.7 All Personnel
Responsibilities:
 Comply with, and constructively participate in, the ABG HSE program.
 Comply with ABG HSE requirements that apply to an individual’s work.
 Work within competencies held.
 Adhere to procedures to protect your safety, the safety of your fellow employees,
and the safety of the general public.
 Proactively be involved in the HSE program; this involvement may include some
aspects of planning, problem solving, priority setting, training, and improving work
practices.
 Analyze the work scope (conduct and or assist with JSAs and STAs) to identify and
assess HSE hazards and to provide for the development of safe work methods.
In compliance with an individual’s “duty of care,” all personnel will:

 Be aware of, and work for, the health and safety of everyone in the workplace.
 Comply with all safe-working directions given in the workplace.
 Not misuse or damage any equipment.
 Wear all appropriate protective clothing and equipment.
Tasks:
 Keep work area in an orderly condition and comply immediately with any lawful
directive given by ABG or the client.
 Immediately report all personal injuries, incidents, near misses, and hazards.

Page 543
ABG
 Report all breaches of safe work practices.

 Read and sign the Employee HSE Responsibilities form.
5.8 Contractors
Responsibilities:
 Comply with all HSE requirements of the contract.
 Proactively identify, assess, and manage HSE hazards associated with their scope of
work on the project in order to provide work methods acceptable to the project.
 Comply with all applicable statutory acts, regulations, and codes of practice.
 Implement the project contractual requirements and the requirements of their own
procedures and work methods.
 Include HSE as an agenda item for all contractor management meetings.
 Monitor execution of the work scope to support the consistent application of safe
work methods.
 Provide to ABG documentary evidence that their HSE system and safe working
procedures conform to and are equal to or exceed those set by ABG.
Tasks:
 Analyze their work scope to identify and assess HSE hazards and to provide for the
development of safe work methods.
 Provide or ensure that skills and other relevant training are provided, in a structured
and documented manner, for all personnel for whom the contractor is responsible.
 Provide or ensure that all personnel are supplied with and trained in the correct use,
fitting, and maintenance of personal protective equipment.
 Audit and inspect the worksite to correct nonconformance with safe work
procedures and identify improvements to work methods.
5.9 Administration Manager/Office HSE Coordinator
Responsibilities:
Ensure full compliance with Practice 000.653.1002, Office Safety.
Tasks:
 Conduct regular housekeeping inspections.
 Allocate, nominate, and verify appropriate training for emergency personnel.
 Verify that all office layouts conform to HSE requirements.
 Verify that procedures and work are undertaken with no injury to persons or damage
to equipment.
 Establish an HSE committee.
 Perform/assist with orientations for employees and visitors.

Page 544
ABG
The following process and activities are, for the most part, common to construction, precommissioning,
maintenance, and commissioning activities—some more or less than others, depending on the work scope.
6.0 PROJECT STARTUP
Refer to practice 000.653.1300, Project Startup — HSE Program. A project startup “kit” is available from the
Business Unit or Regional HSE Lead.
7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
Environmental planning is required whenever projects/sites involve, or can potentially involve, the discharge or
emission of pollutants, contaminants, hazardous substances, or wastes into the environment (air, water, or land).
The degree to which environmental planning is implemented and the effort required depends on ABG’s
responsibility for regulatory permitting, due diligence, or environmental assessments.
Whether directly responsible or not, environmental issues must be addressed to ensure compliance with all in-
country, national, state, and local regulations. ABG’s scope may involve the application for, and acquisition of,
appropriate regulatory permits. More often, ABG’s scope involves assisting the client in the permitting process by
providing the client with information required by the regulations and/or the regulatory agency.
In-country, national, state and local environmental codes and regulations, industry standards, and the client’s
environmental documentation (such as permits, plans, assessments, notices, and consent decrees), must be
reviewed at the start of a project. The contract must also be reviewed to assess the degree of liability ABG may
have regarding potential environmental emissions.
The client may have already prepared a list of applicable codes and regulations, including a list of environmental
permits. This list should be reviewed against applicable regulations and any gaps identified. The limits of existing
permits must also be assessed to adequately determine potential limitations.
When included in ABG’s scope of work, ABG prepares the necessary permitting documents for the client’s review,
approval, and submission to appropriate regulatory agencies. After the permitting protocol has been determined
with the client, it is advisable to hold pre-application meetings with the permitting agency to better understand
the level of detail required for the permit application. Normally, if the applicant works closely with the permitting
agency, the permitting process will go more smoothly.
Before the pre-application meeting, it is advisable to develop a project checklist and to populate the checklist with
available information. This action demonstrates to the agency permit writer that the client has a basic
understanding of the permit requirements.
The Project Environmental Planning Checklist (Form 000.653.F0268) can be used to identify the responsibilities for
permitting, the agencies involved, the types of activities generally requiring a permit, applicable permit criteria,
and general application requirements. The Project HSE Representative or members of the HSE Board are available
to assist in completing this checklist.
7.1 Water Quality
This section of the practice refers to activities that have the potential to affect water quality of water sources in
the vicinity of the project/site, including perched water tables, ground water, surface water, storm water, dikes,
lakes, or river.

Page 545
ABG
7.2 Air Quality, Including Dust, Emissions, and Odors
This section of the practice relates to those activities that have the potential to affect local air quality and cause
environmental nuisance to local residential areas and surrounding commercial activities. Adoption of appropriate
control measures, monitoring, and close liaison with the client are required in the mitigation of these impacts.
This section of the practice relates to those activities that have the potential to cause environmental nuisance to
the community, including client facility, local residents, and local wildlife. Adoption of appropriate control
measures, monitoring, and close liaison with the client are required in the mitigation of these impacts.
This section of the practice is designed to execute effective waste management on the project, thereby complying
with all waste management legislation. Another purpose of this section is to introduce waste minimization
objectives.
Depending on the site location and the nature of the construction activities to be undertaken, there are a number
of traffic management considerations that may need to be recognized and planned, including the potential for
traffic movement associated with construction activities. Traffic movements can impact existing client operations
and the community through:
 Congestion
 Access
 Noise
 Vehicle parking
 Heavy vehicle waiting zone
 Laydown areas
Some construction sites will be located on contaminated land, where previous activities on the site may have
resulted in the contamination of the soil and/or ground water.
If no assessments/investigations have been undertaken and there are reasons to believe that the site may be
contaminated, then steps must be taken to evaluate the site conditions and confirm responsibilities for the
existing site conditions and any associated problems due to construction activities, before commencement of
work.
7.7 Public Relations and Liaison
Project Management will establish and maintain good public relations at all times. Any complaints will be handled
swiftly, and where appropriate, remedial action will be taken.

Page 546
ABG
7.8 Wildlife Flora and Fauna and Natural Features
This section of the practice refers to activities that have the potential to affect wildlife flora and/or fauna and
natural features during construction.
In very sensitive locations, it may be necessary to avoid disturbance. Examples are:
 During particularly sensitive times of year such as hibernation or mating seasons
 Indigenous heritage/areas of significance/sacred sites
 Nature preserves
7.9 Visual Intrusion, Signs, and Lighting
This section of the practice deals with the consideration of the visual impact of any signs erected in the local
environment.
Consideration must be given to the impact of high-powered lighting on the local community as well.
7.10 Archaeology
This section of the practice refers to activities that have the potential to impact archaeological sites during
construction. Archaeological remains are irreplaceable and are a valuable part of a country’s national heritage.
Depending on the nature of the project and the site location, investigate the archaeology of the site during the
planning stage.
This section of the practice refers to the minimum arrangements for worksite housekeeping during a construction
project.
These may include, but not be limited to:
 Adequate supply of waste product containers
 Regular garbage disposal
 Segregation of waste
 Regular inspection of worksites
 Spill cleanup program
For more information on any of these topics, refer to Practice 000.653.4000, Environmental Management.
8.0 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Changes to approved specifications, design materials, or work methods are required to be documented, analyzed,
and approved before such changes are adopted refer to Practice 000.653.8606, HSE Management of Change).
Following their implementation, all management processes are subject to continuous monitoring and review.
Initial requests for changes must be submitted in writing and approved within the context of the workplace or
contract. Change requests must be analyzed by management before the changes are approved.
The analysis will include an evaluation of the proposed change for effects on:

Page 547
ABG
 System integrity
 Level of risk exposure
 Work scope
 Impact on HSE requirements
 Schedule
 Cost
Approval of such changes must also be given in writing. Resultant changes to “permanent” plant/equipment must
be recorded in “as built” documents.
The status of approved changes is subject to regular review until completion of the contract.
9.0 TRAINING AND EDUCATION
During the process of selecting new or replacement employees, the manager/supervisor will assess required
competencies and future training needs.
9.1 Orientation
All personnel must receive an initial orientation for the project/site(s) and offices at which they are to be
employed or for which they require regular access. Further training needs will be determined in accordance with
an individual’s changed responsibilities, changed duties, or changed location by their employer. Training will be
conducted and recorded in accordance with Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
9.2 Training
Typical training includes the following:

 Skills upgrading and refresher training
 Workplace procedures/methods such as “job start checklists and JSAs
 Competency training such as crane operator qualification
 Hot work procedures
 Work permit, lockout/tagout, and isolation procedures
 First aid
 Fire safety awareness and/or use of fire fighting equipment
 Environmental monitoring and protection
Personnel identified as part of the precommissioning team may require additional training.
Project/site employees must receive training on the HSE management system appropriate to the office or
project/site to which they are assigned.
9.3 Professional Credentialing
HSE professionals are encouraged to secure Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or Certified Industrial Hygienist
(CIH) status to maintain state-of-the-art knowledge in their profession (or technical discipline). This status is
obtained by qualifying for and successfully passing the CSP or CIH certification exam. Employees interested in
qualifying to take the examination(s) must be approved by the ABG HSE Board when it is determined that the

Page 548
ABG
registration provides enhancement to the employee’s current responsibilities with the company. The employee
must make all arrangements to obtain, complete, and submit all of the registration forms and pay all fees
required. Upon successfully passing the CSP or CIH certification examination, the employee will be eligible to
receive a reimbursement of reasonable, actual expenses up to $1,000 plus an incentive payment. If the time to
take the first professional registration test is scheduled during normal working hours, employees will be paid for
the time away from work. Employees who do not pass the registration exam on their first attempt will be required
to use TOWP for any additional time required away from work to retake the exam.
Details of ABG’s participation in the application and renewal process are provided in ABG Human Resources Policy
HR-152, Professional Registrations, Memberships, and Subscriptions.
HSE engineers are encouraged to secure Professional Engineer (PE) status. Details of ABG’s participation in the
application and renewal process are provided in Policy HR-152.
The World Safety Organization also offers several globally recognized HSE certifications, which will serve to
enhance professional development. Contact the ABG HSE Board for details regarding the application process.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
10.0 AUDITS
10.1 Planned Inspections
Project/site/office management and employee representatives will conduct planned inspections of work areas.
Weekly HSE inspections will be conducted on all project/sites.
Planned inspections will be conducted by observation of the work activities and the actions of people in the
workplace.
Inspections will be reported in writing in accordance with project/site or office procedures.
Other regular workplace inspections may be required to comply with relevant local legislation and/or regulations.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1305, Inspections/Assessments and Audits.
10.2 Project/Site Audits
Project Management will develop an audit schedule and, during the term of the project, conduct regularly
scheduled project/site audits.
The scope of the audits will include all work areas (including offices) and cover:
 Project/site HSE management system
 Control measures for potential major hazards
 HSE records
 HSE work methods and practices
 Workplace inspections
Audits will examine the continued suitability of the project’s HSE management system procedures and associated
plans, and the effectiveness of their execution. The audits will be conducted and reported in writing in
accordance with the project procedures.

Page 549
ABG

11.0 CONTRACTOR SELECTION
Potential contractors must satisfy the project contractor selection requirements before being awarded any
contract related to the project.
Contractor selection procedures are designed to evaluate a potential contractor’s capacity and commitment for
identifying and controlling HSE risks.
Tender evaluation procedures will evaluate the HSE performance of the supervisors assigned to the project.
Before commencing work on site, all contractors must attend a Contractor Alignment (Kickoff) meeting.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1003, Contract Selection and Alignment.
12.0 ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS MANAGEMENT
12.1 Incident Investigation and Reporting
All incidents and hazards will be reported and investigated; all incidents must be reported to the HSE
Representative.
All personnel are responsible for reporting incidents (including near misses) and hazards to their immediate
supervisor as soon as practicable after the incident occurs or the hazard is identified. Whenever practicable, every
individual is required to immediately rectify identified hazards provided they do not expose themselves to any
danger.
Incidents may be subject to a detailed investigation and required reporting. The report will meet client and
corporate reporting requirements.
Disagreements over action taken in response to a reported hazard will be resolved in consultation with the HSE
Representative.
Refer to Practices:
 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements (resolving HSE issues)
 000.653.1202, Incident Reporting and Investigation
12.2 Critical Incident Management
ABG management is responsible for providing any person who is affected by any critical incident with:
 Appropriate counseling services
 Employee assistance program
 Immediate notification and contact with their family or next of kin
 Direct access to communications at all times (such as phones)
Applicable cultural aspects must be considered at all times and all information is to be treated with the strictest
confidentiality.
Refer to Practices 000.653.1201 and 000.653.1202.

Page 550
ABG
12.3 Reporting
The project/site will report its monthly statistics to the ABG Corporate Office in accordance with Practice
000.653.1203, MIER/MSISR/GIMS.
13.0 Substance Abuse Program
The substance abuse program must be followed by all ABG and contractor personnel, as amended by in-country
regulations.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1400, Substance Abuse Prevention Program.
14.0 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION
In locations where a workers’ compensation program is required, this program must be followed by ABG and
contractor personnel.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1201 for information on workers’ compensation programs.
15.0 PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS (KPIs)

ACTIVITY – Leading Indicators FREQUENCY RESPONSIBLE PERSON
HSE Representative
Safe Work Observations Daily Project/Construction Managers/Line
Management/Contractors
HSE Representative
Inspections (office and worksite) Weekly
Project and Construction Managers
Per the approved HSE Representative
Audits (contractors)
schedule Project/Construction Managers
HSE Representative
Investigations Complete Within 72 hours
Project/Construction Manager
HSE Committee Meetings Once per month Project/Construction Manager
Toolbox Meetings Weekly Supervisors
Pre-Start Meetings Daily Supervisors
JSA Reviews 10% per month Supervisors
Orientation compliance all personnel 100% HSE Representative
Competencies Compliance 100% HSE Representative
Equipment Tagged 100% Supervisors
Permit to Work System 100% Supervisors
Change Management 100% Supervisors

Page 551
ABG
ACTIVITY – Lagging Indicators FREQUENCY RESPONSIBLE PERSON

VIR (Vehicle Incident Rate) <20 HSE Representative
Zero Lost Time Injuries 0 HSE Representative
RCFR (Recordable Case Frequency
Set annually HSE Representative
Rate)
TIFR (Total Injury Frequency Rate) <50 HSE Representative
Zero Environmental Incidents 0 HSE Representative
16.0 AWARDS PROGRAMS
The ABG Awards Program will be used as the basis for awards programs throughout ABG.
Refer to Practices 000.653.1100, Awards Program and 000.653.1101, ABG Star Quality HSE Certification.
17.0 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND INJURY MANAGEMENT
The health management practices provide an outline of the health risk management controls that will be
employed to mitigate potential health impacts during construction activities.
These practices are designed to integrate appropriate health risk controls into project/site construction activities.
They provide an outline of the specific responsibilities and documentation to be maintained to facilitate internal
and external auditing.
Project management has overall responsibility for execution of these health management practices. Project
employers are required to include health risks controls within their method statements to mitigate against
potential health hazards and to provide that sufficient equipment and resources are available to effectively
execute the requirements of these health management practices.
Project management will provide first-aid facilities for personnel who are assigned to a project/site. Trained first-
aid attendants will be available to administer treatment at all times while personnel are at a site. A record of all
workplace first-aid/medical treatments will be maintained by the person administering the treatment.
A person must be appointed to oversee that employees who are injured or ill are placed in a rehabilitation
program and will submit a monthly report to the Project Manager on activities. The Project Manager will monitor
trends in injuries and occupational health through regular review of the treatment records.
Project Management will make provision for:
 Medical treatment and injury management - Practice 000.653.1201
 Medical examinations - Practices 000.653.2100 (International) and .2104 (U.S.)
 A fatigue management program – Practice 000.653.1401
 Management of infectious diseases – Practices 000.653.2101, .2102, and .2103
18.0 Travel Safety
Refer to Practice 000.653.1004, Travel Safety.

19.0 DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS

Page 552
ABG
Refer to Practice 000.653.1005, Disciplinary Process.

20.0 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS
Refer to Practice 000.653.1200, Emergency Preparedness (Medical, Fire, Chemical, Weather).

21.0 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MODIFICATION
Procedures for the maintenance, inspection, testing, and modification of equipment will be implemented. These
procedures are typically applied to:
 Mobile equipment
 Scaffolding and other equipment capable of working at height and load bearing (such
as elevated work platforms, ladders, and rigging gear)
 Portable electrical equipment and power generators (packs and generator sets)
 All forms of light vehicles and vehicle-mounted equipment
 Medical/first-aid equipment
 Rigging equipment
22.0 SITE ACCESS AND SECURITY
Refer to Practice 000.653.1600, Security.

Refer to Practices 000.653.3000, Personal Protective Equipment; and 000.653.3002, Respiratory Protection.
24.0 VEHICLES AND MOBILE EQUIPMENT
Refer to practices in the 000.653.32xx series.

25.0 OVERHEAD HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICES
Refer to Practices 000.653.1302, Permit to Work; and 000.653.3209, Working Near Overhead Power Lines.
26.0 BURIED SERVICES
Refer to Practice 000.653.3311, Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring.

27.0 FALL PROTECTION
Refer to Practices 000.653.3001, Fall Protection; and 000.653.3323, Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal.
28.0 SCAFFOLDING

29.0 LADDERS

Page 553
ABG
30.0 ELEVATED WORK PLATFORMS
Refer to Practices 000.653.3201, Cranes and Rigging — Introduction/Pre-use; and 000.653.3204, Aerial Lifts,
Elevating Work Platforms, and Material/Personnel Hoists.
31.0 SAFE WORK/ACT OBSERVATION
Refer to Practice 000.653.1306, Safe Work Observation.

32.0 WORKING IN HEAT
Refer to Practice 000.653.2003, Working in Heat.

33.0 MANUAL HANDLING

34.0 WORKING ALONE
Refer to Practice 000.653.1401, Work Hour Control/Working Alone.

35.0 FLOOR GRATING REMOVAL
Refer to Practices 000.653.1302, Permit to Work; and 000.653.3323, Grating, Floor Plate, and Guardrail Removal.

37.0 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
Refer to Practice 000.653.3201, Cranes and Rigging — Introduction/Pre-use.

38.0 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
Refer to Practice 000.653.3211, Traffic Management.

39.0 LOADING, TRANSPORT, AND UNLOADING MATERIALS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3202, Loading and Unloading Material.

40.0 HSE HANDOVER
Refer to Practice 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements.

41.0 PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT
Refer to Practice 000.653.3103, Pressurized/Compressed Air Equipment and Compressed Gas

Cylinders/Operations.
42.0 EARTHWORK, CONCRETE, AND MASONRY
Refer to Practice 000.653.3312, Earthwork, Concrete, and Masonry.

Page 554
ABG
43.0 DRILL AND BLAST OPERATIONS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3314, Drill and Blast Operations.

44.0 FIBROUS MATERIALS
Refer to Practices 000.653.2000, Industrial Hygiene Program Requirements; and 000.653.3310, Excavating Fibrous
Materials.
45.0 RAILROAD SAFETY
Refer to Practice 000.653.3205, Railroad Operations.

46.0 MARINE OPERATIONS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3206, Marine Operations.


48.0 ABRASIVE BLASTING
Refer to Practice 000.653.2004, Abrasive Blasting.

49.0 FIRST LINE BREAKS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3320, First Line Breaks.

50.0 TANK AND PIPING SYSTEM
Refer to Practice 000.653.3321, Tank and Piping System Testing.

51.0 SHOP EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES
Refer to Practice 000.653.3307, Shop Equipment and Facilities.

52.0 HIGH-PRESSURE WATER CLEANING
Refer to Practice 000.653.3319, High-Pressure Water Cleaning.

53.0 LAWN EQUIPMENT AND CHAIN SAWS
Refer to Practice 000.653.3308, Lawn Equipment and Chain Saws.

54.0 HOT TAPPING
Refer to Practice 000.653.3316, Hot Tapping.

55.0 EATING AND SANITATION FACILITIES
Refer to Practice 000.653.2002, Eating and Sanitation Facilities.

Page 555
ABG
56.0 HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS (INCLUDING POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS)
Refer to Practice 000.653.3306, Hand/Portable Power Tools.

57.0 MIER AND MSISR REPORTING
Refer to Practice 000.653.1203, MIER/MSISR/GIMS.

58.0 RADIATION
Refer to Practices 000.653.2300, Radiation Control; and 000.653.2301, Radiography.

59.0 EXPOSURE TO HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS/AGENTS
Refer to Practices 000.653.2005, Lead Exposure; 000.653.2006, Incidental Asbestos Handling; 000.653.2008,
Hydrogen Sulfide; 000.653.2010, Crystalline Silica; 000.653.2011, Control of Cadmium and Hexavalent Chromium;
and 000.653.2012, Benzene.
60.0 PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT
At locations where the client/owner has developed a Process Safety Management Program, ABG has certain
responsibilities. Refer to Practice 000.653.1303, Process Safety Management.
61.0 STEEL ERECTION
Refer to Practice 000.653.3317, Steel Erection.

62.0 HAZARD COMMUNICATIONS
Refer to Practice 000.653.2007, Hazard Communications.

63.0 HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL

64.0 HOT WORK (WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING)
Refer to Practice 000.653.3101, Hot Work (Welding, Cutting, Burning).

Refer to Practice 000.653.3102, Hazardous Materials.

66.0 ELECTRICAL WORK SAFETY
Refer to Practice 000.653.3309, Electrical Work Safety.

67.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Refer to Practice 000.653.1501, Project Closeout.

68.0 HSE ENGINEERING

Page 556
ABG
Refer to practices, guidelines, and references in the 000.653.86xx; .87xx; .88xx, and .89xx series.
69.0 RECORDS
Records must be maintained according to a standardized schedule. Refer to Practice 000.653.1500, Records
Management and Document Control.
70.0 REFERENCES

ABG Policy HR-152 Professional Registrations, Memberships, and
Subscriptions
System – Table of Contents
000.653.1002 Office Safety
000.653.1004 Travel Safety
000.653.1005 Disciplinary Process
000.653.1100 Awards Programs
Weather)
000.653.1201 Injury Management and Workers’ Compensation
000.653.1300 Project Start-up — HSE Program
000.653.1303 Process Safety Management
000.653.1401 Work Hour Control/Working Alone

Page 557
ABG

000.653.1600 Security
000.653.2003 Working in Heat
000.653.2004 Abrasive Blasting
000.653.2006 Incidental Asbestos Handling
000.653.2008 Hydrogen Sulfide
000.653.2010 Crystalline Silica
000.653.2011 Control of Cadmium and Hexavalent Chromium
000.653.2012 Benzene
000.653.2100 Pre-Project Medical Examination — International
000.653.2101 Bloodborne Pathogens
000.653.2103 Infectious Disease Control
000.653.2104 Post-Employment Job-Related Questionnaire —
U.S.
000.653.2300 Ionizing Radiation Control
000.653.2301 Radiography
000.653.3000 Personal Protective Equipment
000.653.3102 Hazardous Materials
000.653.3103 Pressurized/Compressed Air Equipment and
Compressed Gas Cylinders/Operations
000.653.3201 Cranes and Rigging — Introduction/Pre-use
000.653.3202 Loading and Unloading Material

Page 558
ABG

000.653.3205 Railroad Operations
000.653.3306 Hand and Portable Power Tools
000.653.3307 Shop Equipment and Facilities
000.653.3317 Steel Erection
000.653.3319 High-Pressure Water Cleaning
000.653.3321 Tank and Piping System Testing
000.653.4000 Environmental Management
Forms:
000.653.F0145 Supervisor HSE Responsibilities
000.653.F0147 Employee HSE Responsibilities
000.653.F0268 Project Environmental Planning Checklist

Page 559
ABG

Equivalency
000.653.F0272 HSE Audit Protocol

Page 560
ABG
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................538
SCOPE539
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................539
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................539
1.1 Potential Exposures.................................................................................................................................539
1.2 Properties and Effects..............................................................................................................................540
A. Physical Data...........................................................................................................................................540
B. Acute.......................................................................................................................................................540
C. Chronic....................................................................................................................................................541
D. First Aid...................................................................................................................................................541
1.3 Exposure Limits and Routes.....................................................................................................................541
A. Action Level.............................................................................................................................................541
B. Exposure Limits.......................................................................................................................................541
C. Routes of Entry........................................................................................................................................541
1.4 Owner/Client Program............................................................................................................................541
2.0 MONITORING...............................................................................................................................................542
2.1 Request Past Sampling Results from Client.............................................................................................542
2.2 Individual H2S Monitors...........................................................................................................................542
2.3 Notification of Results.............................................................................................................................542
2.4 Observation of Monitoring......................................................................................................................542
2.5 Industrial Hygiene Monitoring Methods..................................................................................................542
2.6 Monitoring Results..................................................................................................................................543
3.1 Respirators..............................................................................................................................................543
3.2 Additional Personal Protective Equipment..............................................................................................544
4.0 Work Controls..............................................................................................................................................544
4.1 H2S Areas.................................................................................................................................................544
4.2 Buddy System..........................................................................................................................................544
4.3 Confined Spaces......................................................................................................................................544
4.4 Sudden Discharges/Escape......................................................................................................................545
4.5 Job Safety Analysis...................................................................................................................................545
5.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................545
6.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................545
7.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................546

Page 561
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice identifies the requirements for minimizing exposure to hydrogen sulfide (H 2S).
SCOPE
 Monitoring
 Work Controls
 Training
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Action Level (AL) – Refers to an exposure one half the allowable limits (TLV-TWA).
Threshold Limit Value – Time-Weighted Average (TLV-TWA) – The TWA concentration for a conventional 8-hour
workday and a 40-hour workweek, to which it is believed that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed, day
after day, without adverse effect.
Threshold Limit Value – Short-Term Exposure Limit (TLV-STEL) – The concentration to which it is believed that
workers can be exposed continuously for a short period of time without suffering from irritation, chronic or
irreversible tissue damage, or narcosis of sufficient degree to increase the likelihood of accidental injury, impair
self-rescue, or materially reduce work efficiency, and provided that the daily TLV-TWA is not exceeded. A STEL is a
15-minute TWA exposure that should not be exceeded at any time during a workday even if the 8-hour TWA is
within the TLV-TWA.
1.1 Potential Exposures
Work conducted in/around the following industries/activities may result in exposure to employees:
 Drilling operations:
 Recycled mud
 Water from sour crude wells
 Blowouts
 Tank gauging (tanks at producing, pipeline, and refining operations)
 Field maintenance (such as tank batteries and wells)
 Opening of process piping or systems for maintenance, repair, or isolation
 Crude petroleum
 Natural gas

Page 562
ABG
 Petroleum refineries
 Coke ovens
 Paper mills
 Tanneries
 Sewers
 Sewage treatment
 Utility vaults
The project HSE Representative will identify the areas or operations on a facility plot plan. The plot plan will be
included as part of the new hire orientation, hazard communication, and H2S exposure training courses.
1.2 Properties and Effects
H2S is a highly flammable, poisonous gas.

A. Physical Data
Color: Clear and colorless

Odor: Characteristic “rotten eggs” odor at low concentrations; sense of
smell disappears at 150-250 parts per million (ppm)
Odor Threshold: Less than 0.5 ppm
Explosive Limits: 4.3 - 46 percent
Boiling Point: N/A
Vapor Pressure: 267
Vapor Density: 1.2, slightly heavier than air
Ignition Temperature: 500 °F
B. Acute
Irritant: Yes
Sensitization: No
Eye Effects: Low concentrations will generally cause irritation to the conjunctiva. Repeated exposure to low
concentrations is reported to cause inflammation of the eye tissues, sensitivity to light, tearing, pain, and blurred
vision.
Skin Effects: May irritate the skin upon contact.
Ingestion Effects: Ingestion is unlikely. H2S will irritate the mucous membranes causing a burning feeling with
excess salivation likely. Irritation of the gastrointestinal tract may also occur.
Inhalation Effects:
 Irritation of the eyes, nose, and respiratory tract may be experience at about
50 ppm.
 Headaches, dizziness, nausea, or intoxication may develop above 50 ppm.
 Exposures above 100 ppm are considered to be immediately dangerous to life and
health.

Page 563
ABG
 Concentrations over 1000 ppm cause immediate collapse with loss of breathing,
even after inhalation of a single breath.
Continuous inhalation of low concentrations may cause olfactory fatigue or paralysis of the sense of smell. Thus,
detection of H2S by its odor is not effective.

Page 564
ABG
C. Chronic
Teratogen (may cause birth defects): Yes

Reproductive Hazard: Yes
Mutagen (may cause damage to DNA): No
Synergistic Effects
(more toxic when mixed with other chemicals): None reported
Carcinogenicity: NTP: No
IARC: No
OSHA: No
Medical Conditions
Aggravated by Exposure: Blood disorders
D. First Aid
Eyes: Flush with clean, low-pressure water for at least 15 minutes.

Inhalation: Remove from contaminated area immediately. Give oxygen. If not breathing, give artificial
respiration. Do not attempt to rescue unless wearing self-contained
1.3 Exposure Limits and Routes
A. Action Level
5 ppm averaged over 8 hours.

B. Exposure Limits
10 ppm averaged over 8 hours (ACGIH TLV)

15 ppm averaged over 15 minutes (ACGIH STEL)
C. Routes of Entry
Skin Contact: Yes

Skin Absorption: No
Eye Contact: Yes
Inhalation: Yes
Ingestion: Yes
1.4 Owner/Client Program
ABG and its contractors/lower-tier contractors must be informed where H 2S is used in a host facility, and of
applicable plant safety rules regarding exposure and controls.
It may be appropriate – or even a requirement – to adopt/comply with the owner/client’s written compliance
program. The following must be performed by the HSE Representative:
 An assessment will be made to ensure the program complies with applicable
regulations.

Page 565
ABG
 A deviation will be requested in accordance with requirements in Practice

000.653.0020, Health, Safety, and Environmental Management System – Execution.
2.0 MONITORING
Employees who will work in areas identified in section 1.1 will wear individual H 2S monitors.
2.1 Request Past Sampling Results from Client
Before working in operating facilities or areas with known sources of H2S, each project will formally request
information from the client on past IH, air quality, or other sample results that may be used to indicate the levels
of exposure likely to be encountered by ABG employees. This request will be in writing and documented in
accordance with the project’s document control procedures. The written request and any response will become
part of the project records and will be retained in accordance with Practice 000.653.1500, Records Management
and Document Control.
Attachment 01 provides and example letter that may be used for this request.
2.2 Individual H2S Monitors
Individual monitors will meet the following specifications:

 Have a digital read out and not simply an alarm.
 Consider monitors with data-logging capabilities.
 Be capable of recording and allowing retrieval of peak H2S concentrations and have
some capability of determining when that peak was recorded (date and time).
Unless superseded by site-specific regulation, each employee will be required to:

 Ensure that the sensor grill is free from dirt and debris and is not obstructed.
 Perform a self-test, and have the monitor bump-tested and calibrated periodically
according to the manufacturer’s specifications.
 Wear the monitor on the outermost layer of clothing, above the waist and in front of
the chest/abdomen. The preferred location is within 1 foot (0.30 meter) of the nose;
this area is referred to as the “breathing zone.”
 Evacuate the area and notify site supervision immediately of any alarm from the
personal monitor.
At a minimum, H2S monitors must be used in continuous mode of operation that will alarm when the level reaches
or approaches the TLV of 10 ppm.
2.3 Notification of Results
Notification of monitoring results will be in accordance with Practice 000.653.2007, Hazard Communications.
2.4 Observation of Monitoring
The monitoring process may be observed by all employees whom the monitoring affects.

Page 566
ABG
2.5 Industrial Hygiene Monitoring Methods
Common IH monitoring methods for H2S include the following:

 H2S-specific colorimetric tubes, also known as “length-of-stain” tubes. Examples
include but are limited to products made by Draeger, Sensidyne, or Gastec.
 NIOSH laboratory analysis method 6013,
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/nmam/pdfs/6013.pdf
Atmospheric testing will be conducted before entry within confined spaces that have contained – or may be
suspected to have contained – H2S.
2.6 Monitoring Results
Monitoring results will be sent to the Corporate Industrial Hygiene Manager in accordance with the schedule in
Practice 000.653.2000, Industrial Hygiene Program Requirements.
3.1 Respirators
Respiratory protection will be used in accordance with Practice 000.653.3002, Respiratory Protection.
Appropriate respiratory protection will be selected based on the best available information. Examples of best
available information in order of preference include:
 Applicable IH monitoring results collected by the employer while conducting similar
activities using similar methods
 Written recommendations from the employer’s corporate HSE professional (for ABG,
this will be the Corporate Manager of IH)
 Applicable IH monitoring results collected by the client
 Client-written requirements for respiratory protection
 The following table
H2S Concentration Respirator Cartridge

Unknown (such as no IH
monitoring information
Supplied air Not applicable
and/or emergency response
for a release)
Less than 10 ppm None required Not applicable
Greater than or equal to 10 supplied air or
Not applicable
ppm, but less than 100 ppm ESCAPE ONLY
Greater than or equal to 100
Supplied air Not applicable
ppm

Page 567
ABG
Note: There are no approved air-purifying respirator cartridges for H2S.
Escape respirators will be changed after each use as part of an escape event. The escape respirator should not be
used for any purpose other than escape.
Toxic effects of hydrogen sulfide (H2S)
EFFECT EXPOSURE EST. PPM

Odor detectable by most people Any 0.2
TLV for 8-hour exposure 8 hours 10
TLV for 15-minute exposure 15 min 15
Irritation eyes (reversible) 60 min. 20
Olfactory paralysis + 3-15 min 100
Pulmonary edema (irreversible)* 30 min 200
Potentially lethal (unconsciousness) any 500
+ The effect is faster at higher concentrations

* Potentially lethal for the most vulnerable part of the population (5%)
The recommended TLVs are:

 TLV-STEL, 15 minutes is 15ppm. This is based on avoiding transient irritant effects;
and
 TLV-TWA, 8-hour is 10ppm.
3.2 Additional Personal Protective Equipment
Eye/Face Protection: Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) if less than 3 hours; change
out filters immediately after 1 time use; or use self-contained
breathing apparatus in unknown atmosphere; if LEL is >5 percent
do not enter
Skin Protection: Protective gloves – Neoprene, butyl rubber, PVC, polyethylene
Other/General
Protection: Safety shoes, safety shower, eyewash “fountain”
4.0 Work Controls
4.1 H2S Areas
The boundaries of H2S areas must be plainly marked with “Danger” signs warning of H2S, in accordance with
Practice 000.653.3301, Barricades, Signs, and Tags.

Page 568
ABG
4.2 Buddy System
A “buddy system” will be used any time an employee goes into an H2S contaminated area. The observer must
observe the person entering the H2S area from a safe distance.
4.3 Confined Spaces

4.4 Sudden Discharges/Escape
If a break occurs in a line carrying H2S, leave the zone of exposure quickly moving up-wind, up-hill, or at a right
angle to the wind – run at right angles left or right. Do not run away from the windsock; you might get trapped.
4.5 Job Safety Analysis
Where an exposure limit is likely to be exceeded, a JSA (Form 000.653.F0100 or equal – may also be known as a
“compliance program”) will be developed in accordance with Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task Planning/Risk
Analysis.
Results of air or bulk sampling, calculations of potential H2S exposure, and other data that demonstrate
compliance with this practice will be attached to the JSA/compliance program.
Note: Refer to Attachment 01, Example of Formal Request for Client Monitoring Data.
5.0 TRAINING
Training will be conducted for employees who will or may be exposed to H 2S at/above the AL as follows:
 Upon initial employment
 Annually
 Any time there is a change in this practice
 When there is a change in or addition of a process or operation that creates the
potential for exposure or increase in exposure
Training will include the following:

 Contents of this practice
 Contents of the relevant standard(s)
 Area emergency alarms and evacuation routes
 Location of emergency eye wash stations and showers
 Emergency phone numbers
 Appropriate protective measurements to control H2S e exposures during normal
operations and emergency situations

Page 569
ABG
6.0 REFERENCES

System - Execution
Forms:
7.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Example of Formal Request for Client Monitoring
Data

Page 570
ABG
INCENTIVE & AWARDS PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................547
SCOPE548
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................548
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................548
1.0 INCENTIVE PROGRAMS................................................................................................................................548
1.1 General....................................................................................................................................................548
1.2 Approved Programs.................................................................................................................................548
1.3 Program Audit.........................................................................................................................................549
2.0 OUTSTANDING INCIDENT PREVENTION ACHIEVEMENTS.............................................................................549
2.1 General....................................................................................................................................................549
2.2 ZERO ACCIDENTSSM Program....................................................................................................................550
3.0 AWARDS OF EXCELLENCE AND MERIT.........................................................................................................551
3.1 Awards of Excellence...............................................................................................................................551
3.2 Awards of Merit.......................................................................................................................................551
4.0 SAFETY CROSS AWARDS (SILVER AND BRONZE)..........................................................................................551
4.1 General....................................................................................................................................................551
4.2 Eligibility for the Silver Cross Award........................................................................................................551
4.3 Award Components and Cost..................................................................................................................552
4.4 Eligibility for the Bronze Safety Cross Award...........................................................................................552
4.5 Award Components and Cost..................................................................................................................552
4.6 Application Process.................................................................................................................................552
4.7 Corporate Approval.................................................................................................................................552
5.0 APPLICATION PROCESS................................................................................................................................552
5.1 Application Process for ZERO ACCIDENTS Awards...................................................................................552
5.2 Application Submission Process for Safety Excellence and Awards of Merit...........................................553
6.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................554

Page 571
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for ABG’s health, safety, and environmental (HSE) incentive and award
programs.
SCOPE
This practice includes following major sections:
 Incentive Programs
 Outstanding Incident Prevention Achievements
 Award of Excellence and Merit
 Safety Cross Awards (Silver and Bronze)
 Application Process
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
1.0 INCENTIVE PROGRAMS
1.1 General
ABG believes that successful HSE programs are accompanied by periodic recognition of employees’
accomplishments. One way of accomplishing recognition is through incentive programs that recognize
employees, work crews, or the total workforce. ABG supports the use of HSE incentive programs that are
designed to promote and enhance safety performance.
HSE incentive programs should be easy to understand and administer, fair and nondiscriminatory, and provide
recognition and rewards worthy of the specified safety accomplishment – and they should have well-defined
program rules with clear starting and ending periods.
1.2 Approved Programs
ABG HSE endorses the following 2 HSE incentive programs:

 Recognition — rewards employees for outstanding HSE performance with tokens,
mementos, or gifts.
 Monetary — rewards employees with cash payments.
A. Recognition Program
The recognition incentive programs (nonmonetary) are the primary programs used by ABG. They are varied and
versatile, and promote ease of use and flexibility in implementation. Project/Site Managers and other ABG

Page 572
ABG
Operations Managers may implement recognition incentive programs at their discretion. Approval by Corporate
HSE is not needed.
B. Monetary Programs
Monetary incentive programs provide for bonus cash payments to employees and require certain approvals
before implementation and a mechanism for auditing the program while it is in place. The Project/Site Manager,
Department Manager, and Project/Site HSE Representative have the following responsibilities:
 Determine which incentive program to implement at the project/site.
 Implement and administer the program.
 Manage the program in the best interest of ABG and the client.
 Implement an auditing system of the program.
Variable aspects of the programs will be administered in accordance with a process that is mutually acceptable to
ABG, the client, and the contractor/subcontractor (if applicable).
Proposed monetary incentive programs must be described in detail using Form 000.653.F0139, Monetary HSE
Incentive Program. The form should be completed and submitted to the following for their review and approval:
 Project/Site Manager
 Regional Safety Manager
 Craft Compensation Director/Manager
 Business Unit President
Once final approval has been received, copies of the approved form should be distributed to those on the
approval list and the HSE Board.
1.3 Program Audit
Monetary incentive programs reward employees on the achievement of an agreed upon level of HSE
performance. Statistical information, in the form of total recordable incidence rates and Days Away, Restricted,
or Transferred – Lost (DART-L) incidence rates are commonly used as performance indicators. Auditing this
statistical data is an important part of the monetary incentive program that demands program integrity.
Monetary incentive programs will be audited jointly by the responsible Regional Safety Manager and the ABG
Internal Auditing Department. Incentive program audits will be conducted as a part of normal HSE audits
.
2.0 OUTSTANDING INCIDENT PREVENTION ACHIEVEMENTS
2.1 General
ABG believes that all incidents are predictable and preventable. By training our employees to anticipate potential
hazards and equipping them with safe work practices to alleviate or prevent those hazards, we reaffirm ABG’s
status as the safest contractor in the world. While this keeps us competitive in the global marketplace, above all it
protects our most valuable asset – our employees.
Based on the priority placed on safe work practices, ABG has developed a program to recognize projects and
offices on a global scale that successfully implement safe work practices by setting and achieving safe work-hour

Page 573
ABG
goals. The awards for which a project/site or office may become eligible, as well as the criteria for each, are
provided below.
2.2 ZERO ACCIDENTSSM Program
The ZERO ACCIDENTS Star awards are reserved for the very best performers. The ZERO ACCIDENTS Program has
established a new standard of expectation and recognition in the industry. The criteria are outlined below.
 No injury or illness resulting in a DART-L case
 No environmental citations or other regulatory agency citations
 No fatalities on the project/site or office for the 6-month period immediately
proceeding the accomplishment period.
 The project/site’s or office’s application of the following High-Impact ZERO Incident
Techniques:
 Subcontractor Management
 Pre-Project HSE
 HSE Education and Orientation
 New Employee Development
 HSE Awareness Program
 Substance Abuse Program
 Recognition and Rewards
 Incident Investigation and Reporting
 Pre-Task Planning
 Management in Action
 Audits/Assessments
 Use of Networking and Resources
 Successful completion of the verification audit completed by the appropriate
Regional Safety Manager (or designee) demonstrating use of High-Impact ZERO
Incident Techniques.
Projects and offices are eligible for ZERO ACCIDENTS awards of One-, Two-, Three-, Four-, and Five-Star awards
based on criteria established by the corporate yearly performance goals.
Project/site eligibility for ZERO ACCIDENTS awards is reached upon completion of any of the following milestones:
 100,000 safe work hours
 One million safe work hours
 500,000 safe work-hour increments thereafter
Offices are eligible for Five-Star awards after the completion of 5 million safe work hours or 3 years without a
recordable incident.
Small projects/sites that do not meet the safe hour criteria established by Corporate HSE may be evaluated for
recognition in the ZERO ACCIDENTS Program at the discretion of the business unit, project, and HSE management.

Page 574
ABG
3.0 AWARDS OF EXCELLENCE AND MERIT
3.1 Awards of Excellence
The ABG Safety Excellence Awards are reserved for Million Plus safe work-hour achievements. The criteria are
outlined below.
 No injury or illness resulting in a DART-L case.
 One million or more safe work hours achieved initially (projects/sites and offices) –
500,000 safe work-hour increments thereafter.
3.2 Awards of Merit
ABG Awards of Merit are reserved for safe work-hour achievements that are less than one million safe work
hours. The criteria are outlined below.
 No injury or illness resulting in a DART-L case.
Awards of Merit are awarded upon completion of any of the following safe work-hour milestones:
 100,000 safe work hours  Award of Merit
 250,000 safe work hours  Bronze Award of Merit
 500,000 safe work hours  Silver Award of Merit
 750,000 safe work hours  Gold Award of Merit
A project/site or office may also qualify for an Award of Merit upon completion of a safe work year (or years)
without an injury or illness resulting in a DART-L case. Smaller offices and sites may apply for awards outside
normal program guidelines for approval on an individual basis. Other significant, unique accomplishments may
qualify for an Award of Merit upon special application to the HSE Board.
Awards are based on total project/site or office performance, including subcontractor personnel. The project may
be self-perform, construction management, or operations and maintenance.
4.0 SAFETY CROSS AWARDS (SILVER AND BRONZE)
4.1 General
The Safety Cross Award Program was established to encourage safety awareness among ABG employees and
contractors – an awareness that is essential to the continuous performance improvement for which we strive. By
recognizing employees who assume responsibility for the safety of themselves, their coworkers, and those in the
communities in which they work, we reinforce the vital role that safety plays in maintaining ABG’s status as a
leader in the construction industry. Most importantly, this program recognizes employees for protecting our most
valuable asset – our employees.
4.2 Eligibility for the Silver Cross Award
The Silver Safety Cross Award recognizes those employees who have acted in a life-saving manner and assisted
others in distress either on or off the job.

Page 575
ABG
Note: The Silver Safety Cross Award is not presented to those who are performing duties
within the scope of their work such as fire fighters and rescue workers. However,
these employees will be recognized in a letter of commendation.
4.3 Award Components and Cost
Recipients of the Silver Safety Cross Award are presented with a medallion and a letter of commendation from
Corporate HSE. Corporate HSE furnishes the Silver Safety Cross Award at no cost to the project/site or office at
which the employee works.
4.4 Eligibility for the Bronze Safety Cross Award
The Bronze Safety Cross Award is awarded to employees who have been involved in an accident or incident where
serious injury was avoided through the use of proper personal protective equipment.
4.5 Award Components and Cost
Recipients of the Bronze Safety Cross Award are presented with a medallion and a letter of commendation from
Corporate HSE.
The Bronze Safety Cross Awards are project-reimbursable. Contact the Regional Safety Manager or the HSE
Awards Program Coordinator for pricing information.
4.6 Application Process
To nominate an individual for a Safety Cross Award, the project/site or office must complete Form 000.653.F0144,
Safety Cross Award Application. The application is submitted to the following for review and approval:
 Site HSE Representative
 Business Unit Lead
 HSE Board Chairman
4.7 Corporate Approval
The Regional Safety Manager forwards the request to the HSE Awards Program Coordinator. The Regional Safety
Manager (or designee) will notify the HSE Awards Program Coordinator that a completed request is forthcoming.
5.0 APPLICATION PROCESS
5.1 Application Process for ZERO ACCIDENTS Awards
A. Submittal of Nomination Form
To apply for ZERO ACCIDENTS Star awards, a project/site or office must complete Form 000.653.F0140, ZERO
ACCIDENTSSM Program Award Application. The application is submitted, together with Form 000.653.F0141, ZERO
ACCIDENTSSM Program Award Verification Audit, discussed below, to the appropriate Regional Safety Manager.
B. Verification Audit

Page 576
ABG
The project/site or office must undergo a verification audit to be completed by the appropriate Regional Safety
Manager (or designee). The ZERO ACCIDENTS Program Award Verification Audit will be used to document the
audit and must be submitted together with the ZERO ACCIDENTS Program Award Application, in order to
complete the application for a ZERO ACCIDENTS award. This audit process protects the integrity of the ZERO
ACCIDENTS Program by confirming that High-Impact ZERO Incident Techniques have been implemented on the
project/site.
The Regional Safety Manager (or designee) must verify that the safe work hours reported in the Global
Information Management System (GIMS) submitted by the project/site/office qualify the project/site/office for
the milestone for which it has applied. Should a discrepancy exist, written justification signed by the Regional
Safety Manager will be submitted to Corporate HSE, along with the ZERO ACCIDENTS Program Award forms.
C. Corporate Approval
The Regional Safety Manager forwards the ZERO ACCIDENTS Program Award Application, the ZERO ACCIDENTS
Program Award Verification Audit, and any supporting documentation to the HSE Awards Program Coordinator in
Corporate HSE. The Regional Safety Manager (or designee) will notify the HSE Awards Program Coordinator that a
completed application is forthcoming.
Note: Incomplete applications, applications submitted with discrepancies, and applications
submitted before achieving the accomplishment will be delayed in processing. In order to plan
celebrations effectively, a minimum of 3 weeks should be allowed for delivery of awards
following completion of the application.
5.2 Application Submission Process for Safety Excellence Awards and Awards of Merit
A. Submittal of Nomination Form
To apply for a Safety Excellence Award, a project/site or office must complete Form 000.653.F0142, Million Plus
Safety Excellence Award Application. The application is submitted to the following for review and approval:
To apply for an Award of Merit, a project/site or office must complete Form 000.653.F0143, Safety Certificate
Plaque Application. The application is submitted to the following for review and approval:
B. Corporate Approval

Page 577
ABG
The Regional Safety Manager forwards each request to the HSE Awards Program Coordinator. The Regional
Safety Manager (or designee) will notify the HSE Awards Program Coordinator that a completed request is
forthcoming.
Note: Incomplete applications, applications submitted with discrepancies, and
applications submitted before achieving the accomplishment will be delayed in
processing. In order to plan celebrations effectively, a minimum of 3 weeks should
be allowed for delivery of awards following completion of the application.
6.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0139 Monetary HSE Incentive Program
000.653.F0142 Million Plus Safety Excellence Award Application
000.653.F0143 Safety Certificate Plaque Application
000.653.F0144 Safety Cross Award Application

Page 578
ABG
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE GUIDELINES AND EXPOSURE MONITORING POLICY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................555
EXPOSURE MONITORING........................................................................................................................................556
GENERAL PROCEDURES......................................................................................................................................556
MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE........................................................................................................................................557
EXPOSURE GUIDELINES..........................................................................................................................................557
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)........................................................................................................................557
Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH).............................................................................................557
Recommended Exposure Limits (REL)................................................................................................................558
Threshold Limit Values (TLV’s)............................................................................................................................558
Differentiation of TLVS.......................................................................................................................................558
“Skin” Notation..................................................................................................................................................558
Conclusion:.........................................................................................................................................................558
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE MONITORING......................................................................................................................559
Overview............................................................................................................................................................559
Frequency of Monitoring....................................................................................................................................559
Training..............................................................................................................................................................559
Instrument Calibration.......................................................................................................................................559
Instrumentation Technology..............................................................................................................................560
AIR SAMPLING AND MONITORING PROCEDURES...................................................................................................560
Overview............................................................................................................................................................560
Testing ..............................................................................................................................................................560
Air Testing Instruments......................................................................................................................................560
Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI)........................................................................................................................561
Flame Ionization Detector (FID)..........................................................................................................................562
Infrared Spectrophotometer (IR)........................................................................................................................562
Oxygen Meter.....................................................................................................................................................562
Direct Reading Detector Tubes...........................................................................................................................562
Sampling.............................................................................................................................................................562
EMPLOYEE NOTIFICATION OF I H MONITORING RESULTS..................................................................................563
Overview............................................................................................................................................................563
References..........................................................................................................................................................563

Page 579
ABG
PURPOSE
The primary objective of ABG’ Exposure Monitoring Program is to promote and minimize or prevent exposure of
personnel to airborne concentrations of hazardous substances above limits set by regulatory agencies.
EXPOSURE MONITORING
GENERAL PROCEDURES
1. Substance specific monitoring shall be conducted as required by applicable regulations and as

necessary to protect our employees utilizing the action level, permissible exposure limit (PEL), and
the Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL).
2. Employees will be informed of the results within the time frame specified by regulations but not
later than 15 days from the time ABG receives the results.
3. Employees will be provided training at the time of their initial assignment to the work areas where
air-borne concentrations of hazardous substances may exist.
4. Annual training will be provided to employees who work on job sites which have potential for
exposures above the action level of toxic substance vapors listed in 29 CFR Part 1910.1000-
1910.1500.
5. Records of training, content of training, attendance, and rosters will be maintained at each
respective ABG location.
6. Control procedures will be implemented to minimize personnel exposure.
7. Required signs will be posted at the entrances to all regulated areas.

Page 580
ABG
MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE
Some hazardous substances, such as lead and benzene, require specialized medical evaluations before and after
exposures. In addition, overexposure to some hazardous substances may require follow-up medical evaluations and
testing. Refer to the Medical Surveillance section of the individual safety policy for additional details.
EXPOSURE GUIDELINES
There are several reference sources available, which contain information about toxicological properties and safe
exposure limits for many different hazardous substances. These sources include, but are not limited to, the
following:
 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Threshold Limit Values (TLV’s)
 Occupational Safety and Health Administration Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL’s) and Action Levels
(Al’s)
 National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Recommended Exposure Limits (REL’s)
 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS’s) for specific hazardous substances
This information can provide useful information that can be used to assess the exposure hazards, which might be
present at a ABG job site. These sources should be consulted as necessary when conducting the hazard
evaluation. The results of air testing are compared to these guidelines to make decisions about worker exposures.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
PEL’s are airborne exposure limits set by Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). PEL’s are
legally enforceable and are meant to be minimum levels of protection. Employers may be more protective. Other
exposure limits, such as TLV’s published by the ACGIH, are not legally enforceable. In some cases, current PEL’s
are derived from TLV’s. Because PEL’s are legal limits, the process for updating PEL’s requires a lengthy public
review process, several public hearings, and often takes several years to pass into law. PEL values are found in 29
CFR 1910.1000 – 1910.1500.
Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH)
IDLH concentrations represent a maximum concentration from which one could escape within 30 minutes without
any escape impairing symptoms or irreversible health effects. This includes any severe eye or respiratory
irritation, which would prevent escape without injury. The IDLH values can be found in the NIOSH/OSHA Pocket
Guide to Chemical Hazards.

Page 581
ABG
Recommended Exposure Limits (REL)
REL’s are airborne exposure limits set by NIOSH. These are advisory only and are not legally enforceable. REL’s
are usually more current than PEL’s.
Threshold Limit Values (TLV’s)
Threshold Limit Values are set by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) and are
advisory only. They are not legally enforceable.
The Threshold Limit Value is based on the concept that there is a "threshold" dose or concentration below which
there are no adverse effects. TLV’s are airborne exposure limits set by the ACGIH, a private industrial hygiene
organization. Since TLV’s were formulated for use in the normal industrial workplace, they can be used in the
decision making process only with the utmost discretion.
A revised list of TLV’s is published each year, and TLV’s are as a rule more current than PEL’s.
Differentiation of TLVS
Threshold Limit Values for a substance are differentiated based on time of exposure and concentration.
1. TLV-Time Weighted Average (TWA) – TWA is a time weighted average concentration for a normal
8-hour workday and 40 hour workweek. The fluctuations in exposure that occur during the work
shift are averaged.
2. TLV-Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) – STEL is defined as a 15-minute time weighted average
exposure, which should not be exceeded at any time during a workday. STEL exposures should be
at least 60 minutes apart and should not be repeated more than 4 times per day. The individual
must limit the normal exposure to avoid exceeding the TLV-TWA.
3. TLV-Ceiling (C) – The Ceiling limit is a concentration that should not be exceeded, even
instantaneously
“Skin” Notation
The notation "skin" in OSHA or ACGIH publications indicates that the chemical can be absorbed through
the skin as a route of entry into the body. No concentration guidelines for skin exposure exist. Steps
should be taken to avoid skin contact with these chemicals.

Page 582
ABG
Conclusion:
Many guidelines exist for exposure to hazardous substances. All require that you know what substance
you may be exposed to. These guides are useful in situations where there are many unknown factors and
you want to assume a "worst case" scenario. TLVs and similar guides are useful where there is an
exposure to airborne chemicals and the concentration is known.
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE MONITORING
Overview
Industrial hygiene Monitoring is the practice of using instruments to determine the amount of undesirable agents
present at a particular location. Most monitoring within ABG is concerned with the presence of hazardous
substances in air. However, other health concerns such, as noise levels, heat, light levels, and airflow will be
monitored also.
Frequency of Monitoring
All job sites involving potential exposure to flammable, carcinogenic, or highly toxic agents must be evaluated
and, if necessary, monitored using specialized instrumentation.
All confined space entries will be monitored for oxygen, flammables and toxicity.
All unknown contaminants will be monitored prior to sampling or clean up.
Monitoring will be required at specific job sites based on the nature and severity of the potential hazard.
Monitoring will be conducted either continuously or at designated intervals, depending on the nature of the
hazard. The Safety Department will assist in designing a sampling strategy that best suits their individual
requirements.
Training
Anyone operating a monitoring instrument shall be thoroughly trained in its operation and calibration. The Safety
Department will be responsible to insure that instruction is obtained for anyone requiring this training.
Instrument Calibration
All equipment needing calibration shall be calibrated:

Page 583
ABG
 At least once a year by an outside laboratory or other qualified agency.

 At least once every 3 months by a qualified person within the company.
 Every time before field use.
Documentation must be maintained to verify calibrations.
Instrumentation Technology
It should be noted that technology does not stand still and new, more accurate, more precise, and/or more
reliable instruments become available every year. ABG will keep abreast of these new developments and replace
obsolete equipment as quickly as feasible.
A number of companies also lease equipment and this route should be considered if specific instrumentation is
needed and not in our current inventory.
AIR SAMPLING AND MONITORING PROCEDURES
Overview
Many different kinds of hazards might exist at a job site. Some you can identify using your own senses of sight,
smell, and hearing. Smelling strange odors, seeing vapor clouds and hearing a loud noise alerts you to possible
hazardous conditions. However, the senses are easily fooled and many hazards, especially chemical hazards, are
not detectable to your senses until it is too late.
Testing
Testing for hazards seeks to answer two basic questions:
 First, is a toxic agent present?

 Second, how much is present?
Today many different kinds of sampling instruments are used to identify and measure airborne concentrations.
Testing instruments are commonly used to check for the following hazards:
o Oxygen deficient atmospheres

o Explosive Atmospheres
o Toxic Atmospheres
o Radiation
o Noise (addressed under the Hearing Conservation section of the Health & Safety Manual)

Page 584
ABG
If hazardous conditions exist, steps can then be taken to control the hazards and protect workers. Such steps
might include ventilating an oxygen deficient confined space or selecting the proper respirator and protective
clothing to prevent exposure to harmful substances.
Air Testing Instruments
Many different instruments have been developed, each with certain advantages and certain limitations. Several
different types of testing equipment may be used to evaluate conditions at a job site. Testing instruments can be
classified into two groups of testing instruments:
 Direct Reading Instruments and,
 Indirect Reading Instruments.
Direct Reading Instruments provide information immediately or within a few minutes, enabling rapid decisions to
be made regarding hazardous conditions.
Indirect Reading Instruments collect samples that must be analyzed at a laboratory. The testing results may no be
known for several hours, days or even weeks.
Some direct reading instruments are able to detect only general groups of chemicals, not the specific chemicals
themselves. Those that can detect specific chemicals generally cannot measure concentrations below 1 ppm and
may be affected by the presence of other chemicals and give false readings. Samples taken from indirect
instruments can accurately determine worker's exposure to specific chemicals at very low concentrations (often
to parts per billion) averaged over many hours.
Direct Reading Instruments may include:
 Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI)

 Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
 Infrared Spectrophotometer (IR)
 Photoionization Detector (PID)
 Oxygen Meter
 Gas detectors (specific for carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, and others toxic gases or vapors)
 Detector Tubes
 Passive Dosimeters
Indirect Reading Instruments may include:

 Air sampling pump with collection media
 Passive air samples
Following are brief descriptions of the use, operation and limitations of the direct reading instruments. This
information is not complete, but is merely an introduction to the range of available equipment. Before using any
air testing equipment, you must be properly trained in its calibration, operation, maintenance and its limitations.

Page 585
ABG
Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI)
The CGI monitors for combustible gases and vapors (non-specific). It measures their concentration in the air as a
percent of the lower explosive limit (LEL) of a specific calibration gas, such as methane or hexane.
Combustible gases or vapors in the air are burned inside the instrument, heating a special filament. The increase
in heat is measured providing the operator with a measurement. Readings are not valid under oxygen deficient
conditions (levels below 19.5%). Therefore, it is important to obtain oxygen levels first before measuring
combustible gases.
Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
The FID monitors for organic vapors and gases. The total concentration present is measured as a percent of a
specific calibration gas. If a specific chemical is known to be present, the FID can be calibrated to it.
The FID does not detect inorganic gases or vapors and should not be used at temperatures below 40 degrees F.
Infrared Spectrophotometer (IR)
The IR Monitors for specific gases and vapors and is designed for conditions with one or two known
substances present.
Gases pass by an infrared light in a test chamber inside the instrument and a detector measures the amount of IR
light absorbed. This instrument is not approved for use in flammable or explosive atmospheres. Water vapor and
carbon dioxide interfere with the reading.
Oxygen Meter
The oxygen meter monitors the percent of oxygen in the air and measures the concentration from 0-25% oxygen
content. Normal oxygen in the atmosphere is 20.8%.
Electrochemical sensor measures the partial pressure of oxygen in the air and produces a measurable electric
discharge. The oxygen meter must be calibrated prior to use to compensate for altitude and barometric pressure.
The presence of certain gases (such as ozone) can interfere with readings. Carbon dioxide will poison the detector
cell over time so its duration is limited.
Direct Reading Detector Tubes
Detector tubes monitor for specific gases and vapors. Detect tubes for several hundred different substances are
available. Passive detector badges are also available for a few substances.

Page 586
ABG
The substance in the air reacts with a chemical reagent inside the tube to produce a colored stain. The length or
color change of the stain is proportional to the concentration of the chemical. Tubes have limit accuracy and are
affected by high humidity and cold temperatures. Shelf life is also limited for many substances.
Sampling
Choosing the appropriate sampling instrument and deciding how, when and where to sample are dependent
upon the specific conditions that exist at the site. Often, several testing instruments and sampling strategies are
used to evaluate all hazardous conditions on site.
Grab samples vs. Integrated samples – Grab samples, or short-term samples, are usually taken for just a few
seconds to a few minutes. Most direct reading instruments, like detector tubes or oxygen meters, take grab
samples. Grab samples describe the conditions present at the time of sampling only. Periodic grab samples are
needed to monitor changing conditions and variable chemical exposures. Integrated samples are collected over a
longer period of time, usually several hours and the results are an average measure of conditions. Most indirect
sampling methods (like air sampling pumps) collect integrated samples. Integrated samples will not provide
information on the variation in chemical exposure that occurred during the hours of sampling.
Personal vs. Area Monitoring – Personal monitoring measures the actual exposure of an individual worker. The air
sample is collected from the worker's breathing zone (the area extending about one foot from the nose and
mouth). If respirators are worn, the sample is taken outside of the respirator. Personal samples can be either
grab or integrated samples. Area monitoring measures the level of chemical concentration at a specific site, area,
or location. It is useful for characterizing a site or operation. It does not measure actual worker exposure, but can
be very helpful in determining the boundaries of the exclusion or security zones and the level of personal
protective gear required at a site. Area samples can be either grab or integrated samples.
EMPLOYEE NOTIFICATION OF INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE MONITORING RESULTS
Overview
OSHA regulations require employees who are monitored to be informed of the test results. In addition,
monitoring information should be provided to employees to apprise them of the concentrations of potentially
hazardous substances in their workplace.
References
 29 CFR 1910.1000 Table of Air Contaminants

 29 CFR 1910.20 – Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records
 29 CFR 1910.1025 – Lead
 29 CFR 1926.58 Asbestos, Tremolite, Authophyllite, and Actinolite
 29 CFR 1910.1027 – Cadmium
 29 CFR 1910.1048 – Formaldehyde

Page 587
ABG
 29 CFR 1910.1018 – Arsenic

 29 CFR 1910.1002 – Coal Tar Pitch Volatiles
 29 CFR 1910.1017 – Vinyl Chloride
 29 CFR 1910.1028 – Benzene
 29 CFR 1910.1045 – Acrylonitrile
 29 CFR 1910.1047 – Ethylene Oxide
 29 CFR 1910.1052 – Methylene Chloride

Page 588
ABG
Responsibilities
Department Managers, Site and/or Location Managers, Project Managers, and the Health and Safety Department
have responsibilities to implement this procedure.
The Health & Safety Department will coordinate analysis of all industrial hygiene samples with the laboratory and
will review the analytical results.
The Health & Safety Department will draft a letter of Notification of Industrial Hygiene Monitoring Results. This
letter shall include the following information:
 The name of the person wearing monitoring equipment
 Date of sampling
 Task being performed during sampling operations
 Name of person performing sampling.
 Name of lab performing analysis
 Analytical method used
 Concentration of contaminant detected by the laboratory
The Health & Safety Department will file the original analytical results in the employee’s personnel file.
The Health & Safety Department will forward a copy of the letter to the employee that was monitored, to the
employee’s Supervisor, to the Department Manager, to the Location or Site Manager, and to the Project Manager
(if applicable).
The Health & Safety Department will provide employees who request to view their exposure records with the
necessary information, and will attempt to answer any questions that may be presented.
If the laboratory results indicate an elevated health risk to employees, the Health & Safety Department will
initiate an investigation into the matter and will make appropriate recommendations.

Page 589
ABG
INJURY AND ILLNESS PREVENTION PROGRAM (IIPP) CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................565
Management Commitment....................................................................................................................................566
Safety Communication...........................................................................................................................................566
Labor/Management Safety and Health Committee...........................................................................................567
Employee Participation and Information...........................................................................................................567
Safety and Health Reporting..............................................................................................................................567
Hazard Identification and Assessment...............................................................................................................568
Hazard Prevention and Control..........................................................................................................................568
Accident/Exposure Investigations......................................................................................................................569
Training..............................................................................................................................................................569
Safety and Health Recordkeeping......................................................................................................................570
Program Evaluation............................................................................................................................................570
Heat Illness Prevention.......................................................................................................................................571

Page 590
ABG
Purpose
We at PLANT PERFORMANCE SERVICES (ABG) are committed to the safety and health of our employees, and know
that our strength as a company is only as good as the strength of each individual. We will strive to place safety
and health above all else, and will involve all workers at every level in establishing, implementing, and evaluating
our efforts. This written Injury and Illness Prevention Program is intended to reduce the severity of job-related
illnesses and injuries at this company. It is our intent to comply with the requirements of California laws and
Section 3203 of the General Industry Safety Orders.
Management Commitment
Our commitment to safety and health shows in every decision we make and every action we take, which is why
we've established workplace objectives for accident and illness prevention. As a company, our safety goals are to:
Have ten percent fewer injuries next year,” and “Reduce down-time due to poorly maintained equipment”. The
following Injury and Illness Prevention Program Administrator(s) coordinates the program elements for our
company.
This person(s) is responsible for setting up and managing the program so that managers, supervisors, and
employees know what our company expects. Our Program Administrator(s) is accountable for meeting these
responsibilities when we: performance appraisals. He/She has the authority (delegated ability to take action) to
carry out his/her duties in a timely manner so that progress is made in meeting program goals. He/She is also
provided with sufficient resources, information, and training to meet those responsibilities.
ABG corporate safety director has examined our existing policies and practices to ensure that they encourage and
do not discourage reporting and participation in our program. In this way, early reporting of injuries, illnesses, and
hazards, as well as meaningful employee participation in the program are more likely to occur. The reporting of
injuries, illnesses, and hazards is especially important because the success of the program depends on such
reporting.
Project Manager or Site Safety Manager reviews all incentive programs to ensure that they are designed to
reward safe work practices, such as active participation in the program, the identification of hazards in the
workplace, and the reporting of the early signs and symptoms of illnesses, rather than to reward employees for
having fewer injuries or illnesses.
Managers and supervisors are responsible for implementing and maintaining the Injury and Illness Prevention
Program in their work areas and for answering worker questions about the program. A copy of this program is
available from each manager and supervisor.
Safety Communication
In an effort to open the lines of communication between management and employees, we've established a
system that allows a continuous flow of safety and health information that is readily understandable by all
affected employees.

Page 591
ABG
Field Safety Manager communicates with employees on a timely basis about the program so they have the
information necessary to protect themselves from hazards and have effective input into the operation of the
program. We realize that it is essential to keep our employees informed on matters relating to occupational safety
and health while encouraging them to inform management of hazards in the workplace without fear of reprisal.
That is why we've implemented a communication system that includes: labor/management safety and health
committee, general employee meetings, an anonymous safety suggestion box, posters and bulletins, written
communications, and/or workplace safety and health training programs.
Labor/Management Safety and Health Committee
We've elected to use a labor/management safety and health committee to ensure that a continuous flow of
information is maintained. This committee meets (enter your answer) and is responsible for: (enter your answer).
Employee Participation and Information
All of our employees, including managers and supervisors, are trained and expected to follow the general safe and
healthful work practices and work practices specifically developed for their jobs. In addition, they must
understand our safety and health reporting system, so that reports are received in a timely and systematic
manner. See the Safety and Health Reporting section of this program.
To ensure employee compliance with safe work practices, we've developed the following recognition methods to
motivate employees to put our safety rules and work procedures into practice: (enter your answer).
Our company also holds employees accountable if they violate safety and health rules or safe work practices. Our
disciplinary procedures are as follows: (enter your answer)
A copy of Cal/OSHA's Injury and Illness Prevention Program regulation, Section 3203, and other information is
accessible to all employees ABG Risk Manager, Kathy Bradley. However, this information does not include
confidential or private information that is of a personal nature, such as medical records.
While we provide opportunities for employee participation, we also comply with the National Labor Relations Act.
Safety and Health Reporting
Our safety and health reporting system ensures that all front-line supervisors and the Safety Supervisor receives
and promptly responds to the report, evaluates the report to determine whether an injury or illness has occurred,
and takes corrective action as Cal/OSHA regulations require and where appropriate. When determining whether
an employee who has experienced signs or symptoms of an injury or illness actually has an injury or illness, we
have the employee evaluated, at no cost to the employee, by: the on-site health care professional.
We use the following method for reporting job-related injuries, illnesses, fatalities, incidents, and hazards: a
written incident injury report as well as an anonymous notification by employees about the hazards. All employee
reports are taken seriously by the company. If an injury, illness, fatality, incident, or hazard has occurred, we will
identify, assess, and control the hazard(s).

Page 592
ABG
Hazard Identification and Assessment
Before existing and potential hazards can be prevented and controlled, they must be identified and assessed. It is
critical that this be done for the entire workplace. The site safety manager and the project safety manager reviews
existing safety and health records The evaluation must be done as often as necessary to ensure program
effectiveness and include scheduled periodic inspections to identify unsafe conditions and work practices.
Inspections must be made to identify and evaluate hazards.
Site safety manager and superintendant performs hazard inspections weekly. This person/team has a thorough
knowledge of the facility and the regulations that apply. Inspections are conducted as follows: a job safety
inspection checklist is used to interview employees and observe employees perform their jobs.
Site safety manager identifies and evaluates hazards before we change procedures, or change design, or purchase
equipment, materials, or processes. This is called proactive safety, and the concept encompasses facilities,
hardware, equipment, tooling, materials, layout and configuration, energy controls, environmental concerns, and
products.
In addition, the Corporate Safety Manager will investigate each work-related death, serious injury or illness, or
incident (near-miss) having the potential to cause death or serious physical harm.
Because it is essential to keep good records when assessing our workplace (by records review, inspection,
evaluation, or investigation), we use the following Hazard Assessment Form to record what was done, found, and
corrected. This form is distributed to Site Safety Manager, Corporate Safety Manager and the Risk Manager.
Corporate Safety Manager is responsible for determining what repairs or corrections need to be made, and
assigning responsibility to get them done. Once corrected, all hazards are reassessed.
Hazard Prevention and Control
Once hazards are identified and assessed, they must be eliminated or controlled. Job hazard controls are
engineering, administrative, and/or work practice controls used to eliminate or materially reduce hazards. While
engineering controls, where feasible, are the preferred method, administrative and work practice controls also
may be important in addressing hazards. Personal protective equipment (PPE) may also be used to supplement
engineering, work practice, and administrative controls, but may only be used alone where other controls are not
feasible.
Ultimately, we implement job hazard controls to bring our facility into compliance with the California
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1973 and Cal/OSHA regulations. Generally, this means coming to one of
three ends:
1. The hazards are materially reduced using the incremental abatement process;
2. The hazards are reduced to the extent feasible, and then Corporate Safety Manager periodically looks to
see whether additional controls are feasible and, if so, he/she implements them promptly; or
3. The hazards are eliminated.

Page 593
ABG
When hazards are observed or discovered or when hazards are imminent, our company follows these steps for
hazard control: A hazard assessment is conducted and steps taken to mitigate any issues discovered.
Accident/Exposure Investigations
Although every effort is made to prevent workplace injuries and illnesses, we realize that accidents can happen,
and we are prepared to handle these unexpected situations. If an accident or near-miss occurs in our
establishment, The Site Safety Manager, or Project Superintendant is responsible for conducting a thorough
accident investigation to identify the cause(s), as well as the steps that must be taken to correct the situation.
Our company follows these steps when investigating an accident or near-miss occurrence: A hazard assessment
and safety review of the incident or near miss is conducted.
The project superintendant and corporate safety manager informed of the findings.
The Project Manager notified who initiates necessary controls to mitigate any future occurrences.
Training
Training is one of the most important elements of our Injury and Illness Prevention Program because it allows
employees to learn their jobs properly, brings new ideas into the workplace, reinforces existing ideas and
practices, and puts our program into action.
All of our employees, which include managers, supervisors, and workers, know about the establishment and
success of our Injury and Illness Prevention Program.
They understand the importance of establishing and maintaining safe and healthful working conditions and their
roles in this effort. Under no circumstances may an employee work in job assignments for which training is
required until he/she has successfully completed proper training. This includes all existing and new employees.
However, if an employee has received training in certain required topics within the last three years; initial training
in those specific topics may not be required. Before we can meet the prior training exception, the site
superintendant and site safety manager/supervisor must be able to demonstrate that the employee has retained
sufficient knowledge to meet the requirements for initial training. He/She determines this by discussion of the
required training subjects with the employee.
To be clear, training and instruction is provided:
 When this program is first established;

 To all new employees;
 To all employees given new job assignments for which training has not previously been received;
 Whenever new substances, processes, procedures, or equipment are introduced to the workplace and
represent a new hazard;
 Whenever we are made aware of a new or previously unrecognized hazard; and

Page 594
ABG
 To supervisors to familiarize them with the safety and health hazards to which employees under their
immediate direction and control may be exposed; and
 To all workers with respect to hazards specific to each employee's job assignment.
We follow this training and retraining schedule: Periodic training must be done as often as necessary to ensure
employees are adequately informed and trained, and when safety and health information or a change in
workplace conditions indicates that a new or increased hazard exist.
.
Site supervisor or field safety manager/supervisor will identify trainees in each set of new employees and make
arrangements with department management to schedule training. He/She will also identify those existing
employees who need retraining. The site safety manager/supervisor or supervisor is responsible for conducting
training. His/Her qualifications include: Knowledgeable about the ABG safety policy and has field experience about
the hazards to be retrained.
The company training program includes an opportunity for employees to ask questions and receive answers via a
physically-present and qualified trainer or a telephone hotline with direct access to a qualified trainer. This allows
employees to fully understand the material presented to them. All training and information is provided in a
language the trainee will understand.
The ABG HR department is responsible for keeping records certifying each employee who has successfully
completed training. Each certificate includes: the employee name, the date(s) of the training, and the signature of
the person who did the training and evaluation.
Safety and Health Recordkeeping
To reduce or eliminate employee injuries or illnesses, we are committed to learning from past experience and
making corrections for future operations. That's why information is gathered and stored so that control
procedures can be instituted to prevent injuries or illnesses from recurring.
Program Evaluation
It is inherent that problems may occasionally arise in this written Injury and Illness Prevention Program. Although
we may not be able to eliminate all problems, we try to eliminate as many problems as possible to improve
employee protection and encourage safe work practices. By having our Program Administrator(s) thoroughly
evaluate and revise our written Injury and Illness Prevention Program in a timely manner, we can eliminate
problems effectively and ensure that our program is appropriate to workplace conditions.
At this company, program evaluation is performed by our Program Administrator(s) (enter your answer) to
determine what is working well and what changes, if any, are needed.
The evaluation involves the following: (enter your answer).

Page 595
ABG
Heat Illness Prevention
As an employer whose work activities are primarily outdoors, we strive to comply with Section 3395, Heat Illness
Prevention. Adequate drinking water, access to shade, heat-related emergency procedures, and employee and
supervisor training are keys to preventing heat illness.
To ensure access to sufficient quantities of potable drinking water and frequent consumption, the following steps
are taken: (enter your answer).
We provide access to shade at all times and ensure this by taking the following steps: (enter your answer).
To ensure that employees have access to a preventative recovery period, we follow these steps: (enter your
answer).
When an employee exhibits signs and symptoms of heat illness, it is critical that the following steps be taken:
(enter your answer). Also, should emergency medical services be necessary, the following steps must be taken so
that those services can be provided without delay: (enter your answer).
In addition, we train both supervisory and non-supervisory employees on the following:
 Environmental and personal risk factors for heat illness;

 Frequent water consumption;
 Acclimatization;
 Types of heat illness and common signs and symptoms;
 Reporting procedures;
 Emergency response procedures; and
 Procedures for contacting emergency medical services.
We take the following steps to ensure employees and supervisors are trained: The site superintendant or safety
will conduct a review of policies and procedures with the crew where they will then be tested for comprehension.
This is done before work is to begin.

Page 596
ABG
INJURY ILLNESS RECORDKEEPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE ................................................................................................................................................................573
SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................................573
APPLICATION .........................................................................................................................................................573
DEFINITIONS ..........................................................................................................................................................573
1.0 RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................................................574
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................575
2.1 Project HSE .............................................................................................................................................576
2.2 Supervisor/Manager ...............................................................................................................................576
2.3 Project/Office Manager ..........................................................................................................................577
2.4 Regional Safety Manager ........................................................................................................................577
2.5 Contractors .............................................................................................................................................577
3.0 REPORTING .................................................................................................................................................577
3.1 Major Events ...........................................................................................................................................577
3.2 Fatality ....................................................................................................................................................577
3.3 Other Incidents .......................................................................................................................................578
3.4 All Incidents ............................................................................................................................................578
4.0 INVESTIGATION ...........................................................................................................................................578
5.0 CLASSIFYING AND RECORDING INCIDENTS .................................................................................................579
6.0 Press Releases .............................................................................................................................................580
7.0 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................................580
8.0 ATTACHMENTS ............................................................................................................................................580

Page 597
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for reporting, investigating, and managing incidents that have health,
safety, or environmental significance. The requirements include reporting, investigating, and managing the
following:
 Occupational injuries and illnesses (including classifying cases for
recordkeeping/reporting purposes)
 Occupational exposure to toxic substances
 Motor vehicle incidents
 Property damage incidents
 Environmental incidents
 Near-miss and other health- and safety-related incidents
SCOPE
 Reporting
 Investigation
 Classifying and Recording Incidents
 Press Releases
APPLICATION
Note: Specific countries or regions may have reporting requirements different from
those stated herein. If such is the case, local requirements will be met in
addition to those required in this practice.
Note: All recording determinations, for recordkeeping purposes, will be made as defined
and prescribed by the United States (U.S.) Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) Recordkeeping Handbook. This approach must be used
globally for consistency purposes in reporting HSE statistics.
Note: This practice provides guidance only for ABG contractors. However, contractors
and lower-tier contractors are required to retain and maintain an Occupation
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 300 Log or equal. This log (covering
injuries and illnesses connected with each contract) will be submitted to ABG
Project HSE by the 5th working day of each month.
DEFINITIONS
First Aid Case (FAC) - A work-related case that is not an OSHA recordable illness or injury (refer to Attachment 01,
Recordkeeping Classification Process).

Page 598
ABG
Incident - An unintentional and unplanned event causing, or with the potential to cause injury, illness, property
or asset damage, environmental damage, or loss of production. This covers terms such as near miss, near hit,
non-injury incident, and similar phrases.
Lost Time Injury/Disease (DART-L) - Those incidents that result in permanent disability or time lost from work of
one day/shift or more (not including the day of injury/illness).
Major Event - An incident defined as:
 Fatality
 Lost time incident
 Large fire/explosion
 Severe damage by storm, earthquake, etc.
 Serious facility/equipment damage
 Serious environmental event such as a major oil/chemical spill
 A terrorist threat, dangerous situation, or local conflict
 An event not involving any of the situations above, but is serious enough that
publication in the media may be expected
Near Miss - An unintentional and unplanned incident with the potential to cause injury, illness, property or asset
damage, environmental damage, or loss of production.
Other Recordable Case (ORC) (also known as “medical treatment case”) – A recordable case that is not a fatality,
and has no lost or restricted days associated.
Recordable Case - An occupationally-related injury or illness that results in any of the following:
 Death
 Days away from work
 Restricted work or temporary transfer to another job
 Medical treatment beyond first aid
 Loss of consciousness
 A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed healthcare
professional, even if it does not result in any of the above-described conditions.
Restricted Workday Case (DART-R) - A work-related illness or injury that results in the employee being unable to
perform any of his/her normal duties on any scheduled day/shift subsequent to the injury occurring or the illness
being identified.
Total Case Incident Rate (TCIR)
Number of Recordable Injuries and Illness x 200,000

Hrs = TCIR
Total Number Hours Worked

Page 599
ABG
Title: Major Events Report (Form 000.653.F0158)

Purpose: Initial documentation and notification
Responsibility: Supervisor/Manager
Due: As soon as possible, but certainly within 4 hours of incident
Distribution: Site Manager/Project Manager, Site HSE, HSE Regional Lead,
Regional Safety Manager, Regional Safety Manager
Note: Original reports, documents, photos, etc., developed after the

initial report (from Form 000.653.F0158) will be distributed only
to the Regional Safety Manager, with 3 copies only (Project
Manager, Site HSE Representative, and the Regional Safety
Manager).
Title: Incident Investigation Report (Form 000.653.F0198)

Purpose: Document incidents in detail
Responsibility: Supervisor/Manager
Due: Within 3-5 business days of incident
Distribution: Site Manager/Project Manager, Project/Site HSE Representative,
HSE Regional Lead, Regional Safety Manager
Title: Recordkeeping Classification Process (Attachment 01)

Purpose: Injury classification for recordkeeping/reporting
Responsibility: Site HSE
Due: Within 7 calendar days
Distribution: (For events other than “major events”) Site Manager/Project Manager,
Site HSE, HSE Regional Lead, Regional Safety Manager
Title: Project Incident Log (Form 000.653.F0193)

Purpose: List of all incidents
Due: As directed by HSE Regional Safety Manager
Distribution: Site Manager/Project Manager, Site HSE, HSE Regional Lead, Regional
Safety Manager
Title: GIMS Reporting

Purpose: Single site/source for all injury events
Due: Real time — As soon as possible after event
Distribution: None
Incident investigations should be conducted by an investigative “team” led by a line supervisor or manager at the
project level. Depending upon the circumstances or severity, the HSE Board may appoint other team members to
investigate the incident.

Page 600
ABG
Form 000.653.F0198 is generally used to document any incident. However, clients sometimes require that a
specific form is to be used, in which case the client-specified form may be used instead of Form 000.653.F0198.
All persons are responsible for reporting incidents as soon as practicable after becoming aware of the incident
occurring
All incidents will be formally reported within the terms and requirements of the relevant in-country, statutory
authority.
Incidents should be a topic of a Toolbox Meeting for all affected or potentially affected employees on the
project/site/office.
2.1 Project HSE
Project HSE will perform the following:

 Assist line management during the investigation.
 Review the completed Incident Investigation Report for completeness and accuracy.
 Determine the classification and maintain logs and summaries of the incidents in
accordance with Attachment 01.
 Document and report incidents determined to be site-related to management
(contractors report incidents to the assigned ABG construction engineer) and
Regional Safety Manager as directed, on Form 000.653.F0193 or equal.
 Report “major events” to management, Regional Safety Manager, and the Regional
Safety Manager within 4 hours on Form 000.653.F0158.
 Input relevant information into the Global Information Management System (GIMS)
on a “real-time” basis (as soon as possible after the event).
Note: You don’t need all information to begin a GIMS case file — start a GIMS
electronic case file as soon as you can. Then modify (if necessary) and
complete when all information is available.
Note: Remember, classification of every case must be done within 7 days of

notification — therefore, make this classification in GIMS within 7 days, even
if all information is not yet in. If, after all information is in, the case
classification changes, make the changes on the 300 Log and in GIMS at the
same time (so all records are consistent).
 Maintain a repository of case file documentation on all occupational

injuries/illnesses, vehicle accidents, property loss, and near-miss incidents.
 Post copies of the (previous year’s) annual accident summary (OSHA 300A or equal)
on bulletin boards by February 1 to permit employees to see the summary on their
way to and from work.
 Complete an analysis and trend assessment of all incidents and report to
management at least annually.

Page 601
ABG
2.2 Supervisor/Manager
The immediate supervisor/manager will submit the Incident Investigation Report to Project/Site Management
within 72 working hours.
Note: It is a common contractual requirement to submit incident reports to the client. In
such cases, ABG Project HSE also submits the report in the timeframe specified
in the contract.
2.3 Project/Office Manager
The Project/Officer Manager will review the Incident Investigation Report before release.
2.4 Regional Safety Manager
The Regional Safety Manager will review and approve data and reports from major events and determine
distribution.
2.5 Contractors
Contractors will submit all incident reports and associated documents to the ABG
construction engineer. This applies to all elements of this practice where reporting
documents are mentioned.
3.0 REPORTING
3.1 Major Events
Major events will be reported by the supervisor to the Project/Site Manager and Project HSE immediately.
Project HSE or the Project/Site Manager will notify the Regional Safety Manager immediately. If a Regional Safety
Manager cannot be contacted immediately, another member of the HSE Board must be notified of the major
event.
The Regional Safety Manager will report the major event to the Regional Safety Manager immediately. If the
Regional Safety Manager is not available, immediate notification will be given to his/her delegate, who will be
responsible for disseminating notification, as appropriate, to other HSE Board Members and to the HSE Senior
Vice President.
Major events will be initially documented using Form 000.653.F0158. Follow-up/final documentation will be on
Form 000.653.F0198, and provided to the Regional Safety Manager: copies are to be made/retained by the
Project Manager, the Business Unite HSE Lead, and the Site HSE Representative. The Regional Safety Manager will
determine additional distribution after consulting with senior management, legal, etc., and is responsible for final
“librarying” of the report and associated documents.
Major event investigations should use the ABG TapRooT® Investigation program in consultation with the HSE
Board.

Page 602
ABG
3.2 Fatality
When a fatality (regardless of suspected cause) or accident involving hospitalization of 3 or more employees
occurs, the following notifications must be made:
 Each Business unit will develop a reporting protocol to be followed, based on the
example provided in Attachment 03.
 (All situations) — ABG Project HSE notifies corporate HSE and the client.
 (Contractor employee or work is involved) — Contractor immediately notifies ABG
Project HSE, OSHA/state-plan, and other oversight agencies, as required.
 (ABG employee or self-perform work is involved) — Following authorization by the
Regional Safety Manager, ABG Project HSE notifies OSHA/state-plan and other
oversight agencies, as required.
3.3 Other Incidents
All other events will be documented on Form 000.653.F0198, and should be submitted within 3-5 days to
appropriate project and HSE representatives according to Section 1.0.
3.4 All Incidents
All incidents will be reported in accordance with Practice 000.653.1203, MIER/MSISR/GIMS.

4.0 INVESTIGATION
The basic purpose of an incident investigation is to prevent a recurrence of the incident.

The objectives of an incident investigation are:
 Determination of root causes of incidents
 Correction of unsafe conditions
 Elimination of unsafe acts
 Improvement of work capability
 Improvement of supervision
The investigation phase begins as soon as the supervisor is made aware of the incident. While treatment of
injuries and immediate HSE concerns created by the incident are the initial top priority, the supervisor should be
carefully observing the incident scene – planning for follow-up action and future reference.
Once the immediate needs caused by the incident have been satisfied, the supervisor should begin to investigate
the incident in detail (refer to Attachment 02). Prompt incident investigation may reveal contributing factors to
the incident that may not be present at a later date and time.
As soon as possible, taking into account any injuries or personal problems as a result of the incident, the
supervisor should interview the personnel involved in, and witnesses to, the incident.
The important considerations after an incident are:
 Mitigate the impact to personnel involved in the incident.

Page 603
ABG
 Mitigate the impact to ABG as a result of the incident.

 Prevent reoccurrence of a similar incident.
The HSE Representative may conduct an independent investigation of the incident. Such investigation is not
designed to replace the supervisor’s investigation, but to provide a second opinion with regards to the incident.
HSE’s investigation will follow the same guidelines as the supervisor’s investigation, and include talking with the
supervisor for his/her opinion and input.
Project/Site Management, including the site HSE Representative, will review the report(s) and distribute once the
investigation is finalized.
5.0 CLASSIFYING AND RECORDING INCIDENTS
The HSE Representative will receive and review incident reports and perform the following for each ABG and
contractor (including lower-tier contractor) occupational injury and illness:
 Call employees and/or supervisors (as appropriate) for additional information as
needed.
 Discuss injury/illness reports with corporate HSE and review potentially recordable
cases and status changes.
 Determine recordability of cases with a date of injury/diagnosis on or after
January 1, 2002 based on information available at that time in accordance with the
requirements in 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1904.
Note: The Recordkeeping Classification Process (Attachment 01) will be used to

document classification decisions.
Note: Refer to the OSHA Recordkeeping Handbook and OSHA 300 forms.
Note: In locations where a recordkeeping and classification process is prescribed by

a law or standard other than OSHA, the requirements of the law/standard
must be followed IN ADDITION TO the requirements of 29 CFR 1904.
 Add/update recordable cases to appropriate OSHA 300 Log or equal and GIMS. The
ABG HSE Representative maintains an informal and unofficial OSHA 300 Log or equal
for contractors and lower-tier contractors.
 Complete OSHA 301 forms or equal (BLS Supplementary Record of Occupational
Injury/Illness) for recordable cases that do not have a completed copy of a workers’
compensation claim form in the file.
Note: Some OSHA sources have stated that forms “equal to” the 301 forms are not
acceptable — it is recommended that each project in the U.S. check with the
local OSHA office to be sure (document such inquiries).
 Input incident information into the GIMS on a “real-time” basis — refer to Practice
000.653.1203.

Page 604
ABG
 Track open/pending cases to resolution by updating cases as new information is

received.
 Communicate case status changes to management and also notify them of cases
requiring reevaluation by the occupational healthcare provider: update GIMS with
changes.
 Track receipt of incident reports.
 When received, transmit a copy of incident reports to the Regional Safety Manager.
6.0 Press Releases
All announcements to the news media or to the public in general must be made through, or in coordination with,
the Corporate Media Relations Department and the appropriate ABG Regional Safety Manager. This is intended
to ensure that the information provided is factual and in the best interests of the client, the company, and the
employees.
Unless specifically authorized, project/site personnel will not initiate contact with the news media. The Corporate
Media Relations Department will decide when and if inquiries by the press are answered. This will ensure that
answers are given in a factual manner with details following as soon as possible. No conclusions or opinions on
cause and effect should be given.
7.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0158 Major Events Report
000.653.F0193 Project Incident Log
000.653.F0198 Incident Investigation Report
Non-ABG Documents
29 CFR 1904 OSHA Recordkeeping
3245-O1R/2005 OSHA Recordkeeping Handbook
8.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Recordkeeping Classification Process
Attachment 02 Investigation Guidelines
Attachment 03 Example – Fatality/Multiple Injury Reporting
Protocol

Page 605
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
LADDER SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................582
Hazards...................................................................................................................................................................582
Inspections.........................................................................................................................................................582
Storage ..............................................................................................................................................................582
Ratings & Limits..................................................................................................................................................582
Ladder Weight Ratings...................................................................................................................................582
Limits on Ladder Height.................................................................................................................................583
Ladder Setup......................................................................................................................................................583
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................................583
Additional State Requirements..........................................................................................................................583

Page 606
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
Purpose
ABG understands that ladders present unique opportunities for unsafe acts and unsafe conditions. Employees
who use ladders must be trained in proper selection, inspection, use and storage. Improper use of ladders has
cause a large percentage of accidents in the workplace are of accidents. Use caution on ladders. Ladder rungs,
cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level, and uniformly spaced, when the ladder is in position for use.
Hazards
Ladders shall be used only for the purpose for which they were designed. Falls from ladders can result in broken
bones, crippling injuries and death. Ladder safety is taken very seriously by our company. Ladder hazards include:
- Ladders with missing or broken parts.

- Using a ladder with too low a weight rating.
- Using a ladder that is too short for purpose.
- Using metal ladders near electrical wires.
- Using ladders as a working platform.
- Objects falling from ladders.
Inspections
Inspect ladders before each use.
- All rungs and steps are free of oil, grease, dirt, etc.
- All fittings are tight.
- Spreaders or other locking devices are in place.
- Non-skid safety feet are in place.
- No structural defects, all support braces intact.
- Do not use broken ladders. Most ladders cannot be repaired to manufacturer specifications. Throw away
all broken ladders.
- Do not use metal ladders.
Storage
Store ladders on sturdy hooks in areas where they cannot be damaged. Store properly to prevent warping or
sagging. Do not hang anything on ladders that are in a stored condition.
Ratings & Limits
Ladder Weight Ratings

I-A 300 pounds (heavy duty)

Page 607
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
I 250 pounds (heavy duty)

II 225 pounds (medium duty)
III 200 pounds (light duty).
Limits on Ladder Height

- A stepladder should be no more than 20 feet high.
- A one-section ladder should be no more than 30 feet.
- An extension ladder can go to 60 feet, but the sections must overlap.
Ladder Setup
The following procedure must be followed to prevent ladder accidents:
- Place ladder on a clean slip free level surface.

- Extend the ladder to have about 4 feet above the top support or work area.
- Anchor the top and bottom of the ladder.
- Place the ladder base 1/4 the height, of the ladder, from the wall when using an extension ladder.
- Never allow more than one person on a ladder.
- Use carriers and tool belts to carry objects up a ladder.
- Do not lean out from the ladder in any direction.
- If you have a fear of heights - don't climb a ladder.
- Do not allow other to work under a ladder in use.
Maintenance
- Keep ladders clean.

- Never replace broken parts unless provided by the original manufacturer.
- Do not attempt to repair broken side rails.
- Keep all threaded fasteners properly adjusted.
- Replace worn steps with parts from manufacturer.
Additional State Requirements
- Safety requirements for portable wood ladders placed in service after April 18, 1999 have to meet the
requirements of ANSI A14.1-1994, which is incorporated by reference. Safety requirements for portable
wood ladders placed in service on or before April 17, 1999, are based on the ANSI A14.1 provisions in
effect at the time such ladders were placed in service.
- Cleat Ladders longer than 30 feet cannot be used.
- The wood side rails of ladders having cleat steps cannot be less than 1 1/2 inches thick and 3 1/2 inches
deep (2 by 4 inches nominal).

Page 608
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
- - Wood cleats need to be inset into side rails not less than 1/2-inch or attached directly to the edge of
the side rails. Filler blocks of the thickness of the cleats need to be securely attached to the edge of the
rail for the full length between cleats, or equivalent construction. The cleats need to be fastened to each
rail by three 10-d wire nails or equivalent.
- The cleats on a double cleat ladder must extend the full width of the ladder.
Extra requirements for fixed ladders include the following:
- If materials other than steel, aluminum, and wood are used, they must meet the design, fabrication, and
erection requirements.
- Wood ladders may be coated with a clear sealant after inspection.
INSPECTION CRITERIA AND FREQUENCY

An inspection of all portable ladders will be prevormed on a monthly basis by the Site Safety Supervisor or designee. Colored
tape will be placed on the leg of the ladder identicating that the ladder has been inspected. The color code for indicateion of
inspection is as follows:
LADDER COLOR CODE

RED January – March
GREEN April – June
BLUE July – September
Yellow October - December
To insure proper inspection of portable ladders, the following parts associated with ladders should be inspected:
Stepladders Single and Extension Ladders

Rails Rails
Bracing Rungs Rounds
Steps Locking Devices
Braces Braces
Tie-off Rope Safety Shoes
Tie-off Rope
TYPES OF LADDERS
Woodent Ladders – are recommended for use where the ladder may come incontact with electrical services or if
required by the client as specified in their requirements for performing work on their site. This wwill include
stepladders, rung type, or platform ladders. This does not cover Job Made Ladders. These ladders must meet the
requirements of ANSI 14.1-1982.
Metal Ladders – Are not to be used where contact with energized electrical sources will cause a hazard to the
user. These ladders must meet the requirements of ANSI A1 4.2 – 1982.

Page 609
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
Fiberglass Ladeders – If fiberglass ladders are used, care must be taken to assure contact with an electrical source
will not cause an electrovution hazard. These ladders will have non-conducting side rails and non conductive
footing where the user could contact exposed and energized electrical sources, except as provided in 29 CFR
1926.951. These ladders must meet the requirements of ANSI A14.5-1982.
Job Made Ladders – will meet the requirements of ANSI A14.5-1979.
Fixed Ladders – Ladders permatently affixed to structures and cannot be readily moved of carried.

Page 610
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A ladder with an out-of-date inspection will be considered defective and will not be used until the ladder is
inspected and coded. When a defective ladder is found, it will be tagged with a “Danger Do Not Use” tag and
removed from service immediately. The ladder will be repaired if possible of if it cannot be repaired will be
destroyed. Improvised repairs will not be made. Ladders that are defective and cannot be repaired shall not be
provided or given away to anyone for personal use. When a ladder has been repaired for reuse, it will be
inspected and coded before being released for use on the job site.
 Manufactured ladders shall be industrial Grade Type I at a minimum.

 Portable ladders (manufactrured) will not be spliced, together, or fastned in any way, to provide longer
sections unless they are specifically designed for such use. Manufactured ladders shall not be modified in
any way. Do not disassemble an extension ladder and use the top portion separately.
 Ladders shall be maintained free of oil, grease and other slipping hazards.
 When a portable ladders is used for access to an upper landing surface, the ladder side rails shall extend
three feet above the upper landing surface to which the ladder issued to gain access. The ladder must be
secured at the top or a person designated to support the ladder or both. Do not stand on the ladder at or
above the point of support.
 Non-self supporting ladders shall be used at an angle such that the horizontal distance from the top
support to the foot of the ladder is approximately one quarter of the working length of the ladder.
 Ladders shall not be moved, extended or shifted while occupied. The top or top step of a stepladder shall
not be ued as a step.
 Ladders shall be used only on level and stable surfaces unless secured to prevent accidental displacement.
They should not be placed on surfaces that are slippery or would cause accidental displacement.
 A ladder shall be used only for its intended purpose. It shall not be used as a guy, brace, skid or ina
horizontal position as a runway, skid, platform or scaffold.
 Ladders shall not be placed in front of doors opening towards the ladder unless the door is blocked,
locked or guareded to prevent the door from impacting the ladder. When using a ladder in isles or other
areas where travel is heavy, the area should be barricaded or have an attendant present to keep traffic
away from the area of the ladder being used.
 Ladders will not be placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases to obtain additional hights.
 Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level, and uniformly spaced, when the ladder is in position
for use.
 Ladders shall not be loaded beyond the maximum intedned load for which they were built, nor beyone
the manufacturers rated capacity.
 When ascending or desending, the user will face the aldder and use both hands. If material must be
handled or carried up the ladder a lift rope will be used. If material must be handled or carried up the
ladder a rope will be used. Carrying material up a ladder could cause an employee to lose balance and fall.
 Unless designed for use by more than one person, (using on both sides of a ladder) only one person shall
be allowed to use a ladder. If both sides are used they must be designed for use without climbing on
bracing.
 Adjustment of extension ladders will only be made by the user when standing a the base of the ladder, so
that the user may observe when the locks are properly engaged.

Page 611
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
 Extension ladders should always be erected so that the upper secion is resting on the bottom section of
the ladder.
 A 3/8 inch by 6 foot long rope will be for securing the ladder. The rope will be permantntly attached at
the second rung from the top of the ladder to all single in such a manner as to let it swivel front to rear
and side to side. Most new stepladders have a place designed for this rope to be attached.
 On two section extension ladders, the minimum overlap for the two sections in use shall be as follows:
Size of Ladder (feet) Overlap (feet)

Up to and including 36” 3 feet
Over 36’ up to 48’ 4 feet
Over 48’ not recommended for use
 Fixed ladders are provided by the client, for use by ABG personnel. Useage fo these ladders will be in
compliance with ABG policy, 29 CFR 1926.500 and CFR 1926.1053 of the OSHA Construction Standards.
 ABG personnel will never, even in emergency conditions, use the cage on a fixed ladders to ascend or
descend.

Page 612
ABG
LADDER SAFETY
√ - Place a check mark in the column to show approved.

X - Place an X in the column to indicate failure to pass inspection.
N/A - Place N/A in column if it does not apply.
Ladder Ladder Rungs Sides Feet Spreader Screws Clean Proper Inspectors Signature Date
Id # Type Bars Bolts Operation
Copyright © 2012, ABG. All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental
ABG
LEAD & LEAD AWARENESS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................589
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 589
Application..............................................................................................................................................................589
Action Level....................................................................................................................................................589
Aerosols.........................................................................................................................................................589
Baseline..........................................................................................................................................................589
Biological Monitoring.....................................................................................................................................589
Chelation........................................................................................................................................................589
Competent Person.........................................................................................................................................590
Exposure Assessment.....................................................................................................................................590
Objective Data...............................................................................................................................................590
PAPR...............................................................................................................................................................590
Personal Air Samples......................................................................................................................................590
Quality Information........................................................................................................................................590
Relevant Information.....................................................................................................................................590
PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS (PEL)............................................................................................................590
Requirements.....................................................................................................................................................591
Initial Determination..........................................................................................................................................591
Employee Exposure Assessment (EEA)...............................................................................................................591
Personal Air Samples..........................................................................................................................................591
Positive EEA Results............................................................................................................................................592
Inconclusive EEA Results....................................................................................................................................592
Negative EEA Results..........................................................................................................................................593
Employee Notification........................................................................................................................................593
Observation of Monitoring.................................................................................................................................594
Management of Change.....................................................................................................................................594
Methods of Compliance.....................................................................................................................................594
Written Compliance Programs............................................................................................................................594
Biological Monitoring.........................................................................................................................................596
Employee Placement for Medical Reasons.........................................................................................................597
Return to Work Criteria......................................................................................................................................597
Training...................................................................................................................................................................597
Signs ..............................................................................................................................................................598
Recordkeeping........................................................................................................................................................598
EEA ..............................................................................................................................................................598
Employee Placement for Medical Reasons.........................................................................................................599

Page 614
ABG
REFERENCES...........................................................................................................................................................599
ATTACHMENTS.......................................................................................................................................................600

Page 615
ABG
Purpose
This procedure provides minimum requirements for the protection of personnel engaged in operations where
exposure to inorganic lead, lead compounds, or organic lead soaps above the action level can reasonably be
expected.
Scope
This procedure defines what constitutes exposure to lead and medical, training, and record keeping requirements.
Application
This procedure applies globally to ABG and its subcontractors.
Definitions
Action Level
An airborne concentration of lead, without regard to the use of respirators, of thirty (30) micrograms per cubic
meter of air (30 µg/m3) calculated as an eight (8)-hour time-weighted average (TWA).
Aerosols
Airborne dust, mists, fumes, or vapors.
Baseline
Medical condition of an employee prior to performing work where potential exposure may occur.
Biological Monitoring
Blood sampling and analyses for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels performed by or under the supervision of a
licensed physician. The accuracy of the analyses shall be plus or minus fifteen percent (±15%) or six (6)
micrograms per deciliter 6 µg/dl, whichever is greater, with a confidence level of ninety-five percent (95%). A
laboratory approved by the oversight agency shall conduct analyses. Blood levels at or above forty (40) µg/dl shall
require immediate action to reduce employee exposure.

Page 616
ABG
Chelation
A medical treatment in which a drug that is attracted to metals (such as lead) is infused into a patient’s vein. The
drug binds to the metal in the blood, and both are excreted from the kidney as urine.
Competent Person
One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable lead hazards in the surroundings or working conditions
and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Exposure Assessment
Determination if any employee is exposed to lead at or above the action level.
Objective Data
Information demonstrating that a particular product or material containing lead or a specific process, operation or
activity involving lead cannot release lead aerosols (dust, vapors, or fumes) in concentrations at or above the
action level under any expected conditions. Examples include industry-wide studies or laboratory product test
results.
PAPR
Powered Air Purifying Respirator
Personal Air Samples

Time weighted average samples collected for at least six (7) hours, within twelve (12”) inches (0.31 meters) of the
employee's nose. Samples must meet the quality information requirements.
Quality Information
Information gathered following prudent industrial hygiene protocol. Air, bulk, and wipe sample results must be
accurate to not less than plus or minus twenty-five percent (±25%) with a confidence level of ninety-five percent
(95%).
Relevant Information
Information gathered from industry-wide sources representing workplace conditions closely resembling the
processes, types of materials, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions in the operation.

Page 617
ABG
PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS (PEL)

Fifty (50) micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3) calculated as an eight (8)-hour TWA (time weighted average). If
the employee works a shift longer than eight (8)-hours, permissible exposure is reduced according to the
following formula:
Allowable Employee Exposure = 400  hours worked in the day
For proper exposure monitoring procedures, refer to OSHA 1926.62(d) or the appropriate citation for the country
where the work is performed.
Requirements
Initial Determination
Each project/site shall determine if any employee may reasonably be expected to be exposed to lead at or above
the action level. The determination shall be conducted as if the employee(s) were not wearing a respirator.
Methodologies used to make this determination shall be documented in writing and kept in the project/site files.
The determination shall address the following topics at a minimum.
- There must be a written request to the client asking for information on the location of lead-based paints
and coatings, elemental lead components, and the use of lead or lead compounds in the client’s
operation(s).
- Test all painted or coated surfaces for the presence of lead where operations may create lead aerosols.
Examples of such operations include, but are not limited to, cutting, welding, abrasive blasting, sanding,
and heating.
Employee Exposure Assessment (EEA)
If the Initial Determination indicates the presence of lead in areas where operations are to be performed, an EEA
shall be conducted. The EEA shall consist of the following items.
- Written record of the following:

o each and every job classification on a project;
o date the initial determination was made for each job classification and a listing of the objective data, if
any, used in making the determination;
o name and Personnel/ID Number of each employee in that job classification; and
o the date, sample number(s), and result(s) of personal air samples collected on that employee.
Personal Air Samples – Time weighted average samples collected for at least seven (7) hours, within twelve (12”)
inches (0.31meters) of the employee’s nose. Samples must meet the quality information requirements.

Page 618
ABG
- Gathering objective data, observations, other information, or performing calculations, which would
indicate employee exposure.
- Obtaining copies of any previous measurements of airborne lead concentrations collected while
performing similar operations under similar conditions.
- Reviewing employee complaints of symptoms, which may be attributable to exposure to lead.
- Reviewing available and feasible engineering and work practice controls, which may reduce employee
exposures.
The EEA shall be conducted for each job classification performing tasks, or requiring proximity to operations, that
may create lead aerosols.
A record documenting the accuracy and relevancy of objective data used in assessing employee exposure shall be
kept in the project files throughout the project and for thirty (30) years after project completion.
The information gathered during the EEA can be positive, inconclusive, or negative for the likelihood that an
employee will be exposed to lead aerosols above the action level.
Positive EEA Results
If the EEA results indicate that job classifications are likely to be exposed to lead aerosols above the action level,
appropriate controls, as specified in the Methods of Compliance section of this standard, shall be used to reduce
potential employee exposures.
Inconclusive EEA Results
Information gathered during the EEA can be inconclusive either due to insufficient relevancy or quality. If the EEA
is inconclusive for job classifications performing any of the following tasks where lead is present:
- manual demolition of structures;

- manual scraping or sanding;
- heat gun applications;
- cleaning power tools equipped with dust collection systems; or
- any other task that may generate aerosols.
The following shall be provided at NO COST for affected employees:
- half face, air purifying, negative pressure respirators equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
filter cartridges. If the lead is causing eye or facial skin irritation, a full face piece respirator shall be
required. If additional contaminants are involved in the tasks, appropriate compound filter cartridges
shall be used;

Page 619
ABG
- appropriate coveralls or similar full-body work clothing;

- appropriate gloves, hats, and shoes made of a non-permeable material or disposable shoe coverlets;
Note: Leather shoes cannot be decontaminated. If they are worn during these tasks without coverlets,
they shall be disposed of along with the other lead-contaminated wastes.
- clean change areas equipped with separate storage facilities for protective work clothing and for street
clothing which prevent cross contamination;
- hand washing facilities;
- baseline biological monitoring; and
- training in accordance with the training portion of this manual.
Note: Full face piece PAPRs shall be provided to employees, instead of half face respirators, upon
request.
If the EEA is inconclusive for job classifications performing any of the following tasks where lead is present:
- using lead-containing mortar;

- lead burning;
- rivet busting;
- cleaning power tools not equipped with dust collection systems;
- cleanup activities where dry expendable abrasives were used; or
- removal or moving of abrasive blasting enclosures.
All items previously described shall be provided for affected employees, except that minimum respiratory
protection shall be either:
- loose fitting hood or helmet powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) with HEPA filter cartridges; or
- loose fitting hood or helmet supplied air respirator operated in continuous-flow mode.
If the EEA is inconclusive for job classifications performing any of the following tasks where lead is present:
- abrasive blasting;
- welding;
- cutting or sawing; or
- torch burning;
then all items previously described shall be provided for affected employees, except that minimum respiratory
protection shall be either:
- full face piece, air-purifying respirator with HEPA filter cartridges;

- PAPR with HEPA filter cartridges;
- half face or full face piece supplied air respirator operated in a continuous-flow mode; or
- full face piece, self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) operated in demand mode.

Page 620
ABG
Respiratory protection shall be used until at least two (2) consecutive personal air samples, collected at least
seven (7) days apart by a competent person, are analyzed and found to be below the action level.
Collection of personal air samples shall be collected first on those employees reasonably believed to have the
highest potential exposure. If these first air samples are found to be below the action level, further samples shall
only be collected if there is no objective data to indicate that other tasks present lower exposure potential.
Negative EEA Results
Where objective data is available to indicate that a job classification cannot be exposed to airborne
concentrations of lead at or above the action level, the data will be kept with the project files for thirty (30) years.
Employee Notification
Within five (5) working days after completion of the EEA, the project shall notify each employee, in writing, of the
results of the EEA for that employee's job classification.
Whenever personal air samples or biological monitoring samples are collected, the affected employee(s) shall be
notified, in writing, within five (5) working days after receipt of the sample results.
Whenever area samples are collected, the results of the sample analyses shall be posted in a conspicuous area
within five (5) working days after receipt of the analyses results.
The project shall make available to employees, or their designated representative, the opportunity to:
- observe air monitoring conducted to comply with this standard;

- receive an explanation of the monitoring procedures being followed; and
- if requested in writing, receive a copy of the results obtained within five (5) working days of receipt.
If such observations require the observer to enter an area where respirators or other personal protective
equipment (PPE) is required, the project shall provide that PPE if, and only if, the observer is medically fit to wear
the PPE and has complied with all other applicable safety and health procedures.
Management of Change

Page 621
ABG
Whenever there has been a change of equipment, process, control, personnel, or a new task that may result in
employee exposure at or above the action level, an EEA shall be conducted encompassing any new tasks and/or
job classifications.
Methods of Compliance
Methods used to reduce potential employee exposure to lead shall be implemented in the following order of
priority.
- Engineering controls such as isolation, ventilation, or abatement.

- Work practice controls, such as employee rotation or specific procedures. Wherever all feasible
engineering and work practice controls that have been instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee
exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit; then, in addition to these controls, respiratory
protection shall be used. Respiratory protection alone shall not be an optional method for reducing
potential employee exposures. Engineering controls and/or work practice controls must be implemented
first.
Written Compliance Programs
Prior to the commencement of field activities, the project shall produce and implement a Written Compliance
Program that complies with this standard and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62 (or the standard for the country where work
occurs). The Written Compliance Program shall be updated every six (6) months and shall be made available to all
affected employees or their designated representative(s).
The Written Compliance Program shall, as a minimum, include:
- procedures to be followed to conduct the initial determination;

- procedures to be followed to conduct the EEA;
- a description of each task which may produce lead aerosols including:
o equipment used;
o lead-containing materials impacted;
o number of employees who may be exposed;
o work practices to be used; and
o employee responsibilities during task.
- engineering controls to be used including objective data to justify their use;

- a report of the technologies considered and discounted;
- available air monitoring data;
- detailed schedule for implementation of the Program including documentation such as purchase orders
and contracts;
- PPE, if necessary;
- housekeeping procedures;

Page 622
ABG
- hygiene facilities and their usage;

- relevant work practices;
- administrative control schedule, if used to control employee exposure;
- description of arrangements made to inform other contractors, if any, about potential lead exposure and
contractor responsibilities;
- project, materials, and equipment inspection schedules; and
- the name of contractor's or project's/site’s competent person.
Medical examinations shall be provided by the project/site to all employees who may be exposed above the
action level for more than thirty (30) days in any twelve (12) month period.
The project/site shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each
examination or consultation. Payment by the project for the second medical opinion is conditioned upon:
- the employee informing Project Management in writing, of his/her intent to seek a second opinion; and
- the employee initiating steps to make an appointment with the second physician.
Both of these actions must be completed within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the initial physician's written
opinion or employee receipt of the previously mentioned notification, whichever is later.
All required medical surveillance programs must be performed by or under the supervision or direction of a
licensed physician in a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring. The employee must be
notified in writing prior to therapeutic or diagnostic chelation.
Biological Monitoring
Biological monitoring shall be conducted for all employees who may be exposed to lead aerosols at or above the
action level. Employees who may be exposed for less than thirty (30) days shall receive baseline biological
monitoring only.
Employees who may be exposed for more than thirty (30) days shall be placed in a medical surveillance program.
The project/site shall communicate the availability of biological monitoring available every two (2) months for the
first six (6) months and once every six (6) months thereafter until the employee no longer has a potential lead
exposure.

Page 623
ABG
Employee Placement for Medical Reasons
Remove from work (which may present an exposure to lead aerosols) any employee whose:
- periodic and follow-up blood sampling tests indicate blood lead levels are at or above 50 µg/dl, or;
- medical examination or written physician's opinion indicates that the employee has a detected physical
condition which places the employee at increased health risk to exposure.
Where a medical examination or written physician's opinion recommends special protective measures or
limitations on an employee, the project/site shall implement appropriate additional engineering controls, work
practices, or PPE that meets the intent of the recommendation.
Return to Work Criteria
Where an employee was removed from work for high blood lead levels, the employee may return to his/her
former job classification when two (2) blood-sampling tests indicate that the employee's blood lead level is below
40 µg/dl.
Where an employee was removed from work for a detected physical condition which places the employee at
increased health risk to exposure, the employee may return to his/her former job classification when a
subsequent medical examination and a written physician's opinion finds that the employee no longer has the
condition.
Where a detected physical condition placed the employee at an increased health risk, the employee may return to
his/her former job classification when a subsequent medical examination and a written physician's opinion finds
that the special protective measures or limitations are no longer needed.
Training
ABG will provide refresher training annually for each employee who is subject to lead exposure at or above the
action level on any day.
Prior to initial job assignment an employee shall train in the following:
- the contents of the OSHA Lead in Construction standard (29 CFR 1926.62) and its appendices (if in U.S.;
otherwise applicable in-country standard);
- the specific nature of the operations which could result in exposure to lead above the action level;
- the purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, limitations and health effects of respirators;

Page 624
ABG
- the purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program, the placement of employees for
medical reasons, health effects of lead with particular attention given to the reproductive and teratogenic
effects of lead exposure;
- the engineering and work practice controls associated with each employee’s job classification;
- relevant good work practices;
- the contents of the written compliance program;
- instructions that chelating agents should not be used except under the direct supervision of a licensed
physician; and
- The employee's right to access records and documents including:
o a copy of the Written Compliance Program;
o the Lead in Construction standard; and
o all other materials relating to the employee information and training program.
Signs
The project/site shall post signs, illuminated and cleaned as needed, stating the following in each work area where
an employee exposure to lead aerosols may be above the PEL:
“WARNING LEAD WORK AREA - POISON - NO SMOKING OR EATING”
Recordkeeping
EEA
The project shall establish and maintain accurate records. The project shall make all records kept in accordance
with this standard available to employees or their designated representative upon written request. These records
shall be kept with the project files.
- documentation stipulated in the EEA section of this standard;

- records of all monitoring and other objective data used in conducting the EEA;
- exposure monitoring records including:
o date sample collected;
o sample number;
o sample duration;
o sample location;
o name of employee sampled;
o Personnel/ID Number of employee;
o job classification of employee;
o names of all other employees the sample is intended to represent;
o sampling procedure followed;

Page 625
ABG
o sample analysis results;

o environmental variables that could affect interpretation of sample results such as temperature;
o humidity and barometric pressure;
o sampling equipment make, model and serial number; and
o sampling equipment calibration records.
The project/site shall maintain the following records for each affected employee. These records shall be kept with
the project files:
- documentation stipulated in the medical surveillance section of this standard;

- name, Personnel/ID Number, and job classification;
- a copy of physician's written opinions, if any;
- results of any air sampling results sent to the employee’s physician; and
- any employee medical complaints or observed symptoms related to lead exposure.
The project shall also maintain or require the physician to maintain the following medical records:
- a copy of the medical examination results including the employee's medical and work history;
- a description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or guidelines used to interpret the
test results or references to that information; and
- a copy of the results of any biological monitoring.
Employee Placement for Medical Reasons
The project shall maintain the following records for each affected employee. These records shall be kept with the
project files for thirty (30) years:
- name and Personnel/ID Number of the affected employee;

- the date of each placement change;
- the date the employee was returned to former job classification;
- a brief explanation of how each placement change was accomplished; and
- a statement of whether or not each placement change was due to elevated blood lead levels.

Page 626
ABG
REFERENCES
Forms:
000.653.F0135 Employee Exposure Assessment for Lead
Non-ABG Documents:
29 CFR 1926.62(d) Lead – Exposure Assessment

Page 627
ABG
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01 Initial Determination for Employee Lead Exposure
Attachment 02 Employee Exposure Assessment
Attachment 03 Sample Form Letter

Page 628
ABG
HAZARDOUS ENERGY ISOLATION - LOTO
LOTO - HAZARDOUS ENERGY ISOLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................601
SCOPE603
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................603
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................603
1.0 PRINCIPLES OF LOCKOUT/TAGOUT..............................................................................................................606
3.0 AUTHORIZED WORKER LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCESS..................................................................................607
3.1 Machine-Specific Energy Control Process................................................................................................608
3.2 Authorized Worker Lockout/Tagout Application.....................................................................................608
3.3 Lock Cutting and Removal.......................................................................................................................609
4.0 CONTROLLING ORGANIZATION LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCESS.....................................................................609
4.1 Energy Control Requirements..................................................................................................................609
A. Lock and Tag Logbook.............................................................................................................................609
B. Locks and Tags.........................................................................................................................................609
C. Lockboxes................................................................................................................................................610
D. Locks and Danger – Do Not Operate Tags...............................................................................................610
E. Isolating Devices that cannot be Locked..................................................................................................610
F. Caution Tags............................................................................................................................................611
G. Determining the Need for Lockouts/Tagouts..........................................................................................611
4.2 Preparation..............................................................................................................................................612
A. Preparing, Reviewing, and Documenting Lockouts/Tagouts...................................................................612
B. Preparing Lockouts/Tagouts....................................................................................................................613
C. Performing a Technical Review...............................................................................................................613
D. Documenting Lockout/Tagout................................................................................................................613
4.3 Installation...............................................................................................................................................613
A. Lock/Tag Installation...............................................................................................................................613
B. Verifying Lockouts/Tagouts.....................................................................................................................614
C. Performing Safe-Condition Checks for Lockouts/Tagouts.......................................................................614
D. Notifying Authorized Workers................................................................................................................614
4.4 Removal...................................................................................................................................................614
A.Lock/Tag Removal.......................................................................................................................................614
B.Approving Removal of Lock(s)/Tag(s).........................................................................................................615
C.Removing Lock(s)/Tag(s).............................................................................................................................615
D.Verifying Lock/Tag Removal.......................................................................................................................615
5.0 SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM...........................................................................................................................615
5.1 Lock and Tag Surveillance Program.........................................................................................................615
5.2 Periodic Inspection (Program Review).....................................................................................................617
6.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................617
All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental MS

Page 629
ABG
6.1 Affected Worker......................................................................................................................................617

6.2 Authorized Worker..................................................................................................................................617
6.3 Controlling Organization Lockout/Tagout Administrator........................................................................618
6.4 Refresher Training...................................................................................................................................618
7.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................618
8.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................618

Page 630
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the requirements for locking and tagging equipment and systems to protect personnel,
property, and the environment from events that may be caused by the unexpected release of hazardous energy
or materials, the unexpected startup of machines or equipment, or the unexpected release of stored energy.
Note: Examples of hazardous energy include electrical, mechanical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, chemical, radiation, and thermal energies, as well as various forms
of potential (stored) energy, such as in springs, compressed gases, or suspended
objects.
SCOPE
 Principles of Lockout/Tagout
 Authorized Worker Lockout/Tagout Process
 Authorized Worker Lockout/Tagout Application
 Lock Cutting and Removal
 Controlling Organization Lockout/Tagout Process
 Energy Control Requirements
 Preparation
 Installation
 Removal
 Surveillance Program
 Lock and Tag Surveillance Program
 Periodic Inspection (Program Review)
 Training
 Affected Worker
 Authorized Worker
 Controlling Organization Lockout/Tagout Administrator
 Refresher Training
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Affected Worker – A person whose job requires him or her to be in an area where equipment or system(s) have
been deenergized under the lockout/tagout program. The affected worker cannot perform work under a
lockout/tagout.
Authorized Worker – A person who locks out and tags out machines, equipment, or systems to perform servicing
or maintenance on that machine or equipment. This person must have completed the mandatory training to
qualify as an authorized worker. Only an authorized worker installs and removes his or her own lock(s) and
“Danger Tag(s)” as required by this program.

Page 631
ABG
Boundary – The safe limits of a given lockout/tagout as determined by those components that are configured to
provide a safe condition where the work is to be performed.
Controlling Organization (CO) – The organization or individual responsible for the implementation and
documentation of the lockout/tagout process, including identifying the hazards, controlling the boundaries,
understanding the impacts, and directing the authorized workers. The designated controlling organization may be
a contractor responsible to install a system or equipment; the facility owner or manger; or the construction
management contractor. The Project/Site Manager designates which organization(s) or individual(s) acts as the
CO.
Controlling Organization Lockout/Tagout Administrator – The CO trained worker responsible to perform the
duties of the controlling organization. These duties include performing the technical review, providing approvals,
completing appropriate documentation, and installing/removing tags.
Danger Tag – The tag that is used by authorized workers to perform authorized worker lockout/tagout. This tag is
for the protection of the individual employee.
Danger – Do Not Operate Tag: The tag that is used by the controlling organization to set the boundaries for the
purpose of hazardous energy control. No work may be performed under this tag unless an Authorized Worker
Danger Tag has also been installed.
Energy Source – Any source of hazardous energy or materials. Sources include electrical, mechanical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, chemical, radiation, and thermal energies; as well as various forms of potential energy such as that
stored in springs, compressed gases, or in suspended objects (gravitational).
Isolating Device – A device that prevents the transmission or release of hazardous energy or hazardous materials.
Examples include restraint blocks, electrical circuit breakers, disconnect switches, slide gates, slip blinds, or line
valves. For lockout/tagout purposes, isolating devices that provide visible indication of the device's position are
desirable.
Lockbox – A device that is capable of being locked in which the key(s) for the energy control boundary lock(s) is
stored.
Lock(s) – A device that requires a key to operate (not a combination lock) and holds an isolating device in the
required position for the protection of employees. The lock(s) used for control of hazardous energy must be
singularly identified by color, shape, or size. This lock(s) shall be the only device used for controlling hazardous
energy and shall not be used for other purposes.
Lockout Device – A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock, either key or combination type, to hold an
energy-isolating device in the safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Included are
blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.
Lockout/Tagout – Installation of lock(s) and tag(s) on the isolating device(s) to ensure that work can be performed
safely. The lock(s) and tag(s) ensure that the isolating device(s) and the equipment or system(s) they isolate or
control cannot be operated until the lock(s) and tag(s) are removed.
Overlock/Overtag – Lock(s) and Danger Tag(s) installed by an authorized worker on top of the controlling
organization’s Danger – Do Not Operate Tag(s).

Page 632
ABG
Safe-Condition Check – The inspection or test of a system or component performed by the controlling
organization to ensure that the hazardous energy or materials are controlled adequately to prevent injury or
accident.
Note: This is a mandatory step to ensure safety for employees.
Servicing and Maintenance – Workplace activities such as constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting,
inspecting, modifying, maintaining, or servicing machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication,
cleaning, or unjamming of machines or equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee
may be exposed to the unexpected energization or startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy. This
applies to all employees regardless of job title (operator, researcher, maintenance crafts, engineer, or
construction craft).
Simple Lockout/Tagout – A lockout/tagout activity that meets all of the following (also refer to Practice
000.653.1302, Permit to Work):
1. The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or re-accumulation of
stored energy after shutdown that could endanger employees.
2. The machine or equipment has a single energy source that can be readily identified and
isolated.
3. The isolation and locking out of that energy source that completely de-energizes and
deactivates the machine or equipment.
4. The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during service or
maintenance.
5. A single lockout device achieves a locked out condition.
6. The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized worker performing the
service or maintenance.
7. The service or maintenance does not create hazards for other employees.
8. The employer, in using this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected activation
or re-energization of the machine or equipment during service or maintenance.
Tag – Danger Tag or a Danger – Do Not Operate Tag and a means of attachment, which can be securely fastened
to an energy-isolating device in accordance with this program, to indicate that the energy-isolating device and the
equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the tag is removed.

Page 633
ABG
Tagout – The installation of a danger tag on an isolating device to prevent the operation of the component or
equipment when operation could cause personal injury or death, and to indicate that the energy-isolating device
and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tag is removed. A tag is used by itself only
when the isolating device is physically incapable of being locked.
Tagout Authorization Form (TAF): The controlling organization’s form used to document the implementation of
the lockout/tagout process. When used, a copy of this form is given to the authorized workers to communicate
the work scope, the hazards involved, the isolation methods, and other information specific to the work
assignment.
Work Assignment – An activity an authorized worker performs under a lockout/tagout. The time
period required to complete the work assignment may be a single shift, or part of a shift, or may
extend beyond a work shift or several work shifts. The time period for the work assignment may
be specified by the controlling organization.
1.0 PRINCIPLES OF LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
The following 14 principles provide the fundamental basis for successful employee protection while performing
hazardous energy control/lockout-tagout:
 Each authorized worker will install his/her personal lock(s) and Danger Tag(s) before starting
work and will remove them when leaving that work assignment. The personal lock and
Authorized Worker Danger Tag signifies that an authorized worker is working on a
component.
 The Authorized Worker Danger Tag is for the exclusive use of the authorized worker identified
on that Danger Tag. Information on the tag must include the following:
 Name and telephone number of the authorized worker who installed the Danger Tag
(use permanent ink).
 Name and telephone number of the authorized worker’s supervisor.
 Name of the authorized worker’s organization.
 A safe-condition check is always required.
 No one will remove a lockout or tagout device when an unsafe condition exists until that
condition has been made safe or another lockout device has been installed. No one will
operate any equipment on which a lockout/tagout device is installed.
 No authorized worker will install a lock/tag on any system without notifying the controlling
organization, unless the work control system specifically addresses this issue. This is to
ensure the controlling organization knows the status of its equipment/systems.
 Only keyed locks are authorized for lockout.
 The authorized worker will maintain control of the key(s) for any lock(s) he/she applies. If
a backup key exists, it is locked in a safe location away from the worksite and controlled by
the authorized worker’s supervisor to use only in extreme circumstances.
 Locks and Authorized Worker Danger Tags can only be removed by the worker who originally
installed them. When the authorized worker is not on site, the device(s) may be removed
under the direction of the authorized worker’s management after all reasonable efforts to
reach the worker have been taken.

Page 634
ABG
A phone conversation with the original authorized worker is considered adequate when documented. If contact
with the original authorized worker was not possible, he/she must be informed of the lock/tag removal upon
returning to work.
 New designs include isolating devices for machines or equipment that accept a lock
when the machines or equipment are being replaced, repaired, renovated or
modified, or when new equipment is being installed.
 When an Authorized Worker Danger Tag(s) used in a radiological or hazardous
chemical control zone cannot be released, it must be destroyed or defaced to
prevent reuse and disposed of in accordance with appropriate disposal procedures.
 Appropriate training and annual refresher training will be provided and documented.
 The execution of the energy control and lockout/tagout processes to assess
employee understanding and compliance will be documented in an annual review
and will include interviews with affected and authorized workers.
 Compliance with this hazardous energy control program and its requirements is
mandatory. To maintain consistency, use only the Danger - Do Not Operate Tag
(Controlling Organization) (Form 000.653.F0281); Tagout Index (Form
000.653.F0279); Tagout Authorization Form (TAF) (Form 000.653.F0278); Authorized
Worker Danger Tag (Form 000.653.F0280); and Caution Tag (Controlling
Organization) (Form 000.653.F0282).
 Tags used for hazardous energy control will not be used for any other purpose. For
example, the Authorized Worker Danger Tag and the controlling organization Danger
– Do Not Operate Tag cannot be used to identify equipment as “out of service” or
“defective.” “Out of service” or “defective equipment” tags must be substantially
different.
Each employer will supply uniquely identified locks and associated hardware for use by their authorized workers.
The locks may be issued on a permanent basis or on an as-needed basis.
If an isolating device has the physical capability of being locked out, it will be locked out and an Authorized
Worker Danger Tag installed with each lock. If the isolating device cannot be physically locked out, it will be
tagged out.
If an isolating device cannot be locked, then protection equivalent to that provided by locks must be established
and a tag(s) will be used to ensure that the equivalent protection is maintained.
Note: Examples of measures that could be used to provide protection equivalent to locks
and prevent a system from being energized include removing an isolating circuit
element or fuse, blocking switch controls, opening extra circuit disconnects, and
removing valve handles.
Note: When a lock cannot be applied along with a tag, the tagout devices, including
their means of attachment, must be durable and substantial enough to prevent
inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout attachment devices are of a non-

Page 635
ABG
reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with

a minimum unlocking strength of not less than 50 pounds force (222.4 newtons)
and having the general design and basic characteristics of being at least
equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.
Safe-condition checks will be performed by the authorized worker BEFORE commencing work on the
system/component.
Pieces of equipment will not be removed from their installed location with locks or tags attached. If a
locked/tagged component must be removed (such as during demolition, replacement, or rework), then reset or
readjust the isolation boundaries so that any locks and tags may be properly cleared from the component that is
to be removed.
Locks that are used for control of hazardous energy will be singularly identified by color, shape, or size; these locks
will not be used for any other purpose.
Lockout devices will be used that are substantial enough to prevent removal without excessive force (bolt cutters)
or unusual techniques (metal cutting tools).
3.0 AUTHORIZED WORKER LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCESS
The method described below will be used to achieve authorized worker lockout/tagout. The controlling
organization determines the method of application depending on factors such as complexity of the work,
complexity of the system, number and types of the energy sources, number of authorized workers, and the
duration of the work project.
Authorized Worker Danger Tag(s) and lock(s) will be applied in one of the following three ways:
 As an overlock/overtag of the controlling organization’s lock/tag
 By itself, using a TAF or a machine-specific energy control process (ECP)
 By itself, without a TAF or ECP if it meets the criteria of Table 1 (page 12)
Note: The permit to work process, if in use, will authorize “simple” lockout/tagout activities when
a TAF is not required.
3.1 Machine-Specific Energy Control Process
A machine-specific ECP must be developed when:

 The machine has more than 1 energy source, and
 The machine is purchased, leased, rented, or provided by the client and used by ABG
or a ABG-managed contractor, subcontractor, or lower-tier contractor.
Form 000.653.F0295, Machine-Specific Energy Control Process, is used to analyze the hazards and to document
the ECP.

Page 636
ABG
3.2 Authorized Worker Lockout/Tagout Application
The controlling organization’s TAF or machine-specific ECP will specify how and where the authorized worker’s
lock/tag is applied.
The authorized worker will perform the following:
 Obtain from the controlling organization a copy of the TAF that identifies the work
scope, the hazards involved, the isolation methods, and other information specific to
the task.
Note: A TAF is required unless the criteria of Table 1 are met. Table 1 is used at
the discretion of the controlling organization.
Note: A “simple lockout/tagout” can be authorized using only the permit to work
process (refer to Practice 000.653.1302 and section 4.1G of this practice).
 Inform the controlling organization.

 Install Authorized Worker Danger Tag(s) and lock(s) on each energy-isolating device
for the component to be worked on.
 Personally check that no hazardous energy exists as follows:
 Before starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked and/or
tagged out, verify the isolation and de-energization of energy-isolating device
for the machine or equipment involved in the work scope.
 Perform or witness a field walkdown on the identified boundary each time an
Authorized Worker Danger Tag is hung, to ensure proper isolation specific to the
equipment, machinery, or process undergoing servicing or maintenance.
 Perform the assigned work.
 Remove their Authorized Worker Danger Tag(s) and lock(s) and inform the
controlling organization that their assignment is complete.
 Complete the appropriate documentation.
3.3 Lock Cutting and Removal
Refer to Attachment 01.

4.0 CONTROLLING ORGANIZATION LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCESS
The controlling organization will ensure that locks and Danger – Do Not Operate Tags or Authorized Worker
Danger Tags are used for personal safety when employees are performing maintenance, service, repair,
construction, or demolition.
4.1 Energy Control Requirements
The controlling organization will perform the following:

Page 637
ABG
 If the permit to work process is in use, obtain a Permit to Work (Form

000.653.F0181) in accordance with Practice 000.653.1302.
 Ensure the isolating boundaries have been properly identified, documented, and
verified through the use of accepted as-built drawings, specific written procedures,
or routine walk-downs and are included as a part of each specific work package
instructions.
 Evaluate the impact of the isolating boundaries with respect to work scope,
employee safety, facility operability, configuration control, public and environmental
protection, and compliance with safety requirements of the system.
A. Lock and Tag Logbook
The controlling organization maintains a lock and tag logbook to provide summary information about lockouts and
tagouts. This information, as a minimum, includes a Tagout Index, TAFs for active lockout/tagouts, and
lockout/tagout surveillances.
B. Locks and Tags
The controlling organization allows the use of tags and attachment devices that are capable of withstanding the
environment they are exposed to for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.
C. Lockboxes
Lockboxes are an option that can be used for single or multiple isolation points to simplify lockout/tagout or to
reduce the hazards of applying lock and tag. The principle of lockbox use is the security of the lock key(s) and
control of the key(s) by the authorized worker. The most practical location for the lockbox(es) is at the jobsite.
This allows the authorized worker to easily confirm the integrity of their lockout/tagout.
The controlling organization identifies the lockbox to the job being performed. Posting the TAF on the lockbox is
one method of meeting this requirement.
Typical situations where lockboxes may be used include the following:
 Multiple isolation points: Apply lock(s) and Danger – Do Not Operate Tag(s) to the
isolation points and place the key(s) in the lockbox. All authorized workers intending
to work on the system(s) apply their Authorized Worker Danger Tags and lock(s) to
the lockbox.
Note: The use of a lockbox does not absolve the authorized worker from
personally checking that no hazardous energy exists.
 If the isolation point may not support or accept multiple lockouts/tagouts.

 If the isolation points are in an area of radiation, chemical, or other hazards, use the
lockbox to keep the authorized workers from being exposed to the hazard.
 In areas of poor or restricted access (such as confined space), one person enters to
perform lockout/tagout and places the key(s) in the lockbox located adjacent to the
hazardous area.

Page 638
ABG
D. Locks and Danger – Do Not Operate Tags
If the controlling organization establishes control of the isolation boundaries with their locks, the organization will
use Danger – Do Not Operate Tags with locks to prevent operation of any component or equipment if operation
could cause injury or death when performing repair, service, maintenance, construction, or demolition.
If the controlling organization does not control the isolation boundaries with their locks and Danger – Do Not
Operate Tags, it may assign the authorized worker to directly install the Authorized Worker Danger Tag(s) and
lock(s) on the isolating boundaries, provided the authorized worker is qualified to use the TAF.
Note: When determining whether to control the boundaries with Danger – Do Not Operate Tags
and locks or the Authorized Worker Danger Tags and locks, the controlling organization
must consider the complexity of the system or task, the risk to the worker, and any facility
controls required.
E. Isolating Devices that cannot be Locked
If an isolating device cannot be locked, protection equivalent to that provided by locks must be established.
F. Caution Tags
Caution Tags will be used in situations where a component or system is functional but where some precaution or
item(s) of information is necessary before operating.
 DO NOT use Caution Tags for personal protection.
 DO NOT use Caution Tags for general statements or to emphasize established
operational controls (such as “Do not operate without building supervisor’s
permission”).
 Provide information about the condition that requires the Caution Tag or specific
instructions for operating the equipment.
Note: A lock may be provided with a Caution Tag for additional protection to
equipment and property.
 The controlling organization completes the appropriate documentation (for example,

TAF and Tagout Index).
G. Determining the Need for Lockouts/Tagouts
Evaluate the activity to be performed to determine the need for lockouts/tagouts (refer to the guidelines in
Attachment 02).
If a lockout/tagout is required, the controlling organization determines whether documentation is required by
using the criteria in Table 1. If all criteria in Table 1 are met:
 This would be considered a “simple” lockout/tagout activity,
 Obtain a “permit to work” in accordance with Practice 000.653.1302, and

Page 639
ABG
 Have the authorized worker apply his/her Authorized Worker Danger Tag and lock as
required in this practice.
Note: Refer to Attachment 02 for examples of group lockout/tagout methods.
Table 1
CRITERIA FOR LOCKOUT/TAGOUT WITHOUT
A TAGOUT AUTHORIZATION FORM OR ECP
The following 8 criteria must all be met to perform a lockout/tagout without a Tagout
Authorization Form (TAF).
1. The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or re-
accumulation of stored energy after shutdown that could endanger employees.
2. The machine or equipment has a single energy source that can be readily identified
and isolated.
3. The isolation and locking out of that energy source completely de-energizes and
4. The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during
6. The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized worker performing
the service or maintenance.
8. The employer, in using this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected
activation or re-energization of the machine or equipment during service or
maintenance.
4.2 Preparation
A. Preparing, Reviewing, and Documenting Lockouts/Tagouts
The controlling organization lockout/tagout administrator performs the following:

 Prepares a TAF or refers the authorized worker to the applicable machine-specific
ECP(s).
 Identifies the scope of work to be performed.
 Coordinates high-voltage electrical distribution isolation with the utility having
jurisdiction for requirements if any high-voltage system components must be
locked/tagged.
 Coordinates energy isolation that may result in impairment to fire protection systems
with the affected building manager(s) and the fire department having jurisdiction, if

Page 640
ABG
necessary, before locks and tags are installed as identified in the controlling
organization’s fire protection program.
 Coordinates with the appropriate authorized workers involved in the work to ensure
that they understand the scope of the activity, and that the proposed lockout/tagout
boundary is adequate to protect the worker.
 Identifies the lockout/tagout boundary, including the energy sources or hazardous
materials that must be isolated.
Note: Use controlled drawings, documents, and/or field walkdowns to identify all energy sources
to the equipment or system.
B. Preparing Lockouts/Tagouts
The controlling organization lockout/tagout administrator(s) also performs the following:

 Prepares the tags to be used by:
 Completing all appropriate information on the tag as required in this practice
 Ensuring tags are legible and understandable with all spaces properly completed
 Marking “N/A” in all spaces on the tag that does not apply
Note: The following actions in Section 4 are completed when a TAF is used:
C. Performing a Technical Review
 Reviews the TAF and tag as follows:

 Verifies the adequacy of the lockout/tagout with controlled drawings,
documents, and a field walkdown, as needed.
 Signs and dates the “Technical Review” block on the TAF.
D. Documenting Lockout/Tagout
 Obtains the next sequential number from the Tagout Index located in the lock and
tag logbook and completes the Tagout Index.
 When conditions for installing the locks/tags are met, signs the “Authorized By”
block of the TAF and the tag, if applicable.
4.3 Installation
A. Lock/Tag Installation
The controlling organization lockout/tagout administrator uses the TAF during the installation, verification,
safe-condition check, and removal processes described below.

Page 641
ABG
 Ensures that the component is positioned as specified in the TAF, “Required

Position/Condition.” (Proceed with the following steps for lockout/tagout
installation; repeat steps as necessary to install the required locks and tags.)
Note: If the component is not in the indicated position and you are not authorized
to change the position, consult with the authorizing management.
 Installs tags so that they do not interfere with or obscure indicators, switches, or
other control devices, but are easily seen by anyone about to operate the device.
 Installs locks for identified tags.
 Signs and dates the “Installed By” blocks on the TAF and tag as applicable.
B. Verifying Lockouts/Tagouts
 Verifies that the position and condition of the equipment or components covered by
the lockout/tagout are positioned as identified and provide full isolation.
 Signs and dates the “Verified By” block on the TAF and tag as applicable.
 Repeats the step(s) above as often as necessary to verify the installed locks and tags.
Note: If a lock or tag will prevent performing the safe-condition check, you may make the check
before installation. The safe condition must then be maintained until the lock and tag are
installed.
C. Performing Safe-Condition Checks for Lockouts/Tagouts

 Conducts an appropriate safe-condition check (see guidelines in Attachment 04).
 Initials and dates the “Safe-Condition Check” blocks on the TAF to indicate that the
safe-condition check was performed.
 Updates the “Date Installed” block of the Tagout Index and files the TAF in the lock
and tag logbook.
Note: The controlling organization must install its locks and Danger – Do Not Operate Tags (if
used) before the installation of the Authorized Worker Danger Tag and lock.
D. Notifying Authorized Workers
 Provides a copy of the TAF and continuation sheet to the authorized workers
performing the work activity. The authorized worker must install his/her lock(s) and
Danger Tag(s) over the controlling organization’s lock(s) and tag(s).
4.4 Removal

Page 642
ABG
A. Lock/Tag Removal

 Uses the TAF to remove installed lock/tags.
 Remove locks and Danger – Do Not Operate Tags only after associated Authorized
Worker Danger Tags and locks are removed and the area is cleared.
Note: If removing tags in an area where the form may become damaged or
contaminated (such as radiological or chemical hazard control area) use a
copy of the TAF in those areas and transfer the signatures and dates to the
original after you are out of the area.
 Determines whether removal of the lock/tag is to be partially performed (removal of

some, but not all, of the lock/tags associated with the TAF) for work suspension or
work completion.
 If partial removal is required, ensure that remaining lock/tags provide the
necessary protection for the jobs still in progress (that is, jobs for which the
“Work Completed/Date” block of the TAF has not been signed).
 Adds tags as needed to permit other tags to be removed while still meeting the
boundary isolation requirements.
 Documents the circumstances that permit tags to be removed on the TAF.
 Notifies the authorized worker of boundary changes and provides an updated
copy of the TAF, as required.
B. Approving Removal of Lock(s)/Tag(s)
 Approves removal of the locks and tags as follows:

 Ensures that conditions or circumstances requiring the /lockout/tagout no
longer apply, reviews the work scope, and performs a field walkdown.
 Reviews the system or component lineup.
 Designates the desired restoration lineup for each component.
 Informs interfacing organizations, as necessary, to establish the plant conditions
required when a lock/tag is removed.
 Signs the “Removal/Approval” block of the TAF.
C. Removing Lock(s)/Tag(s)
 Removes the designated locks and tags using the TAF.
Note: Other documentation (such as work packages, tests, or procedures) cannot

authorize the removal of locks and tags.
 Ensures that the component is repositioned as identified on the TAF, if applicable.

 Signs the “Removed By” block on the TAF.

Page 643
ABG
 When the tag is cleared, removes or restores any locks, mechanical blocking devices,
or electrical lead disconnects installed or configured by the tagout.
D. Verifying Lock/Tag Removal
 Verifies that all of the correct locks and tags were removed.
 Disposes of the removed tags as required.
 Updates the “Date Removed” block of the Tagout Index and files the TAF.
5.0 SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM
5.1 Lock and Tag Surveillance Program
The controlling organization lockout/tagout administrator performs the following or ensures the following is
performed:
 Identifies those TAFs that are to be active for 1 year or longer, and documents these
as long-term tagouts on the TAF.
 Specifies a surveillance schedule (at least once every 6 months) for these long-term
tagouts and ensures that the surveillance is performed.
Note: Long-term lockout/tagouts are those with ongoing maintenance, repair construction, or
demolition. Other processes must be employed for permanent shutdown, partial
shutdown, or deactivation.
 Performs surveillance at least quarterly on all other locks and tags installed at the
time of the surveillance.
Note: Exclude those locks and tags in any area that pose an unusual safety risk (radiological or
hazardous chemical control zones or high overhead area); however, if the hazard is
reduced to an acceptable level, include them.
 Reviews the Tagout Index and TAFs for the following:

 Completeness, validity, and accuracy
 Evidence of correct implementation of this practice
 Evaluation of the continuing need for the lockout/tagout
Note: Review work packages or procedures identified on the TAF.
Note: Consolidate the Tagout Index to remove completed TAFs and file the original Tagout Index
forms.
 Performs a field walkdown of the installed locks and tags and verifies the following:
 Proper placement of locks and tags
 Proper position of component or equipment

Page 644
ABG
 Complete and accurate tags

 No tags are missing, mutilated, or illegible
 Identifies Caution Tags installed for longer than 3 months to prevent complacency
regarding the extended use of Caution Tags.
 Resolves conditions that require Caution Tags.
 If conditions are resolved, removes the Caution Tag in accordance with this
practice.
 Replaces mutilated, illegible, or missing tag(s).
 Verifies that the lockout or tagout is still active and required.
 Obtains and prepares a replacement tag. Uses the next sequential tag number
from the Tagout Index located in the lock and tag logbook, and completes the
Tagout Index indicating replacement of tag and number.
 Notes the replacement of the tag and the number of the replacement tag on the
TAF.
 Installs the tag in accordance with this practice.
 Removes the mutilated tag and documents the missing tag in accordance with
this practice.
 Documents the performance of the surveillance on each TAF surveyed, and on Form
000.653.F0294, Lockout/Tagout Surveillance/Program Review.
 Documents and tracks deficiencies found and the corrective actions taken.
5.2 Periodic Inspection (Program Review)
 A periodic inspection/program review must be conducted by an authorized worker at

least annually to assess the extent to which the requirements of this practice are
being followed. The inspection/review must conform to the following:
 Ensures that an authorized worker who is not assigned responsibilities
associated with the activities being inspected performs the periodic inspections.
 Designs the periodic inspection to correct any deviations or inadequacies
observed.
 Includes the following key elements in the periodic inspection:
Isolation
Equipment shutdown
Lock and tag placement
Verification of equipment deactivation
Equipment startup
Documentation (such as tags or logbooks)
Every authorized worker’s responsibilities (interview)
 Documents and tracks the periodic inspection/program review on Form
000.653.F0294, including the deficiencies found and corrective actions taken.
6.0 TRAINING
Training is conducted and documented in accordance with Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.

Page 645
ABG
6.1 Affected Worker
Lockout/tagout orientation for affected workers includes the following elements:

 Instruction that the installation and removal of a lock and tag is conducted only with
proper authorization as required by this practice
 Instruction on limitations of tagout
 Discussion of the disciplinary actions that may result from violation of requirements
specified in this practice
6.2 Authorized Worker
Lockout/tagout training for authorized workers includes the following elements:

 All elements in the affected worker orientation
 The Hazardous Energy Control program as described in this practice
 Limitations of just “tagging out” a component (compared to locking and tagging)
 Methods for recognizing types and magnitude of hazards existing in their work area
 Means to control and isolate these hazards
 Proper performance to determine the safety of the area where the work is to be
performed, as identified in this practice
6.3 Controlling Organization Lockout/Tagout Administrator
Lockout/tagout training for controlling organization lockout/tagout administrator includes the following:
 All elements in the affected worker orientation
 All elements in the authorized worker training
 Application of this practice
 Facility systems, controls, and configuration processes appropriate to the work
involving the lockout/tagout
6.4 Refresher Training
Employees required to be trained by the provisions of this practice must be retrained or pass a challenge test
annually. Employees will be provided appropriate retraining whenever there is a significant change in work
assignment, a new hazard is identified, or there is a revision to this practice.
7.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0162 Authority to Remove Authorized Worker Danger

Page 646
ABG

Tag and Lock
000.653.F0278 Tagout Authorization Form (TAF)
000.653.F0279 Tagout Index
000.653.F0280 Authorized Worker Danger Tag
000.653.F0281 Danger – Do Not Operate Tag (Controlling
Organization)
000.653.F0282 Caution Tag (Controlling Organization)
000.653.F0294 Lockout/Tagout Surveillance/Program Review
000.653.F0295 Machine-Specific Energy Control Process
8.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Lock Cutting and Removal
Attachment 02 Guidelines for Determining Need for
Lockout/Tagout
Attachment 03 Examples of Group Lockout/Tagout Methods
Attachment 04 Guidelines for Safe-Condition Check

Page 647
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
MANUAL LIFTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................620
SCOPE621
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................621
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................621
2.0 RISK IDENTIFICATION...................................................................................................................................621
2.1 Analysis of Injury Statistics......................................................................................................................622
2.3 Risk Identification Checklist.....................................................................................................................622
3.0 RISK ASSESSMENT........................................................................................................................................623
3.1 Risk Factors..............................................................................................................................................623
3.2 Back Pain.................................................................................................................................................624
A. Description............................................................................................................................................624
B. Preventive and Protective Measures....................................................................................................624
4.0 RISK CONTROL.............................................................................................................................................625
5.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................625

Page 648
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for identification, assessment, and control of risks arising from manual-
handling tasks.
SCOPE
 Risk Identification
 Risk Assessment
 Risk Control
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Manual Handling – Any activity requiring the use of force exerted by a person to lift, push, pull, carry, or
otherwise move or restrain any animate or inanimate object.
Manual handling is considered to have greater risk if any of the following characteristics are present:
 Repetitive or sustained application of force
 Repetitive or sustained awkward posture
 Repetitive or sustained movement
 Application of high force
 Exposure to sustained vibration
 Handling of unstable or unbalanced loads or loads that are difficult to grasp or hold
All tasks will be assessed for the risk of injury or harm from manual handling.
All employees will be trained in safe manual-handling techniques.
Compliance with applicable standards is required. However, a limit of 40 pounds (18.1 kilograms) per employee is
recommended.
2.0 RISK IDENTIFICATION
The first stage in the risk assessment and control of manual-handling risks in the workplace is risk identification.
The 3 basic means of risk identification are:
 Analysis of injury statistics

 Consultation with employees

Page 649
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
 General risk identification checklist
The Project/Site Manager must verify that any task involving hazardous manual handling is identified as follows:
 Before any task involving manual handling is undertaken for the first time in the
workplace
 Before any alteration is made to objects used in a workplace or to systems of work
that include a task involving manual handling, including a change in the place where
that task is carried out
 If new or additional information about hazardous manual handling being associated
with a task becomes available
 If an occurrence of a musculoskeletal disorder in a workplace is reported by, or on
behalf of, an employee
2.1 Analysis of Injury Statistics
Indicators to consider during analysis of injury statistics include the following:

 In what area of the workplace the injury occurred
 The occupation or job/task of the injured employee
 The part of the body injured (such as back, neck, and shoulder)
 The nature of the injury (such as strain, sprain, laceration, and fracture)
 The type of incident (overexertion and physical stress in lifting and handling objects)
Consider the frequency and severity of injuries in relation to the numbers of employees and the hours worked.
Consultation with employees should take place as early as possible in the planning for the introduction of new or
modified manual-handling tasks. In this way, changes that may arise can be more easily implemented.
Consultation among employees required to undertake the tasks and the relevant HSE Representatives for the
work group must take place throughout the process (such as when identifying problem areas; when determining
the approach and methods for addressing manual-handling problems that affect a HSE Representative’s work
group; when decisions are being taken on various control measures to reduce risk factors).
2.3 Risk Identification Checklist
The checklist should cover at least the following risk factors:

Posture and Layout
 What is the weight of the object?
 Is stooping involved where the hands pass below mid-thigh height?
 Is reaching above shoulder height involved?
 Is significant sideways twisting of the body involved?
 Is unbalanced or uneven lifting or carrying involved?
 Is an awkward grip involved?

Page 650
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
 Is forward reaching (more than 12 inches [30.5 centimeters] away from the body)
involved?
Task and Object

 Is handling performed for more than 1 hour at a time?
 Is handling performed more than once every 5 minutes?
 Is there a long vertical distance of travel (more than 10 inches [25.4 centimeters])?
 What is the weight of the object?
 Does the object have sharp edges or contain hot/cold materials?
 Does it have unstable/unbalanced contents?
 Are slippery materials/objects handled?
 Is the object bulky or awkward (more than 2 feet [0.6 meters] in 2 directions)?
 Is the object an unusual shape (such as does it have handles)?
 Are there any forces applied to move the object, apart from lifting, such as pushing,
pulling, and restraining/holding?
Workplace Conditions
 Is the task performed in a confined space?
 Is the workplace hot, cold, or poorly lit?
 Are the floor surfaces slippery or uneven?
Work Organization
 Is the work affected by the unavailability of people to do work within a deadline?
 Is the work frequency affected by bottlenecks or sudden changes or delays to the
flow of materials?
Age, Skill, and Experience of Employee

Projects are advised to refer to any available regulatory checklists for details on this topic.
3.0 RISK ASSESSMENT
3.1 Risk Factors
Having identified the hazards associated with a manual-handling task, the risk to health and safety of the
employee undertaking that task must then be assessed.
Each of the following risk factors should be assessed:
 Actions and movements involved
 Layout of the workplace
 Postural requirements
 Duration and frequency of activity
 Distance and time handled
 Force applied

Page 651
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
 Range of weights handled

 Nature of the object handled
 Availability of mechanical aids
 Nature of load and condition of workplace
 Work organization
 Analysis of injury statistics
 Age
 Skill and experience of the employee carrying out the manual handling
 Size of the employee carrying out the manual handling task
 Environmental conditions including heat, cold, and vibration that act directly on the
employee carrying out the task
The Project/Site Manager must verify that a risk assessment is reviewed and revised where necessary.
3.2 Back Pain
Work-related back pain is rarely caused by a single accident or injury, but by a series of repeated, cumulative
injuries. Permanent disability can result if preventive action is not taken. During the risk assessment, special
attention must be given to work-related back pain. Manual handling is a major source of work-related back pain.
A. Description
Work-related back pain can be localized and accompanied by discomfort, fatigue, and numbness of the muscles,
tendons, or soft tissue. In severe cases, loss of function, limited movement, and loss of muscle control can occur.
Potential back strain situations include, but are not limited to:
 Exposure to handling loads (lifting, carrying, and pushing), repetitive handling work,
static and awkward posture, twisting, bending, or stretching at the extreme range of
movement
 Handling heavy, bulky, difficult to grasp, unpredictable, or difficult to handle (such as
sharp, slippery) loads
 Scaffolding operations
 Commissioning and decommissioning (opening and shutting of valves and blinds)
 Erection and stripping of formwork
Special attention is to be given to employees with a high-potential risk, including those who might be pregnant,
employees reporting persistent back pain, and employees with a related health problem.
B. Preventive and Protective Measures
The following preventive or protective measures should be taken:

 Identify through risk assessment, the tasks/activities that could result in back pain –
involve affected employees or outside experts in the evaluation of the risks.
 Take appropriate steps to eliminate or minimize the need for manual handling.

Page 652
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
 Build flexibility into job design and encourage employees to take necessary rest
breaks.
 Involve specialists, such as engineers and ergonomists, in the various stages of work
activity design and development to minimize strain (such as selection of machinery,
tools and equipment, and job rotation).
Basic rules for manual handling and lifting techniques are discussed in Attachment 01.
4.0 RISK CONTROL
If a manual-handling task has been assessed as a risk, then the Project/Site Manager and work supervisor must, if
practicable, redesign the manual handling to remove the risk.
If removal of the risk is not practicable, the Project/Site Manager and the work supervisor must, if practicable,
redesign the manual handling in order to reduce substantially the factors contributing to the risk.
If the task has been assessed as a risk and it is not practicable to redesign the manual handling to remove the risk
or substantially reduce the factors contributing to the risk, then the Project/Site Manager and the work supervisor
must provide mechanical aids (and training in their use) to assist the employee carrying out the task.
If all the above are not practicable, then the Project/Site Manager and the work supervisor must provide training
in methods of manual handling appropriate for the intended work.
Control options include, but are not limited to, the following:
 Modify Object – The object being handled may be modified or repackaged into a
bigger, smaller, or different size, shape, and/or weight.
 Modify Workplace Layout – The layout of the plant, equipment, and furniture may
be modified or rearranged. This may include increased attention to housekeeping
and maintenance functions.
 Rearrange Materials Flow – The schedule or timing and path(s) of materials flow
may be modified.
 Different Actions or Movements – With or without workplace modifications, a task
may be done in a different way using different actions and movements.
 Modify Task – Mechanical Assistance – The risk of a task may be reduced by simple
mechanical assistance provided by simple levers and minor rearrangements of
equipment and plant.
 Modify Task – Team Lifting – The actions and movements required can be modified
by the assistance of others (such as team lifting).
 Mechanical Handling Equipment – The provision of mechanical handling equipment
can reduce the risk by reducing the force required.
 Toolbox Meetings and Pre-Task Hazard Checklists – Supervisors will discuss the
potential hazards and control strategies of manual handling to eliminate and/or
reduce the potential for injury.
The implementation of the “smart lift” program and/or a pre-shift bend/stretch/get limber program is strongly
recommended.

Page 653
ABG
MANUAL LIFTING
5.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Manual Handling of Loads

Page 654
ABG
MIER – MISISR
MONTHLY INCIDENT EXPERIENCE REPORT - MIER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................ 627
SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................................627
APPLICATION......................................................................................................................................................... 627
DEFINITIONS ..........................................................................................................................................................627
1.0 PROJECT/OFFICE STARTUP ..........................................................................................................................627
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................627
2.1 Project Incident Log ..............................................................................................................................627
3.0 MIER ............................................................................................................................................................628
4.0 MSISR ..........................................................................................................................................................628
REFERENCES ..........................................................................................................................................................628
ATTACHMENTS ......................................................................................................................................................628

Page 655
ABG
MIER – MISISR
PURPOSE
This practice provides the standard method that must be used by all ABG entities and locations – office, self-
perform, and construction management/subcontracting; joint venture (JV) and limit liability companies (LLC) –
in compiling and submitting HSE data relating to occupationally-related injuries, illnesses, fires, motor vehicle
accidents, spills of hazardous materials; also, HSE citations, near-miss events, and chemical exposures.
SCOPE
 Project/Office Startup
 MIER
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
JV – Joint Venture; companies retain individual legal liabilities although collectively all companies of JV have
legal requirement to do 100 percent of the work.
LLC – Limited Liability Company; a completely new company entity; ABG shares ownership with other
companies in the LLC. Determining “operational control” becomes unclear since it is a new company typically
with employees from multiple companies working together side-by-side as LLC employees. If majority/plurality
owner of LLC, then ABG will report in HSE statistics. LLC, like a JV, has responsibility for reporting and tabulating
exposure hours and injuries independent of the owner company’s reporting protocols.
MIER – Monthly Incident Experience Report; the standard report of HSE-related events pertaining to a ABG-
managed entity.
MSISR – Monthly Subcontractor Incident Summary Report; the standard report of HSE-related events pertaining
to subcontractors and their lower-tier contractors on a ABG-managed project or office site.
1.0 PROJECT/OFFICE STARTUP
When a contract is awarded where ABG is a part, the HSE Project Incident Reporting Sheet (Form
000.653.F0309) will be completed by the Business Unit/Line HSE staff and presented to ABG Corporate HSE for
concurrence and approval. Refer to Attachment 01 for a discussion on JVs and Lilacs.
2.1 Project Incident Log
HSE Representatives in all locations (offices and sites) will maintain either a Project Incident Log (Form
000.653.F0193 or equal) and provide information on all HSE-related events up the “line” or HSE management
chains as requested, or a “project incident list” (refer to Attachment 02 for an example).
HSE Representative or designee responsibilities include:

Page 656
ABG
MIER – MISISR
 Accumulate data relative to occupationally-related HSE event.

 Adhere to cutoff for monthly reporting, which is 12 midnight the last Saturday of
each month.
 Know what first aid is (refer to Practice 000.653.1202, Attachment 01).
 Distribute copies of monthly performance reports as prescribed by the project
and/or Regional Safety Manager.
3.0 MIER
The MIER is developed electronically from several “components” in for ABG offices, self-perform, construction
management/subcontract, JV, and LLC entities (refer to Attachment 01 for an example).
4.0 MSISR
There is no MSISR within and there is no report as such. In order to accomplish the same results, contractors
will need to be entered individually — then a Subcontractor Detail report must be run to get the monthly
breakdown that previously showed on the MSISR.
REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0193 Project Incident Log
ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Joint Ventures and Limited Liability Companies

Page 657
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................626
SCOPE630
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................630
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................630
2.0 INSPECTIONS................................................................................................................................................632
2.1. General....................................................................................................................................................632
2.2. Equipment/Vehicle Pre-Start/Walk-Around Inspection...........................................................................633
2.3. Starting and Testing.................................................................................................................................634
3.0 EQUIPMENT/VEHICLE OPERATORS..............................................................................................................634
3.1. Operation................................................................................................................................................634
3.2. Refuelling.................................................................................................................................................636
3.3. Operating a Power Takeoff......................................................................................................................636
3.4. Parking of Heavy Equipment...................................................................................................................636
3.5. Equipment/Vehicle Breakdown...............................................................................................................637
3.6 Working Near Overhead Power Lines......................................................................................................637
4.0 SIGNAL PERSONS.........................................................................................................................................637
5.0 ROAD RULES.................................................................................................................................................637
6.0 STANDARD EQUIPMENT..............................................................................................................................638
7.0 MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................................................639
8.0 TRAINING AND LICENSING...........................................................................................................................639
9.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................639
10.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................640

Page 658
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements for the safe operation of motorized heavy equipment and light vehicles.
SCOPE
 Inspections
 Heavy Equipment Operators
 Signal Persons
 Road Rules
 Standard Equipment
 Maintenance
 Training and Licensing
Note: Refer to Practices 000.502.0100, Administrative Practice for Rigging; 000.502.1000, Cranes
and Rigging – Operations (Site-Specific); and 000.653.3201, Cranes and Rigging –
Introduction/Pre-use.
Note: Refer to Practice 000.653.3203, Powered Industrial Trucks (Forklifts).
Note: Refer to Practice 000.653.3204, Aerial Lifts, Elevating Work Platforms, and
Material/Personnel Hoists.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Heavy Equipment – Includes but is not limited to the following:
 Backhoes
 Dozers
 Front-end loaders
 Road graders
 Excavators
 Scrapers (pans)
 Skid-steers
 Dump trucks
 Earth movers
 Trucks 2 tons GVW or greater
 Grad-alls
 Creter cranes

Page 659
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
 Concrete pump trucks

 Vibrating compactors
 Water carts/trucks
 Rollers
 Service/re-fueling trucks
 Air tuggers
Light Vehicle – Includes but is not limited to the following:

 Automobiles
 Trucks less than 2 tons GVW
 “Mules”
 Motorized and electric carts (including “golf” carts)
 Motorized “Georgia buggies”
 4-wheelers and 3-wheelers
To operate/drive motorized heavy equipment or a light vehicle (hereafter referred to as equipment/vehicle),

employees must, at a minimum:
 Have a valid state/country driver’s license.
 Be designated by the Project Manager or his designee to drive (refer to Form 000.653.F0185,
Application for Designated Driver).
 Be mentally alert and possess the physical ability to drive a motor vehicle safely.
 Display a responsible attitude.
All restrictions of the employee’s state/country driver’s license are automatically applicable to operating
equipment/vehicles.
An employee must carry his/her state/country driver’s license on his/her person while operating
equipment/vehicle and must display it upon request to authorized persons:
 A copy of such license and endorsements must be maintained in the employee’s personnel
file (refer to Form 000.653.F0204, Driver’s License Record).
 The HSE Representative must be advised of any change in the status of such license and
endorsements (such as cancellation or suspension).
 The employee will not operate equipment/vehicles on or off the project/site after his/her
state/country driver’s license is suspended, revoked, or otherwise affected.
 An operator must have the appropriate endorsement for the type of equipment/vehicle
being driven. Drivers of 4-wheel drive (4WD) vehicles must have undergone an approved
4WD course.
Only authorized employees shall be allowed to operate all mobile equipment. Authorization to operate mobile
equipment will be issued to employees qualifying under appropriate training and proficiency testing.
Operators and ground employees who may be working near machinery must be trained in, understand, and
practice safe operation/maintenance procedures for equipment/vehicles.
Gasoline or diesel fuel will not be used for cleaning parts.

Page 660
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
Firefighting and first-aid equipment must be conspicuously located near equipment/vehicle operations and readily
accessible at all times.
Employees are prohibited between machines and trailing equipment when maneuvering to connect them; the
tongue or hitch of trailing equipment must be blocked to align it with the drawbar or hitch.
Equipment/vehicles or parts thereof that are suspended or held aloft must be substantially blocked to prevent
falling or shifting before employees are permitted to work under or between them.
Employees on foot must not approach equipment/vehicle until the operator is signaled and acknowledges the
location of the approaching employee(s).
Employees must not ride in or work from excavator or backhoe/loader buckets.
Employees must not stand under suspended loads or suspended machine components such as the boom, arm, or
bucket.
Authorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on equipment unless it is equipped to accommodate
riders safely.
No modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of equipment/vehicle will be made
without the manufacturer’s written approval. If the manufacturer will not approve modifications or changes,
written approval from a registered profession engineer must be obtained. If such modifications or changes are
made, the capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals must be changed accordingly.
All automobile incidents will be reported using Form 000 653 F0102A – Automobile Loss Report.
Operator of a gasoline or diesel vehicle shall shut off the engine before filling the fuel tank and shall see that the
nozzle of the filling hose makes contact with the filling neck of the tank. No one shall be on or in the vehicle
during fueling operations except as specifically required by design. No smoking or open flames in the immediate
area during the fueling operation is allowed.
Malfunctions of the clutch or of the braking system, steering, lighting or control system shall be reported
immediately to his/her supervisor and the equipment shall be locked and tagged if necessary.
The operator shall make sure the warning signal is operating when the equipment is backing up.
The operator shall use provided access to get on and off equipment. Do not jump to the ground.
2.0 INSPECTIONS
2.1. General
Equipment/vehicles received for use (through purchase, contract obligations, or rental) must receive an initial
inspection before placing into operation to verify that there are no mechanical defects or safety deficiencies;
results are documented on Form 000.653.F0165, Pre-Mobilization Inspection Report — Construction Equipment
and Light Vehicles. Refer to Attachment 02, Safety Device Requirements, for a list of minimum safety
equipment/requirements.
If the equipment/vehicle warrants service or repair, it will be rejected (before unloading/use) and returned to the
lessor or owner. The lessor/owner will be notified before such action and, if possible, be allowed to make
necessary repairs at his/her own expense. Management/supervision and the HSE Representative will be part of

Page 661
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
this decision-making process. A photocopy of the inspection report, noting all deficiencies will be transmitted to
the lessor/owner.
When the equipment/vehicle becomes damaged or in need of repair, a documented inspection is completed
before the equipment/vehicle is returned for use. This inspection will include reviewing prior inspection forms to
ensure corrective actions have been taken.
Before use on each shift, the operator will complete a walk-around inspection of the equipment/vehicle to verify
that the unit is in an operable condition.
If a deficiency has the potential for causing bodily injury to the operator/driver or ground employees, the
equipment/vehicle must be tagged with a Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag, Form 000.653.F0301 or equal, to
avoid operation. The supervisor must be notified when the equipment/vehicle is tagged out of service.
Equipment/vehicles (except automobiles and “pickup” trucks) will receive a documented, daily pre-use
inspection. Deficiencies will be fully explained in the Comments section of appropriate form. Corrective
actions will also be noted on the form, before the equipment can be used in the field.
 Inspection Report – Motorized Construction Heavy Equipment: (Form 000.653.F0105)
Note: Forms used to document inspections (000.653.F0105 series) and performance

evaluations (000.653.F0218 series) are specific to the machine. Both forms have
a sub-letter designation for nearly every type of motorized construction heavy
equipment. For example, F0105 “a” and F0218 “a” are used for forklifts; F0105
“e” and F0218 “e” are used for backhoes; F0105 “g” and F0218 “g’ are used for
dozers, etc.
 Inspection Report – General Line Equipment (Form 000.653.F0107)
Note: Forms used to document inspections (000.653.F0107 series) are specific to the
machine. This form has a sub-letter designation for each type of machine. For
example, F0107 “b” is used for aerial lifts; F0107 “c” is used for scissor lifts, and
F0107 “x” is used for welding machines.
A monthly equipment/vehicle inspection will be performed by a Competent Person and documented using Form
2.2. Equipment/Vehicle Pre-Start/Walk-Around Inspection
Pre-start/walk-around inspections will be conducted as follows:

 Ensure the operator’s manual is “on” the equipment/vehicle.
 Check for loose or worn parts and repair or replace immediately.
 Check all fluid/coolant levels. (Caution: Open the radiator cap only when the engine is
cooled). Check the battery and electrolyte levels according to manufacturer’s instructions.
 Inspect hydraulic line connectors and hoses for leaks before applying pressure to the system.
Caution: Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can penetrate skin and cause serious
bodily harm.

Page 662
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
 Use paper or cardboard - not your hands - to search for leaks.

 Check tires for cuts, bulges, irregularities, abnormal wear, and proper inflation.
 Ensure the cab area is clean and free of debris and tools.
 Clean windshield, mirrors, and lights.
 Remove oil, grease or mud, and snow from grab holds, handrails, steps, pedals, and floor to
prevent slips and falls.
 Remove or secure loose items such as tools, chains, or lunch boxes from the cab.
 Ensure the work area has been checked and marked, as appropriate, for underground cables,
gas lines, and water mains.
 Know work area clearances; watch for overhead or underground objects, holes, drop-offs,
and partially hidden obstacles and wires.
 Do not allow riders on the equipment/vehicle unless additional seat, seat belt, and rollover
protection are provided.
 Enter/mount and exit equipment properly; no one is to ever get on or off equipment/vehicles
that are in motion.
 Maintain a 3-point contact with the steps and handrails while getting on/into the machine; do
not use the controls or steering wheel as a handhold.
 Do not operate the machine with wet, greasy, or muddy hands or shoes.
2.3. Starting and Testing
Operators will perform the following start/test functions before operating equipment/vehicles:
 Exhaust fumes are dangerous – always have running equipment/vehicles in a well-ventilated
area.
 Fasten seat belt before starting engine.
 Adjust the seat and mirrors before starting.
 Place controls in neutral and set the parking brake before starting engine.
 Start the engine only from the operator/driver’s seat.
 Warn employees in the area that you are starting the engine
 Check all gauges, light, instruments, and warning devices to ensure that they are functioning
properly and the readings are within normal range.
 Test steering right and left.
 Test brakes against ground speed to be certain there is no malfunction.
 Ensure all controls are operating properly.
3.0 EQUIPMENT/VEHICLE OPERATORS
Depending on site-specific requirements, personal protective equipment worn by drivers/operators may include
the following:
 Boots or safety shoes
 Eye/face protection
 Long pants
 Hard hat
 Hearing protection
 Gloves

Page 663
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
 Seat belts (mandatory on equipment/vehicles except those without rollover protection

structures [ROPSs])
3.1. Operation
If a machine is noticed to be deficient during operation, the operator/driver must cease operation and contact the
immediate supervisor (refer to Section 2.1); do not operate until proper repairs have been made.
The following “general” rules apply to the operation of equipment/vehicles:
 The operator must be satisfied that no one will be endangered before moving the
equipment/vehicle.
 No operator shall operate mobile equipment without the protection of an enclosed cab or
approved eye protection.
 The operator shall not use, or attempt to use any vehicle in any manner or for any purpose
other than for which it is designated.
 If there is an obstructed view in the direction of movement, or the equipment is large enough
or configured such that it allows someone to perform work on it and be unnoticed by the
operation, it is prohibited to use the equipment/vehicle unless:
 The operator/driver sounds the horn with 1 blast, followed by a 5-second pause before
starting the engine, and
 The operator/driver sounds the horn with 2 blasts followed by another 5-second pause
before moving the equipment/vehicle from a stationary position, or
 The equipment/vehicle has a continuous movement signal alarm distinguishable from
the surrounding noise level (for the designated direction of travel), or
 An observer is present
 Light vehicles with an obstructed rear view must be equipped with a rear signal alarm.
 In congested areas, isolated areas with a concentration of employees (such as concrete
pours), or significant equipment/vehicle movement areas (such as in the vicinity of
stockpiles), flaggers should be used to coordinate equipment/vehicle and pedestrian
movement (refer to Practice 000.653.3211, Traffic Management).
 Keep employees outside the hydraulic excavator swing areas and clear of attachments when
using the machines for hoisting materials.
 Carry implements close to the ground, approximately 15 inches) 40 centimeters) above
ground level, or follow manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Keep the bucket as close to the ground as possible when employees are attaching loads for
hoisting.
 Operator shall not load the vehicle/equipment beyond its established load limit and shall not
move a load which because of the length, width or height, that have not been centered and
secured for safe transportation.
 Stay a safe distance from the edge of cliffs, overhangs, and slide areas.
 Stay a safe distance, especially with raised attachments, from energized power lines and
equipment, electrical poles, and circuits and equipment including power, communications, and
fire-alarm circuits (refer to Practice 000.653.3209, Working Near Overhead Power Lines.
 Electric equipment and lines must be considered energized until determined otherwise by testing
or until grounded.
 If the equipment/vehicle begins to sideslip on a grade, immediately dispose of the load and
turn the unit downhill.

Page 664
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
 Be careful to avoid the condition that could lead to tipping when working on hills, banks, or
slopes, and when crossing ditches, ridges, or other obstruction.
 Work up and down slopes, rather than sideways, whenever possible.
 Keep the equipment/vehicle under control and do not work it over its capacity.
 Know the pinch points and wrap points on the loader.
 Be sure hitch points and the towing devices are adequate.
 Connect trailing equipment to a drawbar or hitch only.
 Never straddle a cable, wire rope, or similar device, and do not allow other people to do so.
 Acquaint yourself with the controls before operating the equipment/vehicle.
 Drive at speeds compatible with working conditions, visibility, and terrain.
 Do not coast downhill; select a gear that will prevent excessive speed when going downhill.
 Do not park on a steep incline (greater than 25 degrees).
 Know the stopping distance for working speeds.
 Follow the manufacturer’s load capacity limits; identification plates are attached to all
machines.
 If the equipment/vehicle is stuck, back it out or stop engine and get help.
 Do not make mechanical adjustments while the unit is in motion.
 Always follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for pulling or towing.
 During snow removal, be alert for obstructions covered by snow.
3.2. Refuelling
 Fuel tanks on equipment/vehicles must not be filled while the engine is running, or while
welding or other hot work is being done with 50 feet (15.2 meters).
 Smoking is not permitted during fueling operations.
 Ensure the fueling area is well-ventilated.
 Ground the funnel or fuel nozzle against the filler neck to avoid sparks when refueling.
 Know where the fire extinguisher is located.
3.3. Operating a Power Takeoff
 Shut off the engine and wait until the power takeoff (PTO) stops completely before getting
off, disconnecting, or servicing the PTO unit.
 Wear snug-fitting clothing when operating the PTO (or any rotating equipment).
 When operating stationary PTO equipment, always apply the parking brake and block the rear
wheels front and back to prevent unnecessary movement.
 PTO shields are mandatory on all PTO-driven equipment.
3.4. Parking of Heavy Equipment
The following rules apply to parking heavy equipment:

 Use parking ditches (swales) provided.
 Park only in designated areas.
 Lower attachments on equipment fitted with moveable attachments (such forks, buckets,
blades, and rippers) before shutting down or getting off the machine.
 If on an incline, chock or wedge the wheels and turn wheels into the side of the bank or road.
 Where applicable, select neutral and apply the parking brake and slew brake.

Page 665
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
 If the engine will be idling for more than 5 minutes, idle the engine down, and then stop the
engine.
Note: No employee is allowed to sit or rest:
 Under heavy equipment

 Near or against any tire
 Directly in front of or behind heavy equipment
3.5. Equipment/Vehicle Breakdown
The following apply if equipment/vehicle becomes inoperable:

 If on a road, operate hazard warning lights (if fitted), and leave parking lights on if it is dark.
 Turn the front wheels into the side of the road; apply the parking brake and chock the
wheels.
 Arrange for repair/removal of the equipment/vehicle as soon as practicable.
 Place road hazard markers 163 feet (49.7 meters) in front of and behind the
equipment/vehicle as follows:
 Two-Way Roads— One marker in the front at approximately 100 feet (30.5 meters), and
markers to the rear at 10 feet (3.1 meters) and approximately 100 feet (30.5 meters).
 Divided Roads — Markers to the rear at 10 feet (3.1 meters), approximately 100 feet
(30.5 meters), and approximately 200 feet (61 meters).
 Vision-Obscured Roads — One front marker at approximately 100 feet (30.5 meters) and
rear markers at 10 feet (3.1 meters) and one not less than approximately 100 feet
(30.5 meters) and no greater than 500 feet (152.4 meters).

4.0 SIGNAL PERSONS
 Only one employee can act as the signal person at any given time.
 Before each work shift begins, review and confirm communications signals with the
operator(s).
 The signal person is responsible to:
 Keep the operator and the other employees in sight at all times.
 Keep employees on foot outside heavy equipment work areas (marked with rope, tape,
or other barrier).
 Ensure employees who must be near heavy equipment are kept out of the equipment swing
areas and clear of attachments when hoisting materials.
 Ensure heavy equipment or parts thereof that are suspended or held aloft are substantially
blocked to prevent falling or shifting before employees are permitted to work under or between
them.
 Ensure that all employees in the area are aware of established swing areas of the heavy
equipment and blind spots associated with the unit before allowing an operator to work the
machine.

Page 666
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
5.0 ROAD RULES
All of the rules that apply to public road use generally apply to project/site roads and access ways. Variations to
public road rules on project/site road and access ways will be posted in writing.
The speed limit on project/site roads and access ways is determined by the Project/Site Manager based on site-
specific conditions. Typically, the speed limit is 38 mph (61.2 kilometers per hour) unless otherwise posted.
Speed limit should be, at most, 20 mph (32.2 kilometers per hour) for unsurfaced areas. Employees exceeding set
speed limits will be subject to disciplinary procedures, according to Human Resources policies.
A light vehicle must escort large earthmoving equipment on the site.
Unless a road sign specifically indicates otherwise, the following hierarchy of equipment/vehicles will exist; that is,
equipment/vehicles lower on the list will give way to equipment/vehicles higher on the list:
 Emergency vehicles (when they indicate by sirens/lights that they are on emergency duty)
 Explosives vehicles
 Working graders / working water trucks
 Loaded dump trucks and scrapers
 Empty dump trucks
 Excavators
 Other heavy vehicles (such as nonworking graders)
 Light vehicles
Passengers are not permitted on motorized heavy equipment unless they are a trainee and undergoing instruction
with a licensed operator and are displaying an “Under Instruction” sign, or they are maintenance employees
involved with road testing the unit.
Overtaking of traveling earthmoving equipment will not be permitted under any circumstances.
6.0 STANDARD EQUIPMENT
Equipment/vehicles will be equipped with the following items, where applicable:

 Operator’s manual
 Log book
 Flashing amber lights
 Pre-start checklist record booklet or forms
 VHF or UHF radio compatible to operating frequencies
 In remote areas, a water container (5 gallon [18.9 liters] minimum)
A checklist for required safety devices is included as part of Attachment 02. No equipment/vehicle may be
operated without fully functional safety devices.
The following types of motorized heavy equipment manufactured after June 30, 1969 must be equipped with
rollover protective structures:
 Rubber-tired, self-propelled scrapers
 Rubber-tired, front-end loaders
 Rubber-tired dozers
 Wheel-type agricultural and industrial tractors

Page 667
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT
 Crawler tractors
 Crawler-type loaders
 Powered industrial trucks (forklifts)
 Motor graders, with or without attachments, used in construction work
Note: Exceptions to this requirement may only be approved by the Regional Safety Manager —
and only on equipment operated outside of the United States and its territories.
ROPSs must meet U.S. federal minimum requirements for performance.

Equipment/vehicles with ROPSs must also be equipped with seat restraints to be worn by the operator/driver
while the unit is in operation.
7.0 MAINTENANCE
Equipment/vehicles must be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s maintenance requirements;

records of maintenance must be developed and retained.
8.0 TRAINING AND LICENSING
Operators of motorized heavy equipment must be trained, successfully pass an assessment, and be licensed for
the equipment they will drive/operate, in accordance with Attachment 01, Motorized Heavy Equipment Operator
Training and Licensing.
Refer to Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation, regarding the recommendation of a Defensive Driving
course for ABG employees who drive a great deal (16 hours per month or more) as part of their position
description.
9.0 REFERENCES

000.502.0100 Administrative Practice for Rigging
000.653.3201 Cranes and Rigging
Forms:
000.653.F102A Automobile Incident/Accident Report
000.653.F0105 Inspection Report – Tractors, Loaders, Excavators, and

Page 668
ABG
MOBILE EQUIPMENT

Forklifts
000.653.F0107 Inspection Report – General Line Equipment: Welding
Machines, Air Compressors, Manlifts, etc.
000.653.F0108 Monthly Inspection Report – Construction Equipment
and Light Vehicles
000.653.F0126 Equipment Operator’s License
000.653.F0128 Equipment Operator Certification Record
000.653.F0165 Pre-Mobilization Inspection Report – Construction
000.653.F0185 Application for Designated Driver
000.653.F0204 Driver’s License Record
000.653.F0218 Performance Evaluation – Construction Equipment
Operator
10.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Motorized Heavy Equipment Operator Training and
Licensing
Attachment 02 Safety Device Requirements

Page 669
ABG
NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (NORM)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................641
SCOPE643
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................643
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................643
2.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................645
3.0 RADIATION...................................................................................................................................................646
4.0 NORM HEALTH HAZARDS.............................................................................................................................647
5.0 LINEAR DOES THEORY..................................................................................................................................647
6.0 THE THRESHOLD DOES EFFECT THEORY.......................................................................................................648
7.0 GARDNER THEORY.......................................................................................................................................648
8.0 RADIATION HORMESIS THEORY...................................................................................................................648
9.0 ALARA..........................................................................................................................................................648
10.0 CONTAMINATION........................................................................................................................................648
11.0 TIME, DISTANCE, SHIELDING........................................................................................................................650
12.0 CONTAMINATION CONTROL........................................................................................................................651
13.0 AIRBORNE CONTAMINATION CONTROL......................................................................................................652
14.0 NORM WORKERS PROTECTION PLAN..........................................................................................................653
15.0 SOURCE OF HAZARDS..................................................................................................................................654
16.0 LOCATIONS OF SOURCE HAZARDS...............................................................................................................654
17.0 ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES OF EXPOSURE.................................................................................................655
18.0 STANDARD WORK PROCEDURES.................................................................................................................655
20.0 SECURITY AND POSTING..............................................................................................................................657
21.0 TESTING AND INSTRUMENTATION..............................................................................................................657
22.0 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES FOR SURVEY METERS.........................................................................658
23.0 CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................................658
24.0 AIR SAMPLERS..............................................................................................................................................658
25.0 WATER CONTAMINATION............................................................................................................................659
26.0 AIR CONTAMINATION..................................................................................................................................659
27.0 COMPARISON LEVELS..................................................................................................................................659
28.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES..........................................................................................................................659
28.1 Emergency Procedures for Spills.............................................................................................................659
29.0 NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES.......................................................................................................................660
30.0 TRANSPORTATION.......................................................................................................................................662
31.0 SHIPMENT OF NORM...................................................................................................................................662
33.0 REQUIRED INFORMATION............................................................................................................................663
34.0 USE OF MANIFEST........................................................................................................................................663
35.0 TRANSPORTERS............................................................................................................................................663

Page 670
ABG
36.0 DESIGNATED FACILITY..................................................................................................................................664

37.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................664
37.1 Requirements..........................................................................................................................................664
37.2 Frequency................................................................................................................................................665

Page 671
ABG
PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidance to ABG personnel on the potential hazards associated
with Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM), and to identify occupational settings where this material
can be encountered.
ABG has developed and implemented the following procedure to protect their employees from the possible
occupational exposure to NORM.
Properly implemented it will:
 Establish Company expectations for employees who work at locations where NORM
containing materials are or may be present.
 Aid in complying with federal, state, and local regulations such as:
 OSHA 29 CFR 1910.96(h) (2)
 Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality Office of Air Quality Radiation
Protection (LAC 33:XV Chapters 4, 5, 10
 Texas Department of Health Radiation Control Part 46
 Help eliminate any potential threat to employee health due to NORM exposure.
SCOPE
This procedure applies to company personnel who may perform maintenance work such as welding, cutting, or
reaming of piping or equipment that has become contaminated with naturally occurring radioactive scale or
precipitate at any Company or Client’s premises.
The potential for Technology Enhanced Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (TENORM) exposure is present
when the radioactive materials become airborne during welding, cutting or reaming piping or equipment that
contains radioactive scale or precipitate.
This procedure also applies to employees who may be exposed to the dust or fumes containing radioactive
materials generated by someone working nearby.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Alpha Particle is a small, positively charged particle made up of two neutrons and two protons and of
very high velocity, thrown off by many radioactive materials including uranium and radium.
Beta Particle is a small electrically charged particle thrown off by many radioactive materials; identical to an
electron. Beta particles emerge from radioactive materials at high speeds.
Decay is the disintegration of a radioactive atom; what remains is a different element.
 An atom of polonium decays to form lead, ejecting an alpha particle.
Daughter is the product nucleus or atom resulting from the decay of the precursor or parent.

Page 672
ABG
Gamma-rays (gamma radiation) are the most penetrating of all radiation. Gamma-rays are very high-energy x-
rays.
Half-life (For a single radioactive decay process) is the time required for the activity to decrease to half its value by
that process.
Natural radioactivity is the radioactive background, or more properly, the radioactivity that is associated with the
heavy naturally occurring elements.
Nuclide is a type of atom characterized by its mass number, atomic number, and energy state of the nucleus,
provided that the mean life in that state is long enough to be observable.
Radioactive is the property of an isotope or element that is characterized by spontaneous decay to emit radiation.
Radioactivity is the emission of energy in the form of alpha, beta, or gamma radiation from the nucleus of an
atom.
 This always involves change of one kind of atom into a different kind.
 A few elements, such as radium, are naturally radioactive.
Radionuclide is a radioactive nuclide; one that has the capability to spontaneously emitting radiation.
The President or his designee is responsible for ensuring that employees have completed the training required by
this procedure.
Additional responsibilities include:
 The implementation of this Policy.
 Documentation of completion by each employee.
 Take corrective actions on all violations or suspected violations of this procedure.
 Ensuring that this procedure is followed in work done at a client’s or company location.
 Ensuring that proper records are maintained on all work performed where NORM is
present.
 For reviewing and revising the procedure as required.
The Safety Director is responsible for aiding in the implementation of this Procedure and has been named as the
Program Administrator for any NORM projects.
 Keeping the president informed of any incidents related to this Procedure.
 Providing appropriate safety equipment to company personnel.
 Investigating all employee concerns regarding NORM on company or client’s
premises.
 Reviewing current technical information available on NORM.
 Maintaining medical surveillance records on personnel working with NORM.
 The Assistant Secretary of Labor, affected employees and designated employees'
representatives shall have access to this program.

Page 673
ABG
 Investigating all employee concerns regarding NORM on company or client premises.

 Informing the President of any suspected or newly identified sources of NORM at
company or client’s premises.
 In the event that the company did get involved with a NORM project the Safety
Director would be assigned the responsibility to serve as the Program Administrator.
The Supervisor is responsible for providing assistance in the implementation of this policy.
 Informing the Safety Director of any incidents involving NORM.
 Informing the Safety Director of any suspected or newly identified sources of NORM
at company or client’s premises.
 Ensuring that all employees are informed of any suspected or newly identified
sources of NORM on the company or client’s premises.
 Making suggestions to management for ways to improve this Policy.
 Adhering to the rules and guidelines in this procedure.
Company personnel are responsible for recognizing and anticipating all job hazards that could involve the
exposure of NORM to company personnel, client personnel, the general public or impact the environment.
Additional responsibilities include
 Completing the training required by this procedure.
 Adhering to the rules and guidelines in this procedure.
 Reporting to their supervisor any suspected or newly identified sources of caustic
on company or client’s premises.
 Take appropriate precautionary measures when working with NORM.
2.0 INTRODUCTION
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials, normally referred to as NORM, are a broad group of radioactive
substances found naturally in our environment.
Radionuclides are leached from the clay minerals and are associated with the decay of uranium and thorium
atoms.
Crude oil, natural gas, and other substances extracted from the ground were, in some cases, found to possess
measurable levels of radioactivity.
 These radioactive materials would then deposit themselves onto the pipes,
compressors, and other production equipment and vessels used in the
manufacturing and storage process.
They were first identified as a hazard in the oil and gas production industries in the early 1980's.
 Since its discovery in the oil and gas industry, NORM has also been found in the
petrochemical, fertilizer, mining and related industries.

Page 674
ABG
 The extent of the levels found in these industries thus far, seems to be well below
that found in oil and gas production.
When these streams are pumped out of the ground, NORM can also plate out onto pipe scale or collect in
precipitates.
Exposure can occur when the radioactive materials become airborne during welding, cutting, or reaming, piping or
equipment that contains radioactive scale or precipitate.
Other operations, such as dismantling or refurbishing equipment or transportation may require precautionary
procedures.
3.0 RADIATION
Radiation is defined as "particles or electromagnetic waves released by an unstable atom in an effort to reach
stability."
There are three (3) types of radiation associated with NORM:
 The alpha particle
 The beta particle
 The gamma ray
Units of measurement of radiation include:

 The roentgen, which is a unit of exposure.
 The rad, which is a unit of absorbed dose.
 The rem, which is a unit of biological damage.
 Assorted doses (rad) can be equated to biological damage (rem) using a quality
factor.
Another term that personnel should be familiar with is TENORM (Technologically Enhanced
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials).
 TENORM are radionuclides whose concentrations are increased by, or as a result of,
past or present human practices.
 TENORM does not include background radiation or the natural radioactivity of rocks
or soils.
Radon is produced from the radioactive decay of the element Radium 226.
 Radium is a decay product of uranium and thorium.
 Radium has a half-life of 1,620 years.
 Radon has a half-life of 3.8 days.
 Radon decays into four daughter products which can attach to dust particles in
the air and be inhaled into the lungs.
 When these dust particles are inhaled, they may be trapped inside the
lungs and irradiate the lung tissue.

Page 675
ABG
 Lung cancer is associated with radon gas.
The occurrence of environmentally high concentrations of radioactivity, specifically with radium isotopes in oil
field production waters, is well documented.
The radium levels in certain coastal areas of the United States of America can significantly exceed the limits set by
regulators for discharge waters at nuclear reactor sites.
The term "radiosensitivity" describes how easily a particular cell is affected by radiation.
Factors which affect the radiosensitivity of a cell are:
 The rate of cell division.
 The stage of cell division.
 The degree of cell specialization.
 The amount of cell activity (metabolic rate).
4.0 NORM HEALTH HAZARDS
The radiation exposure levels encountered by persons working around NORM have not been shown to be
high enough to pose an external health risk.
The primary hazard is not in the exposure to NORM itself, but when these materials are taken into the
body.
Radioactive scales and sludges deposited in pipes vessels and other equipment, when taken into the
body can release alpha, beta and gamma radiation.
NORM can be taken into the body by:
 Breathing the material in through the nose or mouth which deposits NORM in
the lungs.
 Eating (ingestion) which can deposit NORM in the digestive tract.
 Open cuts and wounds which can result in NORM being deposited in the blood stream.
Biological damage to our bodies from radiation can be either a direct or indirect process.
The direct process involves the ionization of DNA molecules within the cell directly.
 Ionization is defined as "the removal of an electron from an atom or molecule leaving
that atom or molecule with some net electrical charge"
 Biological damage to our bodies from radiation occurs as a result of the
ionization of our tissues.
When DNA is damaged within a cell, there are four possi ble scenarios for the cell.
They are as follows:
 The cell may die.
 The cell may repair the damage and undergo normal cell division.

Page 676
ABG
 The cell may be unable to repair the damage, divide, and produce normal daughter
cells.
 The cell may be unable to repair the damage or divide; however, the daughter cells
are incapable of sustaining life and die themselves.
The indirect process involves the formation of chemically active species from the ionization of a water
molecule within the cell, which in turn chemically attaches to the DNA molecule.
5.0 LINEAR DOES THEORY
The amount of exposure that a cell receives is called Dose.

The Linear Dose Theory states that there is a linear relationship between the amount of radiation exposure
received and the effects of that exposure, i.e., large amounts of radiation will cause large amounts of biological
damage, therefore, small amounts of radiation will cause small amounts of biological damage.
6.0 THE THRESHOLD DOES EFFECT THEORY
The Threshold Dose Effect Theory states that there is a certain amount of radiation exposure that must be received
by an individual before any biological damage will take place.
7.0 GARDNER THEORY
The Gardner Theory postulates that the effects of exposure to alpha radiation to a parent may show up years later
in the offspring of the parent.
8.0 RADIATION HORMESIS THEORY
The Radiation Hormesis Theory states that low levels of ionizing radiation are beneficial to mankind.
The theory states that low levels of ionizing radiation will result in increases in life span, growth, fertility,
and a reduction in the cancer incident rate.
9.0 ALARA
All operations will be conducted to achieve ALARA.

The term ALARA stands for "As Low As Reasonably Achievable." The concept of ALARA is both federal and state law.
10.0 CONTAMINATION
We know that radiation is emitted from radioactive material and are aware that there is radioactive material
present in the oil and gas industry, in well equipment, pipes, tanks, etc.
This radioactive material is located where we want it to be, and, as long as we keep it where it should be, we can
make sure that it doesn't cause any significant damage.
When radioactive material is someplace where we do not want it, we call it Contamination.
Contamination is radioactive material where we do not want it.

Page 677
ABG
 For example, if some radioactive material leaked from a valve or pipe onto the
ground it would be called contamination.
 We do not want radioactive material on the ground or floor where it could be tacked
all over the site.
 Similarly, we do not want radioactive dust in the air where we might breathe it into
our lungs.
Contamination in the work site is a major concern to us because of the possibility that it might get inside our
bodies.
Internal contamination, or contamination inside the body, is a problem for two reasons:
 It increases the possibility of damage to the vital organs.
 It may be retained by the body for long periods of time.
If contamination enters the body, it is that much closer to the vital organs.
The ingested contamination continues to emit radiation and, because the radiation is being emitted inside the
body, the vital organs are not shielded by the skin or muscles.
Contamination that has gotten inside the body may be very difficult to remove.
 This means that radiation could be emitted inside the body for an extended period of
time.
 The body does not take special steps to rid itself of contamination, because it does not
know the difference between radioactive nuclides and non-radioactive nuclides.
 For example, when iodine is taken into the body, some of it is sent to the thyroid.
 If the iodine happens to be radioactive iodine-131, the body still sends it to the
thyroid.
 In the thyroid, the radioactive iodine would continue to emit radiation, which, as we
know, can damage cells.
 The most obvious way for contamination to enter the body is through the
mouth.
 That is why it is necessary not to eat, drink, or smoke in contaminated areas. Your
nose may be another entrance into the body for contamination.
 Contamination in the air may be breathed in through the nose to the lungs.
A cut in your skin is another way that contamination can enter the body.
As we have said, once contamination gets inside the body, it continues to emit radiation.
 But this process does not last forever, radionuclides decay and, as each atom decays, it
changes into another nuclide.
 Eventually, the decay process will cause the radioactive material to disappear.
 The radiological half-life (TR) is the time required for half of the radioactive atoms
present in a sample to decay.
The body also rids itself of contaminated material through normal body functions.

Page 678
ABG
We can get an idea of how long this would take by looking at the biological half-life of the radionuclide involved.
The biological half-life (TB) is defined as the time required for the body to eliminate half of the atoms rough normal
bodily functions.
Every nuclide has a radiological half-life and a biological half-life.
The biological half-life of radium is 45 years.
Because the processes of radioactive decay and biological elimination are going on at the same time, neither the
radiological half-life nor the biological half-life will be a true measure of the actual half-life of a radionuclide inside
the body.
The actual half-life would be a combination of the radiological half-life and the biological half-life.
This combined half-life is called the effective half-life.
The effective half-life (TEFF) is defined as the time required for half of the radioactive atoms to be removed
from the body by a combination of decay and body elimination.
11.0 TIME, DISTANCE, SHIELDING
When time, distance, and shielding are used effectively, adequate protection can always be provided to workers and
members of the general public.
Time is the first of the "big three" exposure-reducing tools available to the worker in the field dealing with
radiation sources.
The radiation worker should be aware that radiation doses are directly proportional to the time spent in a given
radiation field.
 If the worker’s time in a given radiation field is doubled, the worker’s dose will be
doubled.
 Likewise, if the worker's time in the radiation field is cut in half, his dose will also be
reduced by half.
 To maintain ALARA, the time spent in a radiation field must always be limited to the
maximum extent possible.
 Although this concept is simple, IT WORKS.
 Workers should be made aware of the exact location of radiation sources in a work area.
 They should be familiar with the area and know which locations are "hotter" and which
locations are "colder."
 Time in the hotter locations should be minimized.
 They should be familiar and well briefed with their job tasks to minimize their
time spent in any given radiation field.
Distance is the second of the "big three." Again, the concept is a simple one.
 Radiation fields become less intense the further a worker moves away from the source.
 The worker should spend as much time away from the source as possible.

Page 679
ABG
 If a problem arises on the job, the worker should back away from the source rather than
standing next to it to discuss a solution with his coworker or supervisor.
Shielding is the last of the "big three" tools.

 In some cases a worker will need to spend extended periods of time in close proximity
to a radiation source.
 When shielding such as lead, steel, or iron are placed around a source the intensity of
the radiation field is reduced.
 For example, a worker needs to work on a pump that is close to a valve
giving a dose in the work area of 1500 microroentgens per hour.
 The work is estimated to take a total of 30 man-hours to complete. Simple math will tell
us that the total radiation dose to complete the job will be 45 millirem.
 However, when shielding is placed around the valve, the radiation dose in the
work area is reduced to 500 microroentgens per hour.
 Thus, the same 30 man-hour job will now have a total exposure associated with it
of only 15 millirem.
12.0 CONTAMINATION CONTROL
The primary concern regarding contamination is always to protect persons from inhalation and ingestion of
radioactive materials for the purpose of preventing internal exposure.
A secondary concern is to prevent the spread of contamination throughout the work site by tracking it where
other workers may unknowingly come in contact with it.
Constant vigilance to prevent or minimize contamination or to contain its spread must be maintained by every
worker, since the escape of even an insignificant physical amount of material may be a considerable health
problem.
Areas containing loose surface contamination need to be identified and marked to make the worker aware of the
hazard so that proper preventive measures can be taken.
The worker should also be made aware of work evolutions which may cause loose surface contamination.
 For example, descaling a tubular, opening a pump for maintenance, changing out
filters, or entering tanks and separators for cleaning.
There may not be any loose surface contamination on the exterior of these items; however, the interior may be highly
contaminated.
A simple radiation survey on the exterior surface of these items may be used to determine if a contamination
problem exists on the interior item.
Any radiation reading on the exterior surface of the item is significant of a large alpha contamination problem
inside that item.
 This is due to the fact that most NORM radionuclides, including radium-226, emit both
a gamma and alpha particle when they decay.

Page 680
ABG
 The gamma ray will penetrate the steel or iron that the item is made of allowing for
an external radiation measurement, however, the alpha particle will not.
When working in areas of loose surface contamination, some form of anti-contamination clothing should be worn.
 Anti-contamination clothing is simply clothing, including gloves and head caps, which
are worn to prevent contamination from coming in contact with the workers’ clothes
or skin.
 Often a simple set of disposable coveralls along with gloves and a skull cap are worn
to prevent personnel contamination.
 During wet maintenance evolutions, a plastic set of coveralls is also worn.
When the maintenance evolution is completed, the workers will carefully remove their outer set of protective
clothing minimizing contact of the exterior surface of the clothing with their undergarments and skin.
The contaminated protective clothing is then placed in a properly staged container for disposal.
 After exiting the controlled contamination areas, the workers should monitor
themselves with a pancake type probe to ensure that they are not contaminated.
 The probe should be held within one-half inch of the body and moved at a rate of two to
three inches per second.
 Probe contact with the body should be minimized to prevent possible probe
contamination.
 Monitoring the whole body for contamination usually takes three to five minutes on
the average.
 Special attention should be paid to the hands, feet, and head of the worker.
 Generally speaking, a reading of 100 cpm above background using a pancake type probe
indicates personnel contamination.
If a worker is found to be contaminated during monitoring, he must be decontaminated.

 The simplest way to decontaminate a worker is to use soap and water.
 A mild soap giving a good lather and tepid water should be used.
 Strong alkaline soaps or abrasives are to be avoided.
 Once the worker has washed the affected area, he should monitor again to ensure that
the contamination has been removed.
 It must be remembered that contamination is never destroyed, but only transferred
from one medium to another.
 Thus, if contamination is present in sufficient quantities, the agents used in
decontamination must be treated as radioactive waste.
13.0 AIRBORNE CONTAMINATION CONTROL
Many maintenance evolutions such as grinding, welding, scraping, and sandblasting on contaminated items cause
loose surface contamination to become airborne.

Page 681
ABG
If radioactive material is present in the air above 25% of the Federal regulations contained in 10 CFR 20, the area
must be posted as an Airborne Radioactive Material Area.
The limits used in the federal and state regulations use the designation MPC.
 MPC stands for Maximum Permissible Concentration.
The maximum permissible concentration is that amount of radioactive material that an individual may inhale for 40
hours per week, 50 weeks per year, for his working lifetime and not exceed the federal and state radiation exposure
limits.
 If the air activity is at MPC levels, a person could remain in the area for 40 hours per
week.
 If the activity level is only half of the MPC value, the person could remain in the area
twice as long.
 If the activity is twice the MPC value, the opposite is true, and the person could remain
in the area only 20 hours.
MPC values are used for two things.

 First they are an indicator.
 When a person sees an Airborne Radioactivity Warning sign, he knows that the
airborne concentrations in that area are at least 25% of the federal and state
limits.
 Secondly, MPC values are often used as a threshold point for determining when
personnel should be placed in respiratory protective equipment.
 Generally speaking, any posted airborne radioactivity area should require some
form of respiratory protection.
To determine if an airborne radioactivity situation exists, air samples must be taken and counted.
 Normally, several different isotopes will be found on the air sampling patch.
 To determine which isotopes are present in the air, and thus which MPC value to
use, requires laboratory analysis.
 All radionuclides have different MPC values due to the fact that different radionuclides
cause different amounts of biological damage when breathed into the body.
 For untrained radiation workers and members of the general public, the MPC value for
unknown mixtures of alphaernitters is 2 x 10' uCi/ml.
State and federal law requires the tracking of the MPCs accumulated by an individual whenever that individual may
exceed 40 MPC-hours in any given week.
Therefore, we normally track MPCs accumulated for an individual whenever he is exposed to airborne concentrations
greater than 25% of the MPC value.
That way, data is available should the individual exceed 40 MPC-hours in any given week.
By federal and state law, no individual is allowed to accumulate more than 520 MPGs in any given quarter.

Page 682
ABG
To reduce the amount of radioactive material a person breathes, and to reduce his total MPC accumulation,
respiratory devices are worn.
Different respiratory devices have different protection factors assigned to them.
 A protection factor is a measurement that can be used to determine the efficiency of a
respirator to filter radioactive material out of the air.
 A half-faced respirator normally is assigned a protection factor of 10, and a full faced
respirator is assigned a protection factor of 50.
 Thus, if an individual was exposed to an airborne concentration of 10 MPCs for one
hour, his total MPC accumulated exposure would be 10 MPC-hours.
 However, if the individual was wearing a half-faced respirator with a protection
factor of 10, instead of breathing 10 MPGs he would only be breathing 1 MPC.
 Thus, his MPC exposure for the same one hour period would only be 1 MPC per
hour.
14.0 NORM WORKERS PROTECTION PLAN
The intent and purpose of this Worker Protection Plan is to provide guidelines for the safety and welfare of ABG
personnel working in and around areas where NORM contamination is prevalent.
ABG is providing this Plan for workers' protection, to aid in the identification of a possible NORM contaminated
area or piece of equipment, and to aid in minimizing the spread of NORM contaminants.
This Plan has been prepared in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local regulations.
Each state or country will probably have its own rules and laws regulating NORM.
 In this program, there may be references to the State of Louisiana.
 This is so because Louisiana was the first state to regulate NORM operations and
probably has the most stringent regulations.
 Be sure to check with the Safety Director for specific regulations.
 Remember NORM is subject to be found at any work location.
The concepts of As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) and Time, Distance and Shielding shall be strictly
adhered to in terms of personnel exposure to NORM.
 These Concepts shall be associated with any and every activity involving radioactive
material, and will be incorporated into regularly scheduled safety meetings and prior to
the commencement of any activity to be done in NORM contaminated atmospheres or
with NORM contaminated equipment.
In the event that the company did get involved with a NORM project the Safety Director would be assigned
the responsibility to serve as the Program Administrator.
Their responsibilities include:
 Ensuring that employees have completed the training required by this procedure.
 Sending all training records to the President.

Page 683
ABG
 The implementing and enforcing the company NORM Workers Protection Plan.
 Investigating all employee concerns regarding NORM on Company or Client premises.
 Informing the president of any employee concerns or potential exposure incidents
involving NORM.
 Informing the supervisors and company management of any suspected or newly
identified sources of NORM on Company or Client premises.
15.0 SOURCE OF HAZARDS
The source of hazards associated with the company’s operation would be:
 Fumes
 Scale
 Sludge
 Solids
 Hydrocarbons
 Waste water
16.0 LOCATIONS OF SOURCE HAZARDS
In the company’s work activities NORM hazards could be found in:

 Piping
 Tanks
 Pumps
 Process equipment
17.0 ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES OF EXPOSURE
During repair or maintenance, personnel could be exposed to hazards of NORM while:

 Breaking, cleaning, repairing, and installing interconnecting piping, tanks and
equipment.
18.0 STANDARD WORK PROCEDURES
The following procedures shall be followed when working with NORM contaminated equipment or materials:
 Determine if the equipment on which they are working has been in service that could
expose the equipment components to NORM.
 If working on contaminated equipment, minimize the exposure potential by completing
work activities when a minimum number of personnel are in the work area.
 Notification to employees and contractors shall be furnished where-ever the
presence of NORM contamination is known.
 This will be accomplished through safety meetings, signs and notices.

Page 684
ABG
 There will be no eating, drinking, smoking, or chewing tobacco allowed in the

immediate work area where NORM contaminated fluids, solids, equipment and/or
soil are being handled.
 Direct skin contact with scale, sludges, and solids should be avoided.
 Precautions will be taken to minimize further NORM contamination.
 For work operations that have the potential to produce NORM contaminated dusts the
following will occur:
 Contaminated area will be dampened with water, prior to work activities, to
minimize enhancement of airborne particulates.
 Personnel shall wear appropriate personal protective equipment as specified
below.
 Safety glasses will be worn for eye protection.
 Respirators appropriate for radioactive particulates will be worn during any
operation.
 The appropriate respirators include:
 Half-face High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirators.
 Full-face Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) respirators.
 Full-face supplied-air respirators.
 Work operations will be conducted in well ventilated areas.
 These areas will be restricted to a minimum of only those trained personnel
necessary to accomplish work operations.
 Openings on contaminated equipment and pipe should be sealed by wrapping
them in plastic.
 Minimize the amount of cutting, grinding, sandblasting, welding, drilling, or
polishing of contaminated equipment.
 Plastic ground covers should be used whenever possible to contain any NORM
contamination and to facilitate cleanup when work is performed on NORM
contaminated equipment.
 This may cause a release of contaminated particulates from the equipment, such
as during cutting, grinding, hammering, or drilling.
 Ground covers should also be implemented during the temporary storage of NORM
contaminated materials and equipment.
 Hands and face must be washed after working with potentially contaminated
equipment.
 Personnel monitoring, as defined in this program, will be conducted before leaving the
NORM restricted area.
Company personnel should utilize appropriate protective equipment, when loose contamination is suspected or
work tasks require any action that might produce dust or contact with contaminated equipment.
The following procedure should be followed:
 Utilize a respirator approved for radioactive particulates.

Page 685
ABG
 Wear suitable coveralls, such as disposable tyvek, and gloves.

 Where possible, conduct work activities in well-ventilated areas.
 Utilize, to the extent possible, plastic ground covers to contain contaminants and
facilitate cleanup.
 Decontaminate gloves, respirators, coveralls, and rags, or place them in double bags
and seal for proper disposal.
The following personal protective equipment will be worn by all employees at all times while working in NORM
contaminated areas:
 Hardhats
 Rubber steel-toed boots
 Safety glasses with face shields
 Disposable anti-contamination suits
 Respiratory protection as described above
 T.L.D. badges
 T.L.D. badges shall be worn at all times, and exclusively at the NORM work-site.
 Each employee shall be assigned a T.L.D. with a specific badge number.
 T. L. D. badges are not to be worn by different individuals during the period of
issuance.
 This will ensure proper documentation of each individual's exposure level.
 T.L.D. badges will be handled with extreme care.
 They shall be kept clean, dry, be worn between the neck and waist, and be
exchanged on a quarterly basis.
 Female employees may request exchanges on a monthly basis.
 Records of individual exposures shall be kept and maintained indefinitely and
provided upon request.
 All T.L.D.'s, to include spare, unassigned, and control badges, shall be kept in a
non-contaminated area when not being used.
 Lost or damaged T.L.D.'s shall be reported to the individual's supervisor
immediately and a replacement provided.
20.0 SECURITY AND POSTING
Storage areas for equipment and any other contaminated areas shall be properly marked with radioactive
warning signs according to the following:
CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS
The following signs will be required for areas with radiation.

CAUTION RADIATION AREA
The following signs will be required for areas with radiation of such levels that a major portion of the body could
receive:

Page 686
ABG
 In any one hour, a dose of 5 millirems.

 In any five consecutive days, a dose in excess of 100 millirems.
Any and all contaminated areas shall be deemed RESTRICTED areas and shall be cordoned off with yellow tape or
signs with the words "CAUTION RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL" in red or magenta.
Yellow tape with the words "CAUTION RADIATION AREA" in gold or magenta shall be used in any contaminated
area in which an individual could receive doses greater than five millirems in any one hour, or 100 millirems in any
5 consecutive days.
These areas shall be restricted areas in which only trained and authorized personnel will be allowed.
21.0 TESTING AND INSTRUMENTATION
ABG does not and will not employ qualified personnel to test for NORM.
This activity will be performed by the client or a contract Radiation Safety Supervisor.
Survey meter specifications to be used by the company are as outlined below.
 Survey Meter with Geiger-Meuller Pancake Probe
 A survey meter with a GM Pancake probe will detect Alpha, Beta, and Gamma
radiation.
 Readings shall be recorded in counts per minute (CPM).
 The pancake probe is generally used for external surface or personnel contamination
surveys.
 It is also the generally preferred instrument for use in wipe-testing.
Survey Meter with Gamma Scintillator

 Scintillation detectors will detect exposure levels of Gamma radiation.
 Readings shall be recorded in microroentgens per hour (uR/hr).
 Scintillators shall demonstrate accuracy to within 20% of actual radiation level on
each scale.
 Scintillation detectors are generally used for area and equipment surveys.
22.0 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES FOR SURVEY METERS
The following general operating procedures will be used for survey meters:
 Inspect meter, probe, and cables for damage.
 Test battery level.
 Most meters have battery check capabilities.
 Check background level in a non-contaminated area.
 Background levels in Louisiana generally fall between 4 and 10 uR/hr.
 Check meter response and calibration with a radiation check source.
 If response is not within the expected range, do not use.
 Return meter for recalibration.

Page 687
ABG
 Check audible in both on and off positions to ensure proper functioning.

 Verify proper functioning of Slow and Fast settings.
 Document results of meter function checks.
 Keep meter and probe clean to prevent contamination.
23.0 CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS
Meters shall be calibrated by an authorized facility every 6 months and after any maintenance beyond battery
changes.
Authorized facilities for calibration are:
 Ludlum Measurements, Inc., Sweetwater, TX (915)235-5494
 Amersham Corp., Baton Rouge, LA (504)751-5893
 Suntrac Services, Houston, TX (713)326-2346
24.0 AIR SAMPLERS
Air samplers should be used:

 At the beginning of each new operation or site.
 At times when new contaminants are introduced to the work site.
 When there is the potential for radon levels to exceed allowable limits.
Air samplers shall be used by qualified personnel only.

 Sample filter disks shall be checked with a pancake probe only after a minimum of 60
cubic feet of air sample has been collected.
 The sample filter disk will be sealed and sent to a radiochemistry laboratory meeting
EPA standards and criteria for analysis for gross Alpha/Beta.
Results shall be recorded in picocuries per liter (pCi/L) or equivalent.

Documentation and records shall be maintained for not less than 5 years.
Should "hot spots" be detected, soil samples shall be analyzed for Radium 226 and Radium 228 content by a
radiochemistry lab meeting EPA criteria.
 Soil sample results shall be reported in pCi/gm or equivalent units
25.0 WATER CONTAMINATION
All water contaminated during processing, spill containment, and decontamination operations shall also be
sampled and analyzed before being released to the environment.
Water sample results shall be reported in uCi/ml or equivalent units.
26.0 AIR CONTAMINATION
Air samples shall be taken during all NORM operations.

Page 688
ABG
If the sample data indicates air contamination above acceptable levels, the operations being conducted will be
stopped and reevaluated.
 Air samples shall be analyzed by a radiochemistry lab meeting EPA criteria.
27.0 COMPARISON LEVELS
Background
 All areas by nature contain some level of background radiation.
 In testing for radiation levels of equipment or product the background level must be
subtracted from the reading on the equipment or product.
All operations will be conducted to achieve ALARA.

28.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
28.1 Emergency Procedures for Spills.
In event of an accidental spill or release, the personnel involved shall contact the company personnel as defined
by this procedure.
Emergency medical attention shall be given to any injured personnel until medical help arrive.
The site shall be evacuated and secured to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering the area.
All personnel present shall be detained and checked for contamination.
Persons found to be contaminated will immediately proceed to the decontamination area and follow the
established DECON procedures.
Signs shall be posted in the NORM contaminated area as follows:
 < 5 millirems per hour - "Caution Radioactive Material"
 6 - 100 millirems per hour - "Caution Radiation Area"
 3. Above 100 millirems per hour - "Caution High Radiation Area"
Efforts to contain the spill shall be implemented to prevent further contamination or discharge of NORM
contamination into streams, waterways, or sewer systems.
Proper personal protective equipment shall be worn at all times during cleanup operations.
All NORM contaminated material shall be placed in D.O.T. 17-H drums or other D.O.T. approved containers and
properly labeled.
29.0 NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES
In the event of an emergency, immediate notification shall be made to:

 Your District Manager
 Company safety department
 Depending on the severity of the event, the following persons shall be contacted.

Page 689
ABG
PRIMARY COMPANY CONTACT

DISTRICT MANAGER’S NAME
ABG ADDRESS
WORK PHONE
HOME PHONE
SECONDARY COMPANY CONTRACT
NAME
ABG ADDRESS
WORK PHONE
HOME PHONE
PRIMARY CLIENT CONTRACT
NAME
COMPANY ADDRESS
WORK PHONE
HOME PHONE
SECONDARY CLIENT CONTACT
NAME
COMPANY ADDRESS
TITLE
WORK PHONE
HOME PHONE
Note: Client or District Manager will contact “DEPARTMETOF ENVIRONMENTA QUALITY

PROTECTION DIVISION”.

Page 690
ABG
30.0 TRANSPORTATION
The Department of Transportation defines radioactive materials as any material having a specific activity greater
than 2,000 picocuries per gram (pCi/gm).
The majority of oilfield NORM wastes and materials do not have specific activities greater than 2,000 pCi/gm and
are exempt from DOT radioactive material regulations.
However, if the container contains NORM materials with a specific activity greater than 30 pCi/gm or surface
radiation levels are greater than 25 microroentgens per hour (uR/hr) above background levels, it must be
packaged, marked and/or labeled in accordance with Louisiana Radiation Regulations, Chapters 14 and 15, and
must be manifested.
31.0 SHIPMENT OF NORM
Each shipment of NORM waste to a facility specifically licensed for storage or disposal and that contains Ra-226 or
Ra-228 in concentrations greater than 30 pCi/gm or greater that 25 microroentgens per hour, excluding
background, shall be accompanied by a shipment manifest.
A manifest form must be obtained from the LDEQ Radiation Protection Division and must consist of, at a
minimum, the number of copies that will provide the generator, each transporter, and the operator of the
designated facility with one copy each for their records with the remaining copies to be returned to the generator
and the other appropriate parties.
A generator who transports or offers for transportation, NORM waste for off-site treatment, storage, or disposal
must prepare and sign sufficient copies of a manifest before transporting the waste off-site.
A generator must designate on the manifest one facility which is permitted to handle the waste described on the
manifest.
 If the transporter is unable to deliver the NORM to the designated facility, the
generator must either designate another facility or instruct the transporter to return
the waste.
Generators must provide a statement concerning the nature of the material and general guidelines for an
emergency situation involving this waste to accompany the manifest on shipments and loads.
If the NORM is to be transported out-of-state, the generator will be responsible for receiving the completed,
signed manifest from the out-of-state storage or disposal facility.
Generators must get written confirmation of acceptability of the NORM from the operator of the storage of
disposal facility before shipping the NORM.
 The confirmation must be maintained as part of the facility manifest records.
 Generators are required to report to the division any irregularities between the
NORM actually received and the waste described on the manifest, or any other
irregularities, within fifteen days.

Page 691
ABG
33.0 REQUIRED INFORMATION
The manifest must contain all of the following information prior to leaving the generator site:
 A state manifest document which shall be obtained from the LDEQ Radiation
Protection Division if the destination point is in Louisiana.
 The generator's name, mailing address, telephone number, and NORM general
license number.
 The name, Interstate Commerce Commission number (ICC), and telephone number
of each transporter.
 The name, address, telephone number, and NORM specific license number of the
designated facility, if applicable.
 The description of the waste(s) (e.g., scale, soil, sludge) or contaminated equipment
(heater treater, tubulars).
 The total quantity of all NORM by units of weight in tons, cubic yards, pounds, or
gallons (liquid only).
 The type and number of containers (metal drums, barrels, kegs, fiberboard or plastic
drums, cargo tanks, tank trucks, dump trucks, metal boxes, cartons, cases, burlap
bags, paper bags, plastic bags, wooden drums, tanks portable, cylinder, wooden
boxes, and fiber or plastic boxes) as loaded into or onto the transport vehicle.
 If the weight is known, the volume and estimated weight should be provided.
34.0 USE OF MANIFEST
The generator must:

 Sign and date the manifest certification by hand when the initial transporter accepts
the shipment.
 Obtain the handwritten signature of the initial transporter and date of acceptance of
the manifest.
 Retain one copy.
 Give the transporter the remaining copies of the manifest.
 Receive the fully signed copy of the manifest from the designated storage or disposal
facility within 45 days from the delivery to the initial transporter.
 In the event the generator does not receive the signed manifest timely, it shall:
 Notify the division in writing within seven days.
 Conduct an investigation into the reasons why it did not receive the manifest.
 Report the results of the investigation to the division.
35.0 TRANSPORTERS
A transporter may not accept NORM for transportation unless the NORM is accompanied by sufficient copies of a
manifest, properly prepared and each copy signed and dated by the generator and each previous transporter in
accordance with these regulations.

Page 692
ABG
Before transporting the NORM, the transporter must sign and date each copy of the manifest acknowledging
acceptance of the NORM from the generator or previous transporter.
The transporter must return a signed copy to the generator or previous transporter before leaving the property
with the NORM.
A transporter who delivers NORM to another transporter or to the designated storage or disposal facility shall:
 Obtain the date and signature of the accepting transporter or designated storage or
disposal facility.
 Retain one copy of the manifest signed and dated by the generator, all previous
transporters, and the next transporter or designated facility.
 Give the remaining copies of the manifest to the accepting transporter or designated
facility.
36.0 DESIGNATED FACILITY
The designated facility should fill out their portion, retain a copy for their files, submit the original to the division,
and send any remaining copies to the generator no later than 15 days after delivery of the NORM waste.
37.0 TRAINING
37.1 Requirements
No personnel shall be allowed into a NORM restricted area unless the individual has been properly trained in
NORM by a DEQ recognized instructor.
The NORM training course shall include, as a minimum, the following areas:
 Radiation Safety Fundamentals
 Worker Protection and Operating Procedures
 Radiation Detection Instrumentation
 Hazard locations
 Methods to identify the hazards
 Methods to protect themselves
 Potential Exposures of Routine and Emergency Situations
 Respiratory Protection
 Respirators and Their Limitations
 Filter Selection
 Use and Care of Filters
 HEPA Filters
In addition to the above, the supervisor shall complete 8 additional hours of training in the following areas:
 Regulatory and Licensing Procedures
 Advanced Operating and Emergency Procedures
 Environmental Monitoring
 Record keeping and Documentation Procedures

Page 693
ABG
 Transportation and Disposal of NORM contaminated materials
37.2 Frequency
Company personnel trained as Workers or RSO will be trained according to the following schedule:
 Before exposures could occur.
 Refresher every year.
Company personnel will be trained according to the following schedule for NORM Awareness:
 Initially upon hire.
 Refresher every year

Page 694
ABG
NEW EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................666
SCOPE667
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................667
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................667
1.0 Safety Mentor .............................................................................................................................................667
1.1 Project Manager......................................................................................................................................667
1.2 Safety Mentor..........................................................................................................................................667
1.3 New Employees.......................................................................................................................................667
2.0 NEW EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS..................................................................................................668
2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................668
3.0 SAFETY MENTOR SELECTION........................................................................................................................668
4.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................668
4.1 Safety Mentor Training............................................................................................................................668
4.2 New Employee Training...........................................................................................................................669
4.3 Verification of Training............................................................................................................................669
A. Safety Mentor Training...........................................................................................................................669
B. New Employee Training...........................................................................................................................669
5.0 MENTORING................................................................................................................................................669
6.0 EVALUATION PROCESS.................................................................................................................................670

Page 695
ABG
PURPOSE
This procedure provides guidelines for the New Employee Development (NED) Program, which is designed to
assist new employees in avoiding incidents and injuries and to enhance their acclimation to ABG’s HSE culture.
Industry workplace injury trends indicate that approximately 40% of injuries occur to new-hire employees with
less than 3 months tenure on the job. Early identification and correction of unsafe work habits will help to
promote a safe and healthy workplace.
SCOPE
This procedure describes new employee orientation, training procedures, and content.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
New Employee – Any new ABG employee with less than 30 days of experience with ABG.
1.0 Safety Mentor – A ABG supervisor designated by the ABG Project Manager or delegate who has
demonstrated special skill or expertise, and offers sincere guidance.
Responsibilities
1.1 Project Manager
The Project Manager or delegate is responsible for:

 Selecting and Advising each Safety Mentor acting in a supervisory role on the project
of his or her responsibilities as set out below;
 Providing resources to carry out training;
 Nominating responsible people to conduct training; and
 Participating and confirming that senior representatives provide for all new
employees to attend required orientation and job-specific training.
1.2 Safety Mentor
The Safety Mentor is responsible for:

 Attending required Safety Mentor training.
 Confirming that each person for whom they are responsible has already attended the
required training in accordance with this procedure.
 Act as a Trainer, Observer, Evaluator, and Resource to each new employee put under
your direction.
 Read and sign the Supervisor HSE Responsibilities form (Form 000 653 F0145).

Page 696
ABG
1.3 New Employees
New Employees are responsible for:

 Attending and constructively participating in the New Employee Development
training, at the time and location, as notified by their direct supervisor or other
authorized person.
 Upon completion of the training, employees read and sign the Employee HSE
Responsibilities form (Form 000 653 F0147).
2.0 NEW EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS
2.1 Overview
All newly hired and newly assigned field personnel will have a “NED” hard hat sticker attached to their hard hats
for a period of thirty (30) days. The intent is to assist Project/Site Management, Supervision, and others in
identifying new employees and to allow for intervention when their behavior or environment puts them at risk.
The outer ring of the perforated sticker will be removed after 30 days, given the employee’s demonstration of
his/her ability to safely perform their work, and with approval of their respective Mentor. Each new employee will
have assigned to them, for 30 days, an experienced Mentor who has demonstrated safe work habits and has been
on the job more than thirty (30) days. When a new Project/Site is in the process of deployment, the Project
Manager will determine the respective mentors. Mentor training is available to promote ownership and
accountability of this key initiative.
3.0 SAFETY MENTOR SELECTION
The Project Manager or his/her delegate will select a Safety Mentor based on the following qualifications:
 Must be a supervisor, foreman or above.
 Must be familiar with the New Employee’s job, the oversight responsibilities required, and the
hazards associated with that job.
 Must be familiar with ABG / site policies, procedures and any specialized actions required in the
work to be performed.
 Must exhibit the ability to recognize hazards and at-risk acts.
 Must be able and willing to challenge personnel in the workplace that do not comply with ABG /
site procedures, policies, or requirements and enforce the Stop Work Authority.
The Safety Mentor is required to attend the Safety Mentor training as outlined in Section 4.0 of this procedure.
4.0 TRAINING
4.1 Safety Mentor Training
The Safety Mentor Training will include the following:

 Reasons for Mentoring
 What is Mentoring?
 Instruction on Fulfilling a Mentor’s Roles

Page 697
ABG
 Trainer
 Observer
 Evaluator
 Resource
 New Employee Development Program Requirements
 Rewards of Mentoring
4.2 New Employee Training
The training / orientation process for the New Employee is structured as follows:
 ABG HSE Orientation.
 Client Site Specific Orientation
 New Employee Development (NED) Onsite Training
4.3 Verification of Training
A. Safety Mentor Training
Record of the completion of the Safety Mentor training will be recorded on the Training/Educational Attendance
Log (Form 000 653 F0269). All records will be kept by ABG Corporate Safety. Upon successful completion of the
Safety Mentor Training the Mentor will be given the following Hard Hat Sticker.
B. New Employee Training
Records of the ABG HSE Orientation and the Site Specific Orientation will be kept by the ARSC Safety Council
where they attended the training, and will be verified onsite on their Safety Council Card. New Employee
Development (NED) Training will be recorded on the Training/Educational Attendance Log (Form 000 653 F0269).
The log and NED test will be kept onsite by the HSE Representative and forwarded to ABG Corporate Safety upon
completion of the project. Upon successful completion of the New Employee Development Training the
employee will be given the following Hard Hat Sticker.
5.0 MENTORING
After the New Employee has completed all required training, he/she will be assigned to a mentor. The New
Employee Development Tracking Log (Attachment 05) will be used to record the Mentor’s Name, Employee’s Full

Page 698
ABG
Name, Start Date, and 30 Day Evaluation Date. This log will be kept onsite by the ABG HSE Representative until
completion of the job, at which time it will be forwarded to ABG Corporate Safety.
For a period of 30 days the Safety Mentor will coach and observe the employee during his/her daily work tasks to
assure compliance with all applicable site and ABG Policies and Procedures. At a minimum the Safety Mentor will
focus on the following topics:
 Site and ABG Rules and Regulations
 Proper Use of the Safety Task Assignment (STA) Process
 Incident/Injury Reporting Requirements
 Stop Work Authority
 Proper PPE Usage
 Proper Tool Usage
 Fall Prevention Requirements
 Housekeeping Practices
 Fire Prevention Practices
 Work Permit Procedures
 Proper Barricade Usage
 Incident/Injury Reporting Requirements
 Emergency Evacuation / Safety Shower / Eye Wash Locations
6.0 EVALUATION PROCESS
At the end of a New Employee’s 30 day evaluation period the Safety Mentor must determine if the employee has
demonstrated a sincere commitment to the following:
 Obeys all site rules and regulations
 Seeks to promote Health, Safety & Environmental in all aspects of their job
 Adheres to ABG’s Employee Handbook
 Wears PPE at all times where required
 Gets involved in the STA process … discusses safety concerns
 Ensures proper training where required
 Ensures tools and equipment are used in a safe manner
 Seeks to correct unsafe conditions when identified
 Complies with Fall Prevention requirements
 Promotes good Housekeeping practices
 Maintains Back Safety awareness, ensuring proper lifting techniques
 Promotes good Fire Prevention practices
 Ensures properly facilitated permit is in place when required
 Promotes proper barricade usage
 Obeys danger signs/tags
 Understands the importance of immediately reporting any incident
During the 30 day evaluation period the New Employee must also demonstrate sufficient craft skill to perform
their job at his/her craft level. The Safety Mentor will fill out and sign the New Employee Development Evaluation

Page 699
ABG
Form (Attachment 06). If the employee demonstrates the required skills and level of commitment then he/she
graduates from the New Employee Development Program and will remove the outer ring from the NED hardhat
sticker. If the employee does not demonstrate the skills or required level of commitment he/she will re-attend
the required training, continue to be mentored and will be re-evaluated in 30 days.
The New Employee Development Evaluation Form will be kept onsite by the ABG HSE Representative until
completion of the job, at which time it will be forwarded to ABG Corporate Safety.

Page 700
Date Title of Course
Total Class Hours Instructor(s)
CEU Class Location

(0.1 unit for every 1 hour of class)
ABG employees –– enter your personnel number.

All other participants –– enter your ID or badge number.
Name Personnel No.

Signature (ID or badge number if Job Title Project Name/Location/Number
(print legibly)
non-ABG)
Note to Trainers: As a matter of record, this form must be signed by each attendee. Forward this log to ABG Corporate HSE Department via fax (713.643.1744) or email
(kathy.bradley@ABGworld.com)
Note: This form is referenced in Practice 000.653.1001.

Project Name Project Location Project No./Contract No.
Supervisor (print) Employer Date
You have a responsibility to:
 Work safely to the best of your knowledge.

 Immediately correct or report unsafe conditions to your supervisor and/or HSE Representative.
 Provide information to supervision for improving project/site HSE conditions.
 Obey the rules, requirements, and HSE instructions given to you on this project/site.
 Understand project/site HSE goals and objectives.
 Wear safety equipment properly.
 Attend scheduled HSE training sessions.
 Take an interest in the safety of crewmembers — especially helpers. Your guidance and the benefit of your experience will be
appreciated.
 Take an interest in protecting the environment that could be impacted by the project/site’s activities.
 Have a working knowledge of tools and equipment before operating them.
 Pay special attention to new employees; they may not know all the rules and may need your help to work on this project/site in a
safe manner.
 Discuss any assignment that you feel is unsafe with your foreman or supervisor. If you are still not convinced that you have been
requested to perform a task in a safe manner, then use the open-door policy. Discuss the issue with the next supervisor up the
chain of command (all the way to the Project/Site Manager or the HSE Representative) until you are satisfied that the assignment or
work procedure is safe.
 You will be subject to disciplinary action by your supervisor for committing an unsafe act, which may include termination of
employment. Taking chances or risks concerning safety will not be tolerated! UNSAFE ACTS ARE PROHIBITED!
 ABG has the reputation for being the safest company in the industry. This is because everyone working on our projects/sites is HSE-
conscious. Don’t forget that you are the HSE program and the HSE program is for you!
Name:
Social Security/ID No:
Job Title:
By signing below, I acknowledge that I have read and understand my HSE responsibilities as defined above.
Signature:
ABG
New Employee Development Tracking Log
NEW EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT TRACKING LOG
Mentor Name New Employee Name Hire Date 30-Day Date

ABG
NOISE EXPOSURE – HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAM
NOISE EXPOSURE - HEARING CONSERVATIONS PROGRAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................675
Employee Training and Information.......................................................................................................................676
Training Program................................................................................................................................................676
Employee Information Sources..........................................................................................................................677
Control Measures...................................................................................................................................................677
Engineering/Administrative Controls.................................................................................................................677
Hearing Protective Devices.................................................................................................................................677
Recordkeeping Requirements............................................................................................................................678
Audiometric Test Room Records........................................................................................................................678
Audiometer Records...........................................................................................................................................678

Page 704
ABG
PURPOSE
Audiometric testing shall be provided annually to ALL employees whose exposures equal or exceed an eight (8)
hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels.
Audiometric tests shall be performed by a licensed or certified audiologist, otolaryngologist, or other qualified
physician, or by a technician who is certified by the Counsel of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing
Conservation, or who has satisfactorily demonstrated competence in administering audiometric examinations,
obtaining valid audiograms, and properly using, maintaining and calibrating audiometers. The technician who
performs audiometric tests shall be responsible to an audiologist, otolaryngologist or qualified physician.
Baseline audiograms shall be obtained for ALL NEW employees. Testing to establish a baseline audiogram shall be
preceded by at least 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. This requirement may be met by wearing
hearing protectors that will reduce the employee's exposure to an acceptable level.
A repeat audiogram shall be provided to ALL employees in the hearing conservation program annually.
Audiometric tests shall be pure tone, air conduction, hearing threshold examinations, with test frequencies including
as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, and 8000 Hz. Tests at each frequency shall be taken separately
for each ear.
Audiometric tests shall be conducted with audiometers (including microprocessor audiometers) that meet the
specifications of, and are maintained and used in accordance with ANSI S3.6-1969.
Audiometric examinations shall be conducted in an approved audiometric test booth.
The employee's annual audiogram shall be compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if the
audiogram is valid and if a standard threshold shift has occurred.
The audiologist, otolaryngologist, or qualified physician shall review problem audiograms and shall determine
whether there is a need for further evaluation.
If it is determined that a standard threshold shift has occurred, the following action shall be taken by management:
 The affected employee shall be informed of this fact in writing, within 21 days of the determination.
 Other employees similarly exposed who are not using hearing protectors must be evaluated and hearing
protection must be provided if warranted.
 Other employees similarly exposed who are using hearing protectors must be evaluated and refitted with
hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if warranted.
Employee Training and Information

Page 705
ABG
Training Program
Each affected employee shall be provided with documented annual training which shall include the following:
 An explanation of the contents of the noise standard and hearing conservation program.
 Instruction in the nature of the noise hazards and the effects of noise on hearing.
 A description of specific work areas, processes, machinery or other equipment producing hazardous noise
exposures.
 An explanation of the engineering and administrative control measures being used to reduce noise
exposures.
 Instructions in the selection, use, sanitary care, maintenance, and limitations of hearing protective devices.
 An explanation of the purpose of the noise monitoring program and audiometric testing, and an explanation
of the monitoring and testing procedures.
Employee Information Sources
For work areas equal to, or exceeding, an 8-hour time-weighted average noise exposure of 85 dBA, warning signs
shall be posted. This requirement includes posting signs on mobile noise sources, such as vacuum trucks and
hydroblasters.
Copies of the OSHA hearing conservation standard shall be made available to ALL affected employees, and a copy of
the OSHA standard shall also be posted in the workplace.
Affected employees or their representatives shall be provided the opportunity to observe any measurements of
employee noise exposure.
Access to employee medical records shall be provided in accordance with OSHA requirements.
Control Measures:
Engineering/Administrative Controls
Work areas, processes and equipment which may cause exposure of employees to unacceptable noise levels shall be
controlled by engineering and/or administrative controls wherever feasible, with due consideration to available
technology and economic impact.
Consideration of the effects of noise shall be included as a factor in replacement, modification, and addition of
facilities and equipment.
Equipment design, layout, installation and purchasing criteria shall be developed to provide for noise control.

Page 706
ABG
Employee schedules may be adjusted as a means of administratively controlling exposure levels.
Hearing Protective Devices
Hearing protective devices shall be made available without cost to ANY employee exposed to noise above the action
level of 85 dBA-TWA.
Hearing protectors shall be replaced as necessary due to wear or deterioration.
Hearing protectors shall be worn:

 By any employee exposed above acceptable noise levels
 By any employee who is exposed to an 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA or greater and who has not yet had a baseline
audiogram.
 By any employee who has experienced a standard threshold shift.
Hearing protector attenuation shall be evaluated for the specific noise environments in which the protector will be
used.
Hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure at least to an 8-hour TWA of 90 dBA.
For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift, hearing protectors must attenuate employee
exposure to an 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA or below.
Recordkeeping Requirements
The following records shall be maintained for each noise control and hearing conservation program:
 Employee Exposure Measurements (individual and representative):
 Shall include date, location, number and result of measurements: description of noise measurement
equipment and calibration record. (2-year retention)
 Employee audiograms shall include name, job classification; date, examiner's name and qualifications;
audiometric equipment manufacturer and model number, calibration record, and most recent noise
exposure assessment. (These records shall be maintained by the medical provider.)
Audiometric Test Room Records
Covering measurements of background sound pressure levels (for octave bands 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000 Hz)
date. (5-year retention by the medical provider.)

Page 707
ABG
Audiometer Records
 Acoustical and exhaustive calibration dates and numerical results of calibration. (5-year retention, by the
medical provider.)

Page 708
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
PERMIT TO WORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................679
SCOPE680
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................680
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................680
2.1 Project Manager......................................................................................................................................682
2.2 Permit to Work Assessor.........................................................................................................................682
2.3 Authorized Permit to Work Issuer (hereinafter called “issuer”)..............................................................682
2.4 Recipient..................................................................................................................................................682
3.0 APPOINTMENT AND TRAINING OF ISSUERS.................................................................................................683
3.1 Requirement............................................................................................................................................683
3.2 Training....................................................................................................................................................683
4.0 PERMIT TO WORK PROCESS.........................................................................................................................683
4.1 Issue of Permit to Work...........................................................................................................................683
4.2 Withdrawal of Permit to Work................................................................................................................684
4.3 Duration of Permit to Work.....................................................................................................................684
4.4 Change of Recipient or Authorized Permit Issuer....................................................................................684
4.5 Job Completion........................................................................................................................................685
4.6 Issuers Handling Multiple Permits to Work.............................................................................................685
4.7 Records....................................................................................................................................................685
5.0 SIMPLE LOCKOUT/TAGOUT..........................................................................................................................685
6.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................686

Page 709
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
PURPOSE
This practice describes a “work authorization” process and establishes the requirements for obtaining, issuing,
and withdrawing a Permit to Work.
SCOPE
 Appointment and Training of Permit to Work Issuers
 Permit Issuers Handling Multiple Permits to Work
 Permit to Work Process
 Simple Lockout/Tagout
APPLICATION
A determination will be made by the Project Manager and the HSE Representative whether a permit to work
(work authorization) process is needed for the project. If it is determined that a permit to work process is needed,
either the requirements of this practice will be implemented or an analogous process specified by the client. If
the client’s process is chosen, a gap analysis will be performed to identify if that process is equivalent to the
process described in this practice. If differences are found, a determination will be made by the Project Manager
and the HSE Representative whether implementation of the client’s process by ABG and/or its contractors will
include any or all of the requirements in this practice not found in the client’s process.
In any case, several activities require an activity-specific permit even if a permit to work process is not
implemented by a project.
DEFINITIONS
Simple Lockout/Tagout — A lockout/tagout action performed meeting all of the following:
1. The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or re-
accumulation of stored energy after shutdown that could endanger employees.
2. The machine or equipment has a single energy source that can be readily identified
and isolated.
3. The isolation and locking out of that energy source that completely de-energizes and
4. The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during

Page 710
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
6. The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized worker performing
the service or maintenance.
8. The employer, in using this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected
activation or re-energization of the machine or equipment during service or
maintenance.
Persons required to work under this practice will be trained in their responsibilities. This policy is not to
superceed any current client permitting requirement; but is to be used when a client permiting system is not
available.
A Permit to Work, Form 000.653.F0181, will be issued before starting activities to verify that adequate planning
has been completed in order to conduct the work safely and healthfully and in concert with sound environmental
practice.
The following activities may be approved by a Permit to Work:
 Excavations using slope of 1-1/2 to 1 or greater (reference Practice 000.653.3311)
 Wall penetrations (reference Practice 000.653.3309)
 Ceiling/roof penetrations performed “from below” (reference Practice 000.653.3304)
 Blasting (a new permit is required for each blast)
 Simple lockout/tagout — those situations where a Tagout Authorization Form is not
required (reference Practice 000.653.3315
 Vegetation/ground clearing (reference Practice 000.653.3312)
The following activities require permits in addition to the Permit to Work:

 Confined space (reference Practice 000.653.3322)
 Energized electrical work (reference Practice 000.653.3309)
 Welding, cutting, burning (hot work) (reference Practice 000.653.3101)
 Roof access (reference Practice 000.653.3304)
 Use of suspended personnel workbasket (reference 000.653.8132)
 Critical lift (reference Practice 000.653.3201)
 Line breaks (reference Practice 000.653.3320)
 Hot taps (reference Practice 000.653.3316)
 Access to high voltage areas (such as substations and yards)
 Working near overhead/adjacent power lines (reference Practice 000.653.3209)
 Excavating using a slope of less than 1-1/2 to 1, shoring, or benching (reference
Practice 000.653.3311)

Page 711
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
Note: These activities require an activity-specific permit even if the permit to work
process is not used.
Where used, supplementary permits will be noted in the space provided on the Permit to Work and a copy will be
attached to the Permit to Work.
Modifications to existing work areas—whether controlled by ABG, the client, or another entity—will be planned
and controlled. Permits to Work will not be issued for modifications unless the Issuer is satisfied that the
modifications have been authorized by “the owner.”
2.1 Project Manager
 Appoints a Permit to Work Assessor

 Appoints Permit to Work Issuers (hereafter referred to as Issuers) on Form
000.653.F0205
 Authorizes the list of exemptions
2.2 Permit to Work Assessor
 Trains Issuers and Recipients, as required.

 Assesses Issuers.
 Recommends to the Project Manager additional activity-specific permits each Issuer
should be appointed (authorized) to issue, if any.
 Notifies the Project Manager following satisfactory assessment of each Issuer and
recommends appointment.
 Develops/maintains a list of appointed Issuers
 Assesses effectiveness of the Permit to Work system and provides assistance to the
Project Manager, as required.
2.3 Authorized Permit to Work Issuer (hereinafter called “issuer”)
 Exercises direct operating control over the scope of a Permit to Work.

 Ensures procedural requirements have been implemented by considering hazards
associated with work in accordance with page 1 of the Permit to Work.
 If acting in the capacity of a Controlling Organization “lockout/tagout (LOTO)
administrator, confirms that all isolations are in place, tagged, and locked where
appropriate and de-isolates equipment, as necessary.
 Issues the Permit to Work face-to-face with the Recipient and discusses and verifies
that requirements are understood.
 Closes the Permit to Work face-to-face with the Recipient.

Page 712
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
2.4 Recipient
 Accepts a Permit to Work face-to-face from the Issuer after discussion of

requirements, and when requirements are fully understood.
 Observes precautions stipulated on the Permit to Work.
 Physically confirms all isolations and, if he/she is an Authorized Worker, places
his/her personal lock and Danger Tag on all isolations.
 Signs the Permit to Work and records date and time (24-hour clock).
 Responsible for his/her safe work practices and for those he/she is supervising.
 Removes all of his/her personal locks and Danger Tags (including strings or cable ties)
at completion of the LOTO activity or at end of shift and has face-to-face with the
Issuer.
 Monitors activities on the site under Permits to Work and activity-specific permits.
 Verifies that contractor supervisors arrange for a Permit to Work, as applicable.
 Is present for issue of the first Permit to Work for each contractor.
3.0 APPOINTMENT AND TRAINING OF ISSUERS
3.1 Requirements
Employees authorized to prepare and issue Permits to Work and other permits will be appointed in writing by the
Project/Site Manager.
Before appointment, prospective Issuers will demonstrate that they have:
 Sufficient knowledge of the relevant work areas and Permit to Work practice
 A responsible attitude toward safe work conditions and practices
 An understanding of the requirements pertaining to each of the activity-specific
permits they are being authorized to prepare
At the option of the Permit to Work Assessor, a period of supervised work experience may be required where the
prospective Issuer works with an appointed Issuer.
3.2 Training
Training for the prospective Issuer will consist of, but is not limited to, the following:
 Successful completion of an interview with the Permit to Work Assessor.
 Hands-on practical training under the direct supervision of an appointed Issuer
(permits can be drafted, but cannot be issued/signed by the prospective Issuer).
 Employees using this practice in their normal duties will be trained in use of the
practice.

Page 713
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
4.0 PERMIT TO WORK PROCESS
4.1 Issue of Permit to Work
An Assessment of Task Checklist (the first page of Form 000.653.F0181, Permit to Work) will be prominently
displayed with the Permit to Work in the work area covered by the Permit.
The Issuer will initiate a Permit to Work by:
 Using the checklist to verify that the activity(ies) can be done safely, that necessary
isolations are in place, and that all checklist items are complete
 Completing all sections of the Permit to Work up to and including authorization for
the work to proceed
The Recipient will:

 Read the Permit to Work.
 Discuss hazards and precautions with the Issuer.
 Where deemed necessary by either party, review the activity in the work area.
 Where required, obtain additional permits.
The Issuer will then issue the Permit to Work.

 The Recipient will sign the acceptance of the Permit to Work, insert the date and
time (24-hour clock), and annotate how many employees and/or contractor/lower-
tier workers will be involved in the activity(ies).
 The original Permit will remain in the office normally used for issuing Permits to
Work issue. A photocopy of the Permit to Work must be posted in the work area(s)
covered by the Permit.
Discussion of the Permit and associated permits, limitations, hazards, controls, etc., will be included in the daily
pre-task/Safety Task Assignment (STA) meeting.
4.2 Withdrawal of Permit to Work
Should there be a change in conditions in the work area that introduce new hazards to an activity being
performed under a Permit to Work, or render stated precautions/controls inadequate, the Recipient must stop
work and notify the Issuer of the situation (or vice versa if the Issuer learns of such a change).
If the activity(ies) under the Permit to Work should change after it has been signed, the original Permit to Work
must be withdrawn and revised and reissued to reflect the change in scope of work (or a new Permit to Work
issued).
The Issuer and, if applicable, client in direct operating control of a plant/system/area and equipment, have the
authority to stop the work and withdraw the Permit to Work at any time.
Any employee has the right to discuss withdrawal of a Permit to Work at any time with the Issuer.

Page 714
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
4.3 Duration of Permit to Work
The normal duration for a Permit to Work is one shift (may be 8 or more hours). The maximum duration will be
24 hours. An Issuer may extend the Permit to Work if the job is incomplete when the Permit expires, provided
there are no additional hazards, and the precautions specified on the original Permit to Work still apply.
Work is extended by completing the “Permit to Work Extension” section of the Permit. The extension must be
signed by an Issuer and re-accepted by the Recipient. Each extension has a maximum duration of 24 hours.
4.4 Change of Recipient or Authorized Permit Issuer
The Recipient leaving a job will sign the “Recipient Handing Back” section of the original Permit to Work.
The new Recipient for the job will sign the “Acceptance and Return” section of the original Permit to Work (and
note that he/she is taking over for the previous Recipient) after discussing the hazards and precautions with the
Issuer.
A new Issuer (such as at shift change) will countersign the original Permit to Work after verifying that it is safe for
the job to continue.
4.5 Job Completion
At job completion, or on leaving the job incomplete, the Recipient will:

 Ensure that all workers have removed their Authorized Worker Danger Tags and
locks.
 Sign the “Acceptance and Return” section of the Permit in the presence of the Issuer.
The Issuer will:

 Confirm that the work area is available for return to “the owner.”
 Verify the Recipient has left the area in an appropriate level of housekeeping.
 Sign and record the date and time in the “Job Complete” section of the Permit to
accept the work.
 Verify the safe return to “the owner.”
4.6 Issuers Handling Multiple Permits to Work
Issuers may be allowed to handle and be responsible for multiple Permits to Work at the discretion of the Permit
to Work Assessor.
A single Permit to Work may cover one discrete activity, or a single Permit to Work may cover a group of activities
in the same geographic area. Separate Permit to Work will be required for multiple activities in different
geographic areas.
At the discretion of the Issuer, a single Recipient may sign for multiple Permits to Work only if he/she can
supervise each group adequately. This condition and the number of people involved in the activities covered by
the Permit to Work must be recorded in the “Acceptance and Return” section of the Permit.

Page 715
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK
Multiple permits are more likely to occur when a large section (or sections) of an operating facility is shutdown,
but that should be the exception rather than the rule.
4.7 Records
Records will be maintained in a readily accessible manner, to include the following:

 Approved Authorized Permit Issuers (Form 000.653.F0205).
 Approved Permit to Work Activity Exemptions (Form 000.653.F0180).
 Training records of Issuers.
 Training records of Permit to Work Recipients.
 Copies of authorization documents for Issuers.
Original Permits to Work will be filed and retained for at least 12 months after job completion of the covered work
activity. In the case of an accident or unsafe incident, the associated Permit to Work will be retained for at least
7 years.
5.0 SIMPLE LOCKOUT/TAGOUT

6.0 REFERENCES

000.502.0100 ABG’s Administrative Practice for Rigging
000.502.1000 ABG’s Cranes and Rigging – Operations (Site
Specific)
000.653.3201 Cranes and Rigging

Page 716
ABG
PERMIT TO WORK

Forms:
000.653.F0180 Permit to Work Exemptions
000.653.F0205 Authorized Permit Issuers
000.653.F0280 Authorized Worker Danger Tag

Page 717
ABG
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT / ASSESSMENTS - PPE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................687
General Policy.........................................................................................................................................................688
Hazard Assessment.................................................................................................................................................689
Sources..............................................................................................................................................................689
Organize Data.....................................................................................................................................................690
Analyze Data.......................................................................................................................................................690
Controlling Hazards............................................................................................................................................690
Assessment and Selection..................................................................................................................................690
Selection Guidelines...........................................................................................................................................692
Fitting the Device................................................................................................................................................692
Devices with Adjustable Features......................................................................................................................692
Reassessment of Hazards...................................................................................................................................692
Training..............................................................................................................................................................693
Cleaning and Maintenance.................................................................................................................................693
Equipment Specifications and Requirements.....................................................................................................694
Eye and Face Protection.....................................................................................................................................694
Description and Use of Eye/Face Protectors......................................................................................................695
Safety Spectacles...........................................................................................................................................695
Single Lens Goggles........................................................................................................................................695
Welders/Chippers Goggles.............................................................................................................................695
Welder's goggles............................................................................................................................................695
Chippers/grinders goggles.............................................................................................................................695
Face Shields....................................................................................................................................................696
Welding Shields..............................................................................................................................................696
Emergency Eyewash Facilities............................................................................................................................696
Hearing Protection.............................................................................................................................................696
Respiratory Protection.......................................................................................................................................697
Head Protection.................................................................................................................................................697
Hand Protection.................................................................................................................................................698
Safety Shoes.......................................................................................................................................................698
Hearing Personal Protective Equipment.............................................................................................................699
Appendices.........................................................................................................................................................700

Page 718
ABG
Purpose
ABG provides all Employees with required PPE to suit the task and known hazards. This Chapter covers the
requirements for Personal Protective Equipment with the exception of PPE used for hearing conservation and
respiratory protection or PPE required for hazardous material response to spills or releases, which if applicable
are covered under separate programs.
The Site Supervisor is the program coordinator, acting as the representative of the plant manager, who has overall
responsibility for the program. The SITE SAFETY MANAGER will designate appropriate plant supervisors to assist in
training employees and monitoring their use of PPE. This written plan is kept in the Site Safety Manager office.
Then he/she will review and update the program as necessary. Copies of this program may be obtained from the
Site Safety Manager office.
We at ABG believe it is our obligation to provide a hazard free environment to our employees. Any employee
encountering hazardous conditions must be protected against the potential hazards. The purpose of protective
clothing and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate individuals from chemical, physical, biological, or other
hazards that may be present in the workplace.
Establishing an overall written PPE program detailing how employees use PPE makes it easier to ensure that they
use PPE properly in the workplace and document our PPE efforts in the event of an OSHA inspection. ABG's PPE
program covers:
- Purpose
- Hazard assessment
- PPE selection
- Employee training
- Cleaning and maintenance of PPE
- PPE specific information
If after reading this program, you find that improvements can be made, please contact the Site Safety Manager.
We encourage all suggestions because we are committed to the success of our Personal Protective Equipment
Program. We strive for clear understanding, safe behavior, and involvement in the program from every level of
the company.
General Policy
Engineering controls shall be the primary methods used to eliminate or minimize hazard exposure in the
workplace. When such controls are not practical or applicable, personal protective equipment shall be employed
to reduce or eliminate personnel exposure to hazards. Personal protective equipment (PPE) will be provided,
used, and maintained when it has been determined that its use is required and that such use will lessen the
likelihood of occupational injuries and/or illnesses.

Page 719
ABG
Responsibilities
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER will be responsible for assessing the hazards and exposures that may require the use
of PPE, determining the type of equipment to be provided, and purchasing the equipment. Input from managers,
supervisors, and employees will be obtained and considered in selecting appropriate equipment.
Managers/supervisors will be responsible for training employees in the use and proper care of PPE, ensuring that
all employees are assigned appropriate PPE, and ensuring that PPE is worn by employees when and where it is
required.
Employees are responsible for following all provisions of this program and related procedures. They are expected
to wear PPE when and where it is required.
Hazard Assessment
The Company will perform an assessment of the workplace to determine if hazards are present, or likely to be
present, which necessitate the use of personal protective equipment (PPE). This assessment will consist of a
survey of the workplace to identify sources of hazards to workers. Consideration will be given to hazards such as
impact, penetration, laceration, compression (dropping heavy objects on foot, roll-over, etc.), chemical exposures,
harmful dust, heat, light (optical) radiation, electrical hazards, noise, etc. Where such hazards are present, or likely
to be present, the Company will:
- Select, and have each affected Employee use, the proper PPE
- Communicate selection decisions to each affected Employee
- Select PPE that properly fits each affected employee.
- Train employees in the use and care of PPE as described elsewhere in this program
The Company will verify that the workplace hazard assessment has been performed by conducting a written
certification. This certification will be dated and signed by the SITE SAFETY MANAGER or person conducting the
assessment. Whenever there is a change in process or in the workplace that might introduce or change an
exposure or hazard, the company will perform an assessment to determine if there needs to be additional PPE or
a change in the PPE provided. These supplemental hazard assessments will also be documented, signed and dated
by the person performing the assessment. The Company will review and update the workplace hazard assessment
on an annual basis.
Sources
During the walk-through survey the SITE SAFETY MANAGER should observe:

Page 720
ABG
- sources of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where any movement of tools, machine elements or
particles could exist, or movement of personnel that could result in collision with stationary objects;
- sources of high temperatures that could result in burns, eye injury or ignition of protective equipment,
etc.;
- types of chemical exposures;
- sources of harmful dust;
- sources of light radiation, i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat treating, high intensity lights, etc.;
- sources of falling objects or potential for dropping objects;
- sources of sharp objects which might pierce the feet or cut the hands;
- sources of rolling or pinching objects which could crush the feet;
- layout of workplace and location of co-workers; and
- any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/accident data should be reviewed to help identify problem
areas.
Organize Data
Following the walk-through survey, it is necessary to organize the data and information for use in the assessment
of hazards. The objective is to prepare for an analysis of the hazards in the environment to enable proper
selection of protective equipment.
Analyze Data
Having gathered and organized data on a workplace, an estimate of the potential for injuries should be made.
Each of the basic hazards should be reviewed and a determination made as to the type, level of risk, and
seriousness of potential injury from each of the hazards found in the area. The possibility of exposure to several
hazards simultaneously should be considered.
Controlling Hazards
PPE devices alone should not be relied on to provide protection against hazards, but should be used in
conjunction with guards, engineering controls, and sound manufacturing practices.
Assessment and Selection
It is necessary to consider certain general guidelines for assessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand hazard
situations that exist in an occupational or educational operation or process, and to match the protective devices
to the particular hazard. It should be the responsibility of the SITE SAFETY MANAGER to exercise common sense
and appropriate expertise to accomplish these tasks. Personal protective equipment will meet the following
standards:

Page 721
ABG
- Employee owned PPE is permitted provided it meets the appropriate ANSI standards. All employee
owned PPE must first be inspected and approved by the Site Safety Manager or his designee. ABG
employees must keep all PPE clean and in safe working order.
o Eye & Face Protection devices - ANSI Z87.1-1989 "American National Standard Practice for
Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection"
o Head Protection devices - ANSI Z89.1-1986 "American National Standard for Personal Protection -
Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers"
o Foot Protection devices - ANSI Z41-1991 "American National Standard for Personal Protection -
Protective Footwear"
o Hand Protection - No national standard available - Selection will be based on task performed,
conditions present, duration of use, and the hazards and potential hazards identified.
o Electrical Protective equipment - No national standard - Equipment will be tested electrically before
first use and every 6 months thereafter or upon indication that insulating value is suspect.

Page 722
ABG
Selection Guidelines
The general procedure for selection of protective equipment is to:
- Employee owned PPE must first be approved by the ABG Safety Department;
- Become familiar with the potential hazards and the type of protective equipment that is available, and
what it can do; i.e., splash protection, impact protection, etc.;
- compare the hazards associated with the environment; i.e., impact velocities, masses, projectile shape,
radiation intensities, with the capabilities of the available protective equipment;
- select the protective equipment which ensures a level of protection greater than the minimum required
to protect employees from the hazards; and
- fit the user with the protective device and give instructions on care and use of the PPE. It is very important
that end users be made aware of all warning labels for and limitations of their PPE.
Fitting the Device
Careful consideration must be given to comfort and fit. PPE that fits poorly will not afford the necessary
protection. Continued wearing of the device is more likely if it fits the wearer comfortably. Protective devices are
generally available in a variety of sizes. Care should be taken to ensure that the right size is selected.
Devices with Adjustable Features
Adjustments should be made on an individual basis for a comfortable fit that will maintain the protective device in
the proper position. Particular care should be taken in fitting devices for eye protection against dust and chemical
splash to ensure that the devices are sealed to the face. In addition, proper fitting of helmets is important to
ensure that it will not fall off during work operations. In some cases a chin strap may be necessary to keep the
helmet on an employee's head. (Chin straps should break at a reasonably low force, however, so as to prevent a
strangulation hazard). Where manufacturer's instructions are available, they should be followed carefully.
Reassessment of Hazards
It is the responsibility of the SITE SAFETY MANAGER to reassess the workplace hazard situation as necessary, by
identifying and evaluating new equipment and processes, reviewing accident records, and reevaluating the
suitability of previously selected PPE.
- Defective & Damaged Equipment

- Defective or damaged personal protective equipment shall not be used.
- Selection of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Page 723
ABG
Personal protective equipment (PPE) will be selected on the basis of the hazards to which the workers' are
exposed or potentially exposed. All selections will be made by with input from managers, supervisors and
workers.
Training
Each employee who is required to use PPE will be trained in the following:
- Why PPE is necessary

- When PPE is necessary
- What PPE is necessary and any alternative choices of equipment
- How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE
- The proper care, maintenance, storage, useful life, and disposal of PPE
The training will include an opportunity for employees to handle the PPE and demonstrate that they understand
the training and have the ability to use the PPE properly. Training will be provided by the manager or supervisor of
the affected employees. Training will be documented in writing with the documentation including the names of
each employee trained, the date(s) of the training, and the subject matter covered.
Employees must demonstrate an understanding of the training and the ability to use the PPE properly before they
are allowed to perform work requiring the use of the equipment.
Employees are prohibited from performing work without donning appropriate PPE to protect them from the
hazards they will encounter in the course of that work.
If the SITE SAFETY MANAGER has reason to believe an employee does not have the understanding or skill required
the employer must retrain. Since an employee's supervisor is in the best position to observe any problems with
PPE use by individual employees, the SITE SAFETY MANAGER will seek this person's input when making this
determination. Circumstances where retraining may be required include changes in the workplace or changes in
the types of PPE to be used, which would render previous training obsolete. Also, inadequacies in an affected
employee's knowledge or use of the assigned PPE, which indicates that the employee has not retained the
necessary understanding or skills, would require retraining.
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER certifies in writing that the employee has received and understands the PPE training.
Because failure to comply with company policy concerning PPE can result in OSHA citations and fines as well as
employee injury, an employee who does not comply with this program will be disciplined for noncompliance
according to the company’s Disciplinary Action Program.
Cleaning and Maintenance

Page 724
ABG
It is important that all PPE be kept clean and properly maintained by the employee to whom it is assigned.
Cleaning is particularly important for eye and face protection where dirty or fogged lenses could impair vision. PPE
is to be inspected, cleaned, and maintained by employees at regular intervals as part of their normal job duties so
that the PPE provides the requisite protection. Supervisors are responsible for ensuring compliance with cleaning
responsibilities by employees.
If PPE is for general use, the SITE SAFETY MANAGER has responsibility for cleaning and maintenance. If a piece of
PPE is in need of repair or replacement it is the responsibility of the employee to bring it to the immediate
attention of his or her supervisor or the SITE SAFETY MANAGER. It is against work rules to use PPE that is in
disrepair or not able to perform its intended function. Contaminated PPE that cannot be decontaminated is
disposed of in a manner that protects employees from exposure to hazards.
Engineering controls shall be the primary methods used to eliminate or minimize hazard exposure in the
workplace. When such controls are not practical or applicable, personal protective equipment shall be employed
to reduce or eliminate personnel exposure to hazards.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) will be provided, used, and maintained when it has been determined that its
use is required and that such use will lessen the likelihood of occupational injuries and/or illnesses. The SITE
SAFETY MANAGER will recommend and/or provide necessary protective equipment where there is a reasonable
probability that the use of the equipment will prevent or reduce the severity of injuries or illness.
Equipment Specifications and Requirements
All personal protective clothing and equipment will be of safe design and construction for the work to be
performed. Only those items of protective clothing and equipment that meet National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH) or American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards will be procured or accepted
for use.
Eye and Face Protection
The majority of occupational eye injuries can be prevented by the use of suitable/approved safety spectacles,
goggles, or shields. Approved eye and face protection shall be worn when there is a reasonable possibility of
personal injury. Supervisors, with assistance from the SITE SAFETY MANAGER, determine jobs and work areas that
require eye protection and the type of eye and face protection that will be used.
Typical hazards that can cause eye and face injury are:
- Splashes of toxic or corrosive chemicals, hot liquids, and molten metals;

Page 725
ABG
- Flying objects, such as chips of wood, metal, and stone dust;

- Fumes, gases, and mists of toxic or corrosive chemicals; and
- Aerosols of biological substances.
Prevention of eye accidents requires that all persons who may be in eye hazard areas wear protective eyewear.
This includes employees, visitors, researchers, contractors, or others passing through an identified eye hazardous
area. To provide protection for these personnel, activities shall procure a sufficient quantity of heavy duty goggles
and/or plastic eye protectors which afford the maximum amount of protection possible.
If these personnel wear personal glasses, they shall be provided with a suitable eye protector to wear over them.
Eye and face protectors procured, issued to, and used by Company personnel must conform to the following
design and standards:
- Provide adequate protection against the particular hazards for which they are designed
- Fit properly and offer the least possible resistance to movement and cause minimal discomfort while in
use.
- Be durable.
- Be easily cleaned or disinfected for or by the wearer.
- Be clearly marked to identify the manufacturer.
Persons who require corrective lenses for normal vision, and who are required to wear eye protection, must wear
goggles or spectacles of one of the following types:
- Spectacles with protective lenses which provide optical correction.

- Goggles that can be worn over spectacles without disturbing the adjustment of the spectacles.
- Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind the protective lenses.
Description and Use of Eye/Face Protectors
Safety Spectacles Protective eye glasses are made with safety frames, tempered glass or plastic lenses, temples
and side shields which provide eye protection from moderate impact and particles encountered in job tasks such
as carpentry, woodworking, grinding, scaling, etc.
Single Lens Goggles Vinyl framed goggles of soft pliable body design provide adequate eye protection from many
hazards. These goggles are available with clear or tinted lenses, perforated, port vented, or non-vented frames.
Single lens goggles provide similar protection to spectacles and may be worn in combination with spectacles or
corrective lenses to insure protection along with proper vision.

Page 726
ABG
Welders/Chippers Goggles These goggles are available in rigid and soft frames to accommodate single or two eye
piece lenses.
Welder's goggles provide protection from sparking, scaling or splashing metals and harmful light rays. Lenses are
impact resistant and are available in graduated shades of filtration.
Chippers/grinders goggles provide eye protection from flying particles. The dual protective eye cups house impact
resistant clear lenses with individual cover plates.
Face Shields These normally consist of an adjustable headgear and face shield of tinted/transparent acetate or
polycarbonate materials, or wire screen. Face shields are available in various sizes, tensile strength, impact/heat
resistance and light ray filtering capacity. Face shields will be used in operations when the entire face needs
protection and should be worn to protect eyes and face against flying particles, metal sparks, and chemical/
biological splash.
Welding Shields These shield assemblies consist of vulcanized fiber or glass fiber body, a ratchet/button type
adjustable headgear or cap attachment and a filter and cover plate holder. These shields will be provided to
protect workers’ eyes and face from infrared or radiant light burns, flying sparks, metal spatter and slag chips
encountered during welding, brazing, soldering, resistance welding, bare or shielded electric arc welding and
oxyacetylene welding and cutting operations.
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER maintains a supply of various eye and face protective devices. Personnel requiring
prescription safety glasses must contact the SITE SAFETY MANAGER.
Emergency Eyewash Facilities
Emergency eyewash facilities meeting the requirements of ANSI Z358.1-1981 shall be provided in all areas where
the eyes of any employee may be exposed to corrosive materials. All such emergency facilities shall be located
where they are easily accessible to those in need.
Hearing Protection
Hearing protection devices are the first line of defense against noise in environments where engineering controls
have not reduced employee exposure to safe levels. Hearing protective devices can prevent significant hearing
loss, but only if they are used properly.
The most popular hearing protection devices are earplugs which are inserted into the ear canal to provide a seal
against the canal walls. Earmuffs enclose the entire external ears inside rigid cups. The inside of the muff cup is
lined with acoustic foam and the perimeter of the cup is fitted with a cushion that seals against the head around
the ear by the force of the headband.

Page 727
ABG
Preformed earplugs and earmuffs should be washed periodically and stored in a clean area, and foam inserts
should be discarded after each use. It is important for you to wash hands before handling pre-formed earplugs
and foam inserts to prevent contaminants from being placed in the ear which may increase your risk of
developing infections.
Also, check hearing protective devices for signs of wear or deterioration.
Replace devices periodically.
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER and Site Supervisor maintain a supply of a variety of disposable foam ear inserts and
earmuffs.
Respiratory Protection
Respiratory hazards may occur through exposure to harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists, gases, smoke, sprays, and
vapors. The best means of protecting personnel is through the use of engineering controls, e.g., local exhaust
ventilation. Only when engineering controls are not practical or applicable shall respiratory protective equipment
be employed to reduce personnel exposure.
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER is responsible for the Respiratory Protection Program at the Company. Workers
requiring the use of respirators must first obtain medical approval from the Company physician to wear a
respirator before a respirator can be issued. The SITE SAFETY MANAGER conducts respirator training and fit tests
and is responsible for determining the proper type of respiratory protection required for the particular hazard.
Adherence to the following guidelines will help ensure the proper and safe use of respiratory equipment:
- Wear only the respirator you have been instructed to use. For example, do not wear a self-containing
breathing apparatus if you have been assigned and fitted for a half-mask respirator.
- Wear the correct respirator for the particular hazard. For example, some situations, such as chemical spills
or other emergencies, may require a higher level of protection than your respirator can handle. Also, the
proper cartridge must be matched to the hazard (a cartridge designed for dusts and mists will not provide
protection from vapors)
- Check the respirator for a good fit before each use. Positive and negative fit checks should be conducted.
- Check the respirator for deterioration before and after use. Do not use a defective respirator.
- Recognize indications that cartridges and canisters are at their end of service. If in doubt, change
cartridges/ canisters before using respirator.
- Practice moving and working while wearing the respirator so that you can get used to it.
- Clean the respirator after each use, thoroughly dry it and place the cleaned respirator in a sealable plastic
bag.
- Store respirators carefully in a protected location away from excessive heat, light, and chemicals.

Page 728
ABG
Head Protection
Hats and caps have been designed and manufactured to provide workers protection from impact, heat, electrical
and fire hazards. These protectors consist of the shell and the suspension combined as a protective system. Safety
hats and caps will be of nonconductive, fire and water resistant materials. Bump caps or skull guards are
constructed of lightweight materials and are designed to provide minimal protection against hazards when
working in congested areas.
Head protection will be furnished to, and used by, all employees and contractors engaged in construction and
other miscellaneous work in head-hazard areas. Head protection will also be required to be worn by engineers,
inspectors, and visitors at construction sites. Bump caps/skull guards will be issued to and worn for protection
against scalp lacerations from contact with sharp objects. They will not be worn as substitutes for safety caps/hats
because they do not afford protection from high impact forces or penetration by falling objects.
Hand Protection
Skin contact is a potential source of exposure to toxic materials; it is important that the proper steps be taken to
prevent such contact. Gloves should be selected on the basis of the material being handled, the particular hazard
involved, and their suitability for the operation being conducted. One type of glove will not work in all situations.
Most accidents involving hands and arms can be classified under four main hazard categories: chemicals,
abrasions, cutting, and heat. There are gloves available that can protect workers from any of these individual
hazards or any combination thereof.
The first consideration in the selection of gloves for use against chemicals is to determine, if possible, the exact
nature of the substances to be encountered. Read instructions and warnings on chemical container labels and
MSDS before working with any chemical. Recommended glove types are often listed in the section for personal
protective equipment.
All glove materials are eventually permeated by chemicals. However, they can be used safely for limited time
periods if specific use and glove characteristics (i.e., thickness and permeation rate and time) are known. The SITE
SAFETY MANAGER can assist is determining the specific type of glove material that should be worn for a particular
chemical.
Gloves should be replaced periodically, depending on frequency of use and permeability to the substance(s)
handled. Gloves overtly contaminated should be rinsed and then carefully removed after use.
Gloves should also be worn whenever it is necessary to handle rough or sharp-edged objects, and very hot or very
cold materials. The type of glove materials to be used (in these situations) include leather, welder’s gloves,
aluminum-backed gloves, and other types of insulated glove materials.
Careful attention must be given to protecting your hands when working with tools and machinery. Power tools
and machinery must have guards installed or incorporated into their design that prevent the hands from

Page 729
ABG
contacting the point of operation, power train, or other moving parts. To protect the hands from injury due to
contact with moving parts, it is important to:
- Ensure that guards are always in place and used.

- Always lock out machines or tools and disconnect the power before making repairs.
- Treat a machine without a guard as inoperative; and
- Do not wear gloves around moving machinery, such as drill presses, mills, lathes, and grinders.
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER can help the supervisor identify appropriate glove selections for their operations. The
SITE SAFETY MANAGER also maintains a selection of gloves for various tasks.
Safety Shoes
Leather work shoes/boots are required and safety toe is recommended. When working with wet concrete,
workers must wear rubber boots. Shoes and boots must be kept in good repair; those with worn soles and heels
are not permitted.
All safety footwear shall comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard ANSI Z41-1991,
"American National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear. Protective footwear purchased
before July 5, 1994, shall comply with ANSI Standard Z41.1-1967.
Supervisor - Reviews employees work situation and recommends safety footwear as appropriate in accordance
with established Institute policy. Ensures that all employees under his supervision use and maintain safety
footwear.
Employee - Wears Institute provided or approved safety shoes in all areas requiring safety footwear as
determined by the supervisor and the SITE SAFETY MANAGER.
Hearing Personal Protective Equipment
Hearing protective devices (ear plugs, muffs, etc.) shall be the permanent solution only when engineering or
administrative controls are considered to be infeasible or cost prohibitive. Hearing protective devices are defined
as any device that can be worn to reduce the level of sound entering the ear. Hearing protective devices shall be
worn by all personnel when they must enter or work in an area where the operations generate noise levels of:
- Greater than 85 dBA sound levels, or

115 dBA peak sound pressure level or greater
Types of Hearing Protective Devices Hearing protective devices include the following:
- A device designed to provide an air-tight seal with the ear canal. There are three types of insert earplugs

Page 730
ABG
1. premolded
2. formable
3. custom earplugs.
- Premolded earplugs are pliable devices of fixed proportions. Two standard styles, single flange and triple
flange, come in various sizes, and will fit most people. Personnel responsible for fitting and dispensing
earplugs will train users on proper insertion, wear, and care. While premolded earplugs are reusable, they
may deteriorate and should be replaced periodically.
- Formable earplugs come in just one size. Some are made of material which, after being compressed and
inserted, expands to form a seal in the ear canal. When properly inserted, they provide noise attenuation
values that are similar to those from correctly fitted premolded earplugs. Individual units may procure
approved formable earplugs. Supervisors must instruct users in the proper use of these earplugs as part of
the annual education program. Each earplug must be held in place while it expands enough to remain
firmly seated. A set of earplugs with a cord attached is available. These earplugs may be washed and
therefore are reusable, but will have to be replaced after two or three weeks or when they no longer form
an airtight seal when properly inserted.
- Custom Molded Earplugs: A small percentage of the population cannot be fitted with standard
premolded or formable earplugs. Custom earplugs can be made to fit the exact size and shape of the
individual’s ear canal. Individuals needing custom earplugs will be referred to an audiologist.
- Earmuffs are devices worn around the ear to reduce the level of noise that reaches the ear. Their
effectiveness depends on an air tight seal between the cushion and the head.
Employees will be given the opportunity to select hearing protective devices from a variety of suitable ones
provided by the SITE SAFETY MANAGER. In all cases the chosen hearing protectors shall have a Noise Reduction
Ratio (NRR) high enough to reduce the noise at the ear drum to 85 dBA or lower.
The issuance of hearing protective devices is handled through the SITE SAFETY MANAGER. The SITE SAFETY
MANAGER will issue and fit the initial hearing protective devices (foam inserts, disposables). Instruction on the
proper use and care of earplugs and earmuffs will be provided whenever HPDs (hearing protective devices) are
dispensed. Personnel requiring earmuffs in addition to earplugs will be informed of this requirement and
educated on the importance of using proper hearing protection. The SITE SAFETY MANAGER will dispense ear
muffs when necessary and will maintain a supply of disposable earplugs.
Always use and maintain HPDs as originally intended and in accordance with instructions provided.
Earmuff performance may be degraded by anything that compromises the cushion-to-circumaural flesh seal. This
includes other pieces of personal protective equipment such as eyewear, masks, face shields, and helmets.
Reusable earplugs, such as the triple flange or formable devices should be washed in lukewarm water using hand
soap, rinsed in clean water, and dried thoroughly before use. Wet or damp earplugs should not be placed in their
containers. Cleaning should be done as needed.

Page 731
ABG
Earmuff cushions should be kept clean. The plastic or foam cushions may be cleaned in the same way as earplugs,
but the inside of the muff should not get wet. When not n use, ear muffs should be placed in open air to allow
moisture that may have been absorbed into the cups to evaporate.
The maximum of sound attenuation one gets when wearing hearing protection devices is limited by human body
and bone conduction mechanisms. Even though a particular device may provide outstanding values of noise
attenuation the actual noise reductions may be less because of the noise surrounding the head and body bypasses
the hearing protector and is transmitted through tissue and bone pathways to the inner ear.
The term “double hearing protection” is misleading. The attenuation provided from any combination earplug and
earmuff is not equal to the sum of their individual attenuation values.
Appendices
Hazard Assessment Form

Page 732
ABG
PIPING AND PRESSURE TESTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................701
SCOPE702
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................702
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................702
1.0 PREPARATION................................................................................................................................................702
2.0 TEST PARAMETERS.........................................................................................................................................703
3.0 REFERENCES...................................................................................................................................................704

Page 733
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice outlines the requirements for performing tank and piping pressure testing. It is applicable to all pipe
or vessel pressure tests regardless of size or pressure.
SCOPE
 Preparation
 Test Parameters
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Class One Test  Any test that involves multiple work areas or elevations where employees are performing work
activities in and due to the nature of the hazards associated with:
 The test pressure, medium, voltage, and/or mechanical movement of parts
 The event of mechanical failure of the equipment, release of test medium, or
accidental contact
 The potential to cause serious injury, death, or significant property or equipment
damage
Class Two Test  Any test confined to a specific area where employees are performing work activities and due to
the nature of the hazards associated with:
 The test pressure, medium, voltage, and/or mechanical movements of parts
 That in the event of mechanical failure of the equipment, release of test medium, or
accidental contact
 The potential to cause serious injury, death, or significant property or equipment
damage
Class Three Test  Any test that is confined to a specific location where no employees are performing work
activities or employees can be readily reassigned and due to the minimal hazards associated with:
 The test pressure, medium, voltage, and/or mechanical movement of parts
 The event of mechanical failure of the equipment, release of test medium, or
accidental contact
 The potential to cause injury or property or equipment damage is minimal
PREPARATION
The respective Project/Site Manager will communicate the intent to conduct a test 48 hours in advance to all
managing authorities that could be affected.

Page 734
ABG
A Safety Task Assignment (STA) will be developed; refer to Practice 000.653.1304, Pre-Task Planning/Risk Analysis.
A pretest meeting of involved managers/supervisors will be conducted to:
 Review the potential hazards associated with the test.
 Establish safe distances of boundaries to be maintained.
 Identify the quantity of signs (Danger – Test in Progress) required and additional
means (such as barricades or cones) required to identify boundaries.
 Identify the number of, name of, and post positions for employees required to
visually ensure the integrity of the established boundaries. Boundaries are to be
maintained for the duration of the test. Relief employees may need to be identified.
 Identify the means (such as air horn or whistle) that post-position employees will use
to alert anyone coming too close to or crossing established boundaries.
 Determine the number of radios required for post-position employees.
 Establish safe areas for nonparticipating visitors, spectators, photographers.
 Identify any emergency services that may be required at test area.
An STA meeting will be conducted with employees participating in the test activities to identify roles and
responsibilities.
An inspection of the test components and test area will be conducted by the HSE Representative. Unplanned for
and unsafe conditions will be corrected before the test is allowed to start.
TEST PARAMETERS
ABG’s Engineering Master Specification 000.250.50050, Piping Pressure Testing, will be reviewed as part of test
preparation. This specification provides detailed technical instructions and information on performing pressure
testing. This document must be reviewed and signed by the Site Manager, Site Engineer, Quality Control
Inspector, HSE Representative, and responsible supervisor before performing any pressure test.
All employees will receive instruction on the hazards of pressure testing.
Employees performing the actual work will be given detailed instructions on hazards, technical data and
techniques of performing pressure testing, and all associated equipment, tools of the trade, or specialty devices.
This training will be provided on initial assignment of a crew performing pressure testing, every 6 months
following initial assignment, and any time there is a change of procedure, technique, or equipment or specialty
device.
All equipment, gauges, and relief devices will be certified as specified in ABG’s Master Specification
000.250.50050 and equipped with operating instructions and safety precautions.
The area(s) where the pressure testing is to be performed is to be clearly marked with signs stating "Pressure
Testing in Progress."
The area(s) where pneumatic testing is to be performed will be vacated until such time the test is complete and
the pressure relieved.
Test pressure will be obtained in increments as defined in ABG’s Master Specification 000.250.50050. Once test
pressure is started, absolutely no one will be permitted in the immediate area until the objective pressure is

Page 735
ABG
achieved and maintained for 10 minutes. If, for any reason, regardless of how minor in nature or how short the
duration it appears, adjustments, repairs, or any other task will be conducted that would require an employee in
the immediate area of the test, the test must be aborted and the pressure relieved.
REFERENCES


Page 736
ABG
PRE-EMPLOYMENT MEDICAL EXAM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................705
SCOPE706
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................706
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................706
2.0 SCOPE OF EXAMINATION...............................................................................................................................706
3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES...........................................................................................................................................707
4.0 CONFIDENTIALITY OF RESULTS.......................................................................................................................707
5.0 NOTIFICATION TO THE HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGER................................................................................708
6.0 REFERENCES...................................................................................................................................................708

Page 737
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice provides the requirements for the successful completion of a prescribed medical examination before
workers are employed on the project site.
SCOPE
 Scope of Examination
 Confidentiality of Results
 Notification to Human Resources
APPLICATION
This practice applies at the discretion of the Project Manager.
However, the practice does not apply to workers entering the site as a “visitor.”
DEFINITIONS
None.
A pre-project medical exam will be conducted at the discretion of the Project Manager.
ABG and contractor employees may be required to satisfactorily complete a prescribed pre-project medical
examination or an examination of an equivalent scope that has been approved by the Project Human Resources
(HR) Manager or nominated delegate.
Documented evidence of an equivalent medical examination having been completed within 3 months before
commencing work on the project may satisfy the pre-project medical requirements.
All pre-project medical examinations will be conducted in accordance with applicable standards (such as
Americans with Disabilities Act, local/in-country requirements, and local/in-country standards.)
2.0 SCOPE OF EXAMINATION
It is recommended that a pre-project medical exam be job-function-specific, and designed to evaluate the
applicant’s ability to perform the physical tasks associated with their job. For example, the physical examination
required for crane operators requires vision evaluation (refer to Form 000.653.F0320, Crane Operator Physical
Examination). Medical examinations based on job function will help place the right employee in the right job and
reduce hazards.
The pre-project medical will include a drug screen test.

Page 738
ABG
The pre-project medical examination has the following requirements:

 Completion of Form 000.653.F0322, Pre-Project Medical Questionnaire, by the
applicant, which must be given to the examining medical practitioner before the
medical examination.
 A medical examination by a healthcare provider.
 Completion of appropriate forms by the healthcare provided:
 000.653.F0320, Crane Operator Physical Examination
 000.653.F0321, Employee Physical Examination
 Any special medical conditions must be reported to the site healthcare provider to
assist with any potential treatment while on site.
The completed medical examination form used by the healthcare provider and medical questionnaire completed
by the applicant are confidential documents. They may only be made accessible to appropriately qualified
personnel (such as nurse and/or doctor).
On projects where there is an appropriately qualified healthcare provider (such as a nurse), the forms and reports
associated with the physical examination should be forwarded by the healthcare provider to the site for retention
subject to privacy laws. However, where no healthcare provider is employed on site, the examining healthcare
provider must retain the pre-employment medical examination forms.
Contractors and subcontractors will be responsible for having their employees and the employees of their lower-
tier contractors, successfully complete the pre-project medical examination.
The selection of an examining healthcare provider will be the responsibility of the individual contractors (and if
they so instruct, of their individual contractors), unless formally instructed to the contrary by ABG.
Employers will be responsible for advising their prospective project employees that the medical examination will
include drug screening.
Refer to ABG’s Substance Abuse Prevention Program described in Practice 000.653.1400.
Employers will be responsible for gaining the legal consent of their prospective project employees to complete the
drug screening requirements contained in the pre-project medical examination (refer to Form 000.653.F0232,
Medical Access Authority).
Employers will be also responsible for gaining the legal consent of their prospective project employees for the
examining healthcare provider to provide a Medical Evaluation Report to the ABG Project Manager (or nominated
delegate) following completion of the project pre-employment medical examination, including the drug screening
tests. Such advice to the project will be in the format shown on Form 000.653.F0233, Medical Evaluation Report.
4.0 CONFIDENTIALITY OF RESULTS
The results of the pre-project medical examination (including the drug screening results) will remain confidential
between the examining healthcare provider and the individual employee.

Page 739
ABG
Any arrangements to the contrary are strictly a matter of agreement between the individual employee and the
respective employer and are unequivocally of no interest to ABG, the project Manager, or the client.
Note: All special medical requirements must be reported to the site healthcare provider
to assist with potential treatment while on site.
5.0 NOTIFICATION TO THE HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGER
Each contractor will be individually responsible for providing confirmation of the successful completion of the pre-
project medical examination of each individual employee to the ABG Project HR Manager (or nominated delegate
for this matter).
Such notification will be provided and signed by the examining healthcare provider and will be in the format as
shown on Form 000.653.F0234, Project Pre-Employment Medical – Advice of Successful Completion, or will be in
an alternative format acceptable to the Project HR Manager (or nominated delegate for this matter).
6.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0232 Medical Access Authority
000.653.F0233 Medical Evaluation Report
000.653.F0234 Project Pre-Employment Medical – Advice of
Successful Completion
000.653.F0320 Crane Operator Physical Examination
000.653.F0321 Employee Physical Examination
000.653.F0322 Pre-Project Medical Questionnaire

Page 740
ABG
PREPARING A PROJECT & SITE SPECIFIC HSE MANAGEMENT PLAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................710
SCOPE710
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................710
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................710
1.1 HSE Management System........................................................................................................................710
1.2 HSE Information, Supplies, and Equipment.............................................................................................710
1.3 Client-Hazardous Agents.........................................................................................................................711
1.4 Project Reporting.....................................................................................................................................711
2.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................711

Page 741
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the process to be used at the inception of a project to ensure appropriate arrangements
have been made to develop and implement an effective health, safety, and environmental (HSE) program, and
that required information, supplies, and equipment are in place before the start of field activities.
SCOPE
This practice describes the HSE requirements for the startup of a project.
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
The Project Startup – HSE Program Checklist (Form 000.653.F0215) must be completed for planning purposes by
Project/Site Management before beginning field activities.
1.1 HSE Management System
Project and HSE management will collaborate to determine if the corporate HSE Management System or an
alternative HSE Management System will be used on the project. If an alternative is chosen, this choice must be
documented on Form 000.653.F0270, HSE Management System Compliance and Equivalency, and submitted to
the Regional Safety Manager.
Note: The Corporate HSE Management System is based on United States regulatory
agency (such as OSHA or MSHA) requirements and may require some
modifications to comply with other applicable local or in-country regulatory
agency requirements. However, such modifications may be made only if
applicable local or in-country requirements are more stringent than those
contained in the HSE Management System.
1.2 HSE Information, Supplies, and Equipment
Form 000.653.F0215 provides a listing of topics project employees must consider in setting up the HSE program.
The Project, Site, or Construction Manager or the HSE Representative will complete Form 000.653.F0215 and
forward to the Regional Safety Manager (or designee).
Note: This form may be revised to include in–country regulatory requirements, but must
retain the basic format.

Page 742
ABG
1.3 Client-Hazardous Agents
On projects where there is an operating facility, the HSE Representative will inquire of the client the types and
extent of client-generated hazardous agents. Refer to Practice 000.653.2000, Industrial Hygiene Program
Requirements.
1.4 Project Reporting
Form 000.653.F0309, HSE Project Information Reporting Sheet, specifies the working relationship of JV/LLC/ABG
employees to the client/project, and the responsibilities for recording and reporting incidents (especially
occupationally-related injuries and illnesses). The HSE Representative will complete Form 000.653.F0309 and
forwards to corporate HSE.
2.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
Equivalency

Page 743
ABG
PRE-TASK PLANNING AND RISK ASSESSMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE ................................................................................................................................................................714
SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................................714
APPLICATION......................................................................................................................................................... 714
DEFINITIONS ..........................................................................................................................................................714
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................................715
Hazard Identification .........................................................................................................................................715
Assessment ........................................................................................................................................................715
Control 715
A. Hierarchy of Controls .........................................................................................................716
Evaluation ..........................................................................................................................................................716
Monitor .............................................................................................................................................................716
Continuous Hazard Identification ......................................................................................................................716
Risk Management and Assessment ...................................................................................................................717
PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS ..................................................................................................................................717
PHA Level I .........................................................................................................................................................717
PHA Level II ........................................................................................................................................................717
PHA Level III .......................................................................................................................................................717
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS ............................................................................................................................................718
The JSA Team ....................................................................................................................................................718
Selection of Jobs to be Analyzed .......................................................................................................................718
Hazard Potential ............................................................................................................................................718
Consequences of Failure ...............................................................................................................................718
Incident History .............................................................................................................................................718
Live Machinery/Equipment ...........................................................................................................................719
Define Scope .....................................................................................................................................................719
Basic Process for Completing a Job Safety Analysis ...........................................................................................719
Automated JSA ..................................................................................................................................................719
Informing Employees .........................................................................................................................................720
Training .............................................................................................................................................................720
Responsibilities ..................................................................................................................................................720
Supervision ....................................................................................................................................................720
B. ABG Construction Engineers and Contract Administrators .....................................................................720
C. Project HSE ..................................................................................................720
Process ..............................................................................................................................................................721
Asbestos Inspection ......................................................................................................................................721
Hazard Analyses Documented .......................................................................................................................721
JSA Required .................................................................................................................................................722

Page 744
ABG
Subcontractor JSA Reviews ...........................................................................................................................722

JSA Reviews by Employees ............................................................................................................................722
Posting a JSA .................................................................................................................................................722
Nonroutine Workers .....................................................................................................................................722
Updating a JSA ..............................................................................................................................................722
Pre-Task Walkthrough ...................................................................................................................................722
JSA Preparation .............................................................................................................................................723
Pre-Task Meeting ..........................................................................................................................................724
Safety Task Assignment .........................................................................................................................................724
Responsibility ....................................................................................................................................................724
Process ..............................................................................................................................................................724
Post-STA ............................................................................................................................................................725
REFERENCES ..........................................................................................................................................................725
ATTACHMENTS ......................................................................................................................................................726

Page 745
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the processes to systematically identify, evaluate, control, and communicate known and
potential workplace safety and health hazards to employees before work activities begin.
SCOPE
 Process Hazard Analysis
 Job Safety Analysis
 Safety Task Assignment
APPLICATION
The requirements of this practice apply as follows:
 Process Hazard Analysis - design
 Job Safety Analysis - self-perform or construction management/subcontracted
construction (any location) that is managed by ABG
 Safety Task Assignment
 Construction – individual or crew “tasks”
 Maintenance
 Moving
 Work or inspection “off-the-floor” in offices
 Visits to non-office/“field” and facility worksites of others (such as construction,
disasters, and operating, plants)
Note: If your activities are adequately covered on an existing pre-task planning

document, you may opt to review and “sign on/under” that document instead
of creating a separate STA.
DEFINITIONS
Control - An action or measure that attempts to prevent a recognized hazard from causing injury or damage.
Hazard - A source of energy or condition that may cause injury to personnel, or damage to equipment, property,
or the environment.
Job Safety Analysis (JSA) – A system that identifies hazards associated with each step of a job and develops
solutions for each hazard that will either eliminate or control the hazard. This process is also known as job hazard
analysis, activity hazard analysis (U.S. Army Corps of Engineers in particular), and numerous others.
Risk - The combination of the probability (likelihood) of a specific unwanted event and the potential
consequences if it should occur.
Risk Assessment - A detailed, systematic examination of any activity, location, or operational system to identify
risks, understand the consequences, and review controls.

Page 746
ABG
Risk Management - Management activities that enable risks to be identified, understood, and minimized to a
reasonably achievable, tolerable risk.
Safety Task Assignment (STA) – The process of identifying and communicating to each employee the steps,
hazards, and risks associated with a task, and the safe work practices that are to be applied to complete the task
safely.
The projects will adopt a “whole life” approach to pre-task planning for HSE from commencement of the project
to commissioning and handover to the owner. The project will use a series of hazard studies to identify, analyze,
and manage areas of risk or hazard. In addition, other specific risk assessments and reviews may be used to
analyze specific areas of risk or hazard.
The following subsections provide a systematic approach to any pre-task planning process.
Hazard Identification
Workplace hazards can be identified in a number of ways. Inspections provide a system of recognizing hazardous
conditions so that those conditions can be corrected.
The data collected while performing inspections will be used to identify hazards and barriers to working safely and
in an environmentally protective manner so that they can be addressed – such as procedure changes or
purchasing different personal protective equipment (PPE). The data also will be tracked as a proactive measure of
acceptable health, safety, and environmental (HSE) behavior on the site. Reports and safe work observation
information will be shared with employees at Toolbox safety meetings. Refer to Practice 000.653.1306, Safe Work
Observation.
Assessment
Once the hazards have been identified, it is necessary to assess what risk they pose to employees in the
workplace. In this way we can establish a measure of the risk and determine what priority they should have for
corrective action.
The risk assessment step is that part of the process that assesses the probability (likelihood) and consequences
(severity) of hazards that have been identified. Once we have estimated the probability and consequences for
each hazard then we can allocate it a priority for corrective action.
Generally, risk assessment is estimating: what are the chances (probability) of an accident happening, and if it
does happen, what are the chances that someone will be hurt? What will be the extent of equipment or
environmental damage, and how bad will it be (severity)?
The level of risk is dependent on the exposure to the hazard and the probability and consequences of an event
occurring.
Attachment 01 provides a non-mandatory, formal method for assessing risk.

Page 747
ABG
Control
This stage is the process of determining and implementing appropriate measures to control risk. In many
countries, this process has been legislated and must be completed as far as practicable.
Practicable means considering:
 Severity of the hazard in question
 State of knowledge about the hazard or risk and ways of removing or mitigating it
 Availability and suitability of ways to remove or mitigate that hazard or risk
 Cost of removing or mitigating the hazard
A. Hierarchy of Controls
Having identified the potential hazards, the team is further responsible for identifying solutions to those hazards.
The preferred hierarchy for developing solutions/controls is provided below.
Elimination - Eliminating toxic substances, hazardous equipment, or processes that are not necessary for a
system of work.
Substitution - Where hazardous materials/chemicals have been identified as a hazard, the preferred option is to
replace the material with a less hazardous one.
Engineering - The removal of potential hazards by reengineering the job is a preferred option. This includes
design modification, guards, permanently fixed physical barriers, interlocked physical barriers, physical barriers,
presence-sensing systems, enclosures, ventilation, automation, and isolation.
Administrative Controls - The application of administrative controls to hazards may include such actions as
limiting the time of exposure, rotating employees, and training/re-training of employees.
PPE - The provision of PPE does not eliminate the hazard, but only shields the individual from it. Such action may
have to be coupled with training in the correct use of the equipment.
Evaluation
This step means checking to see whether the introduced changes reduce the risk previously assessed. It may
involve repeating the process of hazard identification, risk assessment, and risk control to verify that all risks to
health and safety from a particular hazard have been controlled as far as is practicable; but this depends on the
hazard, the nature of the assessed risks, and on the control measures used.
Where the evaluations of risk control measures reveal some remaining risk, the process continues until risk is
minimized as far as practicable.
Monitor
To verify that control measures implemented are not eroded over time they must be monitored on a regular
basis.

Page 748
ABG
Continuous Hazard Identification
The project/office will conduct regular audits and inspections of workplaces and continue to identify hazards,
assess risks, and develop/implement appropriate control measures. These audits and inspections will monitor the
pre-task planning process in use to verify that the process is working effectively, analyses are modified as
necessary, hazards are being mitigated, and control measures are appropriate and implemented.
Refer to Practices 000.653.1305, Inspections/Assessments and Audits, and 000.653.1306.
At any stage, employees may identify further activities that require the application of risk identification,
assessment, and management processes such as:
 Recruitment and selection of personnel
 “Critical" construction activities (such as multi-crane lifts)
 Interaction of personnel with technology, vehicles, and equipment
 Planned changes of operational status of equipment
 Confined spaces
 Working at heights
 Foreseeable emergencies
 Climatic extremes
 Archaeological discoveries
 Wastewater discharges
PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS
The project hazard study approach for the engineering phase is described in Practice 000.653.8600, Execution of
Process Hazards Analyses (PHAs). The hazard evaluation and risk mitigation process continues into the
commissioning, construction, and operations/maintenance phases. Individual projects may choose to develop a
different series of studies, but all aspects of the studies described herein must be incorporated.
PHA Level I
The Level I PHA is intended to identify potential chemical and process hazards that require specific considerations
in order to ensure safety in design. Because the study is performed very early in the design process, the hazards
identified tend to be of a general nature. The Level I PHA provides an opportunity for eliminating hazards while
fundamental changes to the process are possible. Requirements for Level I PHAs are presented in Practice
000.653.8600, Conceptual Hazards Identification – PHA Level I.
PHA Level II
The Level II PHA is intended to identify events that could occur during operation of the facility that would be a
deviation from design intent. The potential causes and consequences are identified, and a judgment is made as to
whether additional design features should be incorporated to safeguard against the identified scenarios.

Page 749
ABG
Level II is performed after the basic design is complete during preliminary or front-end
engineering. Details regarding the execution of PHA Level II reviews can be found in
Practice 000.653.8602, Preliminary Process Hazards Analysis – PHA Level II.
PHA Level III
The Level III PHA is intended to identify events that could occur during operation of the facility that would be a
The Level III PHA serves as the final safety review before the Pre-Startup Safety Review (PSSR). Following the
Level III PHA, the P&IDs are “frozen,” and all design changes occurring after that point must be processed through
the project HSE Management of Change program (refer to Practice 000.653.8606, HSE Management of Change).
Details regarding the execution of PHA Level III reviews can be found in Practice 000.653.8603, Process Hazards
Analysis – PHA Level III.
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS
The JSA Team
A JSA should be performed by more than one person in order to provide a greater breadth of technical
competence. There is not an optimum number of persons required to conduct a JSA. However, fewer rather than
more are preferred.
Ideally, the team should include:
 Supervisor
 Employee(s) experienced in the task
 Other employees that will be performing the work
 Specialists (such as HSE representatives, engineers, and industrial hygienists) as
required
Selection of Jobs to be Analyzed
Particular jobs may be selected for analysis either by the Site Manager, the supervisor responsible for the work,
the HSE Representative, or by request of the HSE Committee.
Any employee at the workplace is permitted to submit that a particular job be subject to a JSA. If such a
submission is made, then the recipient is responsible for giving it objective consideration and also for keeping a
record of the conclusions from that consideration (such as a diary note).
As a guide, jobs are selected for analysis on the following basis:
Hazard Potential
Some tasks have a recognizable hazard potential greater than activities generally conducted at the site. As
examples, such tasks will include dual crane lifts; critical lifts (load exceeds 30 ton or 75 percent of rated capacity);
jobs that involve more than one work group; work in confined spaces; crane rope change; and hot work.

Page 750
ABG
Consequences of Failure
A work method failure during the execution of some tasks may result in unacceptably high-damaging
consequences. Such tasks may include work at height and manual handling.
Incident History
Tasks that have previously resulted in an accident or jobs with a high accident potential should be subjected to a
JSA review. New, changed, or infrequent jobs/work methods and repetitive tasks that are the subject of proposed
changes to the work method (such as changed equipment) should be the subject of a JSA.
Live Machinery/Equipment
Jobs undertaken on live machinery and equipment should be subject to a JSA due to the inherent hazards
associated with such work.
The JSA process should also be applied to a project work scope before the HSE procedures are developed for the
project. In this situation, the project work scope should be broken into base activities, and these activities should
then be analyzed. The results of the JSA should be used to develop the project procedures.
Define Scope
Before commencing a JSA, it is important to define the scope of work (the job to be analyzed) and select the
appropriate employees. This scope definition should be undertaken by the person responsible for organizing the
JSA.
Basic Process for Completing a Job Safety Analysis
The basic steps necessary to perform the job from start to finish must be listed. Each of the steps of a job should
accomplish some major task. The task may consist of a set of movements. Look at the first set of movements
used to perform a task and then determine the next logical set of movements. Each step description defines an
action, but does not describe hazards or precautions. Cleanup and stowing of equipment at the completion of
work is a step.
Hazards associated with each step will be identified. Equipment, personnel, and the activities that are required to
complete each step will be considered. Each step to find and identify hazards that could lead to an accident will
be examined. The preparer will verify that all hazards are listed, including environmental and health hazards.
Using the first two steps as a guide, the preparer will decide what actions are necessary to eliminate or reduce the
hazards that could lead to an accident that may result in injury, damage, or occupational illness.
Having identified the potential hazards, the preparer will identify solutions to those hazards. The preferred
options for developing solutions are noted in Subsection 1.4 (A), Hierarchy of Controls.
Recommended safe work plans/operating procedures and the required or recommended PPE for each step of the
job will be listed. Be specific. Say exactly what needs to be done to correct the hazard. Avoid general statements
like “be careful”; they tend to indicate that not enough thought has been applied to the problem and the team
has taken the easy way out.

Page 751
ABG
Each JSA will be recorded on Form 000.653.F0100, Job Safety Analysis.

The individual steps will be numbered consecutively, beginning with the number one.
The hazards identified for each step will be numbered consecutively as a subset. For example, for Step No. 1 the
identified hazards would be numbered 1.1, 1.2, 1.3; while for step No. 3 the identified hazards would be
numbered 3.1, 3.2, 3.3.
All employees and visitors will read or receive instruction in JSA requirements before commencing work on the
job. Employees and visitors must sign the JSA to indicate that they understand and will comply with the JSA.
Automated JSA
It is permissible to use an automated JSA process if it is at least as robust as the process described in this practice.
Informing Employees
Employees must be informed of identified or potential hazards and prescribed safety measures before initiating
work activities through review of pre-task planning documents. In general, pre-task planning documents must
include hazard analyses, permits, and other safety and health-related work plans.
Training
Training associated with hazards/control measures and activities identified on pre-task planning documents will
be completed in accordance with Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
When requested, engineering will provide technical support or pre-task planning to ensure compliance with
codes, standards, and regulations.
Responsibilities
Supervision
Supervisors will ensure the following activities are performed:

 Research (to the extent possible) and identify known environmental hazards in areas
employees enter or in which they work.
 Identify known or potential hazards and list on the JSA and (as required) other pre-
task planning documents. Ensure that required training and permits are completed
for those applicable items on the known or potential hazards list.
 Ensure and maintain documentation of competency/qualification.
 Ensure that pertinent information from the pre-task planning document(s) is
communicated to affected employees before they perform work or enter the
worksite.
 Ensure current pre-task planning documents are at the worksite.
 Ensure compliance with this practice.

Page 752
ABG
B. ABG Construction Engineers and Contract Administrators
ABG construction engineers and contract administrators will ensure that ABG subcontractors and lower-tier
subcontractors have submitted the required JSA(s), the JSA(s) has been reviewed and approved by the ABG HSE
Representative (and the client, if required), and a pre-task walkthrough has been conducted with the appropriate
ABG project representatives (including safety and health) and the subcontractor before the start of work.
C. Project HSE
 Provides safety and health-related program guidance for pre-task planning.

 Reviews and approves all JSAs after the documents have been signed by appropriate
supervision.
Where possible, this review and approval should be made by another HSE (or quality control) Representative who
was not involved in the preparation of the documents.
Note: Review with recommendations to change these documents is not considered
involvement in preparation.
 Ensures a pre-task walkthrough on the project has been completed before the start
of work.
 Reviews and evaluates any hazardous material and/or hazardous process that
creates a potential employee exposure. Processes may include, but are not limited
to, welding or cutting, confined spaces, coating application/removal, sandblasting,
asbestos and lead work, and chemical use.
Once supervision completes the JSA, the HSE Representative will review and approve it. A specific review by
industrial hygiene may be required when conditions dictate, or as requested by the HSE Representative.
If an incident or accident occurs during performance of the job or task, that portion of the work will be stopped
and the supervisor (along with the HSE Representative) must review the worksite to ensure that appropriate
controls are established and identified on the JSA before allowing the work to continue.
Process
Asbestos Inspection
A “good faith” asbestos inspection report must be submitted by the building owner/operator and reviewed before
construction/maintenance work begins. A written report or statement from the building owner/operator stating
that “no asbestos-containing material will be disturbed during the work effort(s)” may be substituted for the good
faith asbestos inspection report. If asbestos is going to be disturbed, the report or statement must be attached to
the JSA. An asbestos inspection report is not required for walkthrough inspections or maintenance activities
where asbestos is not disturbed.
Hazard Analyses Documented
Hazard analyses will be documented as follows:

Page 753
ABG
 Job-specific JSA
 Task-specific JSA
 Position Hazard Analysis
 STA
 Asbestos Work Plan
 Lead Compliance Plan
 Hazardous Waste Health and Safety Plan (or equal)
 Automated job hazard analysis
 Other equivalent hazard analysis process/methods approved by ABG HSE.
Note: All types of hazard analyses, except the STA and process hazard analysis, are
collectively referred to in this practice as JSAs.
Note: Attachments to JSAs may include the Energized Electrical Work Permit; Confined
Space Hazard Identification; Confined Space Entry Permit; Hot Work Permit; Fall
Protection Work Plan; Good Faith Roof Assessment; MSDS, Radiological Work
Permit; and Excavation Permit and scan documents.
JSA Required
No field activities on the worksite may be performed until a JSA covering the activity (with the appropriate
hazards identified and control measures established to protect the employee) has been reviewed and approved.
All JSAs are reviewed and approved by the ABG HSE Representative.
Subcontractor JSA Reviews
Subcontractor JSAs must be submitted to the ABG HSE Representative 5 days before commencing work. The JSA
will be reviewed and initialed by the ABG HSE Representative when acceptable.
Note: It is a common contractual requirement to submit JSAs to the client for
review/acceptance at least 15 days before commencing work. In such cases,
subcontractor JSAs must be submitted to the ABG HSE Representative at least
20 days before commencing work.
JSA Reviews by Employees
Each employee reviews the JSA for the specific task performed before performing the work activity. This review
may be in the form of a pre-task briefing, a one-on-one discussion with the supervisor, or reading the JSA. The
review is documented by employee signature on the Pre-Task Planning Signoff (Form 000.653.F0314) or equal.

Page 754
ABG
Posting a JSA
The JSA will be posted in a conspicuous place at the worksite. Employees will be informed where this location is.
Visitors and vendors are required to review and sign the JSA before entering the worksite.
Note: On occasion, it will be impractical to post the JSA at the worksite. However, in all
cases the JSA will be available at the worksite when activities are being
performed.
Nonroutine Workers
In the event that nonroutine personnel (such as inspectors or visitors) arrive on the worksite and the existing JSA
(whether developed by ABG or subcontractor) does not cover the hazards associated with their activity, a new JSA
will be written to cover that activity or the supervisor will modify the existing JSA to cover the activity.
Updating a JSA
JSAs (including attachments) will be renewed, amended, or revised when the safety requirements change, hazards
change, new hazards are identified, the work scope changes, or 6 months has elapsed since the last review. The
date on the JSA(s) will be changed to reflect the renewal/ modification. The HSE Representative will review and
approve all changes. Employees involved in the work will review the renewed/modified JSA and resign and date
Form 000.653.F0314 or equal.
Pre-Task Walkthrough
Personnel performing a pre-task walkthrough will use the appropriate documents and information available to
ensure hazards, or potential hazards, are correctly identified and communicated for the activity being performed.
If, after the pre-task walkthrough, there is inconsistency between what the actual conditions are at the worksite
and what was expected in the pre-walkthrough evaluation, the differences will be resolved before any work
begins and the appropriate changes noted on the JSA.
Completing a “hazard checklist” (such as Forms 000.653.F0154, Pre-Task Hazard Checklist; 000.653.F0155, Plant
Risk Assessment Checklist; or 000.653.F0315, Job Hazard Checklist) is an optional but convenient method of
documenting hazards/controls identified during the pre-task walkdown. This form also provides a convenient (but
again optional) method of notifying subcontractors of the suspected/potential hazards associated with a
contract/scope of work (refer to Practice 000.653.1003, Contractor Selection and Alignment).
Key ABG employees (such as construction supervision and craft, and the HSE Representative), the
customer/client, and subcontractor (if subcontractor work) should be involved in the pre-task planning process.
Involvement may include pre-task walkthroughs, participation in developing the JSA, or input/changes recognized
during pre-task meetings.
JSA Preparation
JSAs are prepared and address specific work activities and hazards associated with the specific work, and controls
to mitigate the hazards. Subcontractors use the hazard information contained in the contract, as well as the pre-
task walkthrough, when developing JSAs covering their work.

Page 755
ABG
Further evaluation and documentation on the continuation page(s) are required for activities when any of the
following situations pertain:
 Any hazard/activity on page 1 is checked “yes.”
 Hazards associated with the work to be performed are not sufficiently defined.
 Employees may be exposed to hazardous materials.
 Other significant or unusual hazards are anticipated or could become involved.
Subcontractors and lower-tier contractors may use their own JSA forms, provided the information contained in
their completed form addresses the process and guidelines as outlined in this practice.
JSAs include the following information as prescribed on the JSA form:
 Job scope and description of activities
 Listing of each activity or phase
 Identification of the hazards associated with the activities being performed, including
the use or presence of hazardous chemicals
 Specific, effective safety measures (engineering, administrative, or PPE) to eliminate
or control the hazards
 A list of specific applicable work control documents, such as maintenance instruction
or equipment procedure
 Required training
 Required permits
 Identification and detail (including drawings and other documentation) of
activities/hazards for which protective measures are required to be designed,
inspected, or approved by a professional engineer or Competent/Qualified Person
Pre-Task Meeting
The supervisor/designee will conduct a pre-task meeting before any work activity begins and discusses the
completed pre-task planning documents with all employees directly involved in the activity. A “pre-task meeting
form” (such as Form 000.653.F0316, Pre-Task Briefing Checklist) may be used to document topics covered in the
meeting. Any employee who is not in attendance at the pre-task meeting will not be allowed to work until he/she
attends a similar briefing.
Note: The supervisor/designee should invite the ABG HSE Representative to attend the
initial pre-task meeting for each project/task order.
The pre-task meeting will focus on discussions of the area where work is performed, scope of work, equipment
used, the hazards and control measures (including PPE), and any evacuation and emergency procedures.
Each employee directly involved in the activity (including employees in support roles) will sign Form
000.653.F0314 (or equal) indicating that he/she understands the activity, hazards, and controls associated with
the work effort as indicated on the applicable pre-task planning documents and attachments.

Page 756
ABG
Note: Only those employees signing Form 000.653.F0314 (or equal) are allowed to work
on the job specified in the document.
Note: If an employee does not understand the safety requirements or scope of the job,
the employee may not proceed with the work until the requirements and scope
are clearly understood.
Safety Task Assignment
The STA is the process of identifying and communicating to each employee the task steps to be completed, the
hazards and risks associated with the task, and the safe work practices that are to be applied to complete the task
safely and in an environmentally acceptable manner.
The STA process includes the following:
 Pre-task planning
 Hazard identification and correction
 Supervisor and employee accountability
Responsibility
It is the responsibility of Project/Site Management to verify completion of the STA process on a daily basis. It is
the supervisor’s responsibility to conduct the STA process daily with his/her employees before each new work
assignment. The STA forms must be provided to Project/Site Management at the completion of each shift.
Process
 The supervisor receives the job/task assignment.

 The supervisor conducts a review of the job/task to be assigned.
 An STA meeting is conducted with the employees who have been chosen to perform
the assignment and who have agreed to comply with STA requirements.
 Each step of the task will be reviewed with the assigned employees, and all potential
hazards will be identified.
 Safe work practices, PPE, and task competency requirements will be reviewed and
discussed with the employees.
 The supervisor is responsible for providing all required PPE and other equipment
necessary for the safe completion of the task in the work area.
 The supervisor completes the STA form. Each employee assigned to perform the
task will sign the STA form indicating awareness of the task at hand, potential
hazards, safe work practices, and required PPE.
 The STA form will be displayed in the work area until the end of the shift or until the
task is completed.
 The supervisor will monitor the job/task as it begins and periodically revisit the work
location to monitor working conditions and compliance with the STA requirements.

Page 757
ABG
Note: While performing the job/task, if additional employees are assigned to the work
team, the supervisor must review the STA with those employees, and their
signatures must be added to the STA.
Post-STA
The post-STA will be completed at the end of shift or at task completion.

The supervisor will review and complete the post-STA with each employee. All safety concerns/problems that
occur during the assignment should be recorded on the post-STA.
Each employee will sign the post-STA indicating that they have reviewed and agree with the listed comments.
When the job/task is completed, the STA form will be submitted to Project/Site Management for retention.
An STA trifold card is provided as Form 000.653.F0101, Safety Task Assignment.
REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0154 Pre-Task Hazard Checklist
000.653.F0155 Plant Risk Assessment Checklist
000.653.F0156 Hazard and Risk Review
000.653.F0314 Pre-Task Planning Signoff
000.653.F0315 Job Hazard Checklist
000.653.F0316 Pre-Task Briefing Checklist
ATTACHMENTS

Page 758
ABG
Attachment 01 Formal Risk Assessment Process

Page 759
ABG
PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT (PSM)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................728
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 728
Application..............................................................................................................................................................728
Definitions..............................................................................................................................................................728
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.........................................................................................................................................729
Application of Standard..........................................................................................................................................729
ABG ..................................................................................................................................................................... 730
Action Plan..............................................................................................................................................................731
Training...................................................................................................................................................................731
Incident Investigation.............................................................................................................................................732
Confidentiality........................................................................................................................................................732

Page 760
ABG
NOTE: The ABG facility does not fall under the PSM standards. This information is to be used as a guide only
should circumstances warrant it.
Purpose
This procedure provides minimum requirements for the management of hazards associated with processes using
highly hazardous chemicals. It defines ABG and client/owner responsibilities regarding actions that must be taken
to prevent or minimize the consequences of accidents involving highly hazardous chemicals in an effort to protect
employees.
Scope
This procedure defines Process Safety Management (PSM), including training requirements.
Application
This procedure applies globally to ABG and its subcontractors where the client/owner has developed a PSM
program.
Definitions
Facility
The physical structure (building, equipment, piping, valves, instruments, control logic, etc.) within which a given
process is operated.
Hazards
A chemical or physical condition that has the potential to cause injury to people, damage to property, or harm to
the environment.
Hazardous Substance
Any chemical or material that, when released or whose energy is released, can result in serious injury to
personnel, property damage, or significant environmental harm.
Hot Work
Work involving electric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or similar flame or spark-producing operations.

Page 761
ABG
Process
Any activity conducted by employees that involves a highly hazardous chemical including use, storage,
manufacturing, handling, processing, or movement of the chemical, or any combination of these activities. Highly
hazardous chemicals are those that are at or above threshold quantities as specified by OSHA or in-country
regulatory agencies.
Process Safety Management (PSM)
Application of systems and controls to a manufacturing or chemical process in a manner that process hazards are
identified, understood, and controlled so that process-related exposures, injuries, and incidents are prevented.
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Each client/owner should develop a detailed Process Safety Management (PSM) Program suited to its specific
organizational structure and needs. The client/owner's PSM Program must address:
- employee participation;
- process safety information;
- process hazard analysis;
- operating procedures;
- training contractors;
- prestart-up safety review;
- mechanical integrity;
- hot work permit;
- management of change;
- incident investigation;
- emergency planning and response;
- compliance safety audit; and
- trade secrets.
It should be re-emphasized that the responsibility for developing the on-site PSM Program lies solely with the
client/owner.
Application of Standard
The standard, as defined by the U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration applies to a process that
involves a chemical that is at or above the specified threshold quantities listed in Toxic and Reactive Highly
Hazardous Chemicals List (Attachment 2) of this procedure. Processes that contain or involve a flammable liquid
or gas in quantity of ten thousand (10,000) pounds (approximately 455 kg) or greater are covered. Other
processes will be covered due to their involvement of toxic materials that have lower threshold quantities. All

Page 762
ABG
covered chemicals, whether toxic, reactive, flammable, or explosive, will be listed on Toxic and Reactive Highly
Hazardous Chemicals List (Attachment 2) with their applicable threshold quantities.
This standard does not apply to hydrocarbon fuels that are used solely for workplace consumption as a fuel; e.g.,
propane used for comfort heating and gasoline for refueling. It also does not apply to flammable liquids stored
below their normal boiling point without chilling or refrigeration.
Responsibilities
Client/Owner
The implementation and development of the Project/Site Process Safety Management Program is the
responsibility of the client/owner. The specific portion of the client/owner PSM Program that directly impacts ABG
employees are the project’s/site's safe work practices. Safe work practices such as lockout/tagout, confined space
entry, pipe breaking, and control of personnel in areas around covered processes must be implemented. These
safe work practices must then be passed to ABG by the client/owner. ABG must then train their employees in
these safe work practices. Other client/owner responsibilities are:
- Obtain and evaluate a contractor's safety performance and safety program before selecting them to work
on a covered process;
- Inform ABG employees performing work on or near a process of the known potential fire, explosion or
toxic release hazards related to their work and the process;
- Explain to ABG employees the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan;
- Establish clear lines of communication between the client/owner and ABG employees who work in
process areas;
- Periodically evaluate ABG's safety performance; and
- Maintain an injury and illness log related to ABG work in process areas.
ABG
OSHA 1910.119 (h) explains the provisions that are applicable to ABG employees. Only those ABG employees
whose activities bring them into direct contact with a process unit covered by the rule are subject to the standard
provision. The standard applies to ABG employees who perform maintenance or repair, turnaround, major
renovation, or specialty work on or adjacent to a covered process. In these instances ABG responsibility is to:
- Verify that each ABG employee has the necessary job skill training and is qualified to safely perform
his/her assigned task;
- Train each ABG employee in the known fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards associated with his/her job
and the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan;
- Document and verify by testing that each ABG employee received and understood the training.
Employees who do not understand the training may not be utilized to work in or adjacent to a covered
process area;

Page 763
ABG
- Audit the performance of ABG employees to confirm that they are working safely and that they follow all
applicable work procedures and safe practices of the facility;
- Advise the client/owner of any unique hazards presented by ABG’s work or any hazards found by any ABG
employee; and
- Engineering/design operations where ABG employees may be directly affected by another contractor's
work will be included.
- Not perform any hot work until a proper Hot Work Permit has been issued, reviewed and signs off on by
all ABG employee’s working on the project.
Action Plan
The first step in the implementation of the Process Safety Management Program is to obtain the client’s/owner’s
safe work practices, contractor procedures, and control procedures that are necessary to protect ABG employees
who are subject to PSM. A sample form letter asking for that information is shown as Attachment 1. Once those
procedures are acquired, other steps that should be taken are listed below.
- Identify each employee who is or has the potential to be exposed to chemicals or processes containing
chemicals that are regulated by the standard.
- Review all ABG work tasks or assignments to establish client vs. ABG responsibilities in regards to actions
to be taken to prepare the employee, equipment or area for work to be done.
- Verify individual competency in a particular discipline; i.e., pipefitting, millwrighting, instrumentation.
- Confirm that each employee is trained in the client/owner-supplied safe work practices or procedures
necessary to safely perform his/her job.
- Review all work permits to verify that they incorporate the proper information that identify the name of
all chemicals that employees will have potential exposure to so that MSDS can be reviewed and the
necessary precautions taken before beginning work.
- Review and establish the need and training requirements for all personal protective equipment that shall
be used during work on process equipment.
- Prepare a record which contains the identity of each employee, date of training and the means used to
verify that the employee understood the training.
Each project/site should note that the process safety management standard is performance oriented. The
development of each project/site PSM Program will be dependent on resources available. Assistance may be
obtained from ABG’s Corporate HSE Department. To receive assistance concerning a PSM Program, each
project/site should contact the appropriate Regional HSE Director/Manager.
Training

Page 764
ABG
Each ABG employee presently working on or around a covered process and each new employee, before working
on or around a newly assigned process, must be trained. This is ABG responsibility. This training must provide an
overview of the process and must emphasize the specific safety and health hazards, procedures, and safe
practices applicable to the employee's tasks.
ABG employees should receive refresher training as often as necessary and at least annually. ABG must document
that each employee received and understood the training. A record of training that contains the identity of the
employee's date of training, and means (test) used to verify that the employee understood the training, must be
maintained. Examples of training to be provided would involve safe work practices and programs such as:
- hazard communication;
- opening of process equipment and piping;
- lockout/tagout of hazardous energy source;
- entry into confined spaces; and
- control of ignition sources (hot work permit).
Incident Investigation
ABG must immediately report all accidents, injuries and near misses. An incident investigation must be initiated
within 48 hours. Resolutions and corrective actions must be documented and maintained 5 years.
Confidentiality
ABG must inform employees that they must respect the confidentiality of trade secret information released to
them and where exposure or access to trade secrets exist. Violation of this confidentiality is grounds for
disciplinary action up.

Page 765
ABG
RAILROAD SAFETY OPERATIONS GUIDELINES
SAFETY ADMINISTRATION
HEALTH, SAFETY AND

ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES

JANUARY 2017
The movement of rail cars throughout the plant is a critical and imperative phase of plant operations. Regardless
of the time schedules, work delay and shipping commitments, this work must be accomplished safely using every
precaution to protect to the greatest degree possible the operators, all other plant personnel and equipment. To
achieve this, the following rules and regulations are issued as Directives that will be complied with at all times.
Resource information was obtained from the following organizations:
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

The Association of American Railroads (A.A.R.)
Federal Railroad Authority (F.R.A.)
Port Terminal Railroad Authority (P.T.R.A.)
This should be used as a basic training aid. For more specific information you will need to use the actual
equipment on the job and walk through these guidelines with employees testing their ability of performing these
job assignments.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS RELATING TO RAILROAD OPERATIONS
“A” End of Car – Identifying the end of the car being opposite the “B” end. The “B” end of a car is the end upon
which the hand brake is installed.
A.A.R. – The Association of American Railroads.
Accelerate – To increase the speed of movement.
Air Brake – A vehicle braking system that uses air as the force for braking.
Air Brake Hose – Flexible hose at each end of a railcar to provide a continuous flexible air line from locomotive to
caboose.

Page 766
ABG
Air Compressor – A power drive air pump used for supplying air for the operation or air brakes and other air
operated equipment. On locomotives, the main locomotive engine normally drives them.
Ammeter – An instrument for measuring electrical current in amperes.
Angle Cock – Valve located on either end of a car on the air brake hose to enable personnel to open or close the
air flow through the hose.
Axle – The steel shaft on which the car wheels are mounted.
“B” End of Car – The end of the car upon which the hand brake is installed.
Bad Order – A car that is in need of mechanical attention or repairs.
Battery – A group of cells connected together and capable of producing a direct current (D.C.) by chemical action.
Bearing – That which supports or on which something rests and is in contact. (Examples: roller bearings, side
bearings, etc.)
Belt – A band of flexible material, passing around two pulleys, transferring motion from one to the other.
Body Bolster – The part of the car body, which transmits the carload to the trucks through the center places.
Body Center Plate – A steel plate fastened to the body bolster to transmit the body bolster load to the trucks.
Body Side Bearing – a bearing pad fastened to the body bolster, which limits the amount of “rocking” a car, does
when travelling over uneven grades.
Bolster Spring – Main springs of a car supporting the truck bolster on which the weight of a car rests.
Bottom Rod Guard – Device used to support the bottom rod in the event it fails to prevent it from falling to the
ground.
Brake – The combination of equipment used to retard or slow down the movement of a vehicle.
Brake Beam – The supporting structure for the brake heads and shoes.
Brake Chain – A chain connecting the hand brake gear wheel to the brake levers.
Brake Pipe – Length of pipe running the length of the car, with flexible hoses at either end to provide a continuous
air line from locomotive to caboose; sometimes called a “train line”.
Brake Shoe – Block of friction material, which provides braking force when, applied to the tread of the rail wheels.

Page 767
ABG
Brake Valve – The valve by which the engineer operates the train brakes.
Buff – Term used to describe the coupler force when compressed or “pushed in”. (The opposite or pulling force is
called draft.)
Bulkhead – A vertical partition generally extending the full width of a car.
Capacity – The nominal load in pounds or gallons. These figures are stenciled on the car and identified as “CAPY”.
Cast Steel Wheel – A rail wheel made by pouring molten steel into a mold under well controlled conditions.
Center Pin – Steel pin passing the truck and body bolster to aid in keeping truck and body connected together.
Center Sill – The central, longitudinal member of a car under frame. May be a continuous sill running the length of
the car or a short “stub” sill.
C.O.F.C. – An acronym for “container on flat car”. (Example – Van boxes mounted on a flat car.)
Commodity – Term used to describe the contents of a car. Other terms such as “products” or “lading” are also
used interchangeably.
Cooling Water – Fluid that circulates through spaces through equipment to prevent excess heating of the
equipment.
Coupler – A device located at both ends of a car to provide a means for connecting one rail vehicle to another.
Covered Hopper – A hopper car with a permanent roof, hatches, and bottom openings for unloading.
Crossover – A platform located on both ends of a car to permit crossing from one side of the car to the other.
Defect Card – Card issued by the railroads to acknowledge their responsibility for damage done to a railcar.
Density – Weight per unit volume: generally expressed as “pounds per cubic feet” or pounds per gallon”.
Diesel Electric – Type of locomotive by which power developed by a diesel engine is delivered through a hydraulic
transmission to the drive axles.
Draft – Term used to describe the coupler force when de-compressed or “pulled out”. The opposite or pushing
force is called buff.
Draft Gear – Term used to describe the energy absorbing component in the draft system located behind the
couple assembly.

Page 768
ABG
End Sill – The transverse member of the under frame extending across the ends of the longitudinal sills.
F.R.A. – The Federal Railroad Administration.
Filter – Devices for removing undesirable foreign matter from fluids.
Flange – The vertical projection along the inner rim of a wheel that serves to keep the wheel positioned on the
rail.
Flat Car – a freight car having a flat floor or deck with no side ends or roof normally used to transport trailers,
vans, or other individual pieces of equipment.
Fuel Pump – A unit used to transfer fuel oil from a tank or reservoir to the engine.
Fuse – A wire strip or bar of fusible metal placed within an electrical circuit and designed to melt and stop the
current flow when excess current exists.
Gage Glass – A vertical glass tube connected at the top and bottom of a tank to indicate the height of liquid in the
tank. Also called a “sight glass”.
Generator – A rotating electrical machine which changes mechanical energy into electrical energy. In a diesel
electric locomotive, this receives mechanical power from the diesel engine and delivers electrical power to the
traction motors.
Governor – A device, which controls the engine speed in accordance with the throttle setting.
Water Pump – An engine driven pump used to circulate cooling water through the engine assembly.
Wrought Steel Wheel – A railway wheel made by hot forging and rolling as opposed to the casting process.
DEFINITIONS RELATING TO TRACKS AND ACCESSORIES
Ballast – Material used to transmit the rail load to the subgrade. If positioned properly between and beneath rail
ties, it securely anchors track system by preventing sinking ties and limits lateral and longitudinal rail movement.
(Examples are crushed stone, rocks, and gravel.)
Blue Flag (Blue Light) – A warning posted on tracks to alert train personnel that men might be at work on the
track, under, or on top of rail equipment. Do not proceed!
Compromise Joint – Joint bars that are used to connect rail ends of two different sizes – such as 132# rail to 115#
rail.

Page 769
ABG
Connecting Rod – The rod, which connects the switch to the switch, points. By moving the throwing lever, the
movement is transferred to the points through the use of this rod.
Derail – A mechanical safety drive to prevent unwanted railcar movement into a protected area by guiding the car
wheels to the grounds. May be electrical or manual.
Derailment – When the flanged wheels or rail equipment leaves the top of the rail and goes to the ground. Also
called a “derail” (verb).
Fastenings – Equipment that is used to secure a track system in place. Examples are bolts, nuts, washers, braces,
spikes, etc.
Flangeway – The distance between the gauge side of the rail and the edge of track structure, which provides a
passageway for wheel, flanges. Usually found where rail is laid in asphalt or concrete.
Frog – Device used at the intersection of two running rails. Provides wheels on either track to cross the other.
Gauge (Track Tool) – Device used to determine the distance the rails.
Gauge (Of Track) – The distance between the gauge lines, measured at right angles to the rails. Standard gauge is
4’ – 8-1/2”.
Guard Rail – A rail or other structure lay parallel with the running tails to prevent wheels from being derailed or to
keep them in proper alignment when going through switches or frogs.
Heel Block – Device to which the switch points are bolted. Provides a “pivot point” for the switch points.
Joint Bar – Commonly used in pairs to secure the ends of rail ends. Holds them accurately, evenly, and firmly in
position. (Sometimes referred to as “angle bars”.)

Page 770
ABG
SAFETY TRAINING FOR RAILROAD SUPPORT GROUPS
PURPOSE
To provide knowledge of common safety practices associated with railroad support operations.
SAFETY PROCEDURES
1. Employees must wear shoes that afford maximum support and protection to their feet. When
performing duties connected with railroad switching operations, high-top, lace-up boots give added
support to ankles; low heels will give firm footing and make standing, walking and climbing safer.
2. Carelessness has no place and care must be exercised to avoid injury to you or other workers. Always
observe the condition of equipment and tools to be used. When found defective, replace them or
have them repaired back to safe and useable condition.
3. Engine and train operations need to establish a chain of command with the most competent person in
the lead position; this will allow the operation to maintain structure.
4. Employees with duties connected with the movement of trains, engines or cars must familiarize
themselves with the rules governing the duties of others as well as their own and will be prepared, in
case of emergency to act in any capacity to insure safety.
5. Hearing protection should be required when excessive noise of the engine or workplace warrants.
Noise level monitoring should be done to establish this need.
6. Terms used to describe some worker positions addressed in this training are trainmen, conductors,
brakemen, yardmasters, enginemen, firemen, hostlers, flagmen and switchmen.

Page 771
ABG
COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES
1. Employees required to give signals must keep those appliances ready and in good working order
ready for immediate use.
2. Signals must be given and acted upon strictly. Trainmen, enginemen and others must keep alert for
signals. While giving signals, give them in a manner that cannot be misunderstood. When
practicable, all hand signals, flag and lamp signals must be given on the engineer’s side.
3. Caution must be exercised by trainmen and enginemen to avoid acting on signals that are not
understood. When in doubt, a common understanding must be reached before moving.
4. When movement of the engine or cars is being controlled by hand signals, the disappearance from
view of that signalman controlling the movement must be considered as a stop signal.
5. In a similar manner, when train or engine movements are to be made by radio communications,
specific instructions must be given for each movement. The distance of the movement must be
specified and should be stopped within one-half that distance. Unless additional instructions are
received, all movements must be made with caution. Don’t relay on feel or sound as to progress.
6. Before changing the means of communications from hand signals to radio, there should be a definite
understanding among all members of that crew.
7. The following railroad signals should be studied and used when switching cars. The hand or a flag will
give the same indication:
STOP – Swing right arm in front of you at right angle to the track.
REDUCE SPEED – Slight horizontal movement at arm’s length at right angle to track.
PROCEED – Raise and lower right arm vertically.
BACKING UP – Swing right arm in a vertical circle at right angle to track.
APPLY BRAKES – Right arm swing back and forth above the head.
8. For a common understanding, standardize the terminology used for switching commands. Because
quality of radios varies, keep commands short. Verbal terminology used for signals is as follows:
STOP – The engine of the train will come to a complete stop. The engine or train will not move again
until the signalman gives a start signal.
EMERGENCY STOP or WASH OUT – Same as above.
COME TO ME – The engine or train will move toward the switchman; repeat this command until the
engine or train is at the desired position.
TAKE IT AWAY FROM ME or AWAY FROM ME – The engine or train will move away from the
switchman. Repeat this command until the engine or train is at the desired position.
EASY or SLOW DOWN – The engine will reduce speed until the switchman discontinues this
command.

Page 772
ABG
BUMP – The car or engine coupler is 3 feet or less from another coupler. The ending will reduce its
speed sufficiently to lightly engage couplers. This can also be given as a hand signal by tapping the
heels of both hands together, holding hand at chest level.
STRETCH – The engineer and switchman will make sure that all the cars in the train are properly
coupled by pulling the train 2 to 3 feet. The hand signal for this is interlocked fingers chest high and in
an outward motion pulling out.
9. Sometimes it may be necessary to switch at night and give hand signals. These signals must be done
with a bright light and should always face the engine. Signs used at night are:
STOP – One hand holding the lantern. Make a wide sweeping motion across the lower part of your
body in the same manner as the daytime hand signals.
EASY – One hand holding the lantern chest high. Make a sweeping motion from left to right across
your chest.
10. Using the whistle on the engine signals are “O” for short sounds “_” for longer sounds. Sound of
whistles should be distinct, with intensity and duration proportionate.
APPLY BRAKES or STOP - O

TRAIN PARTED - ___
ANSWER TO ANY SIGNAL NOT PROVIDED FOR - OO
WHEN STANDING, BACK UP - OOO
CALL FOR SIGNALS - OOOO
APPROACHING PUBLIC CROSSINGS - _ _O_
Signal must begin at least 20 seconds before reaching crossing. This signal must also be frequently
sounded to warn trackmen and other employees when weather, obscure curves or other unusual
conditions restrict vision and when approaching tunnels.
INSPECT BRAKE PIPE FOR LEAKS OR BRAKE STICKING - O_
ALARM FOR PERSON OR LIVESTOCK ON THE TRACK - Succession of

Short sounds
ENGINEER OR SECOND ENGINE
TAKE CONTROL OF AIRBRAKES - OO_
11. The headlight should be displayed to the front of every train and night unless meeting another train
or during actual switching of cars. This headlight should be displayed forward in your direction of
travel.
It is also important to know and understand protective measures and their applications for the
protection of maintenance and operational personnel in our plants and yard facilities.

Page 773
ABG
12. Blue Signal Protection (Blue Flag)
a) Employee assigned to inspect, test, repair, or service railroad equipment or their components,
including train and yard crews, track repair and operations, must be provided a method of
absolute control for their safety. This control measure should come in the form of blue flags,
derails, and men working signs, to only be removed or opened by those workers or through
authorization of their immediate supervisor.
b) A blue flag indicates that workers are on, under, around, or between rolling equipment and that
the equipment must not be coupled or moved. Other equipment must not be placed on the
same track so as to block or reduce the view of this blue flag. In conjunction with a blue flag,
derail devices should be used. This will help divide the work area with a physical barrier. Before
any of these devices are used or before any work is done, there must be clear and precise
communication between all parties, either directly or indirectly involved; meaning switchcrews,
operational personnel, maintenance workers, as well as inspection groups. These steps must be
taken seriously and never overlooked. We should look at working around railroad tracks just
like working around any heavy equipment; the weight and size of the equipment often puts us
in a blind spot of the operator and in a huge disadvantage.
RIDING MOVING EQUIPMENT
If it becomes necessary to ride on moving railroad equipment during switching activities to get from one
area to another, locomotives and railcars are designed with features added by their manufacturers. This
enables workers to ride railroad switching equipment in a safe manner. This type of procedure is
discouraged but can be done as a last resort by approval of supervision. (One exception is the trackmobile
because of its design. It should only be mounted and dismounted while at a complete stop.) In order to
accomplish these maneuvers safety, several elements are needed – safety awareness, safety equipment,
and training.
1. Before getting on a piece of moving equipment, some conditions that must be met to ensure safety
are:
a) Proper end: It is important when getting on moving equipment that the correct end of the car is
used. Always get on the leading end of the car, which is coming towards the worker. This
prevents a worker from being thrown between cars if a step is missed. Speed and momentum
of a moving car must be respected. It is completed acceptable to get on the trailing end of the
last car.
b) Train speed: The speed of a train is very important when getting on and off. When the car goes
too fast, it increases the chance of missing the handhold or missing a step. If an employee feels
the speed is too great for a safe mount, slow the train or do not mount.

Page 774
ABG
c) Ground conditions: This has to be checked to ensure that the mounting location is a smooth,
high area free from obstacles, which could be a tripping hazard.
2. The mounting technique is a series of movements that can be done safety, when done correctly. The
wrong technique can lead to a very serious injury. Safe mounting and dismounting techniques are as
follows:
a) Walk up to the car and firmly grasp the hand hold approximately head high.
b) Put the trailing foot (the one which is closest to the mounting point) on the back corner of the
side sill step. Using the improper foot will push the employee away from the car. Putting the
foot in the back or trailing end of the step stops slipping action and gives room for the other
foot.
c) Employee should now pull himself on the case while straightening out his leg. The forward
motion of the train will help lift the employee up on the car. The other foot can now be placed
on the sill step.
d) While riding the railcar, the employee should hold on very tight to prevent falling.
3. When getting down from the railcar, the following technique should be used:
a) Hold tight with both hands.

b) Put the trailing foot down first, in a clear spot before the leading foot. This gives the body some
time for adjustment.
c) Let go with the lead hand and swing the lead foot outward away from the railcar. The
employee will be facing in the direction of travel.
d) Put the lead foot down and let go of the car with the trailing hand as soon as possible; pause to
gain balance.
CROSSING OVER STATIONARY CAR
Sometimes it may be necessary to cross over the end of a stationary car. This can be done by walking over
the special cross-over platform located on the end sill of a car. This should be done only if it is impossible or
totally impractical to go around to the end.
1. Some procedures to follow in crossing over cars are as follows:
a) Make sure that car movement will not occur. Communicate with all employees and inform
them of your actions.
b) Put hand on the upper hand holds and place the feet in the corner of the sill step.
c) Pull and put the feet one at a time on the side sill hold.
d) Put the feet on the end sill hand hold.
NEVER use the uncoupling rod bracket as a step. It is not designed to support the

Page 775
ABG
weight of the body
e) Cross over the end of the car by using the cross-over platform and be sure to hold on tightly to
the hand rails.
f) Reverse procedure to dismount.
SWITCHING PROCEDURES
1. Switches used in railroad services are very important pieces of equipment. Switches are used to
divert the movement of rail equipment from one track to another. This equipment must be properly
inspected, operated and maintained to insure the safe operation of any rail system.
2.
It is advisable for employees to first acquaint themselves with the type of switches used on any
operations. The client or the rail maintenance crew most likely has some information, which will
include a parts breakdown.
3. The following procedures should be used to operate switches:
a) When operating switches, stand with feet firmly placed with the body in a balanced position
and lift or pull steadily on the switch lever. Position feet securely and lift with the legs. Do not
lift with the back or just he arms.
b) Do not stand in a position where feet, hands or other parts of the body may be struck by the
switch lever or ball, or by the derail being placed on or removed from the rail, except to operate
the foot latch or to secure the handle of the automatic switch. The use of feet to operate
switches shall be prohibited.
c) When operating a spring switch or dual control switch by hand, do not attempt to force the
lever rapidly. Maintain a steady pressure against the handle.
d) Switch levers on hand-thrown switches must not be left partially raised. Dogs or latches on
switches shall be used to assure the switches are properly engaged.
e) Do not place hands or feet between switch points and rails unless the switch is secured to
prevent use. Never use your hands or feet to remove objects from between switch points.
f) When operating switches, look in both directions for moving equipment on adjacent tracks.
Never operate any switch without communication and approval of switching personnel.
SETTING HAND BRAKES
1. Another procedure that is an intricate part of railroad switching operations is the setting of railcar
hand brakes. Some guidelines to follow in order to make this an easier task are listed below:
a) Employees whose duties require them to operate hand brakes must acquaint themselves with
proper method of operating the various types.
b) When possible, employees should use the side rather than end ladders when ascending or
descending cars to set or release high-mounted hand brakes.

Page 776
ABG
c) When operating hand brakes, maintain a firm grip and safe footing. Be prepared for
unexpected bunching or slipping of brake chains.
d) Take the proper position on the car, as required by the design of the brake to be used. Have a
secure footing and firm handhold to prevent slipping, falls, sprain or strain from loosing grip or
balance.
e) When setting or releasing hand brakes, do not use any part of any other car as a foot rest.
f) When operating hand brakes on cars, especially those equipped with cushion underframes,
employees must be braced and have a firm handhold. Feet must not be place on any movable
part of a car, particularly the sliding still. Low mounted hand brakes on the end of cars must not
be operated while standing on the ground.
g) When operating staff or drop shaft hand brakes, exert the pressure with the body leaning
toward the car.
h) When operating vertical type hand brakes, use one hand to operate the brake and the other to
grip the handhold of the car.
i) Before you operate the vertical type hand brakes, make certain clothing, hands, and other parts
of the body are clear of the spinning wheel or lever.
j) The use of feet in applying or releasing vertical type handbrakes is prohibited.
SAFETY TRAINING FOR SWITCH ENGINE OPERATIONS
Purpose
To provide knowledge of common safety practices associated with switch engine operations.
Safety Procedures
1. Only qualified personnel, those who have been trained and successfully completed training classes
shall operate the switch engine or act as a switchman. Training classes will be scheduled as necessary
to maintain operator proficiency.
2. Movement of any cars requires the entire switch crew’s presence, and it is important to work as a
tem. We should limit our movements to the rail systems, which are controlled by our clients, unless
we have proper authorization from the controlling party. These moves must be made with extreme
caution and should be kept at a minimum.
3. The switch engine is a powerful piece of equipment. In general, they are diesel-electric locomotives.
These engines are capable of moving in excess of some 35 loaded railcars at one time. This would, or
course, be a locomotive in excess of 1200 horsepower at approximately 120 tons.
Much of the engine’s ability to move such loads will depend on track grade, curvature and weather
conditions. The typical engines with this rating work on 600 and 72 voltages. The main generators
are usually driven by V-12 diesel engines. The electrical current is metered to a number of traction
motors; this number depends on the size of the locomotive and the manufacturer. These traction
motors are regulated by the RPM’s of the diesel engine. As the RPM’s increase, the speed of the

Page 777
ABG
generator is increased. The generator increases its current to the traction motors and the locomotive
speed increases.
4. You should have common knowledge of and inspect your locomotive before each shift. Special
attention should be given to the following:
a) Main Battery Switch: Engages and disconnects current from batteries. This switch is to be kept
disconnected when the engine is out of service and not running. At no time is the switch to be
disconnected with the engine running.
b) Isolation Switch: This switch has two positions—start and run. It must be in start position for
the engine to start and in the run position for the engine to move.
c) Ground Relay Reset: This relay should be reset each time the engine is started. The engine will
not move or reset if there is a ground in the electrical system. This will have to be located and
repaired before operations can return to normal.
d) Start and Stop Buttons: These buttons will start and stop the engine only when the isolation
switch is at the start position.
e) Control Panel: This panel contains the bulk of the controls for operating the locomotive:
(1) Fuel pump switch

(2) Generator field switch
(3) Throttle
(4) Controller or reverse
(5) Engine run switch
(6) Lighting switches
f) Air Control Pedestal: This pedestal controls the air for the brake systems (train and engine), the
sanders, and the engine sounding bell.
g) Gauges
(1) Water temperature – 180° maximum operating temperature. Notify supervision if this
temperature is exceeded. Louvers on the front of the locomotive should open
automatically to aid in cooling down the system.
(2) Oil pressure – approximately 62 pounds when starting cold. Approximately 25 pounds
when idling after the engine has been warmed up.
(3) Air tank (reservoir) – pressure should hold at approximately 135 psi.
(4) Engine brake pressure – pressure should be about 30-40 psi with brakes applied.
Pressure should be completely off when running.
(5) Amp load indicator – indicates the amount of amperage the traction motors are pulling.
This load should not be over 900 amps for sustained periods of longer than 5 minutes.

Page 778
ABG
h) Start Procedure: After completing the daily inspection of the locomotive, the start procedure
can be initiated.
(1) Open all 12 compression release valves (one on each engine cylinder). Each is to be
opened 2 to 3 revolutions. Failure to follow this step could cause major damage to the
engine. This should be done any time the engine is down for more than 8 hours and is
done for the purpose of blowing any water that might accumulate in the cylinders out.
(2) Engage battery switch.
(3) Isolation switch set to start.
(4) Fuel pump switch on.
(5) Engine run switch on.
(6) Controller in neutral.
(7) Throttle in idle.
(8) Using START button, bump the engine over 2 revolutions to clear the cylinders through
the release valves. Do not start engine with release valves open. Stay clear of the valves
discharge area.
(9) Make note of any water blown out of the cylinders, and then close all 12 release valves.
(10) Again engage start button. Hold in until engine starts: then release.
(11) Engage generator field switch
(12) Reset ground relay.
(13) Set isolation switch to run.
(14) The engine should be ready to move after approximately 15 minutes of warm-up and the
air pressure is up to its maximum in the main reservoir. Allow the water temperature to
reach at least 100° before working the engine.
(15) An engineer shall never detrain while the switch engine or trackmobile is in motion.
(16) No rail car should be in motion without being firmly coupled to the drives. Flying switches
shall not be permitted. (This can be done only as a directive from the client, and even
then should be done sparingly.)
(17) In the event of a fire or plant emergency, all intersections should be kept clear as much as
possible.
(18) Engineers should sound the horn prior to engine or rail cars crossing any intersection.
(19) Only sufficient force to engage the coupler will be used. “Humping” of cars should be
prohibited.
(20) The engineer shall have full visibility ahead while pulling cars, and the number to be
handled simultaneously should be kept within the load limits of the engine and within the
equipment’s ability to safely stop to load if the need should arise. This shall also apply
when pushing cars.
(21) Throwing of articles form the engine is dangerous and is forbidden.
(22) The engineer is responsible for the safe and proper operation of the engine in his charge.
He must not permit any unauthorized persons to operate or ride on the engine. He must
also stop the engine until all unauthorized persons are removed from his railroad
operation. This includes the tracks.
(23) The engineer shall inspect the engine thoroughly every day.

Page 779
ABG
(24) The engineer will consider any unclear or break in communication as an order to stop the
train until clear, understandable communication can be established.
(25) The engineer should not exceed a speed that will permit stopping within ½ of his visual
range.
(26) Coupling of cars should not take place on curved sections of track for the following
reasons:
(a) Coupler misalignment

(b) Damage to equipment
(c) Possibility of derail

Page 780
ABG
SAFETY TRAINING FOR TRACKMOBILE OPERATIONS
PURPOSE
To provide knowledge of common safety practices associated with trackmobile operations.
SCOPE
Trackmobiles are railroad car movers with the ability to not only work with railroad cars, but to also travel
on plant roads from one distribution area to another.
When moving railroad cars on tracks, the trackmobile gets its weight for traction by borrowing weight from
the car that it is coupled to by means of specially designed weight transfer couplers. These couplers are
raised for weight transfer and lowered for coupling and uncoupling. This is done hydraulically, and the
design of this coupler assures positive coupling.
The trackmobile is equipped with 2 sets of wheels. This provides the versatility that is unique to this type of
equipment. One set of steel, flanged wheels similar to the AAR standard contour is used for track
operation. The second set, rubber wheels, are positioned parallel to the track wheels and are for road
travel. This set of road wheels are hydraulically raised and lowered to enable the trackmobile to get on and
off the tracks.
Trackmobiles incorporate an industrial engine proven power, output and dependability with a torque
converter and hydraulically controlled planetary-gear, constant-mesh transmission. Torque converters in
most trackmobiles not only multiply engine torque to fit engine power to load more efficiently, but it also
provides an oil cushion to protect the engine, power train and complete unit.
The hydraulically controlled, planetary-gear, constant-mesh transmission gives fingertip control through
three speed ranges in either direction. Quick shifting under full loads without interruption of power flow
from engine to load is possible. Down shifting for power and load control is simplified. The conventional
type clutches are eliminated in more modern models.
The switch engine will have the right of way on the track at all times. All switching that is done should
always be coordinated with all the switch crews.
Working with railroad cars requires constant care and vigilance. Safety first and good railroad practice
should govern at all times.
SAFETY PROCEDURES
1. Place any shim carefully when adjusting high and low couplers.
2. Use flat stock and be sure each shim is seated firmly.
3. Be sure parking brake is set while parked
4. Place the transmission in neutral when starting the engine.
5. When the engine will not start with the starter, do not push or pull the trackmobile to start it. This
could damage the converter.

Page 781
ABG
6. If the trackmobile is towed for more than ½ mile, the road universal joint should be disconnected.
7. Wait for the road wheels to completely retract before moving onto the tracks.
8. Be sure the road wheels are fully extended before moving.
9. Never drive the trackmobile off a paved road surface.
10. Observe safe speeds at all times.
11. Locate and advise all personnel in the immediate area of your proposed movements. When you are
finished, notify all persons that it is safe to resume work.
12. When throwing a switch, be sure the switch handle is completely down. If the switch fails, do not
attempt to repair it. Call supervision.
13. Push bars on trackmobiles should never be used to push cars. All cars should be coupled to the
trackmobile to maintain control of them.
14. No riders other than the driver and a switchman are allowed at any time.
15. When parking the trackmobile off the tracks, it will be lowered to its rail wheels and the parking brake
will be set.
16. Complete all inspections carefully and report any mechanical problems to supervision. Only
authorized persons may make adjustments or repairs.
17. “Men at work” signs and derails should never be removed before finding out why they were placed
there and then only after receiving the proper authorization.
18. Additional guidelines:
a) Before putting the trackmobile into operation, there should be a warm-up period. While
waiting for the engine to warm up, check the following instrumentation:
(1) Transmission oil pressure
(2) Transmission temperature
(3) Ampere meter
(4) Engine water temperature
(5) Engine oil pressure
(6) Fuel
b) Keep in mind that at no time during operation of the trackmobile should it be operated above
recommended temperatures. This could cause costly repairs.
c) Stopping and Parking
(1) When stopping the unit without the load, brake the unit gently means of the foot brake in
a conventional manner.
(2) When stopping with a load, anticipate the stop so there will be plenty of room for
downshifting. Use the foot brake for the last few feet.

Page 782
ABG
d) Never attempt to move any railcar that is improperly loaded. With the couplers aligned, move
the trackmobile against the car with just enough force to close and lock the couplers.
Remember weight increases traction. When moving more than one car, couple to the heaviest
car whenever possible.
e) When getting off the track, move to a road crossing or to a section of track where the ground is
level and even with the top of the rails. Raise the trackmobile onto the road wheels and drive
off.
19. Safety Suggestions

a) For running without a load, start in low range and shift to high. Safety will determine maximum
speeds.
b) When difficulty arises in starting with a string of cars, take advantage of the slack available in
the couplers. Under extremely difficult starting conditions, it may be necessary to move the cars
individually.
c) On particularly sharp curves, the couplers of the trackmobile and car may swing to the limit of
their lateral travel and restrict further operation.
20. Cab Layout
The following diagrams identify the controls and accessories found inside of a trackmobile. The
operator must be familiar with the controls listed:
Trackmobile Controls
1. Windshield wiper with switch
2. Brake pedal
3. Accelerator pedal
4. Steering wheel
5. Parking brake lever
6. Transmission control (range selector)
7. Transmission control (forward/reverse for road/rail)
8. Defroster fan (optional)
9. Engine hour meter
10. Ammeter
11. Fuel gage
12. Headlight switch (front and rear)
13. Ignition switch
14. Starter button
15. Cab heater switch
16. Control (pull to stop)
17. Engine throttle control
18. Emergency stop control
19. Coupler release control

Page 783
ABG
20. Converter oil clutch gage

21. Cab heater (optional)
22. Torque converter oil temperature gage
23. Parking brake light
24. Engine air heater control
25. Air reservoir light
26. Engine oil pressure gage
27. Engine water temperature gage
28. Torque converter serial plate
29. Trackmobile serial plate
30. Air brake gage (line pressure)
31. Air brake gage (reservoir pressure)
32. Hydraulic control levers
33. Hydraulic control decal (indicates what each lever controls)
34. Operator’s seat (location)
35. Sight hole (for observing wheel alignment)

Page 784
ABG
RAILROAD OPERATIONS TRAINING - REVIEW
RAILROAD OPERATIONS TRAINING – REVIEW
NAME: DATE:
SAFE OPERATIONS OF TRACKMOBILE/SWITCH ENGINES
AND BRAKEMAN DUTIES
Read carefully and fill in the blanks with the appropriate answers.
1. A thorough check of trackmobiles and engines should be made _______________.
A. on a weekly schedule
B. when it needs repair
C. at the start of each shift and each time it is used
2. You should be more cautious and drive slower than _______________.

A. railcars are full
B. tracks are wet or slippery
C. driving on paved roads
3. When parked, the trackmobile should have _______________.

A. the coupler down and on the rail wheels
B. the gears engaged
C. the wheels down
4. When not driving on the tracks, the rail wheels should be _______________.
A. engaged
B. turning backwards
C. disengaged
5. If trackmobile and switch engine gauges go above recommended points, you should ___________.
A. call the supervisor
B. keep going and tell the next shift about it
C. shut down immediately
6. The railcar brakes should be set _______________.

A. when railcars are full
B. after switching
C. before unhooking the trackmobile
7. If you do not know where the brakeman is, you should _______________.
A. look for him
B. shut down the trackmobile or switch engine and find him
C. blow the trackmobile horn

Page 785
ABG
8. Always set the parking brake, put gears in neutral and turn the ignition off when _______________.
A. waiting the for brakeman
B. hooking up railcar
C. it is necessary to leave the trackmobile
9. Always sound the trackmobile or switch engine horn when _______________.

A. approaching any roadway or pathway
B. passing other vehicles
C. getting the brakeman’s attention
10. Good communication with the brakeman is a must for _______________.

A. moving the trackmobile or switch engine
B. putting the trackmobile on the tracks
C. a good safe switch
11. Never pull or push railcars unless _______________.

A. you can see the brakeman or have radio contact with him
B. they are all full of product
C. they are all empty
12. Never switch without _______________.

A. using hand signals
B. using a two-way radio
C. using a red flag
13. At night, when switching, you must use _______________.

A. a radio
B. a flashlight
C. a flashlight and radio
14. Before moving any railcar, you should _______________.

A. check the clearance
B. check to see if the railcar is full
C. check to see if the railcar is empty
15. A derail should be removed from the track when _______________.

a. switching
b. a track must e passed over
c. backing up
16. Always walk _______________. Railcars when switching and watch for hazards on the tracks.
A. behind

Page 786
ABG
B. on the side of
C. ahead and to the side of

Page 787
ABG
17. Always set the brakes on railcars before _______________.

A. entering the loading area
B. leaving the loading area
C. unhooking the trackmobile
18. You should _______________. Ride on the outside of the trackmobile.

A. not, unless instructed
B. never
C. sometimes
19. All derails are put back on tracks and locked with blue flags in position after _______________.
A. the trackmobile is parked
B. railcars are loaded
C. switching is completed
20. Never switch when the railroad switch crew is switching in the plant unless _______________.
A. the railroad crew is on another track
B. you are behind a locked derail
C. the railroad crew is only in the plant for a few minutes
21. Is it safer to push or pull railcars?

A. push
B. pull
C. neither
22. Name three items that make up part of a rail system.

1.
2.
3.
23. Name three items that make up a railcar.
1.
2.
3.
24. What are the main operational areas in our facility?
1.
2.
3.
25. What type of railcars is used in your plant’s rail operations?

Page 788
ABG
1.
2.
3.
26. What safety equipment is required for working in the railroad switching area?
27. Can all rail equipment be safely mounted and dismounted while moving? Explain.
28. What three conditions must be met before mounting a moving railcar?
29. Why is the proper end of the car critical in safely mounting and dismounting a railcar?
30. Is it permissible to use hand signals while riding on a railcar?
31. What must be done before crossing over a stationary railcar?

Page 789
ABG
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................756
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 757
Application..............................................................................................................................................................757
Definitions..............................................................................................................................................................757
General................................................................................................................................................................... 760
Employees..........................................................................................................................................................761
Medical Evaluation.................................................................................................................................................761
General Requirements............................................................................................................................................761
Fit Test....................................................................................................................................................................762
Training...................................................................................................................................................................762
Respirator Cleaning and Maintenance...................................................................................................................763
Respirator Selection...............................................................................................................................................763
Breathing Air Quality..............................................................................................................................................764
Program Evaluation................................................................................................................................................765
Record Keeping.......................................................................................................................................................765

Page 790
ABG
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to provide the guidelines for the selection, use and maintenance of respirators
for the protection of employees against the inhalation of harmful air contaminants and oxygen-deficient
atmospheres in the workplace where required by regulations and/or specified by ABG Corporate HSE.
Scope
This procedure outlines the personnel responsibilities, medical evaluations and the use, maintenance and
selection of respiratory protection.
Application
This procedure shall apply to all ABG and subcontractor personnel.
Definitions
Atmosphere-Supplying Respirator
A respirator that supplies the respirator user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient
atmosphere and includes supplied-air respirators (SARs) and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBAs) units.
Air-purifying respirator
A device that filters removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.
Atmospheric contaminant
Any substance, either gaseous or particulate, which is not a constituent of the normal atmosphere or which is
present in a concentration greater than that found in the normal atmosphere.
Breathing air (respirable air)

Air of quality intended to be suitable for human respiration at normal atmospheric pressure with an oxygen range
of between 19.5% and 23.5 %.
Disposable respirator
A device for which maintenance is not intended and which is designed to be discarded after excessive resistance,
sorbent exhaustion, physical damage or end of service-life renders it unsuitable for use.

Page 791
ABG
End-Of-Service-Life-Indicator (ESLI)
A system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the end of adequate respiratory protection.
Escape type respirator
A device for emergency escape from a respiratory hazard.
Fit Factor
A quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual, and typically estimates the
ration of concentration for a substance in ambient air to its concentration inside the respirator when worn.
Filter or Air-Purifying Element

A component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from the inspired air.
Full face piece

A close fitting device to cover the eyes, nose and mouth and be secured in position by suitable means.
Hood
That portion of the respirator, which completely covers the head, neck, and portions of the shoulders.
High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA)

A filter that is at least 99.97% efficient in removing monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.
Hose-mask respirator
A respirator, used with a full face piece through which respirable air from a source remote from the workplace is
available to the wearer through an air hose at atmospheric or near atmospheric pressure.
Immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH)

Exposure to an atmosphere that poses an immediate adverse effect on health or the ability to escape.
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting)

A respirator in which the air pressure inside the face piece is negative during inhalation with respect to the
ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Nose clip

Page 792
ABG
A device designed to occlude the nostrils to prevent air inhalation. Normally used in conjunction with a
mouthpiece.
Oxygen-deficient atmosphere
An atmosphere that does not contain enough oxygen (less than 19.5%) to fully support the body’s metabolic
processes.
Particulates
A term used in this Procedure to refer to particulate aerosols such as dusts, mists, smoke, and fumes.
Positive pressure respirator

A respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering is positive with respect to ambient air
pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator

An air purifying respirator that uses a blower to force the ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet
covering.
Pressure demand respirator

A positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the face piece when the positive
pressure is reduced inside the face piece by inhalation.
Qualitative fit test

A facial fit test giving pass/fail results and relying on the subject’s response to a test agent.
Respirable air (breathing air)

Air of quality intended to be suitable for human respiration.
Respirator
A personal respiratory protective device that is designed to prevent the inhalation of contaminated air.
Routine Respirator Use

Wearing a respirator as a normal procedure when carrying out a regular and frequently repeated task.

Page 793
ABG
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)

A portable respirator that supplies oxygen, air or other respirable gas from a source carried by the user.
Supplied air respirator

A source of respirable air, independent of the work environment, which is conveyed to the person through an air
line, air hose or by the person carrying apparatus which provides the air.
General
Lung Function testing is required for personnel requiring routine respirator use. Medical clearance is required for
individuals requiring routine respirator use. Annual medical evaluation is required of personnel requiring routine
respirator use.
Biological monitoring in the form of blood and/or urinary analysis for employees where required by relevant
Statutory Authorities or when specified by the Project Manager.
Carry out and document a Safety Task Assignment (STA) or Job Safety Analysis (JSA) when there is a need for
personnel to wear respiratory protection.
Employee training on correct selection, use and maintenance of respiratory equipment.
Administrator must be knowledgeable of the complexity of the program, conduct evaluations, and be properly
trained.
Responsibilities
- Project Manager
o Implement this Procedure;
o Medically evaluate employees that require routine respirator use; and
o Provide continued support and resources for effective implementation.
o Comply with this Procedure;
o Evaluate the working environment to ascertain which specific applications require the use of
respiratory protection equipment. Where possible eliminate the need for respiratory protection
through engineering controls including elimination of the task, substitution of the substance
creating the hazard, isolation or enclosure, or the provision of adequate ventilation;
o Provide appropriate training to all persons required to wear respiratory protection;
o Maintain records of medical evaluation, and respirator training;
o Implement procedures to regularly inspect and maintain respiratory protection devices; and
o Establish a system for regularly auditing the operation of this Procedure and for dealing with any
non-compliance.
- Supervisor

Page 794
ABG
o Provide training for all persons under his or her control that have a need for routine respirator
use, in fitting, storage and maintenance of the respiratory equipment supplied.
o Enforce compliance with the requirements of this Procedure;
o Conduct hazardous analysis prior to work commencing requiring the use of respiratory
equipment; and
o Monitor compliance with the requirements of this Procedure. This should include inspection of a
randomly chosen respirator and audit of relevant inspection checklists.
Employees
o Wear, inspect, store and maintain respiratory equipment issued in accordance with training and
instructions received;
o Report to the supervisor any malfunction of equipment;
o Report to the supervisor any change in physical conditions that could affect respirator fit;
o Report to the supervisor any medical signs or symptoms related to the ability to use the
respirator; and
o Report to the supervisor if the fit of the respirator becomes unacceptable.
Medical Evaluation
Must be confidential, during normal working hours, convenient, understandable, and the employee must be given
a chance to discuss results with PLHCP.
Personnel routinely required to wear a respirator as a normal procedure when carrying out a regular and
frequently repeated task must be subject to a medical evaluation to determine their fitness to wear a respirator.
Pre-Project Medical refers to requirements for employee pre-placement and periodic medical evaluation. Results
of the medical evaluation are noted on the Medical Evaluation Report.
For Projects where employees will be routinely required to wear respiratory protection, or may reasonably be
expected to do so, the Project Manager shall instruct the examining medical practitioner to conduct lung function
testing. This shall be for the purpose of ascertaining each employee’s suitability for wearing respiratory
protection.
The selection, use, and maintenance of respiratory protective devices shall be in accordance with this Procedure.
Project personnel that require respiratory protection shall be “clean shaven” as follows:
- Beards and moustaches must not protrude beyond projected lines, drawn vertically from the corner of
the mouth; and

Page 795
ABG
- When wearing full-face protection, sideburns shall not extend below a line drawn through the top of the
notch in the cartilage of the ear just above and immediately in front of the ear hole and the corner of the
eye.
- The seal must be inspected each time the mask is put on. Any mask that does not properly seal must be
removed from service.
- The program administrator must address appropriate surveillance, and ensure employees leave the area
to wash, change cartridges, or if they detect break-through or resistance
Persons with long hair must control their hair so that it does not get trapped beneath the fitting surface.
The issue of all respiratory equipment must be recorded.
Hose couplings used with supplied air respirators must be incompatible with other couplings.
Employees must exit from work areas when an evacuation alarm is activated, regardless of the type of respirator
being worn.
General plant air shall not be used for respiratory protection unless it is fitted with adequate filtration and safety
devices to support a continued supply of breathable air. Documented results of air quality tests conducted by a
fully accredited laboratory shall be maintained on site and shall be readily available.
NOTE: Many plant air systems use a nitrogen backup to keep the instrument air working. This can switch to
nitrogen without notification and may be fatal if used. DO NOT use the plant air system if it’s on a nitrogen
backup!
Entry to IDLH or oxygen deficient atmospheres, or atmospheres where the level of contaminant may change or be
unknown, shall not proceed until a JSA has been carried out and all necessary actions implemented.
An outside standby person is required for all IDLH environments. A constant communication must be established.
The standby must have been properly trained and have the proper equipment available. Training should include
the notification procedures, and necessary action. Mandatory equipment must include SCBA or SAR with auxiliary
air supply & appropriate retrieval equipment or equivalent rescue means.
Fit Test
ABG is required to ensure employees pass qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quantitative fit test (QNFT) before initial
use, if a different respirator is used, and annually. SARs are required to be fit tested as well.
Training
Employees will be trained initially, annually, and on an as-needed basis in the proper use and limitations of the
respirators to be used for routine and/or emergency work. Training will include the selection of a properly fitting
face-piece and the trial wearing of each type of respirator to be used.

Page 796
ABG
Medical, respirators, and training are required to be provided free to the employee.
A competent and qualified trainer shall conduct training.
As a minimum, the training should cover:
- Hazard identification – gaseous and particulate contaminants, and oxygen deficient atmospheres, and
hazard evaluation/risk assessment;
- Reasons for the use of respirators – exposure limits for various substances set by regulatory authorities;
- Project areas where respiratory protection will be required;
- Current controls in place (if any) or proposed (e.g., engineering, administrative);
- Respirator selection;
- Respirator fitting;
- Limitations of respirators;
- Maintenance, cleaning and storage of respirators; and
- Maintain records of training.
Respirator Cleaning and Maintenance
Respirators must be regularly inspected, cleaned and maintained with a respirator sanitary wipe pad daily, by the
individual that wore the mask.
If a mask is worn by other than one (1) person, the mask will be sterilized by the safety supply rental company.
DO NOT DISMANTLE THE SUPPLIED AIR RESPIRATOR! When not in use, the respirator must be placed in a plastic
bag and the user’s name as well as date placed on the outside. At no time are masks to be left out in the open on
the job site.
Any respiratory protective equipment found to be defective should be taken out of service, tagged with an “Out
of Service” tag and repaired as soon as possible.
Records shall be maintained for each respirator and will include inspection and repair records. To facilitate proper
maintenance a clean room with running water is required for maintenance of respirators.
Half face respirators shall be inspected, cleaned and maintained by the person to whom it is issued.
Disposable Respirators: All disposable masks are to be rendered un-usable (straps removed, etc.) and then
properly disposed.
The Project Manager shall allocate responsibility for inspection, cleaning and maintenance of all other respirators
to a suitably trained employee(s).
When not in use, respirators shall be stored in clean, sealed containers provided for that purpose.

Page 797
ABG
Respirator Selection
There are a number of important aspects of respirator selection that must be considered. These include those
noted below.
The first step in respirator selection is to identify the hazards (i.e., the contaminants that personnel are expected
to be or may be exposed to). On projects where work is taking place on Client’s operating sites (e.g., maintenance
type projects) relevant information may be obtained from the Client.
On projects where Clients already have a respiratory protection program in place Project Managers must confirm
that respirators specified by the Client are appropriate.
Contaminant based selection factors include:
- The nature, toxicity, physical form and concentration of the contaminant;

- Whether the contaminant is particulate, gas or vapor, or a combination of these;
- Whether failure of the device can result in a situation which is immediately dangerous to life or health;
- The need to wear other forms of personal protective equipment (e.g., eye or skin protection);
- The adequacy of the warning given by the contaminant; and
- The possibility of the contaminated atmosphere being flammable.
Task related selection factors include:
- Whether device is for regular use or for emergency or rescue purposes;

- The expected length of time the wearer will be in the contaminated atmosphere;
- The level of activity and mobility required;
- The access to and nature of the working environment and its location with respect to a source of air
suitable for breathing;
- The need for clear vision and communication; and
- The facilities available to maintain the device;
Operator related selection factors include:
- Basic physiological considerations (e.g.; regular wearing of some types of respirators places additional
strain on cardiac and respiratory systems, and the physical weight of the device may pose additional
physical/muscular strain);
- The importance of facial fit (e.g., Facial hair, scars, hollow temples, very prominent cheekbones, a
misshapen nose), may cause sealing problems. Positive pressure respirators may reduce the effect of poor
facial fit but will not eliminate the effect of leakage caused by facial hair. Where conservation of the air
supply is important (e.g., self-contained breathing apparatus), any leakage from poor facial fit reduces
service time; and

Page 798
ABG
- User acceptance. It is important that the respirator is worn the entire time that a person is at risk of
exposure. This will be influenced by the wear ability (e.g., Comfort, field of vision and the need to
communicate without removing the device).
Employees required to use respiratory protection should be offered a choice of at least two different makes, and
where available, different models of respirators. They must be allowed to choose the respirator that gives the
best fit.
Only certain types of respirators are allowable in IDLH atmospheres. They include the following:
- A SCBA, full face piece with minimum service life of 30 minutes;
- A combination supplied air respirator with an auxiliary self-contained supply;
- A respirator specifically certified for escape from an IDLH atmosphere.
When employees must enter IDLH atmospheres, the Project Manager must be notified. A specific IDLH entry plan
will be created in which one or more rescue personnel will be located outside the IDLH area and will maintain
contact with the employees in the IDLH area. The rescue personnel outside the area will be trained to provide
effective emergency rescue and will be equipped with retrieval equipment or other means for rescue as
necessary.
Breathing Air Quality
Air supplied to airline respirators or self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet the following Grade D
minimum requirements:
- Oxygen: 19.5% min., 23.5% max.

- Carbon Dioxide: 0.1% max.
- Carbon Monoxide: 10 ppm max.
- Condensed Hydrocarbons: 5 mg/m3 max.
- Water: Concentration to be below the dew point when the air is released into face piece.
- All Grade D breathing air must be compressed, not mixed and from a reputable safety supply company.
NO mixed gas processes will be allowed to produce Grade D breathing air.
- 10% of all grade D breathing air bottles must be tested with a 4 gas monitor to ensure a safe supply of
breathing air.
An air compressor system may be used to supply breathable air, provided the compressor used does not require
oil to lubricate the piston rings and the valves. To be used, an oil-lubricated compressor must be equipped with:
- A filter to remove oil mist;

- Charcoal to remove oil vapor;
- A carbon monoxide high concentration alarm or a high temperature alarm. When a high temperature
alarm is used, the carbon monoxide concentration shall be tested often enough to assure that the
concentration remains below 10 ppm;

Page 799
ABG
- An air tank with sufficient capacity to allow the respirator user to escape to clean air upon compressor
failure;
- A compressor failure alarm capable of warning the respirator user or his/her standby; and
- A compressor air intake located away from air contaminants such as engine exhaust, ventilation exhaust,
process vents, welding fumes, or paint spray.
Airline respirator couplings shall be incompatible with all other couplings.

When air is supplied from cylinders, the quantity of air available shall be monitored frequently enough to ensure
that the airline respirator user will leave the contaminated atmosphere before the air supply runs out.
Personal air samples must be collected on a representative employee in each job classification without sufficient
objective data. Air Monitoring Record shall be used for this purpose.
Program Evaluation
In an effort to evaluate the programs effectiveness, employees must be asked about fit, selection, use,
maintenance and other related questions. A lack of specific knowledge will require a retraining.
Record Keeping
The purpose of this section is to provide employees and their designated representatives a right of access to
relevant exposure and medical records; and to provide representatives of the Assistant Secretary a right of access
to these records in order to fulfill responsibilities under the Occupational Safety and Health Act. Access by
employees, their representatives, and the Assistant Secretary is necessary to yield both direct and indirect
improvements in the detection, treatment, and prevention of occupational disease.
Should ABG cease to do business and there is no successor employer to receive and maintain the records subject
to this standard, the employer shall notify affected current employees of their rights of access to records at least
three (3) months prior to the cessation of the employer's business.
In the absence of an employer to receive and maintain the records, as required to be 30 years, ABG will transfer
the records to the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)

Page 800
ABG
RIGGING MATERIAL HANDLING & OPERATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................767
Working Under Loads.........................................................................................................................................768
Multiple Lift Rigging Procedures.........................................................................................................................768
Structural Steel Assembly...................................................................................................................................769
Walking/Working Surfaces.....................................................................................................................................769
Plumbing-Up Equipment........................................................................................................................................769
Metal Decking Operations..................................................................................................................................770
Installation of Metal Decking..................................................................................................................................771
Derrick Floors.........................................................................................................................................................771
Beams and Columns...............................................................................................................................................771
Diagonal Bracing.....................................................................................................................................................771
Double Connections at Columns and/or at Beam Webs Over a Column............................................................771
Open Web Steel Joists........................................................................................................................................772
Field-Bolted Joists...................................................................................................................................................773
Attachment of Steel Joists and Steel Joist Girders..............................................................................................773
Erection of Steel Joists............................................................................................................................................773
Erection Bridging....................................................................................................................................................774
Landing & Placing Loads.........................................................................................................................................775
Systems-Engineered Metal Buildings.................................................................................................................775
Falling Object Protection........................................................................................................................................776
Fall Protection........................................................................................................................................................776
Criteria for Fall Protection Equipment....................................................................................................................777
Recordkeeping........................................................................................................................................................777

Page 801
ABG
PURPOSE
Our crane operators are responsible for those operations under their direct control. Whenever there is any doubt
as to safety, our operators have the authority to stop and refuse to handle loads until safety has been assured.
Our qualified rigger will inspect the rigging prior to each shift in accordance with OSHA regulations.
The headache ball, hook, or load is never used to transport personnel except when using a personnel platform as
provided in another section of this written safety plan.
Our company's crane safety latch policy is:
- Safety latches on hooks will not be deactivated or made inoperable except:

o When a qualified rigger has determined that the hoisting and placing of purlins and single joists
can be performed more safely by doing so; or
o When equivalent protection is provided in a site-specific erection plan.
Working Under Loads
- Routes for suspended loads shall be pre-planned to ensure that no employee is required to work directly
below a suspended load.
- Tag lines shall be used unless their use creates an unsafe condition.
- All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to the limited and of suspended loads.
Multiple Lift Rigging Procedures
“Christmas Tree” lifts are unacceptable on ABG jobsites.
A multiple lift will only be performed if the following criteria are met:
- A multiple lift rigging assembly is used;

- A maximum of 2 members are hoisted per lift;
- Only beams and similar structural members are lifted; and
No crane is permitted to be used for a multiple lift where such use is contrary to the manufacturer's specifications
and limitations.
Components of the multiple lift rigging assembly will be specifically designed and assembled with a maximum
capacity for total assembly and for each individual attachment point. This capacity, certified by the manufacturer

Page 802
ABG
or a qualified rigger, will be based on the manufacturer's specifications with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all
components.
The total load will not exceed:
- The rated capacity of the hoisting equipment specified in the hoisting equipment load charts;
- The rigging capacity specified in the rigging rating chart.
Controlled load lowering will be used whenever the load is over the connectors.
Structural Steel Assembly
Structural stability will be maintained at all times during the steel erection process.
The following additional requirements will apply for multi-story structures:
- The permanent floors will be installed as the erection of structural members progresses, and there will be
not more than eight stories between the erection floor and the upper-most permanent floor, except
where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design.
- At no time will there be more than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m), whichever is less, of unfinished bolting
or welding above the foundation or uppermost permanently secured floor, except where the structural
integrity is maintained as a result of the design.
- A fully planked or decked floor or nets will be maintained within two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever
is less, directly under any erection work being performed.
Walking/Working Surfaces
Because of the possibility of becoming a trip hazard, shear connectors (such as headed steel studs, steel bars, or
steel lugs), reinforcing bars, deformed anchors, or threaded studs will not be attached to the top flanges of
beams, joists or beam attachments so that they project vertically from or horizontally across the top flange of the
member until after the metal decking, or other walking/working surface, has been installed.
When we use shear connectors in the construction of composite floors, roofs, and bridge decks, our employees
will lay out and install them after the metal decking has been installed, using the metal decking as a working
platform. Shear connectors will not be installed from within a controlled decking zone.
Rigging equipment not in use shall be removed from the immediate work area so as not to present a hazard.
Plumbing-Up Equipment

Page 803
ABG
When deemed necessary by a company competent person, the following plumbing-up equipment procedures will
be implemented:
- When deemed necessary by a competent person, plumbing-up equipment will be installed in conjunction
with the steel erection process to ensure the stability of the structure.
- When used, plumbing-up equipment will be in place and properly installed before the structure is loaded
with construction material such as loads of joists, bundles of decking or bundles of bridging.
- Plumbing-up equipment will be removed only with the approval of a competent person.
Metal Decking Operations
During metal decking operations, our specific operational requirements to protect our employees during the
installation of metal decking are:
- Hoisting, Landing and Placing of Metal Decking Bundles

o Bundle packaging and strapping will not be used for hoisting unless specifically designed for that
purpose.
o If loose items such as dunnage, flashing, or other materials are placed on the top of metal decking
bundles to be hoisted, such items will be secured to the bundles.
o Bundles of metal decking on joists will be landed in accordance with OSHA regulations.
o Metal decking bundles will be landed on framing members so that enough support is provided to
allow the bundles to be unbanded without dislodging the bundles from the supports.
o At the end of the shift or when environmental or jobsite conditions require, metal decking will be
secured against displacement.
- Roof and Floor Holes and Openings

o Metal decking at roof and floor holes and openings will be installed as follows:
 Framed metal deck openings will have structural members turned down to allow
continuous deck installation except where not allowed by structural design constraints or
constructability.
 Roof and floor holes and openings will be decked over. Where large size, configuration or
other structural design does not allow openings to be decked over (such as elevator
shafts, stair wells, etc.) employees will be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations.
 Metal decking holes and openings will not be cut until immediately prior to being
permanently filled with the equipment or structure needed or intended to fulfill its
specific use and which meets the strength requirements specified in OSHA regulations or
will be immediately covered.
- Covering Roof and Floor Openings

Page 804
ABG
o Covers for roof and floor openings will be capable of supporting, without failure, twice the weight
of the employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.
o All covers will be secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by the wind,
equipment or employees.
o All covers will be painted with high-visibility paint or will be marked with the word "HOLE" or
"COVER" to provide warning of the hazard.
o Smoke dome or skylight fixtures that have been installed are not considered covers for the
purpose of this section unless they meet the strength requirements specified in OSHA regulations.
- Decking Gaps Around Columns

o Wire mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, will be installed around columns where planks or
metal decking do not fit tightly. The materials used must be of sufficient strength to provide fall
protection for personnel and prevent objects from falling through.
Installation of Metal Decking
Except as provided in applicable OSHA regulations, metal decking will be laid tightly and immediately secured
upon placement to prevent accidental movement or displacement.
During initial placement, metal decking panels will be placed to ensure full support by structural members.
Derrick Floors
A derrick floor will be fully decked and/or planked and the steel member connections completed to support the
intended floor loading.
Temporary loads placed on a derrick floor will be distributed over the underlying support members so as to
prevent local overloading of the deck material.
Beams and Columns
To minimize the hazard of structural collapse during the early stages of steel erection, our company's procedures
for connecting beams and columns are:
- During the final placing of solid web structural members, the load will not be released from the hoisting
line until the members are secured with at least two bolts per connection, of the same size and strength
as shown in the erection drawings, drawn up wrench-tight or the equivalent as specified by the project
structural engineer of record, except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.

Page 805
ABG
- A competent person will determine if more than two bolts are necessary to ensure the stability of
cantilevered members; if additional bolts are needed, they will be installed.
Diagonal Bracing
Solid web structural members used as diagonal bracing will be secured by at least one bolt per connection drawn
up wrench-tight or the equivalent as specified by the project structural engineer of record.
Double Connections at Columns and/or at Beam Webs Over a Column
When two structural members on opposite sides of a column web, or a beam web over a column, are connected
sharing common connection holes, at least one bolt with its wrench-tight nut will remain connected to the first
member unless a shop-attached or field-attached seat or equivalent connection device is supplied with the
member to secure the first member and prevent the column from being displaced (See Appendix H to this subpart
for examples of equivalent connection devices).
If a seat or equivalent device is used, the seat (or device) will be designed to support the load during the double
connection process. It will be adequately bolted or welded to both a supporting member and the first member
before the nuts on the shared bolts are removed to make the double connection.
Open Web Steel Joists
Our company's procedures for the erection of open web steel joists are:
- Where steel joists are used and columns are not framed in at least two directions with solid web
structural steel members, a steel joist will be field-bolted at the column to provide lateral stability to the
column during erection. For the installation of this joist:
o A vertical stabilizer plate will be provided on each column for steel joists. The plate will be a
minimum of 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) and will extend at least 3 inches (76 mm)
below the bottom chord of the joist with a 13/16 inch (21 mm) hole to provide an attachment
point for guying or plumbing cables.
- The bottom chords of steel joists at columns will be stabilized to prevent rotation during erection.
- Hoisting cables will not be released until the seat at each end of the steel joist is field-bolted, and each
end of the bottom chord is restrained by the column stabilizer plate.
- Where constructability does not allow a steel joist to be installed at the column:
o An alternate means of stabilizing joists will be installed on both sides near the column and will:
 Provide stability equivalent required in OSHA regulations;
 Be designed by a qualified person;

Page 806
ABG
 Be shop installed; and

 Be included in the erection drawings.
- Hoisting cables will not be released until the seat at each end of the steel joist is field-bolted and the joist
is stabilized.
- Where steel joists at or near columns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the joist will be designed with
sufficient strength to allow one employee to release the hoisting cable without the need for erection
bridging.
- Where steel joists at or near columns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), the joists will be set in tandem
with all bridging installed unless an alternative method of erection, which provides equivalent stability to
the steel joist, is designed by a qualified person and is included in the site-specific erection plan.
- A steel joist or steel joist girder will not be placed on any support structure unless such structure is
stabilized.
- When steel joist(s) are landed on a structure, they will be secured to prevent unintentional displacement
prior to installation.
- No modification that affects the strength of a steel joist or steel joist girder will be made without the
approval of the project structural engineer of record.
Field-Bolted Joists
Except for steel joists that have been pre-assembled into panels, connections of individual steel joists to steel
structures in bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more will be fabricated to allow for field bolting during erection.
These connections will be field-bolted unless constructability does not allow.
Steel joists and steel joist girders will not be used as anchorage points for a fall arrest system unless written
approval to do so is obtained from a qualified person.
A bridging terminus point will be established before bridging is installed.
Attachment of Steel Joists and Steel Joist Girders
Each end of "K" series steel joists will be attached to the support structure with a minimum of two -inch (3 mm)
fillet welds 1 inch (25 mm) long or with two ½-inch (13 mm) bolts, or the equivalent.
Each end of "LH" and "DLH" series steel joists and steel joist girders will be attached to the support structure with
a minimum of two ¼-inch (6 mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long, or with two ¾-inch (19 mm) bolts, or the
equivalent.

Page 807
ABG
Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist will be attached to the support structure, at
least at one end on both sides of the seat, immediately upon placement in the final erection position and before
additional joists are placed.
Panels that have been pre-assembled from steel joists with bridging will be attached to the structure at each
corner before the hoisting cables are released.
Erection of Steel Joists
Both sides of the seat of one end of each steel joist that requires bridging under Tables A and B will be attached to
the support structure before hoisting cables are released.
For joists over 60 feet, both ends of the joist will be attached as required by OSHA regulations before the hoisting
cables are released.
On steel joists that do not require erection bridging under only one employee will be allowed on the joist until all
bridging is installed and anchored.
Employees will not be allowed on steel joists where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater than the span
shown in the OSHA regulations.
When permanent bridging terminus points cannot be used during erection, additional temporary bridging
terminus points are required to provide stability.
Erection Bridging
Where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater than the span shown in the OSHA standard, the following
will apply:
- A row of bolted diagonal erection bridging will be installed near the mid-span of the steel joist;
- Hoisting cables will not be released until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and anchored;
and
- No more than one employee will be allowed on these spans until all other bridging is installed and
anchored.
- Where the span of the steel joist is over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet (30.5 m), the following will
apply:
o All rows of bridging will be bolted diagonal bridging;
o Two rows of bolted diagonal erection bridging will be installed near the third points of the steel
joist;
o Hoisting cables will not be released until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and
anchored; and

Page 808
ABG
o No more than two employees will be allowed on these spans until all other bridging is installed
and anchored.
- Where the span of the steel joist is over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet (43.9 m), the following will
apply:
o All rows of bridging will be bolted diagonal bridging;
o Hoisting cables will not be released until all bridging is installed and anchored; and
o No more than two employees will be allowed on these spans until all bridging is installed and
anchored.
- For steel members spanning over 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods used will be in accordance with
OSHA regulations.
- Where any steel joist specified in the OSHA standard is a bottom chord bearing joist, a row of bolted
diagonal bridging will be provided near the support(s). This bridging will be installed and anchored before
the hoisting cable(s) is released.
- When bolted diagonal erection bridging is required by this section, the following will apply:
o The bridging will be indicated on the erection drawing;
o The erection drawing will be the exclusive indicator of the proper placement of this bridging;
o Shop-installed bridging clips, or functional equivalents, will be used where the bridging bolts to
the steel joists;
o When two pieces of bridging are attached to the steel joist by a common bolt, the nut that
secures the first piece of bridging will not be removed from the bolt for the attachment of the
second; and
o Bridging attachments will not protrude above the top chord of the steel joist.
Landing & Placing Loads
During the construction period, the Company placing a load on steel joists will ensure that the load is distributed
so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any steel joist.
Except for where specified in the OSHA standard, no construction loads are allowed on the steel joists until all
bridging is installed and anchored and all joist-bearing ends are attached.
The weight of a bundle of joist bridging will not exceed a total of 1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist bridging
will be placed on a minimum of three steel joists that are secured at one end. The edge of the bridging bundle will
be positioned within 1 foot (.30 m) of the secured end.
No bundle of decking may be placed on steel joists until all bridging has been installed and anchored and all joist
bearing ends attached, unless all of the following conditions are met:

Page 809
ABG
- The Company has first determined from a qualified person and documented in a site-specific erection plan
that the structure or portion of the structure is capable of supporting the load;
- The bundle of decking is placed on a minimum of three steel joists;
- The joists supporting the bundle of decking are attached at both ends;
- At least one row of bridging is installed and anchored;
- The total weight of the bundle of decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds (1816 kg); and
- Placement of the bundle of decking will be in accordance with the OSHA standard.
The edge of the construction load will be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of the bearing surface of the joist end.
Systems-Engineered Metal Buildings
When constructing systems-engineered metal buildings, our company erection procedures are:
- All of the requirements of this subpart apply to the erection of systems-engineered metal buildings except
where specified in the OSHA standard.
- Each structural column will be anchored by a minimum of four anchor rods (anchor bolts).
- Rigid frames will have 50 percent of their bolts or the number of bolts specified by the manufacturer
(whichever is greater) installed and tightened on both sides of the web adjacent to each flange before the
hoisting equipment is released.
- Construction loads will not be placed on any structural steel framework unless such framework is safely
bolted, welded or otherwise adequately secured.
- In girt and eave strut-to-frame connections, when girts or eave struts share common connection holes, at
least one bolt with its wrench-tight nut will remain connected to the first member unless a manufacturer-
supplied, field-attached seat or similar connection device is present to secure the first member so that the
girt or eave strut is always secured against displacement.
- Both ends of all steel joists or cold-formed joists will be fully bolted and/or welded to the support
structure before:
o Releasing the hoisting cables;
o Allowing an employee on the joists; or
o Allowing any construction loads on the joists.
- Purlins and girts will not be used as an anchorage point for a fall arrest system unless written approval is
obtained from a qualified person.
- Purlins may only be used as a walking/working surface when installing safety systems, after all permanent
bridging has been installed and fall protection is provided.
- Construction loads may be placed only within a zone that is within 8 feet (2.5 m) of the center-line of the
primary support member.
Falling Object Protection

Page 810
ABG
Securing Loose Items Aloft
All materials, equipment, and tools, which are not in use while aloft, will be secured against accidental
displacement.
Protection from Falling Objects Other Than Materials Being Hoisted
The controlling contractor has the responsibility of barring other construction processes below steel erection
unless overhead protection for the employees below is provided.
Fall Protection
Except for our connectors and employees working in controlled decking zones, each of our employees engaged in
a steel erection activity that is on a walking/working surface with an unprotected side or edge more than 15 feet
above a lower level will be protected from fall hazards.
Perimeter Safety Cables
On multi-story structures, perimeter safety cables will be installed at the final interior and exterior perimeters of
the floors as soon as the metal decking has been installed.
Connectors and employees working in controlled decking zones will be protected from fall hazards as provided in
the OSHA standard, respectively.
Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ)
A controlled decking zone may be established in that area of the structure over 15 and up to 30 feet above a
lower level where metal decking is initially being installed and forms the leading edge of a work area. In each CDZ,
the following will apply:
- Each employee working at the leading edge in a CDZ will be protected from fall hazards of more than two
stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is less.
- Access to a CDZ will be limited to only those employees engaged in leading edge work.
- The boundaries of a CDZ will be designated and clearly marked. The CDZ will not be more than 90 feet
(27.4 m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from any leading edge. The CDZ will be marked by the use of
control lines or the equivalent.
- Each employee working in a CDZ will have completed CDZ training in accordance with OSHA regulations.
- Unsecured decking in a CDZ will not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m 2).
- Safety deck attachments will be performed in the CDZ from the leading edge back to the control line and
will have at least two attachments for each metal decking panel.

Page 811
ABG
- Final deck attachments and installation of shear connectors will not be performed in the CDZ.
Criteria for Fall Protection Equipment
Guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems and their
components will applicable OSHA regulations.
Fall arrest system components will be used in fall restraint systems and will conform to the criteria in OSHA
regulations. Body harnesses will be used in fall restraint systems.
Perimeter safety cables will meet the criteria for guardrail systems in OSHA regulations.
Custody of Fall Protection
Fall protection provided by the steel erector will remain in the area where steel erection activity has been
completed, to be used by other trades, only if the controlling contractor or its authorized representative:
- Has directed the steel erector to leave the fall protection in place; and
- Has inspected and accepted control and responsibility of the fall protection prior to authorizing persons
other than steel erectors to work in the area.
Recordkeeping
The SITE SAFETY MANAGER maintains all records related to steel erection in his/her office.

Page 812
ABG
SAFETY & HEALTH TRAINING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................778
Safety Training Topics.............................................................................................................................................780
Periodic Safety Training Meetings..........................................................................................................................780
Employee Training Documentation........................................................................................................................781
Employee Communication......................................................................................................................................781
Accident Prevention Policy Posting....................................................................................................................781
Hazard Identification – Inspections & Abatement..............................................................................................781
Accident Investigation............................................................................................................................................782
Records................................................................................................................................................................... 782
OSHA Records Required.........................................................................................................................................783

Page 813
ABG
PURPOSE
ABG is committed to instructing all employees in safe and healthy work practices. The Company will provide
training to each employee with regard to general, acceptable, safety procedures and to any hazards or safety
procedures that are specific to that employee’s work situation.
Training can take many forms and is synonymous with education and can be attained in a number of ways.
Company Safety Rules (Employee Handbook): Employees should read the rules and understand them. The
issuance of these rules should be logged and signed receipts should be kept on file. Each new employee, as he/she
arrives on the job, should be approached in the same manner.
Safety Meetings – the company will hold safety meetings with their employees on a daily basis. The meeting may
consist merely of restating the company safety rules or warning of dangerous conditions which exist. A particular
subject may be covered, such as lockout tagout, confined space, or fire prevention.
Changed Conditions -When any of the job operation changes or when new hazardous materials are brought into
the workplace, employees should be made aware of new or added potential dangerous situations that might occur
and the proper action employees can take to maintain a safe workplace.
Safety Equipment -Employees should not simply be issued protective equipment. They should be instructed as to
its proper and safe use.
Consistency/Redundancy -The employer must consistently and routinely entertain the concept of safety training.
At the orientation meeting of new employees, on through the follow-up weekly/monthly safety talks, the central
theme must be to dwell on employees not committing unsafe acts.
Management Follow-Up -Management must not be content with advising employees on unsafe practices. A
follow-up of employee actions must be made. The Supervisor(s) must be instructed to watch for employees
committing unsafe acts. Employees should be reprimanded when found doing unsafe acts. (See disciplinary policy)
Documentation -All actions taken by Management as it relates to Safety Training/Education should be

documented.
Individual/Group Instruction -Safety Education can be aimed at a group such as at a weekly/monthly safety talk or
at an individual as in a case where the employee is being given instruction on use of a new tool, etc., by the
Supervisor. Whichever the case may be, it should be documented.
Safety training must be ongoing. It must be given to all employees and members of management. Documentation
of instruction and other forms of safety awareness techniques must be made. Never assume everyone knows the
safest way of performing his or her task.
The Company provides training:

- When the program is first established;

Page 814
ABG
- To all new employees;

- To all employees given new job assignments for which training has not previously been received;
- Whenever new substances, processes, procedures or equipment are introduced to the workplace and
represent a new hazard;
- Whenever the employer is made aware of a new or previously unrecognized hazard; and
- For supervisors to familiarize them with the safety and health hazards to which employees under their
immediate direction and control may be exposed.
Safety Training Topics
We train our workers on the following checked training subjects. Other training may be conducted depending on
hazards present in the workplace.
- The Company's Code of Safe Practices.
- Confined spaces.
- Safe practices for operating any equipment.
- Good housekeeping, fire prevention, safe practices for operating any construction equipment.
- Safe procedures for cleaning, repairing, servicing and adjusting equipment and machinery.
- Safe access to working areas.
- Protection from falls.
- Electrical hazards, including working around high voltage lines.
- Crane operations.
- Trenching and excavation work.
- Proper use of powered tools.
- Guarding of belts and pulleys, gears and sprockets, and conveyor nip points.
- Machine, machine parts, and prime movers guarding.
- Lock-out/tag-out procedures.
- Materials handling.
- Power tool operation.
- Fall protection from elevated locations.
- Use of elevated platforms, including condors and scissor lifts.
- Driver safety.
- Slips, falls, and back injuries.
- Ergonomic hazards, including proper lifting techniques and working on ladders or in a stooped posture for
prolonged periods at one time.
- Personal protective equipment.
- Respiratory Equipment.
- Hazardous chemical exposures.
- Hazard communication.
- Physical hazards, such as heat/cold stress, noise, and ionizing and non-ionizing radiation.
- Laboratory safety.
- Bloodborne pathogens and other biological hazards.
- Other job-specific hazards

Page 815
ABG
Periodic Safety Training Meetings
ABG has safety training meetings as needed. The purpose of the meeting is to convey safety information and
answer employee questions. The format of most meetings will be to review, in language understandable to every
employee, the content of the injury prevention program, special work site hazards, serious concealed dangers, and
material safety data sheets. During these meetings, the SITE SAFETY MANAGER or supervisor will review a portion
of the company's safe work practices contained in this booklet, or other safety related information. Whenever a
new practice or procedure is introduced into the workplace, it will be thoroughly reviewed for safety. A sign-up
sheet will be passed around each meeting, and notes of the meeting will be distributed afterwards. A copy of the
notes will also be placed in the job training file or general training file. Employee attendance is mandatory.
Employee Training Documentation
ABG maintains documentation of safety and health training for each employee, including employee name or other
identifier, training dates, type(s) of training, and training providers. This documentation shall be maintained for
five (5) years.
Employee training records are maintained in the Safety Director’s office.
Employee Communication
Occupational safety and health matters will be promptly communicated with employees. This will be done by:
- SAFETY AUDIT TEAMS: Safety audit teams will communicate with employees on inspections and
abatement activities, accident investigation findings, and general committee activities. Findings of the
safety audit are available for employee review.
- BULLETIN BOARDS: A safety bulletin board will be located in each work area. The “5 in 1” will be
permanently posted on all bulletin boards. Other safety related items shall be posted on the bulletin
boards as they become available.
- SAFETY MEETINGS: Supervisors will give Tailgate talks at least once each week to all employees. Provisions
must be made to ensure that employees who were not present are given the information presented
during the talk. Safety Meetings must be documented on the SAFETY MEETING REPORT.
- EMPLOYEE SAFETY HANDBOOK: An Employee Safety Handbook will be issued to each employee. This
handbook covers basic safety rules, guidelines for safe work performance, company policy, etc.
- SAFETY POSTERS: Will be posted on the bulletin board and at other appropriate locations.
- SAFETY PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS: At least once each quarter, the Safety Director will prepare an analysis
of the effectiveness of the safety program. This analysis will include accident statistics for the company.
The analysis will be posted on safety bulletin boards
Accident Prevention Policy Posting
A copy of this manual will be on each project.

Page 816
ABG
Hazard Identification – Inspections & Abatement
The Safety Director will inspect each of the operation's facilities monthly. During the inspection, the manager will
record the hazards or unsafe procedures observed during the inspection. One copy of the report will be filed at the
main office and another copy will be sent to the supervisor directly responsible for the location or work procedure.
Each supervisor receiving an inspection report that has corrections to be made must respond, in writing, to the
manager within 7 days. The response shall note the estimated time to make necessary corrections or to develop
alternative work procedures as uncovered during the inspection. The supervisor's response may also include other
suggestions to improve the safety within his or her area of responsibility.
Other inspections will be conducted:
- Whenever new substances, processes, procedures, or equipment are introduced to the workplace that
represent a new occupational safety and health hazard; and
- Whenever the Company is made aware of a new or previously unrecognized hazard.
When an imminent hazard exists which cannot be immediately abated without endangering employee(s) and/ or
property, the Company will remove all exposed personnel from the area except those necessary to correct the
existing condition. Employees necessary to correct the hazardous condition shall be provided the necessary
safeguards.
Accident Investigation
It is the policy of ABG that all work related accidents, injuries and illnesses are to be conducted in a professional
manner to identify probable causes and are used to develop specific management actions for the prevention of
future accidents. Proper and complete investigation of these injuries can be an effective injury prevention tool.
The Site Safety Manager and Supervisor will be responsible for conducting accident investigations.
All accident investigations will be conducted as soon as possible. All accident investigations will be documented
using the attached Accident Investigation Report Form. While conducting accident investigations, particular
attention will be given to suggesting ways to prevent future occurrences of the events which caused the accident
and corrective action to be taken.
A satisfactory accident report will answer the following questions:
1. What happened? The investigation report should begin by describing the accident, the injury sustained,
the eyewitnesses, the date, time and location of the incident and the date and time of the report.
Remember: who, what, when, where and how are the questions that the report must answer.
2. Why did the accident occur? The ultimate cause of the accident may not be known for several days after
all the data are analyzed. However, if an obvious cause suggests itself, include your conclusions as a
hypothesis at the time you give your information to the person in charge of the investigation.

Page 817
ABG
3. What should be done? Once a report determines the cause of the accident, it should suggest a method
for avoiding future accidents of a similar character. This is a decision by the Site Safety Manager and the
supervisor on the project, as well as top management. Once a solution has been adopted, it is everyone's
responsibility to implement it.
4. What has been done? A follow up report will be issued after a reasonable amount of time to determine
if the suggested solution was implemented, and if so, whether the likelihood of accident has been
reduced.
Records
ABG maintains records of employee training, hazard identification and abatement, and accident investigation.
OSHA Records Required
Copies of required accident investigations and certification of employee safety training shall be maintained by the
Site Safety Manager.
ABG keeps records of its employee fatalities, injuries, and illnesses that:
- Are work-related; and

- Are new cases; and
- Meet one or more of the general recording criteria of Title 8 Sections 14300-14300.48.
Each recordable injury or illness is entered on OSHA 300 Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses, OSHA 301Form
Injury and Illness Incident Report, and a separate, confidential list of privacy-concern cases, if any, within (7)
calendar days of receiving information that a recordable injury or illness has occurred. The Safety Director keeps
these records up to date.
If there is a privacy-concern case, we have the option to not enter the employee's name on OSHA 300 Log of Work-
Related Injuries and Illnesses. Instead, the text “Privacy Case” is entered in the space normally used for the
employee's name. This will protect the privacy of the injured or ill employee when another employee, a former
employee, or an authorized employee representative is provided access to the OSHA 300 Log. The company will
keep a separate, confidential list of the case numbers and employee names for your privacy concern cases so that
we can update the cases and provide the information to the government if asked to do so.
At the end of each calendar year, the Safety Director performs the following steps:
1 Reviews OSHA 300 Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses to verify that the entries are complete
and accurate,
2. Corrects any deficiencies identified in the entries,

Page 818
ABG
3. Creates an annual summary of injuries and illnesses recorded on OSHA 300 Log of Work-
Related Injuries and Illnesses,
4. Ensures that he/she and the Executive Vice President of the company certify that they reasonably
believe, based on their knowledge of the process by which the information was recorded, that the
annual summary is correct and complete, and
5. Posts OSHA 300-A Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses on the Main Office bulletin board
from February 1 of the year following the year covered by the records and kept in place until April 30
for a total of three (3) months.
All employees, former employees, their personal representatives, and their authorized employee representatives
have a right to access our regulatory-required injury and illness records, with the following limitations:
1. We are allowed to give the requester a copy of OSHA 300 Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses by
the end of the next business day.
2. We may choose to not record the employee's name on OSHA 300 Log of Work-Related Injuries and
Illnesses in order to protect the privacy of injured and ill employees in certain privacy-concern cases.
3. We are allowed to give an employee, former employee, or personal representative a copy of OSHA
301Form Injury and Illness Incident Report by End of the next business day.
A personal representative is:
- Any person that the employee or former employee designates as such, in writing; or
- The legal representative of a deceased or legally incapacitated employee or former employee.
4. We are allowed to give authorized employee representatives under a collective bargaining agreement
a copy of OSHA 301Form Injury and Illness Incident Report within seven (7) calendar days.
5. An authorized employee representative is an authorized collective bargaining agent of employees. The

authorized employee representative will be provided the OSHA 301 Incident Report section titled 'Tell
us about the case.' The company will remove all other information from the copy of the OSHA 301
Incident Report or the equivalent substitute form that is given to the authorized employee
representative.
6. While the first copy is free, we may charge a reasonable amount for retrieving and copying additional
copies.
7. Employees also have access to OSHA 300-A Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses, which is
posted on the Main Office bulletin board from February 1 of the year following the year covered by the
records and kept in place until April 30 for a total of three (3) months.

Page 819
ABG
ABG does not discriminate against employees who request access to any records or otherwise exercise any rights
afforded by the OSH Act.
The Safety Director saves the following records for (5) years following the end of the calendar year that these
records cover:
- OSHA 300 Log, the privacy case list (if one exists),
- the annual summary, and
- the OSHA 301 Incident Report forms
During the storage period, The Safety Director updates OSHA 300 Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses to
include any newly discovered recordable injuries or illnesses and any changes that have occurred in the
classification of previously recorded injuries and illnesses.

Page 820
ABG
SAFETY MEETINGS
SAFETY MEETINGS
POLICY
1. Periodic meeting shall be conducted by the Project or Location Safety Representative at the frequency of
not less than one per month. All supervisors (foremen and above) shall attend these meetings. These
supervisors will communicate the topics discussed in these meetings to the employees under their supervision.
This shall be done in addition to the topics covered in the Toolbox Safety Meetings.
2. Toolbox Safety Meetings shall be conducted by a Supervisor.
a. These meetings shall be conducted once a week. It is recommended that these meetings
be held every Monday. However, if trend information reveals that project and/or location
is experiencing incidents at a higher frequency on other day of the week, then it would be
prudent to hold the weekly toolbox safety meetings on that day.
b. Topics covered in these meetings may include, but are not limited to:
1) New safety rules.

2) Current safety problems.
3) Review of accidents and corrective action.
4) Review any near-miss accidents and their causes.
5) Review of jobsite conditions.
6) Review of safety equipment requirements.
7) Resolution of safety problems presented by employees.
8) Review Safety Alerts and/or Communiqués published by Corporate and/or
Divisional offices.
3. Records shall be prepared and maintained of all safety meetings on Form No. AMC 9002, Appendix A
or equivalent form. Such records shall prove the following:
a. Attendance list signed by all attendees. With the date of the meeting, trainer, if
applicable, employee identification number, and location of the meeting.
b. Description of discussion topics.
c. Any action(s) decided upon.
d. The person or persons responsible for follow-up.

Page 821
Supervisor Name Date
Job Title Social Security/ID No.
Project Name
Project Location
Project No. /Contract No. No. of Attendees No. in Crew
Topics Covered
(list/brief description)
Supervisor Signature
Return completed form to the Project/Site HSE Representative within 24 hours.
Have all attendees sign page 2 of this form.

Enter name and social security/ID number acknowledging your attendance of the Toolbox Safety Meeting referenced on
page 1 of this form. Report all safety concerns to your immediate supervisor or HSE Representative.
ATTENDANCE
Social Security/
Name (signature) Comments/Safety Concerns/ Training Requests
ID No.

ABG
SAFETY TASK ASSESSMENT (STA)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................788
SCOPE790
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................790
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................790
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................................... 792
Hazard Identification..........................................................................................................................................792
Assessment........................................................................................................................................................792
Control ..............................................................................................................................................................792
A. Hierarchy of Controls..............................................................................................................................793
Evaluation...........................................................................................................................................................793
Monitor..............................................................................................................................................................793
Continuous Hazard Identification.......................................................................................................................793
Risk Management and Assessment....................................................................................................................793
PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS...................................................................................................................................794
PHA Level I..........................................................................................................................................................794
PHA Level II.........................................................................................................................................................794
PHA Level III........................................................................................................................................................794
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS.............................................................................................................................................795
The JSA Team.....................................................................................................................................................795
Selection of Jobs to be Analyzed........................................................................................................................795
Hazard Potential.............................................................................................................................................795
Consequences of Failure................................................................................................................................795
Incident History..............................................................................................................................................795
Live Machinery/Equipment............................................................................................................................795
Define Scope......................................................................................................................................................796
Basic Process for Completing a Job Safety Analysis............................................................................................796
Automated JSA...................................................................................................................................................796
Informing Employees.........................................................................................................................................796
Training..............................................................................................................................................................797
Supervision....................................................................................................................................................797
B. ABG Construction Engineers and Contract Administrators.....................................................................797
C. Project HSE..............................................................................................................................................797
Process ..............................................................................................................................................................798
Asbestos Inspection.......................................................................................................................................798
Hazard Analyses Documented.......................................................................................................................798
JSA Required..................................................................................................................................................798

Page 824
ABG
Subcontractor JSA Reviews............................................................................................................................799

JSA Reviews by Employees.............................................................................................................................799
Posting a JSA..................................................................................................................................................799
Nonroutine Workers......................................................................................................................................799
Updating a JSA...............................................................................................................................................799
Pre-Task Walkthrough....................................................................................................................................799
JSA Preparation..............................................................................................................................................800
Pre-Task Meeting...........................................................................................................................................800
SAFETY TASK ASSIGNMENT.....................................................................................................................................801
Responsibility.....................................................................................................................................................801
Process ..............................................................................................................................................................801
Post-STA.............................................................................................................................................................802
REFERENCES...........................................................................................................................................................802
ATTACHMENTS.......................................................................................................................................................803

Page 825
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the processes to systematically identify, evaluate, control, and communicate known and
potential workplace safety and health hazards to employees before work activities begin.
SCOPE
Process Hazard Analysis
Job Safety Analysis
APPLICATION
The requirements of this practice apply as follows:
Process Hazard Analysis - design
Job Safety Analysis - self-perform or construction management/subcontracted construction (any
location) that is managed by ABG
 Construction – individual or crew “tasks”
 Maintenance
 Moving
 Work or inspection “off-the-floor” in offices
 Visits to non-office/“field” and facility worksites of others (such as construction, disasters, and
operating, plants)
Note: If your activities are adequately covered on an existing pre-task planning document, you may
opt to review and “sign on/under” that document instead of creating a separate STA.
DEFINITIONS
Control - An action or measure that attempts to prevent a recognized hazard from causing injury or damage.
Hazard - A source of energy or condition that may cause injury to personnel, or damage to equipment, property,
or the environment.
Job Safety Analysis (JSA) – A system that identifies hazards associated with each step of a job and develops
solutions for each hazard that will either eliminate or control the hazard. This process is also known as job hazard
analysis, activity hazard analysis (U.S. Army Corps of Engineers in particular), and numerous others.
Risk - The combination of the probability (likelihood) of a specific unwanted event and the potential
consequences if it should occur.
Risk Assessment - A detailed, systematic examination of any activity, location, or operational system to identify
risks, understand the consequences, and review controls.

Page 826
ABG
Risk Management - Management activities that enable risks to be identified, understood, and minimized to a
reasonably achievable, tolerable risk.
Safety Task Assignment (STA) – The process of identifying and communicating to each employee the steps,
hazards, and risks associated with a task, and the safe work practices that are to be applied to complete the task
safely.

Page 827
ABG
The projects will adopt a “whole life” approach to pre-task planning for HSE from commencement of the project
to commissioning and handover to the owner. The project will use a series of hazard studies to identify, analyze,
and manage areas of risk or hazard. In addition, other specific risk assessments and reviews may be used to
analyze specific areas of risk or hazard.
The following subsections provide a systematic approach to any pre-task planning process.
Hazard Identification
Workplace hazards can be identified in a number of ways. Inspections provide a system of recognizing hazardous
conditions so that those conditions can be corrected.
The data collected while performing inspections will be used to identify hazards and barriers to working safely and
in an environmentally protective manner so that they can be addressed – such as procedure changes or
purchasing different personal protective equipment (PPE). The data also will be tracked as a proactive measure of
acceptable health, safety, and environmental (HSE) behavior on the site. Reports and safe work observation
information will be shared with employees at Toolbox safety meetings. Refer to Practice 000.653.1306, Safe Work
Observation.
Assessment
Once the hazards have been identified, it is necessary to assess what risk they pose to employees in the
workplace. In this way we can establish a measure of the risk and determine what priority they should have for
corrective action.
The risk assessment step is that part of the process that assesses the probability (likelihood) and consequences
(severity) of hazards that have been identified. Once we have estimated the probability and consequences for
each hazard then we can allocate it a priority for corrective action.
Generally, risk assessment is estimating: what are the chances (probability) of an accident happening, and if it
does happen, what are the chances that someone will be hurt? What will be the extent of equipment or
environmental damage, and how bad will it be (severity)?
The level of risk is dependent on the exposure to the hazard and the probability and consequences of an event
occurring.
Attachment 01 provides a non-mandatory, formal method for assessing risk.
Control
This stage is the process of determining and implementing appropriate measures to control risk. In many
countries, this process has been legislated and must be completed as far as practicable.
Practicable means considering:
Severity of the hazard in question
State of knowledge about the hazard or risk and ways of removing or mitigating it

Page 828
ABG
Availability and suitability of ways to remove or mitigate that hazard or risk

Cost of removing or mitigating the hazard
D. Hierarchy of Controls
Having identified the potential hazards, the team is further responsible for identifying solutions to those hazards.
The preferred hierarchy for developing solutions/controls is provided below.
Elimination - Eliminating toxic substances, hazardous equipment, or processes that are not necessary for a
system of work.
Substitution - Where hazardous materials/chemicals have been identified as a hazard, the preferred option is to
replace the material with a less hazardous one.
Engineering - The removal of potential hazards by reengineering the job is a preferred option. This includes
design modification, guards, permanently fixed physical barriers, interlocked physical barriers, physical barriers,
presence-sensing systems, enclosures, ventilation, automation, and isolation.
Administrative Controls - The application of administrative controls to hazards may include such actions as
limiting the time of exposure, rotating employees, and training/re-training of employees.
PPE - The provision of PPE does not eliminate the hazard, but only shields the individual from it. Such action may
have to be coupled with training in the correct use of the equipment.
Evaluation
This step means checking to see whether the introduced changes reduce the risk previously assessed. It may
involve repeating the process of hazard identification, risk assessment, and risk control to verify that all risks to
health and safety from a particular hazard have been controlled as far as is practicable; but this depends on the
hazard, the nature of the assessed risks, and on the control measures used.
Where the evaluations of risk control measures reveal some remaining risk, the process continues until risk is
minimized as far as practicable.
Monitor
To verify that control measures implemented are not eroded over time they must be monitored on a regular
basis.
Continuous Hazard Identification
The project/office will conduct regular audits and inspections of workplaces and continue to identify hazards,
assess risks, and develop/implement appropriate control measures. These audits and inspections will monitor the
pre-task planning process in use to verify that the process is working effectively, analyses are modified as
necessary, hazards are being mitigated, and control measures are appropriate and implemented.
Refer to Practices 000.653.1305, Inspections/Assessments and Audits, and 000.653.1306.

Page 829
ABG
At any stage, employees may identify further activities that require the application of risk identification,
assessment, and management processes such as:
Recruitment and selection of personnel
“Critical" construction activities (such as multi-crane lifts)
Interaction of personnel with technology, vehicles, and equipment
Planned changes of operational status of equipment
Confined spaces
Working at heights
Foreseeable emergencies
Climatic extremes
Archaeological discoveries
Wastewater discharges
PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS
The project hazard study approach for the engineering phase is described in Practice 000.653.8600, Execution of
Process Hazards Analyses (PHAs). The hazard evaluation and risk mitigation process continues into the
commissioning, construction, and operations/maintenance phases. Individual projects may choose to develop a
different series of studies, but all aspects of the studies described herein must be incorporated.
PHA Level I
The Level I PHA is intended to identify potential chemical and process hazards that require specific considerations
in order to ensure safety in design. Because the study is performed very early in the design process, the hazards
identified tend to be of a general nature. The Level I PHA provides an opportunity for eliminating hazards while
fundamental changes to the process are possible. Requirements for Level I PHAs are presented in Practice
000.653.8600, Conceptual Hazards Identification – PHA Level I.
PHA Level II
The Level II PHA is intended to identify events that could occur during operation of the facility that would be a
Level II is performed after the basic design is complete during preliminary or front-end
engineering. Details regarding the execution of PHA Level II reviews can be found in
Practice 000.653.8602, Preliminary Process Hazards Analysis – PHA Level II.
PHA Level III
The Level III PHA is intended to identify events that could occur during operation of the facility that would be a

Page 830
ABG
The Level III PHA serves as the final safety review before the Pre-Startup Safety Review (PSSR). Following the
Level III PHA, the P&IDs are “frozen,” and all design changes occurring after that point must be processed through
the project HSE Management of Change program (refer to Practice 000.653.8606, HSE Management of Change).
Details regarding the execution of PHA Level III reviews can be found in Practice 000.653.8603, Process Hazards
Analysis – PHA Level III.
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS
The JSA Team
A JSA should be performed by more than one person in order to provide a greater breadth of technical
competence. There is not an optimum number of persons required to conduct a JSA. However, fewer rather than
more are preferred.
Ideally, the team should include:
Supervisor
Employee(s) experienced in the task
Other employees that will be performing the work
Specialists (such as HSE representatives, engineers, and industrial hygienists) as required
Selection of Jobs to be Analyzed
Particular jobs may be selected for analysis either by the Site Manager, the supervisor responsible for the work,
the HSE Representative, or by request of the HSE Committee.
Any employee at the workplace is permitted to submit that a particular job be subject to a JSA. If such a
submission is made, then the recipient is responsible for giving it objective consideration and also for keeping a
record of the conclusions from that consideration (such as a diary note).
As a guide, jobs are selected for analysis on the following basis:
Hazard Potential
Some tasks have a recognizable hazard potential greater than activities generally conducted at the site. As
examples, such tasks will include dual crane lifts; critical lifts (load exceeds 30 ton or 75 percent of rated capacity);
jobs that involve more than one work group; work in confined spaces; crane rope change; and hot work.
Consequences of Failure
A work method failure during the execution of some tasks may result in unacceptably high-damaging
consequences. Such tasks may include work at height and manual handling.
Incident History
Tasks that have previously resulted in an accident or jobs with a high accident potential should be subjected to a
JSA review. New, changed, or infrequent jobs/work methods and repetitive tasks that are the subject of proposed
changes to the work method (such as changed equipment) should be the subject of a JSA.

Page 831
ABG
Live Machinery/Equipment
Jobs undertaken on live machinery and equipment should be subject to a JSA due to the inherent hazards
associated with such work.
The JSA process should also be applied to a project work scope before the HSE procedures are developed for the
project. In this situation, the project work scope should be broken into base activities, and these activities should
then be analyzed. The results of the JSA should be used to develop the project procedures.
Define Scope
Before commencing a JSA, it is important to define the scope of work (the job to be analyzed) and select the
appropriate employees. This scope definition should be undertaken by the person responsible for organizing the
JSA.
Basic Process for Completing a Job Safety Analysis
The basic steps necessary to perform the job from start to finish must be listed. Each of the steps of a job should
accomplish some major task. The task may consist of a set of movements. Look at the first set of movements
used to perform a task and then determine the next logical set of movements. Each step description defines an
action, but does not describe hazards or precautions. Cleanup and stowing of equipment at the completion of
work is a step.
Hazards associated with each step will be identified. Equipment, personnel, and the activities that are required to
complete each step will be considered. Each step to find and identify hazards that could lead to an accident will
be examined. The preparer will verify that all hazards are listed, including environmental and health hazards.
Using the first two steps as a guide, the preparer will decide what actions are necessary to eliminate or reduce the
hazards that could lead to an accident that may result in injury, damage, or occupational illness.
Having identified the potential hazards, the preparer will identify solutions to those hazards. The preferred
options for developing solutions are noted in Subsection 1.4 (A), Hierarchy of Controls.
Recommended safe work plans/operating procedures and the required or recommended PPE for each step of the
job will be listed. Be specific. Say exactly what needs to be done to correct the hazard. Avoid general statements
like “be careful”; they tend to indicate that not enough thought has been applied to the problem and the team
has taken the easy way out.
Each JSA will be recorded on Form 000.653.F0100, Job Safety Analysis.
The individual steps will be numbered consecutively, beginning with the number one.
The hazards identified for each step will be numbered consecutively as a subset. For example, for Step No. 1 the
identified hazards would be numbered 1.1, 1.2, 1.3; while for step No. 3 the identified hazards would be
numbered 3.1, 3.2, 3.3.
All employees and visitors will read or receive instruction in JSA requirements before commencing work on the
job. Employees and visitors must sign the JSA to indicate that they understand and will comply with the JSA.

Page 832
ABG
Automated JSA
It is permissible to use an automated JSA process if it is at least as robust as the process described in this practice.
Informing Employees
Employees must be informed of identified or potential hazards and prescribed safety measures before initiating
work activities through review of pre-task planning documents. In general, pre-task planning documents must
include hazard analyses, permits, and other safety and health-related work plans.
Training
Training associated with hazards/control measures and activities identified on pre-task planning documents will
be completed in accordance with Practice 000.653.1001, Training and Orientation.
When requested, engineering will provide technical support or pre-task planning to ensure compliance with
codes, standards, and regulations.
Responsibilities
Supervision
Supervisors will ensure the following activities are performed:

Research (to the extent possible) and identify known environmental hazards in areas
employees enter or in which they work.
Identify known or potential hazards and list on the JSA and (as required) other pre-task
planning documents. Ensure that required training and permits are completed for those
applicable items on the known or potential hazards list.
Ensure and maintain documentation of competency/qualification.
Ensure that pertinent information from the pre-task planning document(s) is
communicated to affected employees before they perform work or enter the worksite.
Ensure current pre-task planning documents are at the worksite.
Ensure compliance with this practice.
E. ABG Construction Engineers and Contract Administrators
ABG construction engineers and contract administrators will ensure that ABG subcontractors and lower-tier
subcontractors have submitted the required JSA(s), the JSA(s) has been reviewed and approved by the ABG HSE
Representative (and the client, if required), and a pre-task walkthrough has been conducted with the appropriate
ABG project representatives (including safety and health) and the subcontractor before the start of work.
F. Project HSE
Provides safety and health-related program guidance for pre-task planning.

Reviews and approves all JSAs after the documents have been signed by appropriate
supervision.

Page 833
ABG
Where possible, this review and approval should be made by another HSE (or quality control) Representative who
was not involved in the preparation of the documents.
Note: Review with recommendations to change these documents is not considered involvement
in preparation.
Ensures a pre-task walkthrough on the project has been completed before the start of
work.
Reviews and evaluates any hazardous material and/or hazardous process that creates
a potential employee exposure. Processes may include, but are not limited to, welding or
cutting, confined spaces, coating application/removal, sandblasting, asbestos and lead
work, and chemical use.
Once supervision completes the JSA, the HSE Representative will review and approve it. A specific review by
industrial hygiene may be required when conditions dictate, or as requested by the HSE Representative.
If an incident or accident occurs during performance of the job or task, that portion of the work will be stopped
and the supervisor (along with the HSE Representative) must review the worksite to ensure that appropriate
controls are established and identified on the JSA before allowing the work to continue.
Process
Asbestos Inspection
A “good faith” asbestos inspection report must be submitted by the building owner/operator and reviewed before
construction/maintenance work begins. A written report or statement from the building owner/operator stating
that “no asbestos-containing material will be disturbed during the work effort(s)” may be substituted for the good
faith asbestos inspection report. If asbestos is going to be disturbed, the report or statement must be attached to
the JSA. An asbestos inspection report is not required for walkthrough inspections or maintenance activities
where asbestos is not disturbed.
Hazard Analyses Documented
Hazard analyses will be documented as follows:

Job-specific JSA
Task-specific JSA
Position Hazard Analysis
STA
Asbestos Work Plan
Lead Compliance Plan
Hazardous Waste Health and Safety Plan (or equal)
Automated job hazard analysis
Other equivalent hazard analysis process/methods approved by ABG HSE.
Note: All types of hazard analyses, except the STA and process hazard analysis, are
collectively referred to in this practice as JSAs.

Page 834
ABG
Note: Attachments to JSAs may include the Energized Electrical Work Permit; Confined
Space Hazard Identification; Confined Space Entry Permit; Hot Work Permit; Fall
Protection Work Plan; Good Faith Roof Assessment; MSDS, Radiological Work
Permit; and Excavation Permit and scan documents.
JSA Required
No field activities on the worksite may be performed until a JSA covering the activity (with the appropriate
hazards identified and control measures established to protect the employee) has been reviewed and approved.
All JSAs are reviewed and approved by the ABG HSE Representative.
Subcontractor JSA Reviews
Subcontractor JSAs must be submitted to the ABG HSE Representative 5 days before commencing work. The JSA
will be reviewed and initialed by the ABG HSE Representative when acceptable.
Note: It is a common contractual requirement to submit JSAs to the client for
review/acceptance at least 15 days before commencing work. In such cases,
subcontractor JSAs must be submitted to the ABG HSE Representative at least
20 days before commencing work.
JSA Reviews by Employees
Each employee reviews the JSA for the specific task performed before performing the work activity. This review
may be in the form of a pre-task briefing, a one-on-one discussion with the supervisor, or reading the JSA. The
review is documented by employee signature on the Pre-Task Planning Signoff (Form 000.653.F0314) or equal.
Posting a JSA
The JSA will be posted in a conspicuous place at the worksite. Employees will be informed where this location is.
Visitors and vendors are required to review and sign the JSA before entering the worksite.
Note: On occasion, it will be impractical to post the JSA at the worksite. However, in all
cases the JSA will be available at the worksite when activities are being
performed.
Nonroutine Workers
In the event that nonroutine personnel (such as inspectors or visitors) arrive on the worksite and the existing JSA
(whether developed by ABG or subcontractor) does not cover the hazards associated with their activity, a new JSA
will be written to cover that activity or the supervisor will modify the existing JSA to cover the activity.
Updating a JSA
JSAs (including attachments) will be renewed, amended, or revised when the safety requirements change, hazards
change, new hazards are identified, the work scope changes, or 6 months has elapsed since the last review. The
date on the JSA(s) will be changed to reflect the renewal/ modification. The HSE Representative will review and

Page 835
ABG
approve all changes. Employees involved in the work will review the renewed/modified JSA and resign and date
Form 000.653.F0314 or equal.
Pre-Task Walkthrough
Personnel performing a pre-task walkthrough will use the appropriate documents and information available to
ensure hazards, or potential hazards, are correctly identified and communicated for the activity being performed.
If, after the pre-task walkthrough, there is inconsistency between what the actual conditions are at the worksite
and what was expected in the pre-walkthrough evaluation, the differences will be resolved before any work
begins and the appropriate changes noted on the JSA.
Completing a “hazard checklist” (such as Forms 000.653.F0154, Pre-Task Hazard Checklist; 000.653.F0155, Plant
Risk Assessment Checklist; or 000.653.F0315, Job Hazard Checklist) is an optional but convenient method of
documenting hazards/controls identified during the pre-task walkdown. This form also provides a convenient (but
again optional) method of notifying subcontractors of the suspected/potential hazards associated with a
contract/scope of work (refer to Practice 000.653.1003, Contractor Selection and Alignment).
Key ABG employees (such as construction supervision and craft, and the HSE Representative), the
customer/client, and subcontractor (if subcontractor work) should be involved in the pre-task planning process.
Involvement may include pre-task walkthroughs, participation in developing the JSA, or input/changes recognized
during pre-task meetings.
JSA Preparation
JSAs are prepared and address specific work activities and hazards associated with the specific work, and controls
to mitigate the hazards. Subcontractors use the hazard information contained in the contract, as well as the pre-
task walkthrough, when developing JSAs covering their work.
Further evaluation and documentation on the continuation page(s) are required for activities when any of the
following situations pertain:
Any hazard/activity on page 1 is checked “yes.”
Hazards associated with the work to be performed are not sufficiently defined.
Employees may be exposed to hazardous materials.
Other significant or unusual hazards are anticipated or could become involved.
Subcontractors and lower-tier contractors may use their own JSA forms, provided the information contained in
their completed form addresses the process and guidelines as outlined in this practice.
JSAs include the following information as prescribed on the JSA form:
Job scope and description of activities
Listing of each activity or phase
Identification of the hazards associated with the activities being performed, including the
use or presence of hazardous chemicals
Specific, effective safety measures (engineering, administrative, or PPE) to eliminate or
control the hazards

Page 836
ABG
A list of specific applicable work control documents, such as maintenance instruction or

equipment procedure
Required training
Required permits
Identification and detail (including drawings and other documentation) of
activities/hazards for which protective measures are required to be designed,
inspected, or approved by a professional engineer or Competent/Qualified Person
Pre-Task Meeting
The supervisor/designee will conduct a pre-task meeting before any work activity begins and discusses the
completed pre-task planning documents with all employees directly involved in the activity. A “pre-task meeting
form” (such as Form 000.653.F0316, Pre-Task Briefing Checklist) may be used to document topics covered in the
meeting. Any employee who is not in attendance at the pre-task meeting will not be allowed to work until he/she
attends a similar briefing.
Note: The supervisor/designee should invite the ABG HSE Representative to attend the
initial pre-task meeting for each project/task order.
The pre-task meeting will focus on discussions of the area where work is performed, scope of work, equipment
used, the hazards and control measures (including PPE), and any evacuation and emergency procedures.
Each employee directly involved in the activity (including employees in support roles) will sign Form
000.653.F0314 (or equal) indicating that he/she understands the activity, hazards, and controls associated with
the work effort as indicated on the applicable pre-task planning documents and attachments.
Note: Only those employees signing Form 000.653.F0314 (or equal) are allowed to work
on the job specified in the document.
Note: If an employee does not understand the safety requirements or scope of the job,
the employee may not proceed with the work until the requirements and scope
are clearly understood.
SAFETY TASK ASSIGNMENT
The STA is the process of identifying and communicating to each employee the task steps to be completed, the
hazards and risks associated with the task, and the safe work practices that are to be applied to complete the task
safely and in an environmentally acceptable manner.
The STA process includes the following:
Pre-task planning
Hazard identification and correction
Supervisor and employee accountability

Page 837
ABG
Responsibility
It is the responsibility of Project/Site Management to verify completion of the STA process on a daily basis. It is
the supervisor’s responsibility to conduct the STA process daily with his/her employees before each new work
assignment. The STA forms must be provided to Project/Site Management at the completion of each shift.
Process
The supervisor receives the job/task assignment.

The supervisor conducts a review of the job/task to be assigned.
An STA meeting is conducted with the employees who have been chosen to perform the
assignment and who have agreed to comply with STA requirements.
Each step of the task will be reviewed with the assigned employees, and all potential
hazards will be identified.
Safe work practices, PPE, and task competency requirements will be reviewed and
discussed with the employees.
The supervisor is responsible for providing all required PPE and other equipment
necessary for the safe completion of the task in the work area.
The supervisor completes the STA form. Each employee assigned to perform the task will
sign the STA form indicating awareness of the task at hand, potential hazards, safe
work practices, and required PPE.
The STA form will be displayed in the work area until the end of the shift or until the task
is completed.
The supervisor will monitor the job/task as it begins and periodically revisit the work
location to monitor working conditions and compliance with the STA requirements.
Note: While performing the job/task, if additional employees are assigned to the work
team, the supervisor must review the STA with those employees, and their
signatures must be added to the STA.
Post-STA
The post-STA will be completed at the end of shift or at task completion.

The supervisor will review and complete the post-STA with each employee. All safety concerns/problems that
occur during the assignment should be recorded on the post-STA.
Each employee will sign the post-STA indicating that they have reviewed and agree with the listed comments.
When the job/task is completed, the STA form will be submitted to Project/Site Management for retention.
An STA trifold card is provided as Form 000.653.F0101, Safety Task Assignment.

Page 838
ABG
REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0154 Pre-Task Hazard Checklist
000.653.F0155 Plant Risk Assessment Checklist
000.653.F0156 Hazard and Risk Review
000.653.F0314 Pre-Task Planning Signoff
000.653.F0315 Job Hazard Checklist
000.653.F0316 Pre-Task Briefing Checklist
ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Formal Risk Assessment Process

Page 839
ABG
SAFE WORK ENVIRONMENT IN SHOPS AND AROUND EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................804
SCOPE805
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................805
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................805
2.0 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................................................................................806
3.0 ACCESS...........................................................................................................................................................806
4.0 ELECTRICAL....................................................................................................................................................806
5.0 MATERIAL STORAGE.......................................................................................................................................807
6.0 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION.........................................................................................................................807
7.0 FIRE PROTECTION...........................................................................................................................................807
8.0 COMPRESSED GASES......................................................................................................................................807
9.0 SERVICING OF TIRES.......................................................................................................................................807
10.0 REFERENCES...................................................................................................................................................807

Page 840
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the requirements for providing a safe work environment in shops and around equipment
(such as pipe fabrication, model, carpentry, paint, etc.)
SCOPE
 Equipment
 Access
 Electrical
 Material Storage
 Lighting and Ventilation
 Fire Protection
 Compressed Gases
 Servicing of Tires
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Shop Equipment  Equipment normally used in a shop setting including, but not limited to:
 Lathes
 Drill presses
 Power brakes
 Table saws
 Radial arm saws
 Benders
 Shears
Layout of facilities and equipment placement will be designed in accordance with applicable standards and this
practice.
Eye protection must be worn at all times.
Loose clothing or dangling jewelry will not be permitted in the area of operating equipment.
Long hair must be tied back or a net worn while working on or around operating equipment.
Supervisors must conduct periodic audits in compliance with this practice, assist in providing required training,
and be knowledgeable about applicable requirements.

Page 841
ABG
2.0 EQUIPMENT
Equipment subject to tipping over or moving (vibrating) off tables must be secured to prevent movement.
Guards must be installed on all rotating machinery (equipment that may produce flying objects, create a pinch/nip
point, or presents a hazard to the employee from moving parts, such as lathes, drill presses, and table saws).
Before employees can operate shop equipment, they must be trained on the safe operation of that specific
equipment.
Warning signs or labels will be placed on equipment as required for safe operation.
Appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) must be worn at all times.
Equipment will have all warning labels/signs posted showing requirements for its safe operation, including the
wearing of appropriate PPE.
Operational safety interlocks must be used on all equipment as required (such as power brakes/presses, shears,
and drill presses).
3.0 ACCESS
Exits will be provided as adequate for the number of employees working in the area and the size of the
project/site.
Exits will be clearly marked with adequate signs that can be illuminated after dark.
Work areas and aisles must be kept clean and free of unnecessary materials/waste.
Work areas for each piece of equipment will be kept clean and orderly at all times.
A minimum of 3 feet (0.9 meter) of free space must be maintained around each piece of equipment.
Employees will not be permitted behind equipment (such as power brakes) without the operator’s knowledge and
until the equipment has been shut down.
A minimum of 3 feet (0.9 meter) of aisle space must be maintained in all shop areas.
Portable adders will be appropriate and comply with Practice 000.653.3302, Portable Ladders; fixed ladders must
comply with applicable codes.
4.0 ELECTRICAL
Equipment installed in a designated area for an indefinite period of time must have its power source provided in
approved conduit. Portable cords will not be used.
Temporary cords, leads, and hoses must not be placed on the floor or in walkways. All temporary cords, leads,
and hoses must be secured along the walls.
Equipment must be grounded and all electrical sources tested semiannually at non-construction facilities, or
monthly at construction facilities in accordance with Practice 000.653.3309, Electrical Work Safety.
A disconnect must be provided within the immediate work area for each piece of equipment. This disconnect will
be labeled as the “Emergency Stop” and will identify which item of equipment it shuts down.

Page 842
ABG
All distribution panels must be labeled showing the item each breaker serves.
5.0 MATERIAL STORAGE
Stock material (such as pipe, all-thread, and angle iron) will be secured from shifting or falling while stored.
Round stock will be blocked to prevent rolling.
Materials identified as hazardous, including but not limited to, paints, thinners, cleaners, coatings, and adhesives
must be stored in approved storage cabinets.
Hazardous materials that are used in the workplace must be stored in approved safety cans. Only a 1-day supply
will be permitted in the work area outside of an approved storage cabinet.
Compressed gases must be stored outside in a designated area.
Ceilings of rooms or elevated platforms used for storing of material will be posted as to the maximum load limit
that may be imposed on the area.
6.0 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
Lighting for shop areas must meet the applicable levels.

Overhead lights below 10 feet (3.1 meters) above grade will be protected from physical damage by guards or
other acceptable means.
Ventilation must be adequate to remove vapors, dusts, fumes, etc., from the workplace.
Dust-producing equipment (such as planer, sanders, and saws) will be equipped with local exhaust ventilation to
remove the dust.
7.0 FIRE PROTECTION
Appropriate portable fire extinguishers will be provided in accordance with in-country standards and the National
Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).
Combustible materials must not be permitted to accumulate and create a fire hazard.
Temporary heating devices meeting in-country standards will be approved for each specific work area before use.
8.0 COMPRESSED GASES
Compressed air used for cleaning must not exceed 30 psi or equivalent in-country measurement gauge.
9.0 SERVICING OF TIRES
Employees who service tires will be trained on the hazards associated in servicing rim wheels.
Vehicle tires must be serviced in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
Split-rim tires will only be serviced in containment cages specific to that operation.
Servicing multi-piece or single-piece rim wheels must be performed in accordance with in-country standards, such
as 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1926.600.

Page 843
ABG
10.0 REFERENCES

Non-ABG Documents:
29 CFR Split-Rim Tire Work
1926.600

Page 844
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................809
Application..............................................................................................................................................................810
Capacity.................................................................................................................................................................. 810
Platform Construction............................................................................................................................................810
Supported Scaffolds...........................................................................................................................................812
Suspension Scaffolds..........................................................................................................................................813
Gaining Access to Scaffolds................................................................................................................................815
Working Employees............................................................................................................................................815
Ramps & Walkways................................................................................................................................................816
Erecting & Dismantling...........................................................................................................................................817
Fall Protection Plan.................................................................................................................................................817
Working Employees................................................................................................................................................818
Falling Object Protection........................................................................................................................................820
Using Scaffolds........................................................................................................................................................821
Prohibited Practices................................................................................................................................................822
Aerial Lifts...............................................................................................................................................................823
Ladder Trucks and Tower Trucks............................................................................................................................823
Extensible & Articulating Boom Platforms..............................................................................................................823
Duties of Competent & Qualified Persons..............................................................................................................824
Competent person.........................................................................................................................................824
Qualified person.............................................................................................................................................824
Competent Person(s):........................................................................................................................................824
Inspections.............................................................................................................................................................825
Training...................................................................................................................................................................825
Employees Who Use Scaffolds...........................................................................................................................825
Employees Who Erect........................................................................................................................................825
Employees Who Need Retraining.......................................................................................................................826

Page 845
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
Purpose
It is this company's purpose in issuing these procedures to further ensure a safe workplace based on the following
formal, written procedures for scaffold work. These procedures will be reviewed and updated as needed to
comply with new OSHA regulations, new best practices in scaffolding, and as business practices demand. The Site
Supervisor is the plan coordinator/manager and is responsible for its implementation. Copies of the written
program may be obtained at the Site Safety Manager office.
Application
This general scaffold plan applies to:
- All employees who perform work while on a scaffold.

- All employees who are involved in erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or
inspecting scaffolds.
Capacity
Taking into account the OSHA rules we must apply and the engineering/manufacturing requirements of our
scaffolds, the following rules apply:
- Each scaffold and scaffold component we use will support, without failure, its own weight and at least
four times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to it.
- When we use non-adjustable suspension scaffolds, each suspension rope, including connecting hardware,
will support, without failure, at least six times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that
rope.
- Direct connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used to balance adjustable suspension
scaffolds, shall be capable of resisting at least 4 times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold
operating at the rated load of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times the tipping moment imposed by the
scaffold operating at the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.
- Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on non-adjustable suspension scaffolds shall
be capable of supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or
transmitted to that rope.
- Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be
capable of supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted
to that rope with the scaffold operating at either the rated load of the hoist, or 2 (minimum) times the
stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.
- The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not exceed 3 times its rated load.
- Scaffolds shall be designed by a qualified person and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with
that design.

Page 846
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
Platform Construction
This section documents the procedures and safety requirements we use to construct our scaffold platforms.
The following safety rules apply for this scaffold platform construction:
- Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds shall be fully planked or decked between the front
uprights and the guardrail supports as follows:
o Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold plank, fabricated plank, fabricated deck, or fabricated platform)
shall be installed so that the space between adjacent units and the space between the platform
and the uprights is no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where the employer can
demonstrate that a wider space is necessary (for example, to fit around uprights when side
brackets are used to extend the width of the platform).
o Where the employer makes the demonstration provided for in the OSHA regulations, the platform
shall be planked or decked as fully as possible and the remaining open space between the
platform and the uprights shall not exceed 9 1/2 inches (24.1 cm).
o The requirement in the OSHA regulation to provide full planking or decking does not apply to
platforms used solely as walkways or solely by employees performing scaffold erection or
dismantling. In these situations, only the planking that the employer establishes is necessary to
provide safe working conditions is required.
- Each scaffold platform and walkway shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide.
- Each ladder jack scaffold, top plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall be
at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. There is no minimum width requirement for boatswains' chairs.
- Where scaffolds must be used in areas that the employer can demonstrate are so narrow that platforms
and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and walkways shall be as wide as
feasible, and employees on those platforms and walkways shall be protected from fall hazards by the use
of guardrails and/or personal fall arrest systems. T
- he front edge of all platforms shall not be more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the face of the work, unless
guardrail systems are erected along the front edge and/or personal fall arrest systems are used in
accordance with applicable OSHA regulations to protect employees from falling.
- The maximum distance from the face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 inches (8 cm).
- The maximum distance from the face for plastering and lathing operations shall be 18 inches (46 cm).
- Each end of a platform, unless cleated or otherwise restrained by hooks or equivalent means, shall extend
over the centerline of its support at least 6 inches (15 cm).
- Each end of a platform 10 feet or less in length shall not extend over its support more than 12 inches (30
cm) unless the platform is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able
to support employees and/or materials without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to
the cantilevered end.
- Each platform greater than 10 feet in length shall not extend over its support more than 18 inches (46
cm), unless it is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support
employees without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the cantilevered end.

Page 847
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- On scaffolds where scaffold planks are abutted to create a long platform, each abutted end shall rest on a
separate support surface. This provision does not preclude the use of common support members, such as
"T" sections, to support abutting planks, or hook on platforms designed to rest on common supports.
- On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long platform, the overlap shall occur only over
supports, and shall not be less than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are nailed together or
otherwise restrained to prevent movement.
- At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes direction, such as turning a corner, any platform
that rests on a bearer at an angle other than a right angle shall be laid first, and platforms which rest at
right angles over the same bearer shall be laid second, on top of the first platform.
- Wood platforms shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except that platform edges may be covered or
marked for identification. Platforms may be coated periodically with wood preservatives, fire-retardant
finishes, and slip-resistant finishes; however, the coating may not obscure the top or bottom wood
surfaces.
- Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be intermixed unless the
components fit together without force and the scaffold's structural integrity is maintained by the user.
Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be modified in order to intermix
them unless a competent person determines the resulting scaffold is structurally sound.
- Scaffold components made of dissimilar metals shall not be used together unless a competent person has
determined that galvanic action will not reduce the strength of any component to a level below that
required by OSHA regulations.
Supported Scaffolds
Supported scaffolds with a height to base width (including outrigger supports, if used) ratio of more than four to
one (4:1) shall be restrained from tipping by guying, tying, bracing, or equivalent means, as follows:
Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at locations where horizontal members support both inner and outer legs.
Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the scaffold manufacturer's recommendations or at the
closest horizontal member to the 4:1 height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal members every
20 feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less
thereafter for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) wide. The top guy, tie or brace of completed scaffolds shall be
placed no further than the 4:1 height from the top. Such guys, ties and braces shall be installed at each end of the
scaffold and at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end [not both] towards the
other).
Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers shall be used to prevent the tipping of supported scaffolds in all circumstances
where an eccentric load, such as a cantilevered work platform, is applied or is transmitted to the scaffold.
Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on base plates and mud sills or other
adequate firm foundation.

Page 848
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
Footings shall be level, sound, rigid, and capable of supporting the loaded scaffold without settling or
displacement.
Unstable objects shall not be used to support scaffolds or platform units.
Unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms.
Front-end loaders and similar pieces of equipment shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless they
have been specifically designed by the manufacturer for such use.
Forklifts shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless the entire platform is attached to the fork and the
forklift is not moved horizontally while the platform is occupied.
Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall be plumb and braced to prevent swaying and
displacement.
Suspension Scaffolds
- All suspension scaffold support devices, such as outrigger beams, cornice hooks, parapet clamps, and
similar devices, shall rest on surfaces capable of supporting at least 4 times the load imposed on them by
the scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist (or at least 1.5 times the load imposed on them by the
scaffold at the stall capacity of the hoist, whichever is greater).
- Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, shall be made of structural metal or equivalent strength
material, and shall be restrained to prevent movement.
- The inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be stabilized by bolts or other direct
connections to the floor or roof deck, or they shall have their inboard ends stabilized by counterweights,
except masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall not be stabilized by
counterweights.
- Before the scaffold is used, direct connections shall be evaluated by a competent person who shall
confirm, based on the evaluation, that the supporting surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be
imposed. In addition, masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold connections shall be designed by
an engineer experienced in such scaffold design.
- Counterweights shall be made of non-flowable material. Sand, gravel and similar materials that can be
easily dislocated shall not be used as counterweights.
- Only those items specifically designed as counterweights shall be used to counterweight scaffold systems.
Construction materials such as, but not limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be used
as counterweights.
- Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the outrigger beams to prevent accidental
displacement.
- Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until the scaffold is disassembled.
- Outrigger beams which are not stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck
shall be secured by tiebacks.

Page 849
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension ropes.

- Outrigger beams shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing support (usually the face of the building or
structure). However, where the employer can demonstrate that it is not possible to place an outrigger
beam perpendicular to the face of the building or structure because of obstructions that cannot be
moved, the outrigger beam may be placed at some other angle, provided opposing angle tiebacks are
used.
- Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on the building or structure. Sound
anchorages include structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or
electrical conduit.
- Tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the building or structure, or opposing angle
tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks installed at an angle are prohibited.
- Suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be:

o Provided with stop bolts or shackles at both ends;
o Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when channel iron beams are used in
place of I-beams;
o Installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam center line;
o Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position; and
o When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the rope is attached to the
outrigger beam shall be placed directly over the centerline of the stirrup.
- Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or
similar devices shall be:
o Made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of equivalent strength;
o Supported by bearing blocks; and
o Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles to the face of the building or
structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed and secured to a structurally sound point
of anchorage on the building or structure. Sound points of anchorage include structural members,
but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical conduit.
- Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.

- When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they shall contain not less than four wraps
of the suspension rope at the lowest point of scaffold travel. When other types of hoists are used, the
suspension ropes shall be long enough to allow the scaffold to be lowered to the level below without the
rope end passing through the hoist, or the rope end shall be configured or provided with means to
prevent the end from passing through the hoist.
- The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited.
- Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together except through the use of eye splice thimbles
connected with shackles or coverplates and bolts.
- The load end of wire suspension ropes shall be equipped with proper size thimbles and secured by eye
splicing or equivalent means.

Page 850
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- Ropes shall be inspected for defects by a competent person prior to each work shift and after every
occurrence which could affect a rope's integrity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of the following conditions
exist:
o Any physical damage which impairs the function and strength of the rope.
o Kinks that might impair the tracking or wrapping of rope around the drum(s) or sheave(s).
o Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken wires in one strand in one
rope lay.
o Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening or peening causing loss of more than one-third of the
original diameter of the outside wires.
o Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact with electrical wires.
o Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an overspeed condition and has
engaged the suspension rope.
- Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not be used unless they are made by
the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person.
- When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds:

o There shall be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with the clips a minimum of 6 rope
diameters apart;
o Clips shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations;
o Clips shall be retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations after the initial loading;
o Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations at the start of
each work shift thereafter;
o U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for any scaffold hoist;
o When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt shall be placed over the dead end of the rope, and the
saddle shall be placed over the live end of the rope.
- Suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manual hoists shall be tested by a qualified testing
laboratory.
- Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on suspension scaffolds.
- Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension scaffolds shall be enclosed.
- In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manually
operated hoists shall have a braking device or locking pawl which engages automatically when a hoist
makes either of the following uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change in momentum or an
accelerated overspeed.
- Manually operated hoists shall require a positive crank force to descend.
- Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds shall be tied or otherwise secured to prevent them from
swaying, as determined to be necessary based on an evaluation by a competent person. Window
cleaners' anchors shall not be used for this purpose.
- Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and rescue shall not be used as working
platforms. This provision does not preclude the use of systems which are designed to function both as
suspension scaffolds and emergency systems.

Page 851
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
Gaining Access to Scaffolds
We know that getting to the working platform is critical to the safety of our employees. This section outlines the
mechanical requirements for gaining access to scaffold platforms such as: (1) ladders, (2) ramps and walkways, (3)
stair rails, and (4) direct access from another scaffold. This section is divided into two parts. The first part is for
workers gaining access to scaffold platforms to do work; the second part is access for employees erecting and
dismantling scaffolds.
Working Employees
- When scaffold platforms are more than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a point of access, portable ladders,
hook-on ladders, attachable ladders, stair towers (scaffold stairways/towers), stairway-type ladders (such
as ladder stands), ramps, walkways, integral prefabricated scaffold access, or direct access from another
scaffold, structure, personnel hoist, or similar surface shall be used. Cross braces shall not be used as a
means of access.
- Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders (Additional requirements for the proper construction and use
of portable ladders are contained in subpart X of this part -- Stairways and Ladders):
- Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders shall be positioned so as not to tip the scaffold;
- Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be positioned so that their bottom rung is not more than 24 inches
(61 cm) above the scaffold supporting level;
- When hook-on and attachable ladders are used on a supported scaffold more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high,
they shall have rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals.
- Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be specifically designed for use with the type of scaffold used;
- Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have a minimum rung length of 11 1/2 inches (29 cm); and
- Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have uniformly spaced rungs with a maximum spacing between
rungs of 16 3/4 inches.
- Stairway-type ladders shall:

o Be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches (61 cm) above the scaffold
supporting level;
o Be provided with rest platforms at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical intervals;
o Have a minimum step width of 16 inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaffold stairway-type
ladders shall have a minimum step width of 11 1/2 inches (30 cm); and
o Have slip-resistant treads on all steps and landings.
- Stair towers (scaffold stairway/towers) shall be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24
inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold supporting level.
- A stair rail consisting of a toprail and a midrail shall be provided on each side of each scaffold stairway.
- The toprail of each stair rail system shall also be capable of serving as a handrail, unless a separate
handrail is provided.
- Handrails, and toprails that serve as handrails, shall provide an adequate handhold for employees
grasping them to avoid falling.

Page 852
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- Stair rail systems and handrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to employees from punctures or
lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.
- The ends of stair rail systems and handrails shall be constructed so that they do not constitute a
projection hazard.
- Handrails, and toprails that are used as handrails, shall be at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
- Stair rails shall be not less than 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 inches (94 cm) from the upper surface
of the stair rail to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the
tread.
- A landing platform at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided
at each level.
- Each scaffold stairway shall be at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between stair rails.
- Treads and landings shall have slip-resistant surfaces.
- Stairways shall be installed between 40 degrees and 60 degrees from the horizontal.
- Guardrails meeting the requirements of paragraph (g)(4) of this section shall be provided on the open
sides and ends of each landing.
- Riser height shall be uniform, within 1/4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight of stairs. Greater variations in riser
height are allowed for the top and bottom steps of the entire system, not for each flight of stairs.
- Tread depth shall be uniform, within 1/4 inch, for each flight of stairs.
Ramps & Walkways
- Ramps and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall have guardrail systems which comply
with subpart M of this part -- Fall Protection;
- No ramp or walkway shall be inclined more than a slope of one (1) vertical to three (3) horizontal (20
degrees above the horizontal).
- If the slope of a ramp or a walkway is steeper than one (1) vertical in eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or
walkway shall have cleats not more than fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which are securely fastened
to the planks to provide footing.
- Integral prefabricated scaffold access frames shall:

o Be specifically designed and constructed for use as ladder rungs;
o Have a rung length of at least 8 inches (20 cm);
o Not be used as work platforms when rungs are less than 11 1/2 inches in length, unless each
affected employee uses fall protection, or a positioning device, which complies with applicable
OSHA regulations;
o Be uniformly spaced within each frame section;
o Be provided with rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals on all supported
scaffolds more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and
o Have a maximum spacing between rungs of 16 3/4 inches (43 cm). Non-uniform rung spacing
caused by joining end frames together is allowed, provided the resulting spacing does not exceed
16 3/4 inches (43 cm).

Page 853
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway type access shall line up vertically with each other between rest
platforms.
- Direct access to or from another surface shall be used only when the scaffold is not more than 14 inches
(36 cm) horizontally and not more than 24 inches (61 cm) vertically from the other surface.
Erecting & Dismantling
Our company shall provide safe means of access for each employee erecting or dismantling a scaffold where the
provision of safe access is feasible and does not create a greater hazard. We shall have a competent person
determine whether it is feasible or would pose a greater hazard to provide, and have employees use a safe means
of access. This determination shall be based on site conditions and the type of scaffold being erected or
dismantled.
Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be installed as soon as scaffold erection has progressed to a point that permits
safe installation and use.
When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds, (end) frames, with horizontal members that are
parallel, level and are not more than 22 inches apart vertically may be used as climbing devices for access,
provided they are erected in a manner that creates a usable ladder and provides good hand hold and foot space.
Cross braces on tubular welded frame scaffolds shall not be used as a means of access or egress.
Fall Protection Plan
Fall protection planning is critical to the safety and well being of our employees. Our fall protection plan follows
the OSHA requirements that are different depending on the type of scaffold we are using. In this plan we address
fall protection for our scaffold erectors and dismantlers separately.
Working Employees
This fall protection plan for our working employees is for the following type(s) of scaffold(s):
- Single- or two-point adjustable suspension scaffold-We will protect each employee on our single- or two-
point adjustable suspension scaffolds by a personal fall arrest system. Our personal fall arrest systems:
o Meet the requirements of applicable OSHA regulations.
o Are attached by lanyard to a vertical lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold structural member.
 NOTE: Vertical lifelines shall not be used when overhead components, such as overhead
protection or additional platform levels, are part of a single-point or two-point adjustable
suspension scaffold.

Page 854
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
o When vertical lifelines are used, they shall be fastened to a fixed safe point of anchorage, shall be
independent of the scaffold, and shall be protected from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe points of
anchorage include structural members of buildings, but do not include standpipes, vents, other
piping systems, electrical conduit, outrigger beams, or counterweights.
o When horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured to two or more structural members of
the scaffold, or they may be looped around both suspension and independent suspension lines
(on scaffolds so equipped) above the hoist and brake attached to the end of the scaffold.
Horizontal lifelines shall not be attached only to the suspension ropes.
o When lanyards are connected to horizontal lifelines or structural members on a single-point or
two-point adjustable suspension scaffold, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional
independent support lines and automatic locking devices capable of stopping the fall of the
scaffold in the event one or both of the suspension ropes fail. The independent support lines shall
be equal in number and strength to the suspension ropes.
o Vertical lifelines, independent support lines, and suspension ropes shall not be attached to each
other, nor shall they be attached to or use the same point of anchorage, nor shall they be
attached to the same point on the scaffold or personal fall arrest system.
o Self-contained adjustable scaffold supported by the frame structure-We will protect each
employee on our self-contained, frame structure supported, adjustable scaffolds by a guardrail
system. The guardrail system:
 Has a minimum 200-pound toprail capacity.
 Will be installed before being released for use by our employees.
 Guardrail systems shall be installed along all open sides and ends of platforms.
 Guardrail systems shall be installed before the scaffold is released for use by employees
other than erection/dismantling crews.
 The top edge height of toprails or equivalent member on supported scaffolds
manufactured or placed in service after January 1, 2000 shall be installed between 38
inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m) above the platform surface. The top edge height on
supported scaffolds manufactured and placed in service before January 1, 2000, and on all
suspended scaffolds where both a guardrail and a personal fall arrest system are required
shall be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When conditions warrant, the
height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system
meets all other criteria of applicable OSHA regulations.
 When midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, or equivalent
structural members are used, they shall be installed between the top edge of the
guardrail system and the scaffold platform.
 When midrails are used, they shall be installed at a height approximately midway
between the top edge of the guardrail system and the platform surface.
 When screens and mesh are used, they shall extend from the top edge of the guardrail
system to the scaffold platform, and along the entire opening between the supports.
 When intermediate members (such as balusters or additional rails) are used, they shall
not be more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.

Page 855
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
 Each toprail or equivalent member of a guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding,

without failure, a force applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point
along its top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n) for guardrail systems installed on single-
point adjustable suspension scaffolds or two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, and at
least 200 pounds (890 n) for guardrail systems installed on all other scaffolds.
 When the loads specified in the applicable OSHA regulation are applied in a downward
direction, the top edge shall not drop below the height above the platform surface that is
prescribed in the OSHA regulation.
 Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent
structural members of a guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding, without
failure, a force applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along the
midrail or other member of at least 75 pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems with a
minimum 100 pound toprail capacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) for guardrail
systems with a minimum 200 pound toprail capacity.
 Suspension scaffold hoists and non-walk-through stirrups may be used as end guardrails,
if the space between the hoist or stirrup and the side guardrail or structure does not allow
passage of an employee to the end of the scaffold.
 Guardrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or
lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.
 The ends of all rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except when such overhang
does not constitute a projection hazard to employees.
 Steel or plastic banding shall not be used as a toprail or midrail.
 Manila or plastic (or other synthetic) rope being used for toprails or midrails shall be
inspected by a competent person as frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to
meet the strength requirements of the OSHA regulation.
 Cross bracing is acceptable in place of a midrail when the crossing point of two braces is
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the work platform or as a toprail
when the crossing point of two braces is between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3
m) above the work platform. The end points at each upright shall be no more than 48
inches (1.3 m) apart.]
Falling Object Protection
All employees must wear hardhats when working on, assembling, or dismantling scaffolds. This is our primary
protection from falling objects. Additionally, we will:
- Install all guardrail systems with openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects.
- Prevent tools, materials, or equipment that inadvertently fell from our scaffolds from striking employees
by barricading the area below the scaffold.
- In addition to wearing hardhats each employee on a scaffold shall be provided with additional protection
from falling hand tools, debris, and other small objects through the installation of toeboards, screens, or

Page 856
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
guardrail systems, or through the erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or canopy structures that
contain or deflect the falling objects.
- When the falling objects are too large, heavy or massive to be contained or deflected by any of the above-
listed measures, the Company will place such potential falling objects away from the edge of the surface
from which they could fall and shall secure those materials as necessary to prevent their falling.
- Where there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment falling from a scaffold and striking employees
below, the following provisions apply:
o The area below the scaffold to which objects can fall shall be barricaded, and employees shall not
be permitted to enter the hazard area; or
o A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of platforms more than 10 feet (3.1 m) above lower
levels for a distance sufficient to protect employees below, except on float (ship) scaffolds where
an edging of 3/4 x 11/2 inch (2 x 4 cm) wood or equivalent may be used in lieu of toeboards;
- Where tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height higher than the top edge of the toeboard,
paneling or screening extending from the toeboard or platform to the top of the guardrail shall be erected
for a distance sufficient to protect employees below; or
- A guardrail system shall be installed with openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling
objects; or
- A canopy structure, debris net, or catch platform strong enough to withstand the impact forces of the
potential falling objects shall be erected over the employees below.
- Canopies, when used for falling object protection, shall comply with the following criteria:
o Canopies shall be installed between the falling object hazard and the employees.
o When canopies are used on suspension scaffolds for falling object protection, the scaffold shall be
equipped with additional independent support lines equal in number to the number of points
supported, and equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension ropes.
o Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to the same points of
anchorage.
- Where used, toeboards shall be:

o Capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222 n) applied in any
downward or horizontal direction at any point along the toeboard (toeboards built in accordance
with Appendix A to this subpart will be deemed to meet this requirement); and
o At least three and one-half inches (9 cm) high from the top edge of the toeboard to the level of
the walking/working surface. Toeboards shall be securely fastened in place at the outermost edge
of the platform and have not more than 1/4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance above the walking/working
surface. Toeboards shall be solid or with openings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the greatest
dimension
Using Scaffolds

Page 857
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
Site preparation, scaffold erection, fall protection, and gaining access to the working platform are only some of
the requirements for scaffold work. While this all takes concentration and safe work practices, the most
dangerous time can be when employees are concentrating on their work and not particularly aware of the
hazards of working from scaffolds. It is critical that employees who use scaffolds be trained, among other things,
in the recognition of the hazards associated with the type of scaffold being used and to understand the
procedures to control or minimize those hazards. Our competent person will inspect all scaffolds and scaffold
components for visible defects before each work shift, and after any occurrence that could affect a scaffold's
structural integrity. However, in addition to that, all users of scaffolds in this company will know and understand
the following safety rules:
- Scaffolds and scaffold components will never be loaded in excess of their maximum intended loads or
rated capacities.
- Debris must not be allowed to accumulate on platforms.
- The use of shore or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
- Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be inspected for visible defects by a competent person before
each work shift, and after any occurrence which could affect a scaffold's structural integrity.
- Any part of a scaffold damaged or weakened such that its strength is less than that required by the OSHA
regulation shall be immediately tagged out, repaired or replaced, braced to meet those provisions, or
removed from service until repaired. An example of tag used in tagging out scaffolding equipment is
provided at the back of this program.
- Scaffolds shall not be moved horizontally while employees are on them, unless they have been designed
by a registered professional engineer specifically for such movement or, for mobile scaffolds, where the
provisions of §1926.452(w) are followed.
- The clearance between scaffolds and power lines shall be as follows: Scaffolds shall not be erected, used,
dismantled, altered, or moved such that they or any conductive material handled on them might come
closer to exposed and energized power lines.
- Scaffolds and materials may be closer to power lines than specified above where such clearance is
necessary for performance of work, and only after the utility company, or electrical system operator, has
been notified of the need to work closer and the utility company, or electrical system operator, has
deenergized the lines, relocated the lines, or installed protective coverings to prevent accidental contact
with the lines.
- Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only under the supervision and direction of a
competent person qualified in scaffold erection, moving, dismantling or alteration. Such activities shall be
performed only by experienced and trained employees selected for such work by the competent person.
- Employees shall be prohibited from working on scaffolds covered with snow, ice, or other slippery
material except as necessary for removal of such materials.
- Where swinging loads are being hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that the loads might contact the
scaffold, tag lines or equivalent measures to control the loads shall be used.
- Suspension ropes supporting adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be of a diameter large enough to
provide sufficient surface area for the functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms.
- - Suspension ropes shall be shielded from heat-producing processes. When acids or other corrosive
substances are used on a scaffold, the ropes shall be shielded, treated to protect against the corrosive
substances, or shall be of a material that will not be damaged by the substance being used.

Page 858
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during storms or high winds unless a competent person has
determined that it is safe for employees to be on the scaffold and those employees are protected by a
personal fall arrest system or wind screens. Wind screens shall not be used unless the scaffold is secured
against the anticipated wind forces imposed.
- Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms.
- Makeshift devices, such as but not limited to boxes and barrels, shall not be used on top of scaffold
platforms to increase the working level height of employees.
- Ladders shall not be used on scaffolds to increase the working level height of employees, except on large
area scaffolds where employers have satisfied the following criteria:
o When the ladder is placed against a structure which is not a part of the scaffold, the scaffold shall
be secured against the sideways thrust exerted by the ladder;
o The platform units shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent their movement;
o The ladder legs shall be on the same platform or other means shall be provided to stabilize the
ladder against unequal platform deflection, and
o The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent them from slipping or being pushed off the platform.
- Platforms shall not deflect more than 1/60 of the span when loaded.
- To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the suspension wire rope when performing
welding from suspended scaffolds, the following precautions shall be taken, as applicable:
o An insulated thimble shall be used to attach each suspension wire rope to its hanging support
(such as cornice hook or outrigger). Excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent
lines from grounding shall be insulated;
o The suspension wire rope shall be covered with insulating material extending at least 4 feet (1.2
m) above the hoist. If there is a tail line below the hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent contact
with the platform. The portion of the tail line that hangs free below the scaffold shall be guided or
retained, or both, so that it does not become grounded;
o Each hoist shall be covered with insulated protective covers;
o In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding process, a grounding conductor
shall be connected from the scaffold to the structure. The size of this conductor shall be at least
the size of the welding process work lead, and this conductor shall not be in series with the
welding process or the work piece;
o If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected at any time, the welding machine shall be shut off;
and
o An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead shall not be allowed to contact the scaffold or
its suspension system.
Prohibited Practices
The following practices will never be tolerated in this company:

Page 859
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers will never be intermixed unless the
components fit together without force and the scaffold's structural integrity is maintained.
- Unstable objects will never be used to support scaffolds or platform units. Footings must be level, sound,
rigid, and capable of supporting the loaded scaffold without settling or displacement.
- Cross braces will never be used as a means of access.
- The use of shore or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
Aerial Lifts
Anytime aerial lifts, including: (1) extensible boom platforms, (2) aerial ladders, (3) articulating boom platforms,
(4) vertical towers, or (5) a combination of any such devices, are used to elevate employees to job-sites above
ground, the following safety rules will apply:
- No aerial lift this company owns or uses will be 'field modified' for uses other than those intended by the
manufacturer unless:
o the manufacturer certifies the modification in writing, or
o any other equivalent entity, such as a nationally recognized testing lab, certifies the aerial lift
modification conforms to all applicable provisions of ANSI A92.2-1969, and the OSHA rules. The
lift must be at least as safe as the equipment was before modification.
Ladder Trucks and Tower Trucks
Aerial ladders must be secured in the lower traveling position by the locking device on top of the truck cab, and
the manually operated device at the base of the ladder before the truck is moved for highway travel.
Extensible & Articulating Boom Platforms
- We will test lift controls each day prior to use to determine they are in safe working condition.
- Only authorized employees can operate an aerial lift.
- When personnel fall protection must be worn and a lanyard attached to the tie point located on the
basket when working from an aerial lift.
[* No aerial lift this company owns or uses will be "field modified" for uses other than those intended by the
manufacturer unless: (1) the manufacturer certifies the modification in writing, or (2) any other equivalent entity,
such as a nationally recognized testing lab, certifies the aerial lift modification conforms to all applicable
provisions of ANSI A92.2-1969, and the OSHA rules. The lift must be at least as safe as the equipment was before
modification. ]

Page 860
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
Duties of Competent & Qualified Persons
When working with scaffolds in this company there are some tasks that must be done by our competent or a
qualified person. By definition they are:
Competent person-One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings
or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has
authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Qualified person-One who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or

who by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to
solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
The following tasks will only be done by the person we have deemed competent or qualified to perform them:
Competent Person(s):
We will not inter-mix scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers unless the
components fit together without force and the scaffold's structural integrity is maintained. Scaffold
components manufactured by different manufacturers will not be modified in order to inter-mix them
unless our competent person determines the resulting scaffold is structurally sound.
Before a suspension scaffold is used, direct connections must be evaluated by our competent person who
will confirm, based on the evaluation, that the supporting surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to
be imposed.
Prior to each work shift and after every occurrence that could affect a rope's integrity, suspension scaffold
ropes will be inspected by our competent person. Ropes will be replaced if any of the conditions outlined
in the OSHA regulations exist.
Scaffolds will be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only under the supervision and direction of a
competent person.
Qualified Person(s)
Scaffolds must be designed by a qualified person and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with
that design.
Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes of suspension scaffolds will not be used
unless they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person.

Page 861
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
We will have each employee who performs work while on a scaffold trained by a person qualified in the
subject matter to recognize the hazards associated with the type of scaffold being used and to understand
the procedures to control or minimize those hazards.
NOTE: Only qualified and competent personnel are allowed to modify scaffolding systems. If
modifications are attempted by non-qualified personnel they will be subject to disciplinary action up to and
including termination of employment.
Inspections
A competent person will conduct all inspections of scaffolding.
Training
Recognizing the need for training for employees who: (1) perform work while on scaffolds, (2) are involved in
erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or inspecting scaffolds, and (3) have lost the
requisite proficiency, training is one of the highest priority of this program.
Employees Who Use Scaffolds
Our employees who perform work on scaffolds will be trained by a qualified person to recognize the hazards
associated with the type of scaffold being used and to understand the procedures to control or minimize those
hazards. The training will include the following areas as applicable:
- The nature of and the correct procedures for dealing with electrical hazards.
- The nature of and the correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection
and falling object protection systems used.
- The proper use of the scaffold, and the proper handling of materials on the scaffold.
- The maximum intended load and the load-carrying capacities of the scaffolds used.
- Tagging out of scaffolds.
- Any other pertinent requirements of the OSHA rules.
Employees Who Erect, Disassemble, Move, Operate, Repair, Maintain, or Inspect Scaffolds
Our employees who erect, disassemble, move, operate, repair, maintain, or inspect scaffolds will be trained by
our competent person to recognize the hazards associated with the work being done. The training will include the
following topics as applicable:
- The nature of scaffold hazards.

Page 862
ABG
SCAFFOLDING SAFETY
- The correct procedures for erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, inspecting, and
maintaining the type of scaffold in question.
- The design criteria, maximum intended load-carrying capacity, and intended use of the scaffold.
- Tagging out of scaffolds.
- Any other pertinent requirements of this subpart.
Employees Who Need Retraining
When we have reason to believe that one of our employees lacks the skill or understanding needed for safe work
involving the erection, use or dismantling of scaffolds, we will retrain the employee so that the requisite
proficiency is regained. Retraining will be done in at least the following situations:
- Where changes at the worksite present a hazard about which the employee has not been previously
trained.
- Where changes in the types of scaffolds, fall protection, falling object protection, or other equipment
present a hazard about which an employee has not been previously trained.
- Where inadequacies in an affected employee's work involving scaffolds indicate that the employee has
not retained the requisite proficiency.
Example of tags used to tagout scaffolding equipment.

DANGER. EQUIPMENT TAGGED OUT. MY LIFE IS ON THE LINE.

Page 863
ABG
SCAFFOLDING CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................827
SCOPE828
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................828
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................828
1.1 Design......................................................................................................................................................828
1.2 Competent Person...................................................................................................................................828
1.3 Inclement Weather..................................................................................................................................829
2.0 SCAFFOLD ERECTION...................................................................................................................................829
2.1 Falling Object Protections........................................................................................................................833
3.0 SCAFFOLD INSPECTION................................................................................................................................833
4.0 SCAFFOLD USE.............................................................................................................................................834
5.0 TRAINING.....................................................................................................................................................835
5.1 Erectors...................................................................................................................................................835
5.2 Users........................................................................................................................................................835
5.3 Inspectors................................................................................................................................................836
6.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC TYPES OF SCAFFOLDS..................................................................................836
6.1 Suspension Scaffolds...............................................................................................................................836
6.2 Other Types of Scaffolds..........................................................................................................................838
7.0 GIN WHEELS/SAFETY PULLEYS.....................................................................................................................839
7.1 General....................................................................................................................................................839
7.2 Setting Up................................................................................................................................................840
7.3 Using the Rope and Wheel......................................................................................................................840
7.4 Safety Pulley............................................................................................................................................841
8.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................842
9.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................842

Page 864
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice establishes the requirements for design, erection, inspection, and use of scaffolds including training
requirements.
SCOPE
 Scaffold Inspection
 Scaffold Erection
 Scaffold Use
 Training
 Requirements for Specific Types of Scaffolds
 Gin Wheels/Safety Pulleys
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Guardrail - A barrier secured to uprights and erected along the exposed sides and ends of platforms to prevent
falls.
Qualified Person - One who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who
by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve or resolve
problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Scaffold - A temporary elevated platform (supported or suspended) and its supporting structure (including points
of anchorage) used for supporting employees, materials, or both.
1.1 Design
Qualified Persons will plan, design, or modify scaffold systems. Special job needs (configuration, location of
access, material handling) will be communicated to the Qualified Person preparing design specifications for a
scaffold system.
A registered professional engineer, designated as a Qualified Person, will design tube and coupler and tubular-
welded frame scaffolds over 125 feet (38.1 meters) in height, pole scaffolds over 60 feet (18.3 meters) in height,
and all outrigger beam scaffolds and their components.
1.2 Competent Person

Page 865
ABG
Competent Persons are designated to:

 Direct scaffold selection and erection/dismantling
 Inspect Scaffolds
 Train scaffold erectors, inspectors, and maintenance/repair persons
 Resolve issues
Designation of Competent and Qualified Persons must be documented in accordance with

Practice 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements.
1.3 Inclement Weather
The Project/Site Manager will determine if it is safe to work on or from scaffolds during storms or high winds. If
authorization is given to perform such work, additional safety precautions must be used, including a personal fall
arrest system (PFAS) or previously installed windscreens.
2.0 SCAFFOLD ERECTION
Scaffolds will be constructed, modified, and altered only with knowledge of the maximum intended load and in
accordance with the design criteria and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Refer to Form 000.653.F0308,
Scaffold Checklist – Erection for scaffold erection criteria.
Scaffolds will be constructed so that the structure and its components are capable of supporting, without failure,
their own weight and at least 4 times the maximum intended load.
Example: 4 employees @ 300 lb each = 1,200 lb + 100 lb of tools = 1,300 lb x 4 =
5,200 lb maximum intended load.
Scaffold components and materials must be inspected before use, ensuring that wood scaffold planks (when used)
are scaffold-grade lumber or the equivalent, as recognized by approved grading rules for the species of wood
used.
The following table may be used as information for minimum and maximum permissible spans for 2 inches by
10 inches (5.1 centimeters by 25.4 centimeters) or wider wood planks:
Table 1 – Material
Rated Load Capacity (Intended Load)
Light Duty (25 p.s.f) / Medium Duty (50 p.s.f.) / Heavy Duty (75 p.s.f)
Full Thickness Nominal Thickness
Undressed Lumber Lumber1
Working load,
1.2 (25) 2.4 (50) 3.6 (75) 1.2 (25) 2.4 (50)
kPa (p.s.f.)
Permissible span, m (ft) 3.1 (10) 2.4 (8) 1.8 (6) 2.4 (8) 1.8 (6)
1
Nominal thickness lumber not recommended for heavy-duty use.

Page 866
ABG
Note: Fabricated planks and platforms may be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks.
Maximum spans for such units are according to manufacturer’s recommendations
for the intended use/load.
The clearance between scaffolds and power lines will be in accordance with Practice 000.653.3209, Working Near
Overhead Power Lines; that is, no part of any scaffold can be closer than the “working distance” in Practice
000.653.3209.
When scaffold platforms are more than 2 feet (0.6 meter) above or below a point of access, portable ladders,
hook-on ladders, attachable ladders, stair towers, ramps, walkways, integral prefabricated scaffold access, or
direct access from another scaffold, structure, personnel hoist, or similar surface must be used.
Gates, or other methods approved by the manufacturer or Competent Person, will be used to provide a safe
transition from the access point to the scaffold platform and to maintain the integrity of the scaffold’s guardrail
system.
The scaffold must be plumb and level; supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights will bear on base
plates and mud sills or base plates and other adequate foundation such as concrete slab flooring.
Where leveling of a scaffold is necessary, screw jacks or other equivalent stable means will be used.
When erecting or dismantling scaffolds, safety harnesses and lanyards must be used at the 6-foot (1.8-meter)
working level whenever feasible, if performing work at a stationary location for a period of time, and where
components will be used for tie-off are deemed strong and stable enough to allow their use.
Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers or composed of dissimilar materials will not be
inter-mixed or modified without approval from the Competent Person.
Scaffolds must be placed as close to the work as possible. If fall protection is provided by the structure on which
the work is being performed (such as a building or wall), no more than 14 inches (35.6 centimeters) will be
allowed between the scaffold platform and the structure.
Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds will be fully planked or decked between the front uprights and the
guardrail supports.
Each platform unit will be installed so that the space between adjacent units and the space between the platform
and the uprights is no more than 1 inch wide (2.5 centimeters) except where it can be demonstrated that a wider
space is necessary.
Each platform must be secured. The platform ends must be extended 6 inches to 12 inches (15.2 centimeters to
30.5 centimeters) past the centerline of their supports unless restrained by hooks, cleats, or other means.
Each scaffold walkway must be at least 18 inches wide (45.7 centimeters).
At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes direction, any platform that rests on a bearer at an angle
other than a right angle will be laid first, and platforms that rest at right angles over the same bearer will be laid
second.
Where a scaffold’s height exceeds 4 times its smallest base dimension, guy, tie, or otherwise brace the scaffold at
the closest horizontal member to the 4:1 height. Repeat every 26 feet (7.9 meters) vertically (20 feet [6.1 meters]
for those scaffolds less than or equal to 3 feet [0.9 meter] in width) and 30 feet (9.1 meters) horizontally.

Page 867
ABG
Protection will be installed (such as toeboards, netting, or fencing) where employees located on or below a
scaffold are exposed to the possibility of objects falling from overhead.
Access:
 Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders are positioned so as not to tip the scaffold.
 Hook-on and attachable ladders are positioned so that their bottom rung is not more
than 24 inches (61 centimeters) above the scaffold supporting level.
 When hook-on and attachable ladders are used on a supported scaffold more than
35 feet (10.7 meters) high, they have rest platforms at 35 feet (10.7 meters)
maximum vertical intervals.
 Hook-on and attachable ladders are specifically designed for use with the type of
scaffold used.
 Hook-on and attachable ladders have a minimum rung length of 11-1/2 inches
(29.2 centimeters).
 Hook-on and attachable ladders have uniformly spaced rungs with a maximum
spacing between rungs of 16-3/4 inches (42.6 centimeters).
Stairway-type ladders:
 Are positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches
(61 centimeters) above the scaffold supporting level.
 Are provided with rest platforms at 12-foot (3.7-meter) maximum vertical intervals.
 Have a minimum step width of 16 inches (40.6 centimeters) except that mobile
scaffolds stairway-type ladders have a minimum step width of 11-1/2 inches
(29.2 centimeters).
 Have slip-resistant treads on steps and landings.
 Stair towers are positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches
(61 centimeters) above the scaffold supporting level.
 A stair rail consisting of a toprail and a midrail is provided on each side of each
scaffold stairway.
 The toprail of each stair-rail system is capable of serving as a handrail, unless a
separate handrail is provided.
 Handrails and toprails that serve as handrails will provide an adequate handhold for
employees grasping them to avoid falling.
 Stair-rail systems and handrails will be surfaced to prevent injury to employees from
punctures or lacerations and to prevent snagging of clothing.
 The ends of stair-rail systems and handrails are constructed so that they do not
constitute a projection hazard.
 Handrails and toprails that are used as handrails are at least 3 inches
(7.6 centimeters) from other objects.
 Stair rails will not be less than 28 inches (71.1 centimeters) nor more than 37 inches
(94 centimeters) from the upper surface of the stair rail to the surface of the tread, in
line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

Page 868
ABG
 A landing platform at least 18 inches (45.7 centimeters) wide by at least 18 inches

(45.7 centimeters) long is provided at each level.
 Each scaffold stairway is at least 18 inches (45.7 centimeters) between stair rails.
 Treads and landing have slip-resistant surfaces.
 Stairways are installed between 40 degrees and 60 degrees from horizontal.
 Guardrails meeting requirements are provided on the open sides and ends of each
landing.
 Riser heights are uniform, within 1/4 inch (0.6 centimeters) for each flight of stairs.
 Tread depth is uniform, within 1/4 inch (0.6 centimeters for each flight of stairs.
Ramps and walkways 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more above lower levels must have guardrail systems.
 No ramp or walkway is inclined more than a slope of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical (3:1)
(20 degrees above horizontal).
 If the slope of a ramp or a walkway is steeper than 8 horizontal to 1 vertical (8:1), the
ramp or walkway will have cleats not more than 14 inches (35.6 centimeters) apart
that are securely fastened to the planks to provide footing.
Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway-type access will line up vertically with each other between rest platforms.
Direct access to or from another surface will be used only when the scaffold is not more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) horizontally and not more than 24 inches (61 centimeters) vertically from the other surface.
Access for employees erecting and dismantling supported scaffolds must be in accordance with the following:
 Provide a safe means of access for each employee erecting or dismantling a scaffold
where the provision of safe access is feasible and does not create a greater hazard.
Have a Competent Person determine whether it is feasible or would pose a greater
hazard to provide, and have employees use a safe means of access. This
determination will be based on project/site conditions and the type of scaffold being
erected or dismantled.
 Hook-on or attachable ladders are installed as soon as scaffold erection has
progressed to a point that permits safe installation and use.
 When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds, end frames with
horizontal members that are parallel, level, and not more than 22 inches
(55.9 centimeters) apart vertically, may be used as climbing devices, provided they
are erected in a manner that creates a usable ladder and provides good handhold
and foot space.
Scaffold areas will be marked or posted with warning flags or barriers where vehicular traffic is present.
A completed scaffold status tag will be attached near the access point of any scaffold being used, erected, or
dismantled, as follows:
 Red Tag (Form 000.653.F0304) – KEEP OFF/DO NOT USE – prohibits use of the
scaffold, as the unit is undergoing some stage of erection, alteration, or dismantling.

Page 869
ABG
 Yellow Tag (Form 000.653.F0305) – SPECIAL CONDITIONS/ADDITIONAL CONTROLS –

indicates special safety measures for use of the scaffold; examples include PFAS or
head protection.
 Green Tag (Form 000.653.F0306) – SCAFFOLD IS ERECTED TO CODE/APPROVED FOR
USE – indicates that the scaffold is complete, meets erection requirements, and is
safe to use for its intended purpose.
Alterations or modifications, which must be made to a Green-tagged scaffold, must be re-inspected and re-tagged
by the Competent Person who is responsible for the modification. A new tag must be placed on the scaffold or
platform.
The scaffold must be dismantled shortly after being notified that the work requiring the scaffold is complete.
2.1 Falling Object Protections
In addition to wearing hard hats, each employee on a scaffold will be provided with additional protection from
falling hand tools, debris, and other small objects through the installation of toeboards, screens, or guardrail
systems, or through the erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or canopy structures that contain or deflect the
falling objects.
Where there is danger of tools, material, or equipment falling from a scaffold and striking employees below, the
following provisions apply:
 The area below the scaffold where objects can fall will be barricaded, and employees
will not be permitted to enter the hazard area.
 A toeboard will be erected along the edge of the platforms more than 6 feet
(1.8 meters) above lower levels for a distance sufficient to protect employees below.
 Where tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height higher than the top edge
of the toeboard, paneling, or screening extending from the toeboard or platform to
the top of the guardrail will be erected for a distance sufficient to protect employees
below.
 A guardrail system with openings small enough to prevent passage of potential
falling objects will be erected over the employees below.
Canopies, when used for falling object protection, will comply with the following criteria:
 Canopies will be installed between the falling object hazard and the employees.
 When canopies are used on suspension scaffolds for falling object protection, the
scaffold will be equipped with additional independent support lines equal in number
to the number of points supported and equivalent in strength to the strength of the
suspension ropes.
 Independent support lines and suspension ropes will not be attached to the same
points of anchorage.
Where used, toeboards will be:

Page 870
ABG
 Capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds

(22.7 kilograms) applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along
the toeboard.
 At least 3-1/2 inches (8.9 centimeters) high from the top edge of the toeboard to the
level of the walking/working surface. Toeboards will be securely fastened in place at
the outermost edge of the platform and have no more than 1/4-inch
(0.6 centimeters) clearance above the walking/working surface. Toeboards will be
solid or with openings not over 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) in the greatest dimension.
3.0 SCAFFOLD INSPECTION
The Competent Person will inspect scaffolds (and their components, including gin wheels/safety pulleys) to be
used before the start of each work shift, and after any event that could affect the structural integrity of the
equipment. Results of inspections must be documented on Form 000.653.F0303, Scaffold Inspection Tag (or
equal); the tag will remain affixed to the scaffold.
4.0 SCAFFOLD USE
Users will conduct the following activities.

Note: Refer to Attachment 01, Scaffold Checklist – User, for scaffold use criteria.
Scaffolds must be used only for their intended purpose.

Ladders, unstable objects, or makeshift devices will not be used to increase the working height of scaffolds.
Exception: Ladders may be used on large area scaffolds when certain criteria are met
and only with written approval from the Competent Person.
Employees will not straddle, stand on, or work outside guardrails.

Mobile scaffolds will be used on firm, level surfaces. Lock the casters or wheels before using. To move, apply
force as close to the base as practical, but not more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) above the supporting surface.
Employees will not “ride” on a scaffold while it is being moved; remove or secure tools/materials on the platform.
Only approved access means will be used to ascend and descend scaffolds (stairs, attached ladder, or specially
designed end frame); do not use cross bracing or side rails.
Note: Scaffold framing may be used for access only if its horizontal members have been
specifically designed and constructed for such use.
Only tools and materials necessary to perform the task will be kept on the scaffold platform. Slipping or tripping
hazards will be controlled by removing or securing the tools/materials.
Scaffolds and scaffold components will not be loaded in excess of their maximum intended loads or rated
capacities, whichever is less.
Fall arrest (PFAS) must be used wherever feasible when working 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more above a lower level;
this requirement is in addition to the requirement for guardrails.
Page 871
ABG
Work can be conducted only from scaffolds having a completed yellow or green scaffold status tag and a current
scaffold inspection tag affixed. Special conditions/additional controls noted on the tag(s) must be complied with.
A scaffold system/component or scaffold status tag must not be modified or removed. Notify supervision
immediately if a scaffold is damaged, weakened, or otherwise deficient.
Employees will not position themselves or use tools/equipment where there is a possibility of contact with
energized overhead electrical lines. When scheduled to work within 20 feet (6.1 meters) of the centerline of the
nearest conductor, contact the electric utilities organization having jurisdiction 48 hours in advance. They will
specify requirements and clearance distances for the work activity.
Debris must not be allowed to accumulate on platforms.
Makeshift work platforms such as, but not limited to, boxes and barrels, will not be used on top of scaffold
platforms to increase the work height level of employees.
Ladders must not be used on scaffolds to increase the working level height of employees, except on large area
scaffolds where employees have satisfied the following criteria:
 When the ladder is placed against a structure that is not part of the scaffold, the
scaffold is secured against the sideways thrust exerted by the ladder.
 The platform units are secured to the scaffold to prevent their movement.
 The ladder legs are be on the same platform, or other means will be provided to
stabilize the ladder against unequal platform deflection.
 The ladder legs are secured to prevent them from slipping or being pushed off the
platform.
The platform will not deflect more than 1/60 of the span when loaded.
Any part of a scaffold damaged or weakened so that its strength is less than that required by this practice must be
immediately repaired or replaced, braced to meet those provisions, or removed from service until repaired.
5.0 TRAINING
A Competent Person will provide training on erection, maintenance, inspection, use, and dismantling of scaffolds
as outlined below. Training must be documented.
5.1 Erectors
Scaffold erectors and maintenance/repair persons will be trained specifically in the following areas, as applicable:
 Nature of potential scaffold hazards (such as falls, falling objects)
 Procedure for erecting, maintaining, inspecting, and dismantling scaffolds; associated
fall hazards, and falling object protection systems
 Design criteria and load-carrying capacities
 Other pertinent requirements

Page 872
ABG
5.2 Users
Scaffold users will be trained in hazard recognition and control measures associated with the type of scaffold
being used, including the following:
 The nature of electrical, fall, and falling object hazards and the correct procedures
for dealing with these hazards
 Proper use of scaffold and material handling on scaffolds
 Pre-use inspection criteria
 Use of fall protection and fall protection systems (erecting, maintaining, and
disassembling)
 Maximum intended load and load-carrying capacities
Employees who erect, dismantle, or use scaffolds will be retrained when necessary to ensure their proficiency or
provide updated information on hazards or changes.
5.3 Inspectors
Scaffold inspectors will be trained in the following areas, as applicable:

 Nature of potential scaffold hazards (such as falls, falling objects)
 Procedure for erecting, maintaining, inspecting, and dismantling scaffolds; associated
fall hazards; and falling object protection systems
 Design criteria and load-carrying capacities
6.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC TYPES OF SCAFFOLDS
6.1 Suspension Scaffolds
Each suspension rope, including hardware used on nonadjustable suspension scaffolds, must be capable of
supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load.
All suspension scaffold support devices, such as outrigger beams, cornice hooks, parapet clamps, and similar
devices, will rest on surfaces capable of supporting at least 4 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold
operating at the rated load of the hoist.
Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, will be made of structural metal or equivalent strength
materials and will be restrained to prevent movement.
The stall load of scaffold hoists will not exceed 3 times its rated load.
Inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams will be stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the
floor or roof deck; or they will have their inboard ends stabilized by counterweights, except for masons' multi-
point, adjustable, suspension scaffold outrigger beams, which will be stabilized by counterweights.
Suspension scaffold outrigger beams will be:

Page 873
ABG
 Provided with stop bolts or shackle at both ends.

 Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when channel iron beams are
used in place of I-beams.
 Installed with all bearing support perpendicular to the centerline.
 Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position.
 When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the rope is
attached to the outrigger beam will be placed directly over the centerline of the
stirrup.
Suspension scaffolds support devices such as cornice hooks, roof hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or similar
devices will be:
 Made of steel, wrought iron, or material of equivalent strength.
 Supported by bearing blocks.
 Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles to the face of the
building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks will be installed and secured to a
structurally sound point of anchorage on the building or structure.
 Tiebacks will be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.
 When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they will contain no
less than 4 wraps of the suspension rope at the lowest point of scaffold travel.
 The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited.
 Wire suspension ropes will not be joined together except through the use of eye
splice thimbles connected with shackles or coverplates and bolts.
 The load end of wire suspension ropes will be equipped with proper size thimbles
and secured by eye splicing or equivalent means.
 Ropes will be inspected for defects by a Competent Person before each work shift
and after every occurrence, which could affect a rope’s integrity.
 Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes will not be used unless
they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or Qualified Person.
When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffold:

 There will be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with the clips a minimum of
6 rope diameters apart.
 When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt will be placed over the dead end of the rope;
and the saddle will be placed over the live end of the rope.
 Manufacturer’s recommendation will be consulted before torqueing bolts.
Suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manual hoists will be tested and listed by a qualified testing
laboratory.
Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists will not be used on suspension scaffolds.
Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension scaffolds will be enclosed.

Page 874
ABG
In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manually operated
hoists will have a braking device or locking pawl that engages automatically when a hoist makes either of the
following uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change in momentum or an accelerated over speed.
Manually operated hoists will require a positive crank force to descend.
Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds will be tied or otherwise secured to prevent them from swaying,
as determined to be necessary based on an evaluation by a Competent Person.
Suspension ropes supporting adjustable suspension scaffolds will be of a diameter large enough to provide
sufficient surface area for the functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms.
Suspension ropes will be shielded from heat-producing processes. When acids or other corrosive substances are
used on a scaffold, the ropes will be shielded, treated to protect against the corrosive substances, or be of a
material that will not be damaged by the substance being used.
To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the suspension wire ropes when performing welding
from suspension scaffolds, the following precautions will be taken, as applicable:
 An insulated thimble is used to attach each suspension wire rope to its hanging
support. Excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent lines are
insulated.
 The suspension wire rope is covered with insulating material extending at least 4 feet
(1.2 meters) above the hoist.
 East hoist line will be covered with insulated protective covers.
 In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding process, a grounding
conductor will be connected from the scaffold to the structure.
 If the scaffold grounding lead will be disconnected at any time, the welding operation
is discontinued.
 An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead must not be allowed to contact
the scaffold or its suspension system.
Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and rescue will not be used as working platforms.
6.2 Other Types of Scaffolds
Types of scaffolds that may be used on a project/site, but not specifically addressed by this practice include:
 Pole scaffolds
 Tube and coupler scaffolds
 Fabricated frame scaffolds
 Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds
 Bricklayers' square scaffolds
 Horse scaffolds
 Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds
 Roof bracket scaffolds
 Outrigger scaffolds
 Pump jack scaffolds

Page 875
ABG
 Ladder jack scaffolds

 Window jack scaffolds
 Crawling boards (chicken ladders)
 Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds
 Single-point adjustable suspension
 Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds (swing stages)
 Catenary scaffolds
 Float (ship) scaffolds
 Interior hung scaffolds
 Needle beam scaffolds
 Multi-level suspended scaffolds
 Mobile scaffolds
 Repair bracket scaffolds
 Stilts
 Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, stone setters' multi-point adjustable
suspension scaffolds, and masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold
OSHA/State-Plan or applicable in-country requirements documents must be reviewed
before scaffold erection, and erections plans must be made specific to each set of
requirements for each type of scaffold.
7.0 GIN WHEELS/SAFETY PULLEYS
The following are typical instructions/requirements — but always install and operate according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
7.1 General
 Use this type of equipment only on structures that are able to bear its weight and its
load.
 Only use a gin wheel and rope if you have been properly trained to do so.
 Only persons trained in scaffold erection will install/erect a gin wheel/safety pulley.
Note: A gin wheel/safety pulley must be inspected daily/each shift before use. If
the wheel/pulley is part of a scaffold, the inspection must be performed by a
Competent Person.
 Never leave the equipment loaded or unattended.

 Make sure the landing area is unobstructed and able to accept the load in size and
weight.
 Never exceed the equipment’s safe working load.
 Check the condition of the equipment before use. If it shows signs of damage or
excessive wear, tag it out using a Danger – Don’t Use It – Unsafe Tag
(Form 000.653.F0301).
 The wheel must:

Page 876
ABG
 Have an identification number.

 Have safe working load (SWL) (for example, 110 pounds [50 kilograms]) marked
on the wheel.
 Run freely and true, with no visible signs of corrosion, excessive wear,
deformity, or contamination from oil, paints, concrete, etc.
 Have edges that are free from any sharp edges that could damage the rope.
 Not be crimped, which will prevent the rope from running smoothly.
 Have 2 split pins in place, unbroken, and not corroded (bent over nails is not an
acceptable alternative).
 Have a center pin that does not show any signs of excessive wear.
 The supporting ring/hook must not be cracked, damaged, or deformed.
 The rope must:
 Have a means of identification (ID tag with SWL).
 Be in sound condition and not cut, frayed, worn, or damaged.
 Not be kinked or contaminated by oil, paints, etc.
 Be firm and consistent along the rope length.
 Have ends that are properly spliced.
 Keep the equipment clean.
 Never push the equipment beyond its design limits. If it will not do what you want
with reasonable ease and speed, assume you have the wrong tool for the job.
 When not in use, store the equipment somewhere clean, dry, and safe.
7.2 Setting Up
 Double check that the equipment has a sufficient SWL for the item being lifted.
 Make sure that you only use a suitable rope of either 0.71 or 0.79 inches (18 or
20 millimeters), which is also long enough for the required drop.
 Check and confirm that the suspension/anchorage point is tested and certified to the
equivalent (or preferably greater) SWL of the wheel/pulley — allow a 10 percent
safety margin to accommodate dynamic forces that may arise during the course of a
lift.
 Carefully select a safe area where coworkers and members of the public are not a
risk and barrier off a working zone on the ground/floor below the wheel.
 Fix a gin wheel horizontal supporting tube with double couplers to 2 standards.
 Use a sleeve coupler where a joint occurs on the inside standard between the
supporting tube and the working platform.
 Suspend a gin wheel from its supporting tube no more than 2 feet (0.6 meters) from
the scaffold.
 Ensure a load-bearing fitting is used on each side of the gin wheel on the horizontal
support tube.
 Remove any obstructions (such as transoms) from the rope’s route of travel.
 If using a gin wheel:

Page 877
ABG
 Use either a suitable shackle or slide the loop on the wheel’s bracket over a
scaffold pole and retain in place using a scaffold clip on either side.
 Once secured, feed the rope over the wheel and continue until the rope reaches
the ground or the areas where the load is to be lifted from or lowered to.
7.3 Using the Rope and Wheel
 Ensure that the load is balanced, stable, and that personnel stand clear of the raised
load.
 Make sure that anyone in the immediate work area is warned of what you are doing.
 Do not shock-load this equipment.
 Determine the load’s weight and center of gravity as accurately as possible.
 Never stand directly under the load; keep others clear and concentrate at all times.
 In addition to standard PPE, gloves appropriate for this work must be worn.
 When lowering materials over the side, the top man must ensure that the person
below is holding the rope securely and is ready to receive the load.
 If the item to be raised has a dedicated lifting eye, ensure that it is in good condition
before you attach the hook.
 If the item has no lifting eye, suitable slings/chains must be used.
 Make sure the load is properly secured; use the rolling hitch knot for tubes and the
timber hitch knot for boards.
 Before lifting, ensure the load is free and not restrained by fixings, etc.
 Lift the load a nominal distance to check balance and security of the load.
 Use tag lines to control long or bulky loads.
 Assess the weight and shape of the system components before deciding on the
number of items to be attached at anyone time.
 When raising/lowering more than 1 tube or board, use and additional half-hitch knot
to improve the grip on the load. The maximum amount of material to be lifted or
lowered:
 1-1/2 inches (2 x 38 millimeters) thick boards of any length
 1 galvanized tube up to 21 feet (6.4 meters)
 2 galvanized tubes up to 10 feet (3.1 meters)
 3 galvanized tubes up to 8 feet (2.4 meters)
 Only lifting bags or baskets of sufficient size, strength, etc., are to be used for raising
fittings.
 Once raised, lower as soon as possible. Do not leave the load suspended or
unattended for any reason.
 Gently lower the load and then remove it from the rope.
 Remove the rope from the wheel/pulley and remove from its mounting position.
7.4 Safety Pulley

Page 878
ABG
The following are typical instructions/requirements — but always install and operate according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations:
 An auto-braking unit is supplied with its own mounting tube that should be attached
to the scaffold using standard scaffold clips.
 Before attaching the tube, ensure that the end fitted with a stop collar and spring pin
are outermost.
 Feed the rope through the unit — start by feeding the rope between the rear spacer
and roller.
 Next feed the rope between the main roller and the brake; if you find that the brake
gets in the way, press down on the brake rocker to hold it clear.
 Finally, feed the rope so that it is between the main roller and counterweight.
 Raise the unit and slide its rotating sleeve onto the mounting tube, ensuring it is
pushed beyond the spring pin.
 You can now pull enough rope through the pulley to allow the rope to reach the
ground or the area where the load is to be lifted from or lowered to.
 The safety pulley has a braking system that will grip the rope if you loose control. It
will only work if the counterweight is set correctly and the SWL is not exceeded.
 The last adjustment to make is to the balancing counterweight. This should be set in
position according to the length of drop of the load side of the rope.
 To adjust its position, insert the pin spanner into the end of the counterweight.
 Loosen the counterweight by about 8 turns (counterclockwise) move the
counterweight to the required position and relock.
8.0 REFERENCES

Forms:
000.653.F0303 Scaffold Inspection Tag
000.653.F0304 Scaffold Status Tag (Red) – Keep Off
000.653.F0305 Scaffold Status Tag (Yellow) – Special Conditions
000.653.F0306 Scaffold Status Tag (Green) – Erected to Code
000.653.F0308 Scaffold Checklist – Erection

Page 879
ABG
9.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Scaffold Checklist – User
Attachment 02 Gin Wheel Erection Checklist – User

Page 880
ABG
STEEL ERECTION FOR CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................... 843
Controlling Contractor..............................................................................................................................................844
Overhead Hoisting Operations..................................................................................................................................845
Site-Specific Erection Plan--Setting Steel Joists.........................................................................................................845
Site-Specific Erection Plan--Placing Decking Bundles................................................................................................845
Hoisting and Rigging.................................................................................................................................................845
Pre-Shift Visual Inspection of Cranes........................................................................................................................845

Page 881
ABG
Purpose
ABG must meet the requirements of OSHA's Steel Erection standard. This Steel Erection Plan for Construction is
our company's policy to protect our employees from the hazards associated with steel erection activities. Those
activities could include:
Hoisting, laying out, placing, connecting, welding, burning, guying, bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging
structural steel, steel joists, and metal buildings;
Installing metal decking, curtain walls, window walls, siding systems, miscellaneous metals, ornamental iron, and
similar materials; and
Moving point-to-point while performing these activities
The Site Supervisor is responsible for developing and maintaining the written Steel Erection Plan for Construction.
This written safety plan is kept in the Site Safety Manager office and each worksite trailer
Controlling Contractor
Each steel erection jobsite must have a controlling contractor. ABG is the controlling contractor for this jobsite.
Before starting steel erection we ensure that:
- The concrete in the footings, piers, and walls and the mortar in the masonry piers and walls have attained,
on the basis of an appropriate American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard test method of
field-cured samples, either 75 percent of the intended minimum compressive design strength or sufficient
strength to support the loads imposed during steel erection.
- Any repairs, replacements, and modifications to the anchor bolts were conducted in accordance with the
OSHA regulations.
- There are adequate access roads into and through the site for the safe delivery and movement of derricks,
cranes, trucks, other necessary equipment, and the material to be erected and means and methods for
pedestrian and vehicular control. This requirement does not apply to roads outside of the construction
site.
- There is a firm, properly graded, drained area, readily accessible to the work with adequate space for the
safe storage of materials and the safe operation of the erector's equipment.
- Other construction processes going on below steel erection activities must be barred unless overhead
protection for the employees below is provided.
If the controlling contractor leaves fall protection equipment for other trades to use, we must:

Page 882
ABG
- Direct the steel erector to leave the protection in place, and

- Inspect and accept control and responsibility of the fall protection prior to authorizing persons other than
steel erectors to work in the area.
Overhead Hoisting Operations
ABG is concerned for the safety of employees that must work under loads. Prior to the movement of suspended
loads, we will pre-plan routes to ensure that no employee is required to work directly below the load except:
- Employees initially connecting steel, or

- Employees necessary for the hooking or unhooking of a load.
When an employee must work under a suspended load, the following rules will apply:
- Materials being hoisted must be rigged to prevent unintentional displacement;

- Hooks with self-closing safety latches or their equivalent must be used to prevent components from
slipping out of the hook; and
- All loads must be rigged by a qualified rigger.
Site-Specific Erection Plan--Setting Steel Joists
ABG has written a site-specific erection plan explaining our alternative method to provide protection for our
employees when setting steel joists in accordance with OSHA regulations.
Site-Specific Erection Plan--Placing Decking Bundles
ABG has written a site-specific erection plan explaining our alternative method to provide protection for our
employees when placing decking bundles in accordance with OSHA regulations.
Hoisting and Rigging
When ABG is involved in hoisting and rigging operations, we follow the requirements of OSHA's steel erection
regulation and the general requirements for cranes in applicable OSHA regulations.
All hoisting of employees using a personnel platform with be conducted in accordance with applicable OSHA
regulations.

Page 883
ABG
Pre-Shift Visual Inspection of Cranes
Prior to every shift, our competent person visually inspects each crane that will be used for steel erection
operations on that shift. This pre-shift inspection includes at least the following:
- All control mechanisms for maladjustments;

- Control and drive mechanism for excessive wear of components and contamination by lubricants, water
or other foreign matter;
- Safety devices, including but not limited to boom angle indicators, boom stops, boom kick out devices,
anti-two block devices, and load moment indicators where required;
- Air, hydraulic, and other pressurized lines for deterioration or leakage, particularly those which flex in
normal operation;
- Hooks and latches for deformation, chemical damage, cracks, or wear;
- Wire rope reeving for compliance with hoisting equipment manufacturer's specifications;
- Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, or moisture accumulation;
- Hydraulic system for proper fluid level;
- Tires for proper inflation and condition;
- Ground conditions around the hoisting equipment for proper support, including ground settling under and
around outriggers, ground water accumulation, or similar conditions;
- The hoisting equipment for level position; and
- The hoisting equipment for level position after each move and setup.
If a deficiency is discovered on a pre-shift crane visual inspection, our company's procedure for handling the
deficiency is:
- An immediate determination will be made by the competent person as to whether the deficiency
constitutes a hazard.
If the deficiency is determined to constitute a hazard, the hoisting equipment will be removed from service until
the deficiency has been corrected.

Page 884
ABG
SUBCONTRACTOR MANAGEMENT PLAN
STOP WORK AUTHORITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................847
SCOPE848
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................848
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................848
POLICY AND PROGRAM OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................848
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES................................................................................................................................848
INTERVENTION PROTOCOL.....................................................................................................................................849
Protocol Instruction................................................................................................................................................849
Steps ..............................................................................................................................................................849
REPORTING.............................................................................................................................................................850
FOLLOW-UP............................................................................................................................................................850
RECOGNITION.........................................................................................................................................................850
TRAINING................................................................................................................................................................851
Front of card.......................................................................................................................................................851

Page 885
ABG
PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to provide an outline of site/project “stop work authority” for employees,
contractors, and visitors.
SCOPE
This procedure describes “stop work authority” program.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all ABG, contractors/subcontractors and visitors.
DEFINITIONS
None.
POLICY AND PROGRAM OVERVIEW
This program formally establishes the Stop Work Authority (SWA) of all ABG employees and contractors to stop
individual tasks or group operations when the control of HSE risk is not clearly established or understood.
It is the policy of ABG that:
 All employees and its contractors have the authority and obligation to stop any task or
operation where concerns or questions regarding the control of HSE risk exist;
 No work will resume until all stop work issues and concerns have been adequately addressed,
and
 Any form of retribution or intimidation directed at any individual or company for exercising
their authority as outlined in this program will not be tolerated.
As with any policy, accountability for non-compliance will follow established ABG disciplinary procedures.
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Persons in the following roles have responsibilities in support of this program:

 Company employees and contractors are responsible to initiate a “stop work” intervention
when warranted, support the intervention of others and properly report all “stop work”
actions.
 Forman/Supervisors are responsible to create a culture were SWA is exercised freely, honor
request for “stop work”, work to resolve issues before operations resume, recognized
proactive participation and ensure that all “stop work” actions are properly reported with
required follow-up completed.
 Site Managers must establish the clear expectation to exercise SWA, create a culture where
SWA is exercised freely, resolve SWA conflicts when they arise and hold those accountable
that choose not to comply with established SWA policies.

Page 886
ABG
 HSE in support of operations is responsible for monitoring compliance with the requirements
of this program, maintenance of associated documents, processes and training materials,
identification of trends, and sharing of lessons learned.

Page 887
ABG
INTERVENTION PROTOCOL
In general terms, the SWA process involves a stop, notify, correct and resume approach for the resolution of a
perceived unsafe work actions or conditions.
Much like behavior based safety processes, a workforce that clearly understands how to initiate, receive and
respond to a “stop work” intervention is more likely to participate. Though obvious to some, the following
protocol creates an environment where people know how to act and respond.
Though situations may differ, the following steps should be the framework for all stop work interventions.
Protocol Instruction
Steps
1. When a person identifies a perceived unsafe condition, act, error, omission, or
lack of understanding that could result in an undesirable event, a “stop work”
intervention shall be immediately initiated with the person(s) potentially at risk.
2. If the supervisor is readily available and the affected person(s) are not in
immediate risk, the “stop work action” should be coordinated through the
supervisor. If the supervisor is not readily available or the affected person(s) are
in immediate risk, the “stop work” intervention should be initiated directly with
those at risk.
3. “Stop work” interventions should be initiated in a positive manner by briefly

introducing yourself and starting a conversation with the phrase “I am using my
stop work authority because…” Using this phrase will clarify the users’ intent and
set expectations as detailed in this procedure.
4. Notify all affected personnel and supervision of the stop work issue. If necessary,
stop associated work activities, remove person(s) from the area, stabilize the
situation and make the area as safe as possible.
5. All parties shall discuss and gain agreement on the stop work issue.
6. If determined and agreed that the task or operation is OK to proceed as is (i.e.,

the stop work initiator was unaware of certain facts or procedures) the affected
persons should thank the initiator for their concern and proceed with the work.
7. If determined and agreed that the stop work issue is valid, then every attempt
should be made to resolve the issue to all affected person’s satisfaction prior to
the commencement of work.

Page 888
ABG
8. If the stop work issue cannot be resolved immediately, work shall be suspended
until proper resolution is achieved. When opinions differ regarding the validity of
the stop work issue or adequacy of the resolution actions, the Site Manager shall
make the final determination.
9. Positive feedback should be given to all affected employees regarding resolution

of the stop work issue. Under no circumstances should retribution be directed at
any person(s) who exercise in good faith their stop work authority as detailed in
this program.
10. All stop work interventions and associated detail shall be documented and
reported as detailed in this program.
REPORTING
All “stop work” interventions exercised under the authority of this program shall be documented on the ABG
Incident Investigation Report (Form 000.653.F0198).
“STOP WORK” reports shall be reviewed by line supervision in order to:
Measure participation;
Determine quality of interventions and follow-up;
Trend common issues and identify opportunities for improvement;
Facilitate sharing of learning’s;
 Feed recognition programs.
The HSE department will regularly publish incident details regarding the number of “stop work” actions reported
by location as well as details regarding common trends and learning’s.
FOLLOW-UP
It is the desired outcome of any “stop work” intervention that the identified safety concerns be addressed to the
satisfaction of all involved persons prior to resuming work. Although most issues can be adequately resolved in a
timely fashion at the job site, occasionally additional investigation and corrective actions may be required to
identify and address root causes.
“Stop Work” interventions that required additional investigation or follow-up will be handled utilizing existing
protocols and procedures for incident investigation and follow-up.
RECOGNITION
In order to build and reinforce a culture in which SWA is freely exercised and accepted, line supervisors are
encouraged to positively recognize employee and contractor participation in the program.

Page 889
ABG
Minimally, each line supervisor should informally recognize individuals when they exercise their authority to “stop
work” or demonstrate constructive participation in a “stop work” intervention. This informal recognition need be
no more than an expression of appreciation for a job well done or the awarding of a nominal item (hat, gloves,
flashlight, etc.) or recognition. Additionally, formal recognition of selected examples of “stop work” interventions
and those responsible should be made during regularly scheduled safety meeting.
TRAINING
Training regarding this SWA Policy and Program will be conducted as part of all new employee and contractor
orientations. Additionally, a review of the SWA Policy shall be completed as part of all field location safety
briefings and regularly in safety meetings.
Documentation of all training and reviews shall be maintained as per established procedures.
Stop Work Authority cards (Form 000.653.0601) can be obtained by contacting your HSE Manager.
Front of card.
DO IT SAFELY . . .
Or Not at All.
STOP WORK
STOP AUTHORITY
STOP WORK I have the authority &
AUTHORITY obligation to stop work if any
unsafe condition exists or
unsafe act occurs.
Back of card.
STOP WORK AUTHORITY
• YOU have stop work authority, and are expected to use
it whenever you see something you believe to be unsafe.
• YOU are responsible for your own safety – don’t do
anything you believe to be unsafe.
• YOU have a responsibility for your co-worker’s safety –
don’t let them do anything unsafe.
• YOU are responsible for reporting all safety incidents to
your supervisor, including injuries or accidents you are

Page 890
ABG
involved in.
• YOU are expected to report all safety concerns to your
supervisor, safety committee, or safety representative.
If necessary, elevate the concerns through any other
available avenues within the company.

Page 891
ABG
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................847
SCOPE855
APPLICATION..........................................................................................................................................................855
DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................................................................855
1.1 Prequalification.......................................................................................................................................855
1.2 Contract Language...................................................................................................................................856
1.3 HSE Program, Practices, and Procedures.................................................................................................856
1.4 Preconstruction Meeting/Tour................................................................................................................857
1.6 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Contract Employees.............................................................................857
1.7 Hazard Awareness/Compliance Training.................................................................................................858
1.8 Programs and Process.............................................................................................................................858
1.9 Interface with Clients and Third Parties...................................................................................................859
2.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION/NONREIMBURSABLE BACKCHARGE...........................................................................859
3.1 General....................................................................................................................................................859
3.2 Contractors’ Planning and Execution.......................................................................................................860
A. Pre-Execution Planning...........................................................................................................................860
B. Execution of Work...................................................................................................................................861
C. Purchase of Materials/Services; Inspection of Materials/Equipment.....................................................861
D. Employee Responsibility and Stop Work Authority.................................................................................862
4.0 CONTRACTOR-DEVELOPED HSE PROGRAM/PROCEDURES..........................................................................863
4.1 General....................................................................................................................................................863
A. Company Organization............................................................................................................................863
B. HSE Policy................................................................................................................................................863
C. HSE Objective..........................................................................................................................................863
D. HSE Training Program.............................................................................................................................863
E. Policy Restricted Work............................................................................................................................863
F. HSE Motivation Program.........................................................................................................................863
4.2 Specific....................................................................................................................................................863
A. Work Description....................................................................................................................................863
B. Work Method Statement........................................................................................................................863
C. Risk Analysis............................................................................................................................................864
D. Hazardous Products................................................................................................................................864
E. Waste Management................................................................................................................................864
F. Pollution Prevention/Waste Minimization..............................................................................................864

Page 892
ABG
G. Environmental Protection.......................................................................................................................864
H. Personal Protective Equipment...............................................................................................................865
I. Composition Job Personnel.....................................................................................................................865
J. Material/Equipment Inspection Program................................................................................................865
K. HSE Meetings..........................................................................................................................................865
L. HSE Inspections........................................................................................................................................865
M. Accident/Incident Prevention Program...................................................................................................865
N. Housekeeping.........................................................................................................................................865
O. HSE Incentive and Publicity Program......................................................................................................865
P. Security Aspects......................................................................................................................................865
Q. Others.....................................................................................................................................................865
4.3 Submittal of Contractor Project-Specific HSE Documentation.................................................................865
4.4 Filing of Contractor Project-Specific HSE Documentation.......................................................................866
4.5 Update of Contractor Project-Specific HSE Documentation....................................................................866
5.0 REFERENCES.................................................................................................................................................866
6.0 ATTACHMENTS............................................................................................................................................867

Page 893
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice defines the health, safety, and environmental (HSE) requirements for contractor selection and
alignment.
SCOPE
 HSE Program
 HSE Representatives
 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Workers
 Contractor Selection
 Hazard Awareness/Compliance Training
 Interface with Clients/Third Parties
 Corrective Action/Non-reimbursable Backcharge
 Project-Specific HSE Documentation
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
Competent Person — A person who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings
or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to
HSE Professional — A person who, by education, experience, or a combination, has gained extensive knowledge
in HSE. The HSE professional has chosen HSE to be their full-time occupation/career path. The HSE professional
usually performs only HSE-related functions.
HSE Representative — A person designated to be the point of contact for an employer’s HSE program. A
representative may be a “line” employee such as a foreman, superintendent, warehouseman, or engineer — the
representative need not be an HSE “professional.” An HSE Representative may, depending on project/contract
requirements, perform functions other than HSE.
The client HSE Representative assigned to the project will be consulted through the ABG HSE Manager before the
start of any work in operating areas.
1.1 Prequalification
The prequalification process is endorsed by executive management and ABG Contracts and Procurement team
members. Project Management is accountable for the consistent application of this process.

Page 894
ABG
Evaluation of a contractor’s HSE qualifications is a vital component of the contractor selection process. During the
bidding process, the contractor must complete the Contractor HSE Prequalification Evaluation (Form
000.653.F0222), which is subsequently evaluated by ABG’s HSE Representatives using the Contractor and
Subcontractor HSE Prequalification Evaluation Guidelines (Attachment 03). Selecting contractors who are aligned
with ABG’s HSE philosophy and culture provides for a safer work environment and enhances project execution.
The Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Prequalification Evaluation Guidelines provide a consistent tool for
evaluation of the contractor’s HSE program. Some elements of the contractor HSE program must be in place and
meet strict guidelines, while other elements of the program may not be as absolute.
Details of the contractor prequalification process should be reviewed in depth and the highlights of the process
shared with the project leadership team. When assistance is required in the implementation of the evaluation
guidelines, the HSE Director should be contacted.
1.2 Contract Language
The contractor’s responsibilities and requirements must be discussed in each contract.

Recommended HSE-related construction contract language is provided in Attachment 01. Attachment 02 provides
a tutorial on how to develop/finalize HSE-related construction contract language using the draft (template)
language in Attachment 01.
Attachment D (Form 000.430.F0175) offers an alternative to the approach described in Attachments 01 and 02
when:
 An HSE Representative is not available to develop project-/site-/scope-specific
contract language, or
 The construction contract is small in scope and the risks involved are considered
“low,” and
 Time is of the essence.
1.3 HSE Program, Practices, and Procedures
The contractor will 1) adopt ABG’s HSE Management System (policies, practices, forms, and processes), or 2)
develop its own project-specific HSE program/procedures (including requisite and applicable forms) and submit to
ABG HSE for review before starting work..
In the event that a contractor elects to provide its own HSE documentation, the contractor’s HSE documentation
will be developed and maintained at all times during performance of the work.
ABG HSE will evaluate the contractor’s HSE program/procedures using the Contractor and Subcontractor HSE
Documentation Requirements Checklist (Form 000.653.F0257).
The contractor’s HSE program/procedures will be at least as stringent as ABG’s HSE Management System that is
provided as an example for the contractor’s information, included “for information” in an attachment to the
Request for Proposal (RFP), and provided to the contractor before bid and award. The contractor’s HSE
program/procedures must be provided to ABG HSE for review and comment in accordance with the time set forth
in the RFP and/or the contract. ABG HSE will return the contractor’s HSE program/procedures with one of the
following status codes:

Page 895
ABG
 A – Proceed. No Comments.
 B – Proceed. Change in line with comments and resubmit.
 C – Do not proceed. Change in line with comments and resubmit.
Contractors will disposition comments proposed by ABG and, when required, resubmit documents in a timely
manner to support “A” or “B” status before commencement of field activities. ABG’s review and comment will
not relieve a contractor of obligations under the contract nor constitute ABG’s assumption of responsibility for the
accuracy or adequacy of the contractor’s HSE program/procedures.
1.4 Preconstruction Meeting/Tour
The contractor will be required to attend a preconstruction meeting before starting work to further facilitate
understanding of the project conditions and HSE requirements. A worksite tour will be made to confirm the
contractor's awareness of potential hazards.
It is the contractor's obligation to undertake any action, which may be necessary or required, to establish and
maintain safe working conditions. Contractors are required to provide appropriate methods, equipment, devices,
and material to ensure a safe workplace at all times.
Contractors are required to designate trained and knowledgeable individuals as Competent Persons (refer to
Practice 000.653.1000, HSE General Requirements) to coordinate their project HSE program in accordance with
contract requirements. This coordination includes, but is not limited to: toolbox meetings, accident/incident
investigation, accident/incident reports, near miss incident reports, monthly statistics, HSE meetings, first aid, site
inspection records, and coordination with ABG to support an effective HSE program in accordance with client
requirements and statutory HSE regulations.
The contractor will provide ABG, before commencement of the project, the name of the
designated HSE Representative. The contractor-designated HSE Representative will
attend the necessary kickoff meetings.
1.6 Ratio of HSE Representatives to Contract Employees
The ratio of contractor-designated HSE representatives will be specified in contract requirements. However, as a
general guide, the following will be used for general planning purposes:
 When contractor’s onsite employee total is less than 25 individuals, the designated
HSE Representative may have other responsibilities and need not be an HSE
professional; when contractor’s onsite total equals or exceeds 25 employees, the
HSE Representative will be dedicated full-time to the responsibilities of the onsite
HSE Representative; when contractor’s onsite total equals or exceeds 50 employees,
Note: “Onsite employee total” includes employees of the contractor plus those of
project site(s).

Page 896
ABG
 Additional full-time HSE professionals will be assigned to the project by the

contractor for each increase of 75 employees. Additional competent HSE
Representatives may be required due to geographic location, specific hazards, client
requirements, or local regulatory requirements.
1.7 Hazard Awareness/Compliance Training
Hazard awareness and compliance training (the USA/OSHA 10 hour for Construction course, or equal) is required
for all contractor employees, including those who manage or supervise construction workers or sub-/lower-tier
contractors (includes foremen, general foremen, superintendents, construction managers, construction
engineers/buyers technical representatives, and project managers as well as those in similar positions) and HSE
representatives.
Hazard awareness and compliance training will be completed within 1 week of the employee’s start-of-work at
the project site.
1.8 Programs and Process
The following list of programs and processes will typically be included in large/complex construction contracts at
the discretion of the Project Manager and the Regional Safety Manager. The method of implementation will be
left to the contractor to develop and manage; however, the basic precepts and implementation
methods/strategies described in applicable ABG HSE Management System practices (listed in parentheses
following each program/process listed below) will be expected. Each program and process will be measured as a
“performance standard” at times and frequencies agreed upon by ABG and the contractor.
 Roles and Responsibilities – clearly defined and communicated (refer to Practices
000.653.0000 and 000.653.0020)
 Behavior-Based Safety Program (refer to Practice 000.653.1001)
 Disciplinary Action (refer to Practice 000.653.1005 and Section 10.2.13.6 of this
contract)
 Lessons Learned program
 Lower-/Sub-Tier Contractor Prequalification (refer to Practice 000.653.1003)
 Communications Systems (verbal and written)
 Incentives and Rewards (refer to Practice 000.653.1100)
 Substance Abuse/Fitness For Duty (refer to Practice 000.653.1400 and Section
10.2.12 of this contract)
 HSE Training, to include workers, supervisors, and managers (refer to Practice
000.653.1001)
 New Employee Identification and Mentoring HSE-Related Performance Reporting
(refer to Practice 000.653.1001)
 Accident/Incident Investigation (refer to Practice 000.653.1202)
 Injury Case Management (refer to Practice 000.653.1201)

Page 897
ABG
 HSE-Related Performance Reporting (refer to Practice 000.653.1202 and Sections

10.2.13.8 and 10.2.13.10 of this contract)
 Job Safety Analysis (refer to Practice 000.653.1304) and Section 10.2.4.1 of this
contract)
 Safety Task Assignment (refer to Practice 000.653.1304 and Section 10.2.4.2 of this
contract)
 Emergency Preparedness/Action (refer to Practice 000.653.1200)
 Worksite Inspections and Audits (refer to Practice 000.653.1305)
 Tie-Ins and Commissioning (refer to Practice 000.653.3318)
 High-Pressure Cleaning
 HSE Managers Weekly Meetings
 Monthly HSE Performance Review Meetings
1.9 Interface with Clients and Third Parties
Whenever a contractor meets with a client or a third party, such as a regulatory agency representative,
concerning HSE issues, the contractor will immediately notify ABG HSE of the meeting date, time and location, the
attendees of the meeting, and the outcome of the meeting. Time permitting, the contractor is expected to notify
ABG HSE before the meeting and request attendance by ABG HSE or ABG management, as appropriate.
2.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION/NONREIMBURSABLE BACKCHARGE
The failure or refusal of any contractor to fulfill its HSE responsibility or to correct or abate HSE-related conditions,
work practices, or acts within a reasonable time period will result in corrective action being ordered by ABG or the
client for contractor’s account.
Refer to Attachment 04, Guidelines for Contractor HSE Corrective Action Plan.
3.1 General
Contractors are expected to:

 Comply with in-country HSE legislation, ABG HSE practices and procedures or
equivalent, and with requirements contractually flowed down by the client.
 Comply with requirements specified in Attachment D to the contract.
 Provide protective safety equipment for the work for which they are responsible 
including safety glasses, hard hats, shoes, and other safety clothing  if required. The
contractor must take care that personal protective equipment (PPE) remains in good
condition by checking it on a regular basis.
 Enforce the wearing of necessary protective equipment at all times by personnel and
visitors on the project sites other than in areas specifically designated as "no risk"
areas by ABG Site Management.
 Immediately report any injury sustained or damage caused by contractors’
employees to the ABG HSE Representative and the ABG Project/Site Manager.

Page 898
ABG
 Take immediate improvement actions for hazards or defects noted during

inspections by ABG HSE specialists.
 Maintain the highest standards of housekeeping and keep workplaces tidy.
 Keep debris and waste materials cleared as work proceeds.
 Verify that its employees receive project orientation and other training specific for
the project, and that HSE information, bulletins, and work instructions are received
before entering the jobsite.
 The contractor’s employees must attend an HSE orientation before being allowed to
start work within the project location. An HSE booklet (Contractor/Subcontractor
Site Safety Guidelines) will be issued to contractors as a reminder of the information
presented in the orientation.
 Participate in and support the HSE motivation program.
 When necessary, take disciplinary action, including exclusion from the site if
necessary, of staff that violate HSE procedures or otherwise work in a careless or
unsafe manner.
 Provide first-line response for first aid, emergency, and fire. When further action,
treatment, or ambulance is required, seek such emergency services from ABG project
resources.
 Keep registers, records, and reports up to date and properly completed and stored in
a safe place.
3.2 Contractors’ Planning and Execution
Contractors will be required to:

 Understand, endorse, and comply with ABG HSE practices and procedures (or
contractor’s equivalent), client HSE requirements, applicable HSE standards, and
generally accepted HSE practices. Communicate the above items to contractor
supervisors and employees.
 Conduct work in accordance with the above directives.
Refer to Contractor HSE Alignment (Kickoff) Meeting (Form 000.653.F0228).
A. Pre-Execution Planning
Determine at the planning stage the following:

 The most appropriate order and method of working, including job safety analysis
(JSA) (execution plans)
 Provision of adequate lighting and safe method of electrical distribution
 Identification and allocation of responsibilities between client, ABG, contractor, and
others on site
 Hazards arising from underground and overhead services
 Environmental aspects including endangered species, historical and archaeological
resources, environmental permit conditions, pollution prevention/waste

Page 899
ABG
minimization, erosion and sediment control, dust control, noise, sanitary waste,
water resources, landscape protection, and spill prevention and control
 Fire precautions
 Any particular training or instruction required for site personnel
 Temporary works provision by the contractor (such as scaffolding and excavation
support)
B. Execution of Work
 Provide written instructions in unusual situations not covered by the project-specific

HSE program/procedures to establish working methods and sequence, outline
potential hazards at each stage, and indicate precautions and controls to be adopted.
 Understand and fully comply with client/ABG permit to work system (if applicable).
 Supervisors will be fully knowledgeable of the hazards involved in the work they
supervise and the HSE procedures to be followed.
 Before starting their daily task, supervisors will demonstrate and explain the HSE
procedures, and precautions that must be taken before the employee can proceed
with their designated task.
 Oversee that work, once started, is:
 Carried out as planned and that account is taken of changing or unforeseen
conditions as work proceeds.
 Carried out in accordance with the applicable HSE procedures and other
appropriate statutory requirements.
 Reprimand any member of supervisory staff for failing to satisfactorily discharge
HSE responsibilities.
 Take appropriate action when notified of onsite disregard of HSE Representative’s
advice.
 Set a personal example when visitting site by wearing appropriate protective
clothing.
 Carry out necessary notifications to local authorities (such as the police) as required
by local legislation.
 Carry out project entrance orientation, toolbox talks, and necessary HSE training for
onsite personnel.
 Take responsibility for preparation and updates of project-specific HSE
documentation.
C. Purchase of Materials/Services; Inspection of Materials/Equipment
To prevent the purchasing of unsafe materials/equipment or environmental contaminants, HSE specifications

should be part of the contractor purchasing procedure of relevant project materials and equipment (including
activities).
Examples of such materials/equipment are: forklift trucks, grinding machines, portable climbing materials, circular
saws, milling machines, high-pressure material, liquids, and temporary E-extensions.

Page 900
ABG
The following must be clearly identified:

 List of materials/equipment
 Identification method
 CE-mark (inside EC) or equivalent (outside EC)
 Methods of use
 Availability of specifications
 Availability of material safety data sheets (MSDS)
Chemicals must be investigated for dangerous properties to human health and the environment. Less hazardous
materials will be substituted whenever practical.
MSDS will be available in the workplace for each chemical used.
An inspection and certification program is required to provide assurance that materials and equipment comply
with appropriate specifications. This is applicable to critical materials/equipment, such as:
 Hoisting equipment (such as lifting blocks, slings, hoisting belts, chains)
 Portable climbing materials (such as ladders and rolling scaffolds)
 Elevators for persons and materials
 Forklift trucks and other materials handling equipment
 Portable electric equipment
 Welding generators and other welding equipment
 High-pressure equipment
 Specific PPE
Contractor must indicate in the project-specific HSE program/procedures the situations where critical materials
and/or equipment are being used.
Contractor is obligated to maintain critical materials/equipment in good condition to prevent serious
accidents/incidents.
There must be a system present, at the worksite, for registration providing the last inspection date, with the
following evaluation criteria:
 Identification system
 Available materials/equipment
 Inspection reports
 Inspection body
 Inspection frequency (minimum once every 6 months)
Contractor must attest that the user of the materials/equipment can verify, in a simple manner, whether the
materials/equipment comply with the inspection requirements. Using stickers or labels on which the date of the
last inspection will comply, contractors will:

Page 901
ABG
 Carry out regular inspections of workplaces to determine whether work is carried out
in accordance with project-specific HSE documentation and work permit
requirements.
 Carry out regular task observation.
D. Employee Responsibility and Stop Work Authority
Employees are responsible to carry out their work with the highest respect to safety, health, and protection of the
environment and they also have the right to stop their work if they cannot fulfill this obligation. In this case,
employees must inform their direct supervisor, who will take immediate corrective action. Contractor supervision
is responsible to inform ABG supervision immediately for further follow-up. End responsibility for a safe and
healthy work environment rests with the direct employer, but ABG management will work to help the contractor
fulfill this obligation.
4.0 CONTRACTOR-DEVELOPED HSE PROGRAM/PROCEDURES
If the contractor chooses to develop/submit for approval its own HSE program/procedures, the contents must be
related directly to the project and show how ABG HSE Management System policies, practices, and processes are
integrated to form the contractor’s HSE program/procedures, to demonstrate it will be at least as stringent as
ABG requirements. The following must be designed to inform contractor and sub-/lower-tier contractor
personnel and ABG of the contractor-specific HSE requirements for the work.
4.1 General
A. Company Organization
A simple organization chart illustrating responsibilities for work at the worksite, the relationship with supervision,
and the relationship with home office/company HSE advisors (include names, as appropriate).
B. HSE Policy
A statement by the contractor senior management establishing contractor policy with respect to the health and
safety of contractor employees and third parties, and with respect to care of the environment.
C. HSE Objective
A statement of the goals that the contractor wishes to achieve such as No Incidents.
D. HSE Training Program
A description of the systems used for education and training of new and existing employees on HSE legislation and
work-related requirements.
E. Policy Restricted Work
A statement describing how employees suffering from an injury can be voluntarily employed in alternative
activities.

Page 902
ABG
F. HSE Motivation Program
A description of methods used to promote HSE awareness among employees.

4.2 Specific
A. Work Description
Description of the major work elements such as mechanical erection involving heavy lifts, structural steel erection
by bolting and welding, and installation of internals.
B. Work Method Statement
Step-by-step breakdown of each work element into activities (or reference to JSA used for the project).
C. Risk Analysis
Itemization of risk for each activity and the means by which risks are limited or controlled (or reference to the
JSA(s) used for the project). Refer to Practice 000.653.1304.
D. Hazardous Products
Product list and MSDS for hazardous products to be used on the site.
E. Waste Management
A description of the methods proposed to collect, characterize, store, transport and dispose of wastes. Wastes
include, but are not limited to, hazardous waste, solid waste, wastewater, sanitary waste, recycled materials, and
construction and demolition debris.
F. Pollution Prevention/Waste Minimization
Methods proposed for minimizing waste, including prioritization for:

 Source reduction
 Minimizing packaging material
 Salvage and reuse
 Salvage for resale or donation
 Recycling
 Compliant disposal
G. Environmental Protection
Methods proposed to protect the surrounding environment, which include, but are not limited to:
 Protecting cultural, historical, and archeological sites (as appropriate)
 Protecting threatened or endangered species
 Minimizing erosion and controlling run-on/run-off
 Managing storm water

Page 903
ABG
 Managing dust emissions

 Limiting noise pollution
 Limiting temporary facilities to designated areas
 Protecting water resources
 Managing groundwater discharges
 Identifying nonpotable water sources
 Protecting existing landscaping
 Protecting existing roads and access routes
 Preventing and controlling spills and releases
 Monitoring environmental impacts (as appropriate)
 Notifying ABG HSE of hazardous material release to the environment or
noncompliance with an HSE requirement
H. Personal Protective Equipment
A catalog of PPE used for high-risk activities as mentioned in the risk analysis (or reference to JSA used for the
project).
I. Composition Job Personnel
Resumes of key individuals.

J. Material/Equipment Inspection Program
Description of the inspection method used for equipment and tools that provide a visual record of an item’s
suitability for use.
K. HSE Meetings
Typical agendas, frequency, chair, and attendees.

L. HSE Inspections
Descriptions of planned and random inspections performed by a Competent Person showing frequency,
participants, areas of attention, and remedial actions.
M. Accident/Incident Prevention Program
Methods used to reduce risks to zero in areas of the work showing how observations and reports are made.
N. Housekeeping
Description of housekeeping procedures and methods for dealing with daily waste products.
O. HSE Incentive and Publicity Program
Use of publicized HSE aids (such as posters and flyers) and incentive awards for meeting HSE targets.

Page 904
ABG
P. Security Aspects
Elements employed to provide for the security of property and materials at the site.
Q. Others
Any other items that contractor believes will promote better health, safety and environmental care. Items must
include at least a permit to work procedure and an incident/accident investigation procedure.
4.3 Submittal of Contractor Project-Specific HSE Documentation
The contractor must issue the project-specific HSE documentation such that the review and approval process is
completed before the start of work.
4.4 Filing of Contractor Project-Specific HSE Documentation
The approved contractors’ project-specific HSE documentation will be control-issued and made available to the
following ABG and contractor functions:
 HSE Manager
 Area Superintendent/Supervisor
 Contracts Manager
 Project Lead
 Site Supervisor
 HSE Representative(s)
The contractor project-specific HSE documentation and applicable ABG HSE practices and procedures will be
accessible for project personnel.
4.5 Update of Contractor Project-Specific HSE Documentation
The contractor project-specific HSE program/procedures will be updated, as required. When no update is
required, on an annual basis or as otherwise requested by a ABG HSE Representative, the contractor will send a
notice to ABG that the project-specific HSE program/procedures is up to date. When special circumstances occur,
like corrective actions from accident investigations, then the HSE program/procedures will be immediately
reviewed and updated, as appropriate.
Updates of HSE program/procedures must be submitted, reviewed, and distributed in the same manner as
original documentation (including a revision log).
5.0 REFERENCES

Forms:

Page 905
ABG

000.430.F0175 Attachment D: Project Health, Safety, and
Environmental Rules and Regulations
000.430.F0206 Subcontractor Request Form
000.653.F0219 Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Prequalification
Questionnaire
000.653.F0222 Contractor HSE Prequalification Evaluation
000.653.F0228 Contractor HSE Alignment (Kickoff) Meeting
000.653.F0257 Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Documentation
Requirements Checklist
6.0 ATTACHMENTS

Attachment 01 Draft Safety-Related Requirements to Add to PART I
of a Construction Contract
Attachment 02 How to Make “Draft” Construction Contract Safety
– Related Language Project-Specific
Attachment 03 Contractor and Subcontractor HSE Prequalification
Evaluation Guidelines
Attachment 04 Guidelines for Contractor HSE Corrective Action
Plan

Page 906
ABG
SUBSTANCE ABUSE PREVENTION PROGRAM
PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements of ABG’s Substance Abuse Prevention Program of
maintaining a safe, productive, and drug-free workplace.
SCOPE
 Testing
APPLICATION
This Program applies to all field – foreign and domestic – project/sites and covers salaried,
hourly, full-time, part-time, and temporary employees as well as consultants, temporary
agency workers, and candidates for hire.
Compliance with this Program is a condition of employment or continued employment.

Violation of this Program will result in disciplinary action, up to and including termination.
DEFINITIONS
Terms and definitions for the Substance Abuse Prevention Program are provided in ABG’s
Human Resources (HR) Policy HR-1505, Substance Abuse Policy.
All Rights Reserved ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

Page 907
ABG
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................868
SCOPE868
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................868
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................868
GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................... 870
TESTING.................................................................................................................................................................... 870
EXCEPTIONS..............................................................................................................................................................872
Substance Abuse Prevention Statement of Understanding Form.............................................................................873
Description of Suspicious Behavior Form..................................................................................................................874
Site Standard Time Limit for Providing Test Sample.................................................................................................875
Consent to Substance Abuse Screening....................................................................................................................876
TEST ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE................................................................................................................................877
RELEVANT CONTACTS...............................................................................................................................................890
ADDENDUM..............................................................................................................................................................891
ATTACHMENT A........................................................................................................................................................900
ADDENDUM CONSENT AND AUTHORIZATION..........................................................................................................901

Page 908
ABG
GENERAL
ABG is committed to providing a safe environment for its employees, clients, and contractors. Illicit drug use
and alcohol abuse constitute not only a significant danger to the safety and health of the user, but also to
fellow employees, contractors, and clients. As such, to further its goal of maintaining a safe, productive, and
drug-free workplace, the company maintains a zero tolerance for the inappropriate use or possession of illicit
drug or alcohol in the workplace. The goal of this Program is to maintain a safe, productive, and drug-free
workplace.
ABG considers substance abuse screening part of the overall program to prevent illicit substances from
entering the workplace. Such screening will be conducted in compliance with all applicable federal, state, and
local laws, in-country requirements, and in compliance with the Company’s contractual obligations with
clients and bargaining units. Additionally, ABG has in effect, and enforces, drug and alcohol procedures as
required by the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT). These requirements, as well as those of other
governmental regulations, will supersede this Program when applicable.
The ABG Substance Abuse Prevention Program, as developed by Corporate Health, Safety and Environmental
(HSE), includes chemical screening as a condition of employment for hourly and salaried applicants, and
employees reasonably suspected of using or being under the influence of controlled substances or alcohol.
This is in accordance with ABG’s HR-1505, Substance Abuse Policy.
Each site develops a site-specific program based on corporate requirements.
Each site-specific program is unique to the site and is nontransferable. Site-specific programs are developed
for each individual site using the ABG standard program as a base and then addressing client-specific
requirements and state-/country-specific regulations. In countries or regions where legislation prohibits
certain aspects of the ABG standard program being implemented, the site-specific program must be
developed, incorporating all aspects of the ABG program deemed acceptable under such legislation.
Management and employee orientation, supervisory drug awareness, and administrator’s training are to be
performed by ABG Corporate HSE.
TESTING
Each site receives a site-specific Substance Abuse Program Policy that includes the Test Administrator’s Guide.
All persons to be tested should receive the Management Letter to Employees Form explaining the policy and
company rules.
All persons to be tested should review and sign the Substance Abuse Prevention / Statement of
Understanding Form.
Persons to be alcohol tested should review and complete the Alcohol Testing Form.
All persons to be tested should complete the Individual Release Form and Consent to Substance Abuse
Screening Form.

Page 909
ABG

Each ABG project, site, or office should establish a time limitation for employees to comply with the screening
process. Refer to the Site Standard Time Limit for Providing Sample.
Testing should be performed in accordance with the Test Administrator’s Guide. ABG performs the following
types of testing:
 Post-Offer/Pre-employment Screening - All newly hired salaried and hourly employees and
all transferred salaried and hourly employees will be screened after the decision is made to
hire. Potential applicants will be advised of this requirement at the time applications are
distributed to them.
 For Cause/Reasonable Suspicion - Employees reasonably suspected of using or being under
the influence of illicit substances or alcohol as manifested, among other ways, through
deteriorating job performance, uncharacteristic behavior, safety violations, mood swings,
falling asleep, inability to appropriately respond to questions, the odor of alcohol on the
breath or person, inappropriate or aggressive behavior, accident or near-miss accident, or
other credible evidence are subject to drug and alcohol screening at the ABG Project
Manager’s discretion. Refer to the Description of Suspicious Behavior Form.
 Random Screening - All employees on site will be subject to random screening unless
disallowed by state law. It is recommended that a minimum of 10 percent of site employees
be tested each month. Refer to the Random Selection Verification Example.
 Post-Incident/Accident Screening – Employees on all sites will be required to submit to
substance abuse screening, including alcohol testing, after any involvement in an
incident/accident resulting in, or requiring medical treatment for, an injury or damage to
equipment or property.
 Other - Other types of testing may be established for individual sites based on site specifics.
The ABG standard test is an 8-panel test as follows:

Drug Test Screening Threshold
Amphetamines 500 ng/ml

Methamphetamine 500 ng/ml
Barbiturates 300 ng/ml
Benzodiazepines 300 ng/ml
Cannabinoids (THC) 50 ng/ml
Cocaine Metabolites 150 ng/ml
Opiates 2000 ng/ml
Phencyclidine (PCP) 25 ng/ml
*Alcohol Testing Cutoff 0.04%
*To be used only in reasonably suspicious situations and post-incident/accidents.

Page 910
ABG

All confirmation testing will be by the GC/MS method at these levels:
Drug Class Confirmation Threshold
Amphetamines 250 ng/ml

Methamphetamine 250 ng/ml
Barbiturates 300 ng/ml
Benzodiazepines 300 ng/ml
Cannabinoids (THC) 15 ng/ml
Cocaine Metabolites 100 ng/ml
Opiates 2000 ng/ml
Phencyclidine (PCP) 25 ng/ml
*Alcohol Testing Cutoff 0.04%
* To be used only in reasonably suspicious situations and post-incident/accidents.

EXCEPTIONS
Only as approved by ABG’s HSE Director.

Page 911
ABG
Substance Abuse Prevention Statement of Understanding Form
Employees are not permitted to possess, sell, use, and have present in/on the body or purchase controlled substances
or alcohol on ABG/client property. Such possession, use, sale, presence, or purchase is cause for immediate
termination.
To ensure each employee functions at his/her highest potential, the company may require you to submit to a search.
During working hours, searches of an employee’s vehicle and personal items may be conducted in his/her presence to
confiscate any contraband. In addition, ABG Health, Safety, and Environmental (HSE) is including substance abuse
screening (urinalysis) as a portion of its overall program to ensure that this site has an appropriate environment in
which to work. All newly hired salaried and hourly employees and transferred salaried and hourly employees will be
chemically screened after the decision is made to hire on this site. Substance abuse screening may be required upon
a showing of suspicious behavior or activity including accidents. In addition, all employees will be subject to periodic
random screening, unless prohibited by state law. Employees whose levels of controlled substances exceed the levels
established in the Company’s policy without a legitimate medical reason will receive disciplinary action of termination
of employment. Employees refusing such searches, testing, or adulterating samples will be terminated.
Any employee who has a drug or alcohol-related problem should consult with his or her Human Resource
Representative concerning available assistance programs, some of which may be covered by employee insurance.
However, such assistance will not be a substitute for performance.
Employees suspected of possession or being under the influence of controlled substances or alcohol will be placed on
suspension pending investigation. Employees who receive a confirmed positive result will not be paid, while on
suspension. Every effort will be made to complete this investigation within 5 working days.
Any employee convicted of any criminal drug violation occurring in the workplace must report such conviction to
management within 5 days of such conviction and will be immediately terminated.
“My signature indicates that I have read this document, that I understand the purpose of ABG HSE search and
substance abuse screening policies, and that I consent to work under these terms and conditions.”
___________________

Description of Suspicious Behavior Form
Employee: Date:
Location: Time:
Observations
Breath: (odor of alcoholic beverage) Strong Moderate
Eyes: Bloodshot Glassy Watery

Heavy Eyelids Fixed Pupils Dilated Pupils
Speech: Confused Stuttered Thick-Tongued

Mumbled Slurred Mush Mouthed
Other
Attitude: Excited Indifferent Talkative Insulting

Care-Free Cocky Sleepy Cooperative
Profane Other
Unusual Action: Fighting Crying Laughing Lethargic

Other
Balance: Falling Needs Support Wobbling Swaying

Other
Walking: Falling Staggering Stumbling Swaying

Other
Turning: Falling Staggering Stumbling Swaying

Hesitant Other
Indicate any other unusual actions or statements:
Does the employee show signs or complain of an illness or injury (supervisor’s opinion)?:
Effects of alcohol/drug intoxication: None Slight Obvious Extreme
Should the employee operate equipment: Yes No
Additional Comments:
Date: ____________________________________ Time: __________________________________
Supervisor: ____________________________________Witness: __________________________________

(print name) (print name)
Supervisor: ____________________________________Witness: __________________________________

(signature) (signature)

Site Standard Time Limit for Providing Test Sample
The _ABG_ site has established a time limit of the following in which an employee/job applicant has to provide a
sample for substance abuse screening purposes:
__3____ Hours (no less than 2 hours)

or
______ End of normal work shift
Failure to provide a sample in the time limit specified above will be considered a refusal and the employee should be
terminated, unless employee can provide a documented medical reason for the failure.
Check one of the above options Site Management agrees is a reasonable standard for this site. Once a precedent is
established, employees must be notified in writing 30 days before the implementation of the change.
Complete the above and provide the approving signatures below. Keep the original in the Site substance abuse policy
manual and return a copy to the Substance Abuse Administrator – Baton Rouge.
____________________________________ ______________________________________
Site Manager (print name) Site Manager (signature)
____________________________________ ______________________________________
HSE Manager (print name) HSE Manager (signature)
____________________________________ ______________________________________
Site Name Site Number
___________________________________
Date

Consent to Substance Abuse Screening
(Including but not limited to: urinalysis, breath alcohol and/or hair test)
Name Social Security No. Location/Project #
DOCUMENTS THAT ESTABLISH IDENTITY: (a minimum of one of the following)
State-issued driver’s license or United States military Other (specify document and
state-issued ID card with a ID card issuing authority)
photograph or information
including name, sex, date of birth, _______________________
height, and color of eyes (specify
state) _______________________
________________
To be Signed Before Sample is Given
I, ___________________________________________, do hereby give my consent to Plant Performance

Services, LLC and/or Plant Performance Services, Inc. (ABG) Health, Safety and Environmental (HSE) to collect a
sample from me on this date and further give my consent to Plant Performance Services, LLC and/or Plant
Performance Services, Inc. (ABG) HSE to forward the urine sample to an approved laboratory for its performance
of appropriate test thereon to identify the presence of controlled substances. I furthermore give the laboratory
my permission to release the results of such test to ABG (HSE).
Signature Date

ABG

TEST ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE
SECTION I
1. The purpose of the Substance Abuse Prevention Program is to have a drug-free and therefore safe workplace
for our employees.
2. This guide provides general information that should be helpful as you begin substance abuse testing at your
site/facility as required by your substance abuse prevention program.
3. There are legal ramifications in many areas of substance abuse testing. Testing technology and laws are
changing rapidly.
4. This guide is not all-inclusive, so you may have questions that are not covered here. If so, contact ABG HSE
Substance Abuse Prevention Program Administrator Kendra Winchester (225) 202-5747.
SUBSTANCE ABUSE PREVENTION PROGRAM MANUAL
A Substance Abuse Program is mandatory for all ABG sites/facilities. The Substance Abuse Prevention
Program Manual is your textbook for drug testing at your location. If you read it carefully, you will find
answers to most of your questions. Like all high level manuals, this is a management document. Keep it in
your office or other secure area. Let other designated managers become familiar with it, such as the site
personnel/Human Resources (HR) Manager and the site HSE Representative. These persons may be helping
to implement and carry out the program with you. If you have a question about the manual or a question for
which the manual does not give an answer, call the ABG HSE Substance Abuse Administrator before acting.
Remember the Substance Abuse Prevention Program is site specific and cannot be carried from one site to
another.
STATEMENT OF POLICY FOR APPLICATIONS
This statement should be attached to or a part of applications for new hires. This statement notifies
applicants that they will be drug tested if an offer of employment is made to them. Some may read it and
leave knowing they cannot pass such a test. We are letting potential employees know what we expect of
them and of our commitment to a drug-free and safe worksite. This statement does not need to be signed by
anyone.
STATEMENT OF UNDERSTANDING / SITE LETTER
All employees and candidates for hire are to be informed that ABG is a drug–free workplace. All employees
who are within the scope of Policy HR-1505 will be required to sign a Statement of Understanding
acknowledging their agreement to abide by the terms and conditions of policy.
CONSENT TO URINALYSIS

Page 916
ABG

This form is a legal document that records identification of the subject about to be tested.
Under no circumstances should a test subject be asked about medications prior to a test. Only if the results
are confirmed non-negative by a SAMSHA-certified laboratory, may the subject be questioned about what
he/she has been taking, and then only about drugs in the category in which the sample tested non-
negative. The consent form, Chain of Custody documentation, and the test results should be kept in a
separate, secure file with limited access.
FOR CAUSE OR REASONABLE SUSPICION
The decision to test for cause or reasonable suspicion is based on supervisor observation. Should an
employee be suspected of being under the influence of drugs or alcohol, a Description of Suspicious Behavior
Form should be completed. This form requires the signatures of 2 supervisors or 2 members of the site. The
description must be based on observed signs and not by hearsay or rumor. Always keep in mind: the
behavior that raises suspicion should present itself in the workplace and/or affect the work of the employee.
SECTION II
ALERE QUICK TEST GUIDELINES FOR SAMPLE COLLECTION
This section is for the persons designated to perform the collection of samples for testing at your site. You should
designate at least 2 such people. Make sure that all such designated persons are trained, certified, and thoroughly
familiar with the entire process. This is an important procedure and mistakes can lead to liability. The important
thing is to take one’s time in filling out the documentation and to take the subjects one at a time through the entire
process before starting on the next subject. Any questions about this should be directed to the ABG HSE Substance
Abuse Administrator, Kendra Winchester (225) 202-5747.
Should you use a clinic or other outside source for collection, be sure that those persons are familiar with ABG’s
policies, practices, procedures, and HSE forms, laboratory forms, and DOT Urine Specimens Collection Guidelines.
Outside sample collections should be arranged through the ABG HSE Substance Abuse Administrator, Kendra
Winchester (225) 202-5747.
Strict procedures must be followed in the collection of urine samples in order to ensure the integrity of the sample
and to provide an accurate and legal chain of custody. These procedures prevent mix-ups, tampering, and misplaced
documentation. The documentation furnished by the approved testing laboratory may vary in some small details, but
the principles are the same.
GENERAL
Before any collection can be made, the site or collection location must have a site specific Substance Abuse
Prevention Program that has been developed and approved by the ABG HSE Substance Abuse Administrator.
Any other testing is against corporate policy.

Page 917
ABG

Each location must designate a restroom facility that will be used for urine specimen collection. It is not
necessary to set aside facilities exclusively for collection, but the designated facilities should be the only place
collection is performed. The facility should provide privacy as well as security against tampering. A bluing
agent should be placed in the bowl, and water in faucets, etc., turned off during
testing. The facility should be free of bleach, cleaning agents and other material that could be used to dilute
or alter a sample.
Regular inspections of the designated facilities must be made to prevent the presence of such material. The
facility should also be in close proximity to the area where documentation will be completed.
TRAINING
ABG’s illicit substance and alcohol abuse awareness training program provides management, supervisors, and
employee’s education on the dangers of drug and alcohol abuse, drug identification, symptoms and methods
of drug and alcohol use. It also provides information on ABG’s policies and procedures concerning drug and
alcohol abuse in the workplace and penalties to be imposed for violation of the policy. The training program
emphasizes the practical factors in dealing with substance abuse and the available substance abuse
counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs. This training program is for field project site
management and supervisors and is highly encouraged for all field project employees.
BEFORE TESTING
Subjects to be tested should be individually directed to the collection area. The collection process requires
strict concentration and sequential procedures. Trying to deal with several subjects simultaneously leads to
confusion and may result in mishandling of samples. Therefore, the entire collection process must be
completed for each subject before proceeding with the next subject.
COLLECTION PROCEDURE
Collection Facility – Adhere to DOT Guidelines
On Site Testing – Follow Laboratory Procedure
1. With the subject, review the Consent to Urinalysis and Chain of Custody (COC) Form. Complete the
identification information at the top.
2. Have the subject provide picture identification. This prevents any attempt to have a “clean” person give a
sample in place of the proper person. This should be accomplished by driver’s license, state ID card, or
company ID card. For employees being tested for random or for-cause testing, the supervisor’s identification
of the subject will be sufficient if other identification is not available.

Page 918
ABG

3. Collector completes Section C (Name/I.D.) on the chain of custody form by writing in the subject’s last name,
first name and job number in available spaces.
4. Collector completes Section D (Donor SSN or Employee ID No.) with social security number.
5. Collector completes Section E by checking the reason for the test.
6. Subject completes Step 5.
7. Subject’s outer garments and personal belongings are to be left outside collection area. Wallet may be
retained.
8. Instruct subject to wash hands before collection.
9. Open the quick screen collection kit in front of the subject and give it to the subject. No personal observation
should be made during the process unless the first sample is suspected to be tampered with; and then only
indirect observation is allowed. The two possible reasons for indirect observation are: temperature is not in
the acceptable range or the test results show low specific gravity or low creatinine. If indirect observation is
necessary, ALWAYS have subject and observer of the same sex. Make sure that the subject takes no personal
belongings into the stall, such as purse, lunchbox, etc. Make a visual search of the subject before they enter
the facility to see if there are any bottles, etc., on them. Ask the subject to empty the pockets before going
to the facility. The subject must retain possession of his/her wallet. Accompany the subject to the facility.
10. Have the subject provide a sufficient sample of at least 60 ml into the calibrated collection container with
temperature strip.
11. Check specimen temperature and record results in Step 2, acceptable range 90-100° F 32°/38°C.
12. In full view of the subject, collector places the security seal over the top and down both sides of each
specimen bottle.
13. Instruct subject to date and initial the security seal that have been affixed to the specimen bottle. (Refer to
your respective laboratory’s instructions for this). Complete the Laboratory Order Form/Chain of Custody
form. Extreme care must be taken to assure that all required information is completed and correct. Mixed-
up social security numbers, an omitted signature, etc., will result in a rejection of the sample by the
laboratory.
14. If on site testing procedures are to be done, adhere to strict guidelines provided by the Laboratory Product
being used for testing.
15. If on site collection is being performed, adhere to DOT Collection Guidelines.
If the test result is NEGATIVE:
 Fax the chain of custody to the ABG HSE Substance Abuse Administrator Kendra Winchester

Page 919
ABG

Fax: (225)-753-1462.
 Discard specimen.
 Mail original to Kendra Winchester, 456 Highlandia Drive, Baton Rouge, LA 70810.
If the test results are NON-NEGATIVE:
 Place the original chain of custody form and the sealed sample into the biohazard bag for transport to the
laboratory via express transport. Place the biohazard bag in the box and then place the box in the Fed Ex
Clinical Pak with pre-printed laboratory labels for overnight delivery. Drop off at the nearest Fed Ex collection
site or call Fed Ex for pick up.
 Fax a copy of the paperwork immediately to Kendra Winchester Fax: (225) 753-1462 or email to
Kendra.winchester@ABGworld.com and Kathy.bradley@ABGworld.com so results can be monitored.
Note: Under no circumstances should you ask the subject about medication he/she may be taking before the
drug test. Note any medication information provided by the employee voluntarily should be listed in the
Remarks section of the chain of custody form.
Send all documentation to HSE Substance Abuse Administrator, Kendra Winchester, for file retention after faxing.
This information is not for general access. In the event of a confirmed non-negative result, the employee should
be offered the opportunity to explain the non-negative results, identifying any drug he/she has taken that are in
the same category of the non-negative result.
SECTION III
GENERAL SUBSTANCE ABUSE SCREENING INFORMATION
Who is subject to substance abuse screening on my job?
At ABG, all employees, both hourly and salaried, are subject to the drug testing requirements on your job.
Temporary employees furnished by an agency are to be tested before coming to work for ABG.
Contractor/subcontractor employees are also subject to testing.
When do I test new hires?
It is ABG’s preference to have all individuals screened and negative results received before access to ABG or
Client property.
Do salaried transfers get a drug test?

Page 920
ABG

Salaried transfers will be tested before their transfer to your job site if there is no drug screen performed in
the last 90 days. If a transfer fails the drug test, the transfer will not be made. All testing must comply with
corporate policy.

Page 921
ABG
What if an hourly employee is promoted to a salaried position?
All candidates for hire to a salaried position in ABG are to be chemically screened before the actual hiring can
be done. Since hourly employees are terminated then hired as salaried, they must be screened before the
change in status can be effective. This also works the same way from salaried to craft positions.
What if the subject says he or she can’t void at the appointed time?
The test is a requirement for employment. Should someone indicate inability to void at the specified time,
have them wait in the office area where they can be observed. Let them drink water (no more than 3 8-ounce
glasses within a 3-hour period. Usually within an hour or two the person will be able to void. If an acceptable
sample cannot be obtained by the sites documented time limit, testing must cease, and the HSE Substance
Abuse Administrator (Kendra Winchester (225) 202-5747 must be notified. The HSE Substance Abuse
Administrator or Safety Manager must direct the employee to obtain, within 5 working days, an evaluation
from a licensed physician who has expertise in the medical issues raised by the employee’s failure to provide
a sufficient specimen. If the referring physician determines a medical condition precluded, or probably
precluded, the employee from providing a sufficient amount of urine, the test must be cancelled. If the
referring physician does not determine a medical condition interfered with the provision of a sufficient
amount of urine, this is considered a refusal to test. Any questions concerning this issue should be addressed
with the HSE Substance Abuse Administrator.
Who should confront an employee with a non-negative result?
On ABG project sites, non-negative results are reviewed by the ABG Medical Review Officer. The MRO must
determine whether there is a legitimate medical explanation for the confirmed positive, adulterated,
substituted, or invalid test results. The MRO must conduct a verification interview with the employee. The
MRO is also responsible for informing the employee of his/her right to have the specimen retested. The MRO
may communicate test results directly to the employer. The MRO who transmits the results to the employer
must ensure the security and limited access to the transmission. The HSE Substance Abuse Administrator is
the person for MRO to contact. The results are a confidential document and should be kept in a secure
location. Human Resources will be notified of any confirmed positive results which will result in termination
and removal of employee from the jobsite (to be coordinated confidentially between Human Resources,
Safety, and Site Upper Management).
What if the person denies ever taking drugs?
We have confidence in the laboratories we use for our drug testing. A drug test is not a determinant of
whether someone is an addict or user; it is a determinant of whether the individual has certain detectable
levels of drugs in his/her system. Using the laboratory methods we require, we have never had a result
proven erroneous. As long as there was no mix-up of the sample before getting to the lab, we will stand
behind the results. The employee does, however, have a right to appeal results and/or have specimen
retested.

Page 922
ABG
Do “over-the-counter” drugs show up on the drug test?
Some may show up on the initial screen, but very few will affect the GC/MS confirmation. However, in some
people, antihistamines may indicate a non-negative for amphetamines. This is because some nasal sprays
contain small amounts of amphetamine. Heavy use may ingest the system with sufficient amphetamine to
show non-negative. In seasons conducive to colds and flu, pay close attention to the cold medication that the
subject may be taking, even if it is a non-prescription drug.
Also, some non-prescription drugs may contain amounts of barbiturates such as Primatene tablets containing
Phenobarbital. These may show up on confirmation as non-negative. Call ABG HSE Substance Abuse
Administrator if you are at all unsure.
Does cocaine used in mouth and nose surgery show up on a drug test?
This is very possible, especially if the surgery is just before the drug test (2-3 days). While no one can legally
have a prescription for cocaine, it is used as a packing for nasal and mouth surgery to stop blood flow when
stitches are impractical. The cocaine enters the bloodstream and will show up if the person is tested within 2-
3 days of the packing. This is why the MRO asks the subject, if they have visited a physician or dentist in
recent weeks. If so, and the drug shows on the test, the person will be given an opportunity to bring a
statement from the doctor or dentist that sets forth the medication given for MRO review.
What termination codes do I use?
For failing a chemical-screening test or refusing to take a required test or to submit to a search use Code FCS.
What is the difference between an hourly employee failing and a salaried employee failing?
All salaried employees who fail a drug test are entitled to the services of the company Employee Assistance
Program (EAP) as an alternative to termination. This should be handled by your field HR representative or
Corporate HR if a field representative is not available. If they choose to get help from the EAP, they may be
removed from your job but not from the company. If an hourly worker fails a drug test, he/she will be
terminated. There will be no exceptions. However, he/she is entitled to the services of the EAP and may
apply for a period of up to 30 days from date of termination.
The hourly worker may reapply with the company after 90 days for first offense.
What do I do if an hourly worker comes and asks for drug abuse help before failing a drug test?
ABG HSE wants to help employees as much as possible. If an hourly worker asks for help before submitting a
sample for testing, the site supervisor or site HR Representative should contact Corporate HR and/or Legal for
guidance before discussing with the employee or directing the employee to EAP. The employee may not be
able to continue work while receiving help, but if possible, allow him/her to work. If not, allow the employee
to voluntarily quit for personal reasons. If

Page 923
ABG
the employee is successful in fighting the problem, hire him/her back if you have a position available. This
does not apply to employees who have already taken a drug test or been notified they are selected for a
random test.
If an employee is terminated for failing a drug test, is he/she eligible for unemployment compensation?
Laws vary from state to state. All inquiries of this nature should be directed to Corporate Human Resources
for further action.
If an employee fails a drug test, will he/she be eligible for rehire?
The employee will be eligible for re-hire with ABG after 90 days for first offense, but not necessarily at the
same site. Some clients do not allow rehiring of an employee who has failed a drug test at that site. If your
client has no policy on that, ABG policy states that any employee who fails a substance abuse screening test
may reapply in 90 days for first offense. That means you must let the person reapply, but does not mean you
must rehire the person. He or she must be considered as are other applicants and the most qualified
applicant hired. Other considerations would include the Nuclear Regulatory Commission rule that will not
allow anyone who has failed a drug test to work at an operating nuclear site for 5 years or sites who use
consortiums (DISA, ASAP, NASAP, etc.) who mandate rehabilitation requirements. If you are unsure as to any
such requirements at your site, call the ABG HSE Substance Abuse Administrator. Multiple offenses require
longer suspension requirements.
What happens if an employee quits work before the test results are received?
If the test was random or done because of suspicion, the termination will be governed by the results of the
test. Likewise, if an employee quits before a random test or a test “for cause,” the termination will depend
on whether the employee knew he/she was about to be tested. If the employee knows of the test, then
quits, the employee will be terminated for refusal to submit to substance abuse screening (Code FCS). If,
however, the employee does not know of the impending test, the voluntary quit will stand. If an employee
takes a test for any reason and then quits before the results are completed, they will be considered FCS only
upon an MRO confirmed positive result.
What if an employee or applicant tests non-negative for a prescription drug and the prescription is in someone
else’s name?
If an applicant or employee produces a prescription that is in someone else’s name, or tells you “I took one of
my wife’s pills,” the test will be considered non-negative. Only if the applicant/employee has a “legitimate
medical reason” (backed up by a doctor’s statement saying the doctor approved him/her taking his wife’s
prescription before the test, for example) will the result be considered negative. This is an area that should
be handled carefully. If you have questions or need assistance, call ABG HSE Substance Abuse Administrator.

Page 924
ABG
What if an employee has a prescription for a drug that might affect his ability to perform his job safely?
Should any employee have a prescription for any barbiturate, benzodiazepine, or opiate, HSE/HR should
discuss with the employee the potential effect of the drug at work and, if necessary, have the employee
provide a note from the prescribing physician stating that, in his/her opinion, it is safe for the employee to
work construction while taking the particular drug. This is a safety precaution in that even properly
prescribed and used drugs may adversely affect a worker in the construction field.
What if an employee’s sample indicates low specific gravity?
Should any employee’s test results be returned with a low specific gravity reading, a second sample should be
obtained and should be taken under indirect observation. Also, ask the employee if they are taking any
prescription diuretics or have any medical problems that would result in a low specific gravity specimen.
Note: Direct observation is prohibited unless mandated by a consortium or DOT screening.
Prohibited conduct includes, but is not limited to:
 The manufacture, possession, distribution, selling, concealment, or use of illicit substances while at work,
while on company or client property, or when operating company equipment or vehicles (including leased or
rented vehicles).
 The manufacture, possession, distribution, selling, concealment, or use of alcohol while on duty (on or off
company property), while on company or client property, or when operating company equipment or vehicles
(including leased or rented vehicles). Exceptions for serving alcohol at authorized company functions must be
in writing by the HSE Regional Manager, the senior vice president, HR and Administration or their designees.
 Testing positive for an illicit substance or alcohol is in violation of this Program.
 Refusal or failure to submit to illicit substance or alcohol screening upon request.
 Attempting to subvert/avoid a test by means of sample substitution, adulteration, intentional insufficient
specimen quantity, or other. Such circumstances include, but are not limited to: (a) absence of all body hair,
with the exception of a valid medical explanation (such as alopecia universalis or chemotherapy) or
professional sport requirement, (b) refusal to submit a sufficient breath test in the absence of a valid medical
explanation (such as severe debilitation COPD), (c) substitution and/or falsification of urine or other test,
and/or (d) insufficient urine after following the DOT protocols for collection and shy bladder.
 Not reporting any legally prescribed or over-the-counter medication taken which could adversely affect the
employee’s ability to perform the job safely to ABG HSE or HR before beginning work
 To the extent allowed by law, employees are required to report any drug conviction to the ABG Site HSE
Representative or the Site Hr Representative within 5 days. Employees who operate project equipment or
drive project vehicles are required to report any alcohol conviction relating in any way to driving (such as
driving under the influence, driving while intoxicated, and possession) to the ABG Site HSE Representative or
Site HR Representative within 5 days. For purposes of this program, a conviction means that an employee is
found guilty, pleads guilty, or pleads ‘nolo contendere’ (no contest).

Page 925
ABG

 Failing to report conduct of others in violation of the Substance Abuse Prevention Program may result in
disciplinary action up to and including immediate termination.
SECTION IV
DRUGS OF ABUSE AND DRUG TESTING
AMPHETAMINES
Amphetamines are prescription stimulants which are medically used to treat narcolepsy (sleeping sickness)
and obesity (diet pills). Common names for these include Dexedrine, Spancap, Biphetamine, Delcobese,
Mediatric, Benzedrine, Preludin, Ritalin, and Sanorex. Methamphetamine, a more powerful amphetamine,
may come in the form of Desoxyn or Methampex.
Abusers are attracted because these drugs cause euphoria, increased alertness, and excitation. They also
increase pulse rate and blood pressure. Adverse effects include insomnia, restlessness, palpitations,
confusion, and dilation of pupils of the eyes, psychosis, convulsions, and death.
Other substances that may show up on a test as amphetamines include decongestants, such as Vicks inhalers,
ephedrine, Sucrets Decongestant Formula, as well as some blood vessel dilators. A non-negative result for
the sub-group methamphetamine should be addressed at once, since illegal “meth,” also known as “crank” or
“ice,” is becoming a widely used drug and produces extremely dangerous and violent behavior in the user.
However, a non-negative for methamphetamine does not rule out the possibility of legal drug use, since often
amphetamines show up both as amphetamine and methamphetamine. If you have a question about a non-
negative result for amphetamines, call your testing laboratory representative or ABG HSE Substance Abuse
Prevention Program Administrator. This is especially important in cold weather or when many people are
taking cold remedies. Again, cold or sinus medication could trigger a non-negative result.
METHAMPHETAMINE
Methamphetamine is an addictive stimulant drug that strongly activates certain systems in the brain.
Methamphetamine is chemically related to amphetamine, but the central nervous system effects are greater.
Both drugs have some limited therapeutic uses, primarily in the treatment of obesity.
Methamphetamine is made in illegal laboratories and has a high potential for abuse and addiction. Street
drugs are referred to by many names, such as “speed,” “meth,” and “chalk.” Methamphetamine
hydrochloride, clear chunky crystals resembling ice, which can be inhaled by smoking, is referred to as “ice,”
“crystal,” “glass,” and “tina.”
Methamphetamine is taken orally or intranasal (snorting the powder), by intravenous injection, and by
smoking. Immediately after smoking or intravenous injection, the methamphetamine user experiences an
intense sensation, called a “rush” or “flash,” that lasts only a few minutes and is described as extremely

Page 926
ABG

pleasurable. Oral or intranasal use produces euphoria—a high, but not a rush. Users may become addicted
quickly, and use it with increasing frequency and in increasing doses.
BARBITURATES
Barbiturates are depressants, also known as “downers” or “barbs.” These drugs are used as sedatives, anti-
hypnotics, and anti-convulsants. They must be prescribed by a physician. Examples of common barbiturates
include Amytal, Tuinal, Butisol, Pyridium Plus, Nembutal, Doriden, Placidyl, Equanil, Noludar, Miltown,
Luminal, Seconal, and Phenobarbital.
Barbiturates cause sedation, loss of inhibitions, and induction of sleep. They are usually accompanied by a
warning against mixing them with alcohol and against operating machinery while taking them. The abuse
potential for barbiturates is usually high.
Adverse effects of prolonged use or abuse include drowsiness, confusion, disorientation, slurred speech,
nausea, suppression of breathing reflexes, and physical addiction.
No substances are known to produce false non-negative results on a confirmed drug test. However, some
over-the-counter medications such as Primatene tablets, contain Phenobarbital, so it is very important to ask
the subject if he/she is taking any over-the-counter medications. If you are unsure about a barbiturate non-
negative result, call your laboratory representative or ABG HSE.
BENZODIAZEPINES
Benzodiazepines are prescription depressants that also are used by doctors as sedatives, hypnotic, and
tranquilizers. Common benzo drugs include Ativan, Valium, Librium, Dalmane, Serax, Xanax, Tranxene,
Diazepam, Restoril, Centrax, Halcion, and Paxipam.
Benzodiazepines produce most of the same effects as barbiturates such as relief of anxiety, sedation, and
induction of sleep. Benzodiazepines are the most abused prescription drug type in the world. Many people
take them even if prescribed for another person.
Adverse effects include drowsiness, fatigue, decreased activity level, dizziness, fainting, impaired ability to
concentrate, disturbed vision and hearing, physical addiction, and general disorientation.
No substances are known to give false non-negative drug test results for benzodiazepines. If you are not sure
if the drugs listed by the employee/applicant are in this category, call your laboratory representative or ABG
HSE.
COCAINE
Cocaine is a white granular powder that is available primarily through illegal means. No prescription can be
written for it. Its only medical usage is as packing for nasal or mouth surgery. Here it is applied by the
physician and not prescribed for the patient. Cocaine can be “snorted” up the nose in its powder form,

Page 927
ABG

dissolved in water and injected into the body by needle, or mixed with other common ingredients and
smoked in pipes as “crack.”
Cocaine, which is a natural stimulant, causes an intense feeling of euphoria, increased ability to concentrate,
alertness, sexual stimulation, and heightened sociability. It is a stimulant, so the effects of cocaine and
amphetamines are similar, but in cocaine these effects are more intense.
Cocaine also causes restlessness, nervousness, tremor, convulsions, and disturbances in heart rhythm,
psychological dependence, heart attacks, strokes, and death.
No substances are known that will give a false non-negative result for cocaine. However, the use of cocaine
by a doctor as a local anesthetic or to stop bleeding after nose, mouth, or throat surgery may show in a drug
test. It is important to ask the subject if they have been to the doctor or dentist for any minor surgery when
they fill out the Prescription Medication/Consent Form.
CANNABINOIDS (MARIJUANA)
Cannabinoids include the drugs marijuana, hashish, and hash oil. These are all derivatives of cannabis sativa,
which is the marijuana plant. Marijuana is also called pot, weed, grass, smoke, reefer, and other localized
nicknames.
Marijuana is occasionally used in treatment of nausea and vomiting due to cancer chemotherapy. Marijuana
is also used in the management of anorexia and nausea with Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS). A
doctor will write a prescription for the drug to be filled at a pharmacy just like other prescription drugs. The
doctor will not refer the patient to the local street corner, as some employees will have you believe.
Users experience euphoria, intensified sensual perceptions, loss of inhibitions, and a general feeling of
relaxation. Habitual use can cause paranoia, loss of coordination and perception, impairment of memory and
basic motor skills, lung disease, cancer, and psychological dependence.
No substance is known to produce false non-negatives of marijuana on a drug test. “Passive inhalation” is
often used as the excuse for a non-negative result. This is the term for casually inhaling some marijuana
smoke from someone else nearby smoking pot. Studies have proven that passive inhalation will not show up
in a GC/MS confirmation at the levels we require. Also, since the chemical that gets the smoker high, THC, is
absorbed into the fatty tissue of the body, marijuana can be detected days or even weeks after use,
depending on the amount of use, the purity of the marijuana, and the person’s metabolism. We are not
determining when someone used the drug, only that the person has amounts of the drug in their body above
our allowable levels.
OPIATES
Opiates are the true narcotic drugs. Most are derivatives of opium or are synthetic substitutes. These are the
true pain-killing drugs and all have an extremely high potential for physical addiction. Some are also

Page 928
ABG

prescribed as cough suppressants and as treatment for diarrhea. Legal opiates are prescribed for extreme
pain relief such as after surgery or an injury. Legal opiates include morphine, codeine, pectoral syrup, Tylenol
with codeine, Empirin Compound with codeine, Robitussin A-C, Dilaudid, Demerol, Mepergan, LAAM,
Percodan, Tussionex, Fentanyl, Lomotil, and others. Many of these do not require a prescription but may be
purchased by signature, such as Paregoric, Robitussin A-C, and others. States vary in what is allowed to be
purchased by signature without prescription, so be careful in dealing with non-negatives in this category.
Heroin is also an opiate and will show on a drug test as the subgroup morphine. Heroin is an illegal drug, so
no prescription for it will be authentic.
The opiate drugs produce euphoria, sedation, and relieve pain. Harmful effects include drowsiness, apathy,
confusion, nausea, respiratory depression, constricted pupils, physical addiction, and death.
Drug test results for opiates will be non-negative either for codeine or morphine or both. This is because the
drug family undergoes chemical changes in the body. The drug detected in the urine may not be in the same
form as the drug taken. For example, both heroin and codeine are converted to morphine before excretion in
the urine. A prescribed dose of codeine may show up as non-negative for codeine, for codeine and morphine,
or for morphine. If the person receives a non-negative in the opiate category and has a prescription for an
opiate drug, consider it acceptable
IMPORTANT NOTE: In some cases, regular ingestion of poppy seeds will show up as non-negative for opiates.
This is a rare occurrence but should a test subject have no prescription for an opiate drug after testing non-
negative, inquire if the subject eats poppy seeds. For assistance in the category, call your laboratory
representative or ABG HSE.
PHENCYCLIDINE
Phencyclidine, also known as PCP or “angel dust,” is a livestock anesthetic that has no permissible use for
humans. It is a synthetic, white, odorless, crystalline powder that causes hallucinations, seizures, and
delirium. Easily manufactured by illegal means, it is perhaps the most dangerous “street” drug in use today.
PCP can be “snorted” into the nose, used intravenously, or smoked. Its effects are rapid, usually seen in 45 -
120 minutes and lasting 12 to 48 hours. It is usually eliminated from the body within 4-7 days.
The effects of PCP include nausea, loss of coordination and perception, distorted vision, indifference to pain,
muscle rigidity, and a catatonic state. Higher doses can lead to coma, respiratory depression, and death.
Continued usage of even small doses can cause psychosis. The drug causes the user to become irrational and
often causes violent behavior.
A non-negative confirmation test for PCP usually means usage within the past week. The drug does not
appear naturally and there is no legal means of obtaining it. There is no other substance that will show up on
a confirmed non-negative for PCP. Therefore, a non-negative is absolute.
If you have a result that is non-negative for PCP, there is no prescription that can be produced. Call ABG HSE
for assistance in handling the removal of the employee.

Page 929
ABG

Page 930
ABG
RELEVANT CONTACTS
Evaluation, treatment, and rehabilitation may be provided by ABG SAP under contract, or SAP not affiliated with ABG.
Substance Abuse Program Administrator’s contact information:

Page 931
ABG
ALCOHOL, DRUG AND CONTRABAND POLICY
ADDENDUM
FOR NCMS / DISA SITES
EFFECTIVE DATE: July, 2012
APPROVED BY: NAZAR SALMAN
For the purpose of this policy “company” shall refer to: ABG

Page 932
ABG
1.0 PURPOSE
To insure a safe, healthy, and productive work environment for the employees of Plant Performance Services,
LLC and Plant Performance Services, Inc. (“ABG” or “Company”). Customers and others on company/customer
property, to protect company/customer property and assets, and to ensure efficient operations, company
shall have and enforce a written policy on drugs and alcohol which complies with the laws of the states in
which the company performs services for customers.
SCOPE

 Testing
APPLICATION
This Program applies to all field – foreign and domestic – project/sites and covers salaried, hourly, full-time,
part-time, and temporary employees as well as consultants, temporary agency workers, and candidates for
hire.
Compliance with this Program is a condition of employment or continued employment. Violation of this
Program will result in disciplinary action, up to and including termination.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
Company Personnel: any company’s employees, agents, subcontractors or subcontractors’ employees

performing field operations work on company and/or customers property. This includes temporary and part-
time personnel.
Candidates for Hire: Applicants who have been extended an offer of employment or re-employment as a
salaried or hourly employee.
Salaried Employees: ABG exempt or non-exempt employees whose pay is quoted weekly, biweekly, semi-
monthly, or monthly.
Hourly Employees: ABG Employees whose pay is quoted hourly.
Temporary Agency Workers: Individuals whose services are retained for a contracted period of time or for
assignments of limited duration.

Page 933
ABG
Consultants: Independent contractors who are hired to provide services which are considered of a type
historically and typically performed in the business field of ABG or its employees.
ABG and/or Customers Property: All real or tangible personal property, including facilities, buildings,
vehicles, products and equipment, either owned or controlled by ABG or its customers.
Reasonable Suspicion: A belief based on objective and articulable facts sufficient to lead a supervisor to
suspect use of Prohibited Substances.
Under the Influence: (1) the presence of a Prohibited Substance or metabolites of a Prohibited Substance in
the body fluids above the cut-off level established by Contractor’s (or Customers) Policy or other commonly
accepted cut-off level and/or (2) the presence of a Prohibited Substance that affects an individual in any
detectable manner. The symptoms of influence may be, but are not limited to, slurred speech or difficulty in
maintaining balance.
Prohibited/Illicit Substance: Any drug which is prohibited or restricted by law, illicit or unprescribed drugs,
controlled substances and mood or mind-altering substances (i.e. any synthetic derivative/product that
produces a marijuana-type high and any herbal products not intended for human consumption), including
prescribed drugs used in a manner inconsistent with the prescription, regardless of whether such conduct
constitutes an illegal act or whether the individual may be, or is, criminally prosecuted and/or convicted for
such conduct. Illicit substances include but are not limited to: marijuana / hashish, hemp, cocaine,
hallucinogens, amphetamines, barbiturates, benzodiazepines, PCP, depressants, opiates, methadone,
methamphetamines, “designer” drugs, and other substances (whether synthesized or natural) with mood
altering or similar effects. The term illicit substance also includes any prescription or over-the-counter
medication which is being used in an abusive or inappropriate manner and/or contrary to the prescribing
physician’s instructions. This may include drugs used in excess of the therapeutic dosage prescribed by a
licensed medical professional. A valid prescription will be required to prove legitimacy of the medication.
Illicit substances include those which some state laws or some foreign countries may recognize as “legal” but
which are not recognized as “legal to prescribe” by the Federal Drug Enforcement Agency, e.g. medical
marijuana for nausea in California. Illicit substances also include prescription drugs for which the employee
has no current prescription or using another person’s prescription.
Alcohol Abuse: Use or being under the influence of alcohol while on Company property, while on duty, or
while operating a vehicle owned, leased or rented by the Company. Alcohol may be served at Company
functions if authorized in writing by the Health, Safety, and Environmental (HSE) Director and the Company
President or Vice President, or their designees.
Substance Abuse: Any drug or alcohol use as defined under “illicit substance” and “alcohol abuse.”
Drug-free Workplace: No use of any drug or alcohol as defined under “illicit substance” and “alcohol abuse.”
Positive or Failed Drug Test: Any oral fluids, urine, or hair drug test for illicit substances that is confirmed by
laboratory-accepted methods and confirmed as positive by a certified medical review officer (MRO).

Page 934
ABG

.
Drug Screening Test: Drug and alcohol screening tests utilizing hair, urine, oral fluids, or breath that are
collected and evaluated onsite or offsite with testing devices and methods that are accepted standard
screening methodologies approved by ABG HSE.
Medical Review Officer (MRO): A physician (medical doctor or doctor of osteopathy). The MRO is
knowledgeable in substance abuse disorders and has appropriate medical training to interpret and evaluate
an individual's confirmed positive test result together with medical history and any other relevant biomedical
information. The MRO will be certified by a recognized certifying association.
Suspension: Any amount of time an employee who is reasonably suspected of violations under this Policy
may be removed from the workplace, with or without pay, pending test results or while an investigation is
conducted.
3.0 GENERAL
ABG is committed to providing a safe environment for its employees, clients, and contractors. Illicit drug use
and alcohol abuse constitute not only a significant danger to the safety and health of the user, but also to
fellow employees, contractors, and clients. As such, to further its goal of maintaining a safe, productive, and
drug-free workplace, the company maintains a zero tolerance for the inappropriate use or possession of illicit
drugs or alcohol in the workplace. The goal of this Program is to maintain a safe, productive, and drug-free
workplace.
ABG considers substance abuse screening part of the overall program to prevent illicit substances from
entering the workplace. Such screening will be conducted in compliance with all applicable federal, state, and
local laws, in-country requirements, and in compliance with the Company’s contractual obligations with
clients and bargaining units. Additionally, ABG has in effect, and enforces, drug and alcohol procedures as
required by the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT). These requirements, as well as those of other
governmental regulations and client requirements that exceed ABG’ standards, will supersede this Program
when applicable.
The ABG Substance Abuse Prevention Program, as developed by Corporate Health, Safety and Environmental
(HSE), includes chemical screening as a condition of employment for hourly and salaried applicants, and
employees reasonably suspected of using or being under the influence of controlled substances or alcohol.
This is in accordance with ABG’s HR-1505.
Each site develops a site-specific program based on Company and contractual requirements.
Each site-specific program is unique to the site and is non-transferable. Site-specific programs are developed
for each individual site using the ABG standard program as a base and then addressing client-specific
requirements and state-/country-specific regulations.
Management and employee orientation, supervisory drug awareness, and administrator’s training are to be
performed by ABG HSE personnel as soon as possible.

Page 935
ABG

4.0 PROHIBITIONS
ABG’s Policy shall prohibit company Personnel from the following:
A. Using, processing, selling, manufacturing, distributing, concealing, or transporting on company and/of

customer Property any of the following items:
i. Any Prohibited Substance
ii. Contraband, including firearms, ammunition, explosives, and weapons

iii. Illicit drugs, equipment or paraphernalia
B. While on company and/or customer Property, possessing or using prescription drugs or over-the-counter
medications that may cause impairment, except when all the following conditions have been met:
i. Prescription drugs have been prescribed by a physician for the person in possession of the drugs.
ii. The prescription is not expired and was filled by a licensed pharmacist for the person possessing the
drugs.
iii. The individual notifies his/her supervisor that he/she will be in possession of, or using, impairment-
causing prescription drugs or over-the-counter medication and, if possible, appropriate steps are
taken to accommodate the possibility of impairment. If such accommodation cannot be made,
removal from work for the period of possible impairment shall be required.
C. Being Under the Influence of Prohibited Substances while performing any work for company
and /or customers.
D. Switching or adulterating any urine, blood or other sample using for testing.
E. Performing work for company and/or customers when an individual has tested positive or refused testing
in any employment-related tests.
5.0 SEARCHES AND INSPECTIONS
As a condition of employment, all employees must consent to the following: On company and/or customer
property, at anytime, company and/or customer supervisors, contractor supervisor and/or authorized search
and inspection specialists, including scent-trained animals, may conduct unannounced searches and
inspections of company and/or company personnel and their property. That property may include, but is not
limited to, wallets, purses, lockers, baggage, offices, desks, toolboxes, clothing and vehicles.
6.0 TESTING

Page 936
ABG

Each site receives a site-specific Substance Abuse Program Policy that includes the Test Administrator’s Guide.
All employees will be required to complete the Consent to Urinalysis form upon hire.
Each ABG project, site, or office should establish a time limitation for employees to comply with the screening
process. Refer to Site Standard Time Limit for Providing Sample Form.
Testing should be performed in accordance with the Test Administrator’s Guide.
Requirements:
i. Pre-Access Testing
a. All company Personnel are subject to “customer” pre-access testing which might mandate that
the employee(s) receive a negative result on a drug and alcohol test within 60 days or less
preceding the company Personnel’s first access to customer Property (some clients will accept if
employees are currently active in a DOT random testing pool). Annual drug and alcohol testing
also by specific customers. Upon customer’s request, company shall so certify in writing. A
single letter certifying negative tests results for all Contractor Personnel requiring site access is
preferred.
b. Company will provide no information to customers identifying individuals who have positive pre-
access tests.
ii. Post-Incident Testing:
a. If company and/or customer determine from the best information available immediately after a
work-related Incident that performance of one or more company Personnel contributed to the
incident, or cannot be completely discounted as a contributing factor to the Incident, company
shall remove that/those individual(s) from customer Property and surrender his/her site
credentials to the customers. For purposes of this part “Incident” means an event that causes
personal injury requiring medical treatment beyond first aid administered at the work site, all
doctor visits, or property damage of more than $1,000 or an event that carried the potential for
personal injury or property damage.
b. An individual so removed may be allowed to return to work on customer Property only after
company conducts alcohol and drug testing on the individual as soon as possible following the
individual’s removal from the site, and the Contractor (ABG) certifies in writing the test
identification number, the individual’s social security number (last 4 digits), the test date and
time and a negative test result. On that written certification the company will include a consent
signed by the individual permitting disclosure to customer of the test result.
iii. Reasonable Suspicion Testing

Page 937
ABG

a. Upon Reasonable Suspicion of company and/or customers that company Personnel is Under the
Influence of a Prohibited Substance while on company and/or customer Property, company shall
remove the individual(s) from the customer Property and surrender his/her site credentials to
the customer.
b. An individual removed from company and/or customer Property for Reasonable Suspicion may
be allowed to return to work on company and/or customer Property only after company
conducts alcohol and drug testing on the individual as soon as possible following the individual’s
removal from the site, and the company certifies in writing the test identification number the
individual’s social security number (last 4 digits), the test
date and a negative test result. On that written certification the company will include a consent
signed by the individual permitting disclosure to customers of the test result.
iv. Random Testing

All employees on site will be subject to random screening unless disallowed by state law. It is
recommended that a minimum of 10 percent of site employees be tested each month.
If specific customers require random drug and/or alcohol testing, then the following guidelines will be
followed unless more stringent guidelines are required by the customer:
Unless otherwise specified by DOT, company employees and “high risk” suppliers shall be
subject to unannounced random testing for the 5 DOT substances as well as barbiturates,
benzodiazepines, methadone, and Propoxyphene on a random (or quarterly) basis that will
yield a compliance of an annualized rate of at least 50% (unless set at a lower rate by a specific
client) spread reasonably throughout the year. If required by the specific client, a breath
alcohol test will be given at the same time as the drug test. Upon notification of a drug and/or
alcohol test, company employee must report to the collection site within 60 minutes, plus
travel time. Failure to report to the collection site, refusal to test, or adulterating a specimen
is considered the same as a positive test and individual will not be allowed on company and/or
customer premises.
The supplier could utilize subcontractors when performing work for the client. Suppliers must
ensure that subcontractors have a drug/alcohol program that meets the requirements of the
client. If subcontractors are utilized by the supplier, the supplier’s policy must state that
subcontractors must comply with the supplier’s policy and testing requirements.
v. Wall-to-Wall Testing
The Substance Abuse Policy requires the use of Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) certified laboratories. All alcohol testing shall be conducted on devices approved by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA). Alcohol testing is performed by a
breath, blood, or saliva (with breath confirmation test). All non-DOT collection and testing
procedures shall mirror as closely as possible DOT 49 CFR Part 40 protocols.

Page 938
ABG
7.0 NON-COMPLIANCE
Any company personnel found in violation of this policy and/or customer’s Policy or who refuse to cooperate
with the searches and tests included in this policy and/or customer’s Policy shall be permanently removed by
company from customer Property and from performing work for customer. Company must immediately
notify customers that the individual has become disqualified from performing work for them. Company will
immediately review with customer that nature of the work for them. Company must immediately notify
customers that the individual has become disqualified from performing work for them. Company will
immediately review with customer the nature of the
Work previously performed by the individual. At customer’s request company shall, at its sole cost and risk,
inspect all work in which the individual may have participated and submit a written report to the customer
that documents the inspection, any findings and the actions taken to assure all deficiencies have been
corrected.
8.0 SUBSTANCE ABUSE AWARENESS
Company warrants that company Personnel performing work have each been fully informed of the
requirements of this Addendum and company’s Policy. Before beginning work on company and/or customer
property, each company personnel must sign a written certification that he/she has been so informed and
agrees to be bound by those requirements.
9.0 SPECIAL PROVISIONS – CUSTOMER-APPROVED CONSORTIUM
Enrollment in, and maintenance of “active status” in an Customer-approved consortium that requires pre-
enrollment testing and continuously subjects active members to random drug and/or alcohol testing at an
annual effective rate of at least 50% (unless otherwise specified by DOT) will be recognized as satisfying some
customer’s pre-access and random testing requirement. All costs associated with implementation and
maintenance of this policy are the responsibility of company.
10.0 APPLICABLE LAWS
Company shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local drug and alcohol related laws and
regulations (e.g., DOT regulations, Department of Defense (DOD), Drug-Free Workplace Policy, Drug-Free
Workplace Act of 1988, etc.).
11.0 SUPERVISOR TRAINING
Company shall provide training regarding this policy. Training on the recognition of performance indicators of
probable drug and/or alcohol use on its effects and consequences to personal health, safety and the
workplace shall be included. It is required that each supervisor employee who will determine whether an
employee must be tested based on reasonable suspicion, receive at least one 60-minute training session on
the specific, contemporaneous, physical, behavior and performance indicators of probable drug and alcohol

Page 939
ABG

use. Records of individuals trained (including name, date) must be maintained by the company and available
to customers.
12.0 AUDIT
A. Company shall keep records required by this Addendum available for inspection by customers during the
period that the company is performing work for customers and for a period of (3) years after company
ceases to perform work for that customer.
B. Customers shall have the right, at its discretion, to perform unannounced audits of the company’s alcohol
and drug program to verify that company’s and its enforcement comply with these guidelines.
C. At the customer’s request, company will provide separate lists of company Personnel (including name
and last 4 digits of the social security number) who were eligible for customers work on a date specified
by customers. Upon further request, company will provide customers with the following information on
each alcohol and drug test conducted for each company Personnel identified by customers from those
lists:
1. Date of and type of test (e.g. random, pre-access) and

2. Laboratory chain-of-custody identification number and/or test number
Company will obtain an agreement from any consortium, laboratory, and/or Medical Review Officer
(MRO) providing drug/alcohol testing services for company that upon submission by customers of a list,
or lists, of last 4 digits of social security numbers, chain-of custody ID numbers and test dates,
1) the consortium/laboratory will verify that the tests were conducted as represented and
2) The consortium/laboratory and/or Contractor MRO will provide a sworn statement that each of
the tests identified by the customer were confirmed as negative or that it/they cannot so swear.

Page 940
ABG
ATTACHMENT A
DISA NON-DOT TESTING INFORMATION
COLLECTION FACILITY NAME Any and all Certified collectors

ADDRESS
PHONE NUMBER
CONTACT PERSON
TESTING LABORATORY NAME Quest Diagnostics

ADDRESS 10101 Renner Blvd.
PHONE NUMBER Lenexa, KS. 66219
NATIONALLY CERTIFIED? Yes No Yes
MRO (Medical Review Officer) MRO NAME Lenox Health Care MRO Services
Dr. Barry Sachs
MRO PHONE 1-800-752-6432
SUBSTANCE SCREEN LEVEL CONFIRMATION LEVEL

Amphetamines 300 ng/ml 250 ng/ml
Barbiturates 300 ng/ml 100 ng/ml
Benzodiazepines 300 ng/ml 100 ng/ml
Cocaine 300 ng/ml 100 ng/ml
Methadone 300 ng/ml 100 ng/ml
Opiates 2000 ng/ml 2000 ng/ml Morphine
2000 ng/ml Codeine
Cannablnoids 20 ng/ml 10 ng/ml
PCP 25 ng/ml 25 ng/ml
Propoxphene 300 ng/ml 200 ng/ml
ALCOHOL TESTING METHOD USED: (Must be preformed by breath, blood or SCREEN CONFIRMATION
saliva with breath confirmation) LEVEL LEVEL
Evidential Breath Testing Device (EBT) Note: Alcohol screening and
0.02 0.04
confirmation Methods are conducted according to DOT Protocol.
SUBSTANCE SCREEN LEVEL CONFIRMNATION LEVEL

COCAINE
PHENCYLCIDINE
MARIJUANA (THC)
OPIATES 6-Acetylmorphine
AMPHETAMINE / METHAMPHETAMINES
MDMA 1
MDA 2
MDEA 3
BARBITURATES
BENZODIAZEPINES
METHADONE
PROPOXYPHENE
1 - Methylenedioxymethamphetamine (MDMA) SEE ABOVE SEE ABOVE
2 - Methlenedioxyamphetamine (MDA)
3 – Methlenedioxyethylamphetamine (MDEA)
ALCOHOL TESTING METHOD USED SCREEN LEVEL CONFIRMATION LEVEL

ABG
ADDENDUM CONSENT AND AUTHORIZATION
I hereby acknowledge that I have been provided a copy of, and agree to be bound by the requirements
of the addendum (DISA) to the ABG Drug/Alcohol policy requirements. I consent to all requirements
contained in the policy, including, but not limited to, the Searches and Inspection requirements in
Section 5.0. I understand that disciplinary action, up to and including termination, will result if I violate
this Policy.
_________________________________ ____________________
_________________________________ ____________________
Employee Printed Name Employee ID (last 4 digits)
Consent and authorization for disclosure to clients of ABG the DISA alcohol and drug test results and
related information. (ALERE drug test results if employee is currently active in DISA and offered
employment at a DISA work site)
I hereby consent to disclosure by ABG and its agents, including, but not limited to, any collecting and
testing agencies, of the test results identified above and any related information, including but not
limited to the last 4 digits of my Social Security Number, to clients of ABG and its authorized agents,
assigns, or representatives.
_________________________________ ____________________
_________________________________ _____________________

ABG
Employee Printed Name Employee ID (last 4 digits)

ABG
TRENCHING, EXCAVATION AND SHORING
TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, AND SHORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................902
Definitions..............................................................................................................................................................903
Aluminum hydraulic shoring..............................................................................................................................903
Benching.............................................................................................................................................................903
Cave-in ..............................................................................................................................................................903
Competent person.............................................................................................................................................903
Excavation..........................................................................................................................................................903
Registered professional engineer.......................................................................................................................903
Shield (shield system).........................................................................................................................................904
Shoring (shoring system)....................................................................................................................................904
Sloping (sloping system).....................................................................................................................................904
Trench (trench excavation)................................................................................................................................904
Before Excavating...................................................................................................................................................904
Testing Methods.....................................................................................................................................................905
Visual test...............................................................................................................................................................905
Manual tests...........................................................................................................................................................905
Spoil ..................................................................................................................................................................... 906
Surface Crossing of Trenches..................................................................................................................................906
Ingress & Egress......................................................................................................................................................906
Protective Support Systems....................................................................................................................................906
Sloping ..............................................................................................................................................................907
Benching.............................................................................................................................................................908
Support Systems, Shield Systems, and Other Protective Systems..........................................................................910
Timber Shoring...................................................................................................................................................910
Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring..............................................................................................................................910
Other Support Systems...........................................................................................................................................914
Shielding.................................................................................................................................................................914
Other Protective Systems...................................................................................................................................914
General Requirements for Excavations...................................................................................................................914
Training...................................................................................................................................................................915
Current Certified Excavation Workers................................................................................................................915
Inspection Procedures............................................................................................................................................915
Personal Protective Equipment..............................................................................................................................916
Recordkeeping........................................................................................................................................................916

Page 944
ABG
PURPOSE
One of the preventable hazards of site work is the danger of trench cave-ins. Yet every year in the U.S., there are
an estimated 75 to 200 deaths and more than 1,000 lost work days per year from trenching accidents. Other
hazards associated with trenches include contact with numerous underground utilities, hazardous atmospheres,
water accumulation, and collapse of adjacent structures. For these reasons, we have written Excavation
Procedures for both our daily and occasional excavation workers. It is the policy at ABG to permit only trained and
authorized personnel to create or work in excavations.
Definitions
Aluminum hydraulic shoring means an engineered shoring system comprised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders
(cross braces), used in conjunction with vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal rails (walers). Such a system is
designed specifically to support the sidewalls of an excavation and prevent cave-ins.
Benching means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating the sides of an excavation to
form one or a series of horizontal levels or steps, usually with vertical or near-vertical surfaces between levels.
Cave-in means the separation of a mass of soil or rock material from the side of an excavation, or the loss of soil
from under a trench shield or support system, and its sudden movement into the excavation, either by falling or
sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure and immobilize a person.
Competent person means one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings,
or working conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. All competent persons must complete the 4-hour Physical
Plant trenching and shoring class, successfully pass the exam, and be certified for successful completion of the
class. A competent person should have and be able to demonstrate the following:
- Training, experience, and knowledge of:

o soil analysis,
o use of protective systems, and
o requirements of applicable OSHA regulations.
- Ability to detect:
o conditions that could result in cave-ins,
o failures in protective systems,
o hazardous atmospheres, and
o other hazards, including those associated with confined spaces.
- Authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate existing and predictable hazards and to stop
work when required.

Page 945
ABG
Excavation means any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by earth removal.
Registered professional engineer means a person who is registered as a professional engineer.
Shield (shield system) means a structure that is able to withstand the forces imposed on it by a cave-in and
thereby protect employees with the structure. Shields can be permanent structure or can be designed to be
portable and moved along as work progresses. Also known as trench box or trench shield.
Shoring (shoring system) means a structure such as a metal hydraulic, mechanical or timber shoring system that
supports the sides of an excavation and which is designed to prevent cave-ins.
Sloping (sloping system) means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating to form sides of
an excavation that are inclined away from the excavation so as to prevent cave-ins. The angle of incline varies
with differences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure, and application of
surcharge loads.
Trench (trench excavation) means a narrow excavation (in relation to its length) made below the surface of the
ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench is not greater than 15 feet. If
forms or other structures are installed or constructed in an excavation as to reduce the dimension measured from
the forms or structure to the side of the excavation to 15 feet or less, the excavation is also considered to be a
trench.
The Site Supervisor is responsible for developing and maintaining the written Excavation Procedures. These
procedures are kept in the Site Safety Manager office.
Our Excavation Procedures are administered under the direction of our competent person(s), someone capable of
identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary,
hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them. These competent persons include Site Safety Manager and all Site Supervisors.
Before Excavating
Before anyone at this company begins excavating, we follow the steps below:
- Contact the utility companies or property owners and ask the companies or owners to find the exact
location of the underground installations in the area.
- If the utility companies or owners do not respond within 24 hours or the period established by law or
ordinance, or if they cannot establish the location of the utility lines, the excavation may proceed with

Page 946
ABG
caution. In this situation, provide employees with detection equipment or other safe and acceptable
means to locate utility installations.
- Remove or adequately support the following objects (i.e., trees, rocks, and sidewalks) in the excavation
area that could create a hazard to employees.
- Using applicable OSHA regulations, classify the type of soil and rock deposits at the site as either stable
rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C soil. The soil classification is based on the results of at least one visual and
at least one manual analysis conducted by a competent person. Details of the acceptable visual and
manual analyses are to be found in the OSHA regulation. NOTE: Soil classification is not necessary if the
excavation will be sloped to an angle of one and one-half horizontal to one vertical.
- Have the competent person choose the appropriate method for protective support systems, as necessary.
See the Protective Support Systems section for the procedures he/she used for selecting this system.
Testing Methods
The competent person in charge of the excavation shall be responsible for determining whether the soil is Type B
or C. The competent person shall use a visual test coupled with one or more manual tests.
Visual test
In addition to checking the items on the trench inspection form, the competent person should perform a visual
test to evaluate the conditions around the site. In a visual test, the entire excavation site is observed, including the
soil adjacent to the site and the soil being excavated. The competent person also checks for any signs of vibration.
During the visual test, the competent person should check for crack-line openings along the failure zone that
would indicate tension cracks, look for existing utilities that indicate that the soil has been previously disturbed,
and observe the open side of the excavation for indications of layered geologic structuring.
This person should also look for signs of bulging, boiling, or sloughing, as well as for signs of surface water seeping
from the sides of the excavation or from the water table.
In addition, the area adjacent to the excavation should be checked for signs of foundations or other intrusions
into the failure zone, and the evaluator should check for surcharging and the spoil distance from the edge of the
excavation.
Manual tests
Thumb penetration test- Attempt to press the thumb firmly into the soil in question. If the thumb penetrates no
further than the length of the nail, it is probably Type B soil. If the thumb penetrates the full length of the thumb,
it is Type C. It should be noted that the thumb penetration test is the least accurate testing method.
Dry strength test- Take a sample of dry soil. If it crumbles freely or with moderate pressure into individual grains it
is considered granular (Type C). Dry soil that falls into clumps that subsequently break into smaller clumps (and

Page 947
ABG
the smaller clumps can only be broken with difficulty) it is probably clay in combination with gravel, sand, or silt
(Type B).
Plasticity or Wet Thread Test - Take a moist sample of the soil. Mold it into a ball and then attempt to roll it into a
thin thread approximately 1/8 inch in diameter by two inches in length. If the soil sample does not break when
held by one end, it may be considered Type B.
A pocket penetrometer, shearvane, or torvane may also be used to determine the unconfined compression
strength of soils.
Spoil
Temporary spoil shall be placed no closer than 2 feet from the surface edge of the excavation, measured from the
nearest base of the spoil to the cut. This distance should not be measured from the crown of the spoil deposit.
This distance requirement ensures that loose rock or soil from the temporary spoil will not fall on employees in
the trench.
Spoil should be placed so that it channels rainwater and other run-off water away from the excavation.
Spoil should be placed so that it cannot accidentally run, slide, or fall back into the excavation.
Permanent spoil should be placed some distance from the excavation.
Surface Crossing of Trenches
Surface crossing of trenches should not be made unless absolutely necessary. However, if necessary, they are only
permitted under the following conditions:
- Vehicle crossings must be designed by and installed under the supervision of a registered professional
engineer.
- Walkways or bridges must: have a minimum clear width of 20 inches, be fitted with standard rails, and
extend a minimum of 24 inches past the surface edge of the trench.
Ingress & Egress
Trenches 4 feet or more in depth shall be provided with a fixed means of egress.
Spacing between ladders or other means of egress must be such that a worker will not have to travel more than
25 feet laterally to the nearest means of egress.
Ladders must be secured and extend a minimum of 36 inches above the landing.

Page 948
ABG
Metal ladders should be used with caution, particularly when electric utilities are present.
Protective Support Systems
The company protects each employee in an excavation from cave-ins during an excavation by an adequate
protective system designed in accordance with OSHA standards. Protective system options include proper sloping
or benching of the sides of the excavation; supporting the sides of the excavation with timber shoring or
aluminum hydraulic shoring; or placing a shield between the side of the excavation and the work area. ABG has
the following standard operating procedures regarding protective support systems for excavations, in accordance
with safe practices and procedures and OSHA excavation regulations:
- If the excavation is made entirely of stable rock, then no protective system is necessary or used.
- If the excavation is less than 5 feet in depth (provided there is no indication of a potential cave-in), then
no protective system is necessary or used.
- If the excavation is less than or equal to 20 feet in depth, then competent person chooses the most
practical design approach (that meets required performance criteria) for the particular circumstance,
and/or
- A registered professional engineer designs all protective systems for use in the excavation.
Sloping
When sloping is used to protect against cave-ins, these options can be chosen for designing sloping systems:
- If a soil classification is not made, then slope the sides of the excavation to an angle not steeper than one
and one-half horizontal to one vertical (34 degrees). A slope of this gradation or less is considered safe for
any type of soil.
- Use the OSHA standard to determine the maximum allowable slope and allowable configurations for
sloping systems. The soil type must be determined in order to use this option.
- Use other tabulated data approved by a registered professional engineer.
- Have an engineer design and approve the system to be used.
There are a number of exceptions or special cases to these general sloping guidelines, which can be utilized by
your company if the conditions meet the exception's requirements. The exceptions and conditions are outlined
below:
- In Type A soil, simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12
feet high or less in depth may have a maximum allowable slope of 1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical.
- In Type A soil, all excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower
portions must have a maximum vertical side of 3.5 feet.
- In Type A soil, excavations over 8 feet but less than 12 feet in depth with unsupported vertically sided
lower portions must have a maximum allowable slope of 1H:1V and a maximum vertical side of 3.5 feet.

Page 949
ABG
- In Type A soil, excavations 20 feet or less with vertically sided lower portions that are supported or
shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 H:1V. The support or shield system must extend at
least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.
- In Type B soil, all excavations 20 feet or less which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or
supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. The excavation shall have a
maximum allowable slope of 1H:1V.
- In Type C soil, all excavations 20 feet or less which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or
maximum allowable slope of 1-1/2 H:1V.
- When an excavation contains layers of different types of soils, the general sloping requirements do not
apply. The excavation must be sloped according to the OSHA standard.
Maximum allowable slopes for excavations less than 20' based on soil type and angle to the horizontal are as
follows:
Soil Type Height/depth ratio Slope angle

Type B 1:1 45 degrees
Type C 1 1/2:1 34 degrees
A 10-foot-deep trench in Type B soil would have to be sloped to a 45-degree angle, or sloped 10 feet back in both
directions. Total distance across a 10-foot-deep trench would be 20 feet, plus the width of the bottom of the
trench itself.
In Type C soil, the trench would be sloped at a 34-degree angle, or 15 feet back in both directions for at least 30
feet across, plus the width of the bottom of the trench itself. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth
shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2:1.

Page 950
ABG
The competent person chooses the best option for sloping for the job at hand.
Benching
When benching is used to protect against cave-ins, these options can be chosen for designing benching systems:
- Use Appendices A and B of 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P to determine the maximum allowable slope and
allowable configurations for benching systems. The soil type must be determined in order to use this
option.
- Use other tabulated data approved by a registered professional engineer.
- Have an engineer design and approve the system to be used.
There are a number of exceptions or special cases to these general benching guidelines, which should be utilized
by your company if the conditions meet the exception's requirements. The exceptions and conditions are outlined
below:
- In Type A soil, simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12
feet high or less in depth may have a maximum allowable slope of 1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical.
- In Type A soil, all excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower
portions must have a maximum vertical side of 3.5 feet.
- In Type A soil, excavations over 8 feet but less than 12 feet in depth with unsupported vertically sided
lower portions must have a maximum allowable slope of 1H:1V and a maximum vertical side of 3.5 feet.
- In Type A soil, excavations 20 feet or less with vertically sided lower portions that are supported or
shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4H:1V. The support or shield system must extend at
least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.
- In Type B soil, all excavations 20 feet or less which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or
maximum allowable slope of 1H:1V.
- In Type C soil, all excavations 20 feet or less which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or
maximum allowable slope of 1-1/2 H:1V.

Page 951
ABG
When an excavation contains layers of different types of soils, the general sloping requirements do not apply. The
excavation must be sloped according to the OSHA standard.
There are two basic types of benching, single and multiple, which can be used in conjunction with sloping.
All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. In Type B soil, the
vertical height of the benches must not exceed 4 feet. Benches must be below the maximum allowable slope for
that soil type. In other words, a 10-foot deep trench in Type B soil must be benched back 10 feet in each direction,
with the maximum of a 45-degree angle.
Benching is not allowed in Type C soil.
The competent person chooses the best option for sloping for the job at hand.
Support Systems, Shield Systems, and Other Protective Systems
Timber Shoring

Page 952
ABG
When trenches do not exceed 20 feet, timber shoring according to OSHA design specifications may be used.
Designs for timber shoring in trenches for company work sites are determined by the competent person using the
following method(s):
- Use the requirements set forth by OSHA. The design specifications for timber shoring provided by OSHA
may be found in the OSHA standard. These tables refer to the actual dimensions and not nominal
dimensions of the timber. If the competent person chooses to use nominal size shoring, he/she must use
the additional tables found in the OSHA standard. The soil type in which the excavation is made must be
determined in order to use the OSHA data.
NOTE: The specifications do not apply in every situation experienced in the field; the data were developed
to apply to most common trenching situations. If the specifications do not apply to the situation
encountered in the field, the competent person will make a determination of what approach to use to
allow safe protective support of the excavation.
- Use data provided by the manufacturer of the support system.

- Use other tabulated data approved by an engineer.
- Have a registered professional engineer design the system.
Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring
Determined by the competent person, each design for aluminum hydraulic shoring is based upon the following
method(s):
- Use the manufacturer's tabulated data and design in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications,
recommendations, and limitations. Deviations from the manufacturer's specifications, recommendations,
or limitations are only allowed upon written approval of the manufacturer, which must be obtained by the
competent person prior to implementation. The written approval is kept at the job site during
construction of the protective system.
- Use the OSHA specifications if the manufacturer's tabulated data cannot be utilized. NOTE: Before using
the OSHA data, the soil type must be determined.

Page 953
ABG
Here are some typical installations of aluminum hydraulic shoring:
Vertical aluminum hydraulic shoring (spot bracing)
Vertical aluminum hydraulic shoring (with plywood)

Vertical aluminum hydraulic shoring (stacked)
Aluminum hydraulic shoring waler system (typical)

Page 954
ABG
Other Support Systems
Designs for our support systems are determined by the competent person using the following method(s):

Shielding
Determined by the competent person, designs for shielding are based upon the following method(s):

Other Protective Systems
Designs for our protective systems are determined by the competent person using the following method(s):

General Requirements for Excavations
The following rules are to be followed at all times by all employees working on, in, or near excavations, as
applicable:
- Employees exposed to public vehicular traffic must wear warning vests or other suitable garments made
of retroflective or high-visibility material.
- The competent person inspects the excavation and the adjacent areas on a daily basis for possible cave-
ins, failure of protective systems and equipment, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions
(see appendices for Daily Inspection Checklist. Inspections are also required after the occurrence of any
natural (such as rain) or man-made events (such as blasting) that could increase the potential for hazards.
Employees may not begin work until after being informed by the competent person that these inspections
are complete.
- A warning system is used to alert operators of heavy equipment and other employees at the work site of
the edge of an excavation.

Page 955
ABG
- Adequate protection is provided to protect employees from falling rock, soil, or other materials and
equipment. Protection is provided by placing and keeping such materials or equipment at least 2 feet
from the edge of excavations, or by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to prevent materials or
equipment from falling or rolling into excavations, or by a combination of both if necessary.
- Employees are not permitted under loads that are handled by lifting or digging equipment. Employees are
not allowed to work in the excavation above other employees unless the lower level employees are
adequately protected.
- While the excavation is open, underground installations are protected, supported, or removed as
necessary to safeguard employees. Adjacent structures are supported to prevent possible collapse.
- Employees are not permitted to work in excavations where water has accumulated or is accumulating
unless adequate precautions have been taken. Diversion ditches, dikes, or other means are used to
prevent surface water from entering an excavation and to provide drainage to the adjacent area.
- Before an employee enters an excavation greater than 4 feet in depth, the competent person must test
the atmosphere where oxygen deficiency or a hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably exist (i.e.,
excavations in landfill areas or excavations in areas where hazardous substances are stored nearby).
Emergency rescue equipment is readily available and attended when hazardous atmospheric conditions
exist or may develop.
- Sufficient means for exiting excavations 4 feet deep or more are provided and are within 25 feet of lateral
travel for employees.
- Guardrails are provided if there are walkways or bridges crossing over an excavation.
Training
The Site Supervisor will identify all new employees in the employee orientation program and make arrangements
with management to schedule training. The following person(s) will conduct initial training and evaluation: Site
Safety Manager and/or the Site Supervisor. These instructor(s) have the necessary knowledge, training, and
experience to train excavation workers.
After an employee has completed the training program, our company keeps records certifying that each
excavation worker has successfully completed excavation training. The certificate includes the name of the
worker, the date(s) of the training, and the signature of the person who did the training. SITE SAFETY MANAGER is
responsible for keeping a copy of all training certification records.
Current Certified Excavation Workers
Under no circumstances shall an employee create or work in an excavation until he/she has successfully
completed this company’s excavation training program. This includes all new excavation workers regardless of
claimed previous experience.

Page 956
ABG
Inspection Procedures
Our competent person inspects excavations daily and during poor weather. Our inspection checklist is attached to
these written Excavation Procedures. Site Supervisor is responsible for retaining completed inspection checklists.
All excavation workers required to wear all required personal protective equipment and are trained when it is
necessary; what equipment is necessary; how to properly put on, take off, adjust, and wear it; limitations of the
equipment; and proper care, maintenance, useful life, and disposal of PPE.
Recordkeeping
We keep a copy of the following documents at the job site during construction of a particular excavation
protective system and then store them in the Site Safety Manager office at company headquarters where they will
be readily available to OSHA upon request:
- Tabulated data for designing any of our sloping or benching systems

- Designs of any sloping or benching systems approved by a registered professional engineer
- Manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations, and limitations for designs of support systems, shield
systems, and other protective systems drawn from manufacturer’s tabulated data
- Manufacturer’s approval to deviate from the specifications, recommendations, and limitations for designs
of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems drawn from manufacturer’s tabulated
data
- Tabulated data for designing any of our support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems
Designs of all support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems approved by a registered
professional engineer

Page 957
ABG
Excavation and Trenching Safety Checklist (Pre-work Daily Inspection
Excavation and Trenching Safety Checklist (Pre-work and Daily Inspection)
EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING SAFETY CHECKLIST

(Pre-work and Daily Inspection)
PRE-WORK
Excavation
Job/Task ID: Permit No.:
Verified By Date
Excavation permit is completed, dated, all required Supervisor:
signatures obtained, all attachments/scans/etc. are
complete as required. (Supervisor and Competent Competent
Person) Person:
Competent Person(s) has been designated/assigned;
designation form is complete/current (within 1 year). Supervisor:
(Supervisor)
Initial (pre-excavation) call
Date:
to
Supervisor:
“U DIG” has been made. Time:
(Supervisor)
Walkdown of proposed excavation performed.
(Supervisor and Competent Person)
Walkdown to ensure:
Supervisor:
 Ground markings identifying underground
obstructions are present and applied in
accordance with 000.653.3311.
 Evaluation of the work area for potential
hazards that have not been addressed by
scanning existing drawing research efforts Competent
and/or other pre-task planning activities. Person:
Excavation work is released to begin.
Supervisor:
(Supervisor)

ABG
Excavation and Trenching Permit

Project Name Project Location Project No. /Contract No.
Date Time Expiration Date
Job Description and Location (be specific)
Before Trenching and Excavation
Soil Classification: Check for previously disturbed ground

Stable Rock Type A Type B Type C Adequacy and availability of all equipment, including personal protective
Requirements have been met and required data gear, shoring material, signs, barricades, and machinery
recommended Other known obstructions (such as footing concrete encasements)
Proximity to utilities, buildings, footings or pilings, Allowable slope
and sources of vibration
Overhead obstructions reviewed
Owners of utilities, service, or transmission piping, (electrical,
Protective systems depth of a trench or excavation of 5 feet (1.5 meters) or
telephone, water, sewer)
more – check the applicable boxes below:
Site of Excavation:
Sloping and benching
Depth ________ Width ________ Length ________
Timber shoring for trenches
Changing ground conditions, particularly after rain Aluminum hydraulic shoring for trenching
fall Alternative to timber shoring
Monitor for possible oxygen deficiency or gaseous Selection of protective systems
conditions Designed shoring (data must be filed on site)
Adequacy of shoring and/or sloping as work progresses Note: Sloping or benching for excavations greater than 20 feet
Entrance and Exit Facilities: (6.1 meters) deep must be designed by a registered professional
Stairway Ladders Ramp engineer.
Change in vehicular and machinery operation patterns Atmospheric testing required Yes No
Oxygen LEL (%) Toxics
Water removal equipment and operation
Adequacy of portable trench boxes or trench shields
Comments
Approver Approval Signatures Date
Competent Person
Electrical
Equipment Operator
Supervisor
Mechanical Engineer
Civil Superintendent

ABG
Other Approval if Required by Civil Engineer or

Registered Professional Engineer
Note: All items must be evaluated before start of work.

ABG
WELDING & CUTTING PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................920
Hot-Work Permit....................................................................................................................................................922
Operating Procedures.............................................................................................................................................923
Compressed Gas Cylinders.................................................................................................................................923
Gas Welding and Cutting....................................................................................................................................924
Fire Prevention...................................................................................................................................................926
Fire Watchers.....................................................................................................................................................927
Ventilation..........................................................................................................................................................927
Confined Spaces.................................................................................................................................................928
Flammable, Toxic, or Hazardous Materials........................................................................................................928
Electrical Equipment..........................................................................................................................................928
Fall Protection....................................................................................................................................................929
Inspections.............................................................................................................................................................929
Maintenance..........................................................................................................................................................929
Signs and Labels......................................................................................................................................................929
Low-Pressure Manifold...........................................................................................................................................931
Welder Maintenance & Inspection.........................................................................................................................931
Recordkeeping........................................................................................................................................................932
Additional State Requirements...............................................................................................................................932
Oxygen and Fuel Gas Equipment Maintenance Personne......................................................................................934
Training...................................................................................................................................................................934

Page 961
ABG
PURPOSE
These written Welding & Cutting Procedures establish guidelines to be followed whenever any of our employees
work with welding and cutting equipment at this company. The procedures here establish uniform requirements
designed to ensure that welding and cutting safety training, operation, and maintenance practices are
communicated to and understood by the affected employees. These requirements also are designed to ensure
that procedures are in place to safeguard the health and safety of all employees.
It is the intent of ABG to comply with the requirements of all applicable OSHA regulations. These regulations have
requirements for welding and cutting operations. We also comply with applicable requirements of:
Standard or Regulation Name
ANSI A13.1-1956 American National Standard Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems
ANSI B31.3-1967 American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping
ANSI C33.2-1956 Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc-Welding Machines
ANSI Z48.1-1954 American National Standard Method for Marking Portable Compressed
Gas Containers to Identify the Material Contained
ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding and Cutting
ANSI Z54.1-1963 American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and
Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources
ANSI B57.1-1965 American National Standard Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and
Inlet Connections
ANSI Z87.1-1968 American National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye
and Face Protection
API Std. 1104-1968 Standard for Welding Pipe Lines and Related Facilities
API Std. PSD No. 2201-1963 Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables
ASTM B88-66a Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

Page 962
ABG
Standard or Regulation Name
AWS A6.1-1966 Recommended Safe Practices for Gas-Shielded Arc Welding
CGA--Regulator Connection ----

Standards-1958
CGA & RMA--Specification for ----

Rubber Welding Hose-1958
CGA--Standard Hose Connection ----

Specifications-1957
NEMA EW-1-1962 Requirements for Electric Arc-Welding Apparatus
NFPA Standard 51B-1962 Standard for Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes
NFPA 80-1970 Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and Windows
29 CFR 1910.132 Personal Protective Equipment—General Requirements
29 CFR 1910.217 Mechanical Power Presses
29 CFR 1910.219 Mechanical Power-Transmission Apparatus
29 CFR 1910, Subpart S Electrical
29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants
42 CFR 84 Approval of Respiratory Protective Devices
49 CFR 171-179 Hazardous Materials Regulations
The Site Supervisor is responsible for developing and maintaining the written Welding & Cutting Procedures.
These procedures are kept in the Site Safety Manager office.
Hot-Work Permit
Prior to any cutting, welding or brazing activities a hot work permit must be obtained.

Page 963
ABG
Our operating procedures follow:
Compressed Gas Cylinders

o Approved practices include:
 Keep valve protection cap in place at all times when a cylinder is not in use.
 Use care in handling and storage of cylinders, safety valves, relief valves, etc., to prevent
damage.
 When cylinders are hoisted, secure them on a cradle, slingboard, or pallet.
 Move cylinders by tilting and rolling them on their bottom edges. Care in handling is
required.
 Secure cylinders in an upright position at all times, especially when moving them by
machine.
 Use carriers or carts provided for the purpose when cylinders are in use.
 When in use, isolate cylinders from welding or cutting or suitably shield them. Care will be
taken to prevent them from becoming part of an electrical circuit.
 Maintain a distance of at least 20 feet or provide a non-combustible barrier at least five
feet high in separating fuel gas cylinders from oxygen cylinders. This applies to indoor and
outdoor storage.
 The supervisor will designate:
 Well-ventilated storage areas for cylinders inside buildings. Care will be taken to
keep storage areas out of traffic areas or other situations where they could be
knocked over, damaged, or tampered with.
 Locations for fuel gas and oxygen manifolds in well-ventilated areas.
 Before a regulator is removed, check that the valve is closed and the gas released
from the regulator.
 Keep cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, hoses, and apparatus free of
oily or greasy substances.
 Keep empty compressed gas cylinders appropriately marked and their valves
closed.
 Store full and empty cylinders apart.
 Group cylinders by types of gas.
 Use old stock before newer stock.
 Prohibited practices include:
 Use of valve protection caps for lifting cylinders.
 Damaged or defective cylinders should be removed from services and labeled
with a tags and move to a designated storage area for these cylinders.
 Use of a wrench or hammer to open cylinder valves.
Attempting to repair a cylinder valve. The supplier should be contacted.

Page 964
ABG
 Mixing of gases.
 Use of a magnet or choker sling when hoisting cylinders.
Use of a bar to pry cylinders from frozen ground. Warm, not boiling, water is used
to thaw cylinders.
 Taking oxygen, acetylene, or other fuel gas or manifolds with these gases into
confined spaces.
 Storing cylinders near elevators, stairs, or gangways.
Using cylinders as rollers or supports.
Gas Welding and Cutting

o Safe practices in using fuel gas include:
 Before a regulator to a cylinder valve is connected, "crack" the valve to clear it of dust or
dirt. Stand to one side of the outlet, not in front of it. Do not do this where the gas would
reach welding work, sparks, flame, or other possible sources of ignition.
 Open cylinder valves slowly to prevent damage to the regulator. For quick closing, do not
open valves on fuel gas cylinders more than 1 1/2 turns. When a special wrench is
required, leave it in position on the valve stem while the cylinder is in use. In the case of
manifold or coupled cylinders, make sure at least one such wrench is always available for
immediate use.
 Do not place anything on top of a fuel gas cylinder, when in use, which may damage the
safety device or interfere with quick closing.
 Do not use fuel gas directly from cylinders through torches or other devices equipped
with shutoff valves without reducing the pressure through a suitable regulator.
 Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, always close the cylinder valve and
release the gas from the regulator.
 If gas leaks around the valve stem, close the valve and tighten the gland nut. If this
doesn't work, do not use the cylinder. Properly tag it and remove it from the work area.
 If fuel gas leaks from the cylinder valve and the gas cannot be shut off, properly tag and
remove the cylinder from the work area. If a regulator will effectively stop a leak through
the valve seat, the cylinder can be used.
 Do not use oxygen for personal cooling, cleaning off of surfaces, ventilation, or blowing
dust from clothing.
 Do not weld or cut an acetylene or oxygen pipeline, including the attachment of hangers
or supports, until the line has been purged.
 Only use pressure-reducing regulators for gas and pressures for which they are intended.
 Do not attempt to repair a regulator or parts of a regulator. Have a skilled mechanic do
so.
o Safe practices in using manifolds include:
 Do not place fuel gas and oxygen manifolds in enclosed spaces.
 Do not place oxygen manifolds in an acetylene generator room.
 Use manifolds and their parts only for the gas(es) for which they are approved.

Page 965
ABG
 Do not alter or substitute manifold hose connections to allow interchange between fuel
gas and oxygen manifolds and supply header connections. Keep hose connections free of
grease and oil.
 Cap manifold and header hose connections when not in use.
 Do not place anything on top of a manifold, when in use, which will damage the manifold
and interfere with quick closing of valves.
 Install approved flash arresters between each cylinder and the coupler block when
acetylene cylinders are coupled.
 Manifold acetylene and liquefied fuel-gas cylinders only in a vertical position.
o Safe practices in using hoses include:
 Make sure fuel gas hose and oxygen hose are easily distinguishable from each other, by
different colors or by surface characteristics readily distinguishable by the sense of touch.
Do not allow use of a single hose with more than one gas passage.
 Do not interchange hoses, including use of adapters, between fuel gas and oxygen
sources.
 When parallel sections of oxygen and fuel gas hose are taped together, do not cover more
than four inches out of 12 inches with tape.
 Inspect all hose at the beginning of each working shift. Do not use defective hose.
 Hose subjected to flashback, or with evidence of severe wear or damage, must be tested
to twice the normal pressure to which it is subject, but in no case less than 300 p.s.i. Do
not use defective hose, or hose in doubtful condition.
 Use only hose couplings that cannot be unlocked or disconnected by means of a straight
pull without rotary motion.
 Do not store gas hose in unventilated boxes.
 Keep hoses, cables, and other equipment clear of passageways, ladders, and stairs.
o Safe practices in using torches include:
 Clean clogged tip openings only with suitable cleaning wires, drills, or other devices
designed for such purposes.
 Inspect at the beginning and end of each shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose couplings,
and tip connections. Do not use defective torches.
 Light only with friction lighters or other approved devices. Do not use matches or hot
work.
o Safe practices in using regulators and gauges include:

 Make sure oxygen and fuel gas pressure regulators, including their related gauges are in
proper working order.
 Keep oxygen cylinders and fittings away from oil or grease. Oxygen shall not be directed
at oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within a fuel oil or other storage tank or vessel.
- - Arc Welding and Cutting

o When arc welding is performed in wet conditions, or under conditions of high humidity, special
protection against electric shock shall be supplied.
o Do not dip a hot electrode into water.

Page 966
ABG
o Use holders, cable, and other apparatus specifically designed for the purpose, matched to the job
and other components and in good repair.
o When leaving electrode holders unattended, electrodes must be removed and holders placed so
that accidental electrical contact is not made.
o Use non-combustible or flame-proof screens to protect employees and passersby from arc rays
wherever practicable.
o Keep chlorinated solvents at least 200 feet from an inert-gas metal-arc welder or provide
adequate shielding. Surfaces prepared with chlorinated solvents will be thoroughly dry before
welding.
o Before starting operations all connections to the machine shall be checked to make certain they
are properly made. The work lead shall be firmly attached to the work; magnetic work clamps
shall be freed from adherent metal particles of spatter on contact surfaces. Coiled welding cable
shall be spread out before use to avoid serious overheating and damage to insulation.
o Grounding of the welding machine frame shall be checked. Special attention shall be given to
safety ground connections of portable machines.
o There shall be no leaks of cooling water, shielding gas, or engine fuel.
o It shall be determined that proper switching equipment for shutting down the machine is
provided.
o Printed rules and instructions covering operation of equipment supplied by the manufacturers
shall be strictly followed.
o Electrode holders when not in use shall be so placed that they cannot make electrical contact with
persons, conducting objects, fuel, or compressed gas tanks.
o Cables with splices within 10 feet (3 m) of the holder shall not be used. The welder should not coil
or loop welding electrode cable around parts of his body.
o The operator should report any equipment defect or safety hazard to his supervisor and the use
of the equipment shall be discontinued until its safety has been assured. Only qualified personnel
shall make repairs.
o Machines that have become wet shall be thoroughly dried and tested before being used.
o Cables with damaged insulation or exposed bare conductors shall be replaced. Joining lengths of
work and electrode cables shall be done by the use of connecting means specifically intended for
the purpose. The connecting means shall be insulation adequate for the service conditions.
Fire Prevention
o The supervisor will use this guide to assess fire hazards at the workplace:
 If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily be moved, all movable fire hazards in the
vicinity shall be taken to a safe place.
 If the object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards cannot be
removed, then guards shall be used to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect
the immovable fire hazards.
 If the requirements stated in the two boxes above cannot be followed then welding and
cutting shall not be performed.

Page 967
ABG
 Wherever there are floor openings or cracks in the flooring that cannot be closed,
precautions shall be taken so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will
be exposed to sparks that might drop through the floor. The same precautions shall be
observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls, open doorways, and open or broken
windows.
 Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be provided and maintained in a state of
readiness for instant use. Such equipment may include a charged water hose of no less
than 3/4 inch or portable extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the
combustible material exposed.
 Before cutting or welding is permitted, the area shall be inspected by the individual
responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations. He shall designate precautions
to be followed in granting authorization to proceed preferably in the form of a written
permit.
 Special precautions shall be taken for floors covered with combustible materials;
combustibles within 35 feet of the work area; ducts that might carry sparks; combustible
walls; combustibles on the other side of a noncombustible wall; combustible coverings;
pipes in contact with combustible walls; storage of readily ignitable materials; drums,
barrels, tanks, other containers that may contain flammable materials; pipes leading to a
drum or vessel; and all hollow spaces, cavities or containers.
 The company will establish procedures for cutting and welding and designate an
individual responsible for authorizing welding operations in areas not designed for such
processes.
Fire Watchers
o Firewatchers shall be required whenever welding or cutting is performed in locations where other
than a minor fire might develop, or any of the following conditions exist:
 Appreciable combustible material, in building construction or contents, closer than 35
feet (10.7m) to the point of operation.
 Appreciable combustibles are more than 35 feet (10.7m) away but are easily ignited by
sparks.
 Wall or floor openings within a 35-foot (10.7m) radius expose combustible material in
adjacent areas including concealed spaces in walls or floors.
 Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls,
ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation.
 Fire watchers shall have fire-extinguishing equipment readily available and be trained in
its use.
 Fire watchers will be trained on the specific fire hazards.
 Fire watchers must be maintained at least a half–hour after completion of welding or
cutting operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires.
Ventilation
o The supervisor will determine the number, location, and capacity of ventilation devices.

Page 968
ABG
o Ventilation will be sufficient to protect passersby as well as the welder.

o Oxygen shall never be used for ventilation.
o Don't rely on general ventilation as the only means of protection when air contaminants are toxic.
o Where ventilation is not sufficient to provide clean, respirable air, respirators will be specified
according to specifications applicable to your facility and policies.

o Proper eye protection i.e., helmets, hand shields, goggles, and spectacles, must be provided.
o Proper protective clothing must be provided.
o First–aid equipment shall be available at all times.
o Air line respirators will be provided for confined space jobs when sufficient ventilation cannot be
provided without blocking the exit.
o When known or unknown toxic materials are present in a job, respirators will be provided that
match the hazard for all employees. The hazards include zinc or zinc–bearing base or filler metals,
lead base metals, cadmium–bearing filler metals, chromium–bearing or chromium–coated metals,
mercury, nitrogen dioxide, and beryllium. Due to beryllium’s extreme danger, both ventilation and
air line respirators will be used.
o Where screens are not sufficient to protect welders and passersby from arc radiation, the
company will provide eye protection with appropriate helmets, filter lens goggles, or hand shields.
The helmets and shields will be maintained in good repair.
o When a toxic preservative is detected on a surface in a confined space, air line respirators will be
provided (or the toxic coating will be stripped from at least four inches around the heated area).
Confined Spaces
o Evaluate the space, the hazardous atmosphere, the floor surface, and the interior surface for
flammability, combustibility, or toxic fumes that could result from the welding process.
o Perform atmospheric testing for oxygen deficiency and for toxic and flammable or combustible
gases before and during entry. If the tests show that flammable or combustible gases are present,
the space must be ventilated until safe to enter. If the atmosphere is toxic and cannot be cleared
through ventilation, appropriate respiratory equipment must be used. All energy sources that
could cause employee injury must be disconnected and locked in the "off" position before entry.
o Ventilation must be provided. Confined spaces such as manholes, tunnels, trenches, and vaults,
are particularly hazardous working areas made more dangerous by welding.
o Gas cylinders and welding machines shall be left on the outside of the confined space. Before
operations are started, heavy portable equipment mounted on wheels shall be securely blocked
to prevent accidental movement.
o Where a welder must enter a confined space through a manhole or other small opening, means
shall be provided for quickly removing him in case of emergency. When safety belts and lifelines
are used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body that his body cannot be
jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant with a preplanned rescue procedure shall be

Page 969
ABG
stationed outside to maintain communication with the welder at all times and be capable of
putting rescue operations into effect.
o When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or
overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so
that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine disconnected from the power source.
o In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks of improperly closed valves,
when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the fuel-gas and oxygen supply
to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not
to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where
practicable the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space after welding
operations are completed the welder.
Flammable, Toxic, or Hazardous Materials

o The company will designate a competent person to test the flammability of unknown coatings.
o When a coating is found to be highly flammable, it will be stripped from the area to prevent fire.
Electrical Equipment
o Do not arc weld while standing on damp surfaces or in damp clothing.
o Properly ground, install, and operate equipment.
o Do not use defective equipment.
o Use well-insulated electrode holders and cables.
o Insulate yourself from both the work and the metal electrode and holder.
o Don’t wrap a welding cable around your body.
o Wear dry gloves and rubber-soled shoes.
o Do not use damaged or bare cables and connectors.
o In case of electric shock, don’t touch a victim. Turn off the current at the control box and then call
for help. After the power is off, you may perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) if
necessary.
Fall Protection
o A welder or helper working on platforms, scaffolds, or runways shall be protected against falling.
This may be accomplished by the use of railings, safety belts, lifelines, or some other equally
effective safeguards.
o Welders shall place welding cable and other equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders,
and stairways.
o Maintain a clear welding or cutting area to prevent slips, trips, and falls.
Inspections

Page 970
ABG
A number of inspections are required under the welding and cutting regulations. To make inspections efficient, we
have compiled a list of inspection items to be checked before welding or cutting:
Maintenance
Any deficiencies found in our welding and cutting equipment are repaired, or defective parts replaced, before
continued use. However, no modifications or additions that affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment
may be made without the manufacturer’s written approval. If such modifications or changes are made, the
capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals, must be changed accordingly. In no case
may the original safety factor of the equipment be reduced.
While defective parts may be found, we prefer to invest time and effort into the proper upkeep of our equipment,
which results in day-to-day reliability. Keeping up with the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedules,
and completing the proper records, will also increase our welding and cutting equipment’s longevity.
We follow the manufacturer’s operator instruction manual for daily or weekly maintenance.
Periodic maintenance (those completed monthly or less frequently) is done by a factory-trained-expert, or a

dealer.
Signs and Labels
Our company posts signs as follows:
- Warning Sign: After welding operations are completed, the welder shall mark the hot metal or provide
some other means of warning other workers.
- Precautionary Labels: A number of potentially hazardous materials are employed in fluxes, coatings,
coverings, and filler metals used in welding and cutting or are released to the atmosphere during welding
and cutting. These include but are not limited to the materials itemized in OSHA regulations. The suppliers
of welding materials shall determine the hazard, if any, associated with the use of their materials in
welding, cutting, etc.
- All filler metals and fusible granular materials shall carry the following notice, as a minimum, on tags,
boxes, or other containers:
CAUTION
Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these fumes and gases. Use
adequate ventilation. See ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding and Cutting published by the American Welding
Society.

Page 971
ABG
Brazing (welding) filler metals containing cadmium in significant amounts shall carry the following notice
on tags, boxes, or other containers:
WARNING
CONTAINS CADMIUM--POISONOUS FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING Do not breathe fumes. Use only with
adequate ventilation such as fume collectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators. See ANSI Z49.1-
1967. If chest pains, cough, or fever develops after use call physician immediately.
Brazing and gas welding fluxes containing fluorine compounds shall have a cautionary wording to indicate
that they contain fluorine compounds. One such cautionary wording recommended by the American
Welding Society for brazing and gas welding fluxes reads as follows:
CAUTION
CONTAINS FLUORIDES
This flux when heated gives off fumes that may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
1. Avoid fumes--use only in well-ventilated spaces.
2. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin.
3. Do not take internally.
Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked, for the purpose of identifying the gas content, with
either the chemical or the trade name of the gas. Such marking shall be by means of stenciling, stamping,
or labeling, and shall not be readily removable. Whenever practical, the marking shall be located on the
shoulder of the cylinder. This method conforms to the American National Standard Method for Marking
Portable Compressed Gas Containers to Identify the Material Contained, ANSI Z48.1-1954, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in 29 CFR 1910.6.
A warning should be placed near cylinders having leaking fuse plugs or other leaking safety devices not to
approach them with a lighted cigarette or other source of ignition. Such cylinders should be plainly
tagged; the supplier should be promptly notified and his instructions followed as to their return.
The following sign shall be conspicuously posted at each manifold:

Page 972
ABG
Low-Pressure Manifold
Do Not Connect High-pressure Cylinder
Maximum Pressure--250 psig (1.7 MPa)
- Aboveground piping systems shall be marked in accordance with the American National Standard Scheme
for the Identification of Piping systems, ANSI A13.1-1956, which is incorporated by reference as specified
in 29 CFR 1910.6. 06-01-96
- Station outlets shall be marked to indicate the name of the gas.
- Gages on oxygen regulators shall be marked USE NO OIL.
- Acetylene generators (1) Approval and marking. (i) Generators shall be of approved construction and shall
be plainly marked with the maximum rate of acetylene in cubic feet per hour for which they are designed;
the weight and size of carbide necessary for a single charge; the manufacturers name and address; and
the name of number of the type of generator.
- Carbide shall be of the size marked on the generator nameplate.
- Rating and pressure limitations. (i) The total hourly output of a generator shall not exceed the rate for
which it is approved and marked. Unless specifically approved for higher ratings, carbide-feed generators
shall be rated at 1 cubic foot (0.028 m3) per hour per pound of carbide required for a single complete
charge.
- Operating instructions shall be posted in a conspicuous place near the generator or kept in a suitable
place available for ready reference.
- Packages containing calcium carbide shall be conspicuously marked CALCIUM CARBIDE--DANGEROUS IF
NOT KEPT DRY or with equivalent warning.
Welder Maintenance & Inspection
Manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance of welding units are as follows:
ANNUAL
Clean all internal components & wiring.
QUARTERLY
- Inspect power cord.

- Inspect leads.
- Insure external labeling for legibility.

Page 973
ABG
Maintenance will be conducted by qualified maintenance personnel with written reports completed and filed in
the Site Safety Manager office.
Recordkeeping
The Site Supervisor is responsible for keeping records certifying that each employee who has successfully
completed training and testing.
The Maintenance Department keeps inspection records for welding and cutting equipment.
Additional State Requirements
Some state requirements regarding welding, cutting, and brazing include a substantial amount of regulatory
information beyond the federal requirements. A summary of the additional requirements includes the following:
- For acetylene generators located inside, a portion of the exterior walls or roof equal to at least 10% of the
combined areas of the enclosing walls and roof must be of light, noncombustible material, preferably
single-strength glass.
- In every acetylene generator house, room, or compartment over 100 sq. ft. in floor area, there must be 2
readily accessible exits remotely located from each other. At least one exit door must give direct access to
the outside.
- At least one fire extinguisher of at least 10B:C rating must be kept available for service and in good
working order near each acetylene generator house or room.
- Whenever a person is inside an acetylene generator, another person must be stationed outside the
generator to assist in case of emergency. The person in the generator must be provided with, and must
wear an approved life line and belt. In addition, a ladder must give access to the interior of the generator.
- Flashlights used in the generator room or storage building must be Bureau of Mines permissible type or
equivalent.
- Before portable acetylene generator is recharged partially or completely, it must be thoroughly cleaned of
all sludge and refilled with clean water.
- The seal on calcium carbide storage containers stored indoors must not be broken so long as there is
carbide in excess of one pound in any other unsealed package of that size of carbide in the building. The
contents of damaged containers must be promptly used or transferred to another container.
- Sealed metal containers of calcium carbide stored out-of-doors must be stored in rows with ample space
for easy inspection and under tarpaulins.
- Carbide storage rooms must not be used for the storage of any other material except fuel gas cylinders,
singly or manifold.
- Trucks or wheelbarrows used inside carbide storage rooms must be equipped with rubber or other non-
sparking tires.
- There must be no opening from a carbide storage room into any other room or building, except that if
there be a partition between the carbide room and a generator room, a doorway will be permitted if all

Page 974
ABG
electrical equipment in the carbide room is installed in accordance with Electrical Safety Orders for
hazardous locations.
- Nonferrous tools except copper or copper base alloy tools must be provided and used for opening carbide
containers.
- Service piping and fittings must comply with Section 2, Industrial Gas and Air Piping Systems of the
American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping ANSI B31.1.1983.
- All drip pots must be readily accessible.
- Oxygen piping must never be placed in a tunnel, trench, manhole, or duct where it may be exposed to
contact with oil.
- In low-pressure (less than 1 psi) gas piping systems, a hydraulic back-pressure valve must be employed at
every point where fuel gas and oxygen are withdrawn from the system.
- If the station outlet is equipped with a detachable regulator or connected directly to a hose, the outlet
must terminate in a union connection that complies with the Standard Connections for Regulator Outlets,
Torches and Fitted Hose for Welding and Cutting Equipment, Compressed Gas Association, Pamphlet E-1-
1980.
- Each fuel-gas and oxygen cylinder lead must be provided with a backflow check valve.
- Manifolds must be located and guarded to protect them against damage from trucks and from any
material being moved in the vicinity.
- Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds must bear the name of the substance they contain in letters at least 1-inch
high, either painted on the manifold or on a sign permanently attached to it.
- Nothing may be placed on top of a manifold, when in use, which will damage the manifold or interfere
with the quick closing of the valves.
- Special manifold buildings or rooms also used for the storage of cylinders containing fuel gas and of drums
of carbide must have signs conspicuously posted, reading, "Danger No Smoking, Matches or Open Lights,"
or other equivalent wording.
- Where liquid oxygen in a quantity exceeding 100 gallons is to be used for welding and cutting, the
containers must be located outside or in a special building having no other occupancy except that related
to the handling and gasification of the oxygen, and must comply with the provisions of Article 139,
Oxygen.
- Hose for oxy-fuel gas service must comply with the Specification for Rubber Welding Hose, 1979, Rubber
Manufacturers Association.
- Hose connections must comply with the Standard Connections for Regulator Outlets, Torches and Fitted
Hose for Welding and Cutting Equipment, Compressed Gas Association, Pamphlet E-1-1980.
- All hose in use carrying any gas or substance which may ignite or enter into combustion, or which is in any
way harmful to employees, must be inspected at the beginning of each working shift.
- All oxygen pipe lines must be painted one color (preferably green) and all fuel gas pipes a different color.
If more than one fuel gas is employed, the pipe lines supplying the different gases must be painted
distinctive colors. A color chart indicating the colors employed for this purpose must be prominently
displayed. Signs clearly establishing the location and identity of section shut-off valves must be provided.
- Torches in use must be inspected at the beginning of each working shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose
couplings, and tip connections. Defective torches must not be used. Clogged torch tip openings must be
cleaned with suitable cleaning wires, drills, or other devices designed for that purpose.

Page 975
ABG
- Torches must be lighted by friction lighters or other approved devices, and not by matches or from hot
work.
- Management must:
o establish a fire prevention and suppression procedure relative to use of cutting and welding
equipment on its property and issue instructions based upon the applicable parts of ANSI Z49.1-
1973, Safety in Welding and Cutting;
o insist that only approved apparatus, such as torches, manifolds, regulators or pressure reducing
valves, and acetylene generators, be used; and
o select contractors to perform hot work involving cutting or welding who have suitably trained
personnel and who have an awareness of the magnitude of the risks involved.
- All electric welding equipment must be installed and maintained in accordance with the OSHA regulations
and applicable technical portions of ANSI Z49.1-1973.
- Arc welding cables with splices or repairs within 10 feet of the holder may be used if insulated connectors
or splices have insulating quality equal to that of the cable are used.
- Arc welding and cutting cables must be insulated, flexible, and capable of handling the maximum current
required by the operations, taking into account the duty cycles.
- The employer must ensure that only manual electrode holders intended for arc welding and cutting and
capable of handling the maximum current required for such welding or cutting, may be used.
- Hot electrode holders must not be dipped in water.
- Employers must ensure that when arc welders or cutters leave or stop work or when machines are
moved, the power supply switch must be kept in the off position.
- When arc welding is performed in wet or high humidity conditions, employees must use additional
protection, such as rubber pads or boots, against electric shock.
- One or more safety emergency stop buttons must be provided on all multi-spot welding machines, with a
minimum of one stop button at each operator's position.
Oxygen and Fuel Gas Equipment Maintenance Personnel
Personnel in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment, including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas
distribution piping systems shall be instructed and judged competent by ABG for this important work before being
left in charge. Rules and instructions covering the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel-gas supply
equipment including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be readily available.
Training
Arc Welders assigned to operate arc welding equipment must be properly instructed and qualified to operate
such equipment. As a minimum, Arc Welders will receive training in Fire Prevention, Eye Protection, and General
Work Practices.

Page 976
Hot Work Permit
Date: Start Time: Time Valid to:
Issued to: Area:
Describe work to be done:
Equipment No.: WO No.:
GENERAL PREPARATIONS: (check off all items that apply; supervisor/employee initials each to verify in place)
Initials Initials
Yes No Yes No
Energy sources locked, tagged, tried Supervisor has reviewed responsibilities
Radiation shutter locked closed with fire watch/standby person
Sewers covered, closed, or plugged Combustible materials removed
LEL monitors provided Proper fire extinguisher available
LEL Test % at Hrs. Running water/tarps/blankets
LEL Test % at Hrs. Signs and barricades posted
LEL Test % at Hrs Vehicle entry
LEL Test % at Hrs Other:
Maintenance supervisor approval for Other:
LEL >0 but <10% Fire watch/standby person name:
Signs and barricades posted

CONDITIONS NOT ALL MET
Special procedure prepared
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT:
First After First After First After First After
Break Break Break Break Break Break Break Break
Slicker Suit Rubber Boot Chemical Gloves Face Shield
Goggles Acid Hood Full Acid Suit Cartridge Respirator
Hearing Protection Breathing Air
APPROVALS (full name):
Hot Work Authorized Permit Issuer Supervisor Designated Hot Work Employee
TURN BACK TO OWNER:

Work is not completed: Date: Time: Hrs.:
Status:
Work is completed Work area has been cleaned

Tools and equipment have been put away Tags and locks have been removed
Employee/Supervisor Hot Work Authorized Permit Issuer
Copyright © 2012, ABG. All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental
ABG
WELDING ELECTRICAL CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................936
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 937
Managers and Supervisors.................................................................................................................................937
Employees..........................................................................................................................................................937
Procedure...............................................................................................................................................................937
General................................................................................................................................................................... 937
Fire Prevention Measures..................................................................................................................................938
Confined Space...................................................................................................................................................939
Light Protection..................................................................................................................................................940
Fumes, Gases and Dust......................................................................................................................................940
Personal Protection............................................................................................................................................940
Cleaning Compounds..........................................................................................................................................941
Arc Welding and Cutting.....................................................................................................................................941
Fire Watch Requirements...................................................................................................................................941
First Aid Equipment............................................................................................................................................942

Page 978
ABG
Purpose
The purpose of this program is to assure a safe work environment during electric welding, cutting and hot work
operations in California. Electric welding, cutting and heating shall be conducted in accordance with Cal/OSHA
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 4851.
Scope
This program is applicable to all employees directly involved or assisting in the welding, cutting and hot work
operations in California. When work is performed on a no owned or operated site, the operator's program shall
take precedence, however, this document covers COMPANY employees and contractors and shall be used on
owned premises, or when an operator's program doesn't exist or is less stringent.
Responsibilities
Managers and Supervisors

 Determine if its property is safe for welding and cutting operations.
 Establish safe areas for welding and cutting operations.
 Provide training for all employees whose task includes heat, spark or flame producing operations such as
welding, brazing, or grinding.
 Develop and monitor effective hot work procedures.
 Provide safe equipment for hot work.
 Provide proper and effective PPE for all hot work.
 Monitor all hot work operations.
 Ensure that arc welding or cutting equipment having defects will not be used. Arc welding or cutting
equipment having a functional defect shall not be used.
 Allow only trained and authorized employees to conduct hot work and conduct inspections of the hot
work area before operations begin.
 Ensure permits are used for all hot work outside authorized areas.
Employees
 Follow all hot work procedures.
 Properly use appropriate hot work PPE.
 Inspect all hot work equipment before use.
 Report any equipment problems or unsafe conditions.
Procedure
General
A hot work permit must be completed before performing hot work. Precautions that are to be taken shall be in
the form of a written permit. Before cutting or welding is permitted the area shall be inspected and a written
permit shall be used to authorize welding and cutting operations.

Page 979
ABG
Where practicable all combustibles shall be relocated at least 35 feet from the work site. Where relocation is
impractical, combustibles shall be protected with flameproof covers, shielded with metal, guards, curtains, or wet
down the material to help prevent ignition of material.
Ducts, conveyor systems, and augers that might carry sparks to distant combustibles shall be protected or shut
down.
Where cutting or welding is done near walls, partitions, ceilings, or openings in the floor (grating, manholes, etc.),
fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.
If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling, or solid decking/flooring, precautions shall be taken to
prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or radiation of heat. Where combustibles
cannot be relocated on the opposite side of the work, a fire watch person shall be provided on the opposite side
of the work.
Welding shall not be attempted on a metal partition, wall, and ceiling or decking/flooring constructed of
combustible sandwich panels.
Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, floors, ceilings, or roofs
shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by combustion.
Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in the following situations:

 In areas not authorized by management.
 In sprinkled buildings while such protection is impaired.
 In the presence of potentially explosive atmospheres, e.g. flammables.
 In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitable materials.
 In areas where there is dust accumulation of greater than 1/16 inch within 35 feet of the area where
welding/hot work will be conducted.
 All dust accumulation shall be cleaned up before welding or hot work is permitted.
Whenever welding or cutting is performed in locations where other than a minor fire might develop or any of the
conditions mentioned above cannot be met, a fire watch shall be provided.
 The fire watch shall be provided during and for a minimum of 1/2 hour past the completion of the welding
project.
 The fire watch shall be trained in the use of fire extinguishers and the facility's alarm system.
 During this time the fire watch will have appropriate fire extinguishers readily available.
 Suitable extinguishers shall be provided and maintained ready for instant use.
 A hot-work permit will be issued on all welding or cutting outside of the designated welding area.
Fire Prevention Measures

A designated welding area shall be established to meet the following requirements:
 Floors swept and cleaned of combustibles within 35 feet of work area.

Page 980
ABG
 Flammable and combustible liquids and material will be kept 35 feet from work area.
 Adequate ventilation providing 20 air changes per hour.
 At least one 10 pound dry chemical fire extinguisher shall be within access of 35 feet of the work area.
 Protective dividers such as welding curtains or noncombustible walls will be provided to contain sparks
and slag to the combustible free area.
Requirements for welding conducted outside the designated welding area:

 Portable welding curtains or shields must be used to protect other workers in the welding area.
 A hot-work permit must be completed and complied with prior to initiating welding operations.
 Respiratory protection is mandatory unless an adequate monitored airflow away from the welder and
others present can be established and maintained.
 Plastic materials must be covered with welding tarps during welding procedures.
 Fire Watch must be provided for all hot-work operations.
After welding operations are completed, the welder shall mark the hot metal or provide some other means of
warning other workers.
Confined Space
 A space that Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned
work;
 Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, coolers, storage bins,
hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry); and
 Is not designed for continuous occupancy.
Refer to the Confined Space Program for COMPANY before commencing any welding, cutting, and/or brazing
operations in an area meeting the requirements of a confined space.
Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces.
Welding machines shall be left on the outside of a confined space and be blocked to prevent accidental
movement.
Welding machines shall be left on the outside of a confined space and heavy portable equipment shall be blocked
to prevent accidental movement.
When a welder must enter a confined space through a manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided
for quickly removing him in case of an emergency.
 When safety belts and lifelines are used for this purpose, they shall be so attached to the welder's body
that it cannot be jammed in a small exit opening.
 An attendant with a preplanned rescue procedure shall be stationed outside to observe the welder at all
times and be capable of putting rescue operations into effect.

Page 981
ABG
When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all
electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot
occur and the machine shall be disconnected from the power source.
All welding and cutting operations carried on in confined spaces shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the
accumulation of toxic materials or possible oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder, but also to
helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity. All air withdrawn will be replaced with air that is clean.
In circumstances for which it is impossible to provide such ventilation, airline respirators or hose masks approved
for this purpose by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) will be provided. In areas
immediately hazardous to life, a full-face piece, positive pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus or a
combination full-face piece, positive pressure supplied-air respirator with an auxiliary, self-contained air supply
approved by NIOSH must be used.
Where welding operations are carried on in confined spaces and where welders and helpers are provided with
hose masks, hose masks with blowers or self-contained breathing equipment, a worker shall be stationed on the
outside of such confined spaces to ensure the safety of those working within.
Light Protection
Workers adjacent to the welding areas will be protected from the rays by an acceptable method. Where the work
permits, the welder shall be enclosed in an individual booth painted with a finish of low reflectivity, such as zinc
oxide and lamp black or shall be enclosed with noncombustible screens having a similar low reflectivity finish.
Booths and screens shall permit circulation of air at floor level. Workers or other persons adjacent to the welding
areas shall be protected from the rays by noncombustible or flameproof screens or shields or shall be required to
wear appropriate goggles.
Fumes, Gases and Dust

Fumes produced by some welding processes can be toxic and may require source extraction. An assessment of
the work to be performed must be completed before each job is undertaken. Fumes generally contain particles
from the material being welded. Welding fumes can have an acute effect on the respiratory system.
Any welding, cutting or burning of lead base metals, zinc, cadmium, mercury, fluorides, beryllium or exotic metals
or paints not listed here that could produce dangerous fumes shall have proper ventilation or respiratory
protection. This includes inert-gas metal-arc welding or oxygen cutting of stainless steel.
Welders and helpers will refer to the Respiratory Protection Program for COMPANY to determine the appropriate
respiratory protection to be used during welding operations.
All welding and cutting operations shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials.
This applies not only to the welder, but also to helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity.

Page 982
ABG
Personal Protection
 Helmets and hand shields shall be made of a material, which is an insulator for heat and electricity.
Helmets, shields, and goggles shall not be readily flammable and shall be capable of withstanding
sterilization.
 Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the face, neck and ears from direct radiant energy
from the arc.
 Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates designed for easy removal.
 All parts shall be constructed of a material, which will not readily corrode or discolor the skin.
 Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses as much as practicable.
 All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free from scratches, air bubbles, waves and other
flaws. Except when a lens is ground to provide proper optical vision correction, the front and rear surfaces
of lenses and windows shall be smooth and parallel.
 Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking which may readily identify the source and shade.
 Adequate hand protection and clothing must be used to protect the body from welding hazards.
Cleaning Compounds
In the use of cleaning materials, because of their possible toxicity or flammability, appropriate precautions such as
manufacturer instructions shall be followed.
 Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so located that no
vapors from these operations will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding any welding
operation.
 In addition, trichloroethylene and perchloroethylene shall be kept out of atmospheres penetrated by the
ultraviolet radiation of gas-shielded welding operations.
Arc Welding and Cutting

 All personnel operating, installing, and maintaining welding equipment shall be qualified or trained to
operate and maintain such equipment.
 Arc welding equipment must be designed to meet conditions such as exposure to corrosive fumes,
excessive humidity, excessive oil vapor, flammable gasses, abnormal vibration or shock, excessive dust
and seacoast or shipboard conditions. It shall be operated at recommended voltage in accordance to the
manufacturer recommendations.
 Leads shall not be repaired with electrical tape.
 Damaged cables are not to be used or repaired/protected except by insulation equivalent in performance
to the original capacity. When a cable other than the lead wears and exposes bare conductors, the
portion exposed shall not be used until it is protected by insulation equivalent in performance capacity to
the original.
 Ground connections shall be mechanically and electrically adequate to carry the current
 A disconnecting switch or controller shall be provided at or near each welding machine along with over
current protection.
 The power supply switch must be in the off position when welders or cutters leave or stop work, or when
machines are moved. COMPANY shall ensure that when arc welders or cutters leave or stop work or
when machines are moved, the power supply switch shall be kept in the off position.

Page 983
ABG
 All direct current machines shall be connected with the same polarity and all alternating current machines
connected to the same phase of the supply circuit and with the same polarity.
 To prevent electrical contact with personnel, all electrode holders shall be placed where they do not make
contact with persons, conducting objects or the fuel of compressed gas tanks.
 Only cables free from repair or splice for 10 feet from the electrode holder are used. Only cable free from
repair or splice for 10 feet (3 m) from the electrode holder shall be used unless insulated connectors or
splices with insulating quality equal to that of the cable are provided.
 If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily be moved, all moveable fire hazards should be removed.
 If an object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and if all the hire hazards cannot be removed, then
guards shall be used to confine the heat sparks and slag and to protect the immovable fire hazards.
 When arc welding is performed in wet conditions, or under conditions of high humidity, special protection
against electric shock shall be supplied. Additional protection for employees while welding in damp or
humid conditions. When arc welding is performed in wet or high humidity conditions, employees shall
use additional protection, such as rubber pads or boots, against electric shock.
Fire Watch Requirements

A fire watch shall be under these conditions as a minimum and when welding, cutting, brazing and/or soldering is
performed near combustible materials and/or locations where fire may develop:
 Locations where other than a minor fire might develop.
 Combustible materials are closer than 35 feet to the point of operation.
 Combustibles that are 35 feet or more away but are easily ignited.
 Wall or floor openings within a 35 feet radius of exposed combustible materials.
 Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, ceilings or roofs.
Fire watch personnel shall be maintained at least a half an hour after welding or cutting operations have been
completed and fire watchers shall have fire extinguishers readily available.
First Aid Equipment

First aid equipment shall be available at all times. All injuries shall be reported as soon as possible for medical
attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention can be provided.
Training
Training shall include:
 Position Responsibilities
 Cutters, welders and their supervisors must be suitably trained in the safe operations of their equipment
and the safe use of the process.
 Fire Watch Responsibilities - specifically, the fire watch must know:
o That their ONLY duty is Fire Watch.
o When they can terminate the watch.
o How to use the provided fire extinguisher(s).
o Be familiar with facilities and how to activate fire alarm, if fire is beyond the incipient stage.
o Operator Responsibilities

Page 984
ABG
o Contractor Responsibilities
o Documentation requirements
o Respirator Usage requirements
o Fire Extinguisher training.

Page 985
ABG
WELDING GAS SYSTEM CAL/OSHA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose..................................................................................................................................................................943
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 944
Key Responsibilities................................................................................................................................................944
Managers and Supervisors.................................................................................................................................944
Employees..........................................................................................................................................................944
Procedure...............................................................................................................................................................944
General..............................................................................................................................................................944
Fire Preventio.....................................................................................................................................................945
Confined Space Work.........................................................................................................................................946
Fumes, Gases and Dust......................................................................................................................................947
Personal Protection............................................................................................................................................948
Cleaning Compounds..........................................................................................................................................948
Cylinders.............................................................................................................................................................948
First Aid Equipment............................................................................................................................................949
Training..............................................................................................................................................................949

Page 986
ABG
Purpose
The purpose of this program is to assure a safe work environment during welding, cutting and hot work
operations in California. Gas welding, cutting and heating shall be conducted in accordance with Cal/OSHA
California Code of Regulations, Title 8.
Scope
This program is applicable to all ABG employees directly involved or assisting in the welding, cutting and hot work
operations in California.
Key Responsibilities
Managers and Supervisors

 Determine if its property is safe for welding and cutting operations.
 Establish safe areas for welding and cutting operations.
 Provide training for all employees whose task includes heat, spark or flame producing operations such as
welding, brazing, or grinding.
 Develop and monitor effective hot work procedures.
 Provide safe equipment for hot work.
 Provide proper and effective PPE for all hot work.
 Monitor all hot work operations.
 Ensure all hot work equipment and PPE are in safe working order.
 Allow only trained and authorized employees to conduct hot work and conduct inspections of the hot
work area before operations begin.
Employees
 Follow all hot work procedures.
 Properly use appropriate hot work PPE.
 Inspect all hot work equipment before use.
 Report any equipment problems or unsafe conditions.
Procedure
General
Rules and instructions covering the operation and maintenance of fuel-gas supply equipment are readily available.
Rules and instructions covering the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment including
generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be readily available.
Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in the following situations:

 In areas not authorized by management.
 In sprinkled buildings while such protection is impaired.

Page 987
ABG
 In the presence of potentially explosive atmospheres, e.g. flammables.

 In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitable materials.
 In areas where there is dust accumulation of greater than 1/16 inch within 35 feet of the area where
welding/hot work will be conducted.
 All dust accumulation shall be cleaned up before welding or hot work is permitted.
Employees in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment shall be instructed for this work before the work
begins. Employees in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment including generators, and oxygen or fuel-
gas distribution piping systems shall be instructed for this work before being left in charge.
Back flow protection shall be provided by an approved device that will prevent oxygen from flowing into the fuel-
gas system or fuel from flowing into the oxygen system.
An approved device that will prevent flame from passing into the fuel-gas system shall provide flashback
protection.
An approved pressure-relief device set at the appropriate pressure shall provide backpressure protection.
Only approved apparatuses such as torches, regulators or pressure-reducing valves, setting generators and
manifolds shall be used.
A safety method used will consist of connecting a regulator to a cylinder valve using the "cracking" method away
from possible sources of ignition and while standing to one side of the outlet. Before connecting a regulator to a
cylinder valve, the valve shall be opened slightly and closed immediately. (This action is generally termed
"cracking" and is intended to clear the valve of dust or dirt that might otherwise enter the regulator.) The valve
shall be opened while standing to one side of the outlet; never in front of it. A fuel-gas cylinder valve shall never
be opened up, cracked near other welding work or near sparks, flame, or other possible sources of ignition.
All hoses and hose connections shall comply with the Compressed Gas Association and Rubber Manufacturers'
Associations' applicable standards.
Fire Prevention
COMPANY will ensure fire prevention and suppression procedures whenever any welding and cutting operations
are taking place are used. A fire prevention and suppression procedure shall be established whenever any
welding and cutting operations are taking place.
Whenever welding or cutting is performed in locations where other than a minor fire might develop or any of the
conditions mentioned above cannot be met, a fire watch shall be provided.
 The fire watch shall be provided during and for a minimum of 1/2 hour past the completion of the welding
project.
 The fire watch shall be trained in the use of fire extinguishers and the facility's alarm system.
 During this time the fire watch will have appropriate fire extinguishers readily available.
 Suitable extinguishers shall be provided and maintained ready for instant use.

Page 988
ABG
 A hot-work permit will be issued on all welding or cutting outside of the designated welding area.
A hot work permit must be completed before performing hot work. Precautions that are to be taken shall be in
the form of a written permit. Before cutting or welding is permitted the area shall be inspected and a written
permit shall be used to authorize welding and cutting operations.
Where practicable all combustibles shall be relocated at least 35 feet from the work site. Where relocation is
impractical, combustibles shall be protected with flameproof covers, shielded with metal, guards, curtains, or wet
down the material to help prevent ignition of material.
Ducts, conveyor systems, and augers that might carry sparks to distant combustibles shall be protected or shut
down. Where cutting or welding is done near walls, partitions, ceilings, or openings in the floor (grating,
manholes, etc.), fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.
If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling, or solid decking/flooring, precautions shall be taken to
prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or radiation of heat. Where combustibles
cannot be relocated on the opposite side of the work, a fire watch person shall be provided on the opposite side
of the work.
Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, floors, ceilings, or roofs
shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by combustion.
A designated welding area shall be established to meet the following requirements:

 Floors swept and cleaned of combustibles within 35 feet of work area.
 Flammable and combustible liquids and material will be kept 35 feet from work area.
 Adequate ventilation providing 20 air changes per hour.
 At least one 10 pound dry chemical fire extinguisher shall be within access of 35 feet of the work area.
 Protective dividers such as welding curtains or noncombustible walls will be provided to contain sparks
and slag to the combustible free area.
Requirements for welding conducted outside the designated welding area:

 Portable welding curtains or shields must be used to protect other workers in the welding area.
 A hot-work permit must be completed and complied with prior to initiating welding operations.
 Respiratory protection is mandatory unless an adequate monitored airflow away from the welder and
others present can be established and maintained.
 Plastic materials must be covered with welding tarps during welding procedures.
 Fire watch must be provided for all hot-work operations.
After welding operations are completed, the welder shall mark the hot metal or provide some other means of
warning other workers.

Page 989
ABG
Confined Space Work

A confined space is:
 A space that Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned
work;
 Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, coolers, storage bins,
hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry); and
 Is not designed for continuous occupancy.
Refer to Confined Space Program for ABG before commencing any welding, cutting, and/or brazing operations in
an area meeting the requirements of a confined space.
Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces.
When welding or cutting is being performed in any confined spaces, cylinders containing oxygen or acetylene, or
other fuel gases are not allowed to be taken in a confined space. Cylinders containing oxygen or acetylene or
other fuel or gas shall not be taken into confined spaces.
When a welder must enter a confined space through a manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided
for quickly removing him in case of an emergency. When safety belts and lifelines are used for this purpose, they
shall be so attached to the welder's body that it cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant with a
preplanned rescue procedure shall be stationed outside to observe the welder at all times and be capable of
putting rescue operations into effect.
In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks of improperly closed valves, when gas welding
or cuffing, the torch valves shall be closed and the fuel-gas and oxygen supply to the torch positively shut off at
some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such
as during lunch hour or overnight. If practical, the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.
When welding must be performed in a space entirely screened on all sides, the screens shall be so arranged that
no serious restriction of ventilation exists. It is desirable to have the screens so mounted that they are about 2
feet (0.61 m) above the floor unless the work is performed at so low a level that the screen must be extended
nearer to the floor to protect nearby workers from the glare of welding.
All welding and cutting operations carried on in confined spaces shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the
accumulation of toxic materials or possible oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder, but also to
helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity. All air withdrawn will be replaced with air that is clean.
In circumstances for which it is impossible to provide such ventilation, airline respirators or hose masks approved
for this purpose by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) will be provided. In areas
immediately hazardous to life, a full-face piece, positive pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus or a
combination full-face piece, positive pressure supplied-air respirator with an auxiliary, self-contained air supply
approved by NIOSH must be used.

Page 990
ABG
Where welding operations are carried on in confined spaces and where welders and helpers are provided with
hose masks, hose masks with blowers or self-contained breathing equipment, a worker shall be stationed on the
outside of such confined spaces to ensure the safety of those working within.
Fumes, Gases and Dust

Fumes produced by some welding processes can be toxic and may require source extraction. An assessment of
the work to be performed must be completed before each job is undertaken. Fumes generally contain particles
from the material being welded. Welding fumes can have an acute effect on the respiratory system.
All welding and cutting operations shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials.
This applies not only to the welder, but also to helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity.
ABG shall institute procedures to be used when possible evolution's of hazardous fumes, gases or dust to the
metals involved may exist. Any welding, cutting or burning of lead base metals, zinc, cadmium, mercury, beryllium
or exotic metals or paints not listed here shall have proper ventilation or respiratory protection. Refer to
California Division of Occupational Safety and Health – Title 8 Regulations Subchapter 4, Construction Safety
Orders, Article 4 - Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors, and Gases for a complete list
Welders and helpers will refer to the Respiratory Protection Program for ABG to determine the appropriate
respiratory protection to be used during welding operations.
Personal Protection
Helmets and hand shields shall be made of a material, which is an insulator for heat and electricity. Helmets,
shields, and goggles shall not be readily flammable and shall be capable of withstanding sterilization.
Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the face, neck and ears from direct radiant energy from the
arc.
Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates designed for easy removal.
All parts shall be constructed of a material, which will not readily corrode or discolor the skin.
Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses as much as practicable.
All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free from scratches, air bubbles, waves and other flaws. Except
when a lens is ground to provide proper optical vision correction, the front and rear surfaces of lenses and
windows shall be smooth and parallel.
Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking which may readily identify the source and shade and be
appropriate shade number for the application of work.
Adequate hand protection and clothing must be used to protect the body from welding hazards.

Page 991
ABG
Cleaning Compounds
In the use of cleaning materials, because of their possible toxicity or flammability, appropriate precautions such as
manufacturer instructions shall be followed.
Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so located that no vapors
from these operations will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding any welding operation. In
addition, trichloroethylene and perchloroethylene shall be kept out of atmospheres penetrated by the ultraviolet
radiation of gas-shielded welding operations.
Cylinders
Compressed gas cylinders shall be DOT-approved and legibly marked near the shoulder of the cylinder for the
purpose of identifying the gas content with either the chemical or trade name of the gas.
All compressed gas cylinder connections must comply with ANSI B57. 1-1965 Standards.
Compressed gas cylinders shall be in the upright position during use and storage. Welding fuel-gas cylinders shall
be placed with valve end up whenever they are in use. Liquefied gases shall be stored and shipped with the valve
end up.
All cylinders shall be kept away from sources of heat and from radiators and piping systems that may be used for
grounding purposes.
Cylinders and cylinder valves including couplings and regulators shall be kept free from oily or greasy substances
and must not be handled with gloves or rags in the same condition.
Cylinders shall be handled carefully. Note: Rough handling, knocks and falls are liable to damage the cylinder,
valve or safety devices and result in leakage.
Stored oxygen cylinders shall be kept at least 20 feet from the fuel gas cylinders or combustible materials,
especially oil or grease, or separated by a non-combustible barrier at least 5 feet high with a fire rating of at least
one-half hour. All empty cylinders shall have closed valves. Valve protection caps shall always be in place and
hand-tight except when cylinders are in use or connected for use.
Cylinders shall not be kept in unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards.
Cylinders with defective safety devices or leaking fuse plugs be plainly tagged, the supplier notified and warning
signs placed around the area to prohibit approach of an ignition source. Cylinders having leaking fuse plugs or
other leaking safety devices shall be plainly tagged and the supplier shall be promptly notified of the condition
and his instructions followed. A warning shall be placed near the cylinders prohibiting any approach to them with
a lighted cigarette or other source of ignition.
Assigned storage spaces shall be located where cylinders cannot be knocked over or damaged by falling objects or
subject to tampering by unauthorized persons.

Page 992
ABG
Special care must be taken when transporting gas cylinders:

 Cylinders must be secured with valve cap installed.
 Cylinders shall not be lifted by the valve protection caps, the regulators must be removed and cylinders
shall not be dropped or permitted to strike each other.
 Removed regulators must be carried in the cab of the vehicle.
 Cylinders shall not be tampered with nor should any attempt be made to repair them.
First Aid Equipment

First aid equipment shall be available at all times. All injuries shall be reported as soon as possible for medical
attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention can be provided.
Training
Training shall include:
 Position Responsibilities
 Cutters, welders and their supervisors must be suitably trained in the safe operations of their equipment
and the safe use of the process.
 Fire Watch Responsibilities - specifically, the fire watch must know:
o That their ONLY duty is Fire Watch.
o When they can terminate the watch.
o How to use the provided fire extinguisher(s).
o Be familiar with facilities and how to activate fire alarm, if fire is beyond the incipient stage.
o Operator Responsibilities
o Contractor Responsibilities
o Documentation requirements
o Respirator Usage requirements
o Fire Extinguisher training.

Page 993
ABG
WORKPLACE VIOLENCE OR POTENTIALLY VIOLENT PROCEDURES
WORKPLACE VIOLENCE OR POTENTIALLY VIOLENT PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS................................................................................................................................................951
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................................................................952
SCOPE952
APPLICATION............................................................................................................................................................952
DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................................................952
GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................... 952
1.0 REPORTING A SITUATION...............................................................................................................................952
2.0 RESPONDING TO A SITUATION — OUTSIDE THE BUILDING...........................................................................952
3.0 RESPONDING TO A SITUATION — INSIDE THE BUILDING...............................................................................953
4.0 RESPONDING TO A SITUATION — IN A WORK AREA/CUBICLE/OFFICE..........................................................953
5.0 RESPONDING TO A HOSTAGE SITUATION......................................................................................................954

Page 994
ABG
PURPOSE
This practice describes the actions to be implemented for a facility in response to a violent or potentially violent
situation.
SCOPE
 General
 Reporting a Situation
 Responding to a Situation — Outside the Building
 Responding to a Situation — Inside the Building
 Responding to a Situation — In a Work Area/Cubicle/Office
 Responding to a Hostage Situation
APPLICATION
DEFINITIONS
None.
GENERAL
The following actions are for the protection and safety of employees in a facility. Management may
institute these actions in whole or in part, as deemed appropriate.
1.0 REPORTING A SITUATION
 Call the emergency number for your facility/office.

 Provide to the emergency dispatcher the following:
 Nature of the emergency
 Callback number (normally, the number you are calling from)
 Location of the emergency
 Name of person reporting the emergency
 Do not hang up + stay on the line (if you can do so without putting yourself in danger).
 If possible, alert others in the immediate area bout the current situation.
2.0 RESPONDING TO A SITUATION — OUTSIDE THE BUILDING


Page 995
ABG

 If possible, alert others in the immediate area bout the current situation.
 If you find yourself in such a situation, use common sense and only take additional action
that you deem appropriate based on the circumstances. Each employee must use his/her
best judgment in determining what action, if any, they should take to protect their own lives
and that of their coworkers.
 If an individual with a weapon is outside the building and you are inside a building, move to
the center area of the building and out of the line of fire. Remain there until the police tell
you it is safe to leave. Do not respond to commands until you are certain they are issued by
a police officer or security personnel.
 Security (if provided at the facility location) will activate appropriate response procedures.
Employees should follow instructions given via public announcement/emergency notification
systems if provided at the facility location.
3.0 RESPONDING TO A SITUATION — INSIDE THE BUILDING

 Silence your cell phone.
 Notify anyone you may encounter to leave the building immediately.
 As you exit the building, keep your hands above your head and listen for instructions that
may be given by police officers. If an officer points a firearm at you, make no movement that
may cause the officer to mistake your actions for a threat. Try to stay calm.
 If you are unable to escape the building, move out of the hallway and into an office or
conference room and try to lock the door. If the door will not lock, try barricading the door
with desks and chairs. Turn off the lights. Lie on the floor and/or under a desk and remain
silent. Wait for the police or security to come and find you.
4.0 RESPONDING TO A SITUATION — IN A WORK AREA/CUBICLE/OFFICE
 There is no set procedure in this situation. If possible, call the emergency number for your
facility/office and talk with security or a police dispatcher. If you cannot speak, leave the
phone line open so security or the police can monitor the activity and identify the caller and
location.
 If you find yourself in such a situation, use common sense and only take additional action
that you deem appropriate based on the circumstances. Each employee must use his/her
best judgment in determining what action, if any, they should take to protect their own lives
and that of their coworkers.

Page 996
ABG
 If the individual exits your area and you are able to escape, leave the area immediately.
Remember to be alert for responding police officers who may mistake you as the shooter.
 While escaping, as soon as you see a police officer put your hands over your head and
immediately comply with the officer’s instructions.
5.0 RESPONDING TO A HOSTAGE SITUATION
 Remain calm and be patient. Avoid drastic action. Follow instructions, be alert. Don’t speak
unless spoken to and only when necessary. The captors may not want to harm persons held
by them.
 Be observant. When you are released, or when you escape, the personal safety of others may depend
on what you remember about the situation.

Page 997

ABG-HSE-MS.0000 (Complete Safety Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABG-HSE-MS.0000 (Complete Safety Manual)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABG-HSE-MS.0000 (Complete Safety Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Origination Date: October 7, 2017 Revision Date: -

ABG HEALTH SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL MANUAL

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

Attachment 03 – Verbal Reprimand - HR Form H617-1 (sample)

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

Attachment 05 – Hazard Communications Poster (example)

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

Attachment 05 – Workers’ Compensation Claim Reporting

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

SAFETY MEETINGS 784

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

 Engineering controls, where technically feasible

1.0 POSTING REQUIREMENTS

2.0 PROJECT HSE BOOKLET

3.0 SAFETY COMMITTEES

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

4.0 TOOLBOX MEETINGS

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

5.0 COMPETENT PERSON DESIGNATIONS

 Confined space entry

Qualified Persons must be designated for the following:

 Concrete and masonry construction

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

6.0 OPERATION OF CELLULAR TELEPHONES

7.0 PERSONAL JEWELRY

8.0 TOOL/EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

9.0 RESOLVING HSE CONCERNS AND ISSUES

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE

11.0 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS

12.0 BROWNFIELD OPERATIONS LIAISON AND INTEGRATION

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

Document ID Document Title

Attachment No. Attachment Title

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental

ABRASIVE BLASTING PROCEDURE

ABRASIVE BLASTING PROCEDURE

All Rights Reserved. ABG Health, Safety & Environmental